edhe shee A rertt hd f ibetedad 7298'S
sata se -O OPE * “aye * it omnis Der bo Ht) bela
we aa tee t) : era errr nrnre Petri bore ott
TRA rire a . Perarirr a beer trerer nt: cobCw Glo rote]
*
ccaere im ended add > ON 4 et 9 e'
Puree ir a te ie Perarerer thurs wert bm Yee Ty re
ae 4
ae J
4 Pierrr een
Tae cot ot held . hele
Pett Adalat dwt ee Garh i)
4 , Hert
4 4 xi a9! woaner
ow eee nr Poor tobe thie eke be a ath th Bd bale ohh 6 othr Woah,
othe per ei tesgoas aed 4 ot. ] ants MOB Oh ot roe rt; then pete
by : : “4 “ “hs bok ~ eh zt ety rere
e Me 4 oe
" eri poereetrer poet tbr oem (hie abe og
featboner el earactte ; uv siiardtamany sialaarega oan 47
eA gh adel che Jet ed etintnnd dae emirnet
cea : tas 4 cf
cea tram se €) z v z of te egal
ha ae if te
“as thai pa he a ‘ 4]
Pere ee ar " to 3 . “ehh gett spasm enboee gn rty eat ibe
. ' bbe Aid ota delhi ad és
he Cars
athe bel
Adet in vy : $ yi L shed
f tae
co coeetaey eee hee ¢
ih Ard phy Lt ehpys yd
saagiisii4rit f Y : ee pores
‘ ry
eS Pe lO ene) Pie eer a ' « ‘ ‘ ‘ ee
4 eto . TFS Pret ee) See badd 4OVtede bete “4 4 “ Z
, a Cited alae a Whsdedieadae . Za Fp rhe}
Core ets v i Lied
inter dsath as dipeataenencnels ts Brent! endl la asa edoester eusgseia M peprne pe a eet Po rebate
eb doe a tad if a oh AD bonrite , t - ie erarie &
he : 7) ‘ . ? et thee
. ofeaet ae
ee
ae nee ;
ta. Aelbete sh tet Ad : py ay :
#4 ’ erate r } sink
»”
Aidt ted TE . Vaediee
eer a) both gd oh : , . Aa” ehh Pag « 4 i pies b
4s see anda ota batt rs eh : P ALPES y , 4 4 oF, sae oe is 9 saieiis
Poh yatta)
‘ ‘ rs "
“ ; K : Sead b 4 uy 4 ba Se | dies ea
1 4s 9 a Lnthage T : : are Sedaris Leteae tae Mitta: saan We edgy bate
4 site tqite ‘ it a5 ct 7
7 ‘ phat atl eG iit 34
Ove re ag yi dadidrdets at erat (4 4etleseeanl
steis ted oa 2 et Malt’ 4
; Aaa od aif aie Get 4 ri] B34 48> : :
’ 7 Maas t OF el 4 Area 5
a Henatee: ¢ oN be Bar bean Ld be A , 3 Ci aes Frees
dovens ; ee dete te tral rg sazinel sé veh a 4 ij
1 , {len 9 42h OH aehett” detead q 3 =
Hl eHTtey 4 altees Yet ye rf a9 an 4i' " ? xtait K
ied rH Wehed je aabil anes eatet sips . $5
a eS y y q rq > r¢ * 7.
434 a itt hae. { yi anaia ; E ie pea ete ©
rrr Pre Were Ly tae 1% J . - pag tao a tS A
ert
st -gedegs be : ; a4 f $ eat Bats ; : be
PF } « a7, -
%
Sephora that
at
oft thet
ak ye
eta Detee t
vit debe eae ht
peer Sea vdadeded
Poe ran At hes poe < 9707 oF tases
Pda cokhsign Aad oe
Bana
:
votuteg
Ao ilatal he
Tie asy ited
+t isd
oe
cies
uj
baiseare
tea aa a
Sebo ater of.
Wate
if \
eho rt
%
ed
wd
a
~ re
tate
Nowedt
oy
as
by Sy ene LEW hee on
Pree S
ees
Gey
ay
wy
Nopet' ae reve vi we
Chas
ATER
Sil Rola icrtatie
a esl ep pea
“oy E at eee ae
i Fast wat ea etdent “peg AY ores
tk i eh wt { es ree
Anh nas ' jinn V0 weevpeess b deters
i i shelve. atte . ;
f ' “i}- ib tt f hig Badissad We iat ; : 4 i ay : ‘bei Rb, Chee a
footed SopEACH i aon oe oe dev wear Od a weit ‘ Zio aD im bt age ' a) is ' *! wet be OF Ree
UMaasesataatt ert Wak Ge Wie RL SON Sait nart abner ait moieties aoe Pat rie te
SET SUY il Ma aun Fu aia " i +" nab) aan ae Wael eis ® oh
Pe tribe YEG bu a F 7H) i why Cot
; ; Lau vide A) daa’ 44 ‘ » Nd mm RSL ; DL KS it Ved wmtidip
4 Roane san 1 ? : 340% f Wyre veg a ‘i N
1 ;
“fh Grieda\t
wd Fins
Hits 4 ary
Asawa Ae
win by ee ek 4 aii
eae ‘ “ot Bly hal “ yar ie) ‘ Giitive
+4 s ay bea hea " isa ‘a4 ty Sie ” i ‘ C a ¢ ; 4 1! uae
Pata tet Gd hog tanta :
" wt ! t i ‘ Mehta
ors ] whale ’
Peri rye Ban Kedeayy
Lea. dak ob LAU ILL 1 bole hho yeh aq Perce OL wie ot Se Par ee hropae
Lib Gort eid eg swe hs r ; sr 4 Vie yet erie tw
Pa WRG ST Rieke . 4 ‘ SUS Pt kL Ob
Qed iy LeU Shy pened a
PEP OT Me PhS Alek Ph) Dead
btwenetal ara * VTE swine t i ‘oo 5 i
a ay Metre | 4 & fhe NV ; ef Vib U Leet Oe ee at ane A ’ ¢ ree
i i} ev dedeny : we * “ae .
‘ SHEE ay é t hat Fare : 3 rors ee
yay , ' wate Voows 4
Sdwitsh ee a) } wand Pnen WK Rs bt AY ate : veiw
Voted a, re ¢ . Or oe
" : t ‘ ‘ ace aerate tet re
WAT ary oat . i . rr =e haeg APA byt
i “4 a “e
Mate dt ta ‘ } ae
nett PALE ie. } rath ied ‘ Heder iw a CUTE Ore, el ee bes tee
‘4 ‘ al . MW Gebietes 4 ere a
Ssatea wee s . 4 . tee
4 S408R THO MOTE S Bete rw) Aah - ‘
4 ae jatirntigbigadgasdyaceracanee ‘ aeedrapnya tit Say Neate eich te trop inert se : terarsnas
a tee ‘ ‘ ei ideaedy ’ “i Webbe are aay on CLA be Tite ue Oba bi SO ee wis . ee the OF oe aren ee: :
‘ . i “Wid dead EID M ett ee) <5 beget vasizord A yeasa ine ace bee " 4 , A bee at eee are @ Sewer SOS @ oe re oe wesels
SAW AG ST Bares gtidar : et a ide be ae e i lord a newed pert “ a q Se A Goat de OT eee Oe Or ere Hee Sere ten Reever ere = 8
Sede Cad eek eed Me eR sew Col domed’ Var ‘ *15 ete ot ea x 3 ae et ene tere ar eer
CR. CTH te OG RCO ROR SRA PE OLS en a “ VOUd Aloadet ee Crore Greater e &
J » OA fis hale Sind Le eR AD) Det Oded ‘ Cee} Vwardiofoed) each ete eee
a4 ‘ erin Were 7 oe Coat es A ee
by ans hinted - : : we Vets ‘ Pe Wet) r ‘ . vo =$ 40 6 Ph ream OSE) oO) bee OhNew
“aetna ' “Ae ‘ ; f e)es fe ted ee FOS ree apart G4 Se Re
' et Shy a a} Ly Ny : Ai teas : 4 * var « +4 tA del peat) <are a
ite wet . f Sa hart *e " ; . ' Lard eG yt ere tad cers '
we ta ree St CME BO Le OO ‘ ‘ a * 4 weweda by er ror rt Sete at ae i eee . eh em were ee
, vend eet at Spek Phd ba eb LL As i 4 wa Loa y ‘ ' ‘ ny vad snarsyere UM haters Ciaran’ sis i a ae yn be oa ares Se aea ares
tT ky Ba Seki ks Wht EL Oe ii? > wae ee Ahk WENT OTT PRET ee reek to OPN CURT S 4 Fe ~ ” we wwe eee
‘4 ‘ } ry wv rh troinabe rath teen ee we on | as aber ahew se “ owe Seee@ eG" &6re ee ee gene SSeS —
iw ta " ij weltigday vy ‘ : Weds teh ootay! “ae . W Orde ee dee tert el ard antes - Lr etl alte atid
A We eA wR fete ‘ 4 Argntan vt ad ‘ + AAW VE ‘ dey We tede oad @ ORay a eatewe a ae &
a De Wk , « c cat eee) Ot eae bee Loe arg ited ae ener bee evident
SL Ut fer AR Man Wk BO LSG See Bh ALA t ' “ AV aed aa rh hee Woe bee ere re doe ee
5 ; Vaud Vid qewt aA sot dear geass ted @ Sree et eanas “ .
Ei Waa Al oh, WA hs hd ge ted peed tea watt oe ¥ oVare Pie stawy dys, areeatse dagte
an-¥ Ae) U Le ‘ ( \ ih Pie POT BDL ee ote DRT e be) Dede Fe Wee ree able Aw “An i Les
AAO Meaed & ene ‘ aw 4 \ ‘ wade te epee }' awe hay
srw adel ‘ qj $ bh SAC TA DUStL Da We Peed Lake ‘ o Sa hed
TAQ Ge Het wag fete telewia: ' ‘ q i. Oe) oe a Sn ‘ * . wwe TE be ho ba Le bhai
“ ahs LO) VALRALOR UA, Sed ed ‘ ma! Aye,
wether a ae ¥
eee ed wy, 6 ade weeded oa? , vive a Wele Wa ieatiy
tetany
Aeqparerasanteds
8 Qed eraree ;
. ] , . ys
, mire ero in ha} a ‘ ; { : ; : A! yl
Moy eohee Oa a? “eda ad eee oe cee Ga ee
4a eW Miter as Woe ed gp ata 4 4 : ' 3 : perpen ssrene?
Peer hy heir tite ae a PU Ret EOE et b eee Hai bets aa reeCRC EL Pk boo bo) ;
Sele ow latins WNT ee i Peterervs erirec in Pear er ane: trht eral ee Pk DONO TOUTE CL eb
Webatdes wat Ga ; PERRY MIME PUM MERC RO UR ELT MCh tt St MUST. DODD TOM UO RAD Eh Dae Obl 8 Oh be ba ew ara Baas
54 AAA dda te aera VE ee ON wed eG A te Red rere aa rte @ Ade) ee eed fee PA La rarisa fare ‘ ae ~~ or
‘ } HW ee ee reed ta ded ak ata @eeakaw ‘ 4 * ayerd i ee
, fq arte WO Gah eOrEA hn Sr arin We Rr SER hc] tea Ae tian
PeeWee LOOT IN BOOT PO SUR WPUrS DC MERE TODAS DR RAL LLT Ba) eGo As 1B a pees
Vai AO ek AE Te Sent te CRUISE AC WL DAC OL ERE LG ct RP) 0) 2
PPPPn WSC ECD MSC tL WC Pe SCEC CR teu bru WUbaLie bbe We sratheQened Gl eon at ee &
EC irey mr te et Pode PORE CC he “ ‘ . a4 Wis Nasod week we : orare “@
toe et aad si Wovaed ghack Wotte . a eererir tr. tet ts ae)
«ae ae ee eee 8 6 ae eee
Pee eh ie
ae
oh
fl
AR
NER
e
soa}
— oe 2
Z va
See Te
ar
=
SS
Re Wich sy,
RGR
ie th ‘de
Fm.
4 *
2
y
|
|
oO
>
:
METOT,
35,
ons
nots
S,
ne f
eo .
ro age
Pe
4
ee
iy
eS
ay Al F 5
aN ‘es
: fies 5 Bi 4
s, ig ‘s
cm re
“e od,
a
~~
Ca =
of
xs
S
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
VOLUME 48, 1958
PUBLISHED MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mount Royrat & GUILFORD AVES.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
ACTUAL DATES OF PUBLICATION, VOLUME 48
No. 1, pp. 1-82, March 18, 1958.
No. 2, pp. 33-68, April 12, 1958.
No. 3, pp. 69-108, April 30, 1958.
No. 4, pp. 109-144, May 22, 1958.
No. 5, pp. 145-180, June 9, 1958.
No. 6, pp. 181-212, July 11, 1958.
No. 7, pp. 213-248, August 5, 1958.
No. 8, pp. 249-272, September 19, 1958.
No. 9, pp. 273-304, November 4, 1958.
No. 10, pp. 305-340, December 4, 1958.
No. 11, pp. 341-372, January 19, 1959.
No. 12, pp. 373-412, February 11, 1959.
VOLUME 48 January 1958 NUMBER1
ed Le Co
—~ ; ,
,r )
J hes Fs
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
Published Monthly by the
mero HI NGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences —
Editor: CuznsterR H. Pace, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RonaLD BAMFoRD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof .—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Ba teg eee
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PROCEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subseription -Rates for the JouRNAL:—Per Year..:......:....-..- =e $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. tonvol..10; ane). ——not available) fae we ae — -
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).........— 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 _ ) 0288
* Limited number of complete sets of the JoURNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $393 .50.
Monocrapu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.......:.:..-.... 2 .eeeeen $7 .50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete. -... 2.0. .02. 22.2222 52 eee $25.00
Single-volumes, unbound... 225046 0. ee Oe Gee ee 2.00
Singleunmmbersic a. ea whe ee ee oo Lae alee te ee tien ae Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
es to the Treasurer, H. 8S. Rappueyre, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
DiC:
Changes of Address —Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vot. 48
January 1958
No. 1
MINERALOGY —Progress in titanium research Matrunw A. Hunter, Rens-
selaer Polytechnic Institute. (Communicated by H. C. Vacher.)
My first duty is to express my pleasure on
being called to give the Burgess Memorial
Lecture before the Washington Chapter of
the American Society of Metals. Dr. Burgess
and I had one point of contact in the first
decade of this century that was of ines-
timable importance to me. It dealt with the
subject of titanium research.
The motivation behind the development
of titanium research in 1906 was based on
the information that this metal had a melt-
ing point around 6,000°. It is quite imma-
terial whether the scale of temperature was
Centigrade or Fahrenheit, as later operations
showed. If this high melting point could be
confirmed, it was obvious that titanium
could jom molybdenum and tungsten, which
at that time were under development for
filaments in electric lamps.
As we now know, the information was
false. My own experiments led me to con-
clude that the melting point of the titanium
produced was between 1,800° and 1,850°C.,
measured on equipment that would scandal-
ize you today.
The reactions of the administration to the
disappointing news was not calculated to
raise the ego of the experimental observer—
in this case myself. It was obvious that I
must have some confirmation on my melt-
ing-point data. It so happened that Dr.
Burgess was working on the melting points
of refractory elements at the Bureau of
Standards. A platinum or an iridium strip
was heated under controlled conditions in an
atmosphere of hydrogen with visual observa-
tion of the melting points of materials placed
1 Highth Annual Burgess Memorial Lecture,
Washington Chapter, American Society for
Metals.
thereon. Samples of titanium (sodium re-
duced) were supplied by Dr. Von Warten-
berg and by myself.
Von Wartenberg Hunter
1,778° 1,790°
1,807 L185
1,815 1,785
Mean 1,800 1 Sia
The probable melting point was given by
Dr. Burgess as 1,795 + 15.
Recent information from the Armour Re-
search Foundation gives the melting point
of titanium in constitutional diagram as
1,732°C. There would still seem to be some
room for argument here.
But let us turn now to the subject of this
lecture—Research and Development in the
Titanium Industry. There are three aspects
I shall briefly review—Where have we come
from? Where are we now? Where do we ex-
pect to go in the future?
TITANIUM—GENERAL
On an earlier occasion I have given you
our attempts to develop a titanium industry
(in 1906—1916)—but born 50 years too soon.
The industry had to await the later develop-
ment of melting under argon or helium,
which at the earlier date were laboratory
curiosities. But a still greater incentive to
development was the desire of industry for
airborne metals, with the Federal Govern-
ment and the aircraft industry leading the
way in the development. From the earliest
disclosures of the Du Pont Co. in 1948 to the
present time the unlimited resources of the
Man .
ww A ee oe
2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 1
Federal Government have been made avail-
able to the industry.
The metal has no single property that is
outstanding, but it has an optimum series of
combinations. It is strong, light, ductile,
corrosion resistant, and expensive. It is con-
sidered to be indispensable for national de-
fense. Its military value is estimated at $20
to $50 per pound for military aircraft and
when the weight margin is tight, higher
premiums can be justified. Its civilian value
is given as two to three times that of the
materials it can replace. The life expectancy
is often much longer, but at present non-
military operations consume less than 10 per
cent of industrial production.
Major problems of the past that are still
with us today include melting operations and
scrap recovery. Melting at 3,100°F., ti-
tanium reacts with every known refractory
to become embrittled thereby. Present re-
search in skull melting may or may not give
the answer to these difficulties.
PROGRESS IN THE INDUSTRY
The shipment of titanium mill products to
industry in recent years is given below:
1950 2,000 pounds
1952 40,000 pounds
1953 200,000 pounds
1954 2,500,000 pounds
1955 3,900,000 pounds
1956 10,000,000 pounds (estimated)
No metallurgical operation of which I am
aware has ever had so phenomenal a yearly
growth from 2,000 pounds in 1950 to 10
million in 1956. Future projections to 35,000
tons in 1958 have been made.
The important factor of prices for sponge,
billet, and sheet from 1951 to the present
appear in Fig. 1. It is clear that the industry
is moving ahead with increased volume of
production coupled directly with a lowering
in cost of materials produced.
Now let me give you “What Industry
Thinks of Itself.”
WHAT THE TITANIUM INDUSTRY
THINKS OF ITSELF
C. I. Bradford, president of Rem-Cru
Titanium Inc., speaking before a recent
Mining Congress made some pertinent re-
marks on titanium progress.
The year 1956 can be summarized as the
year in which the aircraft industry gave
titanium a solid vote of confidence as a
standard engineering material for production
components. This vote of confidence resulted
in a three fold increase in demand for ti-
tanium mill products in 1956 over 1955.
Final industry figures should clear the 5,000-
ton mark. The same trend appears certain
to continue in 1957. A minimum demand of
10,000 tons of mill products is our present
estimate.
Chase Brass & Copper will melt and
fabricate the titanium metal. Production of
billets is slated for late 1958.
Since costs per annual ton of capacity in
Electromet’s sodium reduction plant are
reputed to be at the rate of $4,125 per annual
ton this commitment of 41 million should
produce 10,000 tons per year.
Japanese sources are expected to continue
or increase their output of 2,500 tons/year.
I have no figures at hand on the melting
capacity of Titanium Metals Corporation of
America, Republic Steel Corporation, and
other melting plants. Rem-Cru reports its
melting capacity to be 6,000—7,000 ingot tons |
per year.
In the fabrication field Certificates of
Necessity have been issued to T.M.C.A. and
Eastern Stainless Co. for 50 inch Sendzimir
Cold Strip Mills for rolling and processing
titanium.
T.M.C.A. considers this development to
be particularly urgent in view of the transi-
tion of aircraft and missiles into high speed
flight where high skin temperatures cause
present materials to lose their strength. In
addition, titanium and its alloys have been
developed and evaluated for incorporation
into jet engines. There would seem to be
little question that the present industrial
plants will be able to meet all potential de-
mands of the titanium industry.
TITANIUM ALLOYS
The compelling motive, in engineering
construction, for the use of titanium as a re-
placement for the more common materials of
construction comes from the high strength-
weight ratio of this material at temperatures
up to 1,000°F., while in the chemical in-
dustry the relative resistance to corrosion
JANUARY 1958
plays the predominant role. The develop-
ments in recent years in the titanium alloy
field have gone a long way in establishing
titanium priority.
THE 6 ALUMINUM, 4 VANADIUM ALLOY
One of the more important alloys is Ti-
6Al-4V developed by Armour Research
Foundation under government sponsorship.
Early studies showed it to have an excellent
combination of tensile strength and ductility,
with good resistance to impact and high
strength at elevated temperatures. Produc-
tion was initiated in 1954 and at the present
time the alloy is one of the most popular of
the commercial compositions. It is being
used in large quantities in ordnance, airframe
and aircraft engine applications and is cur-
rently available as wire, sheet, bar, and
forging billet as well as other mill products.
The mechanical properties of alloy Ti 75 A
of the year 1950 and of Ti-6Al-4V (annealed
of 1955) are compared in the following table:
eee 600°F
1950 Ti 75 A
Tensile strength... .. 98,000 psi; 45,000 psi
Wield 2). 81,000 psi | 28,000 psi
Blongation m 2”... 23 psi 38 psi
i950 Lin6 Al 4V (an-
nealed)
Tensile strength.....| 143,000 105,000
Wigil 2. 2 ee 131,000 93 , 000
Blongation in 2”..... 16 19
By proper heat treatment a tensile strength
of 200,000 psi can be obtained. The more re-
cent data on the alloy 155 A show improve-
ments in properties of a similar character.
EFrrect oF Hear TREATMENT ON THE TENSILE
Properties oF Tr 155A 5 An, 1.5 tis, 105) IMO,
Ld) (Cie
Annealed Heat treated*
Tensile Strength.......| 159,000 208 , 000
Mield strength......... 155 , 000 197 , 000
Mongatiion im I”....... 23 10
Reduction in area..... 45 2.6
“Heat treatment—Solution temp. 17,00°F—
water quenched aged 4 hours at 1,000°F.
With such high strength alloys as these, ti-
tanium can compete on a strength. weight
HUNTER: PROGRESS IN TITANIUM RESEARCH
Ww
KEY FORM BASIS
ZO Sponge 5000 |b.
NSN Billet 2500 |b.- 8in. round - titanium alloy
Ba Sheet 2500 |b.-0.025 X 36x 96in. *2Finish-
commercially pure
20
.o,
q
4
S< TF,
%
A
x
2
SRO O
ISIS INL
SOOT ROOT
ereteteerelecetes:
XX
e.
a2,
ree
. KS 4
fae] b Keo AZ
a I 5 %e, ee Meee So, , ze
a 0x Kx ee, ost 4 OS
é Bed Kee KR A Kod ee
i x oe hee RS ei ee
< LS Ss Be Bo ee ie
3 Ne es ee $y ee BS
O A 4,
210 Ne NGL ON & oe
Bes] 0% Bes) or Se io,
A Ne Ne Nes Ne Ni i
Ne ae NS Ne Ne No
Ne Ne NX N=. Ne NS
as bad Ne se Ne BS
Ni NG NS NG ONS BS
“ d °, 9 s
Na Ne NS NS NM f&
S Ne Ne Ns NS 4) Ns NE 4
Ms Yy od Y oy NY ey Ne NS <
NN aN a: a: aN
SNS NS INS NS es
NSN ZN: EN EN NS
NN IN: JN: GN ee
Nal ZNSE AAS OARS ASS
oL ASS VANS UNS UNE ZS Ne
I951-52 195 1954 1955 195 Present
Hineael
ratio basis with most of the present materials
of construction. Fig. 2 shows the marked
superiority of Ti-6Al-4V over aluminum al-
loys and stainless steels in temperature
ranges from room to 1,000°F. With such fig-
ures as these, titanium alloys become im-
portant factors in engineering construction
and will assume a wider significance.
Production of Titanium Metal
Sodium or magnesium as a_ reducing
agent.—The earlier methods for the produc-
tion of sponge titanium from the tetra-
chloride involved the use of magnesium as
the reducing agent. Later operations have
used sodium as the reducing agent.
The costs of the operation by the two
methods are said to be practically identical
by Kroll? The cost of the titanium chloride
represents 50 per cent of the sponge price and
the sodium or magnesium contributes 20 per
cent to the cost of the titanium product.
In view of this, consumers and potential
users are asking: Can we design more ti-
tanlum into our aircraft, our engines, our
chemical plants, with the assurance that
there will be an ample supply of titanium to
meet our requirements. The answer when we
look at the outlook for
““VeSs?
Behind this optimism is the assurance of
adequate supplies of raw materials for 1957.
The situation by mid or late 1957 will be:
1957 is definitely
* Metallurgical Rev., 1956, vol. 1:1-3, 291.
“ JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, swore
|
| Plant cost
|
| Annual
mae | $ pepemnual
Grametulmeerwer soos ee 6,000 | 4,150
Wows Ghemircalens 9-545 es SOOT —
DusPonty eer cera i Nate ZOOW TG oR 50
National Distillers.......-| 5,000 a
Titanium Metals Corp..... | 9,000 7
AIS
Unione@anoideme eee eer. 7,500 | 4,125
Total capacity. . 36,500
* The figures for plant cost per annual ton were
taken from TML Report No. 52, Sept. 7, 1956.
Recent estimates by the personnel of the
Bureau of Mines in Boulder City, Nev., indi-
cate that the cost per annual ton of new
plant capacity may be as low as $2,500.
Another development in the sponge pic-
ture comes from the public press. Chemical
and Engineering News, December 31, 1956,
and Wall Street Journal state that Allied
Chemical & Dye and Kennecott Copper
plan a jointly owned company to produce
and sell titanium for uses ranging from Jet
aircraft to vacuum tubes.
Initial investment is expected to be
$40,000,000. The installation is to make
titanium tetrachloride, titanium sponge, and
billets of titanium metal. Allied Chemical
1200
800
400
200
te) 200 400
. 6AI-4V(HT. TRTD)
IMO™M90ODP
says the company will use a new continuous
process which employs sodium to reduce
titanium tetrachloride to sponge by processes
represented to be continuous.
The sodium reduction develops one third
more heat than the reduction by magnesium.
The sodium requires one third more electrical
energy for its production than magnesium
does. So far as this observer knows mag-
nesium chloride is recycled to recover mag-
nesium but no recycling is undertaken for the
sodium chloride.
Sodium chloride melts at 800°, and mag-
nesium chloride at 720°C., but sodium re-
ductions can be carried on at much lower
temperatures than 800°C. since the sub-
chlorides of titanium form complexes
(TiC],3NaCl) which melt at 554° and dis-
sociate at 600°C. Much of the sodium reduc-
tion can in fact be carried on in the solid
state as will appear in a later section of this
paper.
Sodium metal is much easier to purify
than magnesium. Ceramic filters can be used
to remove oxides. This is not possible with
magnesium. Further, sodium can be pumped
to the spot where it is to be used. In leaching
operations sodium chloride solutions do not
attack titanium sponge. Excess reducing
. 2024S-T
7075S-T
301- +H
17-7-PH{TH-1075)
4130, 4140, 4340
Ti-8Mn (ANLD.)
Fey £64 ksi
Fry 274 ksi
Fry =155 ksi
Fry £174 ksi
Fry =168 ksi
Fry =120 ksi
Fry =180 ksi
Ti-100 Fy, =100 ksi
600 800 1000 1200
Temperature, F
Fic. 2.Strength-weight comparison on the basis of ultimate tensile strength density
JANUARY 1958
agent can be kept to 5 per cent with sodium
whereas with magnesium it may amount to
15 per cent. Leaching with water is cheaper
than distilling off magnesium chloride but
the hydrogen content of the leached sponge
may be high and must be eliminated by
other means. The recycled magnesium is
said to make an important cost saving.
Other interesting observations are that
molten sodium chloride dissolves 20 per cent
of sodium at 850°C. which would separate
as a fog on cooling.
Titanium tetrachloride has practically no
solubility in molten NaCl. Its vapor pressure
is so high that it rapidly boils off. The lower
chlorides with higher boiling points appear
to dissolve in all proportions.
The present Kroll process is the only well
established procedure for reducing titanium
tetrachloride with metallic magnesium. But
the sodium reduction can follow several
procedures of which the following are more
important.
SODIUM REDUCTION OF TITANIUM
TETRACHLORIDE
(1) Low temperature operations at 200°C.
This is the “high surface”’ sodium operations
described in advertising literature by Na-
tional Distillers to produce subchlorides of
titanium or even titanium metal. In this
procedure when liquid sodium is stirred into
solid salt, it coats each crystal. The tetra-
chloride when introduced reacts with this
sodium layer to produce the dichloride. If
this material is then subjected to further
additions of sodium metal and then set aside
for hours to complete the reduction, the
finely divided titanium powder will grow
larger crystal grains which can be leached
with water without difficulty. Little or no
external energy other than the heat of the
reaction is required to complete the process.
Similar processes are described by J. P.
Quinn’ of Imperial Chemical industries.
(2) The reaction can be carried out at
800°-850°C. At 650°-750°C. the salt complex
of NaCl and TiCl, is molten. At 805°C. the
molten bath will produce needles of titanium
with a Brinell hardness of less than 70.
(3) At still higher temperatures the ti-
$ British Patents 7179380, Nov. 1954; 720517,
Dec. 1954.
HUNTER: PROGRESS IN TITANIUM RESEARCH Z
tanium chloride and sodium can react and
produce droplets of solidified titanium such
as appeared in the early bomb experiments.
DISPROPORTIONATION
In many of these reactions with the sub-
chlorides of titanium disproportionation
probably plays an important role.
From Report No. 20-88, Jet Propulsion
Lab., California Inst. Tech., I quote the fol-
lowing: ‘‘Hydrogen may be used to reduce
TiCl(g) to TiCl3(s) at low temperatures.
While the reaction is thermo-dynamically
complete at room temperatures, the rate is
negligible.”
TiCl;(s) and TiCl.(s) are not reduced ap-
preciably by hydrogen at elevated tempera-
ture since these compounds are stronger
reducing agents than hydrogen. When these
compounds are heated disproportionation oc-
curs as the dominant reaction.
Metallic titanium may be formed com-
pletely from such reactions at temperatures
as low as 600°C.
TiCl, disproportionates and vaporizes as
follows:
2 TiCh(s) > TiCl.(g) + Ti
2 MCL) — 2 TAC@) 2 Th.
Laboratory analysis of the product after
the reaction showed it to contain more than
95 per cent of titanium metal.
But 2 TiCl; — TiCh,(g) + TiClo(s), which
reacts further to give metallic titanium. It
is highly probable that the titanium precipi-
tating from a sodium chloride molten salt
will prefer to precipitate on titanium lattices
that already exist in the solution. By such
means then crystals of titanium will continue
to grow, as we have already observed.
OTHER REDUCTION PROCEDURES
The simplest procedure for producing
titanium would seem to be the reduction of
the abundant titanium dioxide (rutile).
Laboratory investigations of Chretien and
Wyss! indicate that magnesium will reduce
the dioxide to monoxide (T10) while calcium
will complete the reduction to titanium
metal.
Similar procedures are the subject of
‘Chretien and Wyss, Compt. Rend. 224: 1642.
1947.
6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 1
patents? to Dominion Magnesium tide 2
have no information on large scale indus-
trial operations.
There have been many attempts to pro-
duce titanium by electrolytic methods. The
following cell feeds have been used—ti-
tanium tetrachloride, titanium oxide, or
potassium titanium fluoride.
The ideal electrolytic cell will require a
diaphragm or its physical equivalent to pre-
vent the anodic product, oxygen or chlorine,
from reoxidizing the titanium subsaits pro-
duced at the cathode. This introduces many
complications that to date have not been
adequately met.
Real progress in electrolytic recovery and
refining has been made by the Bureau of
Mines group in Boulder City, Nev., which 1s
described in the next section.
ELECTROLYTIC REFINING OF TITANIUM
BUREAU OF MINES—-BOULDER CITY
An active research group under the direc-
tion of Messrs. Blue and Baker has presented
some outstanding results in the field of the
electrolytic refining of titanium. The pro-
gram began as an electrolytic operation for
the refining of titanium scrap. The success
has been so remarkable that the method
gives promise of being hereafter an important
phase in the extractive production of ti-
tanium metal from its basic ores.
The electrolytic cell designed and used by
the Bureau is made from 14-inch mild steel
plate—heated by Globar units and protected
externally from oxidation by a spray coat of
chromium aluminum alloy.
The electrolyte is a 5-per cent solution of
titanium dichloride (TiCls) in sodium chlo-
ride maintained molten around 830°C. The
minimum allowable current density is given
as 550 amperes per square foot. Higher cur-
rents can be used in more concentrated solu-
tions but the quality of the metal produced
drops off at the higher current densities.
In a 4,700-ampere cell four cathodes of
sheet steel were distributed along the longer
axis of the cell. (The number could be in-
definitely increased by lengthening the cell
without interfering with regular operation.)
This cell was actually running at 3200 am-
5 British Patent 664061, Jan. 1952.
peres and was producing 2,800 grams of
cathode titanium per hour at an energy con-
sumption of 26-27 KWH per pound of metal.
Much of this electrical energy was consumed
in keeping the bath molten. It was estimated
that a 10,000 ampere cell would maintain its
temperature without external heat.
The material to be refined is thrown into
the bottom of the tank. An anode connection
to the outside of the tank completes the
electric circuit. The deposit continues with-
out interruption for four hours with practi-
cally no attention. Helium supplies the mert
atmosphere. In argon the sublimation of salt
is greater for reasons unknown.
The deposit is drained for 15 minutes in the
inert atmosphere above the cell and cooled
for one hour when it can be safely removed.
The drag out is unusually small—approxi-
mately two-tenths pound of salt per pound
of metal withdrawn. The deposit which is
highly crystalline in character is readily
washed with water acidulated with hydro-
ehloriec acid.
A 1,000-ampere cell ran with a current
efficiency of 78 percent and a 4,000-ampere
cell ran 70 days at 85 percent.
From a large number of runs (100 or more)
65 per cent of the product was less than 70
BHN, 22 per cent was plus 70 to 80 BHN,
5 per cent was over 100 BHN, 3 per cent be-
tween 100-140 BHN, and 5 per cent was
over 140 BHN.
In the hands of the skilled operators at
Boulder City there appears to be no difficulty
in the continuous running of the cells. The
engineering features in their simplicity are in
strange contrast to some of the electrolytic
monstrosities which I have seen in other
laboratories.
I failed to mention that the starting ma-
terial used in the runs just outlined was
titanium scrap with a Brinell hardness of
350. As a means of upgrading scrap the op-
eration was quite a successful one.
Chemical and Engineering News for De-
cember 31, 1956, carries a reference to the
use of an electrorefining operation for scrap
recovery by Mallory Sharon Titanium Com-
pany under the direction of Dr. R. S$. Dean.
The method followed would appear to be
that indicated by the Boulder City Bureau
of Mines.
JANUARY 1958
A special importance attaches to this re-
fining process in view of the prospect of
refining cheap titanium or titanium alloys
made by carbon, silicon, or metallothermic re-
duction of oxides. This electrolysis of soluble
anodes for titanium refining offers new possi-
bilities, the potentialities of which have still
to be explored.
The approach to this problem is further
developed in a recent brochure which I re-
ceived from Chicago Development Corpora-
tion on Electrolytic Titanium from which I
quote.
A more practical method for the large scale
reduction of titaniferous ores and slags is alumino-
thermic reduction.
Economically, Sorel Slag is an excellent starting
material for use in aluminothermic reduction as it
is cheap, has a high percentage of titanium dioxide
and forms a low melting titanium-aluminum iron
alloy which can be separated easily from the oxide
products after reduction. The Sorel slag, which
is a black, lumpy material, is dried, ground to
—100 mesh, mixed with aluminum scrap, and
heated in an induction furnace to 1200° and 1300° C.
Although the reaction is exothermic, added heat
is necessary to allow the metal to coagulate and
the resultant oxide products to form a slag at the
top. Both a flux of 90% calcium fluoride and 10%
sodium aluminum fluoride, and a flux of 50% ecal-
cium oxide, 45% calcium floride and 5% sodium
aluminum fluoride have been used successfully.
From a sorel slag with an initial composition of
80% TiO,
Oo. TAY FeO
Bo SiO.
4.7% MgO
a reduced product was obtained which contained
Ti 75.0%
Al 10.0%
Fe CD
Oz 3 BY,
The material was bottom poured into an argon
filled mold which casts the alloy into plates that
can be hammer milled to the desired particle size
as a feed for the electrolytic cell.
In following up such investigations as this, the
HUNTER: PROGRESS IN TITANIUM RESEARCH 7
silicothermic reduction of titanium ores must also
receive some consideration. In fact it lies well
within the bounds of possibility that combinations
of carbon, silicon and aluminum used as reducing
agents can produce a satisfactory ferrotitanium
product for ultimate electrolytic refining. A high
concentration of titanium carbide in the resultant
product would present some difficulties in carbon
removal in the final electrolysis.
As a final word to the story I can say that
the members of the Titanium Review Com-
mittee of the Materials Advisory Board,
chairmaned by Dr. Frances C. Frary, in
reviewing the annual progress in titanium
extraction research are in accord in thinking
that the recent development in electrolytic
research at Boulder City represents the first
major break-through in new titanium de-
velopments in the metal production field. It
eliminates the chlorination feature of the ex-
pensive titanium tetrachloride. If the cheap-
est of our titanium ores can be converted by
arc melting to ferrotitanium alloys, the elec-
trolytic process can convert this product to
a high-grade titanium which might be
superior in quality to any metal produced
to date by sodium or by magnesium reduc-
tion of the tetrachloride.
There will be a considerable time lag in
getting such a process into competitive com-
mercial production but the increasing market
for titanium sponge will give present plants
adequate opportunity to recoup their cost
with the 5-year amortization.
I consider it of the greatest importance
that the electrothermal reduction of titanium
oxide and the electrolytic refining of the re-
sulting alloy at the Boulder City, Nev., sta-
tion of The Bureau of Mines should be ade-
quately supported and that the experi-
mental work be pushed as rapidly as possible.
In the hght of these later developments, |
believe that the future holds high promise
for better and even cheaper titanium as an
engineering material in production.
8 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48Nosnl
PALEONTOLOGY .—Some Lower Ordovician monoplacophoran mollusks from
Missouri... Ettis L. YocuEetson, U.S. Geological Survey. (Communicated by
H. A. Rehder.)
(Received August 6, 1957)
The discovery of a living representative ot
monoplacophoran mollusks (Neopzlina gala-
theae) dredged from deep water off the west
coast of Central America (Lemche, 1957,
pp. 413-416) has aroused much interest
among students of mollusks. Monoplaco-
phorans previously had been known only as
fossils in rocks of Cambrian through Devo-
nian age. On the basis of the paired muscle
sears found in the fossil shells the Mono-
placophora have been interpreted as primi-
tive mollusks that have not undergone
torsion (Wenz, 1940; Knight, 1952). The
soft anatomy of the Recent species Neopilina
galatheae Lemche, confirms the supposition
as to the primitiveness of the group.
At the same time, this discovery has em-
phasized the need for more study of the
fossils. An unexpected feature of the Recent
species, not reported from fossil taxa, is an
asymmetrical coiled larval shell. Lemche
(1957, p. 414) suggests that the Silurian
genus Pilina Koken was characterized by an
asymmetrical nucleus. Unfortunately, he
based this opinion on drawing of a specimen
which has long been lost, and this important
detail cannot be checked.
I have examined the U. 8. National Mu-
seum and the U. S. Geological Survey
collections in the hope of finding some mono-
placophorans that would provide informa-
tion on early growth stages. Three specimens
of one species were obtained which give some
information on this subject. Specimens of
two other species, showing well-preserved
muscle scars, were also found. These three
species, two of which belong to new genera,
are described and figured below.
The collections of the U.S. National Mu-
seum contain numerous specimens of the
Cambrian monoplacophoran Scenella Bull-
ings. The muscle scars of one species of the
genus have previously been described (Ras-
etti, 1954). Some Middle Ordovician speci-
mens, particularly types and figured speci-
1 Publication authorized by the Director of the
U.S. Geological Survey.
mens, are also in the collections, as are a few
Silurian specimens. Upon preliminary exam-
ination, none of these specimens showed
either muscle scars or details of the apical
area.
During their tenure with the U. 5. Geo-
logical Survey, the late Drs. E. O. Ulrich and
Josiah Bridge obtained numerous Lower
Ordovician gastropods for a proposed mono-
graphic study. In the course of this work
nearly 200 specimens of monoplacophorans
were collected from outcrops or were con-
tributed by other institutions. The three
species described below are from the Ulrich
and Bridge collection.
No previously described species are re-
ferred to the new genera described below.
Most North American monoplacophoran
species were described between 60 and 70
years ago, and at the time little emphasis
was placed on muscle scars by American
writers. Thorough monographic treatment
of the group, particularly restudy and reil-
lustration of type specimens, is needed.
John W. Koenig, Missouri Geological Sur-
vey, provided information regarding the
fossil localities. I am indebted to Dr. J.
Brookes Knight for his ideas regarding the
significance of these specimens. Photographs
were taken by Nelson W. Shupe of the U.5.
Geological Survey.
Class AMPHINEURA
Order MONOPLACOPHORA
Family TRYBLIDIIDAE
Subfamily TRYBLIDIINAE
Cyrtonellopsis Yochelson, n. gen.
Type species —Cyrtonellopsis huzzahensis
Yochelson, n. sp.
Diagnosis.—Deep, cap-shaped monoplaco-
phorans with a strongly curved asymmetrical
apex not projecting far over anterior; dorsum.
smoothly curved; muscle scars unknown; shell
and ornament unknown.
Discussion.—When these specimens were dis-
covered in the collections, I was unable to place
JANUARY 1958 YOCHELSON: LOWER ORDOVICIAN MONOPLACOPHORAN MOLLUSKS so)
iil
Fies. 1-4.—Cyrtonellopsis huzzahensis, n. gen., n. sp.: 1, Right side view of holotype, U.S.N.M. no.
135181; 2, apical view of paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 135182;3, apical view of paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 135183:
4, apical view of holotype.
Figs. 5-9.—Bipulvina crofisae, n. gen., n. sp.: 5, Oblique top view of holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 135184:
6, side view of paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 135185a;7, top view of holotype; 8, oblique side view of holot ype
showing bifurcation of apex; 9, top view of paratype.
Fies. 10-13.—Proplina cornutaformis (Walcott): 10, Right side view of plesiotype, U.S.N.M. no.
135186a; 11, left side view of plesiotype; 12, apical view of plesiotype; 13, top view of plesiotype
All figures twice natural size, except 2 (natural size) and 8 (three times natural size
10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
them generically. After examining photographs
of them, Knight (written communication) sug-
gested that they represented a new genus closely
allied to the Devonian genus Cyrtonella Hall,
1879. Examination of specimens of Cyrtonella
confirms this opinion. The similarity even extends
to the asymmetry of the juvenile shell (Knight,
1941, pp. 95-96). The principal difference between
the two genera is that Cyrtonella has a ridge on
the dorsum, and Cyrtonellopsis has a smoothly
rounded dorsum. Because of their strongly
curved apex, these two genera are atypical of
the Tryblidiinae (Knight, 1952, pp. 46-47).
Further study may show that they should be
placed in another subfamily or another family.
Cyrtonellopsis huzzahensis Yochelson, n. sp.
Figs. 1-4
Description Strongly curved monoplaco-
phorans with a subcircular aperture; available
specimens from about 2.0 cm to 3.5 cm in length,
apex just overhanging anterior margin and
strongly asymmetrical either sinistrally or dex-
trally; shell expanding rapidly so that it is rela-
tively deep and completing about three-fourths
of one whorl; aperture subcircular, the anterior
part slightly compressed laterally; dorsum fol-
lowing a curve nearly the are of a circle; shell
unknown but presumably thin.
Discussion—When the holotype is oriented
with the aperture down and the apex toward the
observer, the hooked apex bends strongly toward
the right. On one paratype the apex is inclined
to the right but is nearly symmetrical. On the
other paratype, the apex is strongly inclined to
the left. Several colleagues have examined these
steinkerns, or internal shell fillings, and all agree
that the specimens have not been deformed by
compaction of sediment, deformation of strata,
or other geologic features. The asymmetry shown
ean be considered as basic to the living animal.
If this assumption is granted, the specimens
are significant for three reasons: (1) the hook-
shaped apical filing preserved on these steinkerns
is evidence that the early growth stages of the
shell were curved for at least part of one whorl.
As a steinkern is not always a true reflection of
the exterior, it is reasonable to assume that the
shell was more strongly coiled than is shown
directly by the specimen. (2) The specimens
show that in the Lower Ordovician at least one
genus of monoplacophorans had an asymmetrical
protoconch. Though the muscle scars of Cyrtonel-
VoL. 48, No; 1
lopsis are unknown, the general form is so similar
to Cyrtonella, the two taxa probably had similar
musculature. (3) If the three specimens are a
sample of a living population, they show that
the asymmetry of the early whorls was variable
among individuals.
Cyrtonellopsis huzzahensis strengthens the in-
terpretation that the living Neopilina galatheae
Lemche (1957, p. 4161, figs. 1-4) is a mono-
placophoran. The coiled larval shell of that
species is not atypical but is something that can
be at least partly demonstrated from the fossil
record. Comparison of Cyrtonellopsis with
specimens of Cyrtonella has confirmed the indi-
vidual variation of the asymmetrical protoconch
in Cyrtonella. The taxonomic importance of the
assymmetrical protoconch cannot be evaluated
until more information is available regarding this
feature in other genera. It is reasonable to con-
sider the early growth stages of the monoplaco-
phorans as a larval adaptation and as such, they
have limited taxonomic usefulness.
Locality —U.8S.G.S. locality 238 (green),
Cambrian-Ordovician register. Huzzah Creek
section, on Huzzah Creek 1 mile west of mouth
of Dry Creek, on Missouri Highway 8, about 8
miles east of Steeleville. Mr. Koenig suggests
that the section is probably in the SW!148SW!4
sec. 26, T. 38 N., R. 3 W, Crawford County, Mo.
Collected by E. O. Ulrich and H. E. Dickout,
August 23, 1906. The register lists the formation
as Gasconade dolomite.
Catalogued specimens.—Holotype US.N.M.
no. 135181. Paratypes U.S.N.M. nos. 135182,
135183.
Genus Proplina Kobayashi, 1933
Type species —Metaptoma cornutaforme Wal-
cott.
Diagnosis.—Laterally compressed monoplaco-
phorans have the apex projecting far over the
anterior margin of aperture; interior of shell with
six sets of paired muscle scars, one pair anterior
and high in the shell, four spaced uniformly along
the sides of the shell, and one pair on the posterior
slope.
2 The Paleontology and Stratigraphy Branch of
the U. S. Geological Survey maintains several
locality registers for the various internal sub-
divisions. These are differentiated by colors on
the locality numbers attached to specimens. The
‘“‘oreen’’ series, Cambrian-Ordovician, are no
longer in current use being superseded by an
‘“‘orange’’ register. ‘
JANUARY 1958
Discusston.—Kobayashi (1933, p. 263) re-
marked that the muscle scars of this genus are
“represented by an impressed band near the
aperture.”’ Actually muscle scars cannot be seen
on the specimens he described, and cannot be
seen on the primary types of Proplina cornuta-
formis (Walcott) (Knight, 1941, p. 274). Knight
(1952, p. 47) placed the genus within the Tryblidi-
inae and in a footnote stated that he examined
specimens of Proplina from the Ulrich and Bridge
collection which showed monoplacophoran muscle
scars. Though the importance of these specimens
is obvious, they have never been previously
described or figured.
Proplina cornutaformis (Walcott)
Figs. 10-13
Metoptoma cornutaforme Walcott, 1879, p. 129
Metoptoma cornutaforme Walcott. Lesley, 1889,
p. 204, figs.
Triblidium cornutaforme (Walcott). Walcott, 1912,
p. 263, pl. 41, figs. 12-14.
Proplina cornutaformis (Walcott). Knight, 1941,
p. 274, pl. 4, figs. 2a-2c.
Proplina cornutaformis (Walcott). Knight, 1944,
p. 487, pl. 174, fig. 11.
Description.—Laterally compressed ovoid, rela-
tively deep monoplacophorans, with apex pro-
jecting over anterior apertural margin; available
specimens from about 1.0 cm to 3.5 cm in length;
aperture strongly compressed at anterior, moder-
ately rounded at posterior, so that shell is wedge
shaped when viewed from above; shell relatively
deep, in the mature stage flattened on the dorsum
in side view; outer surface with numerous, equally
spaced concentric rugae, not reflected on the
interior of the shell; apex only slightly curved;
approximately one-fourth of shell projecting
over anterior margin in early growth stages and
nearly one-fifth of shell projecting at maturity;
interior of shell with six sets of paired muscle;
anterior muscle scars located about one-third
of the distance from apex to posterior of margin,
and relatively high in the cup; the first scar
consisting of a sharp short depression in shell
trending near 45° to the margin of the aperture
and a posteriorly elongated slight swelling located
behind the depression; the second to fifth sets of
sears on the steep lateral sides, closer to the
apertural margin than the first set, these four
pairs of sears nearly equally spaced, with the
second scar below the swelling noted above, and
the fifth posteriorly, some three-fourths of the
YOCHELSON: LOWER ORDOVICIAN MONOPLACOPHORAN MOLLUSKS Al.
total length of the shell; the second pair of scars
faint and obscure in detail; the third through
fifth formed of elongate narrow depressions in-
clined near 60° to the margin of the aperture
each with a posterior swelling, but neither the
depression nor swelling having sharp margins:
the sixth pair of scars on the posterior slope,
somewhat wider than the others, widening and
dying out toward the posterior margin, but con-
tinuing as faint furrows up along the dorsum
above the general level of the other scars for
some two-fifths of the length of the shell; interior
of shell with a flattened area on dorsum just
anterior to furrows of posterior set of muscles.
Discussion.—The above description is based
on reexamination of the types and topotypes, all
from limestone and showing the external orna-
ment and general form, supplemented by chert
steinkerns preserving the impression of the shell
interior. One measurement suggests that the
shell covering these steinkerns was about 0.4 mm
thick. This thickness of shell would account for
most of the differences of shape between the
calcareous shells and the steinkerns. The possi-
bility remains that the steinkerns may represent
a distinct species. Perhaps the single most
important difference is that the steinkerns do
not reflect the rugosities shown in the shell ex-
terior of the limestone specimens. In the present
state of our knowledge of the monoplacophorans,
however, it seems wiser to construe the species
broadly than name a new species.
In addition to the type, three other American
species have been referred to this genus. Proplina
cornutaformis has a less elongate apex than P.
acuta (Whitfield) (1889, p. 45, pl. 7, figs. 9-11)
and a more elongate apex than P. unguiformis
(Ulrich, in Ulrich and Scofield) (p. 848, pl. 61,
fig. 42-44). The type species is lower and has a
steeper slope of the shell below the apex than
does P. barabuensis (Whitfield) (1878, p. 60)
Proplina cornutaformis (Walcott) differs from P.
bridge. Kobayashi (1933, p. 263, pl. 5, fig. 2)
described from southern
relatively and significantly higher. It
Manchuria, in being
ditters
from P. ampla Kobayashi as figured (Kobayashi,
1933) on plate 4, figure 2, in having the posterior
slope not abruptly set off at an angle. The speci
men of P. ampla figured on plate 5, figure 4,
probably should be referred to Cyrtonellapsis
Locality —The chert steinkerns showing muse
sears, one of which is figured, are from U.S.G.S
242¢ Cambrian-Ordovician
loeality (green),
i, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
register. Teagues Creek, Webster County, Mo.
The specimens probably were obtained at or
near the Teagues Creek lead workings located in
Avs SINSATION A Wee. @, It, AB) IN, Th. la WW Speci-
mens were collected in 1891 by W. P. Jenny.
The register lists the formation as “Hirst Mag-
nesian limestone.’”’ A label with the collection in
Josiah Bridge’s handwriting — states “Lower
Cotter
Catalogued specimens.—Plesiotypes, US.N.M.
nos. 135186a-135186v.
Bipulvina Yochelson, n. gen.
Type species.—Bipulvina croftsae Yochelson,
n. Sp.
Diagnosis.—Low, spoon-shaped monoplaco-
phorans having the interior of the dorsum flat-
tened for more than half of its length and set off
from the anterior and posterior slopes; apex
strongly anterior, just projecting over apertural
margin; five pairs of subtriangular lateral muscle
scars located relatively high on lateral slopes,
with some additional markings on anterior slope;
ornament unknown; interior of shell with two
furrows parallel to lines of muscle scars.
Discussion —Bipulvina fits clearly within the
Tryblidiinae as listed by Knight (1952, p. 46,
47). Even though the external ornament of
Bipulvina is unknown, it can be distinguished
readily from other members of the subfamily. The
shell is lower and much less curved than that of
Cyrtonella Hall, 1879, or Vallatotheca Foerste,
1914. Both Vallatotheca and Pilina Koken, 1925,
have strong rugosities which would be reflected
on the shell interior; such rugosities are missing
from Bipulvina. The apex of Bipulvina is less
pointed than that of Drahomira Perner and
Proplina Kobayashi, 1933, Helctonopsis Ulrich
and Scofield, 1897, is not well known, but seem-
ingly has a lower shell more strongly curved
along the dorsum.
Bipulvina is closest to Tryblidium Lindstrém,
1884, in shape, but has a different musculature
than that genus, possessing only five pairs of
muscles, rather than six. In some ways Brpulvina
is a more complex shell than Tryblidium as it has
a different sort of musculature at the anterior
than on the main part of the body. Pilina unguis
(Lindstrém) shows differentiation of the anterior
scar or scars (Lindstrém, 1880, pl. 9, fig. 2) but
the anterior slope is unlike that of B. croftsae.
It is tempting to homologize the six or eight
VOL) 435sNiGrae
muscles of the tryblidiids with the imdividual
plates of the Amphineura (Knight, 1952, p. 22)
but Bipulvina shows that, in detail, such homol-
ogy is not exact or necessarily correct.
Bipulvina croftsae Yochelson, n. sp.
Figs. 5-9
Description —Low, spoon-shaped monoplaco-
phorans with two depressions on dorsum of
shell interior paralleling the two lmes of muscle
scars; available specimens about 2.5 em in length;
aperture oval, rounded anteriorly and posteriorly,
wider at the latter end; cast of apex relatively
blunt, just overhanging the anterior margin;
ornament and thickness of shell unknown; dor-
sum of steinkern, when viewed in profile, flat-
tened and gently inclined, bending abruptly at
the anterior slope and less abruptly at the longer
posterior slope; five distinct sets of paired muscle
sears located relatively high in the shell between
the anterior and posterior slopes, the most for-
ward set being just posterior to the anterior slope;
muscle scars in shell subtriangular with a point to-
ward the apex, deepest at the point and shallowing
posteriorly, the first muscle scar longer than those
posteriorly, each scar crossed by several growth
lines concave forward, the lowermost edges of
all the muscle scars joined and still farther sunk
into the shell; central to the lines of muscle scars
there are two shallow linear furrows coalescing
on the anterior slope and dying out posteriorly,
the area of the shell between these rounded de-
pressions being raised and flattened; anterior
slope of shell interior with several markings, pos-
sibly muscle scars, but fainter and smaller than
those posteriorly; markings in the form of two
paired ridges and depressions, occurring anterior
to first clear large muscle scar, with a third smaller
depression just posterior to the apex and above
the apical construction noted below, with two
flattened subtriangular shell thickenings pro-
jecting inward near the apex; evidence of a
short median septum anterior to these projec-
tions; a set of paired crescent shaped markings
occurring at the extreme anterior under the apex
where the shell begins to flare out near the
margin; a pair of elongate weltlike ridges in-
clined 30° to the margin occurring anteriorly
about midway between the apex and the first
clear muscle scar, but relatively close to the
margin; and a pair of shorter ridges occurring
below the first large muscle with other similar,
JANUARY 1958
though fainter, ridges posteriorly, their exact
spacing and number not determined.
Discussion.—The description of Brpulvina
croftsae is based on three steinkerns preserved in
chert. The first is incomplete and rather poor,
and shows only the lines of muscle scars and
paralleling depressions. These depressions are
represented as ridges above, or dorsal, to the
muscles. The second steinkern shows the shape
well, but does not preserve many details. The
third is incomplete but exceedingly well pre-
served; it is on this specimen that most details
of the anterior were seen.
Five sets of paired muscle scars are on the
main body of the steinkern. They are limited to
the flattened area set off from the anterior and
posterior slopes. The scars are all high on the
sides, stand in relief, and appear to be relatively
large and deep compared to the scars of other
monoplacophorans. They indicate a fairly thick
shell, as thin shells of patelliform mollusks com-
monly either lack muscle scars or have them
poorly developed. The flaring at the margin of
the steinkerns is another indication of a relatively
thick shell. Secondary deposits may have further
augmented the shell thickness and may be the
cause of the flattening of the dorsum as they are
in Tryblidium reticulatum Lindstrom (Knight,
1941, p. 364).
The markings on the anterior slope are all
fainter than those posteriorly and are of a differ-
ent shape. They are more the ridge and depres-
sion type seen in Proplina cornutaformis (Wal-
cott), though of course much smaller. Two sets
ean be seen clearly; the one just posterior to the
apex is so faint it might be interpreted differently
by another observer. Whatever their exact num-
ber and position, these markings on the anterior
of the steinkern indicate a differentiated head
region, and suggest a fairly complex musculature.
In contrast to these faint markings on the
anterior slope, the constriction at the apex is
quite clear. It is seen on two steinkerns as a
depressed and flattened subtriangular area on
each side of apex. This depression may connect
with the lowest shallow depression just posterior
to it. Anterior to the constriction, the apex of one
steinkern is bifurcated. This bifurcation suggests
the presence of a short median septum in the
shell. An alternative explanation, which cannot
be checked until further specimens are obtained,
is that the apex of the shell was not completely
filled with chert before the shell was dissolved.
YOCHELSON: LOWER ORDOVICIAN MONOPLACOPHORAN MOLLUSKS 13
On the anterior lateral slopes just above the
line where the steinkern flares out to the margin
and just anterior to the first large muscle scar,
paired elongate ridges are quite clear. The are
present as sharp depressions in the steinkern.
Other depressions, much shallower, but of similar
size and shape occur posteriorly on the lateral
and posterior slopes. Their spacing is not clearly
evident, but does not appear to be uniform. The
anterior markings and those on the lateral slopes
may not necessarily have had the same function.
No satisfactory interpretation of these markings
can be given. Whatever they may be, they are
not the same as the ‘“‘shadow scars” in Arch-
aeophiala Perner (Knight, 1952, p. 27), as these
“sears”? would be represented on the steinkern
by ridges rather than depressions and would
be in a different position with reference to the
muscles.
Locality —U.8.G.8. locality 237y (green),
Cambrian-Ordovician register. On Poverty Flat,
NW!14NE24 sec. 31, T. 37 N., R. 1 W., Washing-
ton County, Mo. The Poverty Flat lead workings
were mined in 1890-1891. Mr. Koenig indicates
that they are on the northwest of a dirt road,
just south of a sharp bend, clearly shown on the
Berryman, Missouri, quadrangle sheet. The
specimens were collected by J. D. Robertson, of
the Missouri Geological Survey, in 1890 or
earlier. The register, written June 3, 1933, or
later lists the specimens as being from the Gas-
conade dolomite.
Catalogued specumens.—U.S.N.M. no. 135184;
paratypes U.S.N.M. nos. 135185 a, 135185 b.
REFERENCES
ForerstEe, A. F. Notes on the Agelacrinidae and
Lepadocystinae, with descriptions of Thresher-
adicus and Brockocystites. Bull. Sei. Lab.
Denison Univ. 17: 399-487, 1914.
Haut, James. Natural history of New York,
Paleontology, 5 (2): Containing descriptions of
the Gasteropoda, Pteropoda, and Cephalopoda
of the Upper Helderberg, Hamilton, Portage,
and Chemung growps. 1879.
Knieut, J. Brookes. Paleozoic gastropod geno
types. Geol. Soc. Amer. Spec. Pap. 32: 510
pp. 1941.
Paleozoic Gastropoda. In Shimer, H. W.,
and R. R. Shrock, Jndex fossils of North
America: 437-479, pls. 174-196. New York,
1944.
gastropods and their
Smith-
Primitive fossil
bearing on gastropod classification.
sonian Miss Coll. 117 (13): 56 pp. 1952
Kosayasui, Treticsut. Faunal study of the Wa
th snecia
wanian (basal Ordovician) series wii
14 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
notes on the Ribeiridae and the ellesmereocer-
oids. Journ. Fac. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo, sec.
2, 3: 249-328, pls. 1-10. 1933.
KoxrEn, Ernst (edited by Perner, Jaroslav).
Die Gastropoden des baltischen Untersilurs.
Mém. Acad. Sei. Russie, sér. 8: Classe Phys.-
Math., 37 (1). 1925.
LemcHe, HENNING. A new living deep-sea mollusc
of the Cambro-Devonian class Monoplacophora.
Nature 179: 413-416, 1957.
Lestey, J. P. A dictionary of the fossils of Penn-
sylvania and neighboring States named in the
reports and catalogues of the Survey. Geol.
Surv. Pennsylvania, Report P, 4: i-xlv, 437,
i-xxx1 pp. 1889.
LinpstroM, Gustar. On the Silurian Gastro-
poda and Pteropoda of Gotland. Wongl.
Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Handl. 19 (6). 1884.
Rasetti, Franco. Internal shell structures in
the Middle Cambrian gastropod Scenella and
the problematic genus Stenothecoides. Journ.
Pal. 28: 59-66, pls. 11, 12. 1954.
Unricy, E. O., and ScorieLp, W. H. The Lower
vou. 48, No. 1
Silurian Gastropoda of Minnesota, in Geology of
Minnesota, Final Report, 3 (pt. 2): 813-1081,
pl. 61-82. 1897.
Watcotr, C. D. Description of new species of
fossils from the Calciferous formation. 32d Ann.
Rep. New York State Mus. Nat. Hist.: 129-
IBIS WS7O-
Cambrian geology and paleontology. IT,
No. 9, New York Potsdam-Hoyt fauna. Smith-
sonian Misc. Coll. 57: 252-294, pls. 41-44. 1912.
Wenz, W. Ursprung und frihe Stammes-geschichte
der Gastropoden. Arch. Molluskunde 72: 1-10.
1940.
WHITFIELD, R. P. Preliminary descriptions of
new species of fossils from the lower geological
formations of Wisconsin. Ann. Rep. Wisconsin
Geol. Surv. 1877: 50-89, 1879.
Observations on some imperfectly known
fossils from the Calciferous sandstone of Lake
Champlain, and descriptions of several new
forms. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 2: 41-63,
1889.
POST-SHOT YIELD MEASUREMENT OF AEC
UNDERGROUND NUCLEAR TEST
The Atomic Energy Commission has reported
the resultant yield of the deep underground
nuclear test conducted at the AEC Nevada Test
Site in September 1957 as 1.7 kilotons.
The shot was detonated at 09 hours 59 minutes
59.45 seconds Pacific Daylight Time (16:59 :59.45
GCT) on September 19, 1957, at the end of a
tunnel about 2,000 feet long dug horizontally into
the side of a mesa at the northern edge of the
Yucca Basin. The explosion took place in a layer
of voleanic tuff. The coordinates of the detona-
tion point are: latitude 37°11’44.8”, longitude
116°12/11.3”, elevation 6,615 feet above mean
sea level. The vertica! distance from the detona-
tion point to the mesa surface is 899 feet, and
the slant distance to the side of the mesa is
approximately 800 feet. |
Post-shot investigation of the tunnel and sur-
rounding area confirms that the explosion was
contained and that no radioactive materials
escaped into the surrounding air. A detailed study
of the area and the local effects of the detonation
is In progress.
JANUARY 1958
BRONNIMANN AND BROWN: A CRETACEOUS FORAMINIFERAL GENUS Ly
PALEONTOLOGY — Hedbergella, a new name for a Cretaceous planktonic forami-
niferal genus. PAUL BRONNIMANN, Esso Standard Oil, 8. A., Habana, anp
Nort K. Brown, Jr., Gulf Oil Corporation, New York. (Communicated
by H. A. Rehder.)
(Received August 21, 1957)
The generic name Hedbergina was intro-
duced by Brénnimann and Brown (1956, p.
529) for a group of planktonic Foraminifera
ranging in age from Aptian or Albian to
Cenomanian. Globigerina seminolensis Harl-
ton was thought to be representative of this
group and was originally designated the type
species of Hedbergina. Although Harlton’s
figures of the holotype of G. seminolensis
(1927, pl. 5, fig. 7a, b) seem to give a true
likeness of the group, later examination of
this specimen at the U.S. National Museum
has shown that it is not typical of the group
for which Bronnimann and Brown (idem,
pp. 529, 530) intended their name Hed-
bergina to represent. The holotype is so un-
like Harlton’s deceptive figures that it may
not even be the specimen which he originally
figured. The holotype does in fact, as noted
previously by Plummer (1945, p. 264), re-
semble quite closely Globigerina cretacea
d’Orbigny. It has a relatively large umbilicus
and may have possessed an umbilical cover-
plate which was later broken away.
Harlton Gdem, p. 25) originally stated
that the type locality of G. semznolensis was
the Pennsylvanian Glenn formation, about
4 miles north of Ardmore, Carter County,
Okla. However, Tomlinson (1929, p. 78)
questioned the correctness of this and other
localities supplied by Harlton. Later Harlton
(1929, p. 308) admitted these errors but did
not completely rectify them. Plummer (idem,
p. 264), who examined the holotype of G.
seminolensis was of the opinion that it was
not ‘fa convincing Pennsylvanian faunal
member.”’ Inasmuch as Comanchean (Aptian
to Cenomanian) strata crop out in and
around the town of Ardmore, Brénnimann
and Brown (idem, p. 530) believed Harlton’s
species to be a Comanchean form. We now
believe, judging from the morphology of the
holotype, that G. semanolensis is a younger
Cretaceous fossil.
In spite of our intention, G. semznolensis,
represented by its holotype as this specimen
is now known to be, was originally, though
inadvertently, designated the type species
of Hedbergina; and for this reason the designa-
tion is binding and must be followed. Al-
though our definition of Hedbergina is now
known not to refer to Hedbergina, it still
applies to the group of fossils for which that
name was unfortunately introduced, and for
which we now propose the new name Hed-
bergella. The definition of Hedbergella, nu.
name, which is the same as that previously
given by Brénnimann and Brown (idem, p.
029) for Hedbergina, is as follows:
The smooth- to rough-walled, calcareous
hyaline test is trochospirally coiled. Its small
early chambers are globular, inflated, and glo-
bigerine-like. The last few chambers are elongated
and extend into a relatively small umbilicus. The
aperture is rounded, interiomarginal, and opens
into the umbilicus. Short apertural flaps extend
‘into the umbilicus but do not form an umbilicai
cover-plate.
Remarks.—The most characteristic feature
of Hedbergella, n. name, is the extension of
the last few chambers into the umbilicus.
This represents a stage in the phylogeny
from a Globigerina-like form with a tight
umbilicus to T7cinella Reichel with a large
umbilicus and umbilical cover-plate. In this
lineage the enlarging umbilicus was at first
minimized by extension of the last few cham-
bers as a whole into it as represented by
Hedbergella. Later in the lineage the umbili-
cus became too large to be filled in by the
chambers themselves. However, by extend-
ing only the apertural flaps, and not the
chambers as a whole, the large umbilicus was
covered by an umbilical cover-plate com-
posed of extended apertural flaps as repre-
sented by Tvcinella.
Reichel (1950, pp. 601-603), Hagn (1952,
pp. 769, 770; 1955, pl. 22, fig. 2, pl. 23, fig. 1),
and: Wmuiker (1952, pl. 5, ne. 2, Pv; pl. 6,
fig. 3, Pv) have referred forms belonging to
Hedbergella, n. name, to the genus Pseudo-
valvulinerra Brotzen (type species: Rosalzna
lorneiana d’Orbigny), but Hedbergella, n.
name, differs from this genus 1n possessing
early globigerine-like chambers and a
rounded aperture.
16 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 1
Globigerina infracretacea Glaessner seems
to belong to the genus Hedbergella, but this 1s
not easily ascertained since Glaessner (1937,
p. 28, text-fig. 1) only figured dorsal and
peripheral views of his species. However,
Subbotina (1953, pl. 1, figs. 5-10) has
presented excellent figures of specimens of
G. infracretacea. In the ventral views of her
figures the chambers themselves are seen to
extend into the umbilicus, thus indicating
that G. infracretacea should be allocated to
Hedbergella.
“Anomalina sp. aff. lorneyana (d’Orb.)
typ.”’ of Montanaro Gallitelli (1947, p. 194,
text-fig. 1, no. 18a, b) is either a Hedbergella
or Ticinella, but one cannot tell which since
she did not figure a ventral view.
The type species of Hedbergella, n. name,
is here designated Anomalina lorneiana var.
trocoidea Gandolfi. This form is raised to the
rank of species and described below as Hed-
bergella trocoidea (Gandolfi).
Hedbergella trocoidea (Gandolfi)
Iie, 1 Be
Anomalina lorneiana (not d’Orbigny) GaANn-
DOLFI, Riv. Ital. Paleont., anno 48, mem.
AB To), OS, ol, 4ey mast, I IDS Toll (ey, 1s, 4S (Ole lls},
figs. la, b, 4a, b.
Anomalina lorneiana var. trocoidea GaAn-
Xoo, Woke, 1d. OY), ol, Ho uote. le-@s jo 4s
fies, 4, Be yolwls. wes, 22h, 10; Be, |0,
Anomalina lorneiana d’Orb. var. trocoidea
Gandolfi, Noru, Geol. Bundesanstalt,
Jahrb., Sonderbd. 3: 80, pl. 4, figs. 27a, b,
28a, b.
Pseudovalvulineria sp., UMIKER, Univ. Bern,
Geolw Insts Dissh plone 2 (ev) Eales,
ne. DPW)
Pseudovalvulineria trocoidea (Gandolfi),
Haen, Erdol und Kohle 5: text-figs. 1
(part), 2 (part).
_ Pseudovalvulineria trocoidea (Gandolfi),
HacGn, Internat. Sedimentary Petrogr.
Sensis ple 225) tig. 2a (pany) sa plepZonmicerg!
(part).
Hedbergina seminolensis (not Harlton),
BRONNIMANN and Brown, Eclogae geol.
Helv. 48: 592, pl. 20, figs. 4-6.
Not Globigerina seminolensis HARLTON,
Jiourns (alah 24 len, omar
1942.
1942.
1951.
1952.
1952.
1956.
1927,
Description.—The rather rough-walled,
coarsely granular test is low to relatively high
trochospirally coiled. Its early chambers are small
and globigerine-like. The last whorl is composed
of six to eight chambers, the last one or two of
which are markedly elongated and extended into
a tight umbilicus. The interiomarginal aperture
is rounded and opens into the umbilicus. It is
bordered by a short apertural flap —Broénnimann
and Brown’s (idem, p. 529) description of Hed-
bergina seminolensis (not Harlton).
Tse:
Fig. 1.—Hedbergella trocoidea (Gandolfi). Lec-
totype of Anomalina lorneiana var. trocoidea
Gandolfi. a, dorsal view; 6, peripheral view; c,
ventral view. X50. After Gandolfi (1942, pl. 2, —
fig. la-c).
Remarks. — Anomalina lornerana (not
d’Orbigny) of Gandolfi (1942, p. 98, pl. 4,
figs. 1, 19; pl. 8, fig. 2; pl. 13, figs. la, b, 4a, b)
is a low-spired form, and A. lornezana var.
trocoidea Gandolfi is a high-spired form. Such
forms seem to represent extremes in the
variability of the species. Both forms are
included in the same species herein called
Hedbergella trocoidea (Gandolfi). Globsgerina
infracretacea Glaessner can probably be re-
ferred to Hedbergella, but it is smaller, though
relatively stouter, its walls are smoother,
and it possesses fewer chambers in the last
whorl than H. trocoidea.
Placentula nitida (not Reuss) of Berthelin
(1880, p. 69, pl. 27, 4, fig. 1la—c) from the
Albian of Montcley, Department of Doubs,
France, appears to be a similar form, as noted
by Gandolfi (idem, p. 99). However, Barten-
stein (1954, p. 49), who restudied the
Montcley material, places Berthelin’s form
in synonymy with Valvulineria parva Khan,
which is unlike any Hedbergella. Discorbina
galiciana Friedberg, originally described from
beds of supposedly Senonian age near Lwéw
JANUARY 1958
(Lemberg) in the Ukraine (formerly south-
eastern Poland), may also represent a Hed-
bergella.
In raising the rank of this form from
variety to species, we have retained Gan-
dolfi’s varietal name as the specific name. In
Gandolfi’s paper the spelling of this name
where printer’s type was used is “‘trocoidea”’
(idem, p. 99, explanations to pls. 2, 13). His
spelling of the name where drafted letters
were used is ‘‘trochoidea’’ (idem, text-fig. 49,
pl. 4). Although “‘trocoidea’”’ is probably the
intended spelling, this is not certain. Ac-
cording to the Copenhagen Decisions on
Zoological Nomenclature (Hemming, ed.,
1953, pp. 43-44), ‘“‘Where there was more
than one Original Spelling and in the case of
none of these spellings was there clear evi-
dence that it was the result of an inadvertent
error, the Valid Original Spelling is that one
of the Original Spellings used by the First
Subsequent User of the name.” Reichel (idem,
pp. 601, 603) appears to have been the first
user (other than nomenclators, e.g., the
Zoological Record, Thalmann’s Indexes to new
genera, species and varieties of Foraminifera,
and Ellis and Messina’s Catalogue of Foram-
inifera) of Gandolfi’s name, but he also
used the two spellings. Noth (1951, p. 80)
was the next user of Gandolfi’s name which
he spelled ‘“‘trocoidea.’”? We regard Noth’s
usage as the valid spelling.
No holotype of Anomalina lorneiana var.
trocoidea was originally designated or indi-
cated by Gandolfi. The specimen Gandolfi
(idem, pl. 2, fig. la—c) illustrated as ‘‘A noma-
lina lorneiana d’Orbigny trocoidea n. var.
Breggia, strato 14, 50.” is herein desig-
nated lectotype. Gandolfi’s original figure of
this specimen is reproduced here as Fig.
OmC.
The lectotype of ‘‘Anomalina lorneiana
var. trocoidea Gandolfi” is deposited in the
collections of the Institute of Geology and
Paleontology, University of Basel, Switzer-
land.
The type locality of Hedbergella trocoidea
(Gandolfi) is the lower part of the Scaglia
variegata (Aptian or Albian), bed 14, about
35 m above the top of the Barremian Bian-
cone limestone, in the gorge of Breggia River,
northeast of Balerna, near Chiasso, Canton
Ticino, southeastern Switzerland.
BRONNIMANN AND BROWN: A CRETACEOUS FORAMINIFERAL GENUS 177
REFERENCES
BARTENSTEIN, H. Revision von Berthelin’s Mém-
ore 1880 wiber die Alb-Foraminiferen von
Montcley. Senck. Leth. 35 (1/2): 37-50, pl. 1.
1954.
BerRTHELIN, G. Mémoire sur les foraminiferes
fossiles de étage Albien de Montcley (Doubs).
Mém. Soc. Géol. France (3) 1 (5): 1-87, pls.
24-27. 1880.
BRONNIMANN, P., and Brown, N. K., Jr. Taz-
onomy of the Globotruncanidae. Eclogae Geol.
Helv. 48 (2): 503-562, pls. 20-24, 24 figs. 1956.
GuAESSNER, M. F. Planktonforaminiferen aus
der Kreide und dem Eozdn und thre stratigraph-
ische Bedeutung. Univ. Moscow Paleont. Lab.
Stud. Micropaleontology, 1 (1): 27-52, 1 pl.,
4 text-figs. 1937.
Haan, H. Zur Altersfrage der bunten ‘““Neocommer-
gel” im Hurschbachtobel bei Hindelang (AII-
gau). Erd6l und Kohle 5: 768-770, 2 figs. 1952.
———. Fazies und Mikrofauna der Gesteine der
Bayerischen Alpen. Internat. Sedimentary
Petrogr. Ser. 1: xi + 174 pp., 71 pls., 8 tables.
E. J. Brill, Leiden, 1955.
Harton, B. H. Some Pennsylvanian Foraminifera
from the Glenn formation of southern Oklahoma.
Journ. Pal. 1: 15-27, pls. 1-5. 1927.
———. Some Pennsylvanian Ostracoda and For-
aminifera from southern Oklahoma— a correc-
tion. Journ. Pal. 3: 308. 1929.
Hemminea, F. (editor) (1953) Copenhagen Deci-
sions on Zoological Nomenclature, 14th In-
ternat. Congress of Zoology, Colloquium Zool.
Nomenclature, xxix + 135 pp.
Montanaro GALLITELLI, EH. Per la geologia delle
argille ofiolitifere appenniniche. Nota III.—
Foraminifert dell’argilla scagliosa di Castel-
vecchio (Modena). Mem. Atti Soc. Toscana
Sci. Nat. 54: 175-196, 2 text-figs. 1947.
Notu, R. Foraminiferen aus Unter-.und Ober-
kreide des ésterreichischen Anteils an Flysch,
Helvetikum und Vorlandvorkommen. Geol.
Bundesanst. Jahrb. 3: 91 pp., 9 pls., 2 tables.
1951.
PuumMER, H. J. Smaller Foraminifera in the Mar-
ble Falls, Smithwick, and lower Strawn strata
around the Llano uplift in Texas. Univ. Texas
Publ. 4401 : 209-271, 3 pls., 16 text-figs. 1945.
REIcHEL, M. Observations sur les Globotruncana du
gisement de la Breggia (Tessin). Eclogae Geol.
Helv. 42 (2): 596-617, pls. 16, 17, 6 text-figs.
1950.
SuBBoTINA, N. N. Fossil Foraminifera from the
U.S.S.R., Globigerinidae, Hantkeninidae a
Globorotaliidae. Trudy Vses. Neft. geol.-rav
Inst. [n. ser.], fase. 76: 295 pp., 44 pls., 8 text-
figs. [In Russian]. 1953.
Tomurnson, C. W. The Pennsylvanian system %
the Ardmore Basin. Oklahoma Geol. Surv
Bull. 46: 79 pp., 20 pls., 3 text-figs. 1929.
UmIKER, R. Geologie der westlichen Stockhornkette
(Berner Oberland) mit besonderer Bericksic/
tigung der Kreidestratigraphie. Univ. Bern
Geol. Inst. Publ., Dissertation: x + 77 pp., 8
pls., 12 text-figs. 1952.
18 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, No. 1
ENTOMOLOGY.—Venomous moths and butterflies. Howarp F. ALLARD and
Harry A. Auzarp, Tingo Maria, Peru.
(Received September 24, 1957)
LARVAE WITH VENOMOUS HAIRS OR SETAE
The larvae of a number of species ot
moths and butterflies are known to bear
venomous hairs or setae. The following may
be mentioned:
Lagoa rispata (fam. Megalopygidae). This
is a common eastern species, the caterpil-
lars feeding upon the leaves of oak, elm,
apple, raspberry, and various shrubs. These
are fleshy and furnished with a dense coat
of long, silky, brown hairs which project
upward and meet to form a ridge or crest
along the median dorsal line. Among these
fine hairs venomous setae occur.
Sabine stimulea (fam. Limacodidae, by
some authors termed the Cochlidiidae and
by others the Eucleidae). These are known
as the slug-caterpillar moths. Sabine stemu-
lea is the saddle-back caterpillar, feeding on
oaks and other forest trees. The larva is
characterized by a green patch on the back
resembling a saddlecloth, the saddle being
represented by an oval purplish brown sopt.
The moth is dark reddish brown in color
with two white dots near the apex of the
fore wings.
The spiny oak slug (Luclea delphiniat) is
another common species feeding on oak,
pear, willow, and other trees.
Automeris io (fam. Saturniidae) (Giant
silkworms). This is called the io-moth and
is a common species in the eastern part of
the United States. It is characterized by
large conspicuous eye spots on the hind
wings. The larvae, armed with particularly
yenomous spines arranged in tufts, are
ereen, with a broad brown or reddish-white
edged stripe on either side of the abdomen,
and the spines are tipped with black. This
is a common species, and the junior author,
in his boyhood, was well acquainted with
this caterpillar and often deliberately
touched the spines of the caterpillars
against the tender skin of the arms or
fingers to note the venomous reactions. Fre-
quently, too, he sometimes inadvertently
came in contact with them, usually while
cutting or shocking corn, and was at once
made aware of their presence by a burning
sensation followed by more or less tempo-
rary redness or swelling.
The maia-moth, Hemileuca maa, is also
a member of the same family Saturnudae.
It is the only species of the genus in the
eastern United States and is not particu-
larly common. The larvae feed upon the
leaves of the oak, are brownish black with
a lateral yellow stripe, and each segment is
armed with large, branching, venomous
spines. eae ae
Browntail moth, Huproctis chrysorrhoea
(fam. Lymantriidae, or Lipariidae). The
tussock moths. This is a European pest in-
troduced first into Massachusetts at some
unknown date, but in 1897 its ravages came
to notice, and the species since has spread
over much of New England, and into Nova
Scotia, New Brunswick, and other areas.
The larvae are more or less social in behavy-
ior, fastening leaves together with silk as
shelters in which they pass the winter. They
are nearly black in general coloration, and
are clothed with brownish, barbed hairs,
borne on the subdorsal and lateral tubercles.
These hairs are venomous and in contact
with the human skin, produce an inflamma-
tion similar to that of poison ivy. Even the
cast spines of the larvae are readily blown
about by the wind, the venomous hairs
causing much discomfort.
ADULT INSECTS WITH VENOMOUS
HAIRS OR SETAE
It is perhaps less generally known that
the hairs or setae of the adult moths and
butterflies, in some parts of the world, may
also produce great discomfort, as trouble-
some irritations or inflammation in contact
with the skin of tender areas of the human
body. In this country the hairs of the adult
insects of the browntail moth are known
to be of this character.
In some parts of the world, especially in
January 1958
the warmer regions of South America, the
presence of moths with venomous hairs may
at times constitute a serious health problem.
The following observations and account
of the senior author, living at Tingo Maria,
Peru, in the province of Huanaco, on the
east slope of the Andes, in the tropical rain-
forest, may be of some interest to entomolo-
gists and to the medical fraternity as well.
In the Tingo Maria area, in 1952, during
the latter part of April and the month of
May, near the close of the season of heavy
rains, great numbers of small, dusty black
moths made their appearance, congregating
about electric lights along the streets of
Tingo Maria, and around those over the
entrance of houses. In unscreened houses
where lights were present these moths were
attracted in numbers. These moths at
Tingo Maria appear at about the same
season every year, and in 1952, they became
exceptionally numerous, together with a
number of other species, but the dusty black
species were dominant, appearing in enor-
mous numbers. It was soon obvious that
the irritations which soon developed were
associated with this moth. Simultaneously
with these hordes many people experienced
a troublesome rash. Spotted red areas or
small pimples or streaks developed on the
inner angle of the forearm. Irritations also
appeared on the neck or on other tender
parts of the body. So general was the afflic-
tion that affected individuals visited the
hospital at Tingo Maria, thinking they were
affected with some new, strange tropical
disease. It is estimated that 70-80 per cent
of the population was affected, perhaps as
many as several thousand people.
The senior writer suspected that the hairs
of this ubiquitous moth were responsible for
this rash and carried out a few texts which
definitely proved that his surmise was cor-
rect. He caught several of the moths and
gently rubbed them up and down the inner
part of his own forearm and also made simi-
lar tests upon several Peruvian technicians
at the Experimental Station who had not
previously experienced the prevailing rash.
In about 15-20 minutes all who had _ sub-
mitted to the test had broken out with a
red, itching rash in the treated areas. Both
the senior writer’s garage and house at
ALLARD AND ALLARD: VENOMOUS MOTHS AND BUTTERFLIES 19
Tingo Maria were equipped with an electric
light over the entrance doors. Every night
hundreds of these moths were attracted to
these lights.
This moth has an interesting behavior by
playing possum when touched, at once lift-
ing and closing its wings in an upright
position over the body, then usually relax-
ing its hold upon the object to which it is
clinging and simply falling to the ground as
if helpless or dead. In a few seconds or a
minute it appears to revive and crawl or
fly away.
Although the great swarm of these moths
appear in April and May, a few belated
individuals may be seen in June, but very
few in numbers in comparison with the
great initial invasion.
The day following their nightly appear-
ance, they remain around the light which
attracted them, but many fall to the ground
and appear to die and are carried away or
eaten by ants. Their constant fluttering
about the lights scatters great quantities of
the hairlike fuzz dislodged from their bodies,
and this forms a dense covering on all ob-
jects below or near the lights, and is blown
about. This at once explained the occurrence
of the rash each time the senior author
worked in his workship in the garage, when-
ever he paused and rested his forearm on
the work bench. On these occasions, always
in a short time, the rash made its appear-
ance, and the itching continued for several
hours or more. At the height of the invasion
of these moths, people were being constantly
re-exposed each night so that the rash was
aggravated into an almost chronic and dis-
tressing condition to be endured for several
weeks.
Specimens of this moth, collected by the
authors, have been kindly identified by
Wilham D. Field, associate curator of in-
sects, U. 8. National Museum, as a species
of Hylesia close to Hylesia volvex Dyar, of
the lepidopterous subfamily Hemileucinae,
family Saturnudae. According to Mr. Field
this troublesome genus presents great taxo-
nomic difficulties so that the Tingo Maria
species cannot at present be more definitely
named, than a species near Hylesia vole
Dyar. Mr. Field has been of much assist-
ance in the preparation of relevant litera-
20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ture discussing the moths of the genus
Hylesia, and the skin irritations which they
induce.
TESTS OF THE JUNIOR AUTHOR
Early in July the senior writer (my son)
sent me six or seven dried specimens of this
moth, and I made the following tests. I
carefully rubbed the abdominal portion of a
dry moth, bearinga coat of velvety dark hairs,
on the skin of the bend of my forearm at or
little below the elbow. This was done at 2
p.m. July 17. There was no noticeable im-
mediate effect, but in about two hours, the
area, showed a noticeable redness and by
nightfall the skin was hot and fiery red with
a pronounced puffiness resembling weals,
and itching had become intense. This dis-
comfort persisted throughout the might.
Even at nightfall of the next night, July 18,
the redness, puffiness, and itching were very
pronounced. By nightfall ot dalky WO. 2:
marked fiery redness was still evident, and
tiny pimplelike blisters had appeared, with
blood-red dots as if a slight haemorrhage
had taken place at many pin-point spots.
There was marked hyperaemia in the area,
and the affected skin seemed hot and fever-
ish, and appeared to perspire more freely
than unaffected areas.
I purposely avoided any palliative treat-
ment or medication with alcohol or other
reagents, as I wished to learn how persist-
ent this trouble would be. There was still
some redness of my forearm on July 22,
but there was now little swelling, and with
only occasional periods of itching, and this
became most noticeable only following
work or exercise during periods of hot
weather. By July 24, all irritating symp-
toms resulting from the test had completely
subsided. The irritations induced had there-
fore lasted almost one week, or at least for
six days, although some redness remained
for a few days longer.
In the literature there are a number of
reports of skin irritations produced by
species of moths of the genus Hylesza.
In the Lima newspaper La Cronica, May
12, 1952, the following translated account
appeared.
Montevideo, 12 (U/P/)—The crew of the
Italian oil-tanker Unitas who were detained in
VOL. 48, No. 1
quarantine some days after arriving from Carit-
pito, Venezuela, due to a fear of an epidemic of a
dangerous tropical disease, stated that while tak-
ing on oil in Venezuela, actual clouds of yellow-
tailed butterflies alighted on the hands, faces and
other exposed parts of the officers and sailors,
which they crushed with their hands or other
objects. A few hours before the ship weighed
anchor, the crew showed symptoms of a curious
disease. The skin was irritated first, followed
later by a painful inflammation. The captain,
Romulo Ballestrino, radioed the Institute of
Tropical Diseases in Rome, where a correct diag-
nosis was made and an efficient remedy pre-
scribed.
If this account is correct in all its fea-
tures, it isevident that even certain swallow-
tail butterflies of the genus Papilio may
cause troublesome skin inflammations simi-
lar to that caused by the moths of the genus
Hylesia, but this needs further confirma-
tion. Little work appears to have been done
to determine the exact nature of the skin
irritations produced by the hairy covering
of the moths of the genus Hylesza.
Mr. Leger and P. Mouzels (see reference
4) appear to have made a more than cursory
study of the character of the irritations pro-
duced.
They examined microscopically the indi-
vidual hairs or setae of the body covering
of the moths of Hylesia, a species appear-
ing at Cayenne in French Guiana in July
and August at the close of the rainy season,
causing skin eruptions, watery blisters and
inflammation, especially in young children.
The natives are familiar with its cause,
ascribing it to Mauvais papillons. The trouble
occurs only during a short period when
certain moths of the genus Hylesia appear,
and usually persists for only about eight
days. They examined microscopically the
hairs and setae of the body covering of these
moths and found three sorts. Most of these
were 140-150 microns long with the largest
diameter of 3 microns. These apically were
sharp-pointed, and some were furnished
with downwardly directed barbs. Others
were larger, up to 300 microns long, and less
sharply pointed. Some are lance-shaped,
shaped something like a knife. Some are
plates 2 microns thick with a length 120-150
microns.
Leger and Mouzels very convincingly
proved that the irritations produced by the
JANUARY 1958
hairs of these moths were not of merely
mechanical origin. After macerating the
moths, some in alcohol, and some in water,
these two solutions were centrifuged to
eliminate all scales and hairs. The solutions
were now separately tested on the tender
skin. The alcohol solution was absolutely
without effect. The water solution, after 4
hours, produced the typical characteristic
iritations of Hylesta, which persisted for
four to five days. This simple test indicated
an irritating principle of chemical origin,
comparable, it would appear, to the contact
poisons of the sap of certain plants (Rhus).
In the June 1952 issue of the publication
The Lamp (7), there appeared a most in-
teresting account of insufferable irritations
that workers on oil tankers visiting northern
South America have experienced following
visitations of the moths Hylesia. An artist’s
concept of swarms of these moths visiting
one of these tankers attracted by the lights
on board, is presented in an illustration.
This is a most readable and popular account
of the annoyances swarms of these venom-
ous moths sometimes inflict upon the crews
with their venomous hairs.
ALLARD AND ALLARD: VENOMOUS MOTHS AND BUTTERFLIES 7)
BIBLIOGRAPHY
(1) Dauuas, E. D. Otro caso de dermatitis pro-
ducida por un lepidoptera y nota sobre Hy-
lesia nigricans Berg (Lep. Bombycidae). 8a
Reun. Soc. Arg. Pat. Reg.: 469-474. 1933.
(2) Fiocu, H, H.S. E. ABonnenc. Sur la papil-
lonite guyanaise. Discription du papillon
pathogene Hylesia urticans. Inst. Pasteur
Guyane Franc. Territ. de |’Inini, Publ. 89:
10; 5 figs. 1944.
(3) JoprG, M. E. Nota previa sobre el principio
activo urticante de Hylesia nigricans (Lepz-
dopt. Hemileucidae) y las dermitis provo-
cadas por el mismo. 8a Reun. Sog. Arg.
Pathol. Reg.: 842-895, 1933.
(4) Lecer, M., ann P. Movuzeus. Dermatose
prurigineuse determinee par des papillons
saturnides du genre Hylesia. Bull. Soe.
Path. Exot. 11: 104-107. 1918.
(5) Lima, A. pa Costa. Insectos de Brasil 5:
118-120 (Lagartas urticantes). 1945; 6: 264—
265 (discussion on Hylesia), 1950.
(6) TissEuiIL, J. Contribution a Vlétude
papillonite guyanaise. Bull. Soe.
Exot. 28: 719-721, 1935.
(7) ANON. Beware butterflies. The Lamp (2) 20-
21. June 1952. [An excellent and vivid ac-
count of violent skin irritations induced
upon the exposed skin of workers on oil
tankers of the Standard Oil Co. (New
Jersey) in the Gulf of Paria, northern
South America. |
de la
Path.
THE STATUE OF NEWTON AT CAMBRIDGE
Newton with his prism and silent face,
The marble index of a mind for ever
Voyaging through strange seas of Thought, alone.
—W ORDSWORTH.
22 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 48, No. 1
ENTOMOLOGY.—A recharacterization of the genus Coelopencyrtus, with descrip-
tions of two new species (Hymenoptera: Encyrtidae). B. D. Burks, Entomology
Research Division, U. 8. Department of Agriculture. (Communicated by C.
F. W. Muesebeck.)
(Received September 9, 1957)
In 1919 Timberlake (Proc. Hawaiian Ent.
Soc. 4: 218-225) described two genera of En-
cyrtidae for species which are parasitic on
the mature larvae of aculeate Hymenoptera
in Hawaii. Coelopencyrtus was described for
odyneri Timberlake and swezeyz Timberlake,
both reared from the mature larvae of the
vespid wasp Odynerus nigripennis (Holm-
gren), and Nesencyrtus was described for
Adelencyrtus kaalae Ashmead, reared from
the mature larvae of the colletid bee Neso-
prosopis pubescens Perkins.
Coelopencyrtus was characterized as having
the female antenna with the basal funicle
segments at least as long as broad, the
funicle considerably longer than the club,
the club itself not greatly wider than the
funicle, the mouth opening not greatly
widened, the thorax elevated, and the ovi-
positor not exserted; the male had simple
antennae and the head had the frons pro-
tuberantly produced beyond the eyes. Vesen-
cyrtus, contrariwise, had the female antennal
funicle with all segments broader than long,
the club almost as long as the entire funicle
and much broader than it, the mouth open-
ing very broad to accommodate the unusu-
ally large mandibles, the thorax somewhat
depressed, and the ovipositor slightly ex-
serted; the male had ramose antennae and
the frons was not protuberantly produced
beyond the eyes.
Shortly after his 1919 paper, Timberlake
described two more species of Coelopencyr-
tus. C. orbi (1920, Proc. Hawaiian Ent. Soc.
4: 422) was a parasite of the mature larvae
of Odynerus orbus Perkins, and mauzensis
(1922, ibid. 5: 137) like odynerz and swezeyt,
was a parasite of the mature larvae of Ody-
nerus nigripennis (Holmgren). He also de-
scribed a second species of Nesencyrtus,
sexramosus, from a single unreared male
specimen (1922, ibid. 5: 141). All these
species are Hawaiian. No additional species
in either genus have been described up to
now.
Recently two species of encyrtid parasites
of mature larvae of the solitary colletid bee
Hylaeus were reared and submitted to me
for identification. One species had been
reared in Utah and the other on Plummers
Island, Md. It was apparent that these
species were undescribed, but their generic
assignment presented considerable difficulty.
They could not be placed to genus with pub-
lished keys, such as those of Ashmead (1904,
Mem. Carnegie Mus. 1: 286-311), Mercet
(1921, Fauna Ibérica, Himendpteros, fam.
Encirtidos, pp. 60-82), Ferriére (1953, Mitt.
Schweiz. Ent. Ges. 26: 1-45), or Erdés and
Novicky (1955, Beitr. zur Ent. 5: 165-202).
In Ashmead or Mercet they ran out near
Epiencyrtus, but even a casual examination
of these Hylaeus parasites showed them
not to be that genus. Consequently a search
was made through the numerous described
encyrtid genera which are not included in the
published keys. Fortunately specimens of
many of these genera are in the U. 8. Na-
tional Museum collection. A study of these
specimens and the literature finally made it
clear that the Hylaeus parasites had a blend
of the characters of Timberlake’s genera
Coelopencyrtus and Nesencyrtus. The males
have simple, nonramose antennae, as in
Coelopencyrtus, but the heads are nonpro-
tuberant, as in Nesencyrtus. The females
have the funicle segments all broader than
long, the club large and wider than any
funicle segments, the thorax depressed, and
the ovipositor exserted, as in Nesencyrtus,
but the mouth opening is relatively narrow,
as in Coelopencyrtus.
Under these circumstances it seemed ad-
visable to re-study all the species which have
been placed in Coelopencyrtus and Nesen-
cyrtus, to see how distinct they are generi-
cally. A re-examination of Timberlake’s excel-
lent descriptions and figures, along with a
study of type material of V. kaalae and C.
odynert, swezeyi, and orbs in the U. 8.
National Museum collection, have led to
JANUARY 1958
the conclusion that they all represent a
single genus. The rami of the funicle seg-
ments of the male antennae are not generi-
eally significant, as these vary from six
funicular rami in sexramosus, to four in
kaalae, to three small rami in mawiensis, to
one large ramus in swezey2, to one very small
ramus in odynerz, to none in orbz. In orb,
however, there is a small, ramuslike projec-
tion on the pedicel of the male antenna.
Somewhat similar projections are present on
the pedicels in swezeyz and mauiensis, while
the pedicels are simple or only very slightly
modified in sexramosus, kaalae, and odynert.
As for the female characters, orbt comes very
close to bridging the separation between
Coelopencyrtus and Nesencyrtus. C. orbit has
all the funicle segments broader than long,
the club is three-fourths as long as the entire
funicle, the mouth opening is broader than
in odyneri, but not so broad as in kaalae, the
thorax 1s somewhat depressed, and the ovi-
positor is exserted, less so than in kaalae, but
much more so than in odynerz. The protuber-
ant head, so striking in the male of odynerz,
is present in a reduced degree in the males of
orbt and mauiensis.
Consideration of these facts justifies the
conclusion that all the species mentioned
above, as well as the two to be described
below, belong in one genus, despite the
striking differences that exist between some
of the species. The name Coelopencyrtus has
page priority. It may be mentioned paren-
thetically that the genus Giraultella Gahan
and Fagan (=Hpaenasomyia Girault 1919,
not 1917), parasitic on the larvae of the
xylocopid bee, X ylocopa, in Java is probably
not the same as Coelopencyrtus although
seemingly closely related. Giraultella is very
inadequately described, and I have seen no
authentic specimens. Its description was
published one month after Coelopencyrtus.
Genus Coelopencyrtus Timberlake
‘““Ageniaspis sp.,’’ Swezey, 1907, Ent. Bul. Hawai-
ian Sugar Planters Assoc. Expt. Sta. 5: 52.
Coelopencyrtus Timberlake, 1919, Proc. Hawiian
Ent. Soc. 4: 218; Timberlake, 1922, ibid 5: 135.
(Type: Coelopencyrtus odyneri Timberlake, by
original designation.)
Nesencyrtus Timberlake, 1919, Proc. Hawaiian
Ent. Soc. 4: 223. (New synonymy.) (Type:
Adelencyrtus kaalae Ashmead, by monotypy and
original designation.)
BURKS: GENUS COELOPENCYRTUS dips,
Descriptton—Mandible with three teeth;
maxillary palp with four segments, apical one
the longest; labial palp with two segments, apical
one the shorter; antennae inserted low on frons,
near the mouth border, a relatively broad,
rounded projection present between antennal
bases; antennal scape enlarged, but not lamelli-
form; funicle with six segments, most or all of
which are wider than long; club clearly 3-seg-
mented and large, varying in length from three-
quarters as long as to as long as entire funicle,
and in width varying from only slightly wider
than to greatly wider than broadest funicle seg-
ment; width of malar space varying from three-
fifths to nine-tenths as great as maximum
diameter of a compound eye; fronto-vertex broad,
separated from face by a broadly rounded or
subacute angle, surface faintly reticulated and
lacking alveolar punctures; lateral ocelli almost
touching eye margins. Thoracic notum slightly
to moderately depressed, mesoscutum and scutel-
lum shining, smooth or very minutely and
faintly reticulated; axillae almost but not quite
meeting on meson; scutellum without a pencil
of hairs or lamelliform bristles; brachypterous or
apterous forms unknown; wings long, their
apices greatly exceeding gaster; submarginal
vein of forewing without an apical, triangular
enlargement; marginal vein as long as wide,
stigmal vein arising from marginal and as long
as marginal and postmarginal veins combined;
marginal cilia of forewing very short and dense;
legs with femora and tibiae flattened, but lateral
margins not carinate; mid tibial spur as long as
first mid tarsal segment. Propodeum extremely
short on meson, spiracles separated from anterior
propodeal margin by a space nearly equal to
diameter of a spiracle; gaster slightly wider than
thorax and varying from three-quarters to nine-
tenths as long as thorax; tips of ovipositor sheaths
hidden or slightly exserted. Male with antennal
pedicel and funicle varying from simple to more
or less ramose, club solid; head more or less protu-
berantly produced forward beyond eyes dorsally.
Members of this genus are parasites of the
mature
Hymenoptera. The hosts nest in wood (in twigs,
abandoned beetle burrows, or in rotten logs), or
in clay cells; none has been reared from ground-
larvae of nest-building aculeate
nesting Aculeata. The host larva becomes greatly
distended and filled with cells, much like lepidop-
terous larvae parasitized by Copidosoma (se
Timberlake, 1919, loc. eit., p. 220).
24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Coelopencyrtus kaalae (Ashmead), n. comb.
Adelencyrtus kaalae Ashmead, 1901, Fauna Hawai-
iensis 1, pt. 3: 323.
Nesencyrtus kaalae (Ashmead) Timberlake, 1919,
Proc. Hawaiian Ent. Soc. 4: 183, 214.—Timber-
lake, 1922, ibid. 5: 139.
Coelopencyrtus sexramosus (Timberlake),
n. comb.
Nesencyrtus sexramosus Timberlake, 1922, Proc.
Hawaiian Ent. Soc. 5: 141.
Coelopencyrtus hylaeoleter, n. sp.
Female——Length 1.0-1.25 mm. Head and
thorax dark brown to almost black, with a very
faint metallic blue luster visible under strong
light; antennae dark brown, with apex of pedicel
tan; wings hyaline, veins dark brown, forewing
with a short, faint, brown streak at base and a
small brown stain below marginal vein; legs
dark brown, with trochanters, tibial spurs, and
basal tarsal segments tan or yellow; gaster
brown, with a broad, dark brown stripe across
the middle.
Mandible, Fig. 3, with dorsal tooth blunt,
ventral two teeth acute. Head in anterior aspect
broader than long. Antennae inserted low on
frons near mouth border; scape, Fig. 2, enlarged
in the middle, its maximum width one-third as
great as its length; pedicel semiglobose, two-fifths
as long as scape; funicle segments all wider than
long, first and second segments each slightly
longer than third or fourth, fifth and sixth seg-
ments longest; club broader than any funicle
segment and almost as long as entire funicle.
Malar space long, its width three-fifths as great
as maximum diameter of compound eye. Surface
of fronto-vertex minutely reticulated, mat,
clothed with numerous microbristles; eyes bare.
Ocelli forming a right angle; lateral ocellus
very close to margin of compound eye, length of
ocellocular line one-half as great as diameter of
lateral ocellus and one-sixth as great as length of
postocellar line.
Thorax minutely reticulated dorsally, sub-
shining, and clothed with microbristles; dorsal
surface of thorax flattened, almost plane medially;
pronotum narrower than mesonotum; scutellum
and mesoscutum equal in length on meson.
Forewing greatly exceeding apex of gaster;
marginal vein thickened, Fig. 1, equal in length
to postmarginal vein and three-fourths as long
as stigmal vein; hairless streak narrow; marginal
cilia extremely short. Basal tarsal segment of
VOL. 48, No. I
mid and hind leg as long as tarsal segments 2 and
3 combined, basal fore tarsal segment slightly
shorter than segments 2 and 3.
Propodeum extremely short on meson, poste-
rior and anterior margins almost in contact;
propodeal spiracles round, separated from an-
terior propodeal margin by a space slightly longer
than diameter of a spiracle. Gaster slightly
broader and shorter than thorax; cerci located
halfway between base and apex of gaster, each
cercus bearing two long and one shorter bristles;
ovipositor exserted for a distance one-fifth to
one-fourth the length of the gaster.
Male.—Length 1.0-1.1 mm. Color, sculpture,
and pubescence as in female. Antenna with
scape one-half as wide as long, pedicel one-half
as long as scape and as long as combined first
and second funicle segments; third and fourth
funicle segments slightly shorter than first or
second, fifth and sixth slightly longer; club as
long as two apical funicle segments. Thorax as in
female. Gaster five-sevenths as long as thorax.
Aedeagus normally protruding as far as female
Ovipositor is exserted, apex slender and down
curved.
Type locality —Logan Canyon, Utah.
Types —U.S.N.M. no. 63570.
Described from 9 female and 4 male specimens,
as follows: Type @, allotype ~@, and 7 @ and
2 @& paratypes, Logan Canyon, Utah, April,
1948, reared from mature larvae of Hylaeus sp.,
G. E. Bohart; 1 @ and 1 @ paratypes, North
Logan, Utah, June 4, 1952, reared from mature
larvae of Hylaeus sp. occupying old nest of
Sceliphron sp., G. E. Bohart and M. D. Levin.
All specimens deposited in the U. 8. National
Museum collection. Additional, more or less
fragmentary, specimens which bear the same
data as above are preserved in alcohol and on
slides; these specimens are not included in the
type series.
Coelopencyrtus hylaeoleter agrees with C. orbi
Timberlake in having the funicle segments of
the female all wider than long, with the club
large; the eyes are bare in both species, and in
both hylaeoleter and orbi the ocelli form a right
angle, the head is wider than long, there is a
short, brown streak in the forewing along the
posterior margin near the base, and the tip of
the ovipositor is exserted.
C. hylaeoleter differs from orbit in that the
antennal club of the female is almost as long as
the funicle in hylaeoleter, while this is only three-
JANUARY 1958 BURKS: GENUS
fourths as long in orbi; in hylaeoleter the forewing
is hyaline basally, with a small, brown-shaded
area beneath the marginal vein, but in orbi the
forewing is stained brown over the entire basal
half, but lacks brown shading below the mar-
ginal vein; the apex of the ovipositor in hylaeoleter
is exserted for a distance as great as one-fifth to
one-fourth the length of the gaster, while in
orbt the ovipositor is exserted for a distance only
as great as one-tenth the length of the gaster.
The male of hylaeoleter is at once distinguished
from the male of orbi by its simple, unmodified
antennal pedicel; the pedicel in orbit bears a
prominent, conical projection laterally.
Coelopencyrtus hylaei, n. sp.
Female —Length 1.0-1.1 mm. Head, body, and
legs entirely black, with only the mid tibial
spurs tan or yellow. Head with faint, metallic
blue-green or dark purple luster under strong
light; mesoscutum faintly metallic blue-green,
scutellum nonmetallic. Wings hyaline, venation
black; a very faint brown streak present along
posterior margin at base of forewing; no dark
shading or staining present in basal half or below
marginal vein.
Head in anterior aspect slightly broader than
long. Mandible as in hylaeoleter. Antenna, Fig. 5,
very strongly clavate, third and fourth funicle
segments extremely short; club as long as funicle
and almost twice as wide as sixth funicle segment.
Width of malar space two-thirds as great as
maximum diameter of eye. Surface of fronto-
vertex minutely reticulated, mat; eyes bare.
Ocelli forming an angle of approximately 75°;
lateral ocellus extremely close to lateral margin
of eye, length of ocellocular line one-third as
great as diameter of lateral ocellus and one-fifth
as great as length of postocellar line.
Thorax dorsally minutely reticulated, only
very faintly shining, almost mat; microbristles
slightly more conspicuous than in hylaeoleter;
thorax nor so flat dorsally as in hylaeoleter, the
mesoscutum being more nearly arched and the
scutellum only very slightly depressed on the
meson; mesoscutum slightly longer than scutel-
lum at median line. Forewing, Fig. 4, with
marginal and stigmal veins relatively shorter
than in hylaeoleter and a row of five or six micro-
bristles in outer margin of hairless streak; legs as
in hylaeoleter.
Gaster only very slightly wider than thorax
and nine-tenths as long as it; cercias in hylaeoleter.
COELOPENCYRTUS 25
?
vA
\ N\
Yq \
\ 4
7”
eee lies a ‘<
A oe re Se S PCa ~~ -
=
— = 7! 7 Ly Lares
Le _ GE _— / ide ce on
a a a Pe FF
= eis ARE a a
i pe , a a a-
a EKG SE ETE - aN SE
a —— Vee Zits _ See
oa eee rare oe ea
_ ig Ge ise gu! Fix
Le CG GG - a enone wee
Fies. 1-5.—Coelopencyrtus hylaeoleter, n. sp.,
female, Fig. 1, stigmal area of forewing; Fig. 2, an-
tenna; Fig. 3, mandible. C. hylaez, n. sp.. female,
Fig. 4, stigmal area of forewing; Fig. 5, antenna.
Tips of ovipositor sheaths exserted for a distance
one-fourth as great as length of gaster.
Male—Length 1.0 mm. Antenna with all
funicle segments subequal in length; club as long
as apical two funicle segments; gaster three-
fourths as long as thorax; apex of aedeagus
exserted and very slightly down curved.
Type locality.—Plummers Island, Md.
Types —U.S.N.M. no. 63571.
Described from 22 9 and 1 o&@ specimens, as
follows: Type ¢, Plummers Island, Md.,
taken
dead from trap nest cell of Hylaeus sp., H-73,
26 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
August 14, 1956, K. V. Krombein; allotype @
and 21 © paratypes, progeny of the type, taken
alive from the same Hylaeus cell, August 17,
1956, K. V. Krombein. All specimens deposited
in the U. S. National Museum collection. Mr.
Krombein informed me that he first observed
the original female specimen resting on the
inner side of the septum of a Hylaeus cell in a
trap nest on July 18, at which time the host egg
apparently had not yet hatched. On July 20 the
Hylaeus larva was observed to be partly grown
and feeding; the chalcid still was resting on the
septum. On July 27 the host larva was mature,
its food had been consumed, and the chalcid
VOL. 48, No. I
had moved to the bottom of the cell. On August
14 the chalcid was dead in the cell, and the host
larva was greatly distended, its body being
completely filled with cells made by the develop-
ing chaleids, which were, by this date, darkened
pupae. On August 17, the chalcids had emerged
and were removed from the Hylaeus cell. There
were 25 @ and 1 specimens, 3 2 of which
were mutilated in opening the cell.
C. hylaei is closely related to hylaeoleter,
described above, but can most easily be distin-
euished from it by its completely black colora-
tion. The antennae, also, are different in the two
species, as is shown in Figs. 2 and 5.
See
STUDY OF FROGFISHES
There are fishes that fish with “fishing poles,”
use “worms” for bait, can swallow other fishes as
large as themselves, change color like chameleons,
and inflate themselves a few times their normal
size. These strange representatives of the class
Pisces include some of the most fantastically
hideous creatures in the world. One hardly would
people an imaginary malevolent planet with
creatures so weird in appearance.
These fishes are sparsely scattered through
most of the tropical seas. For the most part they
are bottom dwellers in relatively shallow inshore
waters. Some hide in seaweed. The color of some
species changes in accordance with the environ-
ment, but this is not universal in the family
Antennariidae, or frogfishes, described by Dr.
Leonard P. Schultz, Smithsonian Institution
curator of fishes, in a U. 8. National Museum
publication recently issued. Several hitherto un-
known species, including some of the most fan-
tastic, from the Museum’s collections were
described.
There are several genera of ‘‘fish fishermen,”
but the family Antennariidae is easily the most
fantastic and colorful. Appearance and ways of
life differ greatly from one species to another
but they all have, in general, certain characters
in common. Each has a “fish pole,” of varying
length, at the end of its snout. This is a bony
elongation of a dorsal spine. At the end of the
‘ole’ are one to three fleshy projections, which
look like marine worms and can be made to move
like worms.
The fish lies motionless on the bottom or in a
mass of seaweed. Another fish comes by and
starts nibbling at the bait. The frogfish—so-called
because of the general resemblance to frogs—
just opens its mouth. The inflow of water sweeps
the victim into the mouth. It usually happens too
quickly for the eye to follow. The mouth can be
ereatly expanded, like that of a snake, to swallow
a large victim.
The frogfish usually walks, rather than swims,
Dr. Schultz says. The pectoral fins are modified
to constitute legs of a sort. Movement is slow
and clumsy. The frogfish way of life does not call
for much agility, except with its big mouth. The
ability to change color is probably more or less
developed in all species of frogfishes, but in some
much more than in others. This camouflage
renders the creature almost completely invisible
in a changing environment. Nearly every species
can blow itself up either with air or water—
usually with water—to a few times its normal
size. This, Dr. Schultz believes, is probably a
defense mechanism to terrify possible enemies.
One of the new genera described, with the name
of Kanazawaichthys (in honor of Mr. Kanazawa
of the National Museum staff) has thick bony
plates on its head. Dr. Schultz believes that this
is a creature of the deep open sea and that the
plates serve in some way as a floating mechanism.
This family of fishes has been recognized for
two centuries or more, but considerable confusion
has existed among ichthyologists because of the
secrecy of its ways of life. There are probably
many species still unknown, says Dr. Schultz
since the creatures are likely to be turned up
mostly by accident.
ENTOMOLOGY —A new species of Meropleon Dyar from South Carolina (Lepi-
doptera: Noctuidae). EK. L. Topp, Entomology Research Division, U. 8. De-
partment of Agriculture. (Communicated by A. B. Gurney.)
Two male specimens of a new species of
Meropleon Dyar were recently discovered among
specimens submitted for identification by Frances
McAlister of Clemson Agricultural College,
Clemson, 8. C. The species is named and described
as follows:
Meropleon titan, n. sp.
Proboscis somewhat abortive, coiled, well
hidden by the labial palpi; palpi slightly up-
turned, reaching to about the middle of front,
ventral margin of first and second segments
fringed with loose hairlike scales, third segment
small, clothed with appressed scales; front
smooth, only slightly produced; eyes large,
rounded; ocelli present, small; antennae bipec-
tinate, gradually becoming simple at about apical
one-fifth, the pectinations short, the pectinations
of the inner margin longer than those of the ex-
ternal margin. Tegulae with outer margin clothed
with black hairlike scales, a median spot of black-
tipped scales at apical one-fourth. Vestiture of
thorax mostly of long scales, many black-tipped,
some tufts of long hairlike scales from above
bases of hind wings. Abdomen rubbed (other
species of the genus have a series of dorsal crests
near the base). Forewing broad, triangular, apex
slightly rounded, outer margin weakly angulate
at Cu, ; R; from near middle of cell, R3 from Ry»
anastomosing with R.,; to form areole; Rs and
R, shortly stalked; M, from lower margin of
areole; Ms, M3 and Cu, from near lower angle of
cell, M. converging toward M; basally; Cu, from
apical one-fourth of cell; upper discocellular
absent. Hind wings with Sec°+ R, adnate with
cell near base; Rs and M;, shortly stalked from
upper angle of cell; M, obsolescent, from well
above lower angle of cell; M; and Cu; connate at
lower angle of cell.
Forewing cinereous with rufous and fuscous
sealing in the basal, medial and subterminal
area; subbasal line represented by a short black
mark at costa; antemedial band indistinct except
between anal vein and inner margin; postmedial
band vague, limited basally and distally by a
series of patches of dark scales between the veins,
the median portion cinereous except between Cuy
and the anal vein where it is white; subterminal
line irregular, pale, bordered inwardly by some
rufous spots, those nearer the inner margin the
most heavily marked; terminal line of weak black
erescents; fringe of dark-tipped scales, but
narrowly white at veins; a dark, triangular spot
extending inwardly from termen in area of the
branches of the medial vein and another dark
patch on the costa shortly basad of apex; reni-
24
form moderate, vague, mostly of pale, cinereous
scales; orbicular large, oblique, outlined with
black except open toward costa, central portion
white; the area between the reniform and _ or-
bicular black; a black basal dash present, extend-
ing to antemedial band, followed distally by a
heavy, black median bar. Hind wing lightly
Fre. 1.—Type, male, Meropleon titan, n. sp.
(1.5 X natural size.)
suffused with fuscous; terminal line black; fringe
of dark-tipped scales, but paler than fringe of
forewing. Undersurface of forewing dark grey,
cell appearing darker due to a patch of dark
hairs. Hind wing below, whitish, weakly flecked
with fuscous scales; a moderate, black discal spot
present. Length of forewing, 19 mm.
Male genitalia similar to those of Meropleon
diversicolor (Morrison) but larger and aedeagus
distinct. Aedeagus with two spatulate lobes from
the aedeagal shaft and a third lobe on the vesica
(see Fig. 2). In diversicolor the aedeagus has but
one external spatulate lobe.
Fig. 2.—Lateral view of aedeagus of Merepleor
titan, n. sp. (13.5 X natural size.
Type, male, Clemson, 8. C., October 7, 1956,
Frances McAlister, in the U. 8. National Mu-
seum, Washington, D. C. Type number 63458.
One male paratype, Clemson, 8. C.,
19, 1957, Frances McAlister in the collection of
the Department of Entomology, Clemson Agri-
eultural College, Clemson, 8. C.
This species is obviously related to J.
color (Morr.) but is readily separated by
larger size, the presence of a black basal dash nn
the anal fold of the forewing, the asymmetrical!
bipectinate antennae of the male and the dis-
tinctive aedeagus of the male.
September
Vv
28 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 48, No. I
HERPETOLOGY —Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, No.
17: Southeastern herptiles with northern limits on coastal Maryland, Delmarva,
and New Jersey. CuypE F. Rrrp, Reed Herpetorium, Baltimore, Md.
(Received July 22, 1957)
While studying the flora of southeastern
United States, the author has observed that
various southern herptiles also find their
northern limits in our region. About 75
species of plants with a general distribution
southward to Florida have their northern
limit in Maryland, on Delmarva or in
southern New Jersey. Most of these species
of plants having the said distribution are
found on the Outer Coastal Plain. Their
northern limit, known at the present time,
has been annotated in a botanical paper by
the author dealing with the northern ex-
tensions of the southern coastal flora.
Most notable of the species of plants
finding their northern limit in Maryland or
on the Delmarva Peninsula are: Taxodiwm
distichum (cypress), Tillandsia wusneordes
(Spanish moss), Quercus virginiana (live
oak), Xanthoxylum clava-herculis, Bignonia
capreolata, Trilium pusillum var. virginia-
num, Berchemia scandens, Symplocos tinc-
toria, Borrichia frutescens, and Passiflora
incarinata.
There are 21 herptiles that have a similar
southern Coastal Plain distribution and have
their northern limitations in Maryland, on
Delmarva or in southern New Jersey. A
couple of the species range more northward
into southern New England and Massa-
chusetts. However, some of the southern
Coastal Plain plants also range northward
into New Jersey, Long Island, and Massa-
chusetts.
1. Rana virgatipes Cope. Atlantic Coastal
Plain from southern New Jersey to southeastern
Georgia. New Jersey (Atlantic, Type Locatiry;
Burlington, Monmouth, Essex, Cape May, Mer-
cer, Ocean); Delaware (Sussex); Maryland (Dor-
chester, Worcester, and Charles). See Reed,
Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and
Delmarva, No. 16, in Herpetologica, 1957. Map
1 (@).
2. Hyla femoralis Sonnini and Latreille. Lower
Coastal Plain from southern Maryland and south-
eastern Virginia to eastern Louisiana. Maryland
(Calvert: Battle Creek, see Fowler, Maryland
Journ. Nat. Hist. 17(1): 6-7, 1947). Map 1(X).
3. Hyla cinerea (Schneider). Coastal Plain
from Delaware and Maryland south through the
lowlands of the Atlantic and Gulf States from
Virginia to Texas; north in the Mississippi Basin
to southern Illinois. Delaware (Sussex), Maryland
(Cecil, Kent, Queen Annes, Talbot, Dorchester,
Harford, Baltimore (coastal), Somerset, W1i-
comico, Worcester, St. Marys, Charles, Calvert,
Anne Arundel, Prince Georges). See Reed, Journ.
Washington Acad. Sci. 46(10): 328-332. 1956.
Delmarva Virginia (Accomac and Northampton).
See Reed, Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 47(3):
89-91, 1957. Map 2.
4. Hyla andersoni Baird. Southern New Jersey ;
Southern Pines, N. C.; Anderson, 8. C.; coastal
Georgia. It is interesting to note that Rana
virgatipes has also been recorded from southern
New Jersey, from Southern Pines, N. C., and
from coastal Georgia. See Davis, Amer. Nat. 41
(481): 49-51, 1907.
5. Scaphiopus holbrooki holbrooki (Harlan).
Eastern United States from Massachusetts to
Florida, west to Louisiana, eastern Texas, and
Arkansas, north in the midwest to West Vir-
ginia, southern Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois.
Although this toad ranges northward from our
region in Maryland into central Pennsylvania by
way of the Frederick Valley and the coastal re-
cesses in that region, it is limited to the coastal
regions. See Reed, Herpetologica 12(4): 294-295.
1956. Maryland (Frederick, St. Marys, Charles,
Calvert, Prince Georges, Anne Arundel, Worces-
ter, Wicomico, Somerset, Dorchester, Talbot,
Caroline, Kent); Delaware (Sussex, Kent, New
Castle) and Delmarva Virginia (Accomac).
Map 3.
6. Microhyla carolinensis carolinensis (Hol-
brook). Maryland to Key West, Fla., west and
north to Illinois and Missouri, Kansas, eastern
Oklahoma, and eastern Texas. Maryland (Cal-
vert and St. Marys). See Noble and Hassler,
Copeia 1936(1): 63-64; Mansueti, Bull. Nat.
Hist. Soc. Maryland 12(3): 33-34. 1942. Map
4(@).
7. Siren lacertina Linnaeus. Maryland and
JANUARY 1958
Rana virgatipes Y eee i
(e) y Ge 6 < ’ : a
Hyla femoralis ho \ eS A
(x) Gg \ S e 6/ ian
he YG Oh
Hey } Lf
Scaphiopus
h. holbrooki
Map 5
Cemophora
coccinea (e)
Pituophis
melanoleucus
(x)
Map 7 f pee.
Lampropeltis
c. rhombo-
maculata
Virginia on the west side of Chesapeake Bay,
coastal North and South Carolina, southern
Georgia and Alabama, throughout Florida. Mary-
land and District of Columbia (Potomac Flats).
See Hay, Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 15: 121-
146. 1902. Map 4(++).
REED: HERPETOLOGY OF MARYLAND AND DELMARVA, 17 29
Map 2
Hyla cinerea
Map 4
Microhyla c.
carolinensis(e)
Siren
lacertina (+)
Abastor erythro-
grammus (x)
Map 8
Lampropeltis
doliata
temporalis
8. Abastor erythrogrammus (Latreille). Mary-
land (Charles) through the Atlantic
Coastal Plain to central Florida and Alabama.
Maryland (Charles: 4 miles South of Indian
Head, Stump Neck, between Mattawoman and
Chicomuxen Creek. H. Hassler.) See McCauley,
Lower
30 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. I
Pt
@Pa
Map 9 Map 10
ampropeltis Natrix
: ei eeuias erythrogaster
Map 11
Diadophis
Cnemidophorus
p. punctatus
sexilineatus
NJ
Ly gosoma
laterale
Map 15 : aN nt ee :
p Ne =] (Ge r - Map 16
Malaclemys a. Lee .:
centrata Vv (? heer Pseudemys
concentrica A; on floridana
(M. terrapin) \s e/ | concinna
\’ Neh ae ® a y
a < we |
The reptiles of Maryland and the District of Colum- Gulf States, west to Louisiana and Oklahoma.
bia, 1945; Copeia 1939(1): 54. Map 4(xX). Maryland (Calvert, Baltimore, Prince Georges,
9. Cemophora coccinea Blumenbach. Southern Anne Arundel), District of Columbia. See Reed,
New Jersey, southward through the Atlantic and Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and
JANUARY 1958
Delmarva, No. 8. Snakes of Maryland, etc. 1956.
Map 5(@).
10. Elaphe guttata guttata Linnaeus. Southern
New Jersey to the tip of Florida, west to north-
eastern Mexico, north in the interior to Kentucky
and Missouri and in the west to western Colorado
and Great Salt Lake. Maryland (Prince Georges,
Anne Arundel, adjacent Montgomery, St. Marys,
Talbot, Wicomico), District of Columbia and
Delaware (Sussex). See Reed, Contributions to the
herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, Nos. §
and 11. 1956. Map 6.
11. Lampropeltis calligaster rhombomaculata
Holbrook. Southern Maryland and _ Virginia,
south to eastern Tennessee and central Florida,
and westward through Alabama and Mississippi.
Maryland (Prince Georges, Anne Arundel, ad-
jacent Montgomery) and District of Columbia.
See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of
Maryland and Delmarva, No. 8, 1956. Map 7.
12. Lampropeltis doliata temporalis Cope.
Southern New Jersey, Delaware, and Maryland
through Virginia and North Carolina. Maryland
(Prince Georges, Calvert, St. Marys, Worcester),
District of Columbia and Delaware (Tyrer Lo-
CALITY). Map 8.
13. Lampropeltis getulus getulus (Linnaeus).
Southern New Jersey to northern Florida, west-
ward to southeastern Alabama. Maryland (Gar-
rett, Montgomery, Prince Georges, Charles, St.
Marys, Calvert, Anne Arundel, Howard, Balti-
more City, Baltimore, Harford, Cecil, Queen
Annes, Kent, Talbot, Dorchester, Wicomico,
Worcester, Somerset), District of Columbia,
Delaware (Sussex), and Delmarva Virginia (Ac-
comac and Northampton). See Reed, Contribu-
tions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva,
Nos. § and 11. 1956, and Contributions to the
herpetology of Virginia, No. 3, in Journ. Washing-
ton Acad. Sci. 47(8): 89-91. 1957. Map 9.
14. Natrix erythrogaster erythrogaster Forster.
Maryland southward in the Coastal Plain and
adjacent Piedmont to northern Florida. Mary-
land (St. Marys, Wicomico, and Worcester).
See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Mary-
land and Delmarva, No. § and 11. 1956. Map 10.
15. Diadophis punctatus punctatus Linnaeus.
Coastal Maryland to Florida. Maryland (Charles,
Calvert, Anne Arundel, Queen Annes, Talbot,
Dorchester, and Worcester), Delaware (Sussex),
and Delmarva Virginia (Accomac). See Reed,
Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and
Delmarva, Nos. § and 11. 1956. Map 11.
REED: HERPETOLOGY OF MARYLAND AND DELMARVA, 17 31
16. Pituophis melanoleucus melanoleucus (Dau-
din). New York (Rockland) south to South Caro-
lina and westward to eastern Tennessee. Mary-
land (Queen Annes and Worcester). The New
York locality is just north of the New Jersey
border. Map 5(X).
17. Cnemidophorus sexlineatus (Linnaeus).
Maryland to Key West, Florida, west to eastern
Texas, north in the interior to Indiana and
Illnois, and along the rivers in southern Wis-
consin and Minnesota, and through Oklahoma to
South Dakota and southeastern Wyoming. Mary-
land (Anne Arundel, Calvert, Charles, St. Marys,
Baltimore and Baltimore City) and District of
Columbia. Absent from the Delmarva Penin-
sula. See Reed, Contributions to the herpetology
of Maryland and Delmarva, No. 6. The Lizards of
Maryland, etc. 1956. Map 12.
18. Humeces laticeps (Schneider). Southern
Pennsylvania and Delaware, southward to
Florida, westward through Ohio, Indiana, Illinois
and southeastern Missouri, west to eastern
Kansas, eastern Oklahoma and eastern Texas.
Maryland (Anne Arundel, Baltimore, Calvert,
St. Marys, Charles, Montgomery, Queen Annes,
Dorchester, Frederick) and Delaware. See Reed,
Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and
Delmarva, No. 6, 1956. Map 13.
19. Lygosoma laterale (Say). Southern New
Jersey and southeastern Pennsylvania south-
ward; southern Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, and
northern Missouri; westward to eastern Kansas,
eastern and central Oklahoma, and Texas. Mary-
land (Prince Georges, Calvert, Charles, St.
Marys, Dorchester and Worcester,) District of
Columbia and Delmarva Virginia (Accomae and
Northampton). See Reed, Contributions to the
herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, Nos. 6 and
11; Contributions to the Herpetology of Virginia,
No. 8, i Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 47(3):
906, 1957. Map 14.
Note: EHumeces inexpectatus Taylor ranges as
far north as the northern shores of Northern
Neck, Virginia, which is the southern shore of
the Potomac River. The Maryland line extends
to the southern bank of the Potomac River.
Northumberland County, Va., 1 mile north of
Heathsville, near Clarks Mill, May 15, 1954,
Reed 854. See Reed, Herpetologica 12: 1386. 1956,
and Contributions to the herpetology of Virgim
No. 2, The herpetofauna of Northern Neck, Vur-
ginta, in Journ. Washington Acad. Sei. 47(1):
21-23. 1957.
32 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
20. Pseudemys floridana concinna (LeConte).
Atlantic Coastal Plain from Maryland to Ala-
bama, mostly above the Fall Line and into eastern
Tennessee. Maryland (Montgomery, Prince
Georges, Charles) and District of Columbia. See
Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland
and Delmarva, No. 7. 1956. Map 16.
21. Malaclemys centrata concentrica (Shaw).
Coastal Plain from Massachusetts to North Caro-
lina, including Delaware and Chesapeake Bays
and to Florida. Maryland (Calvert, Somerset,
Caroline, Queen Annes, Talbot, Wicomico, Dor-
chester, Kent, and Worcester), District of Colum-
bia, Delaware (Sussex and Kent) and Delmarva
Virginia (Accomac and Northampton). See Reed,
Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and
Delmarva, Nos. 7 and 11. 1956; Contributions to
the herpetology of Virginia, No. 3, mn Journ.
Washington Acad. Sci. 47(8): 89-91. 1957. Map
115),
Incidentally, there are four deep-sea turtles
from tropical and semitropical south Atlantic
waters that find their way up the Atlantic Coastal
area as far north as Maryland, Delaware, Massa-
chusetts, and Nova Scotia. Specimens of these
have been recorded from the lower Potomac
River and the Chesapeake Bay or from Delaware
Bay in our region. These turtles are usually
stragglers that come up the Gulf Stream from
time to time. However, large numbers have been
seen and at times have been caught in the Chesa-
peake Bay off Virginia and southern Maryland.
As many as five Caretta caretta have been caught
in the fish nets in a single day by a single fisher-
man. Capt. W. J. Biddlecomb of Fairport, Va..,
reports many of these and other deep-sea turtles
in the waters off Great Wicomico Light House.
The records for these turtles are recorded in
Reed, Contributions to the herpetology of Virginia,
No. 2, The herpetofauna of Northern Neck, Vir-
gina (Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 47(1): 21-28.
1957). Also, Maryland and Delmarva specimens
are annotated in The contributions to the her-
petology of Maryland and Delmarva, Nos. 7 and 11.
1956.
22. Caretta caretta caretta (Linnaeus). Atlantic
vou. 48, NO. 1
and Gulf coasts of United States from Maryland
and the Chesapeake Bay southward. Maryland
(Calvert, lower Potomac River and Chesapeake
Bay, Dorchester and Worcester), Delaware
(Sussex), and Delmarva Virginia (Accomac and
Northampton). See Reed, Contributions to the
herpetology of Virginia, No. 2, l.c., 1997.
23. Chelonia mydas mydas (Linnaeus). Tropical
and subtropical Atlantic waters, northward to
temperate zones. Maryland (Calvert). See Reed,
Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and
Delmarva, No. 7. 1956.
24. Dermochelys coriacea (L.). Atlantic and
Gulf coasts, occasional as far north as Nova
Scotia. Maryland (Calvert and Chesapeake Bay)
and Delmarva Virginia (Accomac). See Reed,
Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 47(1): 21-23. 1957,
for picture of 700-pound specimen caught off
Northern Neck, Va.
25. Lepidochelys (olivacea) kempi (Garman).
Atlantic coast north from tropical waters to
Massachusetts. Maryland (St. Marys, lower
Potomac River and Chesapeake Bay). See Reed,
Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and
Delmarva, No. 7. 1956; Contributions to the
herpetology of Virginia, Nos. 2 and 3. 1957, both
in Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 47(1) and 47(3),
respectively.
The 21 herptiles listed above represent about
25 percent of the species in the herpetofauna of
Maryland and Delmarva. Seven of these find their
northern limit in southern Maryland (the Coastal
Plain area west of Chesapeake Bay); eight of the
species, found on the Coastal Plain, find their
northern limit in coastal New Jersey; two range
into southeastern Pennsylvania along the Dela-
ware River. The accompanying maps indicate
the counties in Maryland, Delaware, the District
of Columbia, and Delmarva Virginia where the
various species have been collected. References
are given with each species where an annotated
list of specimens may be found. Contributions 5
through 11 to the Herpetology of Maryland and
Delmarva have been published by the author and
are available from the Reed Herpetorium, 10105
Harford Road, Baltimore 34, Md.
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Pnriosophical Society of Washington . ..........c0ceececcsencrsceeees CHESTER H. PaGE
Anthropological Society of Washington................0...seeeceees Frank M. Serz.er
Biological Society of Washington................. Se Gea Wes Ae ei HERBERT FRIEDMANN
Shemueal society of Washington. .....5.....00...00 cence ce eedececss CHARLES R. NAESER
Entomological Society of Washington........................... Car. F. W. MurEsEBECK
epronalGeographic Society............0....00 0 ce eeceeacteyderecce ALEXANDER WETMORE
Geolopresl Society of Washington..................ecccecceeceeeues Epwin T. McKnieut
Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... FREDERICK O. CoE
Paramaaiam@elistOrical SOCIebY «6... eo i cee ca eee hn dbo ved eeeeanncae U.S. Grant, III
Bocaures society of Washington... .......00..cc0evcccccctewcccuesocees Carrot E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters................. G. Fuippo GRAVATT
Washington Society of Engineers................00.cccceccccccceecs HERBERT G. DorsEy
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers........ ARNOLD H. Scorr
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers.... ... Howarp S. Brean
Helminthological Society of Washington.....................0... Donaup B. McMuLuen
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists....... MicHakEL J. PELCZAR, JR.
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers............. FLoyp W. Hovuaes
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers......................... Harry WELLS
D. C. Section, American Society of Civil Engineers............... Dovatas E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine........ GrorceE A. HorrLe
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. HERBERT C. VACHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research..WiLLiam T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society..................... CHARLES S. GILMAN
CONTENTS
Mrneratocy.—Progress in titanium research. MatrHew A. HUNTER. .
PALEONTOLOGY.—Some Lower Ordovician monoplacophoran mollusks
from Missouri. -Eniis L. YOCHELSON «.........<... =) ==
PaLEonToLoGy.—Hedbergella, a new name for a Cretaceous planktonic
foraminiferal genus. Paut BrONNIMANN and Nozt K. Brown, JE:
oo]
EntromMoLocy.—Venomous moths and butterflies. Howarp F. ALLARD
and Harry Ac ALLARD... 2. ers. aes... ae ee
Enromotocy.—A recharacterization of the genus Coelopencyrtus, with
descriptions of two new species (Hymenoptera: Encyrtidae).
BUDE BuRKS es ae ts i een
EnromoLogy.—A new species of Meropleon Dyar from South Carolina
(Lepidoptera: Noctuidae). E. L. Topp..............+..+++++2::
Herrprrotocy.—Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and
Delmarva, No. 17: Southeastern herptiles with northern limits on
coastal Maryland, Delmarva, and New Jersey. Crypp I’. ReED....
15
18
22
27
Notestand: NEWS. <a. coticeee wiles Se 14:26
VOLUME 48 | February 1958 NUMBER 2
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
f io at $ 3 ak
fare Se ¥\
( ry '] \\
| APR 3@1958 }}
N \ / f¥
NG i 4 7 /
Published Monthly by the
Mec uwINEG TON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuester H. Page, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BAMFORD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JourNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in finai
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JounNaL.—Per Year............-...--++++22:+55 $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10; inel——not-available*. 7. ce — —_
~ Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 - 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $393.50.
Monocrapa No. 1, ‘“The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS...............-..--+-+5-- $7 .50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete....................:---s0-. $25.00
Single volumes; unbound). 5.209006 .3 0h gas: bh eee Oe ee ee 2.00
Single mumbers 7/9 UN CR yack se ae ids ele aces tee, cet ae eet NER I ee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’”’ and
adie to the Treasurer, H. S. Raprp.ere, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
Changes of Address —Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
|
{
;
;
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 48
February 1958
INGE 2
GENERAL SCIENCE.—A critique of operations research. GrorGcr E. KIMBALL,
Arthur D. Little, Inc. (Communicated by E. W. Montroll.)
In spite of the fact that the Operations
Research Society of America has now more
than 2,000 members, and similar societies
exist in Great Britian, Italy, Japan, India,
and other countries; in spite of the fact that
operations research is now considered essen-
tial by the Army, Navy, and Air Force,
and also by a large fraction of the large
corporations in this country, so that millions
of dollars a year are being spent for it; in
spite of the fact that a dozen universities
have given it a place in their curriculum,
it must be confessed that there is still some
disagreement on the subject of what opera-
tions research is, and doubts are being ex-
pressed concerning its ultimate future.
I should like here to examine critically
just what operations research really is,
what it has accomplished, and where it seems
to be going, and to do this as objectively as
one can who has devoted 15 years to study
and research in this field.
Operations research has been defined
facetiously as that which operations research
workers do. In a sense, I should like to take
this definition seriously, for any definition
which is not consistent with this would
clearly be false. But such a definition is of
little value to anyone who is not acquainted
with the field and therefore requires recast-
ing into terms intelligible to the general
public. I have therefore tried to examine
carefully the activities in which those who
call themselves operations research workers
engage, and thus to find the actual pattern
of their work. This has not been a simple
undertaking, for these activities range from
1 The 26th Joseph Henry Lecture of the Philo-
sophical Society of Washington, delivered before
the Society on May 3, 1957.
ww)
ow
higher mathematics to philosophical dis-
cussions, from antisubmarine tactics to the
scheduling of oil refineries. The National
Research Council has assigned the Opera-
tions Research Society a seat in its Division
of Mathematics, but in the universities the
courses are most frequently given by engi-
neering departments.
Nevertheless, there is an element common
to all these activities. The clue is found in
the word operations. To understand opera-
tions research, it is first necessary to under-
stand this key word. It stems from the
military origin of operations research.
During World War II groups of scientists,
few of whom had any military background
or experience, were called up to help the
armed services put various new devices and
equipment into use. These groups found that
doing this required them to study the whole
tactical situation in which the devices were
to be employed. They found themselves
doing research on the operations of fighter
aircraft, on the operations of antisubmarine
task forces, on landing operations, and thus
the term operations research was born.
At the end of the war the term was broad-
ened to include a number of industrial
operations. For example, we find research
on the operation of warehouses, on the
operation of toll bridges and tunnels, on
railroad and airline operations, on the opera-
tion of direct mail advertising, and all called
operations research.
The difheulty at this point is the great
broadness of the term operation. Is research
on the operation of radio tubes operations
research? Is research on surgical operations?
The answer to these questions is definitely
no. But we must examine why these opera-
SONTA!
INSTITUTIAN
APR 1 6 Sap
354 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
tions are excluded. They are excluded not
because of lack of importance or lack of
interest but simply because they do not fall
into the established pattern of operations
research, because they lack certain elements
in common with the operations which do fall
into this established pattern.
The military and industrial operations we
have mentioned have this in common: they
all involve a complex system of men and
machines. Going a little further, we find that
in each case we have a set of machines con-
trolled by a group of men. Operations re-
search has studied the various ways in
which this control can be exerted and how
the outcome of the operation depends on
the control method. It has found certain
principles which govern such situations,
and is searching for more. To study such
things as the operation of a television set
would get away from this group control
and into a different area.
This brings us near to a definition of
operations research, but there remains one
more limitation. We have said that opera-
tions research is seeking general principles.
To the extent that any operation is unique,
and completely different from any other
operation, to this extent it cannot be gov-
erned by general principles. It follows that
the search for such principles must be con-
fined to those elements which are common to
a number of operations. The success of oper-
ations research depends on its ability to
discover such similar elements in apparently
dissimilar situations. How far this has been
possible is a subject to which I shall return.
For the present, may I point out that some
operations are excluded from operations
research because they are unique. For
example, the total strategy of the armed
forces of the United States at the present
moment is such a unique operation. Many
parts of the strategy are operations to which
operations research can be applied, for they
are similar to other operations, but the total
is not. Likewise, the operation of the board
of directors of, say, the United States Steel
Company has unique elements, which pre-
vent its being a suitable subject for opera-
tions research, even though there may be
many operations within the company which
are suitable for such research.
VOL. 48, NO. 2
I should thus define operations research
as the study of operations in which groups
of men control systems of machines, with
the object of discovering the principles
which govern such operations.
At this point I am faced with a paradox:
the definition of operations research to which
I have been led seems to exclude a very
large part of the work being done at the ©
present time under the title of operations
research. The work in question deals for the
most part with the sort of operations I
have described, but instead cf seeking
general principles, is concerned with solving
specific problems. Much of it consists of the
design and construction of control systems.
To exclude such work from our domain
would be very foolish. Those who consume
operations research are interested in, and
paying for, practical results in the form of | |
answers to problems and systems designs.
If these were not forthcoming, support for
operations research would be far more
difficult to obtain.
We are concerned here with the age-old
distinction between pure and applied science.
One way out would be to call the applied
side of our subject operations engineering,
and in some quarters this has actually been
done. In the future I shall use this term when
I wish to make the distinction. But we must
not lose sight of the historical fact that in
the past theory and practice have always
gone hand in hand, and a pure science with
no applications has never come to much.
On the other hand, it has been proved
time and time again that there is nothing
as practical as good theory. Would we have
the present developments in electronics
without Maxwell’s equations? Would we
have our present-day synthetic drugs and
fibers without the theory of chemical va-
lence? If this is the case, isn’t the best road
to good business management through the
study of the principles of business operations,
i.e., through operations research? In my
opinion, whether the motive is the satis-
faction of scientific curiosity or the solution
of practical problems the road is the same—
the road of research into fundamental
principles.
In carrying out such a program, we must
make a clear distinction between principles
FEBRUARY 1958
and techniques. In discussions of operations
research we hear very frequent reference
to such things as linear programming,
dynamic programming, allocation theory,
and the like. There are those who regard
these subjects as the real essence of opera-
tions research. But to me, calling these
subjects operations research is the same as
identifying physics with the differential
equations of physics. Now mathematics is
indispensable to physics, and no physicist
can get along without a good training in
mathematics, but in no sense is physics a
branch of mathematics. In a similar way,
mathematics is indispensable to operations
research, and good operations research
(and particularly operations engineering)
requires good mathematical training. Just
as the mathematical needs of the physicist
100 years ago stimulated mathematical
research into differential equations, and just
as Riemann’s researches into differential
geometry provided Einstein with the tools
he needed for general relativity, so today we
are finding the needs of operations research
stimulating research in new branches of
mathematics, and operations research
workers making use of previously unapplied
mathematical developments. This symbiosis
is of great importance to both parties, but
the distinction between mathematics, with
its right to carry any set of assumptions to
their logical conclusions, and science, with
its obligation to check its assumptions
against nature, must still be maintained.
Because many of the mathematical tech-
niques used in operations research are
methods of finding maxima and minima,
there has arisen a temptation to claim that
operations research is the study of the
best way to control an operation. If real
operations were as simple as some of the
mathematical models used to describe them,
this might be possible. But in reality there
are a number of obstacles which have pre-
vented the attainment of this goal. One is
a lack of clear understanding of what it is
that should be maximized. Superficial
eriteria like “least cost,” “greatest profit,’’
and “greatest return on investment’ are
all too easy to talk about, but in practice
almost impossible to reduce to numerical
values.
KIMBALL: CRITIQUE OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH 35
Take for example the case of inventory
control in a store. A relatively simple
analysis of a control system will determine
the direct dollar costs of carrying stock, the
amount of capital which will be required,
and the amount of delay the customers will
suffer through temporary shortages of stock
on hand. As the control system is varied,
all three of these factors will vary. What
system is ‘‘best’’ depends on some combina-
tion of these factors, but there is no agree-
ment on what combination this is. At least
at the present time, efforts to find the “‘best”’
policy lead only to frustration.
If operations research cannot find the
best solution to problems like this, what can
it do? First of all, it can describe what will
happen under any given control system,
without committing anyone as to what is
good and what is bad. This is by no means
trivial, and in some cases the mere finding
of a “feasible solution,” a control system
which will work at all, is a major victory.
In some cases, it can go a step beyond this
point: it can eliminate control systems on
the grounds that others are better, regard-
less of the uncertainties of the criterion of
success. For example, in the store inventory
case, if two systems use the same capital
and give the same customer service, the one
which has the lower direct cost is surely
better than the other. More sophisticated
reasoning of this same type frequently re-
duces the possibilities to a relatively small
set of ‘‘acceptable solutions.”
There is a further difficulty with the find-
ing of ‘“‘best”’ solutions. All too frequently
when a ‘‘best”’ solution to a problem has been
found, someone comes along and finds a
still better solution simply by pointing out
the existence of a hitherto unsuspected
variable. In my experience when a moder-
ately good solution to a problem has been
found, it is seldom worthwhile to spend much
time trying to convert this into the ‘best’
solution. The time is much better spent in
real research in trying to find those variables
which have been overlooked, for when these
are found much greater improvements
become possible than by tinkering with the
well-known parameters.
After all this discussion of what operations
research is and is not, let us now turn to
36 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
its real accomplishments, the areas in which
principles have been found and proved by
the test of experiment and observation.
Time will not permit me to go into any
detail, but I would at least like to outline
the present state of a number of topics.
Let me begin with what I like to call
“eongestion theory.” This is sometimes
known as ‘“‘waiting-line theory” or “queue-
ing theory,’ but I object to these terms
because in important cases there is no wait-
ing line. The operation under study here is
any operation in which service 1s being given
in the face of a fluctuating demand. This
includes such varied operations as those otf
telephone exchanges, barber shops, toll
gates, and hospitals. The essence of the
problem is to characterize the demand and
the service performance, and in terms of
these to determine the number of customers
lost or delayed because of the congestion
which arises. It is familiar to anyone who
has been in such a situation that delays
oecur even when the load on the system is
well below its apparent capacity. The theory
enables these delays to be calculated in a
large variety of important cases.
Closely related to congestion theory 1s
warehousing theory. This differs from con-
gestion theory in that it is possible wo) 2}
‘warehouse’ operation to carry goods in
inventory, whereas in a barber shop, for
example, it is not possible to carry a stock
of hair cuts. In the warehouse case, the ex-
istence of an inventory makes possible a
control of the situation by ordering goods
in advance. This is complicated by the fact
that a finite lead time is always required,
and frequently there are requirements that
goods be ordered in full car loads or truck
loads. As we have mentioned earlier, the
“goodness” of a control system depends on
the service provided, the capital required,
and on a number of direct costs. All these
can now be evaluated and many systems
have been successfully designed and placed
into operation.
We come next to the theory of transporta-
tion systems. Here we are concerned usually
with a fleet of ships, railroad cars, trucks,
or airplanes, and a complex demand for
transportation among a number of terminals.
What is usually called “the transportation
VOL. 48, NO. 2
problem” in linear programming is a very
crude first approximation, which neglects
the discrete nature of the transportation
units and the fluctuations in demand. While
a number of features of this theory have
been discovered, much research remains to
be done before the theory can be called
complete.
Communication theory is very closely
related to transportation theory. Thanks
to Shannon’s information theory, it is now
possible to measure ratio of flow of mforma-
tion, and the carrying capacity of informa-
tion flow channels in much the same way as
for physical goods. The theory otf communi-
cation networks is therefore reduced in
many respects to the theory of transporta-
tion in general, and as the theory of trans-
portation advances, communication theory
should advance with it.
Next we come to the theory of production
control systems. In a complex manufacturing
operation, production control involves a
number (frequently a very large number)
of operations of the warehousing type, a
set of transportation problems, and a com-
munications system, all of which must
function together without mutual inter-
ference. Typically, some 20,000 different
items, ranging from raw materials and
purchased parts to finished goods of many
sizes and colors, must all be coordinated.
In spite of all these difficulties, some of the
ereatest successes of operations research
lie in this area.
Quite a different area of research is that
of search theory. This is concerned with the
problem of finding things, varying all the
way from lost golf balls to enemy submarines
and new antibiotics. The theory was quite
highly developed during World War I for
military purposes, and is just now being
declassified for public use.
Finally, as one last example, there is the
theory of population dynamics. Taken origi-
nally from biology and psychological learn-
ing theory, this is now being used to explain
the effect of advertising on customer pop-
ulations, and the determination of the
proper distribution of advertising effort.
This field is one of the newest, and has still
a long way to go.
The areas I have just mentioned are not
FEBRUARY 1958
the exclusive property of operations research.
Just as there is no longer a sharp boundary
between physics, chemistry, and biology,
so these areas overlap the fields of economics,
industrial engineering, cybernetics, and
systems analysis. Perhaps the most difficult
distinction to make is that between opera-
tions research and business research of the
type which has been going on for many
years. Here I am not even sure that any
distinction at all should be made. Business
operations are clearly a legitimate subject
for business research. Those who have done
business research could have done operations
research at any time, and in a sense have
done just that. Yet it is a fact that operations
KIMBALL: CRITIQUE OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH 37
research has opened new approaches to
business problems. It has done this in part
because it has introduced new and more
powerful mathematical techniques, but. if
this were all, operations research would
deserve little credit. More important has
been the fact that operations research has
brought to business research the standards
and practices of the physical sciences, par-
ticularly their insistence on the careful
checking of theory against experience and
experiment. When this attitude becomes
characteristic of all business research, then
perhaps the term operations research can
be dropped. But until then the distinction
must be made.
ee
SHANIDAR SKULL
The skull of a ‘‘man before man,” who lived in
the Near East at least 45,000 years ago, was
shown Regents of the Smithsonian Institution
at their annual meeting on January 17. It was a
cast of the reconstructed skull of a so-called
Neanderthaler found last spring in Shanidar
Cave in northern Iraq by Dr. Ralph S. Solecki,
Smithsonian associate curator of Old World
archeology. Dr. T. Dale Stewart, Smithsonian
curator of physical anthropology, recently re-
turned from Baghdad where he spent three
months reassembling the skull from fragments.
The skull is that of a man about 40 years old.
The net result of Dr. Stewart’s work was repro-
duction of the restored skull of a quite unique
humanlike creature who lived during the Mous-
terian cultural period—roughly 45,000 years ago.
This was late for Neanderthalers, but about the
time the present human race became established.
Dr. Stewart went to Baghdad and reconstructed
the skull, a job requiring extraordinary know]-
edge, skill, and precision, at the request of Dr.
Nagi al Asil, former foreign minister and now
Director General of Antiquities of the Iraq
Government. The original skull is being retained
in Baghdad. The cast—the only one outside of
Iraq—is a gift to the Smithsonian Institution
from the Iraq Museum.
The individual, Dr. Stewart says, undoubtedly
was a Neanderthaler. This was a race of human-
hike creatures whose scant remains have been
found scattered through Europe, western Asia,
and the Near East. They apparently preceded the
true human race, Homo sapiens, as it is known
today, throughout this region by a few thousand
years. They were about the size of present-day
man and had essentially all our human features.
In general these features were cruder. They were
creatures mainly of the last great ice age, pre-
sumably cave dwellers, with a flaked-stone cul-
ture. They had massive jaws, large faces, pro-
truding brows, and large teeth. Their relation to
present-day man is debatable, but it is quite
generally doubted whether they were directly
ancestral although they lived in the same area
where the oldest truly human remains have been
found. The first Neanderthal remains were found
in Germany almost a century ago. Since then
widely scattered specimens have been found.
They now are divided into three groups—early
Neanderthaler, a form from the last interglacial
period in eastern Europe; classic Neanderthaler,
the central European cave dweller of the last ice
age; and the near eastern Neanderthaler, a late
form represented by the present skeleton.
The skull reconstructed by Dr. Stewart, how-
ever, shows some quite primitive features con-
sidering the date assigned to it. In some respects
the face recalls the so-called Rhodesian man of
South Africa, sometimes included among the
Neanderthalers. The lower jaw also recalls that
of the famous Heidelberg man of central Europe,
a much more primitive creature of about 100,000
vears ago. Whether there ever was any actual
connection between Heidelberger and Neander-
thaler has been much debated. Dr. Stewart found
the parts of the Iraq skull in quite small frag-
ments, which had to be fitted together—a super
jigsaw puzzle job made more difficult by the
fact that the fellow’s skull had been bashed in in
several places, presumably in fights with clubs.
He apparently had survived all these injuries.
Dr. Stewart’s work in Baghdad was a coopera-
tive project of the Iraq Government. the Ameri-
can Philosophical Society and the Smithsonian
Institution.
38 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 2
PHYSIOLOGY —Observations on the oxygen consumption of young Australorbis
glabratus. ALINA PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWIcz! and THropor von Branp, Na-
tional Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases.’
(Received October 9, 1957)
The oxygen consumption of developing
eges of Australorbis glabratus has been
studied from the time of oviposition till the
hatching period (Perlowagora-Szumlewicz
and von Brand, 1957), and several investi-
gations on the respiration of sexually mature
specimens of this species have been pub-
lished (von Brand et al., 1948, 1953;
Edwards et al., 1951). However, no detailed
investigation has been made of young
specimens; that is, for the interval between
hatching and reaching sexual maturity. The
present study was designed to close this gap
in our knowledge.
MATERIAL AND METHODS
Australorbis glabratus (Venezuelan stock, lab-
oratory maintained since 1947) hatched from the
eggs used in our previous study (Perlowagora-
S7umlewiez and von Brand, 1957) were isolated
during the first 24 hours after hatching into jars
containing dechlorinated water and lettuce
leaves. Thus a supply of snails of rigorously con-
trolled age was available. The very young snails
(freshly hatched to 1 week old) were fairly sensi-
tive to handling, especially during the drying
procedure preliminary to weighing. These snails
were used therefore only for a single oxygen and
weight determination and were then discarded.
All other snails, beginning 18 to 21 days after
hatching, withstood the necessary manipulations
remarkably well and therefore were retested at
weekly intervals. The groups established for ini-
tial testing were kept separately in beakers be-
tween tests and were fed abundantly with lettuce.
Powdered calcium carbonate was added at weekly
intervals. With increasing size of the specimens,
subdivision into smaller groups became necessary.
The oxygen consumption was studied by
means of the standard Warburg technique at a
1 Permanent address: Instituto de Endemias
Rurais do DNER, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. The
present work was done at the National Institutes
of Health during a tenure of a WHO fellowship.
Requests for reprints should be addressed to the
Laboratory of Tropical Diseases, National Insti-
tutes of Health, Bethesda, Md.
2 Laboratory of Tropical Diseases.
temperature of 28°C. Flasks of 5-ml capacity
with 1 ml dechlorinated water as medium and
flasks of 16 ml capacity with 3 ml water were
used, depending on the size of the snails. The
experimental period lasted 2 to 3 hours; readings
were taken every half hour. The number of
specimens per flask varied, depending upon their
size. Up to 150 of the smallest and only 1 or 2 of
the largest were used. The former were counted
under a dissecting microscope prior to the intro-
duction into the Warburg flask which was done
with the help of a very fine spatula and a brush.
At the end of the experiment the snails were
washed out of the flask onto filter paper. They
were shifted once or twice to fresh filter paper
and allowed to dry for 20 to 30 minutes in air
before being weighed on a microbalance to the
nearest 0.001 mg. The older snails were dried
according to Newton and von Brand (1955) and
weighed to the nearest 0.1 mg.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Biological observations.—Because little is
known about postembryonic growth of Austra-
lorbis glabratus, we are describing some of our
relevant observations.
Upon plotting the weight of snails as function
of age on a double logarithmic scale, two bisect-
ing lines resulted, indicating that the growth
characteristics of snails younger than one week
are different from those of the older ones (Fig. 1).
The data for the latter showed a relatively good
fit to a straight line. Thus the total weight, in
this range, shows the same growth relationship
as the one previously established for the shell in
a different, although overlapping size range
(Nolan and von Brand, 1954). Whether a straight
line, with a different slope, can justifiably be
drawn for the youngest snails is dubious because
of lack of sufficient points. At any rate, the
clearly different growth relationship of the
youngest snail groups has a biological foundation.
The youngest snails did not feed on lettuce, ig-
noring the lettuce leaves present in each Jar.
They can not have subsisted solely on reserves
carried over from embryonic life, because they
~
FEBRUARY 1958 PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ AND von BRAND: AUSTRALORBIS GLABRATUS 39
did increase in weight. It can be presumed that
they fed on microorganisms developing in the
jars. These groups of snails will hereinafter be
designated as prejuveniles.
The prejuvenile groups are followed by the
juvenile groups which are defined as beginning
with snails older than 8 days, and ending with
specimens reaching sexual maturity. The last
groups are comprised of mature snails, that is,
snails laying eggs. These two groups fed avidly
on lettuce.
It must be emphasized that regularities in
growth pattern as shown in Fig. 1 can only be
demonstrated when the averages of fairly large
numbers are used. While the size of the pre-
juvenile groups was fairly uniform, pronounced
variations occurred among the older groups
(Table 1). These variations in growth as related
to age were definitely not due to an insufficient
food supply; food was present always in surplus.
The reasons underlying the variations are obscure
and will require special analysis, since several
possibilities exist; e.g., unequal food utilization
(Kleiber, 1947), deficiencies in endocrine func-
tions, and probably others. Such an investigation
would be desirable because size is probably one
of the factors determining the onset of sexual
maturity in the sense that in our experiments
snails weighing less than 50 mg never laid eggs.
We determined accurately the age and weight
reached by 104 specimens at first oviposition.
Their average weight was 109 mg with 58.0 and
208.8 as extremes; their average age varied be-
tween 47 and 61 days, 1e., the age varied in
much narrower limits than the weight. Because
of this observation we consider the age factor as
more important than did Pereira and Deslandes
(1954) who stated that the period of first ovi-
position was not related to age but to the growth
of snail. It should be emphasized, however, that
the age figures given above apply only to our set
of conditions; under other conditions the minimal
age for first oviposition may be lower. Pereira
and Deslandes (1954) noted oviposition by 35-
day-old Brazilian Australorbis glabratus, Maia
Penido et al. (1951) and Perlowagora-Szumlewicz
(unpublished) by 32-diy-old laboratory-reared
Brazilian australorbids. In such cases the mini-
mal weight for oviposition, 50 mg, is reached
earler than in our experiment. On the other hand
we had in our material 27 specimens that were
unusually slow growers, weighing only between
TABLE 1.—OxYGEN CONSUMPTION OF AUSTRALORBIS GLABRATUS OF VARIOUS AGES.*
i 5 ; : Mm3 Oxygen consumed in 1 hr.
Group Nemo! Numbehetiual® | Ase of snails | Weight of single z
ments SSVLME Per single snail Per mg
Pre-juve- |
niles
1 4 113-150 0-1 0.07 + 0.005 0.11 + 0.010 | 1.65 + 0.11
(O2065=7 008) | O08 = (0212) | 42s 91-86)
2 3) lS 4-5 0.11 + 0.007 Ool2 S70 000 |) Tiare. 0-02
(COMO = OPN A (Oecd OBO a eae Ua
3 vi 46-100 7-8 0.24 + 0.022 0.15 + 0.013 0.56 + 0.05
ORLGs= 10532) | (One = 0820) |7O.327— 0.68)
Juveniles
il 10 10-18 18-21 3.17 + 0.70 1.45 + 0.38 0.45 + 0.029
(1.21 — 8.10) | (0.64 — 4.31) | (0.30 -— 0.58)
y 13 9-18 26-28 10°62 We} 4 43 3 0.38 0.45 + 0.023
(5.6 = ~22.7) 2.60 -— 6.75) | (0.80 -— 0.58)
3 7 9-10 33-39 20.5 + 2.4 9.66 + 0.89 0.48 + 0.040
(1330 = 33023). 1) (Gc89) = sis.¢3))/ 4(0.42 0.61
4 13 4-11 39-40 43.4 + 4.4 12.51 + 1.39 0.29 + 0.012
(19.0 — 72.3) | (5.24 -— 21.91)| (0.20 0.34
Mature snails
1 60 1-7 47-61 108.7 + 4.6 29.3 + 1.40 0.27 + 0.005
(58.0 — 208.8)) (15.7 -— 62.0) | (0.20 0.35
* In this and the following tables the mean values and, in parentheses, the extremes are presented.
The figure following the + sign is the standard error of the mean.
40 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 2
100.0
500
10.0
3.00
1.00
WEIGHT IN mg.
0.30
0.06 @=
3.0 10.0 20.0 40.0 600
AGE IN DAYS
Fic. 1.— Relation between age and weight in growing Australorbis glabratus.
50.0
Y=0.80
re)
rS)
oO
Oo
(e)
100
mm? OXYGEN/1ISNAIL /!1 HOUR
2
oO
Kio =
007 O10 030 Ke) 3.0 100 500 1000 1500
WEIGHT IN mg.
Fic. 2.—Relation between weight and rate of oxygen consumption in growing A ustralorbis glabratus.
FEBRUARY 1958 PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ AND von BRAN
24.4 and 44.1 mg when 60 days old. They never
laid eggs during the period of observation. It is a
matter of conjecture whether they eventually
would have reached sexual maturity, or whether
they were permanently dwarfed, infantile speci-
mens, as a result, perhaps, of faulty endocrine
functions.
Observations of respiratory activity —As ex-
plained above, both the weight and the age of
the snails used in the respiration experiments
were known; it was therefore possible to correlate
the rate of oxygen consumption to both these
factors.
As Tables | and 2 show, a progressive lowering
of the respiratory rates is evident with increasing
weight and increasing age, if the rates are calcu-
lated on the basis of unit weight. The decrease is
greatest in the pre-juvenile groups. Fundamen-
tally, the same trend exists in the other groups,
although the decline may be very small if limited
size or age differences are considered. The ques-
tion then arises whether weight or age is pri-
marily responsible for this decline. It is difficult
to get incontrovertible evidence on this point,
because both factors change in general in the
same direction. Our somewhat indirect evidence
is as follows: The juvenile groups and the mature
group shown in Table 1 had been established
purely on the age criterion and therefore each
contained both small and large specimens. Hach
of these groups was now divided into two sub-
groups (Table 3) one containing the smaller and
another one containing the larger snails. In all
five groups thus subdivided the respiratory rate
of the smaller specimens was higher than that of
the larger ones, indicative of a definite trend.
Similarly, five groups of the juvenile and mature
snails established on the weight criterion (Table
2) contained older and younger specimens. When
their average rates were calculated separately, it
was found that in two cases the rate of the older
specimens was highest, in two other cases that of
the younger ones, and in 1 case the rates were
equal; that is, a purely random distribution was
evident. We are therefore inclined to ascribe to
size a more important role in determining meta-
bolic rate than to age, at least in the age range
of Australorbis studied by us. It is, of course,
entirely possible that really senile specimens may
behave differently. It should be recalled in this
connection that the level of oxidative phosphor-
ylation was reduced in the albumen gland of
senile Lymnaea (Weinbach, 1956). Planorbid
D: AUSTRALORBIS GLABRATUS 41
TaBLE 2.—OxYGEN CONSUMPTION OF
AUSTRALORBIS GLABRATUS OF
VARIOUS SIZES
2 Number!
Sel oii Mm oxygen consumed
© ¢) snails Weight of in 1 hour
Group | "= in indi-| single snail
=e oa i Per single |
Z| ment “snail, | Per mg
| :
g 1 | 4 113-150 | 0.07 + 0.005 0.11 + 0.010) 1.65 + 0.11
= | | (0.05-0.08) | (0.08-0.12) | (1.42-1.86)
2 2 | 3| 115 | 0.11 + 0.007| 0.12 + 0.007, 1.12 + 0.02
= | (0.10-0.12) | (0.11-0.13) | (1.09-1.16)
& 3 | 7 | 46-100 | 0.24 + 0.022 0.15 + 0.013, 0.56 + 0.05
(0. 16-0.32) | (0.11-0.20) | (0.32-0.68)
1 | 7 | 12-15 | 1.97 + 0.25 | 0.95 + 0.089: 0.49 + 0.022
(1.21-8.03) | (0.64-1.27) | (0.41-0.57)
& 2 | 8/| 10-18 | 6.28 + 0.50 | 3.04 + 0.35 | 0.47 + 0.027
ie (4.05-8.10) | (1.50-4.31) | (0.36-0.58)
z= 3 | 9} 9-15 | 13.0 + 0.88! 5.76 + 0.46 | 0.45 + 0.028
= (8.9-16.8) | (3.91-8.00) | (0.36-0.61)
4/10) 5-11 | 25.7 +1.5 | 9.09 + 0.87 | 0.36 + 0.036
| (19.0-33.5) | (5.24-13.73) | (0.21-0.56)
We) | 4} POG 2s Ze | TEL Se (ey = Oe
a (38. 2-60.3) (8.9-16.7) | (0.20-0.34)
‘@ 2 | 32 la 85.1 + 1.9 | 22.9 + 0.61 | 0.27 + 0.007
2 | ae 3-105.3) | (15.7-29.7) | (.20-0.35)
B 3/19) 23 /121.741.9 | 32.4 + 1.07 | 0.26 + 0.009
g ‘(107.0-137.7) (21.5-38.8) | (0.20-0.34)
4 | 11) 1-3 1158.2 +: 6.5 | 41.3 + 3.14 | 0.24 + 0.014
| (140.3-208.8) | (29.0-62.0) | (.20-0.35)
! i |
*This group contains juveniles approaching maturity and
mature specimens.
TABLE 3.—ANALYSIS OF RELATIVE IMPORTANCE
oF AGE AND SIZE IN DETERMINING THE RE-
SPIRATORY RATE OF AUSTRALORBIS GLABRATUS.*
A. Influence of size (subdivision of age groups
shown in Table 1)
}
Weight of single snail Oxygen consumption
of heavier snails in
per cent of that of
lighter ones
Subdivided group
Subdi- Subdi-
| vision a | vision b
Juvenile | 1.8 De 80
Juvenile2 | 7.5 15e3 78
Juvenile 3 14.9 24.8 Q4
Juvenile 4 | 28.7 55.9 Q7
Mature 1 iP SIG 132.4 9§
B. Influence of age (subdivision of weight groups
shown in Table 2)
Age of snails Oxygen consumption
of older snails in
S ivided group ae :
ubdivided grouy percent of that of
Subdi-
Subdi- : ae ar
vision a vision b younger ones
Juvenile 2 20 27 121
Juvenile 3 27 34 119
Juvenile 4 34 10 64
Mature | 40 54 100
Mature 2 40 dS Q3
* For details see text.
4? JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
snails are reported to reach 2 to 3, occasionally
up to 5, years of age® (Korschelt, 1922). The 60
days studied by us represent such a small frac-
tion of their life span that a direct age influence
can hardly be expected to be demonstrable by
the Warburg technique. It is true, however, that
we have one observation seemingly in contradic-
tion with the above statement. As mentioned
previously, a minority of our snails grew very
slowly and did not reach sexual maturity during
the time of observation. When the respiratory
rate of these older, small specimens was compared
with that of younger specimens of approximately
equal size, the latter had a distinctly higher rate
(Table 4). However, the small, but older, snails
must probably be regarded as pathologically re-
tarded specimens. It seems more likely that
whatever factor (e.g., endocrine or other) was
responsible for their retardation rather than age
proper, was responsible for the lowered rate. It
certainly would seem desirable to exclude such _
snails from studies concerned with the normal
metabolism. Since they look externally normal,
they can be weeded out only when the age is
accurately known. In experiments where the
ereatest obtainable uniformity of material is
desirable, both the age and size factors should be
considered.
TABLE 4.—OxYGEN CONSUMPTION OF AUSTRA-
LORBIS GLABRATUS OF APPROXIMATELY HQUuAL
Sizz, BUT DIFFERENT AGE
i Mm? Oxygen consumed in
Num otal) Age eigneat |e bm
experi-|ber of suels nee a
ments |snails | days er snail
single Per mg
8 77 | 97-34 21.3 £1.9| 9.0 + 0.95 | 0.48 + 0.033
(15.3-30.3) (6.0-13.7) (0.30-0.56)
5 35 | 40-41) 26.8 -- 2.8 | 7.7 + 1.02 | 0.28 2 0-025
(19.0-33.5) (5.2-10.5) (0.21-0.33)
4 91 | 61-63} 26.0 +3.8| 6.7 + 0.78 | 0.26 + 0.012
(17. 4-32.8) (4.67.8) (0.24-0.29)
It has been shown previously (von Brand et al.,
1948) that a fairly good agreement existed in
Australorbis between respiratory rate and relative
surface, an agreement much better than between
weight and rate. The materials used then and
now are not completely comparable, because then
the age factor was not considered and it is con-
ceivable that some retarded snails had been
3'The exact life span of A. glabratus is un-
known. According to unpublished observations
by Perlowagora-Szumlewicz only a small percent-
age survives in captivity longer than 24 months.
VOL. 48, NO. 2
TABLE 5.—CoMPARISON OF 1948 Data (VON
BRAND ET AL.) AND PRESENT Data ON RE-
SPIRATORY RATE OF AUSTRALORBIS GLABRATUS.
(The 1948 data are in italics.)
Ratios of—
Weight of Mm? Oxygen | Rela-
individual 1 snail tive Belen
snail, mg 1 hour surface Weight |Oxygen| tive
surface
130 5.8 8.98 1.0 10 1.0
14 9) IES 11a 1530 10):
JAS AT 9.09 8.7 Za) 16 1.6
51.6 14.48 1163.9) 4.0 2.4 74.8
66 16.8 Gao aI BS) FO)
Son ll 22.85 19.4 6.5 a9 oD
WAS 32.90 24.6 9.3 5AG 4.5
153 30.3 esas || Jhb. 7/ 5.2 B22
158.2 41.3 2OE3) 2a (Cel 83)
included; furthermore the experiments of . 1948
were done at 30°C, the present ones at 28°C. It
is nevertheless of some interest to compare briefly
both series in regard to the overlapping size
eroups. Table 5 shows an excellent agreement
between both series which is rather surprising in
view of the above differences and the fact that
the strain was then newly established in the
laboratory but by now is an old laboratory
strain. It seems evident that in the size range
discussed the oxygen consumption follows more
closely, though not completely, the relative sur-
face (W?/8) rather than weight.
When the smaller size groups were included
into the above calculation, the deviations from
the expected values became more marked. This
suggested that the relationship W*/? was not
entirely satisfactory to describe the weight /
oxygen relations. We therefore analyzed the
entire size range used in the present study by the
allometrie procedure recommended by von
Bertalanffy (1951). The respiratory figures are
plotted against weight on a double logarithmic
scale, resulting usually in a straight line. Calcu-
lation of the tangent of the angle formed with
the abscissa yields the power to which the body
weight must be raised to describe the relationship
between body weight and respiration. Upon ap-
plying this procedure to our data, it became evl-
dent that the pre-juvenile groups behaved
differently than the remaining groups (Fig. 2).
This is not surprising since in practically all
animals studied so far, the relationship between
size and oxygen consumption differs in the small-
est specimens from that prevailing after the
organisms have undergone a certain growth and
FEBRUARY 1958 PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ AND von BRAND : AUSTRALORBIS GLABRATUS 43
possibly again after they reach near maximum
size (Zeuthen, 1953). It is evident from Fig. 2
that an identical relationship exists for the juve-
nile and adult groups; it does not follow weight
(y = 1.0) nor surface as calculated by the for-
mula W2/3 (y = 0.666), but is actually intermedi-
ate. The exponent found by us (y = 0.80) is
quite similar to that found by von Bertalanffy
@9a))ston Planorbis (y = 0.75). It must be
recognized that one factor exists which introduces
a certain amount of uncertainty into the above
calculations; the possibility that the metabolically
more or less inert shell varies significantly in
weight in snails of different size. Indications to
this effect have been reported for the larger size
range of Australorbis (Nolan and von Brand,
1954), but the relation between shell weight and
total weight for the smaller size groups has not
been established for our strain.‘ It is clear that
any error introduced by this factor is reflected in
all calculations but it becomes smaller as the
exponent to which the weight is raised becomes
smaller.
SUMMARY
1. The growth characteristics of Awustralorbis
differ during the first week after hatching from.
those of older specimens.
2. Both size and age seem responsible for
onset of sexual maturity.
3. If the whole size range from freshly ree
to sexually mature snails is considered, the
respiratory rate decreases materially with in-
creasing size or age if the rate is referred to unit
weight, although the decline may be quite small
within limited size or age ranges.
4. Size has probably a greater importance than
age in determining metabolic rate, at least in the
age range studied.
5. While in larger snails a fairly good correla-
4 Perlowagora-Szumlewicz (unpublished) con-
siders the age factor as more important in deter-
mining the relative shell weight than the size
mitactor.
== NOAA, WL ©.2
tion exists between relative surface and respira-
tory rate, inclusion of the smaller juveniles leads
to discrepancies, indicating that the formula
W?/5 is not entirely adequate. The exponent 0.80
fits the size range studied much better.
REFERENCES
VON Berrauanrry, L. Theoretische Biologie 2,
ed. 2. Bern, 1951.
VON Branp, T., and Meuuman, B. Relations between
pre-and post-anaerobic oxygen consumption in
some fresh water snails. Biol. Bull. 104:301. 1953.
and Mann, E. R. Observa-
tions on the respiration of Australorbis glabra-
_ tus and some other aquatic snails. Biol. Bull.
~ 95: 155. 1948.
Epwarps, G. A.; Vie inane Neto.) Be and
DosBIN, J. E. Influence of Teton and
other Factors upon the respiration of the snail,
Australorbis glabratus. Publ. Avulsas Inst.
Aggeu Magalhaes 1: 9. 1951.
KuErBER, M. Body size and metabolic rate. Physiol.
Rev. 27: 511. 1947.
KorscHEut, E. Lebensdauer,
ed 2. Jena, 1922.
Mara Prnipo, M.; Bustorr Pinto, D.; and
DESLANDES, N. Observacoes sébre as posturas e
tempo de evolucdo de duas especies de caramujos
encontrados no Vale do Rio Doce. Rey. do
SESP 4: 407. 1951.
Newton, W. L.; and von Branp, T. Comparative
phystological studies on two geographical strains
of Australorbis glabratus. Exp. Parasitol. 4:
244. 1955.
Nouan, M. O., and von Branp, T. The weight re-
lations between shell and soft tissues during
the growth of some fresh-water snails. Journ.
Washington Acad. Sei. 44: 251. 1954.
PEREIRA, O., and DrsLANpEs, N. Resultados de
uma tentativa para determinar a idade do
Australorbis glabratus (Say, 1818). Rev. do
SESP 6: 43838. 1954.
PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ, A.,
T. Studies on the oxygen
Australorbis glabratus eggs.
ington Acad. Sci. 47: 11. 1957.
WeinsBacH, EH. C. The influence of pentachloro-
phenol on oxidative and glycolytic phosphoryla-
tion in snail tissue. Arch. Biochem. Biophys.
64: 129. 1956.
ZEUTHEN, E. Oxygen uptake as related to body size
in organisms. Quart. Rev. Biol. 28: 1. 1953.
Altern und Tod,
and von BRAND,
consumption of
Journ. -Wash-
To treat your facts with imagination ts one thing; to imagine your facts is
quite another.—JOHN BuRROUGHS.
44 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 2
PALEONTOLOGY —A pelycosaur with subsphenoidal teeth from the lower Permian
of Oklahoma. Peter Paut Vaucun, U.S. National Museum.
(Received October 2, 1957)
In his Osteology of the reptiles (1956, p.
458), Romer comments on the rarity of
teeth on the parasphenoid in the class
Reptilia: “While teeth may flourish in
reptiles on palatal elements proper, para-
sphenoid teeth are almost never found in
this class—a situation correlated, presuma-
bly, with the tendency toward reduction of
that bone and particularly of its rostral
region. As far as I am aware, teeth on this
element have been noted in only a very few
instances: on the cultriform process of the
millerettid genera, on a platelike develop-
ment of the bone in the problematical
Lanthanosuchus and the primitive turtle
Triassochelys, and on the subsphenoidal
area in a pelycosaur as yet undescribed.”
W. Langston (personal communication,
1957) is currently studying the “‘pelycosaur
as yet undescribed”’; he informs me that it
is a much larger form, from a different lo-
cality and an earlier horizon than the one
described in this paper. Peabody (1952, p. 8)
has described teeth on the parasphenoid of
Petrolacosaurus.
In view of this rarity of parasphenoidal
teeth in reptiles, a portion, consisting of the
combined basisphenoid and parasphenoid,
of the braincase of a small pelycosaur from
the lower Permian fissure deposits hear
Fort Sill, Oklahoma is of interest in that it
has subsphenoidal teeth. This specimen is
of further interest in that it gives us a some-
what clearer picture of the pelycosaurian
portion of the fauna of these deposits than
we have had; various remains of pelycosaurs
are present in the materials collected for the
National Museum from the ‘Fort Sull
locality,” and Gregory, Peabody, and Price
(1956, p. 3) mention small ophiacodont
pelycosaurs and medium sized pelycosaurs
of uncertain family as part of the fauna.
The portion preserved of this pelycosaur
indicates that it is a reptile new to science.
Mycterosaurus, from the Clyde formation
1 Published with the permission of the Secretary
of the Smithsonian Institution.
in Texas, is the only other known pelycosaur
of comparable size, and its only known
horizon is close to that of the form described
here. But Romer (1956, p. 681) feels that
Mycterosaurus is an edaphosaur, and the
parasphenoids of edaphosaurs, as far as I
can make out from figures given by Romer
and Price (1940, pls. 18, 19) are quite unlike
that described here. Mycterosaurus is, how-
ever, a primitive form and may prove to be
similar when its braincase is adequately
known.
Class REpriLia
Subclass SYNAPSIDA
Order PELYCOSAURIA
Basicranodon, n. gen.
Diagnosis.—About the size of Mycterosaurus.
Conical, recurved teeth on the parasphenoid in
a concavity between the basipterygoid processes,
and on the ventral edge of the parasphenoidal
rostrum.
Genotype.—Basicranodon fortsillensis, 0. sp.
Basicranodon fortsillensis, n. sp.
Diagnosis.—The same as for the genus (the
only species).
Type.-—U.S.N.M. no. 21859, the greater part
of the combined basisphenoid and parasphenoid,
lacking the anterior part of the rostrum. Col-
lected in November 1955 by D. H. Dunkle and
hRearce:
Horizon and locality—From a fissure deposit
in Arbuckle limestone at the Dolese Brothers
limestone quarry, north of Fort Suill, in see. 31,
T. 4 N., R. 11 W., Comanche County, Okla.
This is the locality called the “Fort Sill Locality”
by Gregory, Peabody, and Price (1956, p. 3).
These fissure deposits are of early Permian age,
possibly (loc. cit.) of the same horizon as the
Arroyo formation, lower Clear Fork of Texas.
Description and discussion.—The _ basipara-
sphenoid, U.S.N.M. no. 21859, fits the description
of that compound element in other pelycosaurs
(Romer and Price, 1940, pp. 74-76) in almost
every way—except for the presence of teeth on
no. 21859. The basisphenoid and its ventral
FEBRUARY 1958 VAUGHN: A PELYCOSAUR WITH SUBSPHENOIDAL TEETH Ad
cover, the parasphenoid, are so joined to each
other that they are indistinguishable everywhere
except in cross-section through the rostrum of
the compound element and where the para-
sphenoid passes posteriorly beyond the posterior
border of the basisphenoid to form, presumably,
a ventral sheath for the anterior portion of the
basioccipital.
In dorsal or ventral view, the specimen, as
preserved, lacking the anterior part of the ros-
trum, has roughly the shape of an_isoceles
triangle, with the equilateral sides formed largely
by the basal tubera. The distance along the
base of the triangle, between the lateralmost
edges of the two tubera, is 15.5 mm. The distance
from the posterior end of either tuber to the
posterior end of the rostrum is 17 mm. The
distance between the lateralmost tips of the
basipterygoid processes is 11.5 mm. In side view,
it can be seen that the rostrum meets the body
of the basiparasphenoid at a dorsal angle of
about 165°.
Comparison of a figure (Romer and Price,
1940, pl. 8) showing the basiparasphenoid in
place in Dimetrodon limbatus with a figure (ibid.,
pl. 21) showing a side view of the skull of Myctero-
saurus longiceps convinces me that the basi-
parasphenoid of Mycterosaurus must have been
of very nearly the same size as that of Bast-
cranodon. Romer and Price (p. 62) point out that:
“Except for the anterior portion of the para-
sphenoid and the presphenoid, the ossified
portions of the [braincase]... show little varia-
tion in size, despite the great variations found in
pelycosaurs in dimensions of the skull as a whole.”’
Nevertheless, the basiparasphenoid of Bast-
Fia.
1.—Basicranodon fortsillensis, n.
ven.
W e . . 5 . .
basisphenoid and parasphenoid, lacking the anterior part of the rostrum.
cranodon is much smaller than that in, say,
Ophvacodon or Dimetrodon (basiparasphenoid of
each about twice as large as that in Basicranodon,
based on plates 3 and 13 of Romer and Price),
and we may assume that the whole animal
Basicranodon was of about the same size as the
whole animal M ycterosaurus.
In dorsal view, the sella turcica can be seen
as a depression in the basisphenoid beginning on
a plane through the middle of the basipterygoid
processes and extending posteriorly to a plane
about midway in the length of the specimen. A
low ridge lies along the midline in the posterior
part of the sella. Near the anterior end of the
sella turcica are a pair of carotid foramina appres-
sed to one another. A groove leads forward from
each foramen to the base of the rostrum. This
disposition of the dorsal openings of the carotid
foramina differs from the situation seen in at
least some genera of pelycosaurs (Romer and
Price, p. 76) in that the latter show “two unpaired
openings .. . one in the floor of the sella, another
more anteriorly placed.” The lateral walls of
the sella are rounded, finished ridges, low ante-
riorly but rising posteriorly on either side to end
at the unfinished posterior rim of the sella. The
posterior rim of the sella, with a deep, rounded
median notch, shows, as do the corresponding
rims in other pelycosaurs (Romer and Price,
p. 79), “a broad unfinished surface facing postero-
dorsally and obviously articulating, through an
intervening area of cartilage, with the corre-
sponding antero-ventral face of the prodtic
ossification in the dorsum sellae.”” This unfinished
surface is thicker on either side of the notch than
it is in the midline. The bilateral symmetry of
Combined
lateral: C,
(U.S.N.M. no.
A, dorsal; B,
ventral views. D, cross section through rostrum, dorsoventral orientation as in B. Approximately X 2.
and = sp. 21859
46 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the posterior rim of the sella in the specimen and
the appearance of its surface preclude the possi-
bility of any dorsalward extension of the basi-
sphenoid having been broken away.
The low posterior wall of the sella can hardly
be called a dorsum sellae—there are no entire
foramina for the abducens nerves—and the
broad, unfinished posterodorsal surface indicates
that, as is characteristic of pelycosaurs, the
dorsum sellae was formed by the prodtic. It is
this feature that most clearly shows the pely-
cosaurian nature of Basicranodon. According to
Romer and Price (p. 68), ‘““The anterior extension
[of the proédtic] into the dorsum sellae [in pely-
cosaurs] is unusual. This region is formed in all
living reptiles by the basisphenoid; it is formed
in the same way in such an advanced cotylosaur
as Captorhinus....” In 1956 (p. 179), Romer
states that ‘‘a notable peculiarity [of pelycosaurs]
is that, in forms where sutures can be determined,
the prominent dorsum sellae is formed by the
prodtics rather than the basisphenoid.”” Romer
(1956, p. 671) also gives: “Prodétic extends for-
ward and medially to form extensive dorsum
sellae...” as a character for the whole subclass
Synapsida, ‘but the horizon ot U.S.N.M. no.
21859, from deposits probably equivalent in age
to the lower Clear Fork in Texas, rules out
assignation to any group of synapsids other than
the Pelycosauria.
The basisphenoid seems to terminate poste-
riorly with the unfinished posterodorsal surface.
The parasphenoid, however, extends posteriorly
beyond this as a thin plate with many longi-
tudinal grooves on its dorsal surface, which
probably, as in other pelycosaurs, served for
articulation with the ventral surface of the
basioccipital. This thin plate passes on either side
into the basal tubera. The bony parts of the
tubera, as in other pelycosaurs, are formed
entirely by the parasphenoid, although, as Romer
and Price suggest (p. 75), the dorsal cavity in
each tuber may have been filled with cartilage
from the prootic.
In ventral view, the parasphenoid is seen to
be broadly concave between the tubera, which
diverge from one another at an angle of about
40°. As in other pelycosaurs, each tuber termi-
nates rugosely posteriorly. Anteriorly, just
behind the plane of the basipterygoid processes,
the two tubera are confluent via a low connecting
shelf, which forms an anterior boundary for the
VOL. 48, NO. 2
(posterior) concavity of the parasphenoid.
Passing posteriorly from this shelf, a low, broadly
convex ridge, placed slightly to the left, partially
subdivides the concavity.
Anterior to the posterior concavity of the
parasphenoid, posterior to the rostrum, and
between the basipterygoid processes lies a con-
cave area whose ceiling is about two millimeters
ventral to the ceiling of the posterior concavity.
On the steep side walls of this concave area are
teeth, directed ventrally and medially. These
teeth are simple, conical, and slightly recurved.
They are about 1-1.5 mm in length. The teeth
have been lost from the left wall of the specimen,
but there are scars on the wall to attest to their
former presence there. Four teeth can be seen on
the right wall. This being a unique specimen,
some of the matrix has been left on the wall to
serve as a buttress for these fragile teeth, and it
is not possible to say exactly how many teeth were
present in life. But, from a comparison of the
teeth of the right wall and the scars on the left
wall, it seems safe to say that each wall must
have held at least five teeth of the greater than |
mm size, with perhaps smaller teeth around
their bases. Scars indicate that small teeth were
present on the ceiling of what may be called
the ‘“dentigerous concavity,’ and that an irregu-
lar row of small teeth led anteriorly from these
to the teeth of the rostrum.
Each basipterygoid process presents two
articular faces, an anterior one and a dorsolateral
one. These two faces are confluent in a long,
broad ridge, which faces anteriorly, laterally and
dorsally; the axis of this ridge is mainly a dorso-
ventral one, but with a forward inclination.
There is a deep ventral trough between each
basipterygoid process and the ipsolateral wall of
the dentigerous concavity. The posterior half of
this trough must have carried the internal carotid
artery and the palatine branch of the facial
nerve. Midway in the length of the trough, at
its vertex, may be seen the ventral opening of
the canal for the carotid. Anterior to this, the
trough was probably occupied by the palatine
artery and the continuation of the nerve; the
further course of these structures may be indi-
cated by a longitudinal groove along the lateral
surface of the dorsal part of the rostrum on either
side. The presence of the dentigerous concavity
between the basipterygoid processes, and the
consequent effect on other parts of the osteology
FEBRUARY 1958 VAUGHN: A PELYCOSAUR WITH SUBSPHENOIDAL TEETH 47
in this area, including the mode of entrance of
the internal carotid artery, are points of differ-
ence from other described pelycosaurs. In other
yelycosaurs there is (Romer and Price, p. 75)
between the basipterygoid processes “a narrow
valley. Grooves converge forward and downward
into this valley from the sides of the bone,
presumably indicating the course of the palatine
nerve and internal carotid .. . All well-preserved
specimens ...show a pair of foramina [for the
internal carotid arteries] entering the bone from
below between the basipterygoid processes.’
Only the posterior three millimeters of the
rostrum are preserved. The ventral surface of
the rostrum in this region is about 1.5 mm wide.
This surface bears four large teeth, blunter than
those farther back, and about one-half as long;
and one smaller tooth. The two anteriormost
teeth seem to be almost paired. The large tooth
behind these is on the left side with a tooth scar
alongside it. The succeeding tooth is on the right
with a tooth scar to its left. The small tooth is
on the left just behind the anteriormost pair.
An irregular, but apparently single-file, row of
tooth scars connects the rostral row of teeth
with the teeth on the ceiling of the dentigerous
concavity.
The cross-sectional view of the rostrum
afforded by the breaking away of the anterior
part clearly shows the basisphenoid in this
region in the shape of a V clasped in and ventrally
covered by the arms of the Y-shaped rostral
portion of the parasphenoid. The stem of the Y
is widened ventrally to form the dentigerous
portion of the rostrum. The groove of the V,
which must have held the sphenethmoid, termi-
nates posteriorly about 1.5 mm anterior to the
dorsal openings of the carotid foramina.
There are other pelycosaurian elements in the
National Museum collection from the Fort Sill
locality, notably an ilium with a build like that
of a sphenacodontid, from a pelycosaur about
the size of Mycterosauwrus—and, therefore, about
the size of Basicranodon—but assignation to
Baswcranodon seems unwarranted.
The determination of the subordinal position
of Basicranodon is difficult. Romer (1956, p.
675) gives: “‘Fenestrae ovales more widely sepa-
rated than in other suborders, as are the basi-
cranial tubera,”’ as part of his diagnosis of the
Ophiacodontia. The tubera are widely separated
in Basicranodon. Inspection of the figure of
Ophiacodon uniformis (pl. 3) given by Romer and
Price indicates some similarity in that Ophiacodon
has another concavity, roughly comparable to the
dentigerous concavity in Basicranodon, anterior
to a deeper parasphenoidal concavity; these two
concavities are separated, as in Basicranodon, by
ay distimet = step:
ophiacodont.
Acknowledgment.—The drawings illustrating
this paper were made by Lawrence B. Isham.
Basicranodon may be an
REFERENCES
Grecory, J. T., PraBopy, F. E., anp Prick,
L. I. Revision of the Gymnarthridae, Ameri-
can Permian microsaurs. Bull. Peabody Mus.
Nat. Hist., Yale Univ., 10: 1-77. 1956.
Preasopy, F. E. Petrolacosaurus kansensis Lane,
a Pennsylvanian reptile from Kansas. Univ.
Kansas Paleontol. Contr., Vertebrata, 1: 1-41.
1952.
Romer, A. 8. Osteology of the reptiles: 772 pp.
Chicago, 1956.
Romer, A. S., and Price, L. I. Review of the
Pelycosauria. Geol. Soc. Amer. Spec. Pap. No.
28: 5388 pp. 1940.
It is no shame for aman to learn that which he knoweth not, whatever be his
age.—ISOCRATES.
48 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF
SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 2
ZOOLOGY —Sarsiella, tricostata a new ostracod from San Francisco Bay (Myodo-
copa: Cypridinidae). MrrepitH L. Jonss, University of California, Berkeley.’
(Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.)
(Received August 23, 1957)
In the course of sampling the benthic
fauna off Point Richmond, San Francisco
Bay, Calif. (Jones, 1954), a series of three
types of ostracods were encountered. These
animals, which provide the basis for the
following description, were collected at
depths of 2 to 30 feet below mean lower low
water and were most common at depths of
less than 12 feet. At first, because of the
press of the program at hand, and owing to
the scanty knowledge of Pacific coast
members of this group, they were referred
towas) Ostracods, “A, “a7 andas © 22. Sul.
sequent investigation indicated that all
three were of the genus Sarszella Norman,
1869.
At the time of Muller’s work (1912)
some 19 species of Sarszella were recognized,
and since then only one additional species
has been described GS. misakiensis Kajayama
1912). Of the known species, only two (S.
americana Cushman, 1906, and S. zostericola
Cushman, 1906) possess shells bearing
three ridges that converge near the shell
center, a characteristic that 1s constant in
the specimens from Point Richmond.
However, although the gross outline of
Ostracod ‘‘A’”’ was almost identical to that
of S. americana, the shell ribs of Ostracod
‘“A”’ were oriented differently, and the dorsal
margin of the shell (irregularly notched in
S. americana) was smooth. On the other
hand, Ostracods = 87 and) :@7 “bore: 2
superficial resemblance to the female and
male of S. zostericola, respectively.
As will be seen later, there are other
differences that help differentiate between
Cushman’s two species of Sarszella and the
present form and that justify the erection
of a new species, Sarszella tricostata; to
include Ostracod ‘‘A,” the mature female,
Ostracod “C,” the mature male, and
Ostracod “B,”’ juvenile forms of undeter-
minable sex. The specific name is based
on the obvious ribbing of the shell surface.
1 Present address, U. S. Naval Mine Defense
Laboratory, Panama City, Fla.
Suborder Myropocopa
Family CyPRIDINIDAE
Genus Sarsiella Norman, 1869
Sarsiella tricostata, n. sp.
Figs. 1, A-P; 2
Ostracod ‘‘A’’ (female) Jones, 1954.
Ostracod ‘‘C’’ (male) Jones, 1954.
Ostracod ‘‘B”’ (juvenile) Jones, 1954.
Since three morphologically distinct forms
were encountered, they will be described sepa-
rately.
MATURE FEMALE (Fig. 1, A-E)
The shell of the mature female (Fig. 1 A) is
subovate, with the posteroventral margin drawn
into a broad, bluntly pointed process. The ventral
margin is entire, and fine setae are inserted along
the margin from the anterodorsal area continu-
ously to and around the posterior process. The
main surface of the shell is slightly raised from
the marginal area, except near the posteroventral
process. A secondary margin is thus formed from
which some setae originate in the ventral region.
Fine hairs are scattered over the main surface of
the shell, which is divided into three fields by
three ridges extending from or near the secondary
margin to a point of junction, slightly anterior
and ventral to the midpoint of the shell. The
areas delimited by the ridges vary in size, the
largest being dorsal, the smallest anteroventral,
and the medium posteroventral. A fourth field
in the posterior area lies in the transverse
plane and extends from the margin to an in-
dentation of the raised surface of the shell. There
is a light calcification rendering the shell trans-
luscent, although occasionally it may be quite
transparent. The length of the shell is 1.2 mm,
its height 1.0 mm.
The last (fifth) joint of the antennules (Fig. 1
B) bears five to seven heavy, annulated setae,
and the fourth joint bears one or two annulated
setae. The third joint bears three setae, two of
which are annulated, at the posterior distal angle,
and two more nonannulated setae on the anterior
margin, one proximal, and one distal. In addition,
FEBRUARY 1958
a fine seta may be present on the posterior margin
of the third joint.
The natatory (primary) branch of the antenna
is composed of 10 joints, the base of which is
shown in Fig. 1 C(cf. Fig. 1 N). The first may bear
a single fine seta on the anterior margin, the next
eight joints bear a single heavy, annulated seta
on each, and the terminal joint bears a pair of
heavy annulated setae. The secondary branch of
the antenna is a rudimentary protuberance which
bears a single distal spine and a pair of heavier
proximal spines.
The mandible (Fig. 1 D) usually bears short
spines at the anterior distal angle of the second,
third, and fourth joints, and four or five spines
on the posterior margin of the second joint. In
addition, the last three joints bear the large spines
characteristic of the genus.
The caudal lamina (Fig. 1 E) has five heavy
spines in each plate, decreasing in size dorsally.
The shortest spine bears only fine hairs, but the
other four all bear short spines proximally, which
grade into fine hairs, distally. In addition, there
are fringes of fine hairs on the posterior margins
of the laminae.
MALE (Fig. 1, F-K)
The shell of the male of Sarsiella tricostata
(Fig. 1 F) is strikingly similar to that of the male
of S. zostericola. The dorsal margin is broadly
rounded. The ventral margin is nearly straight
and gives way to the antennal sinus anteriorly,
while the posterior margin is truncated, rounds
gently into the dorsal margin, and, ventrally,
forms nearly a right angle. As in the case of the
female, the main surface of the shell is raised
from the level of the margin and is divided into
three fields by ridges. The fourth field is essen-
tially lacking. The surface of the shell is strewn
with fine hairs, and fine marginal setae extend
from the anterior area, along the ventral margin,
to the posterior area. The length of the shell is
1.0 mm, its height 0.7 mm.
The third joint of the antennules (Fig. 1 G)
possesses a cluster of long filamentous setae with
an accompanying heavy annulated seta. On the
anterior margin there are two setae, as in the
female. The fourth joint bears two setae, and the
fifth bears six heavily annulated setae.
The primary branch of the antenna (Fig. 1 H)
is similar to that of the female, but the secondary
branch is quite different. It is composed of three
joints; the first bears two spines, the second, three
JONES: SARSIELLA TRICOSTATA 49
heavy spines, and the third is recurved onto the
three spines of the second. In addition, the tip
of the terminal joint appears to be equipped with
a ridged area which may function, along with
the spines of the second joint, as a part of a
clasping apparatus.
The second joint of the mandible (Fig. 1 I)
bears three main annulated spines. In addition
there may be two to four smaller annulated spines
at the base of the most proximal of the main
spines. On the lateral distal margin there are
three fine annulated setae, one short and two
long. The third, fourth, and fifth joints bear large
clawlike setae and may also have a small spine
at the distal lateral angle. At the base of the large
claw of the fifth joint there may be a second small
spine.
The caudal lamina (Fig. 1 J) is similar to that
of the female except that the fringe of setae on
the posterior margin is replaced by a few short
bristles.
The copulatory organ (Fig. 1 K) is similar to
that of the male of S. zostericola in that each half
is composed of a large blunt hook and a smaller
one with a pair of spines distal and another pair
proximal to the smaller hook. In S. tricostata,
however, there are no spines near the base of the
organ.
JUVENILES (Fig. 1, L-P)
As stated above, the shell of juvenile S.
tricostata (Fig. 1 L) is quite similar to the outline
of the female of S. zostericola. It is similar to the
shells of adult S. tricostata; the fourth area of the
shell surface is obvious, as in the adult female,
and the centrally oriented ribs delimit the other
three fields. Marginal hairs extend from the
anterodorsal margin, ventrally, to the posterior
dorsal area. A posteroventral process similar
to that of the adult female is also present.
The antennules (Fig. 1 M) are also similar to
those of the adult female, and differ only in
having five to seven terminal annulated setae
and one large annulated seta and several small
ones on the posterior margin.
The structure of the
branch (Fig. 1 N) is quite variable in the juvenile
forms of S. tricostata. Indeed it is possible to
trace a line of development of this appendage
(Fig. 2). The series illustrated was arranged
according to two criteria. First, it was felt that
the length of the first joint of the primary anten-
nal branch was indicative of relative age. Second,
}
secondary antennal
() JOUR A a < +
N
Ar
N
N
8
?
.
fe Sy w
Se
Sa
SP
Fi
e
Pal
—(Fo
r
ex
plan
ation, s
, see
re)
pposi
site
pa
ge)
Frespruary 1958
SS
JONES: SARSIELLA TRICOSTATA 5
-Enlarged basal segment
of antenna
Fig. 2.—Sarsiella tricostata n. sp.: A schematic representation of the possible development of the sec-
ond antennal branch, prepared from camera lucida drawings. 2 D shows the condition in the adult fe-
male, and 2 K and 2 L that in adult males. The remaining figures are those of juveniles.
it was assumed that once a spine pattern had
been established, it would probably not be dis-
rupted. The only nonjuvenile forms shown in
Fig. 2 are “D” (adult female) and ‘““K” and “L”’
(adult males). It would seem that, during the
development of the secondary antennal branch
in female S. tricostata, there is an early fusion of
two joints to form the rudimentary branch with
a single distal spine and two proximal spines.
In the male there is an early fusion and, in later
molts, the redevelopment of the second and the
appearance of a third joint. No claim is made
that this series is complete, and it is admitted
that the appearance and disappearance of certain
Fie. 1.—Sarsiella tricostata, n. sp.: A-E, adult female; F-K, adult male; L-P, juvenile. A, lateral
view of left shell of female; B, medial view of right antennule; C, medial view of left antenna; D, me-
dial view of right mandible; E, lateral view of right caudal lamina; F, lateral view of left shell of male;
G, medial view of right antennule; H, medial view of left antenna; I, medial view of right mandible;
J, lateral view of right caudal lamina; K, lateral view of left half of copulatory organ; L, lateral view
of left shell of juvenile; M, medial view of right antennule; N, medial view of left antenna; O, medial
view of right mandible; P, lateral view of right caudal lamina. (Scale 1 at the top of the plate applies
to figures of the shells, 1 A, 1 F, and 1 L; scale 3 applies to the figure of the male copulatory organ, 1 K;
and scale 2 applies to al) of the remaining figures.)
iy,
spines may be due to difficulties in observation.
However, it is felt that the general trend of de-
velopment can be made out in this figure.
The mandibles of the juvenile form (Fig. | O)
are similar to those of the adult female, but with
fewer spines on the posterior margin (3-5) and
no small spines at the distal anterior angles.
The spines of the caudal lamina (Fig. 1 P) are
also similar to those of the female adult, but the
two smallest spines are devoid of either short
spines or fine hairs.
Since S. tricostata most closely resembles
S. zostericola a table comparing the two species
is presented opposite.
Distribution of type material—The adult
female of Sarstella tricostata is designated as the
holotype, and the male adult is designated as an
allotype. The holotype (U.S.N.M. no. 100903)
the allotype (U.S.N.M. no. 100904), and para-
types (15 females, 4 males, and 15 juveniles,
US.N.M. no. 100905) have been deposited with
the U. S. National Museum. In addition, para-
types have also been deposited with the Museum
of Paleontology, University of California, Berke-
ley, and the British Museum, London.
The author is indebted to Dr. Cadet Hand,
Department of Zoology, University of California,
for his kind advice and criticism, and to Mrs.
Emily Reid, illustrator for the Department of
Zoology, University of California, Berkeley, for
the figures illustrating this description.
LITERATURE CITED
Cusuman, JosepH A. Marine Ostracoda of Vine-
yard Sound and adjacent waters. Proc. Boston
Soc. Nat. Hist. 32: 359-386, 132 figs. 1906.
Jones, Merepitu L. The Richmond shoreline
survey. Report of the California Department
of Fish and Game, Project No. 54-2-3: 1-84,
5 figs. 1954.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 2
1
S. zostericola
S. tricostata
Antennules:
Number of setae on fifth
joint
Number of setae on fourth
joint
Number of setae on poste-
rior distal angle of third
joint
Antennae:
Setae on rudimentary sec-
ondary branch
Mandible:
Number of spines on poste-
rior margin, second joint
5*
oF
2”
1 distal
1 proximal
7%
6 (5-7)**
1-2
3
1 distal
2 proxime!
4-5
* Number is based on text figure, not on the text itself.
** Figures within parentheses represent ranges, figures out-
side represent mean or the most common number.
of
S. zostericola
S. tricostata
Antennules:
Number of setae on fourth
joint
Antennae:
Number of joints in second-
ary branch
Mandibles:
Number of spines on poste-
rior margin, second joint
Number of setae on anterior
margin, second joint
Copulatory organs:
Number of setae on upper
end
3
2 long
2 short
2
5 (5-7)
2 long
1 short
0
KasayaMa, BE. Misaki san kaimushirut ni tsutte.
(On the Ostracoda of Misaki.) Dobuts. Z.
Tokyo 24: 488-492, 11 pls. 1912.
Misr, G. W. Ostracoda. In “‘Das Tierreich”’ 31:
1-434, 92 figs. Berlin, 1912.
Nature never says one thing and science another.—JUVENAL.
FEBRUARY 1958 REISH: NEW SPECIES OF COSSURA 53
ZOOLOGY .—Description of a new species of Cossura (Annelida: Polychaeta) from
the Mississippi Delta.1 Donaup J. Retsu, University of Southern California.
(Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.)
(Received December 4, 1957)
While identifying polychaetous annelids
from the Mississippi Delta, I discovered a
new species of the cirratulid genus Cossura
Webster and Benedict. The material was
The genus Cossura, known for only three
previous species, has attracted considerable
interest in recent years. This is largely the
result of increased emphasis upon quantita-
A B | 2 3 4 5 Sf 8
COSSURA LONGOCIRRATA WEBSTER & BENEDICT
Ce, ZEEE
7
fo
a a-
pig eee
Bi
S
S
Bees aoe 6 cin nee To
COSSURA LONGOCIRRATA W. & B. WESENBERG-LUND, 1950
A B | 2 Ss 4 Sf Snr 8
COSSURA CANDIDA HARTMAN
le
CEEEEGEL
A | 2 3 64 5 G6 .a20i0
COSSURA PYGODACTYLATA JONES
A | 2 >, 4 5 CiinGe \nGuteo
COSSURA DELTA N.SP.
Fig. 1.—Diagrammatic representation of the anterior regions of the known species of Cossura. The
number of asetigerous segments posterior to the prostomium is indicated by the letters A and B. The
setigerous segment number is indicated by the numerals. The single letter S within a segment indicates
that the setae of the notopodium and neuropodium are continuous. Two letter S’s indicate separation
of the setae of these two lobes.
collected by Robert H. Parker, with a size 1 tive studies coupled with refinement of
Hayward orange-peel bucket, of the Scripps
Institution of Oceanography. The results
of the quantitative survey, including a list
of the polychaetes collected, have been
published (Parker, 1956).
1 Contribution no. 210 from the Allan Hancock
Foundation, University of Southern California.
handling techniques once the samples have
been taken. Cossura longocirrata was de-
scribed by Webster and Benedict (1887
for specimens collected at Eastport, Maine.
‘This species was subsequently reported from
Denmark (Ehason, 1920; Thulin, 1921
North Atlantic (Wesenberg-Lund, 1950),
54 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
and British Columbia (Berkeley and Berke-
ley, 1956). Cossura candida was recently
described by Hartman (1955b) from south-
ern California. Included under this species
are the reports from San Pedro Basin
(Hartman, 1955a, as Cossura sp.), Los
Angeles—Long Beach Harbors (Anon., 1952,
as Cossura longicirrata [sic]; Reish, 1955,
as Cossura sp.) and Alamitos Bay (Reish
and Winter, 1954, as Cossura longicirrata
[sic]). More recently Jones (1956) described
Cossura pygodactylata from San Francisco
Bay.
Family CrRRATULIDAE
Cossura Webster and Benedict,
Cossura delta, n. sp.
Genus 1887
Many individuals, all incomplete posteriorly,
come from the Pass a Loutre region of the
Mississippi River Delta, Gulf of Mexico (Parker,
1956). The holotype measures 66 mm in length
and 0.5 mm in width. A total of 25 setigerous
segments are present. The ten paratypes have
from 22 to 34 setigerous segments and measure
from 5 to 10 mm in length.
Anterior end—The prostomium is conical in
shape, has two nuchal organs, but lacks eyes.
The proboscis is everted in some of the specimens;
the base bears from 15 to 20 digitate lobes. The
peristomium lacks setae. The first setigerous
segment follows the peristomium. Cossura delta,
as the other species in the genus, lacks parapodia;
the setae originate directly from the lateral body
wall. The first setigerous segment is biramous
with the setae forming a continuous lateral
series (Fig. 1). Beginning with the second setig-
erous segment, the setae of the notopodial
region and the neuropodial region are distinctly
separated (Fig. 1). The single long, cylindrical
tentacle originates from the middorsum of the
third setigerous segment. It measures 8 mm in
the holotype, but it was undoubtably broken
during the process of collecting.
Setae-—There are two kinds of setae in
Cossura delta. One type is a simple capillary which
is armed with spines along its outer edge (Fig. 2,
A). They are found in both the notopodium and
the neuropodium. They number 7 to 9 per lobe
in the notopodium (Fig. 2, A) and are directed
posteriorly. The capillaries are more slender in
the neuropodium (Fig. 2, B). These setae, which
number 4 to 8 per lobe, are directed posteriorly.
VOL. 48, NO. 2
B C
56
Fic. 2.—A, Capillary seta from the notopodium
of segment 10; B, capillary seta from the neuro-
podium of segment 10; C, limbate seta from the
neuropodium of segment 10; D, limbate seta from
the neuropodium of segment 15.
The second kind of setae is simple curved
limbate ones (Fig. 2, C) which are limited to the
anterior neuropodial segments. They begin at
the first setigerous segment, reach their maximum
development at segments 7 to 12, and gradually
diminish in size from segments 18 to 25 (Fig. 2, C
and D). Fine spines are present along the outer
margin of these setae. Generally four limbate
setae are present in each lobe. These setae are
directed slightly forward.
Postertor end.—It is unknown in Cossura delta
since all specimens were incomplete posteriorly.
The posterior end of the other three species are
similar. The setae are as in the anterior segments,
and the pygidium bears three long anal cirri. In
addition, C. pygodactylata is characterized by
possessing 6 to 10 digitate lobes on either side
of the anus.
Discussion.—Cossura delta differs from the
other known species of the genus in possessing
curved limbate setae in the anterior neuropodia
(Fig. 2, C and D), and the separation of the
notopodial and neurcpodial setae at the second
FEBRUARY 1958
setigerous segment (Fig. 1). This species comes
nearest to C. longocirrata as reported by Wesen-
berg-Lund (1950) and Berkeley and Berkeley
(1956). These two species are characterized by
having one setigerous segment posterior to the
prostomium and the tentacle originating from the
dorsum of the third setigerous segment (some-
times second in C. longocirrata as stated by
Wesenberg-Lund, 1950) (Fig. 1). The anterior
ends of the four species of the genus are diagram-
matically represented in Fig. 1. Since some differ-
- ences exist between the reports of C. longocirrata
by Webster and Benedict (1887) and that by
Wesenberg-Lund (1950) and Berkeley and Berke-
ley (1956), diagrams are included for each.
Type matertial—The holotype (U.S.N.M.
no. 28706) and 5 paratypes (U.S.N.M. no 28707)
have been deposited in the U. S. National
Museum. Five paratypes have been placed in the
polychaete collections of the Allan Hancock
Foundation. University of Southern California.
Type locality—Station number 328 (Parker,
1956), off Pass A’Loutre region of the Mississippi
River Delta. It was collected in shallow depths
in clayey sediments.
LITERATURE CITED
ANON. Los Angeles—Long Beach Harbor pollution
survey. Los Angeles Regional Water Pollu-
tion Control Board No. 4, Los Angeles, Calif..,
43 pp. 1952.
BERKELEY, E., and BerKeLny, C. Notes on poly-
chaeta from the east coast of Vancouver Island
and from adjacent waters, with a description
REISH: NEW SPECIES OF COSSURA
Or
Or
of a new species of Aricidea. Journ. Fish. Res.
Bd. Canada 13: 541-546. 1956.
EviaAson, ANDERS. Biologisch-faunistische Unter-
suchungen aus dem Oresund. Polychaeta. Lunds
Univ. Arsskr., N. F. Avd. 2,16 (6) : 1-103. 1920.
HARTMAN, OLGA. Quantitative survey of the benthos
of San Pedro Basin, southern California. Pre-
liminary Results. Allan Hancock Pacific
Exped. 19(1): 1-185. 1955a.
. Endemism in the North Pacific Ocean, with
emphasis on the distribution of marine annelids,
and description of new or little known species.
In “Essays in the Natural Sciences in Honor
of Captain Allan Hancock,” pp. 39-60. Uni-
versity of Southern California Press, 1955b.
Jones, Merepitu L. Cossura pygodactylata, a
new annelid from San Francisco Bay (Poly-
chaeta: Cuirratulidae). Journ. Washington
Acad. Sei. 46: 127-130. 1956.
PARKER, Ropert H. Macro-invertebrate assem-
blages as indicators of sedimentary environ-
ments in east Mississippi Delta region. Bull.
Amer. Assoc. Petrol. Geol. 40: 295-376. 1956.
Reis, Donaup J. The relation of polychaetous
annelids to harbor pollution. Public Health
Rep. 70: 1168-1174. 1955.
——— and WintTER, Howarp A. The ecology of
Alamitos Bay, California, with special reference
to pollution. California Fish and Game 40:
105-121. 1954.
Tuuuin, Gustav. Biologische-faunistische Unter-
suchungen aus dem Oresund. Uber Cossura
longocirrata Webster and Benedict und tiber
die Rohren von Disoma multisetosum Oersted.
Lunds Univ. Arsskr., n. Fr. Avd. 2, 17(10):
EE Pal
Wesster, Harrison E., and Benepict, JAMES E.
The Annelida Chaetopoda from Eastport, Maine.
Rep. U. S. Comm. Fish. for 1885: 707-755.
1887.
WESENBERG-LUND, Eusre. Polychaeta.
Ingolf-Expedition 4(14): 1-92. 1950.
Danish
I envy no man that knows more than myself but pity them that know
less.—S1r THOMAS BROWNE.
56 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, No. 2
ZOOLOGY .—A survey of inequivalve pelecypods. Davin Nicou, U. 8. National
Museum.
(Received November 22, 1957)
In their brief paper on discordant pelecy-
pods Newell and Merchant (1939, p. 176)
make the following statement: ‘‘Evidently
discordaney is not prevalent in modern
forms, for there is scarcely any mention of
the phenomenon in the literature that we
have examined.’ These authors limit the
meaning of discordancy to a difference in
height and length measurements of the two
valves, or, in their term, the ‘‘diameter”’ of
the valves. Although they are correct in
implying that little has been written on the
subject of discordant valves in modern
pelecypods, except in conjunction with
general morphologic descriptions of pelecy-
pod taxa, they err in inferring that dis-
cordancy is an uncommon phenomenon
among living representatives of this class of
mollusks.
On page 177, Newell and Merchant make
the following statement: ‘‘However, there
are many modern forms with markedly
inequivalve convexity in which the valve
margins are perfectly accordant.”’ This
certainly is not the case. Most examples of
marked inequality of the valve convexities
also show some discordancy. Moreover, in
some cucullaeids and corbulids, for ex-
ample, some discordancy is present ac-
companied by little difference in the con-
vexity of the two valves. Actually, inequal
valves of pelecypods may vary as to con-
vesity as well as diameter, and these two
variations are sometimes accompanied by a
discrepancy in the ornamentation on the
two valves of a specimen.
This paper will deal with inequivalve
pelecypods in the broader sense because these
variations are commonly interrelated mor-
phologically. I have listed in tabular form
suborders, superfamilies, families, and gen-
era of inequivalve pelecypods, most of which
are also discordant. The list is not to be
considered exhaustive, and only a few
fossil groups are mentioned. However, from
the list alone, it should be quite clear that
discordant pelecypods are far from rare.
Many families and genera of normally
equivalve pelecypods are, on rare occasions,
represented by individuals which, through
some freak of growth, whether inspired by
environment or by some genetic peculiarity
or both, have developed inequal valves.
These odd specimens will be ignored for the
present discussion. Some of the more unusual
occurrences of Inequivalve elec Cte are
covered by Lamy (1930).
Even in families and genera whose
representatives are considered normally
equivalve, the two valves usually do not
coincide perfectly with each other. A case in
point is seen in the Astartidae (Nicol, 1955,
p. 155) where in the lunular area the margin
of the right valve slightly overlaps the left,
whereas in the escutcheonal area the left
valve slightly overlaps the right. Cotton and
Godfrey (1938, p. 169) point out the same
phenomenon in the genus Cuna (Crassatel-
lidae). The right valves of some donacids
slightly overlap the left valves along the
dorsal margin. More examples of this mor-
phologie characteristic could be included.
This is apparently a supplementary locking
device to keep the valves from twisting,
and for our present discussion this phe-
nomenon, with but one possible exception,
will not be included in the inequivalve
pelecypods.
In this discussion of inequivalve pelecy-
pods I shall begin with the most primitive
taxa and conclude with the most specialized
ones.
Pelecypods having protobranch ctenidia
are structurally the most primitive living
members of the class. It is interesting to note
that none of them is included in the list of
inequivalve forms. Could this mean that the
first pelecypods (late Cambrian or early
Ordovician) all were equivalve? It may be
that the inequivalve characteristic did not
appear with the most ancient pelecypods
but was a secondary morphologic feature
which manifested itself a short time later.
Although the majority of Ordovician
pelecypods are equivalve, there are a few
genera, most of them having small numbers
FEBRUARY 1958
of species, which are inequivalve. One such
genus is Aristerella. It is found in Middle
Ordovician strata and is the oldest in-
equivalve pelecypod I have seen. The exact
systematic position of the genus is in doubt;
it has been placed among the mytilaceans by
most paleontologists and in the pteriaceans
by others. Ulrich (1897, p. 524), the original
deseriber, and subsequent workers have
reported Arzsterella as having the right valve
larger than the left. This genus has a some-
what pteroid shape, and, if the obliquity of
the shell is prosocline, the right valve is the
more convex on most, but not all, the speci-
mens examined. (The one or two exceptions
are small internal casts and may be ex-
amples of distortion.) Two large specimens
from Estonia, labeled Arzsterella in the col-
lection of the U. 5. National Museum, are
strikingly imequivalve, the right valves
being larger than the left. In this respect
Aristerella is similar to Hezkea from the late
Ordovician of Sweden. Isberg (1934, pp.
273-315, 388-389) describes Hetkea and
allocates the genus to the family Cyrtodon-
tidae, which some systematists have placed
among the prionodonts probably for want
of a more accurate assignment. Although
the specimens which Isberg figures are not
markedly inequivalve, he asserts that in
most species of Hezkea the right valves are
larger than the left.
Another early Paleozoic group which is
inequivalve is the family Antipleuridae. This
family of paleoconchs is restricted to the
late Silurian and early Devonian and is
represented by such genera as Antipleura,
Dalila, and Dualina. According to Lamy
(1930, p. 130, footnote) either left or right
valves may be larger. Figured specimens of
these genera show a great difference in the
sizes of the valves.
From late Ordovician onward throughout
the remainder of the Paleozoic, because of
the abundance of pteriaceans and pectina-
ceans, most of the mequivalve pelecypods
have their left valves larger than their right
valves. Besides the exceptions to this rule
already mentioned, Vertumnia, a pterino-
pectinoid genus restricted to the Devonian;
many species of Cypricardinia; and the
obscure genus Dexiobia all have right valves
NICOL: SURVEY OF INEQUIVALVE PELECYPODS od
larger than left valves. Cypricardinia ranges
from Silurian through Mississippian, and
Dexiobia is confined to the latter Period.
I have not attempted to list all the
Paleozoic pelecypods having larger left
valves than right. Furthermore, I have
listed none in which the inequivalve char-
acteristic is doubtful, whether left or right.
Some paleontologists assert that certain
Paleozoic genera are inequivalve whereas
others do not mention this characteristic in
their generic or familial descriptions. The
imphed discrepancy may be due to over-
sight on the part of some workers or to
distorted specimens in the Paleozoic collec-
tions of others.
Bivalves with filibranch ctenidia—i.e.,
those whose morphological development is
second most primitive—constitute the larg-
est group of imequivalve pelecypods from
the standpoint of percentage. Most members
of this order have well-developed byssal
attachments or are attached by their shells
directly to the substrate or, if free-living,
have descended from ancestors which had
some form of attachment. Apparently their
pleurothetic mode of life is related to the
inequal development of their valves. Fur-
thermore, among the filibranchs, the in-
equivalve condition is most consistent as well
as prevalent. In most families, the inequi-
valve species always have their left valves
larger, but in a few families the inequivalve
representatives always have their right
valves larger. There are few exceptions, and
this consistency can be considered, along
with other morphological characters, as an
indication of phyletic relationship.
There are several groups of filibranchs
which consistently are either equivalve or
if inequivalve, have the left valves larger
than the right. The Pteriacea are probably
the most ancient and among the most
prominent of this group. The Leiopteridae
and Pterineidae commonly have inequal
valves, and the left valves are always the
larger. (See La Roeque, 1950). A striking
example of this inequivalve condition is seen
in the genus Cornellites. These pteriaceans,
which are among the most ancient in-
equivalve pelecypods, are like the modern
species, and it is quite significant that this
58 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
large superfamily, which first appeared in
the Ordovician Period, has consistently
throughout its long history possessed the
same inequivalve characteristic—the left
valves invariably being the larger. Other
fossil pteriaceans which are inequivalve
include the genus Buchia and the family
Myalinidae; both have representatives with
their left valves larger than the right. (I
must add that I would include the Mya-
linidae with the Pteriacea rather than the
Mytilacea on the bases of the inequivalve
condition, the shape of the shell, and the
appearance of the ligamental area, despite
Newell’s assertion in 1942.) Many living
species of the Pteriidae are inequivalve, the
left valves always Hae larger than the
right.
The mytilaceans seem to be a consistently
equivalve group with but few exceptions.
Myoforceps aristata has prolonged posterior
ends of the valves which tend to cross over
each other. In some specimens the right
and in others the left valves are the larger
and more prolonged. Other exceptions are
Stavelia torta and Stavelia horrida, large
shells found in the Philippines and Queens-
land. In these species either right or left
valves may be larger. Fluviolanatus subtorta
is another inequivalve mytilid found in
Australian waters.
Another group of filibranchs is the priono-
donts, which first appear in the Devonian.
The Cucullaeidae and their allies constitute
a large suborder, and among its representa-
tives are some species which are inequivalve,
the left valves always being the larger and
overlapping the right valves along the
ventral border. Sometimes this discordancy
is accompanied by a striking discrepancy
in the ornamentation on the two valves.
Some Paleozoic representatives of the Pri-
onodonta and some Paleozoic Pteriacea are
remarkably similar in outline and hinge
characters, and the fact that both groups
have similar inequivalve conditions leads to
the possible inference that these two great
groups are closely related.
In addition to the pteriaceans and _ pri-
onodonts, a third and related group having
inequivalve species is the Isognomonacea,
which includes fossil groups like Cox’s
Bakevelliidae and the well-known genus
VOL. 48, NO. 2
Inoceramus. Besides the tendency to have
inequal valves, the left valves bemg con-
sistently the larger, these three large groups
have other morphologic similarities to link
them. The modern isognomonids are not so
conspicuously inequivalve as their fossil
ancestors, but in an occasional species the
larger size of the left valves is noticeable.
The strange family Vulsellidae, which
may be related to the isognomonids, has
inequivalve representatives. Either valve
may be the larger, but the left valve is the
larger more commonly than the right. The
valves of the vulsellids are often very
irregular, but the inequivalve condition is
not marked.
In the Placunidae, also, the — valves are
commonly larger.
There is some variation as to anen valve
is the larger in the modern Pectinacea, but
in all specimens that are strikingly mequi-
valve their right valves are the more convex
and in most cases overlap the left. The right
valves are larger in Spondylus, Plicatula,
Pedum, the Cretaceous genus Nezthea, and
some Pecten, sensu. lato. In a few modern
pectens, however, the left valves are slightly
larger than the right, and this condition is
true also in the Propeamussiidae. Newell
and Merchant (p. 175) note that the left
valves are larger than the right in the late
Paleozoic pectinacean genera Avizculopecten
and Pernopecten, but the right valves are
larger in specimens of the pterinopectinoid
genus Vertumnia, which is confined to the
Devonian Period. An analysis of the inequi-
valve condition among the pectinaceans
might give some valuable data on the rela-
tionships of the many genera and subgenera
within the superfamily.
Even a few of the fossi! limids are inequi-
valve. Some Jurassic limids represented in
the collection of the U.S. Geological Survey,
mainly by those belonging to the genus
Ctenostreon, have more convex right valves
than left. Cox (1948, p. 153) in his deserip-
tion of the family characters of the Limidae
made this statement: ‘‘There is no anterior
subauricular notch like that found in many
Pectinidae and Pteriidae, an anterior mar-
ginal gape for the protrusion of the foot and
byssus affecting (if present) both valves
equally.’’ In living species the byssal gape
FEBRUARY 1958
usually does affect both valves equally, but
in some, almost always the strongly-ribbed
ones, more of the byssal gape is in the right
valve and in a few cases the gape is wholly
in the right valve.
In the Ostreidae the left, or attached,
valves are either equal in size to, or larger
than, the right valves. This is equally true
of such Mesozoic genera as Gryphaea and
Exogyra as well as of living species of oysters.
The genus Chondrodonta, which is con-
fined to Cretaceous rocks, is attached by its
shell to the substrate. Like most ostreids, the
attached (left) valves are always the larger.
Because of the peculiar hinge and muscula-
ture, the systematic position of Chondrodonta
is still in doubt, and it has been placed in the
Ostreidae, Pectinacea, Pinnidae, and Myti-
lidae by various paleontologists.
On the other hand, the Anomuidae are
attached to the substrate by their right
valves, but the upper (left) valves are
always larger. Likewise, in the aberrant
Dimyidae, the left or unattached valves are
the larger ones. Two interesting Upper Cre-
taceous genera, Diploschiza and Pulvinites,
apparently are like Anomza and Dimya in
that they are attached to the substrate by
their right valves, and the unattached or
upper (left) valves are the larger.
Some aberrant thick-shelled Jurassic and
Lower Cretaceous pinnids are inequivalve.
These forms are placed in the genera 7’ri-
chites and Stegoconcha. In most cases the
left valves are the larger.
It is worthwhile to pause here and sum-
marize the data on the filibranchs thus far
reviewed. The most noteworthy thing about
this large order, with its numerous fossil as
well as living representatives, is that the
left valves are larger in the preponderance
of inequivalve species. The exceptions to
this are found in the Paleozoic pectinacean
genus Vertumnia, most of the Mesozoic and
Cenozoic Pectinidae, the Plicatulidae, the
Spondylidae, a few of the Vulsellidae, and a
few species of the Mytilidae. This, to my
mind, has phylogenetic significance and a
definite bearing on the classification of the
order.
Another characteristic of the filibranchs
with a well developed byssus is that where
the byssal notch is confined to one valve, or
NICOL: SURVEY OF INEQUIVALVE PELECYPODS 59
is predominately in one valve, it is the right
valve that has the notch or the larger portion
of it. This is true of the Pectinacea, Pteri-
acea, Prionodonta, Anomiidae, Isognomon-
idae, Limidae (as pointed out previously),
and undoubtedly others. I have made only a
cursory survey of this characteristic and
there may be some exceptions to this condi-
tion. However, the character is so consistent
among the filibranchs that a definite phy-
letic unity is indicated. One other observa-
tion should be noted here. The pleurothetic
filibranchs are more likely to have the byssal
notch confined to the right valve. This is not
always true, but it is certainly the common
condition. On the other hand, some of the
prionodonts are attached in a position so
that the valve margins are perpendicular to
the substrate. In many of these the byssal
notch has migrated somewhat so that it is
partly in each valve.
Beginning with the Unionacea there are
several large families and superfamilies of
pelecypods having less primitive ctenidial
structure whose representatives, with few
exceptions, are equivalve. Some of these
exceptions may be unintentionally over-
looked, as I have not attempted to trace all
aberrant and obscure species of large taxa.
Most of the aberrant species occupy a
different ecologic niche from the main body
of species of a family. Furthermore, in most
of these cases either the right or the left
valves may be the larger, as typified by
Beguina, Miltha, and a few of the vener-
aceans.
Among the unionaceans (the Aetheridae)
a few African and South American species
are found attached to the substrate by shell
cementation. They may be attached by
either valve, and either valve may be the
larger; furthermore, there is no apparent
correlation between which valve is attached
and which is the larger. Lamy (pp. 144-151)
describes and figures a few contorted and
inequivalve specimens of the unionacean
genera Quadrula, Unio, Pseudospatha, Cune-
opsis, Nodularia, and Arconara.
The Carditidae are a large and ancient
family with nearly all its species equivalve;
however, the aberrant genus Beguina, which
lives in the Indo-Pacific region, is mequi-
valve, and either valve may be the larger.
60 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Beguina lives surrounded by living coral.
Many pelecypods with this type of habitat
have either inequal or irregularly-shaped
valves.
A few of the dreissenids are discordant,
the right valves overlapping the left along a
part of the posterior margin.
The inequivalve Rudistacea are among the
most bizarre of all pelecypods. This large
group of Jurassic and Cretaceous bivalves
comprises species attached by either valve
and in which either the left valve or the
right is the larger. The inequivalve condition
in the rudistaceans may be important to
point to phyletic relationships within the
superfamily.
One of the less primitive families which
has very few inequivalve representatives is
the Lucinidae. However, among the lucinids
the genus Miltha has inequivalve species,
and either valve may be the larger. Most
species of the family Chamidae are also
inequivalve, and here again either valve may
be the larger. This inequivalve character is
one of several indications of the close rela-
tionship between the lucinids and _ the
chamids. Among inequivalve specimens of
the latter group it is always the attached
valves which are the larger.
Even the huge veneracean complex has a
few inequivalve species. Venerupis, as well
as the Petricolidae, have species in which
either valve may be slightly larger than the
other. In some species of Claudiconcha the
inequivalve trait is very pronounced, the
right valves consistently being the larger. In
this connection, incidentally, it is noted that
Cotton and Godfrey, in describing the genus,
state (p. 248) that the right valve is larger
than the left; furthermore, their figure of
Claudiconcha cumingi (279, p. 247) shows
the right overlapping the left, although in
their description of this species (p. 249) they
assert that the left valve overlaps the right.
Most of the Tellinidae are inequivalve in
that the valve margins are sinuous and the
posterior side of the shell is commonly bent
to the right. In this very large family one
finds that either the right valves or the left
may be the larger in diameter or the more
convex. Within a genus, however, the left or
the right valves, as the case may be, are
consistently the larger, and, as is the situa-
vou. 48, No. 2
tion in the Pectinidae, a study of the rela-
tionships among the inequivalve genera
may give some worthwhile suggestions
as to the grouping within the family
Tellinidae. For a more detailed account
of the inequivalve condition in the Tellinidae,
see Lamy (pp. 132-134).
A few of the semelids are also inequivalve.
The larger number and generally more
prominently inequivalve species have the
left valves the larger, but in a few cases the
right valves may be slightly the more con-
vex. Like the tellinids, the posterior end of
the shell is commonly bent, and the direction
of bending is usually to the right, rarely to
the left. Also like the tellinids, but more
prominently and commonly so, the anterior
end of the shell is bent in the direction
opposite to that of the posterior end.
Most of the Sanguinolaridae are equivalve
but a few species are not, the right valves
being distinctly larger than the left. Like the
Tellinidae, the posterior ends of some species
are bent; but unlike the tellinids, they are
bent to either the left or the right in about
equal numbers.
The description of the inequivalve condi-
tion in the tellinids, semelids, and sanguino-
lariids shows some remarkable similarities
and indicates a close relationship of these
three families.
Many of the species belonging to the
family Pleuromyidae (Triassic to Lower
Cretaceous), including those of the genera
Pleuromya, Cercomya, and Gresslya, have
right valves which overlap the left valves
along the dorsal border much like the condi-
tion found in some specimens of the Ceno-
zoic family Myidae.
The corbulids are nearly all inequivalve,
many markedly so, and the larger valves are
invariably the right ones. A few of the re-
lated Myidae are also inequivalve, having in
all such cases larger right than left valves,
furthermore, when the valves of an inequi-
valve myid are closed the umbo of the right
is higher than that of the left.
Among the inequivalve representatives of
the lucinids, chamids, veneraceans, tellinids,
sanguinolariids, pleuromyids, corbulids, and
myids, the larger valves are commonly the
right ones; and among those of the four last-
named families it is invariably so. This situ-
eee
FEBRUARY 1958
ation is the opposite of that of the more
primitive filibranchs.
The remainder of the pelecypod families
discussed are generally inconspicuous groups
either because of the small size of the shells
or because the groups have small numbers of
species and are geographically restricted. In
this latter connection, some of the following
taxa are not seen frequently because their
representatives are restricted to deep water.
The relationships of many of these families
to each other or to their place in the classifi-
cation of the Pelecypoda is not well under-
stood. Moreover, their inequivalve condition
is not consistent; among the inequivalve
species of some families the larger valves are
the right, of others they are the left, and of
others they may be either one.
The Cleidothaeridae are like chamids in
external appearance but are characterized by
a pearly inner shell and a very different
hinge. This family is confined to Australian
and New Zealand waters. Specimens of the
one living species are consistently attached
by their right valves, which are much larger
than their left valves.
In the Myochamidae, representatives of
Myochama are attached to solid objects by
the shells of the right valves, and the left
valves are much larger and overlap the right.
This condition is much like that found in the
Anomiidae. Specimens of MWyodora, on the
other hand, are not attached, and the right
valves are always larger, sometimes con-
spicuously so.
With the possible exception of a species of
Frenamya which Cotton and Godfrey (p.
145) describe as having the right valves more
convex than the left, all of the Pandoridae
have the left valves larger than the right, and
in some cases the discordancy between the
valves is great, the left valves overlapping
the right along the ventral border.
The Lyonsiidae are nearly all equivalve,
but the few inequivalve species in this
family have the left valves larger than the
right.
In the Thraciidae the right valves are
always larger.
Almost all of the periplomatids are inequi-
valve, and the larger valves are always the
right ones.
Although there is little mention of it im
NICOL: SURVEY OF INEQUIVALVE PELECYPODS 61
the lterature, the Poromyidae are also
inequivalve. The right valve of a specimen
overlaps the left valve slightly on both the
dorsal and the ventral margins.
The Verticordiidae have an unusual type
of inequivalve or discordant condition. The
right valves overlap the left along the dorsal
margin. This morphologic character is simi-
lar to that found in the Astartidae and
Crassatellidae, but it is much more marked.
Many cuspidariids are inequivalve; the
consistently larger left valves overlap the
right valves along the posteroventral border.
In some species of Juliidae there are
prominent spiral hornlike structures on the
umbonal region of the right valves. This
morphologic character is unique among the
Pelecypoda. A drawing of the structure is
given by Cotton and Godfrey (p. 129).
Of the 28 families with living species which
are basically inequivalve (this eliminates
such groups as the mytilids, carditids,
lucinids, and venerids.) half, or 14 of them,
have nacreous shells. This 1s an unusually
high percentage as compared with the pro-
portion of nacreous groups in the entire
Pelecypoda. Nacreous shells in the Pelecy-
poda are, in general, considered a primitive
characteristic. Whether the relatively high
correlation between nacreous shells and
inequal valves is significant or not awaits a
survey of the nacreous groups in the entire
Pelecypoda—a _ project that is greatly
needed.
From the table which summarizes the
data and from the more detailed discussion
on the various groups, the consistency of the
Inequivalve trait obviously is Important in
the classification of the Peleeypoda. Some of
the evidence from valve inequality merely
substantiates the indications from other
morphological characters, but, heretofore,
the inequivalve trait has been ignored by
taxonomists arranging a classification of the
Pelecypoda. To be more specific, the con-
sistently larger left valves found in the
Prionodonta, Pteriacea, and Isognomonidae
give an indication of relationship which is
also borne out by other morphological
characters. However, some caution must be
exercised as to the interpretation of valve
inequality in groups which have tew inequi-
valve species, such as the mytilids and
62 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
PELECYPOD TAXA HAVING INEQUIVALVE
REPRESENTATIVES
Taxa The larger valve
Aristerella right
Cyrtodontidae! (Heikea) right
Antipleuridae left right
Cypricardinia right
Dexiobia right
Pterineidae left
Leiopteriidae left
Myalinidae left
Pteriidae left
Mytilidae! left right
Prionodonta left
Bakevelliidae left
Inoceramidae- left
Isognomonidae left
Vulsellidae! left? right
Placunidae left
Pectinacea (Paleozoic) left? right
Pectinacea (Mesozoic, Cenozoic) left right?
Propeamussiidae left
Spondylidae right
Plicatulidae right
Limidae} right
Ostreidae left
Chondrodonta left
Anomiidae left
Dimyidae left
Pulvinitidae (including Diploschiza) left
Pinnidae! (Trichites) left? right
Unionacea! (Aetheriidae) left right
Carditidae! left right
Dreissenidae! right
Rudistacea left right
Lucinidae! left right
Chamidae left right
Veneraceal left right2
Tellinidae left right
Semelidae left? right
Sanguinolariidae right
Pleuromyidae right
Corbulidae right
Myidae! right
Cleidothaeridae right
Myochamidae left right
Pandoridae left
Lyonsiidae left
Thraciidae right
Periplomatidae right
Poromyidae right
Verticordiidae right
Cuspidariidae left
Juliidae right
1 Basically equivalve.
2 Valve which is either more commonly the larger or more
conspicuously so or both.
VOL. 48, NO. 2
carditids. The few cases of inequal valves in
these two groups undoubtedly mean little
or nothing as an indication of phyletic rela-
tionships.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
I am particularly indebted to three per-
sons for data and suggestions for this study.
Dr. Roland W. Brown, of the U. 8. Geolog-
ical Survey, provided information on the
spelling of some of the family names. Dr.
Harald A. Rehder, of the U. 8S. National
Museum, examined the manuscript for the
usage and spelling of the pelecypod taxa.
Dr. Horace B. Baker, of the University of
Pennsylvania, pointed out Lamy’s interest-
ing paper.
REFERENCES
Corton, B. C., and Goprrry, F. K., The molluscs
of South Australia, Part I. The Pelcypoda: 314,
340 text figs. Adelaide, 1938.
Cox, L. R. The English wpper lias and inferior
oolite species of Lima. Proc. Malacol. Soc.
London 25: 151-187, 79 figs. 1943.
——— Taxonomic notes on Isognomonidae and
Bakevelliidae. Proc. Malacol. Soc. London 31:
46-49, 1 fig. 1954.
IsBERG, ORVAR. Studien uber Lamellibranchiaten
des Leptaenakalkes in Dalarna: 492, 32 pls.
Lund, 1934.
Lamy, E. Quelques mots sur la torsion de la coquille
chez les lamellibranches. Journ. de Conch. 74
(2): 128-151, 21 figs. 1930.
La Rocqun, A. Pre-Traverse Devonian pelecypods
of Michigan. Contrib. Mus. Pal. Univ. Michi-
gan 7 (10): 271-366, 19 pls. 1950.
NEWELL, N. D. Late Paleozoic pelecypods: My-
tilacea. Geol. Surv. Kansas 10 (2): 115,15
pls., 22 figs. 1942.
NEweELL, N. D., and Mercuant, F. E. Discordant
valves in pleurothetic pelecypods. Amer.
Journ. Sci. 287 (8): 175-177, 1 pl., figs. la-d.
1939.
Nicout, D. Morphology of Astartella, a primitive
heterodont pelecypod. Journ. Pal. 29: 155-158,
4 figs. 1955.
Utricu, E. O. The Lower Silurian Lamellibranchi-
ata of Minnesota: 475-628, pls. 35-42. (In ‘‘The
Geology of Minnesota’’ 3 (2): of Final Report,
Paleontology.) 1897.
FEBRUARY 1958
ACTIVITIES OF THE JOINT BOARD ON SCIENCE EDUCATION 63
ACTIVITIES OF THE JOINT BOARD ON SCIENCE EDUCATION
Eprror’s Nore: Most members of the Academy are familiar
with the name Joint Board on Science Education, but untortu-
nately few are familiar with its activities. Dr. Arnold H. Scott has
kindly prepared this report on the Joint Board. Following this is a
report by the Joint Board on a problem of interest to all scientists.
As early as 1949 the Washington Academy of
Sciences became concerned about the need for
encouraging the study of science and mathe-
matics in the junior and senior high schools of
the Greater Washington Area. Keith Johnson and
Percy Rayford, of the District of Columbia
Schools, had organized the first annual science
fair for the Washington Area in 1947 and had
begun asking the Academy for help in judging
the entries. In 1951 a special committee was
formed by the Academy with Dr. Martin A.
Mason as chairman to organize a Junior Acad-
emy of Sciences. Upon its organization in 1952
the Junior Academy assumed the responsibility
for promotion of the annual science fairs.
By 1951 some of the scientific and engineering
societies had become concerned with the promo-
tion of science education, and the schools were
being contacted by the various societies who were
wanting the privilege of presenting their pro-
grams to the students and working with them in
the schools. As the work load of the teachers was
heavy and the schedules rather tight, these re-
quests from the societies for time became irksome
to the school officials. It became clear to the
D. C. Council of Engineering and Architectural
Societies that something must be done to coordi-
nate the activities of the societies and to estab- ©
lish better relations with the schools.
Harly in 1952 Dr. W. T. Read, chairman of
the Education Committee of the Council, took
the first steps toward coordinating the efforts of
the societies. He set up a Subcommittee for
Secondary School Contacts with Walter H.
McCartha as chairman, which secured approval
of the school systems for the contact members to
work with the science and mathematics teachers
on behalf of the various societies wishing to help
in encouraging the study of science and mathe-
matics. The Washington Academy of Sciences
was asked to join in this effort by appointing a
parallel Subcommittee for Secondary Schools
Contacts. This subcommittee was appointed with
Dr. Arnold H. Scott as chairman. The first an-
nual “List of Officials and Committees concerned
with the Promotion of Science Talent’? was pub-
lished in the fall of 1952.
At first the teachers and school officials were
suspicious of the efforts of the scientists and
engineers, as they were afraid that an effort
would be made to try to change their methods of
teaching. However, the early efforts of the con-
tact members were very tactful, and the teachers
soon came to realize that the contact members
could be really helpful to them. The influence and
size of the contact committee grew rapidly. The
parallel efforts of the Washington Junior Acad-
emy of Sciences in promoting science fairs in the
schools resulted in a rapid growth of interest by
the students in the fairs. It then became apparent
that a more formal coordinating organization
was needed.
Under the active direction of Dr. Margaret
Pittman, then president of the Academy, the
Joint Board on Science Education was formed in
1955 by an agreement between the Washington
Academy of Sciences and the D. C. Council of
Engineering and Architectural Societies. Its first
chairman was Dr. Raymond Seeger. It was em-
powered to direct its activities “‘toward assisting
and counseling the faculties of schools and related
organizations, with power to initiate action
where desirable, and to raise funds to carry out
the various activities of the Board.’ These ac-
tivities include:
‘1. Providing such speakers as may be desired.
2. Arranging for classroom demonstrations.
3. Assisting in developing graduate school op-
portunities for science teachers and aiding them
in finding summer employment.
4. Recommending changes in science courses
when deemed advisable.
5. Sponsoring local area fairs and assisting in
planning, and promotion of same.”
The Board consists of 12 members, 6 appointed
by the chairman of the Council and 6 appointed
64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
by the president of the Academy. The terms of
office are three years, two members being ap-
pointed each year from each of the parent organi-
zations. The official year starts on June 1, and
the new officers are elected at the first meeting
of the new year. The chairman is chosen alter-
nately from the members of the Academy and
the Council. The Board has been incorporated so
as to establish responsibility and provide for tax
exemption on donations made to the budget of
the Board.
Each committee of the Board is headed by two
members from the Board, one from the Academy
and one from the Council. Other members of the
committees are recruited from interested persons
in the various scientific and engineering societies.
The Secondary Schools Contacts Committee is
the largest committee of the Board and is com-
posed of some 135 persons who act as contact
members to the junior and senior high schools of
the Metropolitan Washington Area (within a
radius of 25 miles of central Washington). There
is one contact member for each junior and senior
high school of the area with a few exceptions.
Because of the size of the committee and magni-
tude of the work to be done, the committee has
been divided into eight divisions, roughly paral-
leling the school systems involved. The contacts
committee serves as a channel through which the
various scientific and engineering societies can
aid the teachers and also as a channel through
which the science and mathematics teachers can
call on the talents of the members of the scientific
and engineering societies.
The work of the Contacts Committee is
planned and reviewed by a Planning Committee,
which is composed of the chairman and vice-
chairman, the Division chairmen, and the school
haison officers. The latter are persons appointed
by the school systems to work with the Joint
Board.
It is the duty of the contact member to make
the acquaintance of the science and mathematics
teachers in his school so that they may feel free
to call upon him for whatever help he can give.
He is prepared to help in getting speakers for
career days, science clubs, school assemblies, etc.
He can help in getting scientific films for use in
schools and in getting volunteers for project
judging, project counseling and other work con-
nected with science fair operations. The contact
member is expected to make sure that there has
been no failure of the school and students to
receive information about the special scientific
VOL. 48, No. 2
lectures which are presented each year especially
for the high-school students and to help when
necessary in obtaining the necessary tickets for
these lectures. It is the stated policy of the
Joint Board that once each year, if the schools
desire it, scientists shall be brought into the
classrooms to discuss their work in science and
engineering with the purpose of creating interest
in these subjects. When such a program has been
planned and arranged between the Joint Board
and the school system, it is the duty of the con-
tact member to see that all the requests have been
filled, that both the teacher and the scientist or
engineer are well informed of what is expected of
each, and that the program works smoothly in
his school. Three such programs have been car-
ried out and have received a very enthusiastic
response.
A meeting in honor of the Secondary Schools
Contacts Committee members for their faithful
work with the schools was held on October 14,
1957. Remarks of appreciation were made by Dr.
John K. Taylor, chairman of the Joint Board,
Dr. Arnold H. Scott, chairman of the Secondary
Schools Contacts Committee, and Dr. T. Ed-
ward Rutter, division superintendent of the
Arlington Public Schools. A feature of the meet-
ing was a preview of the film entitled “The
Strange Case of the Cosmic Rays,” which is the
third of the Bell System Science Series. The film
was introduced by Dr. Ralph Bown, chairman of
the Scientific Advisory Board of the Bell System
Science Series and former vice chairman-Research
of the Bell Telephone Laboratory.
The Committee on Science Fairs was organized
to act as a general coordinating body for science
fair problems. It works with the school staffs and
the Washington Junior Academy of Sciences by:
1. Advising on ground rules,
2. Advising on policy matters,
3. Aiding in securing proper consultants for
projects (this is usually a matter of assisting the
School Contact Members when necessary),
4. Advising on safety problems as needed,
5. Aiding in securing judges,
6. Aiding in securing accessory support, par-
ticularly special exhibitions in the Smithsonian
Institution, National Institutes of Health, and
tours of these and other government institutions
such as the National Bureau of Standards,
7. Aiding in the guidance of publicity,
8. Working with other groups such as the
Prince Georges Science Fair Association, the
Arlington County Science Fair Association,
Science Associates of Montgomery County, and
other similar groups and,
FEBRUARY 1958 ACTIVITIES OF THE JOINT
9. Cooperating with other groups to raise the
necessary money where such is not available from
the School Boards.
Four area science fairs are held each year. Two
winners from each area fair are sent to the Na-
tional Science Fair, along with one teacher from
each area acting as chaperone.
The Finance Committee is charged with
preparing a budget for the Joint Board and
seeking a means for raising the funds required
for this budget. The budget for the present year
is as follows:
Expenses of chairman
SINATRA. ee eee $125.00
Secondary School Contacts Committee. 400 .00
Science Fairs Committee:
(a) Local Area Fairs... . $1,200
doymeNetitonaly Mair: ... 1... 2,500 3,700.00
Science Teacher demonstration
BAAS | 2 Ss 55 RC Oe ete eee eae 525.00
imancemOomimibtee. . 64 2) Jka. ee. 200.00
IMPS CAMA TAS CIS ce eee 590 .00
$5, 500.00
Money to support this budget is expected from
the scientific, engineering, and architectural so-
cieties, commercial organizations in the area,
certain service organizations, and individual do-
nations. In the past the Washington Junior
Academy of Sciences has liberally supported the
budget by its donations from the funds received
from the scientific trips which it sponsors. Many
more individual donations are needed if the bud-
get is to be adequately supported.
A curriculum committee has made a study of
the scientific curriculum of a local school system
at the request of an official of that system. A
report of this committee has been made available
to all the school systems of the Washington Area
who desire it.
Members of the Joint Board on Science
Education and its Committees
Joun K. Taytor, Chairman
R. W. Mess, Vice Chairman
W. H. McCarrua, Secretary-Treasurer
CHARLES MorSEL
ARNOLD H. Scorr
RAYMOND J. SEEGER
KATHERINE STINSON
Lewis K. DowNING
Wo. J. KLLENBERGER
REGINA FLANNERY
PHOEBE KNIPLING
Wave H. MarsHALu
Secondary Schools Contacts Committee
ArNoxtp H. Scorr, Chairman
W. J. ELLENBERGER, Vice Chairman
BOARD ON SCIENCE EDUCATION
Division I District of Columbia
D. B. Scorr, Chairman
R. J. Roru, Vice Chairman
BERNARD W. AGRANOFF Keita C. JOHNSON
Morris E. BArRFIELD
Raupew E. CraBiuu
STANLEY Dosik
JosEPH J. FAHEY
MicHEAL GOLDBERG
Won. P. Harris
JoHN K. Harrsock
NorMan C. HoweE.Lus
Wn. D. JENKINS
GERSHON KULIN
Rospert H. NELSON
Won. H. PINDELL, JR.
GEORGE B. Scorr
C. M. SmitH
Wawupvo E. SMITH
Ecpert H. WALKER
LAWRENCE A. Woop
Division II District of Columbia
L. K. Downine, Chairman
A. KE. Ricumonp, Vice Chairman
EVELYN Boyp
RayYMoND M. JONES
LAWRENCE T. BuRWELL J. I. Minor, JR.
Francis EH. BUTLER
STEPHEN S. Davis
Hauson V. HAGLESON
Liuoyp FERGUSON
Haroup E. FINLEY
DaRNLEY E. Howarp
ARTHUR D. JEWELL
A. F. Moore, JR.
Kewtso Morris
Francis W. STEELE
I, dis WANE
J. C. WEBSTER
CHARLES E. WEIR
Division III Prince Georges and
Charles Counties
GROVER C. SHERLIN, Chairman
Hasima Ora, Vice Chairman
JosEpH G. Tuono, Vice Chairman
WriuuiaM J. BAILEY
ALBERT F. BriRD
Cart BoyarRs
W. O. BRIMIJOHN
Ricuarp L. DoLEcEK
Rosert J. Downs
JAMES F. Fox
Epwarp HacskKAYLo
Rospertr A. HEIN
WaRREN I}. HENRY
Lester F. HuBERT
W. H. Hunt
Wn. H. LuckE
Bruce NEALE, JR.
65
M. F. Maury OSBORNE
JOHN G. PALMER
STANLEY PRUSCH
A. I. SCHINDLER
Mary S. SHORB
K. M. Smite
JOHN K. TaYLorR
C. G. THomMpeson
R. B. TURNER
GEORGE W. WALDO
GEORGE F. WALL
CORR I Wise. ir.
EvizaBetH G. ZooK
Division IV Montgomery County
FALCONER SmitH, Chairman
Rospert B. Moore, Vice Chairman
JAMES CASSELL
ERNEST CoTLOVE
WaLTER T. DANIELS
Jeeves DATS
lefeddy Te isiauie
B. K. ForscHE
Howarp GRAHAM
O. R. HAMILTON
Ricuarpv [IRWIN
LEON JACOBS
ArcHIE I. MAHAN
Louise MARSHALL
R. D. MuURRILL
Wriitram R. Nes
Ricuarp L. PETRITZ
LEE. J. PURNELL
J. L. ROBERTSON
ABRAHAM SHANES
Haroup R,. STANLEY
GILBERT WRIGHT
66 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Division V Arlington County and
Alexandria
T. F. Forp, Chairman
J. M. CaLpwELL, Vice Chairman
ALLEN L. ALEXANDER KENNETH HAINES
Rocco DE MasI R. S. Hunter
Auton H. DESMON LUTRELLE F. PARKER
Wo. H. DIEHL J. A. SANDERSON
JOHN HAGEN W. ZimmerRMAN, III
Division VI
Falls Church, Fairfax and Prince
Williams Counties
C. R. Nasser, Chairman
J. W. Harkness, Vice Chairman
WitL H. SHEARON, JR.
C. R. TREADWELL
Horace M. TRENT
B. D. Van EVERA
Harry J. BOERTZEL
VeRA CONRAD
B. Tuomas HopxKINs
P. W. Kopp
Lucien L. Ricu
Division VII Catholic Schools
JosepH C. Micuatowicz, Chairman
CHARLES C. D1ILuLER, Vice Chairman
VOL. 48, No. 2
GEORGE E. McDuFrrigE JoHN C. OEHMANN
ALBERT J. WALCEK
Division VIII Private Schools
MarGaret R. Fox, Chairman
E. C. Curcuins, Vice Chairman
Mary E. STEVENS
T. DaLe STEWART
EarRLeE R. ToENSE
Epwarp W. TorPFrER
Howarp R. Bau
ELIZABETH DOYLE
Won. J. KaNnor
Marrua L. RIc&
STANLEY B. RUSSELL
Science Fairs Committee
W. H. MarsHatu, Chairman
R. W. Mess, Vice Chairman
CuHarRuEs A. McCatua
PauL R. MILLER
Howarp B. OwENS
KarRuL FRANK
STEPHEN HopxKINS
PHOEBE KNIPLING
JESSE L. Maury
Finance Committee ©
C. MorsEL, Chairman
PHOEBE KNIpPLING, Vice Chairman
A REPORT BY THE JoINT BoAaRD ON SCIENCE EDUCATION IN THE
GREATER WASHINGTON AREA
SCIENCE CURRICULA IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS
About a year ago the Joint Board was invited
by a local school system to make recommenda-
tions on science curricula in secondary schools.
After a brief, intensive study, based upon an ex-
tensive background of experience of the science
community, the following report was submitted
by a special Science Education Committee. The
requesting group is of the belief that the general
recommendations may be of value to other
schools with similar problems; accordingly, the
Board has been authorized to make its views
known to all the schools under the Greater
Washington Area.
Recognizing that the problem of science
teaching is of great concern, both nationally and
internationally, and not merely of a local char-
acter, the Science Education Committee recom-
mends schools continue to study vigorously the
revision of its curricula in mathematics and
science at the secondary-school level with the
following principles in mind:
FUNDAMENTALS
Outside a genuine need to interest all capable
secondary-school students in the scientific aspects
of the universe in which we all live, most college
scientists of all disciplines are agreed that the
primary requirement for college is general prepa-
ration in reading, writing, and arithmetic (the 3
R’s), stressed at all grades from kindergarten
through the secondary school, with particular
emphasis upon mathematics and its relationship
to the sciences, and not merely the specific
courses in the sciences. Of paramount importance
is the motivation of students through enthusi-
astic, content-informed teachers. The need to
challenge intellectually the competent, as well as
to safeguard the right of the slow-to-learn, must
be a primary concern of all engaged in a demo-
cratic educational system.
GUIDANCE
Guidance about the professions is needed for
‘“ouidance personnel.” So-called guidance, at
FEBRUARY 1958
present, seems to be concerned mostly with in-
forming students as to what they should do if
their careers or colleges have already been se-
lected. Much more important is insuring that the
student has an opportunity to select among
eareers those in which he has a particular interest
and potentiality, even if both are latent.
Local scientists are available through the
Joint Board on Science Education for general
presentations to guidance personnel and_ for
specific assistance to individual students, as well
as for group talks.
DEPTH AND BREADTH
A greater emphasis is needed upon depth of
understanding a few principles of science rather
than upon an encyclopedic coverage of many
topics about science. The student needs to know
much more than just facts of science; he needs
to understand primarily ‘“‘the why,’ secondarily
“the how,” and only thirdly “the what.” At all
grades, from the kindergarten through the sec-
ondary school, science should be taught, not
chiefly to acquire “information, please,’ but
primarily to stimulate curiosity and to implement
interests through well-selected facts, as a means
—not an end in itself. The criterion of success
should be whether or not a student is able to
think and behave differently about the scientific
material of his environment at the conclusion of
his course. Above all, he should be made familiar
with both the power and the limitations of
science.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
Each course should have clearly stated, prac-
ticable objectives, including the means of measur-
ing such objectives. Evidence should be annually
shown as to the measured success of achievement
of such objectives. Critical objective analysis
should be continually made of all administrative
procedures, which may prevent the optimum
realization of teaching objectives.
EXPERIMENTATION IN COURSES
The secondary schools should develop objec-
tives of their own without undue regard for
opinions of high school teachers as to what they
believe is, or should be, truly college preparatory.
In this connection, the requirements and use of
high-school subjects by colleges and universities
nationally should be continually examined, par-
ACTIVITIES OF THE JOINT BOARD ON SCIENCE EDUCATION 67
ticularly in consultation with local
scientists.
Serious consideration should be given to the
ordering of courses, including possible modifica-
tion of traditional arrangements; for example, the
order of physics and chemistry which in high
school is sometimes opposite to that usually
found in colleges; the giving of algebra as a 2-year
sequence rather than having it interrupted by
geometry, which may be (or should be) little
used in later secondary physics and chemistry
classes. In this connection, it is noted that some
peculiar choices may be accidentally given stu-
dents; for example, the need to choose at a par-
ticular time between a future required course
(history) and one elective course (in biology). In
this instance it would be preferable to give a
choice among comparable subjects, say, a group
of sciences or a group of social studies.
Experimentation with new types of courses in
mathematics, biology, chemistry and _ physics
should be encouraged on an interschool basis by
a few capable teachers of honor courses. Under
no circumstances, however, should a radical
change be made in the general program without
considerable experimentation and the preparation
of adequate texts. Promiscuous tampering with
the bad material may affect good material also.
Possible new courses are: (a) introductory courses
in mathematical sciences, which involve the use
of numerical analysis and the applications of
mathematics to science; (b) introductory courses
in physical science, which may combine present
courses in physics and chemistry (one semester
of each)—not a “survey” course; (¢) introductory
courses in modern mathematics, including cer-
tain fundamental concepts in algebraic geometry,
elementary calculus, and statistics.
Local scientists might be invited through the
Joint Science Board on Education to participate
in continuing studies of such science curricula.
college
There might be a series of round table discussions
in which an equal number of scientists from a
particular discipline in local universities would be
invited to meet with an equal number of high-
school teachers in that discipline, a_ selected
number of these conferees might be invited to
another round table in which some educational
authorities, both within the local public school
system and from neighboring groups, would also
be invited to participate.
68 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MODERN VIEWPOINTS
All material should be presented to the student
at his own psychological and intellectual levels.
It should be presented, moreover, as living
mathematics and science—that is, from a modern
viewpoint of science as science with only minor
consideration of technological importance, which
would appear to be more appropriate in social
study courses. (General science courses, indeed,
should be more scientific and less social in
emphasis.)
LABORATORY
Good laboratory work is regarded as being
highly important. There is a serious question,
however, as to how much of real value is being
accomplished in single periods of instruction (in
lieu of a double period), particularly when such
periods may be arbitrarily shortened for various
administrative reasons throughout the year.
Here, above all, objectives should be continually
examined and evaluations made annually.
In this connection, more allowance should be
made for a teacher to make ready for laboratory
just prior to the class meeting. Sufficient time
must be allowed in the class for the student to
assemble simple (inexpensive) apparatus. There
is a tendency in a large class to mechanize all
operations in order to achieve efficiency, whereas
the sine qua non of all laboratory work should be
encouragement of the individuality of each
VOL. 48, NO. 2
student. Consideration should be given to differ-
ent patterns for different types of students; for
example, voluntary science-fair projects for the
more imaginative (not all), laboratory repetition
of demonstrations for the less imaginative (not
all), ete.
IN-SCIENCE TRAINING
In view of the increasing complexity of modern
science, it is recommended that in-service train-
ing groups be established at all levels of mathe-
matics and science teaching, but particularly at
the elementary levels. Equally important as new
factual information are new ways of presenting
old basic materials. Local scientists might be
invited through the Joint Board on Science Edu-
cation to assist in such courses.
Science Education Committee:
R. Percy BARNES
Professor of Organic Chemistry
Howard University
Matcoum W. OLIPHANT
Professor of Mathematics
Georgetown University
GrorceE W. WHARTON
Professor of Zoology
University of Maryland
Raymonp J. SEEGER (Chairman)
Deputy Assistant Director
National Science Foundation
Men should be taught as if you taught them not,
And things unknown proposed as things forgot.
— Popr.
17
CONTENTS
GENERAL ScreNcE.—A critique of operations research. GrorcGE E.
GTI Raden es a ees he Se ae ee te ae vicice:
Page
PuysioLoGy.—Observations on the oxygen consumption of young
Australorbis glabratus. ALINA PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ and
THEODOR VON BRAND?. 228-20. .ds5c6 a ees. eer
PALEONTOLOGY.—A pelycosaur with subsphenoidal teeth from the lower
Permian of Oklahoma. Prrer PAuL VAUGHN...............22%
ZooLocy.—Sarsiella tricostata, a new ostracod from San Francisco Bay
(Myodocopa: Cypridinidae). Merrerpiru L. JONES...............
ZooLocy.—Description of a new species of Cossura (Annelida: Poly-
chaeta) from the Mississippi Delta. Donaup J. REISH...........
Zootogy.—A survey of inequivalve pelecypods. Davin Nicou........
Activities of the Joint Board on Science Education...................
Notes and) Newsy 22 eee ee sa OE he bee rrr
22.W23
VOLUME 48 March 1958 NUMBER 3
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
ceeneeecercercertr
ATLL
ar ae ee a
|
ee
MA ieee SoH je
Taal PRA BEI
TEE MEE LL
{
Published Monthly by the
meer SHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuzester H. Pages, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RonALD BaMrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors. ;
Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in finai
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographica! costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PrRoceEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year..........:...:-----32seee $7 .50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, inel.—not, available*....... 02.22.25. — —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $393.50.
Monocrapn No. 1, ‘“The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS........................-. $7 .50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete..........................05. $25.00
Single volumes, wnboUnd:)). 2220205025. 5 5aoe yee sae ses a eee 2.00
Single mummers es s-iici dob ee eine ce eee eee ee ee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
ae aaa to the Treasurer, H. S. Raprieye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vot. 48 Marcu 1958 No. 3
HISTORY OF SCIENCE.—Ferdinand Hassler’s gift to America. Exuiorr B.
Roserts, U. §. Coast and Geodetic Survey.
(Received December 27, 1957)
*** In ridicule and humiliation he pursued his goal of giving the people of his
adopted land a service of lasting value; however his true gift was not the labors to
which he sacrificed himself, but the spirit and ideals still cherished by his followers.
It was not common in Ferdinand Hassler’s _ sophical Society, after submitting the best of
day for public officials to argue with the several plans for the work.
President about their salaries, but Hassler Hassler was born in 1770 of a prosperous
was no common man. He was a genius who watchmaking family of Switzerland. His
gave life to two of the country’s most early interest in mathematics and astronomy
honored scientific services a century and a brought him to Johann Tralles, a leading
half ago, and he wanted to be paid accord- _geodesist who was applying the principles of
ingly. When he asked President Jackson in higher surveying to the mapping of Switzer-
1836 for $6,000 a year, he was rebuked—this land to promote better land utilization and
was as much as his superior, the Secretary development. Among the problems facing
of the Treasury, received. To this Hassler Tralles and his pupil was the development of
had a scornful and to him a perfectly logical _ precise instruments and measurement stand-
reply—secretaries of the Treasury could ards, preoccupations that made Hassler a
be found anywhere, and could by made by _ lifelong instrumentalist. Out of such begin-
any President, whereas there was but one nings grew his passion for precision and
Hassler. Only God Almighty could make a_ orderly procedure. Raised in affluence. he
Hassler! He got the money, and the country never developed a money sense, nor practical
got two scientific bureaus, the Coast and attitudes toward life’s problems. He had a
Geodetic Survey and the National Bureau studious appearance with penetrating eyes.
of Standards, which still operate under a He never wore glasses—instead he became
code of ethics that cannot be evaluated in a habitual snuff user, “to stimulate the
dollars. optic nerve”’ as he said.
America, still young at the turn of the In his scientific development young
nineteenth century, was seeing a tremendous Hassler traveled widely, never hesitating to
maritime growth. Almost all commerce was _ present himself to such eminent scientists as
by coastal shipping, and 60,000 vessels of Lalandeand Lavoisier, and to leading philos-
that trade sustained crippling losses be- ophers and historians. This self-assurance
cause they had no charts of the coast. Amer- impertinence in a lesser man—beecame a
ica’s growth was threatened. When Congress _ lifelong trait. He made a uniformly favorable
faced up to this situation in 1807 by author- impression, gaining a prestige in Europe that
izing a survey of the coast, Ferdinand was lacking later in the relatively rough
Hassler was the only man in America with — society of early America.
the technical knowledge to undertake the In the last years of the century political
work. Thus he became its first head, on the troubles interfered with the work he liked,
recommendation of the American Philo- and led him into public affairs. He displaved
69
SMITH
GTS ONIAN MAY ¢ ©8 4ARea
70 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
original and constructive ideas in administra-
tion and education, and became Attorney
General of Switzerland. Life, however, was
distasteful, leading him to emigrate to Amer-
ica with his family in 1805. He dreamed of
America as a refuge where he could farm in
ease and comfort, indulging in reflection
and study. He even organized a colonizing
scheme and brought with him 120 immigrants
to form a new community. Unfortunately,
financing all this led him into commitments
with associates who not only brought the
scheme to grief—they also lost much of his
fortune for the young crusader, and ruined
his farming dream.
With him Hassler brought furniture, art
objects, standards of weight and measure,
and a library of 3,000 volumes on all aspects
of natural science as then known. That col-
lection, brought for his personal satisfac-
tion, was destined later to be sold, little
by little, during long periods of reversal,
but this was not at first apparent.
He promptly obtained citizenship, and
got in touch with scientific men, who were
captivated by his sincerity and earnestness,
his five languages and cosmopolitan air,
the novelty of his library, and by his dona-
tion of scientific curiosities to the American
Philosophical Society. Among his new friends
were Prof. Robert Patterson, director of the
Mint, who recommended him to President
Jefferson for a job as surveyor or astronomer,
and John Vaughan, a public-spirited Phila-
delphian, who also wrote Jefferson of “one
of the most interesting foreigners we have
for a long time had among us.”’
Jefferson, who liked to read scientific
papers before learned societies, and who
looked on science as the cornerstone of the
Republic, quickly became a friend of the
young Swiss. This association, and the
urgings of Patterson and Vaughan, led to an
executive recommendation resulting in a
Congressional authorization of $50,000 for
a survey of the coast.
Hassler’s plan for the work was based on
simple logic. Starting from astronomical
positions of ‘remarkable’ points of the coast
and a triangulation survey to join them
in a rigorous system of control, he would
then—and only then—make a _ nautical
survey of the shoals and coastal waters.
VOL. 48, NO. 3
If Hassler had any clear conception of the
enormous size of this undertaking, he did
not advertise it. Certainly Congress thought
the matter would soon be concluded, and
felt the money appropriated to be liberal in
the extreme.
Hassler, to support himself, had mean-
while taken a $1,500 professorship of mathe-
matics at West Point that was to last three
years while the Administration temporized
over starting the survey. There he began a
text which displayed a new analytical
approach to the study of trigonometry. He
wrote a paper on meteorites, and he observed
a comet ‘‘of extreme beauty.” He was widely
admired, and he made friends among stu-
dents who later became his aides on the
survey and lifelong supporters. He spent
much time preparing detailed plans of
instruments and procedures, and in writing
letters urging haste upon the administration.
In 1810, despite protest earned by his
stimulating teaching methods, he was forced
out of West Point by a ruling that the Army
lacked authority to employ civilian teachers.
He left a sundial on a rock near the house
he had occupied, like one he had placed as a
boy in his native town in Switzerland. It
remained many years. He next took an
appointment at Union College, which,
though it lasted but a year, left such an
impression that the president of the college
could say, in 1843 at Hassler’s death, “We
have not such another man to die.” His
impoverishment during these years of low
salaries meant little to Hassler, who sold
his books one by one, living for the day when
his great work would begin. His wite, who
loved society and fine living, found it a
dismal period.
Early in 1811 Treasury Secretary Gallatin
found it possible to proceed, and Hassler
joyfully left Union College to begin the
survey. He had previously written that the
work could not be done without tools—and
none were available in America. In his
words, ‘“‘Good instruments are never to be
obtained by buying in shops, where only
instruments of inferior quality are put up
to sell; they must be made on command,
and by the best mechanicians (of London).”
So it was that he went to Europe to procure
the theodolites and other instruments, and
FERDINAND HASSLER
ie, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
to find copper for the chart engravings—in-
deed the engravers themselves would have
to be recruited in Germany.
He had new instruments of his own design
built in London, including a revolutionary
“oreat theodolite”’ for measuring angles of
the survey. He collected reference books,
new standards of measurement, and other
necessities, and he visited the continent to
discuss his plans with leading scientists.
All this forced delay, particularly since war
intervened, and the mission lengthened into
years. In his zeal he personally paid obliga-
tions of the United States, and of his official
funds he overspent the $50,000 allowed him
by Congress. This brought severe censure,
and he had to return home at his own ex-
pense—bringing to America a collection of
instruments said to be the best ever to
leave England.
Actual operations were delayed still
further for many reasons, including lack of
funds, until 1816. Then he was finally
appointed superintendent, with a salary of
$3,000 and an expense allowance of $2,000
—not enough for the improvident Hassler,
who had to continue drawing on his own
resources, finally going to the President with
his money problems. He later reported, “‘I
resigned the certain and respectable position
of professor ... at Union College ... to em-
bark in a work in which the disagreements
and pecuniary losses have by far exceeded
my compensations.”
The first work in the field was in prepara-
tion for surveying the area about New York.
Instrument supports were built before the
actual appropriation of funds. Practically
at the outset, arrangements for the measure-
ment of a baseline near Long Branch were
interrupted by the first of a long series of
controversies—in this case a lawsuit about
branches of a cedar bush used as a survey
signal. Hassler had to ask for papers of
public authority.
Hassler constructed a carriage ingeniously
arranged to safeguard his “great theodolite”’
in transit, as well as to provide compart-
ments for books and papers and _ personal
conveniences. This effective but strange
conveyance attracted great attention, doubt-
less contributing to Hassler’s growing repu-
tation as an eccentric. Congress was never
VOL. 48, NO. 3
reconciled to the expenditure of official funds
for such a monstrosity. In early 1817, before
a year had passed, Hassler was asked by the
Secretary of the Treasury for an estimate of
the time and cost of completion of the proj-
ect! The communication hinted of Congres-
sional impatience and the possibility of
action to terminate the project.
This was preposterous! He was hardly
begun! Clearly Washington was utterly
ignorant in such matters, so he tried to
explain. Much preparatory work had to be
done. A precise geodetic survey based on
astronomic observations must precede the
nautical survey. The chart must show all
details of the shoreline and the landmarks,
requiring laborious operations along every
bit of the coast. All this must- come first.
Hassler worked desperately to impress
Congress. He told how diligent he had
been: ‘‘I protracted the summer work till the
end of December, when none about me
thought it possible to stand it any longer
for cold ...I have been up and at observa-
tions with or before sunrise... taking out
the results occupied me commonly till about
eleven o’clock at night. All this was wit-
nessed enough by every person about me.”
Notwithstanding all his efforts, he could
not satisfy Congress. Where he meant to
build for the future, and to add lustre to
American science, Congress wanted to
satisfy the needs of the moment, and cheaply
too. On April 14, 1818, a bewildered and
uncomprehending Hassler was thrown out.
There began a long period while Congress
tried to get along without him—a period of
almost complete inactivity. Shipwrecks con-
tinued ! .
Hassler, misunderstood and _ neglected,
prepared a long paper of self-justification,
later published by the Philosophical Society
which gained him favorable attention,
at least in Europe. Included was a brilliant
proposal for the use of a polyconie projection
for survey use in the technically difficult
problem of portraying the curved earth on
flat maps—a tool so perfect that it remains
in use today.
It was not long until another short-lived
assignment appeared, in 1818, for which no
one else could be found—an appointment as
astronomer with the Commission demarking
Marcu 1958
the Canadian boundary eastward from the
St. Lawrence River, as ordained by the
Treaty of Ghent. He repurchased and re-
paired the famous carriage at a personal loss
of $1,200. The first running of the line
seemed to indicate the loss to Canada of a
one-mile strip of farmland, containing two
newly built United States forts. The farmers
became incensed, apparently in distrust. of
Hassler’s foreign origin and thick accent.
He feared personal violence, but his tech-
nical skill did not fail him. He propounded
a new geodetic interpretation based on the
lately discovered ellipticity of the earth.
After protracted quarreling, he carried his
point, and saved the disputed land for the
country. This done, he left the boundary
survey in a dispute over his salary and in
humiliation over criticisms by the commis-
sioner, who quite correctly but perhaps
rudely called him quarrelsome. Thus Hassler
went into a long eclipse.
During a 10-year period he had to support
himself as best he could. He wrote textbooks
which earned him nothing, but which con-
tained innovations of mathematical develop-
ment. He lost teaching opportunities because
it was fashionable to employ famous ‘‘con-
tinental’’ professors. His resources ex-
hausted, he tried farming, in pursuit of his
dream of earlier years, but again he was
cheated. He got no decent farm buildings,
and he could not farm, but he lost his wife,
who could not stand the isolation of country
life. Disconsolate, dejected, and desperate,
he sold more of his books, then he took
menial jobs. But he never lost faith that one
day he would return to his project. A more
determined man has seldom lived than
Ferdinand Hassler. He refused a flattering
offer to go to Russia, saying that, though
not paid in money, he would accomplish
an invaluable labor for the American Re-
public that would never perish.
Finally, in 1830, Hassler received a com-
mission that brought him back to public
life, and led, through a series of unauthorized
acts on his part, to the second of his great
works for America—a service that eventually
became the National Bureau of Standards.
His fanatic devotion to the cause of correct
measurement was well known—more signifi-
cant, perhaps, was his possession of the best
ROBERTS: HASSLER’S GIFT TO AMERICA 73
such standards in America. Congress, feeling
that the nation’s international trade was in
jeopardy because of the different concepts
of pounds and bushels entertained by the
various collectors of customs, ordered sets of
standards to be furnished them—a good
enough idea, but there were no standards!
Treasury Secretary Ingham thereupon, on
request of Congress, assigned Hassler to
inspect and review the measures used in
the customhouses.
Much of man’s great advance in civiliza-
tion has derived from his ability to measure
—thus he learned to build, to navigate, and
to trade. This early intellectual attainment
had been so prostituted since the dawn of
history, however, as to threaten the orderly
development of commerce and _ industry.
Standards were crudely defined, and lacked
uniformity. Chiseling and cheating were
rampant.
Biblical injunctions for the use of righteous
measures are many. Parliament, and later
Congress, struggled with the problem
through the centuries. George Washington
pleaded for reform of weights and measures,
but the interests of unprincipled merchants
were too strong. In 1830 the sole official
“standard” in the States was a copy, in a
vault of the Treasury, of a yard-long brass
rod established in Britain by the monarch
about 1600, and later found to have been
broken at an unknown time.
Hassler instinctively despised any misuse
of standards—probably he also appreciated
the practical value of correct measures,
whether for a yard of ribbon or a coastline.
If Congress lacked initiative to enforce
correct standards, not so Hassler! The terms
of his commission meant vastly less to him
than the demands of the situation. Without
further ado, he set up shop, announced and
promulgated standards, made and distrib-
uted copies, and entirely without authority
he constituted himself Superintendent of
Weights and Measures. Far from confining
himself to the customhouses, he extended his
authority to all the Government depart-
ments—even to the states. Congress, eventu-
ally discerning what was going on, and pre-
sumably relieved to be rid of the responsi-
bility, urged him to hasten! In 1836 a
resolution directed the Treasury Secretary to
Oe: JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
do what Hassler had already done, and to
use all the weights and measures already
established as standards—established, that
is, by Hassler! This achieved a stability
that a thousand years of effort had not
found.
The results were far-reaching. Hassler’s
weights and measures were copies, as precise
as could be made, of those in England, and
it was America’s singular privilege, upon the
burning of Parliament in 1843, to make
England a present of new ones copied from
Hassler’s copies! The Office of Weights and
Measures, child of Hassler’s initiative,
remained in the office of Superintendent of
the Coast Survey until 1901, when the
National Bureau of Standards was formed.
Much of the American story of technological
advancement, mass production methods,
and flourishing business based on trust in
honest measures, has been directly due to
Hassler’s work and to the honest and objec-
tive scientific work since carried out by the
Bureau of Standards in keeping with his
traditions.
Successful public service in connection
with standards earned him a measure of
public esteem, so that Congress, long since
dismayed at the lack of progress on the
survey of the coast, finally authorized
Hassler’s reinstatement. This appointment
was to last the rest of his life. On this oc-
casion the Astronomical Journal saw fit to
announce, “The editor cannot omit herewith
to present to the Government of the United
States his thanks, in which all men who
take an interest in exact sciences will join
him, for having taken up again this beautiful
work, that had been begun by Mr. Hassler
sixteen years ago. This work could certainly
not be executed better by any other man
than him, who in its beginning had already
shown so much talent.”
Operations began about 1832. Known in
midcentury as the ‘Coast Survey,” the
bureau eventually became the “Coast and
Geodetic Survey”? when the nation-wide
geodetic surveys started so painfully by
Hassler in 1816 became recognized by
engineers and mappers as fundamental to
their work. In its long history the Survey
has. established procedures looked on as
definitive the world around, yet it has re-
VOL. 48, NO. 3
mained small and little-known except to
those it directly serves—doubtless as Hassler
would have wished.
The years of his later period were stormy.
Among his high-handed practices was the
witholding of charts needed by mariners
until he could personally verify them. He
remained proud and intolerant, drawing
down antagonism on himself by his uncon-
cealed scorn of official interference. In his
code only scientists could evaluate the work
of scientists. When an investigating commit-
tee of Congress visited him, he sent them
away with scathing denunciations of their
presumption—giving rise to mirth in Con-
eress, but little in the way of financial sup-
port. This irascible man, nevertheless,
brought hardened political and public
opinion to his support in the end.
By 1835 a foundation of survey control in
the New York area permitted start of
hydrographic work. The schooner Expert-
ment and the brig Washington were the first
of along line of survey ships that were to sail
across the unknown seas that were to become
vast indeed with the growth of the Republic.
The labors of these sailing craft were plodding
and slow, but to Hassler and all American
mariners they represented the first fruits of
the work authorized 28 years before.
Everyone was impressed—even Congress
—when many rocks and ledges were brought
to light in the nearby waters of Long Island
Sound. A dramatic discovery was the
Gedney Channel approaching New York
from the southeast by Sandy Hook, which
eave rise to the interesting speculation that
had the friendly French fleet known of it
in 1778, a coup of major importance might
have been executed against the British ships
within.
Hassler lived to see the first surveys done
between Rhode Island and Delaware Bay,
and the country soundly embarked on the
course he had set, and his work appreciated.
Some years after his death Sir R. I. Murchi-
son characterized the Survey, before the
Geographical Society of London, as “one
of the most perfect exemplifications of
applied science in modern times.” In 1879
Martha Lamb could say, in the language of
the day in Harper’s Magazine, ‘In human
progress within the present century there 1s no
Marcu 1958
greater marvel than the operations of the
Coast Survey.”
All his life Hassler fought short-sighted
men eager for quick, cheap results, heedless
of lasting values. He won, teaching America
some of the fundamental things we now take
for granted. Science is based on truth and
orderly development of ideas, not on short
cuts. It is not political nor sectional, but
universal and fundamental. Morale and
interest are essential, and the scientific
worker deserves a fair living and honor—not
easily come by in Hassler’s time.
It may be doubted that America was ever
served by a more consecrated man. No one
could doubt it who could have seen him
night after night in his office, past midnight
at a candle-lit table, checking computations,
verifying charted soundings, or writing
reports. He was doing work for which his
ROBERTS: HASSLER’S GIFT TO AMERICA (2
appropriations did not provide workers, and
seeing personally to the attainment of his
own impeccable standards for the work.
When he could spare himself from the
office, or from the incessant demand of
Congress for explanations, he endured the
hardships of travel and field life, personally
to perform the more important observations.
In 1843, during a storm, Hassler, trying to
protect one of his cherished instruments
from the elements, fell in the darkness, in-
juring himself on a projecting rock. Aged 73
years, and weakened by a lifetime of relent-
less work, he died from this mishap. He died
in pursuit of his vision, probably little realiz-
ing how long enduring his example would be.
In 1957,the one hundred and fiftieth anniver-
sary of the survey of the coast, the realization
became vivid indeed!
a RR
INTERACTION OF DIRECT AZO DYES IN AQUEOUS SOLUTION
National Bureau of Standards research on the
properties of materials is providing evidence of a
fundamental relationship between the attach-
ment of direct azo dyes to cotton and the chem-
ical association of these dyes in mixtures.! The
correlation results from a current study of spec-
tral changes of organic dyes as caused by light,
heat, and concentration variables. Partially spon-
sored by the Air Force Office of Scientific Re-
search, the program is being conducted by J. H.
Gould and M. N. Inscoe of the NBS staff in
collaboration with W. R. Brode, Associate Direc-
tor of the Bureau. While the results apply pri-
marily to changes in solution, they may provide
a valuable basis for further investigations of dye
adherence to fabrics.
Direct, or substantive, azo dyes have a strong
affinity for cellulose and adhere directly to the
fibers when applied from a boiling neutral solu-
tion. This is important in the textile industry
since cotton is 99 percent cellulose and since the
structure of rayon is also based on this funda-
mental molecule.
1For further technical information, see The re-
lation between the absorption spectra and the chem-
ical constitution of dyes. XXIX, The interaction
of direct azo dyes in aqueous solution, M. N. INscon,
J. H. Goutp, M. E. Corninea, and W. R. Brops,
Journ. Res. NBS 60:65. 1958. RP 2823.
The behavior of direct dyes applied from dye
baths containing mixtures of dyes often differs
from that of the individual dyes. In general, the
altered characteristics are attributed to interac-
tion or complex formation between unlike mole-
cules and include an increase in time to reach
equilibrium, a decrease in the amount of one or
both of the dyes absorbed at equilibrium, or a
greater unevenness in the dyeing.
When the absorption spectrum of a mixture of
azo dyes in aqueous solution is not the same as
the sum of the spectra of the individual com-
ponents in separate solutions, the result is called
a “non-additive’
tion curve is an inherent characteristic of the dye
)
spectrum. Because the absorp-
molecule, nonadditive spectra are indications of
interaction. No spectral changes were noted when
ageregation occurred at the concentrations used
in this study. Aggregation is defined here as the
complex association of like molecules.
In the present experiments, 30 direct azo dves
differing in aromatic components, number of azo
eroups, and arrangement of substituents were
studied in various combinations. To insure solu-
bility in a water solution, all of these dyes were
sulfonic acid (—SOsNa) derivatives.
To obtain the graphie addition spectrum of two
individual dyes, the two dyes in separate solu-
76 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
tions were measured simultaneously in the spec-
trophotometer. Then, the same components were
mixed and remeasured. If this latter spectrum was
not the same as the initial spectrum, it was
assumed that interaction had taken place.
Although mixtures of direct dyes usually gave
nonadditive spectra, there were two general
situations in which additive spectra were ob-
tained instead of the expected nonadditive curves.
In the first of these, the steric hindrance by
central sulfonic acid groups prevented interaction
between the two dyes. This effect is caused either
by the bulkiness of the acid groups, which could
interfere with the close approach of the molecules
of the dyes, or by the mutual repulsion between
the like negative charges, which could also hinder
the molecules from drawing near each other.
Additive spectra were also noted when the
terminal groupings on both components were
identical or very similar. It is probable that inter-
action may occur in such cases but does not
produce marked spectral changes because of the
similarity between the two dyes. Interaction in
such a mixture is comparable to aggregation in a
solution of the individual dye, and the degree of
ageregation does not produce significant anoma-
lous behavior with direct azo dyes.
The acid azo dyes, as opposed to the direct azo
dyes, do not adhere directly to cotton nor are
they appreciably aggregated at higher concentra-
tions or by inorganic salts. An acid dye generally
contains a shorter conjugated chain (alternating
double and single bonds) than does a direct dye.
VOL. 48, NO. 3
The repulsion of the negatively charged sulfonic
acid groups on the molecule and the increased
solubility caused by these groups are effective in
keeping the molecules separated. Because of these
factors, the dyes show little tendency toward in-
teraction in mixtures with the direct azo dyes.
Basic dyes, e.g., methyl violet or methylene
blue, as well as some substantive fluorescent
brightening agents, were shown to give nonaddi-
tive spectra in mixtures with various other dyes.
The presence of foreign substances in the dye
solution influences the state of aggregation of the
dyes as well as their behavior in dyeing. The
addition of inorganic salts increases aggregation
of the dye as well as the amount of dye taken up
by the fiber. Other substances may have an
opposite effect. For example, pyridine inhibits the
aggregation of azo dyes and also decreases the
affinity of these dyes for cellulose to such an
extent that it can be used as a “‘stripping”’ agent
to remove the dye from the fiber. Such substances
also influence the interaction of azo dyes in mix-
tures.
Alcohol and non-ionic detergents—both effec-
tive in decreasing the aggregation of direct azo
dyes—prevent interaction. Mixtures of dyes that
normally give nonadditive spectra gave additive
spectra in solutions containing 40 percent alcohol
or 0.1 percent of a nonionic detergent. On the
other hand, the addition of inorganic salts or a
large increase in the dye concentration produced
spectral changes which indicated greater associa-
tion between the dyes.
A naturalists life would be a happy one af he had only to observe and never to write.—
CHARLES DARWIN.
Marcu 1958
HUMES: ANTILLESIA
CARDISOMAE WH
ZOOLOGY .—Antillesia cardisomae, n. gen. and sp. (Copepoda: H arpacticoida)
from the gill chambers of land crabs, with observations on the related genus Can-
crinola. ARTHUR G. HuMgEs, Boston University. (Communicated by Fenner
A. Chace, Jr.)
(Received July 22, 1957)
Harpacticoid copepods living in the gill
chambers of land crabs have been described
from Jamaica and Louisiana, but little is
known about these parasites in other
regions of the Gulf of Mexico and the West
Indies. Several persons, acknowledged be-
low, have kindly supplied me with copepods
from crabs of the West Indian and Gulf
regions. Additional specimens have been
recovered from crabs in the collection of the
Museum of Comparative Zoology at Har-
vard University. This has made possible a
redescription of certain features of Can-
crincola jamaicensis Wilson and C. plumipes
Humes, and the description of the new
genus and species below. |
This study was aided by a grant from the
National Science Foundation.
Cancrincola jamaicensis Wilson, 1913
This species was described from specimens
taken from the gill chambers of Cardisoma
guanhumi Latreille at Montego Bay, Jamaica.
Since certain inadequacies and discrepancies
exist in the original description, the type speci-
mens were sought for study. Unfortunately, the
type, U.S.N.M. no. 43506, has disappeared from
its vial and can not be located. The paratypes,
U.S.N.M. no. 32596, have dried up and are use-
less for study.
Other specimens of C. jamaicensis have been
mentioned in published papers or listed in mu-
seum collections, but these are probably not very
Tehiable. Dr. A. 5S. Pearse collected copepods
from Cardisoma guanhumi on July 15, 1931
(U.S.N.M. no. 69804) at Key West, Fla. These
specimens, which he identified as C. jamaicensis,
have unfortunately become dry and are of no
use for study. On August 2, 1931, he found two
copepods in Paguristes punctipes Benedict at
Loggerhead Key, Tortugas, Fla. These, U.'S.N.M.
no. 69811, are labeled C. jamaicensis. I have
studied them and find that they do not belong
to the genus Cancrincola, perhaps being acciden-
ally present. On July 1, 19381, Dr. Pearse found
copepods (U.S.N.M. no. 69807) in the gill cham-
bers of Microphrys bicornutus (Latreille) at Tortu-
gas, Fla. These were identified by him as C. jamaz-
censis and are the specimens referred to by Wilson
(1935) as living in this crab. I have examined the
single specimen remaining in the vial and find that
it is not a Cancrincola but rather another copepod
accidentally present. Pearse (1951) listed C. j7ama-
awensis from Gecarcinus sp., C. guanhumi, and Pa-
nopeus herbstu H. Milne-Edwards at Bimini, Baha-
mas. I have studied a specimen (U.S.N.M. no.
88572) from his Gecarcinus and find that it is
neither Cancrincola nor the new genus to be
described below. Other specimens (U.S.N.M. no.
88571) from his Cardisoma are not Cancrincola
but belong instead to the new genus to be
described on subsequent pages.
Because of the mistaken identity of these
copepods, casting doubt on the identification of
Pearse’s now dried specimens from Key West
and those from Panopeus at Bimini, it seems best
to discount all records concerning C. jamaicensis
in the preceding paragraph. The only well-sub-
stantiated New World record to date is Wilson’s
original collection at Montego Bay, Jamaica,
made in the summer of 1910.
Oswald N. Morris has sent me a single female
Cancrincola taken from the gill chambers of a
Cardisoma guanhumi collected on March 23,
1957, on the banks of the Barnett River near the
Bogue Islands, Montego Bay, Jamaica. This
specimen may be considered as a topotype. It
measures 0.684 by 0.156 mm, and the measure-
ments of leg 1 are: length and width of the first
podomere of the endopodite 73 by I4u, length
of the inner seta 61, length of the second podo-
mere 24u, and length of the exopodite 59x.
Dr. Peter F. Bellinger, of the University Col-
lege of the West Indies, has sent me harpacticoid
copepods from C. guanhumi taken in November
1955, and again in February and May 1956,
on the mud flats at Port Henderson, St.
Catherine, Jamaica. One of the two species in
these lots resembles in all major respects Wilson's
C. jamaicensts. Although these ean not be con
78 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
sidered as topotypes, they come from the same
island and from the same host crab. In the ab-
sence of type specimens or other comparative
material and in view of the desirability of clarity-
ing certain points in the original description,
selected features of these C. jamaicensis from
Port Henderson are described here.
Female—The total length, including the
caudal rami, based on five specimens, is 0.691
mm (0.624-0.815 mm). The greatest width of the
thorax is 0.146 mm (0.144-0.150 mm). The
aesthetask on the fourth podomere of the first
antenna (Fig. 1) is 41u long (39-43y), based on
seven specimens, tapering smoothly in its distal
half, with no constriction. The single egg sac
contains 10 eggs (8-13, based on 10 specimens).
The average measurements, based on three speci-
mens, of leg 1 (Fig. 2) are: length and width of
the first podomere of the endopodite 73 by 14,
length of the inner seta 62u, length of the second
podomere 22, and length of the exopodite 63u.
Leg 5 (Fig. 3) lacks the minute setae on the
margin of the inner expansion. The lengths of
the long setae on the inner expansion of the basal
podomere and on the distal podomere are as
follows (beginning with the outermost):
DistaL PODOMERE
20h 52 33 56 92
18-21p 48-55 31-35 53-57
INNER EXPANSION
52 85 33 29 22
48-57 80-88 32-34 28-31 21-22
Instead of the condition described by Wilson,
the armature of the caudal ramus is like that to
be described below for C. plumzpes, the armature
of the second antenna corresponds to that of
(. plumipes, and the armature of legs 1 and 5 1s
as indicated in Figs. 2 and 3. One may presume
that these minute discrepancies are errors in the
original description.
In Wilson’s original description of C. jamaic-
ensis the female is 0.8 by 0.175 mm and the male
0.88 by 0.17
larger than
mm, measurements somewhat
my measurements of Jamaican
VOL. 48, NO. 3
specimens. The length of Wilson’s female falls
within my size range, however. His male is larger
than any that I have found. Furthermore, his
male is even larger than the female, a condition
not observed in any of the species of Cancrincola
which I have studied. The size differences may be
caused by Wilson’s measurements having been
made on fresh and uncontracted specimens.
Male.—The total length, including the caudal
rami, based on three specimens, is 0.629 mm
(0.586-0.715 mm). The greatest width of the
thorax is 0.136 mm (0.134-0.140 mm). The
first antenna has a small terminal hook. The
aesthetask on the fourth podomere is 52u long
(50-57u, based on seven specimens). Leg 3
(Fig. 4) has a relatively short middle seta on the
end of the endopodite. Leg 5 (Fig. 5) has either
five or six setae. If six, the two outermost are
distally plumose, the next three setae are situated
on the end of a small lamella, and the innermost
is on a short pedicel. If five (Fig. 6), only two
setae are on the lamella. A minute peglike pro-
jection is often visible, though sometimes only
with difficulty, on both sides of the lamella.
Other specimens of C. jamaicensis have been
sent to me from St. James, Barbados, by
John B. Lewis, of the Bellairs Research Institute
of McGill University. They were taken in No-
vember 1955 from Cardisoma guanhumt.
Dr. Robert L. Blickle has sent me specimens
of C. jamaicensis collected on May 24, 1957,
from C. guanhumi at Vero Beach, Fla.
Through the courtesy of Dr. Dorothy E.
Bliss I have collected C. jamaicensis from the
same host crab sent to her from the Lerner Marine
Laboratory of the American Museum of Natural
History at Bimini, Bahamas. Although several
specimens of Gecarcinus lateralis (Freminville)
from the same locality were examined, no cope-
pods were found, in spite of the Cardisoma in
the region being heavily parasitized.
Specimens of C. jamaicensis were washed out
of the gill chambers of Cardisoma guanhumt in
the collection of the Museum of Comparative
Zoology at Harvard University. The crabs para-
sitized were from Cannavieiras, Brazil (M.C.Z. no.
All figures were drawn with the aid of a camera lucida. The letter following each figure title refers
to the scale at which the figure was drawn.
Fics. 1-3.—Cancrincola jamaicensis Wilson, female: 1, Aesthetask on the first antenna (B); 2, leg 1
(A); 3, leg 5 (C).
Fias. 4-6.—Same, male: 4, Leg 4 (A); 9, leg 5 (B); 6, leg 5 (B).
Fias. 7-10.—Cancrincola plumipes Humes, female: 7, First antenna (C); 8, mandible (B); 9, leg 1
(A); 10, leg 2 (A).
We Oa
NACE SS
(ED ALY Ly hha fag
we ee) eee
wy,
80 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
5609), Pernambuco, Brazil (no. 5610), Grand
Anse, Haiti (no. 5602), St. Kitts (no. 5604), Swan
Island (no. 8659), and Bahia Honda, Cuba
(no. 5601).
The known distribution of Cancrincola jamatc-
ensis is shown on the accompanying map. The
copepod probably occurs throughout the range
of the host crab, Cardisoma guanhumi, which
Rathbun (1917) gives as ‘‘Bahamas, Southern
Florida, West Indies, Texas to Sao Paulo, Brazil,
and Bermudas.” The copepod parasitizes Cardt-
soma armatum Herklots and Sesarma huzardt
(Desmarest) in West Africa, where Humes
(1957) reported it from several localities from
Dakar to Pointe-Noire, as indicated on the map.
Cancrincola plumipes Humes, 1941
Several hundred topotypes were collected from
the gill chambers of Sesarma reticulatum (Say)
in July 1941 at Grand Isle, La. Since the original
description inadequately mentions certain fea-
tures, supplementary notes are presented here.
Female.—The first antenna and the rostrum
are as indicated in Fig. 7. The aesthetask is 52u
long (48-56u) with a noticeable constriction in
its distal half. The mandible (Fig. 8) has a weakly
subdivided palp bearing four terminal setae.
Legs 1-4 have the following spine and setal
formula:
leg 1 leg 2
exp end exp end
ist podomere 1:0 0:1 1:0 0:1
2d podomere ei 3 1:1 0:1
3d podomere 5 6 4
leg 3 leg 4
exp end exp end
ist podomere 1:0 0:1 1:0 0:1
2d podomere eit 0:0 1:0 0:0
3d podomere 6 5 5 5
The average measurements (based on seven
specimens) of leg 1 (Fig. 9) are: length and width
of the first podomere of the endopodite 83 x 14u
(81-844 X 14), length of the inner seta A2Qu
(41-43), length of the second podomere 22u
(21-23), and length of the exopodite 64u (62—
67u). Legs 2, 3, and 4 are as shown in Figs. 10,
11, and 12, respectively.
Leg 5 (Fig. 13) has three minute peglike pro-
jections on the margin of the distal podomere.
The lengths of the setae on the inner expansion
VOL. 48, NO. 3
of the basal podomere and the distal podomere
are as follows (beginning with the outermost):
DistaL PoDOMERE
194 38 28 51 116
18-20p 30-49 26-31 43-56 105-128
INNER EXPANSION
50 88 29 27 24
44-56 83-92 27-31 25-28 21-26
There are a few minute setae on the inner margin
and the outer distal corner of the inner expansion.
The caudal ramus (Fig. 14) is short, its width
ereater than its length, with a single long terminal
seta and smaller setae as indicated in the figure.
Male.—The first antenna (Fig. 15) has a small
terminal hook and three pectinate setae as shown
in the figure. Leg 3 (Fig. 16) has a relatively short
middle seta on the end of the endopodite. The
spine and setal formula of legs 1-4 is like that of
the female. Leg 5 (Fig. 17) has five setae, the two
innermost distally plumose, the next two on a
lamella, and the outermost pedicellate. The
abdomen is 4-segmented.
C. plumipes differs from C. jamaicensis in
having a constriction in the distal half of the
aesthetask on the first antenna, in the endopodite
of leg 1 being relatively longer and its inner seta
distinctly shorter, in having a few minute setae
along the inner margin and at the outer distal
corner of the inner expansion of leg 5 in the
female, in the long setae on the inner expansion
and distal podomere of leg 5 in the female being
of somewhat different lengths, and in having two
setae invariably on the lamella of leg 5 in the
male.
Other specimens of C. plumipes, recovered
from S. reticulatum, have been sent to me by
Marvin Wass from Alligator Harbor, on the
northwest coast of Florida.
This species was also recovered from washings
of the gill chambers of S. reticulatum from Tiver-
ton, Rhode Island (M.C.Z. no. 10936). The range
of C. plumipes probably coincides with that of
the host crab, which Rathbun (1917) gives as
“from Woods Hole, Massachusetts, to Calhoun
County, Texas.”
C. plumipes has also been recovered from
Sesarma cinereum (Bosc) at three localities.
Over 100 copepods were found in the gill cham-
Fries. 11-14.—Cancrincola plumipes Humes, female: 11, Leg 3 (A); 12, leg 4 (A); 13, leg 5 (C); 14, cau-
dal ramus, ventral (C).
Figs. 15-17._Same, male: 15, First antenna (C); 16, leg 3 (A); 17, leg 5 (B).
Fires. 18, 19.—Antillesta cardisomae, n. gen. and sp., female: 18, Dorsal (F); 19, lateral (F).
LSS PL LLE
— 2
I9
s. 11-19.—(For legend see opposite p:
FiaG
82 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
bers of 19 of these crabs at Bears Bluff, Wadma-
law Island, 8. C., collected in June 1957 by
G. Robert Lunz. These specimens show the
features distinctive of C. plumipes but are smaller.
The average total length of 10 females is 0.549
mm (0.504-0.600 mm) and of 10 males 0.544
mm (0.504-0.576 mm). The measurements of
certain parts are proportionately smaller:
aesthetask on the first antenna of the female
48u (42-53), first podomere of the endopodite
of leg 1 of the female 71 x 14u (64-78u X 14y),
its inner seta 35u (28-42u), second podomere
22u, exopodite of leg 1 of the female 60y (53-73).
The setae of the fifth leg of the female are: 17,
93, 24, 45, 107, 48, 72, 27, 24, and 23, respec-
tively.
Two females from S. cinereum at Alligator
Harbor, Fla., show variations in the spine and
setal formula of the swimming legs. In both the
exopodite of leg 1 is 1:0, 1:0, 5. The endopodite
of leg 2 in one female is 0:1, 1:1, 3. Leg 4 in the
oar 1s 20), igi. & ancl Mell, Weil, d:
Nine females and 2 males from S. cinerewm
at Jacksonville, Fla. (M.C.Z. no. 6208) conform
closely to the specimens of C. plumipes from
South Carolina.
Presumably the copepod occurs throughout the
range of Sesarma cinereum, which Rathbun
(1917) gives as ‘from Chesapeake Bay (Arundel-
on-the-Bay) to Tampico, Mexico.”’
Cancrincola longiseta Humes, 1957
Specimens of this copepod, known previously
only from Goniopsis cruentata (Latreille) in West
Africa, were recovered from the same host crab
at Caruca, Rio Maria, Brazil (M.C.Z. no. 6167),
Victoria, Brazil (6164), Santa Clara, Rio Mucury,
Brazil (no. 8777), Pernambuco, Brazil (no. 6165),
Rio de Janeiro, Brazil (no. 6168), Panama
(no. 6160), Jeremie, Haiti (no. 6159), and the
Bermudas (no. 8730). Apparently the copepod
occurs throughout the range of the crab (“Ba-
hamas and Gulf of Mexico to Province of Sao
Paulo, Brazil; Bermudas; West Africa,’’ accord-
ing to Rathbun, 1917). The accompanying
map shows its known distribution, including
the localities in West Africa cited by Humes
(1957).
VOL. 48, NO. 3
Antillesia, n. gen.
Body elongated, cylindrical. No operculum.
Caudal ramus nearly three times longer than
wide, bearing terminally an inner long seta and
an outer, short, pectinate, recurved seta. Rostrum
minute and rounded. First antenna of female
8-jointed, without plumose setae; aesthetask
on fourth podomere. First antenna of male 7-
jointed and slightly prehensile, but lacking a
terminal hook. Second antenna with a single-
jointed exopodite. Mandible with a 2-jointed
palp. First maxilla, second maxilla, and maxil-
liped resembling in general those of Cancrincola.
Leg 1 with a 2-jointed, prehensile endopodite
distinctly longer than the 3-jointed exopodite.
Both rami of legs 2, 3, and 4 three-jointed, the
exopodites somewhat longer than the endopo-
dites, with the spine and setal formula as given
in the description below. Leg 3 in the male with
next to outermost terminal seta of endopodite
relatively very short. Leg 5 of the female with
the basal podomere bearing five setae on the
inner expansion and one outer seta, and the distal
podomere having five setae, of which the next to
the innermost is the longest. Leg 5 in the male
with the basal podomere lacking the imner ex-
pansion and bearing only the outer seta, and
with the distal podomere having four terminal
setae. Female genital field with a pair of phumose
setae. Egg sac containing a single layer of eggs
and carried with one narrow edge along the ven-
tral abdominal surface. Abdomen (somites pos-
terior to the genital) 4-segmented in both sexes.
Type species—Antillesta cardisomae, N. sp.
(The generic name alludes to the wide distribu-
tion of the genus in the Antilles, and the specific
name to the crab host.)
Antillesia cardisomae, n. sp.
Type material—More than 60 individuals
representing both sexes, from the gill chambers
of Cardisoma guanhumi Latreille collected in
November 1955 on a mud flat at Port Henderson,
St. Catherine, Jamaica, by Dr. Peter F. Bellinger.
Holotype, allotype, and 28 paratypes (18 fe-
males and 10 males) deposited in the United
Fics. 20-31.—Antillesia cardisomae, n. gen. and sp., female: 20, Rostrum, dorsal (B); 21, genital seg-
ment and abdomen, ventral (D); 22, caudal ramus, dorsal (A); 23, first antenna (C); 24, aesthetask on
the first antenna (B); 25, second antenna (C); 26, labrum, ventral (B); 27, mandible (B); 28, oblique
view of tip of the mandible (B); 29, first maxilla (B); 30, second maxilla (B); 31, maxilliped (B).
24
SCALE E. 0.5 MM
=
2
om
fo)
uw
WwW
}
<
B)
Ww
AE amet ea ,
‘aL Hen
eS TUE yyuat N
el
Fires. 20-31.
yw
ee /)
yi
yn ayn
(For legend see opposite page.)
84 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
States National Museum; the remaining para-
types in the author’s collection.
Female.—Total length, not including setae,
based on eight specimens, 1.051 mm (0.900-1.272
mm). Greatest width of thorax 0.130 mm (0.112-
0.141 mm). Body (Figs. 18 and 19) colorless in
aleohol. Rostrum (Fig. 20) minute, rounded,
with two slender dorsal setae. Abdomen (Fig. 21)
4-segmented, with transverse rows of minute
setae. Caudal ramus (Fig. 22) elongated, about
2.8 times longer than wide, bearing terminally
a long inner seta (570m) and a shorter, slightly
curved, unilaterally pectinate outer seta (135p),
and four smaller setae as indicated in the figure.
First antenna (Fig. 23) 8-jointed, the aesthe-
task on the fourth podomere (Fig. 24) 40 long
and extending only to the middle of the seventh.
Second antenna (Fig. 25) with a very short basal
podomere, a long middle podomere incompletely
divided on the mid-inner margin and bearing a
single-jointed exopodite tipped with three setae,
and a terminal podomere having four setae and
a spine distally, numerous small spines along its
inner edge, and a low protuberance covered with
short hairs at the outer distal corner. Posterior
margin of labrum (Fig. 26) slightly dentate
medially and pectinate laterally. Mandible
(Fig. 27) with a swollen base, a 2-jointed palp
having four distal setae, and an elongate, indis-
tinctly bipartite blade showing a prominent
anterior protuberance and distally (Fig. 28) three
ventral teeth, a dorsal seta, and numerous smaller
teeth between. First maxilla (Fig. 29) with a
broad inner lobe having two slender, curved
setae on its anterior surface and distally two
broad pectinate setae plus several smaller ones;
with two slender outer lobes and an external
seta. Second maxilla (Fig. 30) terminating in a
clawlike spine and a pectinate seta; other parts
as indicated in the figure. Maxilliped (Fig. 31)
2-jointed, the first podomere bearing a distal
swollen plumose seta, the second bearing ter-
minally a long curved pectinate claw with a
minute seta near its base.
Rami of legs 1-4 3-jointed, except the 2-jointed
endopodite of leg 1 (Fig. 32). Average measure-
ments of leg 1, based on 10 specimens: length
and width of the first podomere of the endopodite
98 x 18 (96-103u x 17-20u), length of the
VOL. 48, NO. 3
inner seta 1024 (90-110u), length of the second
podomere 20u (18-22), and length of the exopo-
dite 68u (64-70u). Prominent groups of spines
on the distal outer angles of the first and second
exopodite podomeres of all four legs and of the
second endopodite podomere of legs 2-4 (Figs.
33, 34, and 35). The spine and setal formula of
legs 1-4 as follows:
leg 1 leg 2
exp end exp end
1st podomere 1:0 0:1 1:0 0:1
2d podomere 1:0 3 1:1 0:1
3d podomere 5 6 4
leg 3 leg 4
exp end exp end
lst podomere 1:0 0:1 1:0 0:1
2d podomere 1:1 0:1 ei 0:1
3d podomere 6 5 6 5
Long inner seta on the second exopodite podo-
mere of leg 1 absent.
Leg 5 (Fig. 36) with the inner expansion of the
basal podomere having five terminal setae and in
some specimens a row of small setae along the
outer edge. A single outer seta on the basal podo-
mere. Distal podomere with five terminal setae
and a minute blunt peg about midway along the
outer edge. The lengths of the setae (beginning
with the outermost) as follows:
Distar PODOMERE
13u 54 59 116 17
11-17 45-58 56-64 102-128
INNER EXPANSION
42 94 60 39 29
86-99 53-67 29-47 23-38
Genital field (Fig. 37) with a single plumose
seta, directed posteriorly, on both sides.
Egg sac (Fig. 38) 386u long, reaching to slightly
beyond the middle of the third abdominal seg-
ment. Usually 8 eggs (5-9, based on 6 specimens)
in a single layer. Flat plane of the egg sac oriented
vertically to the abdomen, so that in ventral
view of the entire female the egg sac appears to
be a single row of eggs, only the edge of the sac
being visible.
Male.—Body form as in Fig. 39. Total length,
based on 10 specimens, 0.789 mm (0.700-0.943
mm). Greatest width of thorax 0.120 mm (0.112—
0.125 mm). Abdomen (Fig. 40) 4-segmented,
Fics. 32-38.—Antillesia cardisomae, n. gen. and sp., female: 32, Leg 1 (A); 33, leg 2 (A); 34, leg 3 (A);
35, leg 4 (A); 36, leg 5 (C); 37, genital field (B); 38, egg sac (EH).
Fic. 39.—Same, male: Dorsal (F).
NX WK g thd
rR Se ee SDS OODARERES SS
SEX RRR LVOOQRRRWIMD
Thy — — rr ¥2
35 SSE
y
x A S=s=— a REL LES
Wy SV y
V
J;
/
jj
Fras. 32-39 —(For legend see opposite page.)
86 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
with transverse rows of setae. First antenna
(Fig. 41) 7-jointed and slightly prehensile, the
fourth podomere bearing an aesthetask 90 long,
extending well beyond the tip of the antenna.
Last podomere (Fig. 42) with a slender aesthe-
task.
Legs 1-4 like those of the female, with the
same spine and setal formula, except for the en-
dopodite of leg 3 (Fig. 43) which has the next to
the outermost terminal seta much shorter than
in the female.
Leg 5 (Fig. 44) with an outer pedicellate seta
49u long on the basal podomere. Distal podomere
20 X ll» with 4 terminal setae 12, 56, 61, and
30u, respectively, beginning with the outermost.
Spermatophore (Fig. 45) oval with a slender
recurved neck.
Remaining parts like those of the female.
Oswald N. Morris has sent me specimens of
A. cardisomae from Cardisoma guanhumi found
on the banks of the Barnett River, near the
Bogue Islands, Montego Bay, Jamaica, March
MB. MSS.
John B. Lewis found this copepod in C. guan-
humi at St. James, Barbados, in November
1955. These specimens differ only slightly from
the Jamaican ones. The small setae along the
outer edge of the inner expansion of the fifth leg
are lacking. Since these setae are sometimes
absent in Jamaican specimens, their presence or
absence can not be regarded as a distinctive
specific character. The lengths of the setae on
leg 5 (based on nine specimens) are as follows
(beginning with the outermost):
DistaL PODOMERE
14p 48 54 113 83
13-14p 46-53 49-59 90-121 67-98
INNER EXPANSION
47 82 55 30 23
36-56 74-93 32-63 27-35 19-28
The average measurements of leg 1 of 10
females are: length and width of the first podo-
mere of the endopodite 95 by 16 (85-105u x
14-18), length of the inner seta 92u (86-105y),
length of the second podomere 21u, and length
of the exopodite 68u (64-73).
I have examined specimens from Cardisoma
VOL. 48, NO. 3
guanhumi sent to Dr. Dorothy E. Bliss in 1955
from the Lerner Marine Laboratory at Bimini,
Bahamas. In these the small setae along the
outer margin of the inner expansion of leg 5 are
absent. The lengths of the setae of legs 1 and 5
are somewhat different. The average measure-
ments of leg 1 of 10 females are: length and width
of the first podomere of the endopodite 84 X 1dy,
length of the inner seta 82u, length of the second
podomere 18u, and length of the exopodite 63y.
The setae of leg 5 are as follows (beginning with
the outermost) :
DistTaAL PODOMERE
13u 37 50 104 64
11-15 33-43 43-59 96-115 56-75
INNER EXPANSION
33 75 49 25 i17/
27-42 61-91 39-56 19-31 14-22
In nearly all cases the extreme ranges of these
setae overlap those of the Jamaican specimens.
It does not seem possible, therefore, to regard
the Barbados and Bahama specimens as other
than representing size variations within popula-
tions of the same species.
Considerable individual variation exists in
this species. Not uncommonly the setae may be
partially retracted (Figs. 46 and 47). Occasionally
(in 5 out of 30 females dissected) one or more
setae on leg 5 may be absent (Fig. 48), giving the
leg an asymmetrical appearance. The setae on
leg 5 in the same individual may vary markedly
in length. In one specimen from Bimini, for ex-
ample, the three innermost setae on the imner
expansion measured 45, 19, and 14u on one side
and 36, 31, and 15u on the opposite side. Great
care should be exercised in interpreting the signifi-
cance of setal variation in both number and length
unless sufficient specimens are available for study.
Description based on a single specimen may not
always express the usual condition.
Although specimens of Gecarcinus lateralis
from the same localities in the Barbados and the
Bahamas were examined, no copepods were
encountered, indicating a rather narrow host
specificity.
Other specimens of A. cardisomae were re-
covered from washings of the gill chambers of
C. guanhumi from Key West, Fla. (MLC.Z. no.
Fias. 40-45.—A ntillesia cardisomae, n. gen. and sp., male: 40, Genital segment and abdomen, ventral
(D); 41, first antenna (C); 42, last podomere of first antenna (B); 43, leg 3 (A); 44, leg 5 (B); 45, sper-
matophore (C).
Fics. 46-48.—Same, female: 46, Endopodite of leg 1 with partially retracted seta (A); 47, distal po-
domere of leg 5 with partially retracted seta (C); 48, abnormal leg 5 (C).
A5
Frias. 40-48.—(For legend see opposite page.)
46
——_
SEA,
Sy X
PPP TT VOT
VOL. 48, NO. 3
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
88
SAIWNH VLIVIASY88V VWIOONIYONVO, ©
SSWNH VL3SSISONO1 VIOONIYONVD @
SAWNNH S3dINMId VIODNIBYONVD @
NOSTIM SISNSDIVWVYEF VIOONIYONVD @
SSWNH 3JVWOSIGYVD VISATILNV
Marcy 1958
5600), Swan Island (no. 8659), Guanta, Vene-
zuela (no. 9054), Grand Anse, Haiti (no. 5602),
and Bahia Honda, Cuba (no. 5601). The known
range of this copepod extends from the Bahamas
through the West Indies to the Barbados, as
indicated on the accompanying map.
The new harpacticoid genus Antilles1a belongs
to the Ameiridae, where it seems most closely
related to the genus Cancrincola Wilson 1913.
It differs from the latter, however, principaily
in having two terminal setae on the caudal ramus,
in lacking a seta on the inner margin of the sec-
ond exopodite podomere of leg 1 and in the spine
and setal arrangement of legs 3 and 4, in the next
to the innermost seta on the distal podomere of
leg 5 in the female being the longest, in the orien-
tation of the egg sac, in the slight sexual modifi-
cation of the seta on the last endopodite podomere
of leg 3 in the male, in the absence of a terminal
hook on the male antenna, and in the structure
of the fifth leg in the male.
SUMMARY
1. Cancrincola jamaicensis is redescribed in
part and new collection records cited, extending
its known range from Bimini, Bahamas, to Can-
navieiras, Brazil.
2. Cancrincola plumipes is also partly rede-
HUMES: ANTILLESIA CARDISOMAE 89
scribed and new collections from Florida, South
Carolina, and Rhode Island recorded. Sesarma
cinereum is reported as a new host.
3. Cancrincola longiseta, originally known only
from West Africa, is reported for the first time
in the New World, at several localities from the
Bermudas to Rio de Janeiro.
4. A new harpacticoid genus and _ species,
Antillesia cardisomae, is described from the gill
chambers of Cardisoma guanhumi at several
localities from the Bahamas to the Barbados.
LITERATURE CITED
Humes, A. G. A new harpacticoid copepod from
the gill chambers of a marsh crab. Proc. U.S.
Nat. Mus. 90: 379-386. 1941.
. The genus Cancrincola (Copepoda, Har-
pacticoida) on the west coast of Africa. Bull.
Inst. Frang. Afrique Noire, ser. A, 19: 180-191.
1957.
Pearse, A. 8. Parasitic Crustacea from Bimini,
Bahamas. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 101: 341-372.
1951.
Ratusun, M. J. The grapsoid crabs of America.
U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 97: 1-461. 1917.
Witson, C. B. Crustacean parasites of West Indian
fishes and land crabs, with descriptions of new
genera and species. Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus. 44:
189-277. 1913.
. Parasitic copepods from the Dry Tortugas.
Pap. Tortugas Lab. 29: 329-347. 1935.
Education does not mean teaching people what they do not know. It means
teaching them to behave as they do not behave.—JOHN RUSKIN.
90 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 3
ZOOLOGY —A ppalachian Cambalidae: Taxonomy and distribution (Diplopoda:
Spirostreptida). Ricoarp L. HorrMan, Blacksburg, Va.
(Received September 23, 1957)
Although the American cambaloid milli-
peds, having been the subject of a careful
treatise by H. F. Loomis in 1938, are in a
more satisfactory taxonomic condition than
most other groups of diplopods in this
country, the examination of recently ac-
quired material indicates a need for some
nomenclatorial adjustments in the genus
Cambala. Ideally such changes should be
made in the body of a complete generic
revision. Material is now being accumulated
for a detailed study of Cambala, but the
present scarcity of specimens of the very
poorly known Ozarkian and Midwestern
species will postpone its completion for an
indefinite period of time. For this reason, it
seems worthwhile to clear up the confusion
of the large eastern species promptly, before
additional synonymy accumulates in the
literature.
The problem is one that can be settled on
the basis of geographic distribution, and the
present resolution of it is due in large meas-
ure to the interest and diligence of my friend
Leslie Hubricht, collector of most of the
existing material. The following treatment
is based on 68 collections totaling well over
300 individual specimens of Cambala.
Prior to 1938 only two species of Cambala
had been named: annulata (Say 1821), of
the Atlantic coast region, and mznor (Boll-
man, 1888), of the Interior Lowlands. In his
monograph of the American cambaloids,
Loomis showed, however, that in fact two
well-marked species—easily recognizable by
several structural characters apart from the
male gonopods—occurred in the southeast
within the range previously ascribed only to
annulata.
Making what, on the basis of his limited
material, was certainly a justifiable decision,
Loomis restricted the name annulata to the
population in which the peritremata are
larger and more distinctly “pyriform” as
stipulated in Say’s original description. Of
this species, Loomis had material from the
mountains of eastern Tennessee and western
North Carolina. For the other form—the
annulata of earlier workers—he proposed the
new name Cambala cristula, an arrangement
which has been accepted by all workers who
have subsequently dealt with the group.
It is now apparent, however, on the basis
of much subsequent field work, that the
name cristula is based upon the common and
widespread member of the genus, which
ranges over much of eastern United States
and which is apparently the only cambaloid
occurring in the Atlantic Coastal Plain. On
the other hand, the species which Loomis
identified as annulata seems clearly to be
confined to a narrow strip of high country
making up the Iron and Unaka Mountain
ranges of the southern Appalachians. Inas-
much as Say’s excursion to Florida in 1818,
during which the types of annulata were
taken, was limited to the coastal area, it
seems reasonable to assume that he would
have collected the cambaloid known to
occur there rather than a species of re-
stricted range which is endemic to a region
he never visited. The qualifying adjective
“oyriform” used by Say in his description
could equally well be applied to either of
the species, although of course the peritre-
mata of the montane species are much more
accentuated and ‘‘pear-shaped.”’
This identification of the name annulata
on the basis of geographical evidence occa-
sions a certain amount of departure from
existing nomenclature. For the present, the
name cristula Loomis 1938 (type locality,
Etowah, Tenn.) will have to be regarded a
junior synonym of annulata Say 1821, with
the reservation that it will be available
should the trans-Appalachian segment of the
annulata population be found subspecifically
distinct from the typical form of the southern
Atlantic Coastal Plain. The species which
Loomis treated as annulata must now be
provided with a new name.
For the present, with extended descrip-
tions available in Loomis’s valuable paper,
it does not seem necessary to go into detail
regarding comparative morphology, a matter
which will be covered thoroughly in the
Marcu 1958
forthcoming generic revision. Only the
salient diagnostic characters of the two
Appalachian species are cited, and these two
are readily separated from all other species
by their large size as well as by details of the
male genitalia. The two species under con-
sideration may be distinguished from each
other by numerous structural differences, of
which some of the most conspicuous have
been selected for the diagnostic comparison
which follows.
It seems appropriate that the montane
Cambala be named in honor of Mr. Hubricht,
who although primarily concerned with the
study of terrestrial gastropods has nonethe-
less secured more cambalids than have all
other collectors combined, and it is largely
through his efforts that the present treat-
ment was possible.
1. Body very long and slender, 18 to 20 times as
long as wide, and distinctly narrowed toward
the anterior end; peritremata very pro-
nounced, subconical in shape, and on fourth
segment much larger than the dorsal crests;
coxal plates of anterior gonopods distally
acuminate and not concealed by the telopo-
dites; coxal process of posterior gonopods
long, slender, and simple, directed dis-
HOO ae Cambala hubrichti,n. sp.
Body distinctly stouter, 14 to 15 times as long
as broad, the anterior segments not con-
spicuously narrowed; peritremata lower and
more rounded, those of fourth segment not
larger than the dorsal crests; coxal plates of
anterior gonopods distally furecate and con-
cealed by the incurved telopodites; coxal
process of posterior gonopods short and
stout, distally with several marginal
dempakioms. 5.) 4. Cambala annulata (Say)
Cambala annulata (Say)
Julus annulatus Say, 1821, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philadelphia, 2: 108.
Cambala lactarius Gray, 1832, in Griffith: ‘‘The
Animal Kingdom, arranged in accordance with
its organization by the Baron Cuvier... etc.’’
14: pl. 135, fig. 2; 15: 784 (misidentification of
this species as Julus lactarius Say?).
Spirobolus annulatus Wood, 1865, Trans. Amer.
iiloss soc, mis.) 13): 212:
Cambala annulata Cope, 1869, Proc. Amer. Philos.
Soc. 11: 181.—Bollman, 1887, Ann. New York
mead. Sei. 4: 42- 1888 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
11: 339.—Chamberlin, 1918, Psyche 25: 24.—
Brimley, 1938, Insects of North Carolina:
498.—Chamberlin, 1947, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philadelphia 99: 58.
Cambala cristula Loomis, 1938, Proce. U. 8. Nat.
Mus. 86: 39, fig. 12; 1939, Bull. Mus. Comp.
Zool. 86: 168; 1943, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool.
92: 390.—Causey, 1952, Amer. Mid]. Nat. 50: 156.
HOFFMAN: APPALACHIAN
CAMBALIDAE Q]
Type specumen.—Female, in the British Mu-
seum (Natural History), presented by Thomas
Say.
Type locality.— ‘Southern States” (Say), prob-
ably the coastal region between Charleston, S.
C., and Jacksonville, Fla.
Distribution —The range of this species, as
known at present, is fairly extensive, extending
from central Virginia south to northern’ Florida,
west to Alabama, and north to the unglaciated
parts of Ohio and Indiana.
Most of the localities plotted on the accom-
panying map are based on specimens in my
collection. For records in the Coastal Plain, how-
ever, we must turn to the literature. In the
original description of Cambala cristula, Loomis
recorded specimens from Adams Run, Charleston
County, South Carolina, and these millipeds are
probably representative of the local population
from which Say obtained his type specimen. Sub-
sequently (1943) Loomis reported the species
from Florida Caverns, north of Marianna, Jack-
son County, Fla., and from Kymulga Cave, 7
miles northwest of Childersburg, Talladega
County, Ala., both collections being made by
Leshe Hubricht. Other records of annulata from
more western states, such as those of Bollman
(1888) for Arkansas, and Chamberlin (1918) for
Louisiana, are based upon other species of the
genus, which have been subsequently described
as new. Early records for Indiana by Bollman
(1889) are based upon specimens of Cambala
minor, but recent collections of annulata from
Jefferson County, Indiana (Hubricht) and from
Hocking County, Ohio (Bailey, Thomas, and
Walker) establish that species north of the Ohio
River in unglaciated territory.
Normally annulata is somewhat secretive in
habits, occurring at the deepest levels of humus
deposits or in the burrows of small mammals,
and this fact has doubtless been responsible for
the idea that the species is scarce. In the Appa-
lachian region of southwest Virginia and western
North Carolina, one can usually find annulata in
abundance. For instance, in the vicinity of
Blacksburg, Va., it is one of the most frequently
encountered diplopods, and large collections at-
test to its prevalence in the western Piedmont
area of North Carolina. Further to the north,
however, the species becomes very scarce, for at
Charlottesville Va., only two specimens could be
found in nearly four years of local field work, and
around Clifton Forge, in western Virginia, only
92, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
one has been collected in more than a decade of
search. No material has been seen in extensive
collections of millipeds made around Washington,
D. C., and it seems possible that annulata does
not extend farther north along the east coast
than is now known.
Altitudinally, annulata ranges from sea level
up to around 4000 feet at Highlands, N. C., and
O
fo)
(e)
fe)
fe)
0 fe)
ce)
ce)
re) (e)
0 0
VoL. 48, No. 3
Burkes Garden, Va. There appear to be no
structural variations associated from the material
from high elevations.
According to my field experience and Mr.
Hubricht’s collection data, annulata is most fre-
quently found in rather dry upland oak woods,
usually deep in humus but occasionally under
partly buried logs and rotting stumps in dry lo-
fe)
ce)
(@)
(e) -
° )
0 oO
re) (0)
QO VN Ve
10)
eee’
ra: .
ce)
a. ama 4 oO 8
a 4
O
ie)
que
ce)
_ Fig. 1.—Southeastern United States, showing the distribution of Cambala annulata (Say) by open
circles and of Cambala hubrichti, n. sp., by solid triangles. Records are based upon specimens personally
examined and literature reports considered to be reliable.
Marca 1958
cations. The species is gregarious, and usually
several can be found together. Curiously enough,
I have never discovered one in motion, even at
night when nearly all other millipeds are active.
When handled, specimens exhibit a_ peculiar
slowness and stiffness of motion, and tend to curl
into a loose spiral. Mated pairs have been found
in May and June. The observed season of activity
ranges from mid-February to November at
Blacksburg, Va.
Cambala hubrichti, n. sp.
Cambala annulata (nec Say, 1821) Loomis, 1938,
Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 86: 37, fig. 11.—Chamber-
lin, 1952, Great Basin Nat. 12:30.—Chamberlin
and Hoffman, 1958, U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 212
(in press).
Type specimens—Male holotype, U. 8. Nat.
Mus. (no. 2463), from a bluff along the Doe
River, 1 mile northwest of Hampton, Carter
County, Tenn., collected by Leslie Hubricht on
May 3, 1951. Topo-paratypes from the same
collection are deposited in the Zoologisch Mu-
seum, Amsterdam, and the Senckenberg Mu-
seum, Frankfurt a/M.
Diagnosis —A very large species of Cambala,
adults usually more than 50 mm in length, with
a very strongly sculptured body about 18 to 20
times as long as its greatest diameter. From C.
annulata, the only other species of equal size,
this species is readily distinguished by the char-
acters set forth in the preceding key couplet. In
no other form of the genus are the peritremata
of the 4th segment larger than the intervening
dorsal crests.
This form has been adequately described and
illustrated in the work of Loomis cited above,
under the name annulata. Detailed consideration
of the male genitalia is reserved for a future
treatment.
Distribution —Cambala hubricht: occurs over a
narrow strip of mountainous terrain in the ad-
joining parts of southwest Virginia, eastern
Tennessee, and western North Carolina. To the
south, it has been taken as far as the Nantahala
Gorge in Swain County, North Carolina; north-
ward, to the Alleghenies in Wythe County,
Virginia. The species is not, however, limited to
high elevations, having been taken as low as
1,500 feet at several localities.
Specimens have been collected in the Balsams,
the Iron Mountains, the Unacoi range, Holston
Mountain, satellites of the Great Smokies, and
HOFFMAN: APPALACHIAN CAMBALIDAE 93
on the Blue Ridge itself northeast of Asheville.
There are still no records, however, for the
Black Mountains, although the species surely
occurs there. All of the foregoing mountains and
ranges are, physiographically, part of the South-
ern Section of the Blue Ridge Province.
Perhaps the most interesting locality for
hubrichtt is its northernmost, on Walker Moun-
tain, a long and prominent mountain on the
northwest side of the Tennessee River Valley
and a component of the Ridge and Valley physio-
graphic province. That a milliped species basi-
cally endemic to the southern Blue Ridge should
occur more or less physiographically isolated at
the northern extremity of its known range is of
considerable zoogeographic interest. This instance
reflects a distributional pattern recently estab-
lished for the salamander Plethodon jordani met-
calfi Brimley, as well as for species in other
animal groups.
The evidence from both present-day physi-
ography and known animal distribution indicates
a former faunistic continuity from the Appalach-
ian Plateau region of central West Virginia south
and eastward to the parallel but offset mountains
of the Southern Blue Ridge. The main trend of
the former high country was clearly south across
the region now included in southwest Virginia,
and even today that region remains studded with
isolated high peaks and ridges along the divide
between the upper Tennessee and Kanawha river
drainage systems.
Although the ranges of annulata and hubrichti
overlap both horizontally and altitudinally at
several areas, the species have not yet been taken
together or in close proximity. Despite this ap-
parent vicariation (which some systematists take,
per se, to indicate subspecific relationship), the
structural differences between these two large
cambalids are so numerous as to leave no doubt
that they are worthy of full specific rank. In the
material examined thus far, I have seen no speci-
mens which could be considered intermediate in
any respect.
Records upon which the present concept of
the species’ range is based are listed as follows,
the collections being made by me except as
otherwise credited.
VIRGINIA. Wythe County: Big Bend Recreation
Area, 4,000 feet, Big Walker Mountain about 10
miles northwest of Wytheville, August 6, 1956.
Smyth County: Brushy Mountain, 5 miles east of
O4 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Marion, May 4 and August 20, 1954. Patrick
County: Pinnacles of Dan, 6 miles southwest of
Vesta, May 8, 1951 (W. B. Newman and R. L.
Hoffman), also May 7, 1955 (W. T. Keeton, W. C.
Lund, and R. L. Hoffman), also April 20, 1957
(R. E. Crabill, Jr., and R. L. Hoffman). Grayson
County: Helton Creek, east side of Mount Rogers,
4 000 feet, June 19, 1950, and Peach Bottom Creek,
4 miles southwest of Independence, June 20, 1950
(J. A. Fowler and Hoffman); Comer’s Rock
Recreation Area, 2 miles northwest of Comer’s
Rock, June 15, 1950 (Leslie Hubricht). Washington
County: Laurel Creek near Damascus, April 28,
1951 (Hubricht).
TENNESSEE. Johnson County: Holston Moun-
tain, 2 miles west of Shady Valley, June 20, 1950
(Fowler and Hoffman). Carter County: Doe
River bluff, 1 mile northwest of Hampton, May 3,
1951 (Hubricht). Unicoi County: Unaka Springs,
southeast of Erwin, September 23, 1951, also
June 2, 1952. Green County: Camp Creek, June
1947 (Mike Wright).
NortH Carouina. Alleghany County: Air
Bellows Gap, June 20, 1955 (Arnold VanPelt).
Watauga County: 6 miles north of Boone, June 17,
1948 (Wright). Avery County: Route 221, east
side of Grandfather Mountain, June 1, 1954;
between Newland and Elk Park, May 20, 1956
(Keeton, Lund, and Hoffman). Mitchell County:
3 miles northwest of Spruce Pine, June 4, 1954.
Yancey County: Route 19, 2 miles east of the
State line, June 2, 1952. Jackson County: Soco
Falls, 10 miles northeast of Cherokee, May 20,
1956 (Keeton, Lund, and Hoffman). Swain County:
Nantahala Gorge, 8 miles southwest of Bryson
City, May 6, 1951 (Hubricht).
In addition to the foregoing localities, the
species has been reported by Chamberlin (1952)
from Asheville, Buncombe County, N. C. The
early record of Bollman (1888) for Balsam, Jack-
son County, N. C., is probably based upon
specimens of hubrichtt, but his specimens cannot
at present be found for a verifying study. The
material described by Loomis in 1938 was col-
lected by O. F. Cook between Elizabethton and
Roan Mountain, Tenn., probably within a few
miles of the locality here selected as typical of
this species.
VOL. 48, NO. 3
ON THE ORDINAL POSITION OF THE
CAMBALIDAE
The present allocation of the family
Cambalidae to the Spirostreptida is at
variance with the classification used in the
forthcoming ‘‘Checklist of the Millipeds of
North America’”’ and requires some qualifi-
cation. On the basis of recent studies of the
comparative morphology in the cambaloid-
spirostreptoid group of millipeds, I have
found no basis for the recognition of the
ecambaloids as a separate order. Numerous
annectant groups (such as the Choctelli
dae, Epinannolenidae, Physiostreptidae, and
even Old World Cambalidae) constitute a
network of intermediate conditions both in
gonopod structure as well as configuration
of the mouthparts. Some of this evidence is
included in a report on the family Choctelli-
dae, now in preparation, in which the order
Spirostreptida is divided into three sub-
suborders: Cambalidea, Epinannolenidea,
and Spirostreptidea.
REFERENCES
BouuMAN, CuarLes Harvey. A preliminary list
of the Myriapoda of Arkansas, with descriptions
of new species. Ent. Amer. 4: 1-8. 1888.
———. Catalogue of the myriapods of Indiana. Proc.
U.S. Nat. Mus. 11: 403-410. 1889.
CHAMBERLIN, Rautpu Vary. Myriopods from
Okefenokee Swamp, Ga., and from Natchitoches
Parish, Louisiana. Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer. 11:
369-880. 1918.
———., Further records and descriptions of Ameri-
can millipeds. Great Basin Nat. 12: 13-34,
figs. 1-21. 1952.
Loomis, Harotp Freperick. The cambalord
millipeds of the United States, including a
family new to the fauna and new genera and
species. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 86: 27-66,
figs. 10-21. 1938. ;
Say, THomas. Description of the myriapodae of the
United States. Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila-
delphia 2: 102-114. 1821.
Marcu 1958
REED: HERPETOLOGY OF MARYLAND AND DELMARVA, 13 95
HERPETOLOGY .—Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and Delmarva, 13:
Piedmont herpetofauna on coastal Delmarva. CuypE F. RrEep, Reed Herpe-
torium, Baltimore, Md. (Communicated by Doris M. Cochran.)
(Received September 13, 1957)
The Delmarva Peninsula, which extends
from the Pennsylvania border adjacent to
Maryland and Delaware on the north, the
Susquehanna River and Chesapeake Bay on
the west, the Delaware River and Atlantic
Ocean on the east, to Cape Charles, Va.,
and the mouth of the Chesapeake Bay on
the south, is made up predominantly of
coastal soils. In northern Cecil-and New
Castle Counties the geological Fall Line
passes, dividing the Piedmont from the
Coastal Provinces. All land south of the
Fall Line is considered as coastal in origin,
being composed of sands and alluvial soils.
There are no extensive solid rocks or stones
in this area.
In eastern United States the Fall Line
extends from Georgia northward across the
Carolinas and Virginia, passing through the
center of Washington, D. C., Baltimore,
Wilmington, Philadelphia, across central
New Jersey, Long Island, and thence to
Cape Cod, Mass. Up to the Potomac River
and the Chesapeake Bay, most of the
southern Coastal Plain is continuous, being
divided here and there by either fresh-water
rivers more inland or tidal and low level
rivers along the Atlantic coast. The Del-
marva Peninsula is definitely isolated by
the Chesapeake Bay from this southern
Coastal Plain. Southern Maryland is also
separated from either of these areas either
by the Potomac River from the south or by
the Chesapeake Bay to the east. Likewise,
southern New Jersey is isolated from the
Delmarva Peninsula by the Atlantic Ocean
and the Delaware River to the west and
south and by other areas of the Atlantic
Ocean from Long Island and southern New
England.
Most of the large rivers of the southern
Coastal Plain have their beginnings in or
above the Piedmont region; therefore, it
would not be inconceivable to expect to
find some Piedmont species of both plants
and animals on the Coastal Plain adjacent
to these rivers. In our area the Potomac
River flows from the mountain regions west
of the southern Maryland Coastal Plain.
At the present time the Potomac flows into
the Chesapeake Bay about midway up the
western side of the bay. However, it is
saline and tidal for about 70 miles, up to
Washington, D.C.; above that point it is
Piedmont, with fresh water, and rocky. The
rivers on the western side of southern Mary-
land which flow into the Potomac River have
their origins in the coastal areas of this
region, as Mattawoman, Nanjemoy, Wicom-
ico, St. Marys, and Anacostia Rivers. In
contrast to these rivers, those on the eastern
side of southern Maryland have their
origins in the Piedmont region and flow on
to the Inner Coastal Plain, as the Little and
Big Gunpowder Falls, Patapsco, and Patux-
ent Rivers; there are some rivers in between
these along the Chesapeake Bay which
originate on the Coastal Plain and flow
directly into the Chesapeake Bay, as Bush,
Back, South, West, Severn, and Magothy
Rivers.
Two major rivers which have their origins
and over 98 percent of their drainage in
Piedmont areas flank the Delmarva Penin-
sula; they are the Susquehanna and the
Delaware. The land masses to either side
of the Susquehanna River are Piedmont
nearly to the mouth of the river at Havre
de Grace (Harford County) and Perryville
(Cecil County), both of these cities being at
the very mouth of this river at the Chesa-
peake Bay. The Delaware River ceases to
be Piedmont north of Philadelphia and
becomes quite wide and saline as it ap-
proaches Wilmington. It develops into the
Delaware Bay separating Delaware from
New Jersey.
There are several small rivers and creeks
in the northern portion of the Delmarva
Peninsula which have their origins on
Piedmont soils. Some of them enter the
Susquehanna River above the Fall Line, as
96 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Octoraro and Conowingo Creeks in Cecil
County. Others flow down from Pennsyl-
vania off the Piedmont on to Coastal
regions in Cecil and New Castle Counties,
as Little and Big Elk Creeks which form
Elk River and the Northeast River; these
rivers enter the Chesapeake Bay directly.
The Brandywine Creek enters the Delaware
River. Between Elk River and Northeast
River is a peninsula known as Elk Neck,
upon which many species of plants and
animals known to be otherwise Piedmont in
distribution abound. One would expect to
find Piedmont species in this area for several
reasons: (1) Rivers with Piedmont origins
flow along either side of the peninsula; (2)
the land mass is contiguous with the Pied-
mont soils and areas to the north; (3) this is
the end of the land mass, and many species
migrating southward find natural barriers
on all sides, mainly water; for many it is
their most southern distribution on the
Delmarva Peninsula.
Except for these few small rivers and
creeks in the northern portion of the Penin-
sula, all the rest of the rivers on the Del-
marva Peninsula have their origins within
the land mass of the Peninsula. An interest-
ing observation concerning the rivers on the
Delmarva Peninsula is that there are very
few rivers or creeks of any size on the
eastern side, as Appoquinimink and Black-
bird Creeks, Smyrna River, Leipsic River,
Mispillion Creek, Cedar Creek, Broadkill
Creek, and Indian River. None of these
creeks or rivers are over 25 miles long, and
they all originate in Delaware. On the
western side there are many very long
rivers, some over 50 miles long, traversing
both Delaware and Maryland and emptying
into the Chesapeake Bay, as Bohemia,
Sassafras, Chester, Choptank, Transquak-
ing, Nanticoke, Wicomico (not the Wicom-
ico River of southern Maryland), and the
Pocomoke Rivers. The fresh-water areas
from Pocomoke City south to Cape Charles
consist mainly of millponds, creeks and
drainage ditches. There are very few areas
with fresh water drainages of any size, and
these soon become saline and marshy
before reaching either the Chesapeake Bay
or the Atlantic Ocean.
The entire area of the Delmarva Peninsula
VOL. 48, No. 3
south of the Chesapeake and Delaware
Canal, which empties into the Elk River, is
Coastal Plain and the land masses east of it
(southern New Jersey) and west of it
(Maryland, from Havre de Grace to St.
Marys City, and Virginia, from the Potomac
River to Norfolk) are Coastal Plain, the
former being known as Outer Coastal Plain
and the latter, as Inner Coastal Plain. On
this Coastal Plain there are many areas
which possess considerable numbers of
Piedmont plants and Piedmont animals.
The presence of the animals is much easier
to explain than is the presence of the plants.
This paper deals with those species of
the herpetofauna that are predominantly
Piedmont in distribution in Maryland and
the Delmarva Peninsula but that are also
known from the Coastal Plain of southern
Maryland and the Delmarva Peninsula.
Only the counties on Delmarva in which
specimens are definitely known to have been
collected and are available are listed below.
The annotated lists of these species appear
in the Contributions to the Herpetology of
Maryland and Delmarva, no. 6 through no.
11, published by the author; additional
records may be found in other Contributions
(see no. 5 for bibliography).
There are 17 species of herptiles usually
considered as being upland or Piedmont
which are found on coastal Southern Mary-
land and on Delmarva. It is interesting to
note at this point that many plants also
reach their southern limit in this area.
These are annotated in another paper deal-
ing with northern Piedmont species of
plants which reach their southern limit on
Delmarva, or in southern Maryland. Some
of these species of plants reach as far south
as Accomac County in Delmarva Virginia.
There is a Piedmont forest along the Atlantic
Ocean from Stockton (Worcester County),
Maryland, to Atlantic (Accomac County),
Virginia, about 30 miles long and about 10
miles wide. The author has collected about
150 species of Piedmont plants in this area in
the last five years. This flora which centers
around the town of Silva, Virginia is anno-
tated in a botanical paper; the ferns of which
have been published in Amer. Fern Journ.
46: 148-151. 1956.
The maps accompanying this article show
;
:
:
;
Marcu 1958 REED: HERPETOLOGY OF MARYLAND AND DELMARVA, 15 on
Map 2
Ambystoma
lus
Diemicty maculatum
viridescens
Geological Fall Lint
indicated above
Map 4
Map 3
Hemidactyvlium
rycea
Eupy scutatum
bislineata
Map 6
Pseudotriton
Desmognathus
f ruber
fuscus
| Mav 7
Bufo terrestris
americanus
Clemmys
4nsculpta
the county distribution in Maryland and 1. Diemactylus viridescens viridescens Rafin-
Delmarva; the geological Fall Line is indi- °Sdue. New Castle (Newark, Piedmont); Cecil
cated and the counties on Delmarva below (Octoraro Creek Valley, Piedmont); Talbot (Seth
; : i . Demonstration Forest); Northampton (Cape
it are mentioned where Piedmont species of — @harles). Map 1.
herptiles have been collected. 2. Ambystmoa maculata (Shaw). New Castle
VOL. 48, NO. 3
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
98
Tepremps
Bot 7eATAs 3n4e90und BT [eULaA
BUBY studopera BATEOSUudO
re ageeae’
Cay
AE oT dew
uN TNSueTz.t4
CICETOR | Neale ur BnTN pos snusowe
ST 47 edoudwey SF 4T edouduey sTyudoudue)
+t Cew CT ae
J -ndewo yZatooo
BTEATato LG
Bp)
30)
+2)
4Z Aue ydes
XTIYEN
OCT IsT BA
eoavt ey
OT Ge 6 dey
Marcu 1958
(Wilmington); Cecil (along Susquehanna River
from Conowingo to Port Deposit and Elk
Neck); Queen Annes (Stine, 1953); Talbot
(Stine, 1953). Map 2.
3. Hurycea bislineata bislineata (Green). New
Castle (Hollyoak near Wilmington); Cecil
(Conowingo to Port Deposit); Queen Annes
(Centerville); Kent, Md. (near Sassafras River) ;
Kent, Del. (Brown’s Branch); Northampton
(Eastville). Map 3.
4. Hemidactylium scutatum (Schlegel). New
Castle (Newark, Piedmont); Cecil (Conowingo
to Port Deposit); Sussex (Millsboro); Wicomico
(Quantico). Map 4.
5. Desmognathus fuscus fuscus (Rafinesque).
New Castle (Shellpot Run near Wilmington;
Bradywine Creek); Kent, Del. (Brown’s Branch) ;
Cecil (Conowingo to Port Deposit; Bainbridge;
Pusey Creek; Dove Run); Queen Annes (Center-
ville); Wicomico (Conant, 1945). Map 5.
6. Pseudotriton ruber ruber (Sonnini). Cecil
(Elk Neck; Big Bohemia Creek); New Castle
(Wilmington; Newark). Map 6.
7. Bufo terrestris americanus Holbrook. New
Castle (Conant, 1945); Cecil (Elk Neck: along
Susquehanna near Octoraro Creek); Kent, Md.
(Massey); Wicomico (Conant, 1945); Worcester
(Conant, 1945); Accomac (Conant, 1945);
Northampton (Hog Island). Map 7.
~ 8. Clemmys insculpta (LeConte). Cecil (along
Susquehanna below Conowingo); Talbot (Has-
ton). Map 8.
9. Natriz septemvittata (Say). New Castle
(Newark and Wilmington); Cecil (Elk Neck;
Camp Horseshoe; Octoraro Creek; Rodney
Scout Camps); Kent, Md. (Chestertown). Map 9.
10. Storeria o. occtpitomaculata (Storer). Cecil
(Elk Neck; Rodney Scout Camps); Queen Annes
(Centerville); Dorchester (Blackwater Refuge) ;
Worcester (Pocomoke State Forest; Old Furnace
near Snow Hill). Map 10.
11. Haldea v. valeriae (Baird and Girard).
Cecil (Elk Neck; Rodney Scout Camps; Rising
Sun); Kent, Md. (type locality); Wicomico
(Quantico); Worcester (Stockton; Old Furnace
near Snow Hill; Corbin); Accomac (Silva);
Northampton (Hog Island; Cobbs Island). Map
ike
REED: HERPETOLOGY OF MARYLAND AND DELMARVA, 13 99
12. Carphophis a. amoenus (Say). Cecil (Elk
Neck; Rodney Scout Camps); Queen Annes
(Carmichael; Centerville; Ruthsburg); Kent,
Md. (Conant, 1945); Sussex (Conant, 1945);
Wicomico (Conant, 1945); Worcester (Berlin;
Pocomoke State Forest); Accomac (Wattsville).
Map 12.
13. Lampropeltis g. getulus (Linnaeus). Cecil
(Port Deposit; Northeast; Elk Neck; Rodney
Scout Camps); Kent, Md. (Kennedyville);
Queen Annes (Centreville; Crumpton; Queens-
town; Ruthsburg); Talbot (Easton); Sussex
(Ocean View); Dorchester (Blackwater Refuge;
Gum Swamp; Cambridge); Wicomico (Powell-
ville; Quantico; Salisbury; Willards); Worcester
(Bishopville; Berlin; Pocomoke River near Snow
Hill); Somerset (Westover; Waterloo Farm on
Monie Creek); Accomae (Conant, 1945); North-
ampton (Cape Charles). May 13.
14. Lampropeltis doliata triangulum (Lacé-
pede). New Castle (north of Fall Line, Conant,
1945); Cecil (Camp Horseshoe; Conowingo;
Rising Sun; Stony Run; Elk Neck). Map 14.
15. Opheodrys vernalis vernalis (Harlan). Cecil
(Conowingo). Map 15.
16. Diadophis punctatus edwards: (Merrem).
New Castle (Wilmington); Cecil (Elk Neck;
Gray’s Hill; Elkton; Rodney Scout Camps).
Map 16.
17. Rana sylvatica sylvatica LeConte. New
Castle (Townsend); Cecil (Susquehanna River
from Conowingo to Port Deposit); Kent, Del.
(Brown’s Branch); Kent, Md. (Mansueti, 1940);
Queen Annes (Mansueti, 1940); Dorchester
(Mansueti, 1940); Wicomico (Powellville; Quan-
tico); Worcester (Pocomoke State Forest;
Snow Hill). Map 17.
LITERATURE CITED
Conant, Roger. An annotated checklist of the
amphibians and reptiles of the Del-Mar-Va
Peninsula. Publ. Soe. Nat. Hist. Delaware:
1-8. 1945.
MansuEt!, Romeo. The wood frog in Maryland,
Rana s. sylvatica (LeConte). Bull. Nat. Hist.
Soc. Maryland. 10(10): 88-96, 1 col. plate,
22 figs. 1940.
STINE, CHaRLes. Salamanders of the genus Am-
bystoma. Maryland Nat. 28(1-2): 75-78, 4
maps. 1953.
100
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 3
ICHTHYOLOGY —Two new species of Anampses from the Hawauan Islands, with
notes on other labrid fishes of this genus.1 JoHN E. RANDALL, University of
Miami. (Communicated by Leonard P. Schultz.)
(Received December 4, 1957)
More species of the family Labridae
(wrasses) are known from the Hawauan
Islands than any other family of reef fishes.
This preponderance is furthered in the pres-
ent paper by the description of two more,
both species of Anampses Quoy and Gai-
mard. A key to the four Hawaiian species
of this genus and discussion of related forms
from other regions of the tropical Indo-
Pacific are also presented.
I wish to express my gratitude to Dr.
William A. Gosline, of the University of
Hawaii, for kindly providing the single
paratypes of the two new species, with the
prior knowledge that they probably repre-
sent undescribed forms, and to Dr. James
E. Bohlke, of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia, and Robert H.
Kanazawa, of the United States National
Museum, for pertinent information.
The holotypes of the two new species are
in the United States National Museum
(U.'S.N.M.).
The genus Anampses is characterized as
follows: Mouth small; lips moderately
fleshy; a single pair of large, protruding,
incisiform teeth anteriorly in the upper Jaw
and a similar, more medial pair in the lower
jaw (the upper incisors are slightly longer
and broader and the edges sharper than the
lower incisors; the uppers project outward
at an angle of about 45°, the lowers directly
forward or slightly downward); remaining
teeth minute, generally imperceptible; body
compressed, moderately deep (the depth
contained about 2.5 to 4.0 times in standard
length); head scaleless; body with moder-
ately large scales (subgenus Pseudanampses?
excepted) except for region of nape and
thorax where the scales are small; 27 to 29
1 Contribution no. 195 from the Marine Lab-
oratory, University of Miami.
2 Jordan and Snyder (1902: 628) proposed
Ampheces as a subgenus for the species Anampses
geographicus Cuvier and Valenciennes; Pseudan-
ampses Bleeker (1862: 101), however, has priority.
scales in lateral line (49 to 51 in Anampses
(Pseudanampses) geographicus); lateral line
continuous, angling down sharply at the
level of about the ninth dorsal soft ray;
gill membranes attached to isthmus; pre-
opercle entire; dorsal fin rays IX, 12 (rarely
11 or 13); anal fin rays IIL, 12 G@anelyaiT or:
13); pectoral fin rays 13 (the uppermost a
bony splint); caudal fin truncate, slightly
emarginate, or slightly rounded; colorful
Indo-Pacific species of moderate size (some
attaining 300 mm. in standard length).
KEY TO THE HAWAIIAN SPECIES
OF ANAMPSES
la. Body relatively deep, depth contained about
2.5 to 2.8 times in standard length; caudal fin
truncate... 0.0.2) sot.22 er 2
1b. Body not deep, depth contained about 3.3 to
4 times in standard length; caudal fin slightly
rounded in adults. =. 05. 255 3
2a. Each seale of body with a prominent round
Witte sSpOb when Anampses cuviert (Fig. 1)
2b. Each seale of body with a narrow vertical
blue lines se. Anampses godeffroyi (Fig. 2)
3a. Body without white spots; head pale
(bright orange in life with blue bands)
and contrasting sharply with darker
body; caudal fin not paler than body.
Anampses chrysocephalus, n. sp. (Fig. 3)
3b. Body with white spots (one per scale
below lateral line, several per scale
above); head not paler than body; caudal
fin markedly paler than body (in life red
distally and white basally).
Anampses rubrocaudatus, n. sp. (Fig. 4)
Anampses chrysocephalus, n. sp.
igs
Holotype —U.S.N.M. no 164465, a male,
151.5 mm in standard length and 181.5 mm in
total length, obtained by J. Randall on June
19, 1953, from a fisherman whose traps were set
in about 30 to 90 feet of water from Kewalo
Basin to Koko Head, Oahu, Territory of Hawaii.
Paratype-—University of Hawaii no. 2152, a
male specimen, 139.5 mm in standard length and
168.5 mm in total length, obtained by W. Gosline
in January 1950 from the Honolulu Aquarium.
Marcu 1958 RANDALL: TWO NEW
The majority of the aquarium fishes are pur-
chased from trap fishermen. The specimen is in
poor condition. It was preserved after being
discovered dead on the bottom; sufficient time
had elapsed for partial decomposition to occur.
Description —Based on the holotype and one
paratype. Counts and measurements are recorded
for the holotype, followed in parentheses by data
for the paratype if different from that of the
holotype. Measurements were not made of the
fins of the paratype.
Dorsal fin rays [X,12; anal fin rays III,12]
pectoral fin rays 13 (the uppermost rudimentary,
the next unbranched); pelvic fin rays I,5; princi-
pal caudal rays 14. Lateral line scales 28, 19 in
the anterior part, 2 in the part which is bent
sharply downward at the level of the ninth
dorsal soft ray, and 7 in the peduncular part; a
single row of large scales between anterior part
of lateral line and dorsal fin and 7 rows between
anterior part of lateral line and anal fin (a few
small scales occur between the uppermost and
lowermost rows of body scales and the dorsal
and anal fins, respectively; however no scales are
present basally on these fins); a patch of small
scales basally on caudal fin posterior to large
body scales; head naked; small scales on nape
poorly developed or imbedded; triangular area
from isthmus to upper base of pectoral fin and
origin of pelvic fins covered with small distinct
scales; gill rakers on first gill arch 13 (paratype
only).
Head length 2.96 (2.90); depth of body 3.36
(3.34); snout to anus 1.83 (1.81); snout to origin
of pelvic fins 2.64 (2.58); snout to origin of dorsal
fin 3.21 (3.03); length of dorsal fin base 1.56
(1.55); length of anal fin base 2.53 (2.54)—all in
standard length.
Width of body at gill opening 2.43 (2.64);
least depth of caudal peduncle 2.59 (2.69); snout
length 2.80 (2.75); diameter of eye 7.10 (6.89);
width of interorbital 3.93 (4.00); length of
pectoral fin 2.22 (fins frayed on either side, thus
probably shorter than normal); length of pelvic
fin 1.82; width of mouth (rictus to rictus) 5.68
(5.44); mid-center of upper lip to most posterior
part of upper lip 6.01 (6.02); edge of eye to upper
end of free margin of preopercle 7.35 (7.39);
first dorsal spine 7.63; second dorsal spine 5.38;
ninth dorsal spine 3.29; first dorsal soft ray 2.79;
first anal spine 12.2; second anal spine 6.96;
third anal spine 5.16; first anal soft ray 3.06—
all in head length.
SPECIES
OF ANAMPSES 101
Profile of head with a shght indentation just
anterior to a vertical through forward edge of
eye; lips moderately fleshy; dentition charac-
teristic of the genus, the length of the upper
pair of incisors 2.2 in eye diameter, that of the
lower pair 3.2 in eye diameter; upper teeth nearly
touching at their base; space between lower
pair of teeth contained about 3 times in eye
diameter (no other teeth could be found in the
jaws—only a bony plate which is exposed when
the lips are pulled outward); a well-developed
opercular flap, its length posterior to opercle
equal to eye diameter; gill membranes attached
to isthmus with a small free fold across it
dorsal and anal spines slender but pungent;
posterodistal ends of dorsal and anal fins pointed;
caudal fin slightly rounded.
Color in alcohol: head light tan, almost white
with irregular, dark-edged, light bluish-gray
bands and spots; a large black spot on membra-
nous opercular flap; body brown, the center of
each scale darker than the edges; an elongate,
lobed, dark-edged, bluish-gray spot on nape
extending across demarcation of pale head and
brown body, the part on the body partially
surrounded by a narrow pale region (this region
continuous with a middorsal pale band about an
eye diameter in width which extends anteriorly
from origin of dorsal fin); dorsal fin dark brown
with a distinct but narrow white margin; anal
fin brown, shading outwardly to light yellowish
brown, with a narrow pale margin, a thin sub-
marginal dark line, and pale blue blotches (there
is a large elongate blotch basally on each inter-
radial membrane and a lesser spot or spots distal
to the large one); caudal fin dark brown; pelvic
fin rays brown, the membranes pale; pectoral fin
pale, brown at extreme base; a pale spot on upper
part of axil of pectoral fin.
In life the head was brilliant orange with black-
edged, iridescent blue bands and spots; body
dark orangish brown with a vertically elongate
erayish green spot on posterior border of each
scale; lobed blue spot on nape surrounded by a
narrow bright lemon yellow area which is con-
tinuous with a yellow middorsal band on nape;
lips and adjacent portion of snout light tan;
dorsal and caudal fins dark brown, the dorsal
with a narrow white margin; anal fin brown,
shading in outer part to yellow, with blue
blotches, a narrow white margin, and a thin dark
brown submarginal line; pectoral fin hyaline,
dark brown at base; axil of pectoral blue dorsally
102 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 3:
Fie. 1.—Anampses cuviert Quoy and Gaimard: From a 35-mm color transparency of a fresh specimen.
Standard length, 210 mm. |
Fic. 2.—Anampses godeffroyi Giinther: From a 35-mm color transparency of a fresh specimen. Dorsal
fin split. Standard length, 268 mm.
Fig. 3.—Anampses chrysocephalus, n. sp.: From a 35-mm color transparency of the holotype when
fresh. Standard length, 151.5 mm.
Marcu 1958
RANDALL: TWO NEW
SPECIES
OF ANAMPSES
Fic. 4.—Anampses rubrocaudatus, n. sp.: From a photograph of the holotype after preservation by
W. Courtenay. Pectorals abraded and injury evident on back at rear base of dorsal. Standard length,
137.7 mm.
orange in midsection, shading to pale lavender
ventrally.
Vernon E. Brock, director of the Division of
Fish and Game of the Territory of Hawai, has
informed me that he has observed Anampses
chrysocephalus to be moderately common at
depths of about 100 feet on the Waianae coast,
Oahu.
Named chrysocephalus (Greek xpvaos, gold;
kedadn, head) in reference to the striking colora-
tion of the head.
Of the species of Anampses, A. chrysocephalus
appears to be most closely related to A. melanu-
rus Bleeker, also an elongate species with a black
spot on the opercular membrane. A. chryso-
cephalus is distinct from melanurus in its smaller
eye, shorter third anal spine relative to longest
dorsal spine, and color. Instead of a pale head
with darker irregular spots, melanurus has a
dark head with light spots; also melanurus has
a spotted dorsal fin and a hght caudal fin with a
broad dark subterminal vertical band (after de
Beaufort, 1940: 103, no specimens seen by me).
Anampses rubrocaudatus, n. sp.
Fig. 4
Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 160624, a female,
137.7 mm in standard length and 166 mm in
total length, obtained from §. Tinker of the
Honolulu Aquarium, Oahu, Territory of Hawaii,
1950.
Paratype-—University of Hawai no. 2291,
$2.6 mm in standard length and 108.5 mm in
total length, collected the
Division of Fish and Game, Territory of Hawai,
by spearing off Waianae, Oahu, at a depth of
about 90 feet, in 1956.
by personnel of
Description.—Based on the holotype and one
paratype. Counts and measurements are recorded
for the holotype, followed in parentheses by data
for the paratype if different from that of the
holotype.
Dorsal cm ways IDC Ae aime inn ina IMU 4
pectoral fin rays 13 (outer portion of fins absent
in holotype); pelvic fin rays 1,5; principal caudal
rays 14. Lateral line scales 28, 19 in anterior
portion, 2 in part which angles downward at level
of base of ninth dorsal soft ray, and 7 in pedun-
cular part; a single row of large scales above
lateral line (above this a second row about one-
half as large, and between the latter row and
the dorsal fin a few small scales, these more
numerous anteriorly); 8 rows of large scales
below lateral line to origin of anal fin (plus a few
small scales next to fin); 7 large scale rows
between lateral line and more posterior part of
anal fin; small scales present on base of caudal
fin, thorax, and ventral part of abdomen; no
median predorsal scales, but a few small imbedded
scales more laterally on nape; head naked; gill
rakers on first arch 20 (holotype only).
Head length 2.86 (2.98); depth of body 3.29
(3.95); snout to anus 1.86 (paratype not meas-
ured); snout to origin of pelvic fins 2.73 (para-
type not measured); snout to origin of dorsal fin
2.98 (paratype not measured); length of dorsal
fin base 1.58 (1.62); length of anal fin base 2.60
(2.95)—all in standard length.
Width of body at gill opening 2
least depth of caudal peduncle 2.69 (38.11);
snout length 3.12 (8.34); diameter of eve 7.17
(5.32); width of interorbital 3.93 (4.62); length
length of
77
? 46 (2.7% is
of pectoral fin 1.80 (paratype only);
pelvie fin 1.77 (2.18); width of mouth (rictus to
104
rictus) 5.11 (6.93); mid-center of upper lip to
most posterior part of upper lip 5.16 (5.04);
edge of eye to upper end of free margin of pre-
opercle 7.17 (paratype not measured); first dorsal
spine 8.00 (7.78); second dorsal spine 5.51
(paratype not measured); ninth dorsal spine
3.20 (3.30); first dorsal soft ray 2.40 (2.91);
first anal spine 9.60 (10.6); second anal spine
6.00 (8.70); third anal spine 4.70 (4.95); first
anal soft ray 2.74 (2.98)—all in head length.
Profile of head smooth; lips fleshy, the edges
rounded and firm; no membranous flap extend-
ing from ethmoidal part of snout over groove
posterior to upper lip to rest on base of upper
lip; dentition characteristic of genus, the length
of the incisors of the holotype 2.6 mm; upper
incisors of holotype separated by 1.7 mm and
lowers by 0.7 mm; a well-developed opercular
flap, its length posterior to opercle equal to eye
diameter; gill membranes attached to isthmus
with a small free fold across it; dorsal and anal
spines flexible in holotype, pungent in paratype;
posterodistal ends of dorsal and anal fins pointed;
caudal fin slightly rounded.
Color in alcohol: dark brown (the head of the
paratype a little darker than the body) with a
white spot in center of each scale below the
lateral line; scales in lateral line and above
lateral line with about 4 to 6 white spots; head
with numerous small white spots, those on snout,
interorbital, and nape very small and close-set;
unscaled portion of caudal fin white; dorsal fin
brown with numerous small white spots and a
white border; anal fin dark brown with a few
scattered faint white dots, especially at base,
and a very narrow white margin; pectoral fins
white, the base brown with white spots; pelvic
fins with a broad brown lateral edge, light brown
rays, and hyaline membranes; lips whitish, the
base of the upper lip light brown with small
white spots.
Life color of the holotype of A. rubrocaudatus
from a 35-mm color transparency on file in the
United States National Museum: Dark chocolate
brown with white spots; outer half of caudal fin
bright red, basal half white; pectoral pink; lips
pinkish; inner portion of iris orange-yellow.
Like A. chrysocephalus, this species appears to be
restricted to moderate depths on Hawaiian reefs.
Named rubrocaudatus (Latin rubro, combining
form of ruber, red; caudatus, tailed) in reference
to the prominent red color on the outer half of
the caudal fin.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
This species is most closely allied to Anampses
meleagrides Cuvier and Valenciennes, known from
East Africa to the East Indies, Philippines, Riu
Kiu Islands, and possibly Japan (the species
Anampses ikedae and A. nagoyoi described by
Tanaka from Kagoshima, Japan, may be syno-
nyms of A. meleagrides). The similarity is so
great that it seems probable that meleagrides
gave rise through isolation in Hawaii to rubro-
caudatus. A. rubrocaudatus differs from melea-
grides in having a larger mouth (the width of
the mouth of the 137.7 mm holotype measures
9.3 mm; of a 136-mm Philippine specimen of
meleagrides 6 mm; the length of the upper jaw
of rubrocaudatus is 10.7 mm, of the meleagrides
specimen, 8.7 mm); lips which are more fleshy
and firm (the edges of the lips of meleagrides are
thin and supple); lacking a frenum extending
from the ethmoidal part of the snout over the
groove posterior to the upper lip and over-
lapping the basal part of the upper lip (this flap
in meleagrides makes the lips seem even smaller
than they actually are), having a slightly rounded
instead of slightly emarginate caudal fin, and
color as follows: several white spots per scale
in lateral line and above (single spot per scale in
meleagrides); spots on head and on dorsal fin
smaller and more numerous; spots on anal fin
tiny and indistinct; lips pale (brownish in
meleagrides); no white line at base of pectoral
fins as in meleagrides; caudal fin red and white
in life (yellow in life in meleagrides).
A. meleagrides may have a white-edged black
spot posteriorly on the dorsal and anal fins.
Insufficient specimens have been examined to
determine if this is a juvenile or sexual character.
It appears to be a juvenile character in Anampses
cuviert Quoy and Gaimard from the Hawaiian
Islands. A specimen 46 mm in standard length
has a prominent ocellated black spot on the
hind part of the dorsal and anal fins; on a 70-
mm specimen the anal ocellus is gone and the
dorsal ocellus just disappearing.
As indicated in the key, the four Hawaiian
species of Anampses are easily distinguished one
from another, although color characters, of
necessity, have been emphasized.
Both A. cuviert and A. godeffroyr Giinther* are
portrayed in color in Giinther’s Fische der Stidsee
3 As was suspected by Jordan and Evermann
(1905: 294) and Jordan and Seale (1906: 296),
Anampses evermanni Jenkins is a synonym of A.
godeffroyt.
VOL. 48, No. 3 |
Marcy 1958
(1881: pls. 136 A and 140, respectively), although
somewhat inaccurately. The spots on the body
of A. cuviert should be white instead of blue. A.
godeffroyz is depicted as pale blue with a vertical
blue line on each scale and numerous irregular
dark blue markings on the head. The true life
color (as based on a specimen 268 mm in standard
length from Hawaii) is as follows: Body grayish
brown with vertical blue lines on scales; antero-
dorsal quadrant of head (enclosing eye) bright
green; remainder of head grayish brown with
tortuous, narrow, dark blue lines, those on nape
small and not interconnected; dorsal and anal
fins brownish gray with prominent bright blue
margins and narrow lengthwise dark blue lines:
caudal fin colored like body on basal half, orange-
yellow on outer half, with short horizontal blue
lines and broad blue upper and lower margins;
pectoral fin grayish brown on basal half and
orange-yellow on outer half, with a blue line on
upper margin; iris red and the lips flesh-colored.
Previously A. godeffroyi was known only from
the Hawatian Islands, except for one uncertain
record from the Society Islands by Fowler (1928:
332) based on two specimens in the Museum of
Comparative Zoology. Of these Fowler wrote,
“Though dark and vertical lines little distinct
these specimens evidently this species, not
previously known from outside Hawaii.” I
have recently collected this species from the
Society Islands and Tuamotu Archipelago and
can thus verify Fowler’s record. Specimens are
catalogued at the United States National
Museum under the number 164602 and at the
Natural History Museum, Stanford University,
under the number 48870. In French Oceania
this wrasse was observed only in relatively
shallow (generally less than 20 feet) outer reef
areas exposed to the action of surf. On several
occasions while I was attempting to spear
individuals of this species, they retreated to the
inshore ends of surge channels and disappeared
in the white water of the surf. In Hawaii the
species is usually seen in deeper, less turbulent
water.
A. godeffroyt has a vertical blue line on each
scale of the body in the Society Islands as in
Hawaii; however, there are some differences in
color between the species in the two island
groups. The life colors of a 200 mm specimen from
Tahiti are as follows: Body iridescent greenish
brown, the edges of the scales dark olive, with a
vertical bright blue narrow line on each scale
RANDALL: TWO NEW SPECIES OF ANAMPSES
105
except on the nape, thorax, abdomen, and scaled
portion of caudal fin, where blue spots replace
the blue lines (ground color on abdomen purplish
and on thorax pale turquoise); head dull olive-
green, purplish on opercle, shading to pale tur-
quoise ventrally with widely spaced narrow
bright blue lines, two of which are nearly hori-
zontal and run from snout through eye almost to
end of opercle; dorsal fin greenish yellow basally,
shading to copper up to the blue margin (which
occupies about one-tenth the width of the fin),
with about three irregular rows of small blue
spots; anal similar to dorsal, but with a broader
blue margin (about one-fourth width of fin);
caudal fin with broad bright blue upper and
lower margins and eight blue horizontal bars
interspersed with orangish areas; upper edge of
pectoral fin blue, then a region of hyaline copper
shading to pale yellow on lower part of fin;
pelvic fins blue-edged with a median blue band
separating lateral copper and medial pale yellow
areas; iris yellow with shades of iridescent green.
A color marking readily seen underwater on the
species but not noticeable when the fish are
removed from the water is a light greenish area
dorsally on caudal peduncle.
The most notable differences of the Society Is-
lands specimens from the Hawaiian are the discrete
instead of interconnected blue lines on the head,
the lack of the anterodorsal green area on the
head, and rows of small spots on the dorsal and
anal fins instead of solid blue lines. In view of
the similarity of the two forms, the differences
mentioned are believed to be subspecific and not
specific in magnitude.
As might be expected from the isolation of
the Hawaiian Islands, due not only to distance
but also to the direction of ocean currents, minor
color differences are frequently seen between a
species of reef fish in Hawaii and elsewhere in
the Indo-Pacific area. In the
color differences are not so minor and may be
coupled with differences in counts or propor-
tional measurements. A point is reached where a
taxonomist feels impelled to recognize the
Hawaiian form as a distinct species. Unfor-
tunately, opinions vary as to the degree of differ-
some species
entiation necessary to establish a species in
Hawaii as distinct. This problem, of course, is
not confined to Hawaii and the tropical Pacific,
but I shall restrict the present discussion to this
area. Some authors, to give but a few examples,
regard Chromis dimidiatus (Klunzinger), Macero-
106
pharyngodon geoffroy (Quoy and Gaimard), and
Acanthurus triostegus (Linnaeus) in Hawaii as
not specifically different from these species
elsewhere in their range, whereas others recognize
them as full species by the names C. leucurus
Gilbert, M. meleagris (Cuvier and Valenciennes),
and A. sandvicensis Streets (for details of these
species pairs, see Randall, 1955 and 1956).
Some authors have preferred to regard a Hawai-
ian form as a full species when a character, even
if only a small spot of color, provides complete
separation of the Hawaiian material from that
elsewhere in Oceania. Since no insular stepping
stones join the Hawaiian chain with islands to
the south and west, it is not possible to demon-
strate typical subspecific integradation at some
intermediate place, but this does not mean that
the subspecific concept cannot be applied. I do
not agree with Gosline (1955: 469) who wrote,
“Tt was felt that intergradation between the
Hawaiian endemics and their Central Pacific
counterparts would oceur at Johnston if any-
where. If does not occur there (or elsewhere
among any of the fishes here investigated, and
on the basis of absence of intergradation (the
term is here used in contrast with introgression)
the Hawaiian endemics must be considered full
species.” As this author has indicated (p. 479),
the Johnston Island fish fauna is essentially
Hawaiian (as its proximity to Hawaii would
suggest); therefore I do not believe the absence
of intergradation at Johnston is a strong indication
of full specific rank of the Hawaiian forms in
question. There does not seem to be equal
opportunity for the Central Pacific counterparts
to meet the Hawaiian forms at Johnston. In my
opinion the best criterion on which to base the
assigning of a name to a Hawaiian variant con-
sists of drawing inferences from the degree of
differentiation of other closely related species
in the same genus (if they exist) which occur
together. Naturally this is imperfect, for a
Hawaiian form, although distinguished mor-
phologically only slightly, or perhaps not at all,
from the species in non-Hawaiian areas, may have
differentiated physiologically or ecologically such
that natural interbreeding would be impossible.
As long as the morphological differences be-
tween Hawaiian and related non-Hawaiian forms
are noted, it might be argued that it is unimpor-
tant whether opinions differ as to how to recognize
them nomenclatorially. In a sense this is true;
however I believe the conservative approach
(namely, the recognition of the Hawaiian forms as
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 3
subspecies or varieties when differences are slight,
even though constant) is preferred, for it results
in fewer specific names with which to contend
and is less misleading from a zoogeographical
standpoint.
Anampses cuvieri is known only from the
Hawaiian Islands where, like many of the endemic
fishes, it is abundant. The common Anampses
caeruleopunctatus Riippell is im continuous
distribution from the Red Sea and east Africa
eastward throughout all Oceania except Hawaii.*
These two species are very closely related. Their
similarity first became apparent to the writer
when the life colors of caeruleopunctatus were
noted in collections from the Society Islands,
Tuamotus, and Marquesas (the species is pre-
viously unrecorded from the latter two island
groups; specimens have been deposited in the
United States National Museum, and Natural
History Museum at Stanford University). A
180-mm specimen from Tahiti was olive, shading
to reddish ventrally, the edges of the scales
darker, with a single bright blue spot, edged in
blackish, in the center of each scale; head marked
with similar spots and dark-edged blue bands
(more bands and fewer spots on large specimens) ;
dorsal fin dark copper with narrow bright blue
margin, dark submarginal line, and approx1-
mately three rows of small dark-edged blue
spots; anal fin bright red with a margin like the
dorsal and two rows of small dark-edged blue
spots, one at the base and one half way out in
fin; caudal fin dark reddish brown with blue
edges and blue spots as on body but slightly
larger; pectoral fins hyaline with pale yellow
rays; pelvic fins red with blue lateral edge and
two blue blotches; lips reddish. A. caeruleo-
punctatus differs from A. cuviert in having blue
instead of white spots, in lacking small inter-
mediate spots between some of the larger ones
centered in each body scale (this giving more of a
linear effect on cuviert), in having principally
blue bands on the head instead of small spots, in
having a spotted caudal fin and rows of spots
instead of solid lines in the dorsal and anal
fins; the dorsal and anal fins are pointed poste-
riorly in caeruleopunctatus and slightly rounded
in cuviert; caeruleopunctatus (Society Islands and
Tuamotus) has 21 or 22 gill rakers on the first
4The two specimens of A. caeruleopunctatus
(U.S.N.M. no. 71657) listed from Japan by Fowler
and Bean (1928: 230) were collected in Okinawa,
Riu Kiu Islands. Kamohara (1954: 46, fig. 11)
has recorded the species from Japan.
Marcu 1958
gill arch and cuvrert 19 or 20. The above differ-
ences are probably great enough to warrant the
recognition of two species, but the similarity
in other characters and the distribution of the
species suggests that caeruleopunctatus may have
been the progenitor stock which gave rise through
independent evolution of a Hawaiian population
to A. cuviert.
Although Fowler (1928: 333) correctly placed
Anampses pulcher Regan from Easter Island in
the synonymy of caeruleopunctatus, he created
another synonym when he described Anampses
tinkhami from the Riu Kiu Islands (1946: 162).
Dr. James E. Bohlke provided the author with
information on the type of A. tinkhami in the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.
Another species of Anampses, A. twistii
Bleeker, with a type locality of Ambon, East
Indies, was collected in the Society Islands and
was sighted in the pass at the atoll of Takaroa
in the Tuamotu Archipelago. Previously this
species was known from the central Pacific
from one 80-mm specimen taken at Fiji (as
Anampses fidjensis Sauvage, 1880: 224). Dr.
Leonard P. Schultz, of the United States National
Museum, will record the species from the northern
Marshall Islands in volume 2 of Fishes of the
Marshall and Maranas Islands. Recently
Kamohara (op. cit.) has recorded it from Japan
and Smith (1955: 931) from the western Indian
Ocean. The Society Islands specimen was taken
with a spear in the lagoon of Moorea at a depth
of 40 feet. It measures 83 mm in _ standard
length, and is catalogued in the United States
National Museum under number 114743. In
life the fish was purple on most of the body and
upper half of the head; the lower half of the head
and the thorax up to the pectoral base was
yellow (the demarcation between purple and
yellow being gradual, not abrupt); body and
nape covered with small, black-edged blue spots
(few, however, occurring on thoracic region);
caudal peduncle and caudal fin dull orange-red
with a broad whitish posterior margin and small
pale blue spots (spots lacking on outer third of
fin); dorsal and anal fins reddish purple, shading
to copper distally and posteriorly (the anal with
shades of yellow anteriorly in middle of fin),
with small dark-edged blue spots and a conspic-
uous blue-edged black spot, in diameter nearly
twice as great as eye, in the posterior part of each
fin; dorsal and anal fins margined narrowly with
blue anteriorly and black posteriorly; paired
fins yellow, the pectorals with a dark brown band
RANDALL: TWO NEW SPECIES OF ANAMPSES
107
at the base; opercular membrane darker than
rest of head; lips orangish white. The body depth
of the specimen is contained 3.3 times in the
standard length; the upper pair of canine teeth
are sharply upcurved and the lowers sharply
downcurved. Individuals of the species nearly
twice as large as this specimen were seen in the
Same area, aS were Juveniles. The blue spots on
the latter were fewer and larger, and the bright
yellow ventral coloration was lacking.
Specimens of the non-Hawaiian species,
Anampses diadematus Riippell, A. amboinensis
Bleeker, A. geographicus Cuvier and Valen-
ciennes, and A. pterophthalmus Bleeker were
examined at the United States National Museum
and the Natural History Museum, Stanford
University. A. diadematus is suggestive of godef-
froyi in having vertical pale lines on the scales
and similar body proportions. It differs primarily
in having predorsal scales (absent mid-dorsally
on godeffroyt) and in possessing a distinctive
pale band running forward from the eye across
the front part of the interorbital space and a
second, narrower band connecting eyes vertically
across the interorbital.
A. pterophthalmus and A. geographicus differ
from all other Anampses in having much higher
scale counts (lateral line scales given by de
Beaufort, op. cit. as 49-51). These two species
differ from one another only in color and caudal
fin shape, and it is believed that the former is
the female and subadult male of the latter,
although more specimens are needed to demon-
strate this conclusively. A. geographicus is the
older name. Mostly females and a few males were
found among the museum specimens of ptero-
phthalmus which could be sexed. The largest
specimen is 166.5 mm in standard length. Seven
males and no females were identified among
16 specimens of geographicus which could be
sexed. With the exception of one disconcerting
107-mm_ specimen (sex indeterminable) the
geographicus ranged from 150 to 199 mm in
standard length. A. pterophthalmus has a truncate
caudal fin and a large, black, white-edged spot
posteriorly in the dorsal and anal fins. Except
for the 107-mm specimen which has a truneate
caudal fin, all of the geographicus have emarginate
caudal fins with slightly produced lobes. A.
geographicus is a more colorful species, has a
vermiculation of narrow bands on the head and
chest, and ordinarily lacks ocelli in the fins.
Fowler and Bean (op. cit.: 227) recorded one
specimen from Cebu, Philippine Islands, with
108
cpscure ocelli on the last dorsal and anal rays.
The specimen is 152 mm in standard length, and
its caudal fin is slightly emarginate. This fish
appears to be transforming from the pterophthal-
mus form to that of geographicus.
LITERATURE CITED
Beaurort, L. F. pe. The fishes of the Indo-Aus-
tralian Archipelago. 8: xv + 508, 56 figs.
Leiden, 1940.
Bueeker, P. Atlas ichthyologique .. . néerlandais
1: xxi + 168, 48 pls. Amsterdam, 1862.
Fowier, H.W. The fishes of Oceania. Bernice P.
Bishop Mus. Mem. 10: ii + 540, 49 pls., 82
text figs. 1928.
A collection of fishes obtained in the Riu
Kiu Islands by Captain Ernest R. Tinkham
A.U.S. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia
98: 123-218, 76 figs. 1946.
—— and Bran, B. A. Contributions to the biology
of the Philippine Archipelago and adjacent
regions. U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 100(7): vil +
525, 49 pls. 1928.
Gostrne, W. A. The inshore fish fauna of Johns-
ton Island, a Central Pacific atoll. Pacific Sci.
10: 442-480, 4 figs. 1955.
Gintuer, A. C. Andrew Garrett’s Fische der
Stidsee. Journ. Mus. Godeffroy 7 (15): 217-
256, 20 pls. 1881.
Jenkins, O. P. Description of new species of
fishes from the Hawaiian Islands belonging to
the families of Labridae and Scaridae. Wie Se
Fish Comm. Bull. 19: 45-65, 22 figs., 1 pl.
1900.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 3
Jorpan, D.S., and EvErmann, B.W. The aquatic
resources of the Hawaiian Islands. Part I. The
shore fishes. U. S. Bur. Fish. Bull. 28 (1):
xxvili + 574, 229 figs., 65 pls., 73 col. pls. 1905.
—— and Swaug, A. The fishes of Samoa. U.S.
Bur. Fish. Bull. 25: 175-455 + xxx, 111 figs.,
5 pls., 16 col. pls. 1906.
and Snyper, J. O. A review of the labroid
fishes and related forms found in the waters of
Japan. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 24: 595-662, 10
figs. 1902.
Kamonara, T. A list of fishes from the Tokara
Islands, Kagoshima Prefecture, Japan. Seto
Mar. Biol. Lab. Publ. 3: 265-299, 17 figs. 1954.
Quoy, J. R. C., and Gaimarp, P. Voyage autour
du monde .. . 1817-20. 1-712, atlas. Paris, 1824.
Ranpatu, J. E. Fishes of the Gilbert Islands.
Atoll Res. Bull. 47: xi + 248, 2 figs. 1955.
_ A revision of the surgeon fish genus
Acanthurus. Pacific Sci. 10: 159-235, 23 figs.,
3 col. pls. 1956.
Recan,C.T. A collection of fishes made by Profes-
sor Francisco Fuentes at Easter Island. Proc.
Zool. Soc. London 1913: 368-374, 6 pls.
Sauvacn, H. E. Description de quelques poissons
de la collection du Muséum d’ Histoire Naturelle.
Soc. Philom. Paris Bull. (7) 4: 220-228. 1880.
Smirn, J. L. B. The fishes of Aldabra. Pt. IV.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (12)'8: 928-957) pls 1
fig. 1955.
Tanaka, S. Notes on some Japanese fishes, with
descriptions of fourteen new species. Journ.
Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo 23: 1-54, 4 pls.
1908.
ooo hla
COCKROACHES
Cockroaches are highly dangerous potential
carriers of human disease. This is stressed in a
report by Drs. Louis M. Roth and Edwin R.
Willis, of the Quartermaster Research and Engi-
neering Center, recently issued by the Smithsonian
Institution. At least 18 species of cockroaches
known to inhabit houses have been incrimi-
nated, naturally or experimentally, in trans-
mission of infectious agents, or have been claimed
to bite man. Several of the commonest species
have been captured repeatedly in sewers, cess-
pools, and septic tanks and have been found mi-
erating from sewers and dumps into nearby build-
ings. The predilection of cockroaches for human
food is notorious. Thus, the two scientists point
out, the mechanism certainly exists for trans-
ference of disease organisms to man and domestic
animals.
Natural transmission has not, however, been
incontrovertibly proved. Four strains of polio
virus, however, have been found occurring
naturally in wild-caught cockroaches. In addition
they can harbor, experimentally, Coxsackie,
mouse encephalomyelitis, and yellow-fever
viruses. About 40 species of disease-causing
AND DISEASE
bacteria have been isolated from naturally con-
taminated cockroaches, and two species of fungi
that have been associated with human maladies
have been found.
“There is no question,” say the Quartermaster
Corps scientists, ‘‘about the ability of cock-
roaches to carry pathogens in or on their bodies. . .
Although they undoubtedly are vectors of the
agents of viral and bacterial diseases, with very
few exceptions their relations to specific out-
breaks of disease have not been determined. This
area of research has not received the attention it
deserves. Demonstrating correlations between
house flies and incidence of intestinal disease has
been difficult. Linking cockroaches with the
actual transmission of similar disease agents will
be no easier.
“Cockroaches are tough, resilient insects with
amazing endurance and ability to recover rapidly
from almost complete extermination. They will
probably always be with us, and we can only
temporarily reduce their numbers. But, as in all
battles, recognition of a common enemy is
essential to successful combat.”
.
v
1)
ve.
=
x
f
{
1
|
7 r
h
¢
'
r
j
“N
*
a
} (fie
é
1
*
"7
‘ so ’
oe
Ul
7 “i
fh
wv i
b,
4 ak
%
~!
w 2
yee
Os We, <
’ t
S —_
¥ 2
‘4
Lah a ra ‘
¢ fF i a9
i ( , a, F
* , : :
na tf
- £
4 g-s tagt ne i é
CONTENTS
History oF Scrence.—Ferdinand Hassler’s gift to America. ELLIoTT
B. ROBERTS: oo oe ow eb ee Be ie
ZooLoGy.—Antillesia cardisomae, n. gen. and sp. (Copepoda: Harpacti-.
coida) from the gill chambers of land crabs, with observations on
the related genus Cancrinola. ArTHurR G. HUMES........-.-----
ZooLoGy.—Appalachian Cambalidae: Taxonomy and distribution
(Diplopoda: Spirostreptida). RicHARD Ll. HorrMaAn.. = .- ape a
Hrprtrotocy.—Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland and
Delmarva, 13: Piedmont herpetofauna on coastal Delmarva. CLYDE
IcuTHyoLocy.—Two new species of Anampses from the Hawaiian
Islands, with notes on other labrid fishes of this genus. Joun E.
PUANDIA LBs ooo one ies ss cues cette ole aS ik ae 2 a Oe ee
Page
95
Aste alan ce uate eho ee eae no > 75, 108
ye
OLUME 4 April L958 — NUMBER 4
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
(OF SCIENCES
| } Published Monthly by the
—oe se oH INGTON ACA DEM Y $ O SBS. CRENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD. ~
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CuesteR H. Paas, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BaMrorD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonp, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is aliowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PROCEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNaL.—Per Year...............--.-++-+-+--- $7.50
Price of back numbers and voiumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — _
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 — 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JoURNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $393 .50.
Monoarapu No. 1, ‘““The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS..............-..-+-++--+- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete........... REE ph SS $25.00
Single volames, unbound).45) o) ssa.) 2-22 see ee Eo: - 2.00
Single numbers....... Wale ie. AUG S lt aE PRA eae Ne Se eeeNC Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences”’ and
agcreseee to the Treasurer, H. S. RappLeyve, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
Deg.
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 48
April 1958
No. 4
BIOCHEMISTRY .—The effect of cortisone on the incorporation of C-14 in various
tissues from 2-C-14 labeled alanine.! W. C. Hess and I. P. SHAFFRAN, George-
town University Schools of Medicine and Dentistry.
(Received January 15, 1958)
The incorporation of C-14 from 2-14-C
labeled DL-alanine in glycogen and protein
from liver and skeletal muscle of albino
rats following single injections of cortisone
acetate was reported by Hess and Shaffran
(1, 2). While C-14 was rapidly incorporated
into liver glycogen, its release, in control
animals, was also rapid. In cortisone acetate
treated animals, the specific activity of the
liver glycogen increased up to 40 hours and
then declined slowly. Cortisone acetate
slightly increased the degree of incorpora-
tion of C-14 into liver but not muscle
protein.
These experiments provided no answer to
the question whether cortisone was acting
by preventing the incorporation of the
amino-acid carbon into peripheral tissue
protein, hence making it available for
glycogen synthesis or whether cortisone was
stimulating breakdown of tissue protein.
The extra nitrogen excreted in the urine
of the cortisone treated rats was sufficient
to explain the amount of liver glycogen
formed, as was previously found by Long,
Katzin, and Fry (3). However, when the
nitrogen is considered in terms of muscle
tissue, the amount is insufficient to account
for the weight loss of the animals.
The present experiments were designed to
attempt to provide answers to the question
whether cortisone acted antianabolically or
catabolically. Two series of experiments
were planned. In the first, the labeled
alanine was fed for several days, to estab-
lish the extent of incorporation of C-14 in
1This work was done under a contract with
the Atomic Hnergy Commission.
tissue protein, lipide, nonprotein nitrogen
and glycogen. Then the effect of cortisone
on the rate of release of the C-14 was deter-
mined. Second, the labeled alanine was
fed for three days and cortisone was in-
jected at the same time. The first experi-
ment would offer evidence on the catabolic
effect of cortisone and the second on the
anti-anabolic effect. The results suggest
that the action of cortisone is primarily
catabolic for peripheral protein but not
lipide.
EXPERIMENTAL
Rats, weighing 100 to 150 g, were kept
on standard laboratory diet and given
2-C-14 DL-alanine together with 500 mg
carrier DL-alanine daily for three days.
The total dose of C-14 fed varied between
1.0 and 1.5 X 107 ects./min. In the first
series of experiments the control animals
were fasted on the fourth and fifth days
and then sacrificed. The test animals were
given 5 mg of cortisone acetate in the
middle of the fasting period, 24 hours be-
fore sacrifice. In the second series of ex-
periments the fed rats received the same
amounts of alanine as in the first series
and 5 mg of cortisone acetate for three
days and then were sacrificed. The con-
trols were similarly treated except they re-
ceived no cortisone.
The methods for the administration of
alanine, determination of liver and muscle
glycogen and protein, and their radioac-
tivity have been previously described (7, 2).
Nonprotein nitrogen was determined in
the trichloracetic acid filtrate from the
109
110
precipitation of the protein. The muscle and
liver proteins were exhaustively extracted
with alcohol and ether to obtain the total
lipide fractions. The separation of the
carcass into the nonprotein nitrogen, lipide,
and defatted residue was done by the
method of Clark (4).
RESULTS
Table 1 contains the basic analytical
data on body and liver weights, lipide, and
elycogen content from both series of ex-
periments. The values in all cases repre-
sent the average from experiments on six
to eight animals. Table 2 contains all the
results of the nitrogen determinations on
the tissues, the nonprotein nitrogen frac-
tions, and the urine. The values are ex-
pressed as mg N per 100 g final body
weight for the liver protein and NPN, as
TaBLE 1.—Bopy WEIGHT, LIPIDE, AND -
GLYCOGEN VALUES
Expt. 1 Expt. 2
Cortisone Cortisone
last 24 hours | continuous
Bue Test Cor Test
Wail Vitis Hoscasoceccooes oy GY ED iloz
IMMA Win Bocaaeeeseseses alley (AY Guile kee:
IUIRVGI® Wiis Wewosseccaeaescos| Boo) Boa Ooo Ooo
Inver wt.) 2/100) "2. body
Wu crane ep res ateee: aes PAS Bio) Bees|, eed)
Liver lipide percent...-.:.| 4.0) 4.3) 5.5) 6.3
Muscle lipide percent..... RS) BAN BS) Be
Cancassy lipiGereeaec s.r Wa eA EG 2a
Liver glycogen percent....| 0.1) 1.5) 6.4) 8.2
Muscle glycogen percent..| 0.6) 0.7; 0.8} 1.1
TABLE 2.—TissuE NITROGEN VALUES
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Expt. 1 Expt. 2
Cortisone Cortisone
last 24 hrs. continuous
Control | Test |Control| Test
iver proves epee: Oy POO piles} AK)
Carcass aN mgs 1700 |1620 |1880 {1740
Muscle protein per-
COI ae eee eee Oro Bie ll 3.4 2.9
Trivers Nie Neh oe BATS PATO 2 4 eZ Tae
Carcass NPN, N mg..| 112 99 | 149 | 116.6
Muscle NPN, mg.
3/2 MUS Clete eee A ior 2| a aoe
Wiines mga eee. cee 530 602 430 548
* mg. N/100 g. body weight.
VOL. 48, No. 4
percent for the muscle protein and mg/g
muscle for the muscle NPN. Table 3 con-
tains the data on the estimation of the
radioactivity due to the incorporation of
the C-14 from the administered labeled
alanine in the nitrogen containing fractions.
All the values are calculated in counts per
minute per mg nitrogen. In Table 4 the
C-14 content of the total lipide fractions
are presented calculated as counts per
minute per mg lipide.
DISCUSSION
In experiment 1, designed to test whether
cortisone acetate acted catabolically, the
control animals showed substantial ac-
cumulation of C-14 activity in both liver
and muscle protein, and also in the total
carcass. The several lipide fractions like-
wise showed incorporation of C-14. When
cortisone acetate was administered for the
last 24 hours the liver protein showed an
increase not only in total protein but also
in C-14 incorporation, the activity per mg
protein nitrogen rising from 144 to 162
counts per minute. The activity in the
NPN fractions of the liver increased while
that of both carcass and muscle decreased.
The activity of the muscle protein de-
creased as well as the protein nitrogen
content. It is apparent that as far as muscle
and total carcass protein is concerned
cortisone acts catabolically. As far as
liver protein is concerned this is not the
case nor does it hold for lipide. All the
lipide fractions were higher in absolute
amounts and slightly higher in specific
activity.
Experiment 2, in which cortisone was
administered simultaneously with the la-
beled alanine, indicated that the specific
activity and nitrogen content of the muscle
protein was less than that of the controls.
In the 3-day period the specific activity of
the muscle protein decreased 37 percent
and of the carcass protein 32 percent. In
the first experiment in which cortisone was
administered after the labeled carbon had
been laid down in the tissue, and the corti-
sone given for only the last 24 hours of a
5-day period, the decreases in specific
activity of the muscle and carcass protein
were 30 and 26 percent, respectively. It
Aprit 1958 HESS AND SHAFFRAN:
TABLE 3.—CaRBON-|I4 Activity IN TISSUE AND
URINE, CountTs/MIN./Me. N.
Expt. 1 Expt. 2
Cortisone Cortisone
last 24 hrs. continuous
Control | Test | Control| Test
ever provein......... EAS G2 59a els
Muscle protein....... 80 56); 104 65
Gameasss 956. ees 58 43 76 52
ILiINzere INUEAN eee 93 ay (2, 126
Mirsele INIPIN =. ....... 5 3 18 12
@arcass NIRIN. oo... e. 8 6 16 il
UTA). se eee 1132 | 1010 | 1200 840
Taste 4.—Carpon-l4 Acriviry 1n Lipipes,
CountTs/MIN./MG. LIpPIDE
Expt. 1 Expt. 2
Cortisone Cortisone
last 24 hrs. continous
Control| Test |Control| Test
imeem ae S15 | 35.5 | 44.5 | OO
IMOTSCIG. 5a 2) ener W5o3) | ALI PS | BO 8
Cancaicsmerreee....4.| 12.4 |-14.4 | 18.0+| 2620
would appear that experiment 2 does not
give an unequivocal answer to the question
whether the cortisone acts solely cata-
bolically or antianabolically. There was
some reduction in specific activity of muscle
and carcass protein, but this was probably
due to the fact that the dominant catabolic
effect was being exerted on the labeled
carbon as soon as it was incorporated. In
both experiments the specific activity of
the liver protein was increased and likewise
that of the liver and tissue lipides. The
specific activity of the NPN of the liver
increased whereas that of the muscle and
carcass decreased. Clark (4) observed an
increase in the NPN fraction of the liver
and a decrease in the carcass NPN follow-
ing cortisone and Ingle et al. (5) found
that it induced a significant increase in the
concentration of plasma amino acids. Clark
also found a decrease in carcass nitrogen
following cortisone. In both experiments
reported here there was a decrease in carcass
nitrogen and an increase in urine nitrogen
in the test animals.
An increase in lipide content of liver,
muscle, and carcass produced by cortisone
acetate was noted in both experiments.
EFFECT OF CORTISONE 111
This occurred despite the fact that in both
experiments there was a loss of weight in
the test animals. The increase in liver
lipide has been noted by others, Silber and
Rorters(G) pC astlaneteals <7,)sand, S, I.
Einhorn et al. (8). The decrease in weight
is probably due to loss of water as was
suggested by Cavallero et al. (9) and Hedon
(10). Kyle et al. (17) found that hydro-
cortisone administered to patients produced
a significant increase of total body fat as
determined by specific gravity measure-
ments. The loss in tissue protein as in-
dicated by urine nitrogen increase is insuffi-
cient to account for the loss in weight, an
observation also made by Clark (4).
The concept that the action of cortisone
is catabolic is supported by the recent work
of Grossman et al. (12). These investigators
gave I-131 labeled serum albumin to pa-
tients and measured the effects of hydro-
cortisone on turnover. They found it in-
creased the breakdown of the albumin but
that anabolic effects were unchanged or
only slightly decreased. Fritz (13) fed N-15
glycine to rats and found that cortisone
enhanced protein catabolism and suggested
that it induced a protein mobilization from
the periphery to the liver at a rate faster
than the liver could catabolize it.
Cortisone increased the liver glycogen in
both series of experiments. In series one
where the 24-hour fast prior to the ad-
ministration of the glycogen depleted the
liver glycogen, cortisone produced a large
increase in glycogen. In series two where
the animals were fed continuously, the
cortisone produced an increase of almost
30 percent in liver glycogen even though
the control livers contained 6.4 percent
glycogen. Slight increases in muscle gly-
cogen were also found in both series of
experiments.
SUMMARY
The effect of the administration of corti-
sone acetate on the incorporation of C-14
from 2-C-14 labeled alanine into tissue pro-
tein and lipide was investigated. Two series
of experiments with rats were run. In the
first series the animals were given the
labeled alanine for three days to permit
incorporation of the tag into tissue. They
112
were then fasted for 24 hours to deplete
liver glycogen, given 5 mg of cortisone
acetate and sacrificed after an additional
14-hour fast. The control animals accumu-
lated the tagged carbon into muscle, liver,
and carcass protein and lipide. The corti-
sone acetate treated animals showed an
increase in liver protein, lipide, and gly-
cogen content and also increased specific
activity. Muscle and carcass protein and
specific activity were markedly decreased.
Muscle and carcass lipide was increased and
specific activity was slightly increased.
In the second series the labeled alanine
and cortisone acetate were given simul-
taneously to the animals for three days.
The specific activity and total amount of
liver protein and lipide were increased.
The muscle and carcass proteim was re-
duced in amount and the specific activity
was likewise decreased. Muscle and carcass
lipide was increased and then specific ac-
tivity was increased.
The first experiments indicate that as
far as muscle and carcass protein is con-
cerned, the action of cortisone acetate 1s
catabolic, and anabolic for liver protein,
muscle, liver, and carcass lipide. The
second experiment indicates that cortisone
acetate did not prevent the accumulation
of C-14 in muscle and carcass protein but
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, No. 4
it did reduce the amount, and it also re-
duced the amount of protein formed. This
could be interpreted as non-interference
with anabolism but the immediate exertion
of a catabolic effect on both the newly
formed and existing protein.
LITERATURE CITED
(1) Hess, W. C., and Suarrran, I. P. Journ.
Washington Acad. Sci. 46: 20. 1956.
Q) Ss. lbidk 47) aes
(3) Lone, C: N. H., Katzin, Bland pie, Ki.
Endocrin. 26: 309. 1951.
(4) Cuark, I. Journ. Biol. Chem. 200: 69. 1953.
(5) IneuE, D.J., Prestrup, M. C., and Nezamis,
J. E.. Proc: Soc. Exp. Biolwandi Med:
75: 801. 1950.
(6) Suser, R..H., and PRorrery ¢: Cin
docrin. 52: 518. 1955.
(7) Sata, G., Benevi, O., AmERa, A., CIcERr,
C., and CavaLuero, C. Sperimentale
101: 195. 1951.
(8) Ernnorn, E., Hrrscuperc, E., and GELHORN,
A. Journ. Gen. Physiol. 37: 559. 1954.
(9) CavaLLERo, C., Sava, G., and Ba.uasio,
C. B. Boll. Atti Soc. Ital. Endocrinol.
2: 99. 1952.
(10) Hepon, L., Macasrizs, J., and MaRtTIN,
L. J. Physiol. (Paris) 47; 190%) 1950:
(11) Kytz, L. H., Meyer, R. J., Scwaar, M.,
and WERDEIN, E. J. Journ. Clin. Invest.
35: 1045. 1956.
(12) Grossman, J., Yatow, A. A., and WESTON,
R. E. Abs. 49th Annual Meeting of the
Amer. Soc. for Clin. Invest., p. 82. 1957.
(13) Fritz, I. Endoerin. 58: 485. 1956.
As I grow old I grow calm. If I feel what are perhaps an old man’s apprehensions,
I do not lose my hopes. I do not pin my dreams for the future to my country or even
to my race. I think it probable that cwilization somehow will last as long as I care to
look ahead—perhaps with smaller numbers, but also bred to greatness and splendor by
science. I think it is not improbable that man, like the grub that prepares a chamber
for the winged thing it has never seen, but 1s to be—that man may have cosmic destinies
that he does not understand. And so beyond the vision of battling races and an um-
poverished earth I catch a dreaming glimpse of peace. Perpetual inspiration vs as neces-
sary to the life of goodness, holiness, and happiness as perpetual respiration is necessary
to animal life-—WiLi1am Law
Aprit 1958
NICOL: TAXONOMY VERSUS STRATIGRAPHY
115
GEOLOGY .— Taxonomy versus stratigraphy. Daviy Nico, Southern Illinois Uni-
versity, Carbondale, Il.
(Received January 6, 1958)
Nomenclatural designations should serve
to clarify, not obscure, taxonomic relation-
ships, and the practical needs of stratig-
raphers should in no way hinder this goal.
The application of formal nomenclature to
every variant in a fossil population is a
common practice among stratigraphers,
who seek to name each form which has
stratigraphic significance; but this practice
confounds the true purpose of taxonomy.
The problem is well stated by Newell and
by Kermack in the symposium on The
species concept in palaeontology. Newell (p.
66) says:
Morphologic forms artificially extracted from
whole populations (e.g., polymorphs, ontogenetic
stages, ecotypes, and individual variants) often
are given formal Latin names as varieties or
species. This action is defended on the grounds
that all distinctive fossil forms are actually or
potentially indices of stratigraphic horizon, hence
deserving of separate recognition. As far as it goes
there is some logic in this argument but the point
of view on which it is based actually defeats one
of the ultimate objectives in stratigraphy, which
is the establishment of detailed, interregional
fossil zones based on evolutionary development.
And on page 73 Newell reiterates:
It hardly seems appropriate to burden in-
ternational nomenclature with binominal or
trinominal Latin names for categories which at
best have only local stratigraphic value and are
devoid of evolutionary significance. Yet palaeon-
tologists who favour the naming of artificial
categories of scope less than whole populations
unconsciously support the limited objectives of
local and temporary advantage over the long term
goal of world-wide stratigraphic zonation based on
evolutionary succession. The individual variants
might better be designated, if necessary, by non-
Linnaean, vernacular names or numbers.
And Kermack states succinctly (p. 101):
“Palaeontology in general suffers from too
many species rather than too few.”
In general, problems of this sort arise
When one is dealing with species which
have wide geographic and _ stratigraphic
ranges and have numerous individuals.
The Newell and Kermack contentions are
well exemplified and supported by con-
sideration of the species Glycymeris ameri-
cana, which is found from Virginia to
Florida from the late Miocene to the Re-
cent. During the latest Miocene this species
was exceedingly numerous and _ variable.
The most striking variant is what I have
termed the mutant rugose (Nicol, 1953, p.
451). The rugose form was given a species
name by Conrad, quinquerugata; but Dall
(1898, p. 610) and Gardner (1943, pp. 27-
28) have synonymized quinquerugata with
americana. Dall (p. 611) thought that the
rugose form was due to some pathologic
cause.
The earliest specimens of Glycymeris
americana do not have rugae or folds on
the posterior side of the shell, but toward
the end of the late Miocene rugose forms
began to appear in populations along with
normal forms. There is no other consistent
difference between normal and _ rugose
forms except for one or more folds or rugae
which are located on the outside of the
shell and which are nearly always on the
posterior side. (Apparently further muta-
tions of some of the rugose mutants gave
rise to the rare species Glycymeris aberrans
at the very end of the Miocene, but this
species is of no concern in the present dis-
cussion.) Rugose mutants became more
and more abundant and spread to popula-
tions covering practically the entire geo-
graphic range of Glycymeris americana until
the end of the Miocene, and then they
suddenly disappeared. Specimens of Gly-
cymeris americana trom Phocene and
vounger strata never have folds or rugae.
There appear to be no geographic or eco-
logic differences between normal and rugose
forms. Collections from late Miocene strata
contain both forms in various percentages.
There is no doubt that the rugose forms
have stratigraphic significance, certainly
more so than the normal forms of Gily-
cymeris americana. However, the problem is
how to designate the rugose mutant. The
114
average stratigrapher would prefer a formal
Latin name, which, preferably, would have
some official nomenclatural standing. From
the purely biologic or strict taxonomic view
this is unfortunate. I agree with Dall and
Gardner that there is no reason to consider
the rugose variant as a distinct species.
Furthermore, this mutant cannot be con-
sidered a subspecies by definition. One
could refer to the rugose forms as Gly-
cymeris americana variety quinquerugata,
but I object to this solution for two reasons:
(1) There is always the possibility that
some paleontologist will unwittingly raise
the varietal name to that of a subspecies
or a species without at least stating his
reasons for doing so. (2) The term or
category “variety” is a sort of catchall and
really tells us nothing about the variant.
My preference, as I stated in 1953, is to
term the form Glycymeris americana, rugose
mutant. If one would prefer in this case, the
term “polymorph” can be used instead of
“mutant”, for Glycymeris americana is
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, No. 4
certainly a polymorphic species. (Recom-
mended procedure for the term or terms
following the species or subspecies name is
to set off the description with a comma.
However, this is, as yet, not followed by
many taxonomists.) Either phrase—“‘Tu-
gose mutant” or “‘rugose polymorph’’—has
the advantage of expressing the biologic
relationship of the rugose form to the
normal form. In this way the stratigraphers
can keep the integrity of the variant with-
out confounding its true taxonomic position.
LITERATURE CITED
Dati, W. H. Contributions to the Tertiary fauna
of Florida, etc. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci.
Philadelphia 3 (4): 521-947, pls. 23-35. 1898.
GARDNER, JuLIA. Mollusca from the Miocene
and Lower Pliocene of Virginia and North
Carolina, Part I. Pelecypoda. U. 8. Geol.
Survey Prof. Pap. 199-A: 178, 23 pls. 1943.
Nicot, D. A _ study of the polymorphic species
Glycymeris americana. Journ. Pal. 27 (3):
451-455. 1953.
SyLVESTER-BRADLEY, P. C. (editor). The species
concept in palaeontology. Systematics Assoc.
Publ. 2: 145. London, 1956.
Truth is the foundation and the reason of the perfection of beauty, for what-
ever stature a thing may be, it cannot be beautiful and perfect, unless it be truly
what it should be, and possess truly all that it should have-—A.L¥FRED NoRTH
WHITEHEAD.
Aprit 1958
KENG: TWO NEW GENERA OF GRASSES FROM CHINA
ES
BOTANY .—Two new genera of grasses from China. Y. L. Kena, Department of
Biology, Nanking University, and Chung Shan Memorial Nanking Botanical
Garden, Botanical Institute, Academia Sinica. (Communicated by Agnes
Chase. )
(Received December 7, 1957)
During the past few years the author
and his collaborators have devoted them-
selves to writing in Chinese an illustrated
flora of the grasses of China. Although they
have intended to include in this work only
the more familiar species, there are about
200 genera and 800 species described and
figured in it. Among the ample material
gathered from the different parts of the
country, a good many novelties have been
encountered in the course of their study.
Two new genera are here presented for pub-
lication.
Sinochasea! Keng, genus novum _ tribus
Agrostidearum, cum Deyeuxia Clarioni et
Calamagrostide Adansoni comparandum; ab illa
rhachillae continuatione minuta plerumque
glabra haud penicillata, lemmate sub _ lobos
omnino villoso, ab hae lemmatis callo breviter
barbato, arista inter lobos valida, geniculata, et
ab utraque glumis saepe 5- (vel inferiore 6-,
superiore 4-) haud 1-3-nervibus, stigmatibus
tribus distinguendum.
Spiculae uniflorae, in paniculam contractam
dispositae, lateraliter leviter compressae, rhachilla
supra glumas facile disarticulata, in acumen
minutum glabrum supra paleam producta; glumae
subaequales vel prima_ saepius longior,
herbaceae, plerumque prominenter quinque-
nerves, dorso carinatae vel basin versus
rotundatae, marginibus anguste hyalinis; lemma
glumis brevior, lateraliter compressum vel inferne
dorso rotundatum, a latere videtur anguste
oblongum, profunde bilobum, aequaliter villosum,
chartaceum vel inferne subcoriaceum, sed lobis
glabris, Superne membranaceis, quinquenerve,
nervo medio valido, elevato, sed basin versus
tenui, e sinu aristam geniculatam exserente,
nervis lateralibus inferne obscuris, superne per
lobos paralleliter percurrentibus, marginibus
inter se imminentibus, paleam omnino occultanti-
bus, callo minuto, rotundato-obtuso, breviter
1 Name from a combination of Szno-, China,
and Chasea, after Mrs. Agnes Chase, well-known
agrostologist of the United States, who gave
much help to the study of Chinese grasses.
densiusque barbato; palea a dorso visa anguste
lanceolata, bidentata, lemmate brevior tenui-
orque, obscure binervis, inter nervos (carinas)
adpresse villosa et superne subhyalina, mar-
ginibus inflexis, approximatis vel remotis (i.e.
haud inter se imminentibus); lodiculae duae,
semi-ovatae, hyalinae; stamina tria; filamenta
elongata; antherae oblongae; ovarium fusiforme
vel lineare, glabrum; styli tres, terminales,
brevissimi stigmatibus dense plumosis; caryopsis
(immatura) a lemmate paleaque libera.
Gramen perenne, caespitosum; culmi validi,
simplices, paucinodosi; foliorum laminae lineares,
involutae; panicula terminalis, erecta vel leviter
arcuata.
Species adhuc cognita unica, in provincia
Tsinghai, Chinae occidentalis, endemica.
Sinochasea trigyna Keng, sp. nov. (Fig. 1).
Perennis glabra, basi cum vaginis vetustis
brunneis et innovationibus intravaginalibus cir-
cumdata, radicibus fibrosis validis, cire. 0.8 mm.
crassis, e rhizomate duro brevi ortis; culmi erecti,
rigidi, teretes, circ. 45 em alti, 1.5 mm in diametro
2-3-nodosi, nodo supremo sub medium usque ad
2/3 superiorem sito; folia pallide viridula, erecta,
caulina duo vel tria; vaginae arctae, striatae,
scabridulae, internodio 11—18.5 em longo multo
breviores; ligula membranacea vel _ firmula,
truncata vel lacerata, 0.5-1 mm longa, in mar-
gines vaginae decurrens; laminae e basi angustata
anguste lineares, rigidae, valide nervosae, sub-
ulato-involutae, 6.5-8.5 in innovatione usque ad
16 cm longae, expansae 1-2 raro 3 mm latae,
suprema saepe valde abbreviata, setiformi, 1-2
em longa, utrinque ut in marginibus scabrae vel
ad paginam superiorem setuloso-asperae; panicula
spiciformis, anguste lanceolata, 7-8.5 em longa,
circ. 1 em lata, continua vel inferne interrupta,
ramis binis, adpressis, primariis usque ad 3 em
longis, inferne plus minusve nudis, superne divisis
et 4-7-spiculatis; pedicelli sicut rami setuloso-
seabriduli, adpressi, laterales 0.6-1.5 terminales
3-5 mm longi; spiculae anguste lanceolatae,
10-12 mm longae, confertae, pallide viridulae
vel purpurascentes, demum hiantes; glumae
spiculam aequantes vel subaequantes, acuminatae,
Fic. 1.—Sinochasea trigyna Keng: 1, Habit; 2, spikelet; 3, first and second glumes; 4, side view of
lemma; dorsal 5, view of the same; 6, ventral view of the lower part of lemma showing the prolonged
rachilla; 7, dorsal view of palea; 8, lodicules, stamens, and pistil. (Type.)
116
Aprin 1958
prima saepius quam secunda 0.5-1 mm longiore,
distincte quinquenerves vel prima inferne 6-,
secunda 4-nervis sublaeves vel minutissime
scaberulae, saepe apicem versus recurvatae;
lemma 7-8 mm longum, pilis albis cire. 2 mm
longis villosum, lobis acuminatis, circ. 3 mm
longis, callo pilis densis 0.5-0.75 mm _longis
barbato; arista scaberula, in 1/3 inferiore parte
geniculata, columna laxius contorta, 3-3.5 mm,
subula 7-8.5 mm longa; rhachillae processus 0.5-1
mm longus, laevis, glaber vel raro pilis 1-3 sparse
pilosus; palea 6 mm longa, 0.75 mm lata (mar-
ginibus inflexis excl.), dentibus acuminatis, vix
1 mm longis, nervis (carinis) sub dentes minute
ciliolatis; lodiculae anguste semiovatae, cire.
1.5 mm longae, inferne firmulae, glabrae,
acuminatae vel altera saepe breviter cuspidata;
antherae flavo-brunneae, 1 mm longae; ovarium
purpureo-nigrescens, circ. 2 mm longum, ven-
traliter canaliculatum; stigmata flavo-brunnea,
2-3 mm longa; caryopsis immatura.
CuiNnA: Prov. Tsinghai, Hai-yen Hsien, San
Chio Shen, Sheep-breeding Station, San Tui
Tui Pu, 21 VIII 1954, P. C. Yeh & W.C. Wang,
etc. 3241 (type in Herbarium of the Department
of Biology, Nanking University; duplicate types
in Herb. Botanical Institute, Peking, and Chung
Shan Memorial Nanking Botanical Garden,
Nanking).
This species is peculiar in the tribe in having
three stigmas. The spikelets are probably cleis-
togamous, the short oblong anthers in the
mature florets often being entangled with the
hairs of the stigmas which, after removal of the
lemma, are seen partly exposed laterally on
the outside of the inflexed margins of the palea.
This genus appears to be comparable with the
two closely related genera Deyeuxia and Calama-
grostis, the former being regarded by some authors
as a section of the latter. It is allied to Deyeuxia
through D. moupinensis (¥ranch.) Pilger, since
that species, though differing in having callus-
hairs equaling the lemma, has also a geniculate
awn arising from the sinus of a deeply bilobed
lemma. It is also similar to such species of
Calamagrostis as C. Munroana Boiss. and C.
Griffithiana Hook. f., in which the lemma is
villous all over and the callus hairs shorter than
the lemma.
Anisachne? Keng, genus novum tribus Agro-
2 Name from Greek anisos, unequal, and achne,
scale, referring to the unequal and successively
greater length of the first glume, second glume,
and lemma.
KENG: TWO NEW GENERA OF GRASSES FROM CHINA
117
stidearum, Deyeuxiae Clarioni, arcte affine lem-
mate glumis longiore, gluma inferiore quam
superiore plerumque breviore differt.
Spiculae uniflorae, lateraliter compressae, in
paniculam dispositae, rhachilla supra glumas dis-
articulata, in setam minutam villosam supra
paleam producta; glumae subaequales vel prima
quam secunda saepius leviter brevior, uninerves
vel secunda inferne trinerves, viridi-carinatae,
albo-marginatae; anthoecium hermaphroditum,
ad anthesin hians; lemma glumis saepe longius,
tenuiter chartaceum vel membranaceum, superne
obscure quinquenerve carinatumque, inferne
dorso rotundatum, muticum vel sub apicem
mucronatum, callo minuto dense barbato excepto
glabrum; palea lemmate brevior tenuiorque, ab
eo laxe inclusa vel ad maturitatem dorso ex-
posita, bicarinata; lodiculae duae, hyalinae;
stamina tria; filamenta demum elongata; an-
therae oblongae; ovarium obovatum, glabrum;
styli duo, terminales, brevissimi; stigmata sparse
plumosa, lateraliter exserta; caryopsis ellipsoidea,
dorso rotundata, facie leviter sulcata, inter lemma
paleamque inclusa, libera; hilum subbasale,
breviter lineare; embryo parvus.
Gramen perenne, caespitosum; culmi graciles
vel gracillimi, simplices, plurinodosi; foliorum
laminae lineares, planae vel involutae; panicula
terminalis, angusta vel ad maturitatem aperta.
Species adhue cognita unica, Chinam austro-
occidentalem inhabitat.
Anisachne gracilis Keng, sp. nov. (Fig. 2).
Perennis glabra, radicibus filiformibus ex
rhizomate duro brevi ortis, innovationibus extra-
vaginalibus, tenuibus, erectis vel saepius decum-
bentibus; culmi erecti vel saepe geniculati, basi
vaginis marcidis fibrosis albo-brunneis obtecti,
25-40 em alti, 0.5-1 mm in diametro, lenes, 3-4-
nodosi, nodo supremo infra vel in juventate supra
medium sito; vaginae striatae, laeves, basin
versus clausae, internodio 3-7.5 em _ longo
breviores, vel inferiores eo 12-20 mm longo leviter
longiores, suprema 6-11 em longa, quam sua
lamina longiore; ligula seariosa, truncata vel
obtusa, 0.5-1 vel usque ad 2 mm longa, in mar-
gines membranaceas decurrens; laminae ubique
aequilata vel basi vix contracta, lineares, fusco-
viridulae, firmulae, planae vel siccitate involutae.
utrinque seaberulae, caulinae superiores breviores,
2.5-8.5 em longae, 0.8-1.5 mm latae; panicula
7-16 em longa, exserta vel basi in juventate
vagina suprema inclusa, ramis filiformibus vel
9
subeapillaribus, scaberulis, 2—3-nis, longe remotis,
118
BEE 95 7-
td ‘ ea:
Fic. 2.—Anisachne gracilis Keng: 1, Habit; 2,
spikelet; 3, side view of lemma with prolonged
rachilla; 4, dorsal view of palea with prolonged
rachilla; 5, lodicules, stamens, and pistil; 6,
dorsal and ventral views of caryopsis. (1-5 from
type, 6 from Wang Chi-wu 83229.)
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF
SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 4
erectis vel basalibus ad maturitatem adscendenti-
patentibus, primariis 3.5-8 cm longis, inferne
longe nudis, superne supra vel infra medium di-—
trichotomis; pedicelli laterales 0.5-2 mm _ ter-
minales usque ultra 3 mm longi, scaberuli, apice
incrassati; spiculae circ. 3 mm longae, demum
hiantes; glumae acutae vel secunda obtusiuscula,
pallide viridulae, margine albo-vel purpureomem-
branaceae, ad maturitatem stramineae, prima
l-nervis, 2-2.5 mm longa, secunda 1-3-nervis,
2.5-2.8 mm longa, ad carinam scaberulae; lemma
spiculam aequans, acutum vel sub apicem saepius
mucrone 0.2 mm longo praeditum, callo pilis
circ. 1 mm longis dense barbato; rhachillae con-
tinuatio penicillata, 0.8-0.5 mm longa, conjuncte
cum pilis villosis lemmatis dimidium aequans;
palea glabra cum lateribus inflexis anguste
lanceolata, 2 mm longa, ad carimas sublaevis vel
sparse minutissime scaberula; lodiculae semi-
ovatae vel inferne trilobatae, 0.8 mm longae,
elabrae; antherae fulvae, 1 mm longae; caryopsis
obesa, flavo-brunnea, 1.25 mm longa.
Cuina: Prov. Kweichow, Pichieh Hsien, on
acid sandy soil, altitude 1,400 meters, June 1,
1943, Hou Hsueh-yuh no. 2148 (type in the
herbarium, Department of Biology, Nanking
University, Nanking, China). Prov. Yunnan,
E. E. Maire 6895, 6898 in part; Likiang Snow
Range, J. F. Rock 10693; Wei-hsi, 1955, Hu
Yung-kang without number; Mengtze, 1939-40,
Wang Chi-wu 83229; Dali, en route from Tsang
Shan Miao to Chung Ho Sze, October 2, 1946,
Liou Tchen-ngo 21012, in part.
In the author’s manuscript on the Grasses of
China [unpublished] this species was misidentified
as Deyeuxia abnormis Hook. f., which is, accord-
ing to the original description given in the Flora
of British India, neither a Deyeuxia nor an
Agrostis. It seems that this Indian species may
need to have another generic name, just as in the
same Flora the next species Deyeuxia treutleri
(Kuntze) Stapf did; the latter has been made the
type of the genus Aulacolepis Hackel.
The new genus here described, as noted in the
Latin diagnosis, appears to be related to Deyeuxia
Clarion through the presence of a villous pro-
longed rachilla and a shortly bearded callus. If its
glumes were longer than the lemma, it would un-
doubtedly be referred to the genus Deyeuxia, and
the species would be included in the same series
with awnless lemmas as is Deyeuxia diffusa Keng,
from Yunnan, China.
Aprit 1958
STASEK: NEW SPECIES
OF ALLOGAUSSIA 119
ZOOLOGY .—A new species of Allogaussia (Amphipoda, Lysianassidae) found living
within the gastrovascular cavity of the sea-anemone Anthopleura elegantissima.
CHARLES R. Srasex, University of California, Berkeley. (Communicated by
Fenner A. Chace, Jr.)
(Received October 8, 1957)
In the spring of 1955, while on a field trip
to Moss Beach, San Mateo County, Cali-
fornia, a group of zoology students from the
University of California discovered that by
squeezing individuals of the aggregating
anemone Anthopleura elegantissima they
were able to obtain from the gastrovascular
tract small pinkish gammarid amphipods
which were obviously alive and apparently
uninjured by the nematocysts and digestive
enzymes to which they were exposed. How-
ard Law, one of the discoverers, presented
in a brief unpublished paper (Law, 1955) a
preliminary description of the body and of
various appendages, but he was unable to
correlate with certainty the characters he
found with those of any gammarid family.
Nevertheless he tentatively placed it within
the Lysianassidae on the grounds that it
resembled this family more closely than it
did any other. The present study is the
result of an attempt to identify this unusual
amphipod.
The amphipods described below were, for
the most part, collected from anemones
during the latter part of December 1955 and
January 1956 and were stored in 70 percent
alcohol. All came from the same location;
namely, the “Sand Rocks” at Moss Beach.
The location name is taken from the map of
Moss Beach in Light et al. (1954).
METHODS AND MATERIALS
To assure that all spines and setae would
be visible, the following method was em-
ployed in preparation of specimens for
dissection. The specimens were first placed
in a solution of 70 percent alcohol and fast
green and left over night. They were then
taken through a series of increasing alcohol
concentrations (70-90-95-100 percent) to
clove oil, in which they were allowed to
clear and harden. The brittleness given to
the specimens by the clove oil proved a
great aid in dissections as the appendages
could be separated from the body without
tearing. The stained and dissected amphi-
pods were mounted in clove oil under a
cover glass and observed with a compound
microscope. Approximately 30 individuals
were treated in this way. The figures were
drawn with the aid of a camera lucida.
DESCRIPTION OF THE GENUS
A review of the literature has revealed
that there are no less than 110 genera in
the Lysianassidae, the family to which the
present species belongs. Of these, 48 are
described in Stebbing’s monograph (1906).
The genus Allogaussia Schellenberg (1926)
as modified by K. H. Barnard (1932) seems
to include the present species with two
further points of expansion necessitated by
the inclusion of the amphipod described
below. In the following translation of the
original description of the genus by Schellen-
berg, Barnard’s addenda are given in
parentheses. Expanded characters applying
only to the present species are included in
the description.
Description.—Body broad. Coxae long. (Side-
plate 4 may or may not fit into a groove on
side-plate 5.) Third epimeral plate not produced
to a tooth. Telson short and rounded or sinuous
(or long and notched or shallowly or deeply
cleft). Antennae of nearly equal length (stout in
both sexes); second joint of peduncle of antenna
I relatively long, (or very short compared with
its breadth, with third joint easily visible dor-
sally, ventrally entirely masked on inner side by
first joint of flagellum). (First flagellar joint stout
and elongate, first joint of accessory flagellum
also elongate.) Flagellum of antenna II in the
male not long. Epistome arched forward over the
upper ip, Qvith a narrow notch separating it
from the upper lip). Cutting edge of the man
dible simple with a subterminal “‘canine tooth.”
Molar of moderate size, channeled. Palp arising
behind the molar; first joint short, second joint
longer than the third. Inner lobe of maxilla |
120
with two terminal setae. Inner lobe of maxilla I
somewhat shorter and more slender than the
outer lobe, both lobes slender. Maxillipeds well
developed. Gnathopod I powertul, subchelate or
slightly chelate as in the species described below
(Fig. 3, J). Metacarpus longer than the carpus.
Gnathopod II chelate. Peraeopods 5-7 short.
Base of peraeopod 5 peculiarly broadened or not
‘neculiarly” broadened as in the present species
(Fig. 3, R). Base of peraeopod 7 broad. Uropod
II considerably surpasses the shorter ones; also,
in the nonsetose uropod III of the male the inner
ramus is shorter than the 2-jointed outer ramus,
(or uropod III is shghtly longer with setae on
both rami). Near Orchomenella.
Since no type species has been assigned
Allogaussia, I wish to designate A. paradova
Schellenberg as such.
Schellenberg gives three species of Allo-
gaussia; Barnard adds two others. Of the
five named species, not one corresponds
completely to the one discovered at Moss
Beach; therefore, the following name and
description are proposed for the new species.
DESCRIPTION OF Allogaussia recondita, n. sp.
Allogaussia recondita, n. sp. (Fig. iD) Saelebe
specific name comes from the Latin, reconditus =
hidden, and refers to the distinctive microhabitat
in which this species is found.
Diagnosis.—Allogaussia recondita 1s distin-
ouished from all previously described members
of the genus by the following characters: The
slightly chelate gnathopod I, the relatively weak
broadening of the base of peraeopod 5; the shal-
jow excavation in the posterior margin of the
second joint of peraeopod 7; the produced apex
of the typical female telson; the extremely deep
emargination of the medial edge of the third
joint of antenna I in the male; the distal acces-
sory branchia on peraeopod 4; and by the com-
bination of a setose uropod III (in the male) and
the absence of a groove on side-plate 5 into which
side-plate 4 fits. The association with <Autho-
pleura elegantissima is likewise unique.
Description —Integument smooth. Body com-
pact, broadly rounded dorsally in both sexes.
Head with anterolateral angle acutely produced
with the angle itself rounded. Eyes large and
kidney-shaped with the concave margin anterior.
Facets of eyes bright red in life, with interstices
between facets white. Side-plates 1-3 long, 1
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vo. 48, No. 4
more rounded ventrally than 3; 4 (Fig. 3, M)
longer and broader than the others, with a long
rounded posterior excavation, the posterior pro-
jection broadly rounded, not fitting into a groove
on side-plate 5 (Fig. 3, R). The base of peraeopod
5 (Fig. 3, R) expanded posteriorly, but not to the
same exaggerated extent as in other species of
Allogaussia. Side-plate 7 (Fig. 3, 5) small, with
rounded posterior margin longer than anterior
margin and as long as ventral margin; the whole
trapezoidal in shape. The second joint of peraeo-
pod 7 with a shallow rounded posterior excava-
tion. Pleon dorsally rounded with a low rounded
medio-dorsal keel on segment 4; posteroinferior
angle of segment 3 not produced, margin entire.
Telson of adults of both sexes variable; typically
triangular in the female (Fig. 3, P, Q) with the
blunt, usually weakly notched apex produced be-
yond a pair of short spines, each of which bears a
small lateral seta; telson in the male sometimes
resembling that of the female but often broader
and more rectangular with the terminal notch,
if present, deeper and broader, the apex not
produced beyond a pair of apical spines. A fine
seta laterally placed to each of the spines may
be present in either sex. Usually there are one or
two pairs of narrow setae submarginally placed
midway between apex and base of telson in both
SEXES.
Se 21) |. a
Fic. 1—Allogaussia recondita. n. sp.: Mature
male. For clarity, the pleopods are not shown.
Antenna I stout in both sexes, slightly longer
in male (Fig. 2, A) than in female (Fig. 2, B).
first joint very stout, medially flattened, lateral
setae (Fig. 2, B) with fine long distal projections;
second joint short; third joint visible from all
sides, distal medial margin deeply emarginated in
male exposing stout elongate first joint of flagel-
APRIL 1958 STASEK: NEW SPECIES OF ALLOGAUSSIA IAL
.OMM
Fig. 2.—Allogaussia recondita, n. sp.: A, antenna I, male; B, antenna I, female, showing lateral seta
enlarged; only origins of setae of first flagellar joint shown in both A and B; C, antenna IT; D, lower lip;
HH}, mandible, variation in length of spines of spine-row indicated; F, maxilliped; G, upper lip and epi-
stome;, H maxilla II; I, maxilla I.
122
lum which bears two longitudinal groups of many
heavy setae on medial surface; first flagellar joint
in female not elongate, with few setae on medial
surface. Flagellum of antenna I in male 8-jointed,
rarely 9- or 10-jointed, in female usually 7-jointed
though may be 6- or 8-jointed; accessory flagel-
lum 4- rarely 5-jointed, first joint elongate in
male, sparsely setose on ventromedial surface.
Antenna II (Fig. 2, C) subequal in length to
antenna IJ, with prominent gland cone; peduncle
acutely flexed ventrally between joints 3 and 4,
joint 4 the longest; flagellum slightly longer in
male than in female, 8-10—jointed in male, 5-7—
jointed in female.
Epistome (Fig. 2, G) produced in an arching
manner over the rounded upper lip, the two
separated by a deep, narrow sinus. Anterior mar-
gin of epistome sinuous. Mandible (Fig. 2, E)
with rounded cutting edge and without terminal
denticles, a single elongate blunt seta on the con-
cave medial surface, spine row of three curved
spines, molar well developed, finely denticulated,
the denticles arranged in rows. Accessory plate
between cutting edge and palp blunt. Palp as long
as trunk, inserted just behind molar; second joint
twice as long as third and with a row of setae on
distal margin; third joint tapering distally and
bearing a row of setae on distal margin, typically
with a single long seta proximally placed on
margin opposite from that bearing the row of
setae. Lower lip (Fig. 2, D) with distal apices
slightly excavated, lateral lobes only slightly di-
vergent. Maxilla I (Fig. 2, I) with inner lobe
tapering with two terminal plumose setae, outer
lobe with 10 or 11 serrate spines, palp 2-jointed,
the first joint short, the truncate apex of the
second joint extending beyond outer lobe and
bearing 5 or 6 stout setae and one fine marginal
seta. Maxilla I] (Fig. 2, H) with both lobes
narrow, the inner lobe narrower than the outer
and not quite as long; apices of both lobes setose
on inner margins. Maxillipeds (Fig. 2, F) with
inner lobe long with three stout terminal spines,
one long terminal seta, and three plumose setae
on inner margin; outer lobe extending to apex of
second joint of palp, inner margin bearing a row
of small nodulous teeth and a submarginal row
of small setae; palp 4-jointed, fourth joint curved
and acuminate.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, No. 4
Gnathopod I (Fig. 3, J) slightly chelate,
second joint straight, setose on anterior margin,
fifth with anterior margin twice as long as pos-
terior margin, the distal posterior margin
rounded, posterior margins of fourth and fifth
joints finely setose, sixth jomt only shghtly
longer than fifth, anterior and posterior margins
parallel, palm convexly rounded with two spinules
at distal posterior angle; dactylus slender, slightly
overreaching palm. Gnathopod II (Fig. 3, K)
minutely chelate, very slender, second joint
slightly less than twice as long as third, fifth
joint twice as long as sixth, sixth jomt oblong
with anterior margin rounded and bearing dense
long setae; dactylus (Fig. 3, L) with one long
seta on anterior margin and two blunt setae sub-
terminally placed on posterior margin. |
Uropod I longer than uropod II, outer ramus
slightly longer than inner, rami of both I and II
acuminate: uropod III shorter than others and
relatively stouter, projects slightly beyond others
posteriorly, inner ramus shorter than outer, outer
ramus with a small second joint, inner margin of
outer ramus nonsetose in female (Fig. 3, N), with
3-6 long plumose setae in male (Fig. 3, O).
Oostegites (Fig. 3, K) elongate, narrow, armed
with 5 or 6 long distal setae. Branchiae simple on
peraeopod 2 (= gnathopod II) and peraeopod 3,
a single elongate distal accessory branchia on
peraeopod 4 (Fig. 3, M), and a single proximal
accessory branchia laterally placed on both
peraeopods 5 and 6.
Color, pinkish or yellowish with minute ir-
regular golden flecks scattered upon the body.
Length, 4-5 mm when at rest.
Types: The following have been deposited in
the United States National Museum: (1) Holo-
type, 1 adult male, 4 mm. long, U.S.N.M. no.
99978; (2) paratypes, 6 males and 6 females,
U.S.N.M. no. 99979.
Type locality, “Sand Rocks,” Moss Beach,
San Mateo County, Calif.
Range, unknown. Besides the type locality,
this species has been found in Anthopleura at two
locations near Bodega Bay, Sonoma County,
Calif.; namely, the north jetty bordering the
entrance to Bodega Harbor, and the rocks Just
east of Doran Beach.
a a
Fie. 3.—Allogaussia recondita, n. sp.: J, Gnathopod I; K, gnathopod II and oostegite; L, enlarged
dactylus of gnathopod II; M, side-plate 4 with attached branchia; N, uropod III, female; O, uropod III.
male; P, telson, female; Q, telson enlarged; R, peraeopod 5; S, peraeopod 7.
Aprit 1958
STASEK: NEW SPECIES OF ALLOGAUSSIA
Fie. 83—(See opposite page for legend).
12:
ey
124
DISCUSSION
The genus Allogaussia is probably a
heterogeneous one. It is Barnard’s expansion
of Allogaussia that makes it possible to
include the present species in the genus.
Schellenberg’s original description would
exclude it on the basis of uropod characters:
the second projecting furthest in his species,
the third in those of Barnard and in the
species from Anthopleura; the third uropod
not being setose in the males of Schellen-
berg’s species, but being so in Allogaussia
recondita and in those described by Barnard.
The expansion of Allogaussia by inclusion of
Barnard’s species in the genus also affects
the following generic characters: the relative
size of the second peduncular joint of
antenna I and the strange masked condition
of the third peduncular joint of this append-
age; also the degree of emargination of the
telson whereby there is now a gamut from
short and entire or slightly emarginate to
long and slightly or deeply cleft representa-
tives.
Barnard (1932, p. 64) makes the point
that, “the Ist antenna [of his species] is
entirely different [from those described by
Schellenberg] and in conjunction with the
character of the side plates almost makes a
separate genus advisable.” A new generic
name was not proposed by Barnard, how-
ever, and the expanded concept of Allo-
gaussia must stand, for the time at least.
The further expansion of the genus
demanded by the inclusion of Allogaussia
recondita within it serves to emphasize the
probable heterogeneity of Allogaussza, and
will, perhaps, lend impetus to a thorough
analysis of this genus.
Many authorities have presented single
numbers to indicate the number of joints in
the flagella of antenna I and antenna II,
and have used such numbers as _ specific
characters (e.g. Barnard in describing Allo-
gaussia navicula, p. 65). Such designations
in the present species are not possible. Not
only do the numbers of flagellar joints vary
through ontogeny, but adults of the same
sex and of comparable size display varying
numbers of such joints. Even flagella from
opposite sides of a single individual may
present different numbers of joints. In the
latter case, which is not uncommon, the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 4
difference is of one joint only. The detailed
studies of Sexton (1924) on Gammarus
chevreuxt and of Segerstrale (1937) on
Pontoporeia affinis as well as the more
recent works of Nayar (1956) on Grandidi-
erella bonniert and of Clemens (1950) on
Gammarus fasciatus have shown that differ-
ences in numbers of antennal joints are
related to degree of maturity; therefore, a
range of values for these characters seems
more logical than a single number and has
been employed in the preceding description.
The character of the telson is likewise
variable in the new species. The typical
picture of the telson in the female is pre-
sented in the description (Plate 2, P, Q),
but the lateral edges may be concave
instead of nearly straight, thus the telson
appears to bulge greatly towards the base.
In some cases, egg-bearing females were seen
to have emarginated telsons. In the male
the degree of apical emargination varies
from almost no excavation at all to a very
broad, though shallow, concavity. Immature
stages were not studied in detail, although
it was noticed that telsons of individuals
about ready to be released from the brood
pouch bore a relatively deep emargination,
and that immature individuals free of the
parent’s pouch presented deeper emargina-
tions than the larger adults. The degree of
emargination apparently decreases with age.
The occasional presence of supernumerary
spines on the telson is a further variable
feature of this species. One immature
female was observed to have a_ single
asymmetrically placed supernumerary spine
on the terminal margin of the telson. The
telson of a mature male bore two such
supernumerary spines: one on either side
of the median line. Of these, one was
marginally placed while the other was sub-
marginal in location. All observed super-
numerary spines bore a lateral seta.
PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS ON THE
ASSOCIATION OF A. RECONDITA AND
ANTHOPLEURA ELEGANTISSIMA
The association of Allogaussia recondita
and Anthopleura elegantissima remains to be
studied in detail, but a few observations
will be reported here. Amphipods were
collected when the anemones were exposed
Aprit 1958
at low tide. At these times no amphipods
were found outside the anemones, but only
within the gastrovascular tract among the
gastric filaments which they resemble in
color. Anywhere from three to 12 specimens
were collected from each anemone. Inspec-
tions of neighboring Anthopleura xantho-
grammica, a closely related species, did not,
reveal the presence of Allogaussia, and it
was felt that this absence demonstrated
some host specificity on the part of the
amphipod. When anemones bearing amphi-
pods were removed to the laboratory and
placed in an aquarium of sea water, the
amphipods crawled out through the stomo-
daeum and onto the oral disc as the anem-
ones expanded. From there they wandered
about the bases of the tentacles and even
onto or over these structures, suffering no
apparent harm. Occasionally a specimen
could be seen on the column of an anemone.
When forcibly pushed into the tentacular
mass and then removed, it could be seen
that the amphipod ‘“‘stuck”’ to the tentacles,
but that it was able to continue on its way
apparently uninjured. One very small
Allogaussia was seen to race rapidly up and
down a tentacle without being impeded in
any way. It is not clear just what sort of
relationship this might be. Certainly the
amphipods do not seem to irritate the
anemone.
On one occasion a large Anthopleura
xanthogrammica was placed in an aquarium
with members of the smaller A. elegantis-
sima, the latter containing amphipods. The
following day amphipods were observed
crawling about on the large anemone with-
out hinderance! Whether or not this repre-
sents a lowering of specificity on the part
of the amphipods because of the crowded
condition of the aquarium remains to be
determined.
Another feature of interest is the geo-
graphical and ecological distribution of the
new species. Hand (1955, p. 60) gives the
range of Anthopleura elegantissima as being
from Alaska to Southern California. In the
area of his study, from Bodega Head to
Carmel, this species, ‘‘occurs as dense
ageregations or as single individuals at all
locations along the rocky open coast. It also
penetrates deeply into bays, and in such
STASEK: NEW SPECIES
OF ALLOGAUSSIA 125
situations large single individuals are more
common than aggregations.” With this in
mind, it might be asked whether A llogaussia
has a distribution similar to that of its host.
An answer to this question cannot be given
at present. That Allogaussia recondita does
not occur in all areas where Anthopleura
elegantissima thrives is evident from its
very limited, almost ‘‘colonylike” distribu-
tion at Moss Beach. At this locality amphi-
pods could be found only in those anemones
on the ‘Sand Rocks,’ the numbers of
specimens per anemone becoming less as the
distance from these rocks increased, until,
finally, no amphipods at all could be found
in Anthopleura. Such a condition may be
seasonal, may vary from year to year, or it
may represent specific ecological factors
not evident at this time.
Surprisingly enough, the association here
described is not unique. In 1925, Elmhirst
briefly described a similar relationship in
England between the gammarid Metopa
solsbergi and the anemone Actinoloba dt-
anthus (now Metridium senile). The anem-
ones of this association were found living on
pilings 12 or 15 feet below low water. The
amphipods were seen to move about over
the surface of the anemone and to enter and
leave the stomodaeum unharmed. ‘‘Vealza
crassicorms ate them without hesitation,
Actima equina took them slowly, but after
some minutes the J/etopa generally emerged
again”? (Elmhirst, 1925, p. 150). Elmhirst
mentions that the slime of Actznoloba seems
to be the natural food of the amphipod.
Edmondson (1951) described Elasmopus
calliactis which lives in association with an
anemone, Calliactus armillatas, taken from
depths of about 16 fathoms off the coast of
Oahu in the Hawauan Islands. The anemone
is found upon shells inhabited by a hermit
erab and Edmondson states (p. 189) that
“While its usual host is the sea anemone,
the amphipod harmonizes in color equally
well with the hermit crab and no doubt has
freedom of movement from one organism to
the other.’’? Nothing about the association
more definite than this was noted. How
much similarity exists between these associ-
ations and that of Anthoplewra-Allogaussia
is not known.
The species here described is the first of
126
the genus to be discovered in the Pacific.
The species of Schellenberg and of Barnard
are described from antarctic waters or from
the waters off South Georgia Island in the
South Atlantic. Moreover, the new species is
the first to be found in the littoral zone. All
previous species were brought up from deep
water in dredges or trawls.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
I wish to thank Dr. Cadet Hand for his
help and especially for his patience and en-
couragement during the course of this
investigation. Also, acknowledgments are
due Dr. R. I. Smith for his criticisms regard-
ing the form of the manuscript, and to
Clarence Shoemaker and Thomas E. Bow-
man, both of the Division of Marine In-
vertebrates at the Smithsonian Institution,
for their criticisms and suggestions.
REFERENCES CITED
BARNARD, K. H. Amphipoda. Discovery Reports 5:
1-326. Cambridge, 1932.
CLEMENS, H. P. Life cycle and ecology of Gam-
marus fasciatus Say. Contr. Lab. Ohio Univ.
no. 12: 1-63. 1950.
Epmonpson, C. H. Some Central Pacific crusta-
ceans. Bernice P. Bishop Museum, Oce.
Pap. 20(13): 183-243. 1951.
Evmuirst, R. J. Associations between the amphi-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 4
pod genus Metopa and coelenterates. Scott.
Nat. 1925: 149-152. 1925.
Hann, C. The sea anemones of central California,
Part IIT. The endomyarian and mesomyarian
anemones. Wasmann Journ. Biol. 138(1): 37-
99. 1955.
Law, H. C. A gammarid commensal with Antho-
pleura. Unpublished student report, Zoology
Department, University of California, Berke-
ley, Calif. 1955.
Licut, S. F., et al. Intertidal invertebrates of the
central California coast: 350. University of
California Press, 1954.
Nayar, K. N. The life history of a brackish water
amphipod, Grandidierella bonnieri Stebbing.
Proc. Indian Acad. Sci., sec. B, 48(3): 178-189.
1956.
SCHELLENBERG, A. Die Gammariden der Deutschen
Sudpolar-Expedition 1901-1903. Deutschen
Sudpolar-Expedition 1901-1903 18 (Zoologie
10): 233-414. Berlin und Leipzig, 1926.
SEGERSTRALE, S. G. Studien uber die Bodentierwelt
in Sidfinnlandischen Kistengewassern III,
Zur morphologie und Biologie des Amphipoden,
Pontoporeia affinis, nebst einer revision der
Pontoporeia-Systematik. Societas Scientiarum
Fennica, Commentationes Biologicae 7(1):
1-181, 19 pls. 19387.
Sexton, E. W. The moulting and growth-stages of
Gammarus, with descriptions of the normals
and intersexes of G. chevreuxi. Journ. Mar.
Biol. Assoc. U. K., Plymouth, 13(2): 340-401.
1924.
STEBBING, T. R. R. Amphipoda, I. Gammaridea.
Das Tierreich 21: I-xxxtx, 806. 1906.
The ultimate aim of those who are devoted to science is to penetrate beyond
the phenomena observed on the surface to the ultimate causes, and to reduce the
whole .
.. to a simple deductive system of mechanics, in which the phenomena
observed shall be shown to flow naturally from the few simple laws that underlie
the structure of the universe—CLEVELAND ABBE.
Aprit 1958
SCHWARTZ: ANOTHER NEW SPECIES OF ELEUTHERODACTYLUS 127.
HERPETOLOGY .—Another new species of Eleutherodactylus (Amphibia: Lepto-
dactylidae) from western Cuba. ALBERT Scuwartz, Albright College, Reading,
Pa. (Communicated by Herbert Friedmann.)
Three papers (Schwartz, 1957, 1958a,
1958b) on collections of Hleutherodactylus
from Pinar del Rio Province, Cuba, have
already been published. These, as well as
the present description, are based upon col-
lections made during the summer of 1957
under a National Science Foundation grant;
collections were also made during the
Christmas holiday seasons of 1956-57 and
1957-58. Much time has spent. collecting
amphibians and reptiles in the westernmost
province of Pinar del Rio; that this area
has been but poorly worked previously is
attested by the number of new forms which
have been encountered there; to this in-
creasingly large list of new species, another
new small leptodactylid frog is herewith
added.
On August 30 and 31, 1957, two visits
were made to Soroa, Pinar del Rio Prov-
ince, in the company of Richard Thomas.
Because of previously heavy precipitation,
the area in general was very wet, and the
Rio Manantiales, which forms a scenic
waterfall at Soroa, was at a high level.
Collecting at night in the gorge along the
river yielded a small series of frogs which I
regarded as a new form at the time of col-
lection. During the Christmas holiday
season of 1957-58, opportunity was given
to return to Soroa in the company of Edwin
B. Erickson, Willard M. Stitzell, and
George R. Zug. On this second visit, al-
though the weather conditions were not so
rainy as in August, we were able to secure
another series of this small frog. I wish to
thank these men who have helped me col-
lect in the Soroa area; without their in-
valuable assistance such an adequate series
of these little frogs would not have been
obtained. I take great pleasure in naming
this form after George R. Zug, whose in-
terest, gemal cooperation, and hearty
assistance in the field have aided me im-
measurably in my work, as— 7
Eleutherodactylus zugi, n. sp.
Type.—American Museum of Natural History
(A.M.N.H.) no. 60938, from Soroa, Pinar del Rio
Province, Cuba, one of a series taken by Edwin
B. Erickson, Albert Schwartz, Willard M.
Stitzell, and George R. Zug, on January 1, 1958.
Original number 4903. $
Paratypes—A.M.N.H. nos. 60919-27, Soroa,
Pinar del Rfo Province, A. Schwartz, R. Thomas,
August 30, 1957; A.M.N.H. nos. 60928-35,
Soroa, Pinar del Rfo Province, A. Schwartz, R.
Thomas, August 31, 1957; A.M.N.H. nos.
60936-37, 60939-49, same data as type.
Distribution.—Known only from the gorge of
the waterfall of the Rfo Manatiales at Soroa,
Pinar del Rfo Province.
Diagnosis.—An Eleutherodactylus character-
ized by small size, warty dorsum, rosy suffusion
on thighs, a single transverse brown band across
center of thigh, long and straight vomerine series,
and usually an orange or yellow striped dorsum.
Description of type—An adult female, with the
following measurements (all measurements in
millimeters) : snout-vent length, 18.9; head length
(snout to posterior border of tympanum), 6.8;
greatest width of head, 6.2; longitudinal diameter
of eye, 2.2; longitudinal diameter of tympanum,
1.4; naris to anterior corner of eye, 2.0; femur,
7.8; tibia, 8.7; length of fourth toe, 6.9. Head
slightly narrower than distance from snout to
posterior border of tympanum; snout rather
acute with nares relatively inconspicuous at
anterior end of canthus rostralis; diameter of eye
about equal to distance from naris to anterior
corner of eye; interorbital space 2.3, about equal
to diameter of eye; diameter of tympanum less
than diameter of eye, distance from tympanum to
eye about equal to diameter of tympanum.
Digital dises present, poorly developed on digits
1 and 2, that on digit 3 the largest and equal to
about one quarter size of tympanum. Fingers
short, unwebbed, 3-4-2-1 in order of decreasing
length; subarticular tubercles well developed.
Toes short, unwebbed, 4-3-5-2-1 in order of de-
creasing length. Heels do not touch when legs are
held with femora at right angles to body axis.
Dorsum irregularly warty, with a raised median
middorsal line from snout to above vent: upper
eyelids somewhat warty, but not distinctly so.
Throat and venter smooth; belly dise feebly de-
veloped. Posterior surface of thighs covered with
smooth, flattened, pavementlike granules. Tongue
128
elongate oval, free behind, its greatest width
about half that of floor of mouth. Vomerine
teeth in two long, slightly bowed, series, extending
from the level of the choanae, and almost meeting
at the midline of the roof of the mouth.
Fic. 1.—Eleutherodactylus zugi, n.sp., para-
type, A.M.N.H. no. 60922, adult female, snout-
vent length 18.0 mm. Photograph taken by
William H. Gehrmann, Jr., in field.
Coloration of type-—Dorsum and sides choco-
late brown; beginning on the snout, a pale orange
line extends along the canthus rostralis, over the
upper eyelid (where it is narrow but present), and
along the dorsolateral area to end at the sides of
the groin at the insertion of the hindlimbs; this
pale orange line widens on the sides and meets
the creamy white ventral coloration at the
groin. The brown lateral color begins below the
pale line on the snout, extends over the lores,
tympanic region, and insertion of the forelimb,
but is invaded by the ventral white color midway
between fore- and hindlimbs, giving a mottled or
blotched effect. Forelimbs brown, with the
brachium pale orange. Thighs brown with a
distinct and prominent rosy suffusion, especially
prominent on their anterior faces, but present
also on the dorsal surface. A truncate, brown
triangle, its apex at the vent, extends ventrally
over the posterior face of the thighs as far as the
ventral color. A single brown transverse band
across the center of the thigh and a small brown
transverse band just above the knee; crus pinkish
with a pair of transverse brown bands, the more
distal of which is the wider, and which, when the
legs are held in the flexed position, continues the
transverse band of the thigh. Feet dull brown,
irregularly blotched with darker. Venter pearly
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, No. 4
white, with brown chromatophores scattered on
all ventral surfaces except the median portion of
the belly. The lower jaw is flecked with brown
and white.
Variation.—The series of paratypes includes
eleven males and nineteen females, of which all
but one female appear to be mature. In adult
males, the testes are jet black and prominent
among the viscera; in fully adult females the
oviducts are large and convoluted, and two are
eravid. The means and observed ranges of the
males are: snout-vent length, 15.0 (12.1-16.8);
head length, 5.6 (4.6-6.4); greatest width of
head, 5.2 (4.2-5.8); diameter of eye, Web) Cates
2.2); diameter of tympanum, 1.3 (0.9-1.5); naris
to eye, 1.6 (1.2-1.8); femur, 6.8 (6.0-7.5); tibia,
7.5 (6.2-8.4); length of fourth toe, 6.7 (G2=040)
The measurements of all females (type and para-
types) are: snout-vent length, 16:7 (G24 192)-
head length, 6.1 (4.8-7.1); greatest width of
head, 5.9 (4.5-6.8); diameter of eye, 2.1 (EG
2.9); diameter of tympanum, 1.3 (0.9-1.8); naris
to eye, 1.7 (1.2-2.5); femur, 7.3 (5.5-8.5); tibia,
7.6 (6.7-8.9); length of fourth toe, 7.2 (5.6-7.9).
From these data it can be observed that females
reach a larger size than males, but this difference
is not so striking as may be noted in other species
of Cuban Eleutherodactylus, as for example
cuneatus (see Schwartz and Ogren, 1956, p. 96).
When males and females of comparable size are
studied, females are observed to have larger
tympana than males.
Structurally, the paratypes agree well with the
type with the exception of the degree of wartiness
on the dorsum and sides. In these characters, the
type demonstrates a less warty condition than
many of the paratypes; this is undoubtedly due to
the method of preservation. In specimens which
were less fully injected with formalin at the time
of preservation, the dorsum, sides, and lateral
portions of the belly are very warty, and the
dorsal surface of the limbs are likewise studded
with scattered tubercles, arranged at random.
The vomerine teeth series are always relatively
long and slightly arched; they may begin within
the interior margin of choanae, or not extend
quite so far medially as in the type.
The series of E. zugi shows three basic color
patterns. The first pattern, of which the type is
an example, shows a dark brown to tan mid-
dorsal zone, bounded on each side by a broad
yellow or orange dorsolateral stripe, ending on the
sides just anterior to the hindlimb insertion (see
Apri 1958
Fig. 1). To this category may be assigned 5 males
and 10 females, as well as the type which is also
a female. In some of these individuals, the mid-
dorsal zone is mottled with yellowish or white,
and one male (A.M.N.H. no. 60941) has the
posterior portion of the dorsal band transversely
striped in a condition reminiscent of that of Z.
pinarensis Dunn. In some of this lot, the snout is
light tan, lighter than the dark brown dorsum,
but only poorly delimited by a brownish to black
interocular line, bar, or even elongate triangle,
which extends posteriorly along the dorsal mid-
line. In one individual (A.M.N.H. no. 60947)
there is a pair of pink dots just posterior to the
eye in the dorsal band. In frogs which have the
dorsal band more lightly pigmented, the dorso-
lateral bands are outlined above and below with
black.
The second pattern involves the suppression of
the broad dorsolateral orange bands, and the oc-
currence of a pair of dorsolateral stripes which
end dorsally, rather than laterally, above the in-
sertion of the hindlimbs. To this group belong
five males and six females. That these dorso-
lateral lines are different from the dorsolateral
bands described for the preceding pattern is
‘demonstrated by two specimens (A.M.N.H. nos.
60921, a male, and 60920, a female), both of
which show vestiges of the lines posteriorly, but
possess the broad dorsolateral bands in addition.
All males and two females possessing the second
dorsal pattern also demonstrate a fine pale mid-
dorsal hairline from the sacral region to just above
the vent, where it divides, sending a pale red
branch along the concealed face of the thigh,
where it becomes obscured in the pattern of that
member. This feature is only barely indicated or
absent in all frogs showing dorsal pattern one.
Four females showing the second pattern have
either one or two pairs of pink dots in the dorsal
band, one pair behind the eyes and another in the
scapular region.
The third scheme of dorsal coloration is that of
a mottled dorsum with no indications of either
dorsolateral bands or lines, the entire dorsum
having a mottled or dotted appearance. To this
group belong one male and three females. One
female has two pairs of pink dots in the usual
position. No specimen of this lot has a dorsal
pale hairline or pale lines on the inner surface of
the thighs. A gray or black interocular mark is
present in all, although it may be not so obvious
SCHWARTZ: ANOTHER NEW SPECIES OF ELEUTHERODACTYLUS
129
(A.M.N.H. no. 60944) or may blend into the
dorsal dark coloration (A.M.N.H. no. 60932).
The hindimb markings remain remarkably
constant in all individuals, despite the variation
in dorsal pattern. These markings are those
described for the type. The median transverse
thigh band, and the more distal of the crural
bands are always present; although the thigh
band may be reduced or obsolescent, it is always
present. In addition, many frogs show a brown
transverse band on the pes, which, when the foot
is flexed, continues the transverse marking from
the thigh onto the crus and thence the pes. In
some individuals, the more proximal of the crural
bands noted in the type is completely absent. In
all specimens, the rosy suffusion on the thighs
and crus was well developed in life.
Comparisons.—E. zugi is a representative of
the ricordi group as defined by Dunn (1926, p.
210). To this group 13 forms are now assigned.
The present species does not require comparison
with members of the auriculatus, varleyt, di-
midiatus, and symingtoni groups because of its
distinctive structural characters (for character-
istics of these groups see Dunn, op. cit., Schwartz,
1957 and 1958a). Of the members of the ricordi
group, comparison with ricordi and its subspecies,
pinarensis, greyi, brevipalmatus, sierramaestrae.
turquinensis, cuneatus, and etheridgei is unneces-
sary; all these species are larger than zugi (al-
though male r. planirostris and possibly r.
caspariy may be as small as adult female zugt,
and male etheridgei are just slightly larger than
male zugt and within the observed range of female
zugt) and none possesses the rosy red suffusion on
the hind legs nor has the single transverse brown
band on the thigh and crus.
The only species of the ricordi group with
which comparison is necessary are E. gundlachi
Schmidt and EH. atkinsi Dunn and its subspecies.
The former species is known only from various
localities in the Sierra Maestra and near Guants-
namo, both in Oriente Province. EB. zugi differs
from EH. gundlacht in smaller size; Alayo (1955,
p. 8) gives a length of 22 mm. for gundlachi and I
have examined a specimen (United States
National Museum No. 118210) with a snout-vent
length of 25.2 mm. Both zugi and gundlacht have
red on the hindlimbs; the gundlachi hindlimb
pattern involves a red anterior and posterior face
to the thigh, with a distinct dorsal longitudinal
brownish area from the groin to the outer face of
the knee; in zug?, this dorsal longitudinal thigh
130
band is absent, the entire dorsal face of the thigh
being pigmented and there being no definite,
clearly defined area. E. gundlachi, just as zug,
possesses transverse thigh bands, regularly
spaced; in gundlachi these number three, in zug?,
only two with the much less prominent one at the
knee. E. gundlachi likewise has two crural trans-
verse bands, matching the two innermost thigh
bands, in contrast to the one crural band in zug.
Structurally, gundlachi differs from zugt in the
feeble development of digital discs (these are
small but in harmony with the small size of the
frog in zugt), much longer hindlimbs, and in
having the dorsum extremely rugose with the
warts arranged in longitudinal series (see Barbour
and Ramsden, pl. 6, fig. 1, as H. plicatus), a con-
dition not observed in the new species. It is
possible that zugi is a western counterpart of the
eastern gundlachi, but the differences are so pro-
nounced, that I have no hesitancy in regarding
zugt as a species distinct from gundlachi; the
similarity between the two species rests almost
solely on the red thighs of both forms.
E. atkinsi atkinsi Dunn and E. atkinsi orientalis
Barbour and Shreve are members of the ricordt
group, and also possess red in the groin and on the
hindlimbs. Both these subspecies reach a much
larger size than zugi; Dunn (1925, p. 166) gives
lengths of 31 mm for the type, a male, and 39 mm
for a female of a. atkinsi, and Barbour and Shreve
(1937, p. 383) give maximum length measure-
ments of a. orientalis as 43 mm. H. atkinsz lacks
digital discs, whereas zugi possess them. In
atkinsi, the red coloration occurs over the entire
thigh, and there are no transverse dark bands on
the thigh as in zug?. The nominate race in addition
possesses a large and well defined black groin
blotch which may extend onto the most proximal
part of the thigh; this blotch is reduced or absent
in the subspecies orientalis. Such blotching does
not occur in any of the specimens of zug?. Dorsal
warting is poorly developed in atkinst except
along the dorsolateral line; although zugi is
warty dorsally, there is no increased development
of these warts along the dorsolateral line. The
scheme of coloration of both atkinst and zugi (in
the dorsally banded or lined phases) is super-
ficially similar, but atkinst regularly has a pale
snout set off from the darker dorsal area by a
discrete interocular bar or band, as well as a
dusky scapular W and a sacral dusky marking.
No zugi have a sharply differentiated pale snout
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, No. 4
(although as noted above, the snout may be
poorly delimited in some specimens), nor do they
have a scapular W or a sacral marking of any sort.
Certainly no difficulty will result in distinguishing
adult atkinsi from adult zug; young atkinsi
within the size range of adult zugz can be dis-
tinguished by the presence of a black groin spot
and absence of any transverse thigh banding.
Remarkably, at Soroa, of hundreds of Hleuthero-
dactylus collected, no E. a. atkinsi (the subspecies
known to occur in Pinar del Rio Province) have
been taken, despite excellent weather conditions
and suitable habitat.
One other Cuban species of Eleutherodactylus
is known to have red in the groin; this species is
E. emiliae Dunn. No confusion between emiliae
and zugi should occur; the former is known only
from the Sierra de Trinidad in Las Villas Prov-
ince, is a member of the dimzdzatus group having
a black cheek patch, feebly developed discs, and
smooth skin, and is larger. HE. emiliae is also
microhylid in appearance, and thus is quite
different from zugt.
Remarks.—The series of E. zugi was taken as
the result of three visits to Soroa. Soroa les in the
Sierra del Rosario subregion (see Marrero, 1951,
pp. 416 et seq.), an area of great relief owing to
the montane mass of the Sierra del Rosario; the
highest peak in this mountain range is Pan de
Guajaibén, with an elevation of 728 meters; the
elevation at Soroa is much less than this, probably
no more than 300 meters. This subregion receives
more than 150 cm of rainfall annually, and is
exceeded in Cuba only by the more western but
adjoining Sierra de los Organos. Both areas
appear to be especially rich in amphibians. At
the time of our first visit to Soroa in August, 1957,
the area was very wet, and the Rio Manantiales
was in flood with much water coming over the
falls in the gorge. The spray from the falls had
moistened the ground, rocks, and vegetation in
the immediate vicinity, and the specimens of £.
zugi were taken on the exposed leaves of shrubs
between 2 inches and 4 feet above the ground.
These leaves were very wet with droplets of water
from the spray of the waterfall.
At the time of our second visit in January,
1958, conditions were less wet, and the river was
not in flood. Specimens of E. zugi were taken
during the day under palm trash and other
debris on the narrow flood plain in the gorge, no
farther back from the river than 30 feet. Con-
eas eee
ee ea ee ee
AprIL 1958
ditions under the trash were not especially wet.
At night, these frogs were taken on moist rocks
as much as four feet above the ground surface,
and none was captured on leaves as in August.
Despite a moderate but continued rain beginning
in the early afternoon of January 1, the dense
forest canopy prevented the drenching of the
understory of shrubs and herbs upon which we
had collected zugi in August. It appears that E.
zug? utilizes ground cover such as debris and
trash during the day, and at night ventures
forth to forage from low plants (if weather con-
ditions are wet) or from rocks (if weather con-
ditions are drier). No specimens of E. zugi have
been collected outside of the gorge of the Rio
Manantiales; it may be that the gorge presents
the optimum conditions of humidity which this
frog requires, and that it is unable to persist in
the deciduous forest above the gorge. In the gorge
also we have taken E. eileenae, E. cuneatus, E. d.
amelasma, and HE. r. planirostris. Above the gorge
in the deciduous forest these four species also
occur, although ezleenae is distinctly less abundant
and ricordi more abundant than in the gorge.
Despite much collecting in other parts of
Pinar del Rfo, H. zugi has not been taken else-
where. It should be looked for along any of the
streams cutting through the montane masses of
the Sierra de los Organos and the Sierra del
Rosario. Its complete distribution will become
SCHWARTZ: ANOTHER NEW SPECIES OF ELEUTHERODACTYLUS
131
known only by searching for it in the most humid
habitats in the mountanous areas.
LITERATURE CITED
Auayo Daumau, Pastor. Lista de los anfibios de
Cuba. Universidad de Oriente, Museo ‘“‘Charles
T. Ramsden,” Santiago de Cuba: 11 pp., 4
pls. 1955. (Mimeographed.)
Barsour, THomas, and CuarLes T. RaMspEN.
The herpetology of Cuba. Mem. Mus. Comp.
Zool. 47: (2): 71-213, 15 pls. 1919.
Barsour, Tuomas, and SHREvE, BENJAMIN.
Novitates Cubanae. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 80:
(9): 377-387, 4 pls. 1937.
Dunn, Emmett R. New frogs from Cuba. Occ.
Pap. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 5: 163-166. 1925.
Additional frogs from Cuba. Occ. Pap.
Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 5: 209-215. 1926.
Marrero, Levi. Geografia de Cuba: pp. vii-xvi
+ 736 pp., 478 pls. Alfa, La Habana, 1951.
SCHWARTZ, ALBERT. A new species of Eleuth-
erodactylus (Amphibia: Leptodactylidae) from
Cuba. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 70: 209-212.
1957.
Four new frogs of the genus Eleuth-
erodactylus (Leptodactylidae) from Cuba.
Amer. Mus. Nov., no. 1873: 1-20, 4 figs. 1958a.
Another new large Eleutherodactylus
(Amphibia: Leptodactylidae) from western
Cuba. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, in press.
1958b.
ScHWARTZ, ALBERT, and OGREN, Larry H. A
collection of reptiles and amphibians from Cuba,
with the descriptions of two new forms. Her-
petologica 12: 91-110. 1956.
Language 1s not an abstract construction of the learned, or of dictionary-
makers, but 7s something arising out of the work, needs, ties, joys, affections,
tastes, of long generations of humanity, and has its bases broad and low. close
to the ground.—Wa.r WHITMAN.
132
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, NO. 4
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
76STH MEETING
The 768th meeting of the Society was held at
the Cosmos Club, January 9, 1957, Vice-President
Pauu AVERITT presiding.
Program.—K. H. WepEpont: Tertiary basalts
in western Germany.
H. G. Tuomasson: Ground-water problems in
the Southwest.
G. A. Coorer: Evolution of the spiny brachio-
pods.
769TH MEETING
The 769th meeting of the Society was held at
the Cosmos Club, January 23, 1957, Vice-Presi-
dent Paut AVERITT presiding.
Communication —FRANK SHAtRER: Memorial
to N. L. Bowen.
Program.—K. C. Dunnam: The mineralization
of the English Pennines.
P. C. Bateman: Characteristics of some eastern
Sierra Nevada granites. About 500 square miles
in the eastern part of the Sierra Nevada batho-
lith near Bishop, Calif., was mapped geologically.
The batholith there is a mosaic of discrete intru-
sive masses of granitic rock, which are in sharp
contact with one another or are separated by thin
septa (screens) of metamorphic rock or mafic
igneous rock. Large pendants and small inclu-
sions of metamorphosed sedimentary and vol-
canic rocks are present locally. The granitic
masses or plutons have been divided into 10 for-
mations on the basis of composition, texture, and
intrusive relations. These formations include one
of quartz diorite, one of granite, three of quartz
monzonite, and five of granodiorite. The follow-
ing features taken together indicate that the
major part of the granitic rocks are magmatic:
1. Contacts of individual plutons with each
other and with older rocks are sharp, clean, and
regular.
9. Finer grained rock is present in the marginal
parts and apophyses of some plutons.
3 The walls of aschistic dikes marginal to some
plutons are dilated.
4. The geometry of some dislocations of the
wall rocks suggest strongly that they were caused
by the forcible emplacement of magma. In one
place a dislocation of three miles seems clearly
attributable to forcible intrusion, and in another a
dislocation of 8 miles seems probable. Intrusive
breccias are present locally.
5. The internal foliation in the margins of
plutons parallels external contacts.
6. Granitization and assimilation effects are
confined to amphibolites and other wall rocks that
consist chiefly of minerals earlier in Bowen’s reac-
tion series than those crystallized in the granitic
rocks. The effects are in accord with theoretical
expectations of reactions between granitic magma
and wall rocks.
7. The metamorphic grade of the wall rocks and
of inclusions is that of the amphibolite facies,
which is in accord with the temperatures believed
to exist in nonsuperheated granitic magmas.
8. Variations in the compositions of the granitic
rocks are in accord with variations predicted from
experimental studies of melts.
Or
Frc. 1—Quartz-orthoclase-albite-anorthite tet-
rahedron showing plot of norms on bisecting
plane Ab-An-Qu plus Or.
Two kinds of analytical data were obtained,
(1) limited chemical data and (2) extensive modal
data. Chemical analyses of representative speci-
mens of each of the granitic formations were
calculated to CIPW norms. Plotted on a quartz-
orthoclase-plagioclase triangular diagram the
norms fall close to a straight line that trends from
the plagioclase corner toward the experimentally
determined ternary eutectic near the center of
the diagram. Plotted within a quartz-orthoclase-
albite-anorthite tetrahedron the norms fall close
to a bisecting plane that passes through the albite
APRIL 1958
and anorthite corners and bisects the quartz-
orthoclase join (Fig. 1). The norms plot on this
plane along a curved line that runs from near the
center away from anorthite. The lne bends pro-
gressively with distance from anorthite toward
the quartz-orthoclase join and is convex toward
albite. This curved line is close to the theoretical
path of the lquidus. At about 10 percent of
anorthite the line bends sharply back toward
albite, probably along the experimentally estab-
lished jom between quartz and the feldspars.
Modal data for each pluton and for each group
of plutons assigned to a formation are plotted on
a quartz-K feldspar-plagioclase triangular dia-
gram. These data generally are in accord with the
plot of norms on the same diagram, but most
plutons exhibit considerable scatter, and the field
for some plutons is systematically displaced from
the straight line path exhibited by the norms.
Some scatter results from sampling deficiencies,
but some appears to represent a zonation in
composition from margin to core or along or
across the strike of plutons. Systematic disloca-
tions of the fields of modes of plutons from the
line defined by norms results from the crystalli-
zation of minerals, especially mica, not repre-
sented in the diagram.
Averages of the modal content of plagioclase,
biotite, and hornblende of each granitic forma-
tion plotted in a binary diagram against quartz
plus K-feldspar show that plagioclase, biotite,
and hornblende decrease regularly with increase
in quartz plus K-feldspar. Hornblende is about
4 percent less abundant in most rocks than bio-
tite and is not present in rocks with more than
50 percent of quartz plus K-feldspar—the ap-
proximate boundary between granodiorite and
quartz monzonite.
7(0TH MEETING
The 770th meeting of the Society was held at
the Cosmos Club, February 138, 1957, Vice-
President PauL AverirrT presiding.
A memorial to WiruuiAM F. FosHaG was read
by GEORGE SwITzER.
Program.—J. T. Hack: Frosive work of great
rainfalls or gully washers in the Appalachians.
W. J. Dempsry: Use of aeromagnetic data to
determine regional basement topography.
Doveuas Batt and A. 8S. Winer: Brandywine
Structure, and underground natural gas storage for
Washington, D. C. The Brandywine Structure is a
closed anticline in Prince Georges County, Md.,
PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
153
about 10 miles from Washington, D. C. The
Washington Gas Light Co. found the anticline in
its search for underground gas storage for Wash-
ington. On the basement and in the sediments
immediately above, the anticline has about 150:
feet of closure and covers about 6,000 acres. It is
long and narrow, about 10 by 2 miles. Its axis is
northeast-southwest, parallel to the strike of the
Atlantic Coastal Plain Basin.
Sedimentary rocks of the area include Pleisto-
cene, Tertiary, and Cretaceous formations and an
inher or updip pinchout of indurated, poorly
sorted, arkosic sediments of Triassic age. The un-
exposed basement is composed of metamorphic
Paleozoic or Precambrian rocks similar to those
of the nearby Piedmont.
Starting with a study of the markers described
in water well logs, the company used subsurface
information, gravity, magnetics, slim-hole drill-
ing, big-diameter coring, and geophysical logging
to map important beds of the anticline. The
closure, depth, and a combination of reservoir
and cap rock in the Patuxent formation, the
oldest Cretaceous formation in the area, appear
to make the anticline favorable for gas storage.
T71ST MEETING
The 771st meeting of the Society was held at
the Cosmos Club, February 27, 1957, Vice-
President Paut AveERITT presiding.
Informal communications —M. G. WoLMANn
described an experimental flume for sedimenta-
tion studies.
W. P. Wooprine discussed the first successful
oil well in Central America (Costa Rica-Panama).
Program.—T. P. THayrerR: Some relations of
later Tertiary volcanology and structure in eastern
Oregon. Along the southern edge of the Columbia
Plateau and the northern edge of the Basin and
Range province variations in the Miocene vol-
eanic rocks seem closely related to patterns of
deformation.
The dominant structural feature of the region
is the east-west Aldrich-Strawberry Mountain
range, which is partly an asymmetric anticline
with the north limb vertical, and partly a south-
dipping fault block. To the north, the uniform
basalt flows of the Columbia Plateau were fed
from fissures and deformed by east-west folds
accompanied by subordinate faulting. To the
south, the Miocene voleaniec rocks range from
olivine basalt to rhyolite, were erupted from
voleanoes, and were broken by northwest-trend-
134
ing faults. At a few places in the volcanic border
zone, plateau basalts are intercalated with
basaltic andesite and rhyolite; elsewhere correla-
tion of the two lava facies is uncertain. In the
zone of structural transition, 40 to 50 miles wide,
the northwest-trending faults merge with the
westerly trending folds in ways indicating con-
temporaneity. The correlations between volcan-
ism and deformation are believed to indicate a
common control by variations in the crust and
subcrustal layers.
J. R. VatitentyNe: Paleobiochemistry. The
preservation of organic compounds (other than
amino acids) under geologic conditions was re-
viewed and discussed. Under the heading of
carbohydrates, reference is made to: (1) the
occurrence of free sugars in extracts of lake sedi-
ments (1954); (2) the preservation of celluloses
and hemicelluloses in Tertiary lignites (1922—);
and (3) Aberhalden’s (1933) demonstration of
chitin in Eocene beetles. Treibs’ (1934—) discovery
of porphyrins in coals, oil shales, crude oil and
guano is brought into focus with more recent
work on sedimentary porphyrins. The nature of
chlorophyll degradation products in recent sedi-
ments (1939) is briefly mentioned.
Steriods (as a class) have been identified in
both recent and fossil sedimentary materials
(1938), but the exact identities have not been
determined. Carotenoids (1930-), purines and py-
rimidines (1917+) have been isolated from recent
muds. Studies of their preservation in older
sedimentary rocks have not been complete
enough to determine whether or not they are
preserved there.
H. A. Meryernuorr: Hvolution of Appalachian
drainage: a reinterpretation from geologic evidence.
Theories of origin for southeast-flowing master
streams have all been based on the assumption
that drainage flowed northwest following the
Appalachian orogeny and that the direction of
flow had to be reversed. One hypothesis (Thomp-
son) has reversal taking place progressively by
headward migration of the divide and by piracy;
one (Davis) utilizes tilting of an assumed Cre-
taceous peneplane; and the most widely accepted
(Johnson) invokes regional superposition from a
Cretaceous coastal plain cover, since removed.
The basic assumption of a need for reversal is
contradicted by every line of geological evidence
including: (1) The presence of fossiliferous
Paleozoic pebbles in the Lower Cretaceous
Raritan and Potomac formations, as well as in
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, No. 4
younger coastal plain formations, demonstrates
that drainage from the Appalachian fold belt
was already oriented from northwest to south-
east at the beginning of Cretaceous time. This
fact invalidates the theory of regional super-
position. (2) Lithologic components of all Upper
Triassic formations, including the Stockton,
show that the dominant source of supply was
from the northwest, that structurally controlled
master streams from the fold belt were already
well established and could have functioned in a
parental role to modern drainage. (8) Paleozoic
stratigraphy and Appalachian structures demon-
strate that the Adirondack and Nittany uplifts
were topographically higher than structural
sags in the Precambrian of Blue Ridge and Read-
ing Prong, hence major drainage would have
moved in a southeasterly direction immediately
following Appalachian orogeny. (4) Windgaps
and watergaps in the fold belt are related to
local superposition from higher lithologic over-
burdens of Paleozoic age. (5) Marginal super-
position from a Miocene (?) marine overlap
extended inland to Middletown in Connecticut,
Sparkhill gap in southeastern New York, and
the Watchung range in New Jersey.
772D MEETING
The 772d meeting of the Society was held
at the Cosmos Club, March 13, 1957, Vice-
President Paut AVERITT presiding.
Informal communications—L. B. LropoLp
discussed meanders of the Atlantic gulf streams.
Meyer Rustin: Radiocarbon age determination
of a Pleistocene section near Scranton, Iowa. A
new spectacular Pleistocene section was un-
covered during relocation of U. 8S. Highway 30,
4 miles east of the town of Scranton, Greene
County, Iowa, in a cut across the east valley
slope of the Raccoon River. The section was
measured by Robert V. Ruhe, Soil Conservation
Service, U. S. Department of Agriculture, and
consists of 18 feet of Cary till at the top, under-
lain by 17 feet of silt, and 13 feet of early Wis-
consin till at the base. The silt contains tree
stumps rooted in place at various horizons.
The trunks of the trees that are rooted in the
upper zone of the silt are bent toward the south.
As the outer boundary of the Cary in this Des
Moines lobe is only 25 miles to the south, the
dating of the trees gives the time of ice arrival
at this near-climax position, and _ therefore
AprRIL 1958
yields a more accurate Cary maximum date
than hitherto possible.
Three samples of logs from this and another
site 214 miles north of Scranton were submitted
by Ruhe and dated by the carbon-14 method at
the U. 8S. Geological Survey laboratory. The
results in years are: W-512, 14,470 + 400;
W-513, 13,820 + 400; and W-517, 13,910 + 400.
The average of approximately 14,000 years can
be considered the climax of the Cary substage
in this lobe.
F. N. JOHNSTON reviewed a book titled mor-
phologie littorale et sous-marine, published in
Paris, Universitaires de France, 1954.
Program.—D. B. Stewart: Some feldspar
problems. Simple X-ray and optical methods
for determining the composition and thermal
state of alkali feldspar with less than 5 percent
An and plagioclase with less than 5 percent Or
are reviewed. Inability to determine the ternary
composition of a feldspar without a chemical
analysis is discussed, and the need for carefully
studied natural ternary feldspars is emphasized.
Factors such as temperature, pressure, compo-
sition, and time that influence the relations be-
tween pairs of feldspars from the same rock are
discussed. One experimental method of evaluating
these variables with isothermal isobaric sections
is demonstrated.
E. M. Irvine: Regional geology of the Philip-
pines.
R. B. Neuman and A. R. Patmer: Critique
of Hocambrian and Infracambrian.
773D MEETING
The 773d meeting of the Society was held at
the Cosmos Club, March 27, 1957, President
W. D. Jounston, JR., presiding.
Informal communications —W. D. JoHNsron,
JR., discussed some recent geologic meetings in
Europe and Asia.
Z. 5. ALTSCHULER described and illustrated
some geologic features of the Dead Sea Rift
Valley and Negev area, Israel and Jordan.
Program.—Isiporn ApLER: Some applications
of X-ray fluorescent spectroscopy to mineralogical
problems. A curved-crystal reflecting spectrom-
eter of the type described by Birks and Brooks
of the Naval Research Laboratories, but adapted
for use in mineralogical studies, has been built
in the Geological Survey. It has been successfully
applied to the analysis of tiny crystals, zones in
minerals, and individual grains in mixed-mineral
PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
155
specimens such as thin or polished sections, or
grains or areas about 0.5 mm in diameter, X-ray
diffraction spindles, and small samples of powder
weighing a fraction of a milligram have also been
analyzed without any loss or alteration of the
sample. Of great value in thin- and _ polished-
section work is the fact that this technique can
be used to analyze selected areas without muti-
lating the specimen by digging out grains.
A modification of the curved-crystal spectrom-
eter has made it possible to traverse a standard
polished section in synchronization with a re-
corder, automatically plotting the distribution of
various elements along a selected line. This
method was applied, for example, to a polished
section containing a central core of pyrite inter-
grown with and surrounded by a marcasite-like
mineral. Chemical analysis of a concentrate of
these these two minerals gave selenium, cobalt,
and iron as major constitutents. A clear relation-
ship between the cobalt, selenium, and iron was
established by the X-ray method, identifying
the second mineral as an intermediate member
of the FeSes-CoSe, series.
R. G. Scumipt: Titaniferous sedimentary rocks
in the Cuyuna district, Minnesota.
G. E. ANDREASEN and Istpor& Zinvz: Limiting
parameters in the magnetic interpretation of a géo-
logic structure. A prominent aeromagnetic
anomaly in Randolph County, Ind., suggests
the existence of a dikelike structure within the
Precambrian basement rocks. Because of the
ambiguity inherent in magnetic interpretation,
a unique solution for the parameters involved
(the depth of burial, the geometric configuration,
and magnetic susceptibility of the anomaly-
producing mass) is impossible. However, if one
of the parameters is known it is sometimes
possible to indicate a range of plausible values
for each of the remaining parameters.
The depth to the surface of the Precambrian
rocks in Randolph County is known from drill-
hole data to be about 3,000 feet. With the depth
of burial known, limits need be set only on the
thicknesses, angle of dip, and_ susceptibility
contrast of the assumed dike. The limits are
determined by a graphical method. Theoretical
anomalies over the postulated dike are computed
for different dike thickness, angles of dip, and
susceptibility contrasts. The computed profiles
are then fitted to an observed magnetic profile
flown at right angles to the strike of the feature.
Numerical values for the “goodness of fit’? are
136
calculated, using the statistical method of sums
of squares.
Two plots, one for the index of goodness of
fit and the other for susceptibility as functions
of dip angle and dike thickness, are made to show
eraphically the interdependence of the variables
and the plausible range of each. The contoured
maps for the goodness of fit and the susceptibility
contrast show that the range of best fit is between
dip angles of 35° and 50° and dike thicknesses
of 1,000 to 4,000 feet. The contoured map for
the susceptibility contrast, translated into per-
centage of magnetite, shows this parameter to
be independent of the dip angle.
774TH MEETING
The 774th meeting of the Society was held at
the Cosmos Club, April 12, 1957, President W. D.
JOHNSTON, JR., presiding.
Informal communication.—K. L. YOcHELSON:
The Recent mollusk Neopilina.
Program.—W. P. WoopRIna:
Barro Colorado Island, Canal Zone.
R. C. Dovexass: Significance and distribution
of Orbitolina. Orbitolina is a genus of the larger
Foraminifera which is widely distributed in
rocks of Cretaceous age. Its distribution is
circum-global in a northern tropical to temperate
belt. Orbitolina is commonly associated with
calearenites which contain large amounts of
other organic debris, and many concentrations
of the specimens are in or near bioherms. Analogy
with living larger Foraminifera and sedimentary
environments suggests the species flourished in
warm shallow marine waters. Species of Or-
bitolina have been used for stratigraphic cor-
relations of Cretaceous rocks in Europe and
Southwestern Asia. Two zones can be recognized
in the American Lower Cretaceous sequence.
L. C. Paxiser: Gravity studies of structure in
the earth’s crust.
=~
((OTH MEETING
Geology of
The 775th meeting of the Society was held at
the Cosmos Club, April 24, 1957, President
W. D. Jounsron, JR., presiding.
Informal communication.—IRVING FRIEDMAN:
Vesiculation in glassy rocks.
Program.—R. L. Nace: Hydrology of the Snake
River basalt. The Snake River Plain is a huge
structural depression in southern Idaho. The
plain traditionally has been considered as a part
of the Columbia Plateau Province, but it differs
jithologically, structurally, and in geologic
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 4
history from the Columbia Plateau Province in
Oregon and Washington. The part of the plain
east of Bliss, Idaho is a natural physiographic
and geologic subdivision which was built up
largely by basalt flows. That part of the plain
may be a large graben lying between horst blocks
represented by mountain complexes lying to the
north and south.
The basalt floor of the plain is mantled widely
by loessial sediments, and loess and other sedi-
ments occur as interflow beds beneath the surface
throughout the plain. The Snake River basalt
consists of hundreds of interlocking basalt
flows, mostly local in their distribution and chiefly
Pliocene in age.
From the mouth of Henry’s Fork on the east,
westward 300 miles to the mouth of the Boise
River, no stream that rises in mountains to the
north crosses the plain to join the Snake River,
with the single exception of the Bid Wood
(Malad) River. Instead, the streams end on the
plain, losing their water by deep percolation and
evaporation.
The Snake River Plain east of Bliss may be
the largest unified ground-water reservoir on
the North American continent, underlying more
than 17,000 square miles of area. This part of
the plain, which is the part treated in this paper,
is the gathering ground for water from an area
several times its own size. The average thickness
of the zone of saturation probably is on the order
of 1,000 feet.
The ground water from this body is discharged
naturally through springs in a 40-mile reach of
the valley of the Snake River between Milner
and Bliss. The spring openings lie at all levels
from that of the river to several hundred feet
above, and the discharge points are controlled
by geologic factors which have not been thor-
oughly studied. The aggregate average rate of
discharge of water from the springs is more than
5,000 cfs and amounts to about 4,000,000 ac-tt
per year.
Within the historic period since irrigation
began on the plain, the volume of water dis-
charged from the springs has increased at least
25 percent. The increase represents new re-
charge by deep seepage from farm land that is
irrigated with surface water from the Snake River.
Nearly all water available from the Snake
River is appropriated, and further development
will require the use of ground water, on which
substantial drafts already are being made. The
AprIL 1958
hydrology of the ground-water reservoir is
economically important and the plain is a fertile
field for hydrologic research.
Water-bearing openings in the basalt are of
numerous kinds, but only a few types are volu-
metrically important. All the pahoehoe flows
are extensively ramified by fractures caused by
cooling and contraction of the lava after it solidi-
fied. Few of these fractures are widely open,
and the water-storage capacity per unit volume
of rock is small; the aggregate capacity in a large
mass of rock, however, is considerable. At some
places, as along the arched frontal edges of the
lava flows, widely open tension fractures are
common. So-called pressure ridges in_ basalt
flows also contain widely open fractures. Lava
tubes in pahoehoe flows range in size from that of
a pencil to voids 35 or 40 feet in diameter and
scores to hundreds of feet in length. The perme-
ability of tubes is nearly infinite.
As, or broken, blocky lava is among the most
permeable of all types of rock. Talus breccia is
similar.
Many voids which extend to the surface in a
basalt flow are partly filled by later, overriding
flows, but even the big voids are not completely
filled. At depth beneath the surface, therefore,
the basalt ranges from nearly impermeable to
extremely permeable. Basalt rock itself has little
effective permeability, but the formational
permeability of many zones is quite high. Trans-
missibility coefhicients computed from pumping-
test data range from a few hundred thousand
to 4.5 million gpd /ft?.
Ground water in the Snake River Plain
generally is unconfined. Certain water-level
fluctuations and other phenomena, however, are
more characteristic of artesian (confined) than
of unconfined conditions. In many wells most of
the drawdown from pumping occurs within a
few minutes after pumping begins. Also, nu-
merous water-bearing zones are sufficiently well
confined that the water in them responds readily
to earthquake shocks, and _ seismic-response
fluctuations of water levels have been recorded
at many places in the plain. Water levels in many
wells also fluctuate in response to changes in
atmospheric pressure. These barometric fluctu-
ations also are characteristic of artesian con-
ditions. Barometric fluctuations also cause move-
ment of vast quantities of air in and out of the
ground through wells that are open in the zone
of saturation and through lava tubes. These
PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
137
movements show that there are tight layers in
the zone of aeration, and the intervening per-
meable layers communicate freely with the
atmosphere only through local openings such
as wells or tubes.
Commonly, the water in a new well on the
plain rises a few feet to some tens of feet above
the level at which water is struck by the drill.
In many cases the rock at the level of the regional
water table is impermeable and water does not
enter the well until the impermeable zone is
passed through, after which it rises to the level
of the regional water table. Where the rise is
small no special nomenclatural difficulties arises.
In other cases, the rise may be truly artesian.
At many places, the deeper the well the higher
the static water level. The general term, quasi-
artesian, 1s applied to conditions which cannot
be classed definitely as either artesian or non-
artesian.
The water table has been mapped in sub-
stantial parts of the Snake River Plain, and in a
very general way the maps show the direction of
movement of the ground water. The configuration
of the water table at many places probably is very
complex, but the complexities seldom are brought
out in maps, which are based on water-level
measurements in relatively widely spaced wells.
The maps thus are broad generalizations. The
direction of movement of ground water is down
the maximum hydraulic gradient. Ideally, that
direction would be at right angles to the water-
table contours on a map. Because the maps are
extreme generalizations, however, the directions
inferred from the maps are correct only in a
regional sense. Through short distances or at
point locations, the true direction of movement
often is at an angle to the apparent direction
inferred from a map.
The rate of movement of ground water through
the basalt is not known. From indirect evidence
the estimated rate in moderately permeable
basalt is about 30 ft/day or more, but the esti-
mate may be wrong by a factor of 10 or more.
The flow of water in the basalt may be stream-
lined (laminar) as conventionally inferred in
sand aquifers. On the other hand, turbulence is
probable at some times and places. Turbulence
would cause mixing of waters from various
sources.
Determination of the
nature of ground water flow in the basalt is
extremely important for very practical reasons.
direction, rate, and
138
For example, where liquid-waste material, in-
cluding that containing radioisotope wastes
from nuclear-energy facilities, is disposed of in
the ground and reaches the zone of saturation,
it is important to know where the material will
go, how fast it will move, and to what extent it
will be diluted.
A. R. Kinxeu: Copper deposits of the Philip-
pines. Copper deposits of many types occur in
the Philippine Islands and copper mineralization
is widespread. Because of emphasis on gold
mining and relatively unfavorable economic
conditions for copper mining, little prospecting
was done for copper until the last few years,
although many copper deposits were found
during the search for gold. Practically all of the
limited copper production of the Philippines
before World War II, and up to 1955, came from
two mines, the Lepanto mine and the Hixbar
mine. Several new mines began production in
1955 and other mines will begin production in
1957.
The author has compiled all the available
geologic information on 92 copper mines in the
Philippines. Of these, 37 are vein-form deposits,
26 are deposits of massive pyrite that contain
copper, zinc, gold, and silver, 7 are disseminated
copper deposits, and 22 are other types of de-
posits. A report on these copper deposits of the
Philippines will be published by the Philippine
Bureau of Mines early in 1958.
Twenty-seven thousand metric tons of copper
were produced in the Republic of the Philippines
in 1956, and it seems probable that the copper
production of the Philippines, which in 1956
surpassed in value all other metals, will increase
many fold in the next decade.
Har.Ley Barnes: Geology of a Philippine coal
field. The Philippine coalfield described in this
paper is located in south-central Cebu, one of the
islands in the Visayan group in the south-central
part of the Philippine Archipelago. The coalfield
is located in a mapped region of 230 square
kilometers in the municipalities of Argao and
Dalaguete. Most of the region is covered by the
Carcar and Balamban limestone sequence, but an
erosional window about 40 square kilometers
in area exposes a sequence of older clastic rocks,
limestone, and coal, here named the Argao
group. The group comprises in conformable
sequence the Calagasan formation, composed of
conglomerate, sandstone, shale, limestone, and
coal; the Butong limestone, crystalline and
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 4
argillaceous limestone; and the Linut-od for-
mation, a coal-bearing clastic sequence similar
to the Calagasan. In fault contact with the
Calagasan formation in the northeastern corner
of the window is the Pandan formation, a se-
quence of slightly metamorphosed clastic rocks
with interbedded flows. The Pandan formation
is believed to be Cretaceous in age, the Argao
group is early Miocene, and the different parts
of the thick Carear and Balamban limestone
sequence may range in age from late Miocene
to Recent.
The structure of the Argao-Dalaguete region
reflects two distinct patterns of deformation.
The older and more severely deformed rocks
of the Argao group show northward-trending
close folding, and westward-trending cross-
faulting. Folding is relatively intense with verti-
cal and overturned beds common. Horizontal
rather than vertical displacement is dominant
along the westward-trending cross-faults. From
the regional viewpoint the structure of the Argao
rocks exposed in the erosional window is only
part of the eastern limb of a large syncline that
is broken near the middle of the window by a
major westward-trending fault. The younger
Carcar and Balamban rocks show northeastward-
trending broad folds and faults. Folding is
relatively gentle and displacement by faulting is
chiefly vertical. The major structure of the Car-
car and Balamban rocks is the northeastward-
trending anticline that arches across the entire
island of Cebu in the Argao-Dalaguete region.
The drainage patterns of the region reflect
distinctly the structure and lithologic variations
of the underlying rocks.
The region includes three important areas of
coal-bearing rocks, the Bayabas-Balaas coal
area in the north, and the Manlapay-Dumalan
and Gransina-Mantalongon coal areas in the
south. The Bayvabas-Balaas area includes from
two to six coal beds in the upper part of the
Calagasan formation below the Butong lime-
stone and from two to four coal beds in the lower
part of the Linut-od formation above the Butong
limestone, which is thin in that area. The two
southern coal areas are separated from each
other by a greatly thickened sequence of Butong
limestone. The Manlapay-Dumalan area includes
three beds of coal in the Calagasan formation
below the Butong, and the Gransina-Man-
talongon coal area includes from one to five
beds of coal in the Linut-od formation above
AprIL 1958
the Butong. The mapped coal beds range from
30 to 400 centimeters in thickness and are
generally lenticular, but one or more beds in
each coal area have been traced as far as two
to three kilometers. Bedding generally dips
steeply westward and is overturned in the
central part of the Gransina-Mantalongon area.
A number of minor transverse faults cut the coal
in each area. The coal in the region is both
bituminous and subbituminous, but most of the
samples analyzed have been of high volatile B
and C bituminous rank. Estimated recoverable
reserves of coal above assumed drainage levels
total 2,579,000 metric tons. Estimated recover-
able reserves in the first 100 meters below as-
sumed drainage levels total 1,531,000 metric
tons.
Much of the information for this talk is pre-
sented in a report prepared for the Philippine
Bureau of Mines in cooperation with the United
States Geological Survey under the auspices of
the United States International Cooperation
Administration and the Philippine Council for
United States Aid. The report is Philippine
Bureau of Mines Special Projects Series Publica-
tion No. 7, published in Manila, 1956, titled
Geology and coal resources of the Argao-Dalaguete
region, Cebu, by Harley Barnes, Cresencio P.
Jongco, Generoso C. Lazaga, and Harold HE.
Vokes.
776TH MEETING
The 776th meeting of the Society was held in
the Cosmos Club, May 8, 1957, President W. D.
JOHNSTON, JR., presiding.
Informal communication.—l. G. Soun: Ostra-
cods from the Morrison formation and Inyan
Kara group of the Black Hills.
Program.—Euuis L. Yocurntson: The Lower
Ordovician gastropod Ceratopea. Ceratopea is
widespread in areas of Lower Ordovician rocks
in the southern Appalachian Mountains, Ozark
Plateau, Okla., and Texas. It is a guide fossil
that has had much stratigraphic usefulness in
the past, though details on the ranges of the
several species have never been published. The
specimens commonly found are the opercula,
unusually thickened, paucispiral forms, having
a clawlike or triangular shape. The opercula
belong to low-spired pleurotomarian shells and
four occurrences of such shells associated with
opercula in the same outcrop, have been found
during the past 50 years. The shells suggest that
PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL
SOCIETY 139
the genus is monophyletic, though this con-
clusion must remain tentative until shells of
other species currently known only from their
opercula are found.
IstporE ZieTzZ: How significant can a figure be?
Irvine FriepMAN and R. L. Smita: The
origin of water wm some volcanic glasses. The
deuterium-hydrogen composition (relative to
Lake Michigan water = 0.0) of water extracted
from coexisting perlite and obsidian from 11
different localities was determined. The obsidians
generally have a water content of from 0.08
to 0.35 percent by weight, with two samples
from near Olancha, California, reaching 0.98
percent; and a relative deuterium concentration
of from —4.6 to —11.0 percent. The coexisting
perlite contains from 2.0 to 3.9 percent of water
with a relative deuterium concentration of
—3.2 to —13.8 percent. The deterium concen-
tration in the perlites is not related to that in
the enclosed obsidian. The deuterium concen-
tration in the perlite water is related to the
deuterium concentration of the modern meteoric
water and contains approximately 4.0 percent
less deuterium than does the ground water.
The above relationships hold true for perlites
from Iceland, northern New Mexico, Mojave
desert, east slope of the Sierra Nevada, Cali-
fornia coast range, Saipan, and New Zealand.
As the water in the obsidian is unrelated to
meteoric water, but the enclosing perlite water
is related, we believe that this is evidence for
the secondary hydration of obsidian to form
high water content perlitic glass.
An examination of obsidian artifacts from
archaeological sites shows visible hydration on
specimens estimated to be 500 years old. A sample
dated by C™ as 2,000 years old shows hydration.
This is proof of the hydration of obsidian at
atmospheric temperature and pressure.
777TH MEETING
The 777th meeting of the Society was held
at the Cosmos Club, October 9, 1957, President
W. D. JOHNSTON, JR., presiding.
Program.—R. B. Guitiovu and R. G, Bates:
The correlation of airborne radioactivity data and
aerial geology. The correlation of airborne radio-
activity data and areal geology in several areas
of the United States is being investigated by the
U. 8. Geological Survey. A study of radio-
activity profiles, obtained using equipment and
surveying techniques developed in the search
140
for deposits of radioactive minerals, indicates
that airborne radioactivity surveying can ma-
terially assist the field geologist by determining
continuity between outcrops. In an area of
Triassic rocks near Bealeton, Virginia, it is
possible to differentiate between diabase and
shale on the basis of their radioactivity values
and an areal geologic map can be prepared from
the data. Distinctive airborne radioactivity
units in Marquette County, Michigan can be
correlated with sedimentary rocks of Cambrian
age and an area of Precambrian granite near
Republic, but the areal geology of the entire
area is not adequately portrayed by the radio-
activity units. Airborne radioactivity surveying
is of definite value in areas of low relief and re-
sidual soil such as the Piedmont, but it has limita-
tions in areas of moderate relief or where the
surficial material is not residual soil. Present
investigations include study directed toward
determining whether changes in surveying
technique or modifications in equipment will
produce data of more use from the standpoint
of areal geology.
G. R. Tiron: Are tektites out of this world?
The isotopic composition of lead from three
tektites and Libyan Desert glass is compared
with that from known terrestrial and extra-
terrestrial sources. The lead contained in the
glasses is similar to modern terrestrial lead,
including lead from modern oceanic sediments.
The uranium, thorium, and lead concentrations
were determined for one of the glasses, an austra-
lite. Evidence is given which indicates that within
the last tens of millions of years differentiation
of uranium, thorium, and lead occurred in the
parent material of the australite. These results
are difficult to explain in terms of any extra-
terrestrial origin involving fusion of materials
from the moon, meteorites or comets, but they
are readily explained if tektites are of terrestrial
origin involving fusion of argillaceous sediments
in some unspecified way.
7(8TH MEETING
The 778th meeting of the Society was held
in the Cosmos Club, October 23, 1957, President
W. D. Jounstron, JR., presiding.
Program.—Russian movie: The fall of Sikhote-
alin meteorite.
W. O. Rosinson, Harry Bastron, AND K. J.
Murata: Biogeochemistry of the rare earth ele-
ments with special reference to the hickory tree.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, No. 4
Hickory trees concentrate the rare-earth group
of elements in their leaves to a phenomenal
degree, containing as much as 2,300 parts per
million of total rare earths based on the dry
weight of the leaves. In a general way, the
accumulation in hickory leaves can be related to
the nature of the country rock of the soils on
which the trees grow, the highest values (800
to 2,300 ppm) being found in areas of granites,
eneisses and schists, and the lowest (<10 ppm)
in certain areas of sandstone, marl and serpen-
tine. Previous evidence of the accumulation of
rare earths by plants was offered by Goldschmidt
and Peters in 1933 when they found an enrich-
ment of these elements in coal ashes.
The study of the biogeochemistry of these
elements has been extended by employing chemi-
cal and spectrochemical methods of analysis.
Chemical concentrates of the rare earths were
made from hickory leaves and from the ex-
changeable cations extracted from the soils on
which the trees grow. The individual rare-earth
elements in the concentrates were determined by
a spectrochemical DC-are emission technique.
The average proportions of the individual
elements (atomic percent of the total rare-
earth elements) in the leaves are Y 36, La 16,
Ce 14, Pr 2, Nd 20, Sm 1; Ha0i7Gadia in 0G:
Dy 3, Ho 0.7, Er 2, Tm 0:2; Moritvandsibn. 0:2:
The proportions in the leaves and in the ex-
change complex of the soil on which the hickory
trees grow are very similar, indicating that the
trees do not fractionate the rare earths ap-
preciably.
The variation of the rare-earth elements
among the leaves and soils can be explained
generally in terms of the relative abundance of
the yttrium-group and the cerium-group, except
for the element Ce. A normal distribution of
the cerium-group, as exemplified in igneous
rocks, shales, and cerium minerals shows the
concentration of Ce about equal to the sum of
the concentrations of La and Nd; that is, the
ratio Ce/(La + Nd) = 1. This ratio is lower
for most of the leaf and soil samples analyzed,
indicating that the concentration of Ce is less
than in the normal cerium-group materials.
Further investigation indicated that the pro-
portion of Ce was correlated to oxidation-
reduction conditions in the soil, and led to the
discovery that Ce becomes quadrivalent under
oxidizing conditions that exist in soils which are
low in organic matter, and may become separated
APRIL 1958
from the other elements of the cerium-group,
which undergo no valency change under these
conditions. Ce would thus become unavailable
to the hickory tree in the oxidized state. This
would explain the low values found in the leaves,
and in the exchange complex of soils under
oxidizing conditions.
An experiment using a chemical agent (H».SOs3)
which would reduce any quadrivalent Ce to the
trivalent state and also extract the exchangeable
cations from a soil low in organic matter resulted
in a large increase in extractable Ce, whereas
the concentration of the elements which undergo
no change in valence have the same relative
proportions to each other whether or not a
reducing agent is used. The data prove the
existence of quadrivalent Ce under oxidizing
soil conditions, and show the selective and
independent migration of this element.
H. W. Otiver: Testing isostasy in California.
The Sierra Nevada affords an excellent site for
gravity studies of crustal structure. This moun-
tain range is 400 miles long and 80 miles wide
and culminates in Mount Whitney (14,496 feet),
the highest point in the United States. The rocks
now exposed at the surface are largely granites
of Cretaceous (?) age, which have very little
near-surface density contrast to camouflage
possible gravitational effects due to crustal
structure. Moreover, recent seismic studies of
the earth’s crust in California provide control
for resolving the inherent ambiguities of gravity
interpretation.
Fifteen hundred gravity stations occupied in
the Sierra show a range in complete Bouguer
anomalies from —20 mgal at the western edge
of the Sierra to a minimum of —240 mgal just
west of the Sierra crest, a distance of only 65
miles. Farther east, a positive regional gradient
of 1 mgal per mile continues as far as Death
Valley. Direct analysis of Bouguer anomalies
using seismic data as control indicates that the
crust is 30 km thick under the San Joaquin
geosyncline; that the thickness increases gradu-
ally to 35 km at the western edge of the Sierra
Nevada; very rapidly in the western Sierra
foothills to a maximum of about 60 km under
Mount Whitney; and that farther east, the
thickness decreases to 40 km under Death
Valley.
Isostatic anomalies corrected for local geologic
effects are very close to zero at the western
edge of the Sierra Nevada. The central and
PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
141
eastern regions are overcompensated by 40-50
mgal suggesting that current uplift along the
Sierra Nevada fault zone may be caused by
isostatic forces. However, there is almost no
local isostatic response to the 10,000-foot eastern
Sierra scarp or to individual ranges east of the
Sierra Nevada.
7(9TH MEETING
The 779th meeting of the Society was held
in the Cosmos Club, November 13, 1957, Vice-
President J. W. Grixa presiding.
Communication —W. P. WoopRING presented
a memorial to JAMES STEELE WILLIAMS.
Program.—W. H. Hass: Classification and
stratigraphic range of disjunct conodonts.
Conodonts are the minute laminated toothlike
and platelike structures of an extinct, unknown,
monophyletic group of marine animals. A natural
classification cannot, as yet, be devised but a
utililarian classification, of use to the stratigraphic
paleontologist, is feasible.
The classification of disjunct conodonts here
proposed is based on the fact that each indi-
vidual specimen was built up through the ac-
cretion of lamellae about the pulp cavity, to
which all other parts of the structure are re-
ferred. The so-called fibrous conodonts (Neuro-
dontiformes) are considered to be altered
lamellar specimens. Seven families under the
order Conodontophorida Eichenberg, 1930,
(Lower Ordovician-Middle Triassic; possibly
Upper Cambrian-Upper Cretaceous) are recog-
nized:
DISTACODONTIDAE Bassler, 1925. Pulp cavity
surmounted by single, straight or curved, unden-
ticulated fanglike cusp. Lower Ordovician—Upper
Silurian, and Devonian(?).
BELODONTIDAE Huddle, 1934. Pulp cavity sur-
mounted by a single, straight or curved, denticu-
lated, fanglike cusp whose base may be greatly
enlarged. Lower Ordovician—Upper Silurian.
CoLEODONTIDAE Branson and Mehl, 1944. Pulp
cavity located beneath main cusp at or near the
anterior end of a denticulated bladelike or barlike
unit. Lower Ordovician—Middle Triassic.
PRIONIODONIDAE Bassler, 1925. Pulp cavity lo
cated beneath main cusp at or near the posterior
end of a denticulated bladelike or barlike unit.
Lower Ordovician—Upper Pennsylvanian.
PRIONIODONTIDAE Bassler, 1925. Pulp cavity
located in middle third of denticulated bladelike
or barlike unit. Lower Ordovician—Middle Tri-
ASSIC.
POLYGNATHIDAE 1925. Pulp
Bassler, cavity
142
greatly restricted; platforms flank part or all of
axis. Middle Ordovician—Middle Triassic.
IDIOGNATHODONTIDAE Harris and Hollings-
worth, 1933. Pulp cavity not greatly restricted so
that aboral side of unit is partly or entirely opened
up into a large concavity. Upper Ordovician—
Middle Permian.
W. G. Pierce: Detachment thrusts, with special
reference to the Heart Mountain thrust, Wyoming.
Characteristic or significant features of de-
tachment thrusts are (1) their roots are either
unknown or non-existent, (2) younger rocks are
commonly thrust on older rocks, (3) the thrust
masses are very thin in comparison to their hori-
zontal extent, and (4) the thrusts apparently
originate along, or tend to follow stratigraphic
horizons.
The Heart Mountain detachment thrust,
characterized by the above-noted features, has
been described by the writer in a recent paper
(Bull. Amer. Assoc. Petr. Geol. 41: 591-626.
1957). Additional evidence subsequently found
indicates that the Heart Mountain thrust had
two episodes of movement. The first movement,
which preceded the deposition of the Crandall
conglomerate of early Eocene age and may have
initiated the conditions for its development, is
shown by several deposits of Crandall conglomer-
ate resting with sedimentary contact on brec-
ciated thrust debris. The second movement of
the thrust blocks was after the deposition of the
Crandall conglomerate, as is indicated by thrust
blocks riding over and resting on other deposits
of the Crandall conglomerate.
New evidence also was found pertaining to
the initiating force or movement of the Heart
Mountain thrust. Prior to the first large move-
ment of the Heart Mountain thrust blocks, rocks
belonging to the “early acid breccia” volcanic
sequence were deposited on the surface beds—
commonly Madison limestone—and then some
large blocks of Madison limestone were thrust
or otherwise emplaced on these deposits of
“early acid breccia.” This combined sequence
then became detached along the horizon of the
Heart Mountain thrust at the base of the Bighorn
dolomite and moved southeastward for a dis-
tance of several miles. Hence there is evidence
of a slightly earlier and less extensive thrust
closely associated with the “early acid breccia”
voleanism. Following this was the main move-
ment of the Heart Mountain thrust blocks
which carried in “piggy-back” style some of the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, No. 4
“early acid breccia’ and overlying Madison
blocks of the earliest thrust to their present
position where they were soon engulfed and
buried by volcanic rocks of the “early basic
breccia”’ sequence. Thus in a few places, some
of the Heart Mountain thrust masses may be
seen to consist of Madison limestone resting
on “early acid breccia”? which in turn rests on
the so-called ‘‘upper plate’? of the Heart Moun-
tain thrust.
7SOTH MEETING
The 780th meeting of the Society was held in
the Cosmos Club, November 27, 1957, Vice-
President J. W. GrieG presiding.
Program.—P. E. Croup: Extinction.
E. C. Ropertson: Haperimental consolidation
of aragonite mud. Consolidation experiments
were made on 165 samples of calcium carbonate
sediments from the banks west of Andros Island
in the Bahamas. The sediments consisted mainly
of needles of aragonite of clay and silt size.
Density and crushing strength of the mud were
observed as functions of pressure, temperature,
and time. The pressures ranged from 30 psi to
500 psi; temperatures ranged from 30°C to 400°C;
time periods ranged from 3 hours to 4 days, and
a few periods from 1 to 8 weeks. Other important
variables such as the amount of water present,
the composition and concentration of dissolved
salts in the water, the proportions of aragonite
and calcite present, the grain size and shape,
and the porosity and permeability of the mud,
were not tested.
The density of the product shows an antici-
pated increase with increase of pressure (about
20 percent from 30 psi to 500 psi) for each tem-
perature. Heating of the mud caused a sur-
prising decrease in the final density (about 20
percent from 30° to 400°C), for times up to 4
days, because of an exchange of air for water
in the void spaces.
Aragonite is metastable under all conditions
of pressure and temperature used in the experi-
ments. In these experiments aragonite inverts
to calcite in 1 hour at 450°C under 15 psi and
in about 4 weeks at 200°C under 5,000 psi.
The increase of crushing strength of the prod-
uct is roughly linear with increase of tempera-
ture. The effect of pressure on the crushing
strength is small, and the effect of time was
noticeable only for periods greater than 4 weeks.
The crushing strength and density of natural
APRIL 1958
limestone from various localities in the United
States indicate (1) a low strength group, less
than 5,000 psi, for densities between 1.2 to 2.0,
and (2) a high strength group from 5,000 psi
to 30,000 psi and densities from 2.0 to 2.9. The
synthetic limestones produced in this study are
in the low-strength group. It is suggested that
the low-strength group represents calcium car-
bonate sediments that have been subjected to
low temperature-low pressure diagenesis, whereas
the high-strength group represents sediments
that have been metamorphosed under higher
pressure and temperature, possibly for longer
periods of time.
D.8. Carper and L. F. Battery: Seismic wave
travel times from nuclear explosions. A large
number of seismograph records from nuclear
explosions in the Nevada and Pacific Island
proving grounds have been collected and an-
alyzed. The Nevada explosions were well re-
corded to distances of 6.5° (450 miles) and
weakly recorded as far as 17.5°, and under
favorable circumstances as far as 34°. The Pa-
cific explosions had worldwide recording except
that regional data were necessarily meager.
The Nevada data confirm that the crustal
thickness in the area is about 35 km, with
associations of 6.1 km/sec speeds in the crust
and 8.0 to 8.2 km/sec beneath it. They indicate
that there is no uniform layering in the crust,
and if higher speed media do exist, they are not
consistent; and that the crust between the proving
grounds and central California shows a thicken-
ing probably as high as 70 or 75 km and that
this thickened portion may extend beneath the
Owens Valley. The data also point to a dis-
continuity at postulated depths of 160 to 185
km.
Pacific travel times out to 14° are from 4 to
8 sec earlier than similar continental data
partly because of a thinner crust, 17 km or less,
under the atolls and partly because speeds in the
top of the mantle are more nearly 8.15 km/sec
than 8.0 km/sec. More distant points at 17.5
and 18.5°, indicate slower travel times—about
8.1 km/sec. A fairly sharp discontinuity at 19°
in the travel time data is indicated. Travel times
from Pacific sources to North America follow
closely Jeffreys-Bullen 1948 and Gutenberg
1953 data for surface foci except they are about
2 sec earlier on the continent, and Arctic and
Pacific basin data are about 2 sec still earlier.
The core reflection PeP shows a strong variation
PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
143
in amplitude with slight changes in distance at
two points where sufficient data were available.
781ST MEETING
The 781st meeting of the society was held in
the Cosmos Club, December 11, 1957, Vice-
President J. W. Grine presiding.
Program.—Mryrr Rusin: New treatment and
resulting C-14 dates from the Near East. A series
of peat samples from a bog at McCulloch,
Hancock County, Iowa, were separated into a
cellulose fraction (NaOH insoluble) and a humic
acid-lignin fraction (NaOH soluble) and their
ages determined by the radiocarbon method.
The results (Table 1) show no significant differ-
ences in the ages of the two carbon fractions.
TABLE 1
(Age in years)
Pollen zone
NaOH insoluble NaOH soluble
Grass. fe oe) | 04500) 22200 6,580 + 200
Conif.-decid.....| 8,170 + 200 8,110 + 200
SpRUCC + se 11,660 + 250 11790 + 250
The conclusion is that there has been very
little migration of the more mobile fraction
(the humic acid). The importance of this to
radiocarbon dating is obvious.
However, samples of charcoal from the ar-
cheologic site Jarmo, in Iraq, gave ages of 9,040
years for the cellulose fraction and 7,750 years
for the NaOH soluble material. It is believed
that the charcoal absorbed younger carbon from
the groundwater, which was then separated by
the processing of the sample.
To prove whether alkaline soils do or do not
“Wash out’? C-14, samples of modern wood
were boiled for periods of 1 day and of 1 week,
respectively, in a 5 N solution of NaOH and
compared with one that was not boiled. Measure-
ments of C®/C® ratio of the CO. were made
with a mass spectrometer by Mrs. Toshiko K.
Mayeda, University of Chicago. Results indi-
cated no significant isotope fractionation. It is
therefore concluded that alkaline soils or alkaline
pre-treatment do not change the isotope ratio
to give an erroneous age.
R. J. Bratpwoop: The Post-Glacial boundary
and beginnings of the settled village-farming com-
munity tn the Near East.
144
65TH ANNUAL MEETING
The 65th annual meeting was held immediately
following the 781st regular meeting. The reports
of the meeting secretary, treasurer, and auditing
committee were read and approved. The Awards
Committees presented prizes for the best pro-
orammed talks presented during the year. First
prize was awarded G. ARTHUR COOPER for his
talk, titled Evolution of the spiny brachiopods
and second prize was awarded Jonn Hack for
his talk on Erosive work of great rainfalls or gully
washers in the Appalachians. Vice-President
Pau Averirr received the Sleeping Bear Cup
Award for his stimulating ‘‘pre-communication”
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 4
discussions while acting as presiding officer
of some meetings.
Officers for the year 1958 were then elected:
President: CARLE H. DANE
Vice-Presidents: AticE S. ALLEN and Lioyp C.
HENBEST
Secretary (2 years): PHrtrp W. GuiLp
Treasurer: Mary EK. MroseE
Members-at-large of the Council (2 years): L. T.
Aupricu, Harotp James and Writiiam R.
THURSTON
The Society nominated L. W. CurRIER to
be a vice-president of the Washington Academy
of Sciences for the year 1958.
KS
EREMOTHERIUM, THE GIANT SLOTH
Creature of nightmares was Eremotherium,
cigantic sloth of the latter part of the Pleistocene
or ice age in Panama. It was an enormous animal
that walked on all fours but sat upright, propped
up by its heavy tail while feeding on the leaves of
trees, one of the largest land mammals the world
has known. It is described by Dr. C. Lewis
Gazin, Smithsonian Institution curator of verte-
brate paleontology, in the Institution’s most
recent annual report. Dr. Gazin collected remains
of several individuals in western Panama. He
Says:
It was truly a creature of tremendous bulk. It
may be compared in size with a mammoth or mas-
todon, but with rather striking differences in form
and relative proportions. The length of the
animal’s body, for example, was much greater than
that of the American mastodon, with a very much
smaller head, a longer neck, and a long and
massive tail. The length of the vertebral column
in a particularly large individual was over 16 feet.
The hindquarters were particularly robust.
This is shown by the striking increase in the size of
the vertebrae from the neck back to the sacrum.
The hind limbs, although a little shorter than
those of the average mastodon, were of much
greater width. The femur, for example, while
nearly a yard in length, is a few inches shorter than
in the mastodon, but is more than twice the width
across the distal portion.
The skull is about 2 feet long, with a compara-
tively slender snout. The animal had no tusks, but
there are five long crowned teeth above and four
below, averaging about an inch and a half in
diameter. Eremotherium possessed long, powerful
claws. In locomotion the forefoot carried its
weight on the knuckles with the palm and claws
turned inward. The hind foot was turned so that in
locomotion the weight was carried on the outer
side of the foot. The length of the hind foot in one
animal, from the bony core of the claw to the
heel, measured 36 inches, possibly the greatest for
any kind of land animal.
(This giant sloth] probably had no equal among
animals of great bulk for grotesque unwieldiness
and sluggishness. It seems impossible that it could
have survived and evolved in any reasonably
competitive atmosphere or environment. The ex-
planation is that together with other edentates
they underwent their principal development and
specialization in South America, isolated from the
more highly competitive herbivores and espe-
cially the more aggressive predators, such as the
wolves, pumas, and sabretooth cats of the north.
At about the beginning of the ice age, he says,
the northern and southern continents became
joined by a land bridge—probably at about or not
far from the present isthmus of Panama. At that
time many of the more progressive northern
types, such as horse, llama, mastodon, various
carnivores, and rodents invaded South America.
At the same time the relatively more primitive
South American animals—including the ground
sloths—made their way north. They included
opossums and porcupines which still survive.
The ground sloths, the glyptodons with their
turtlelike armor, and strange, rhinoceroslike
toxodons did not survive to present time. Toxo-
dons did not get north of Central America, but
certain smaller kinds of ground sloths, however,
established themselves as far north as Pennsyl-
vania and Idaho. One of these, from a cave in
West Virginia, was described by Thomas Jeffer-
son. The giant ground sloths, probably never
came farther north than the Southern States.
Some of the best-preserved remains—evidently
also of Eremotherium—were found more than a
century ago on an island off the coast of Georgia.
Remains of the gigantic Hremotherium have been
found at several localities in Panama. They also
have been collected in Venezuela, Ecuador, and
Brazil, characterizing the more tropical portions
of both North and South America during Pleisto-
cene time.
f
L<
|
.
'
F
\
|
\
*
i
;
' ‘,
jer
a t
-
i? ;
CONTENTS
: Page
BiocHEMIstRY—The effect of cortisone on the incorporation of C-14 in
various tissues from 2-C-14 labeled alanine. W. C. Huss and aaa
CDATHTELAIN «© 2 oc TR ees Ue Bed om aig ose cies eae ce re ge 109
GroLtocy.—Taxonomy versus stratigraphy. Davin Nicon..........-.-. 113
Borany.—Two new genera of grasses from China. Y. L. KENG. 235 ae 115
ZooLoGy.—A new species of Allogaussia (Amphipoda, Lysianassidae)
found living within the gastrovascular cavity of the sea-anemone
Anthopleura elegantissima. CHARLES R. SPASEK........4-+ . 300 . 119
Herprerotocy.—Another new species of Eleutherodactylus (Amphibia:
Leptodactylidae) from western Cuba. ALBERT SCHWARTZ.......-- 12F
Proceepines: Geological Society of Washington..............+-+-+---- 132
Notes and NEWS... 4 ne owe oe ee 144
DA W232
VOLUME 48 May 1958 NUMBER 5
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
A
=~
jeeneteteecretcen
Published Monthly by the
mee oH INGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CHESTER H. Paas, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BaMrorD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care In seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 33/4 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the JouR-
NAL or the PROCEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JOURNAL—-bPer Y@ar......:.2..-+ 4002 $7 .50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*..............-. — =
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)..... ste Tete oU. By si U
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available -
for sale to libraries at $393.50.
Monocrapu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,” by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS...........--+++++--+++-+- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete........ rine $25.00
Single volumes, unbound.:..-.-. 0.4 -. 20.68) $3.2 .- 72-29. 2.00
Single mumiberss 423s ae ee ree Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘“‘Washington Academy of Sciences”’ and
edge ree to the Treasurer, H. 8S. RapPLEYE, 6712 Fourth Street, NW.., Washington 12,
Changes of Address—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 48
May 1958
No. 5
PHILOSOPHY Scientist and theologian?! RAYMOND J. SEEGER, National Science
Foundation.
(Received March 19, 1958)
In the Stanza of the Segnatura in the
Vatiean, there is a Raphael fresco that is
commonly known as the ‘‘Disputation on
the Sacrament.” The official guidebook,
however, is of the opinion that the picture
might have been more appropriately en-
titled, ‘“The Triumph of the Church.” To
be sure, the painting shows a sharp divi-
sion: above, the Church Triumphant
gathered about Christ; and below, the
Church Militant concerned with the sacra-
ment. What is most significant to me is
the division itself; it seems to be a parable
portraying a lofty celestial realm of spirit
as a separate sphere, distinct from a nether
terrestial world of matter. This distinction,
indeed, has not been without supporters.
One may recall the Franciscan John Duns
Scotus, the Subtle Doctor who argued in
the 12th century that it is impossible to
harmonize theology based on faith with
philosophy based on reason. Philipp Frank
notes that ‘Skepticism towards reason has
frequently bolstered faith in revelation.”
Certainly, there is a modern tendency for
many theologians to exclude scientists
from exploring the heavenly precincts and
for some scientists to banish God from the
earthly domain. For example, the Danish
philosopher Soren Wierkegaard actually
demanded that all existential conclusions be
unscientific. In the book “Christianity and
Existentialists,’ edited by C. Michaelson,
one finds that ‘‘to exist 1s to value personal
authenticity more highly than scientific
exactitude.” ““N. Berdaev’s concern is the
realm of the spimit, of meaning, of exist-
‘University Lecture, Vanderbilt University,
April 1957.
145
ence—that is primary; the realm of matter
is secondary, and he leaves it to the scien-
tist.” There is apparently a gentleman’s
agreement (or is it a cold war?) among some
academic specialists to regard science and
rehgion as belonging to separate spheres.
No wonder that scientists and theologians
are rarely found attending the same _ pro-
fessional meetings.
It would seem that the intellectual world
could be theoretically described by either
science or religion—depending upon one’s
viewpoint. For example, from a particular
metaphysical point of view in which one
regards all religiously, the domain of science
is automatically meluded in the realm of
religion. On the other hand, from a_posi-
tivistic point of view in which one regards
everything scientifically, the area of religion
is naturally included in that of science—as
an epiphenomenon at least. Even practically
the average person is usually concerned
with either science or reigion—rarely with
both. Here is a man of science. He has had
genuine scientific experiences; he believes
that these experiences are true and that
truth is single. He concludes that if there
are any apparent conflicts between religion,
which he does not know well, and science,
which he does know well, he must choose
science. There is a man of religion. He has
had genuine religious experiences; he, too,
believes these experiences are true and that
truth is single. He concludes that if there
are any apparent discrepancies
religion, which he knows well, and science
which he does not know well, he must choose
religion. It is conceivable, of course, that
there might be a complete overlapping of
between
SMITHSONIAN
146
these separate spheres of science and of
religion so that they would be identical —or
at least equivalent.
It is my personal belief, however, that
from a practical point of view, there are
two spheres which will never be either
completely separated or wholly coincident,
but will always overlap to some degree.
Each one of us becomes acquainted early
with a little religion and with a little science.
As we become older, we normally grow
both in religion and in science; so, if there
is an initial overlapping, there will probably
always be an overlapping region of science
and of religion, a hazy ground for potential
conflict. Actually each of us tends to develop
either science or religion to a greater degree
so that the problem area of contact always
appears relatively small to us personally.
Hence we may honestly deny any real
problem of science and religion as we knew
them. (Any problem of science and religion
is necessarily of a personal nature, although
affected by social factors; it must be solved |
ultimately upon an individual basis.) Of
course, a state of continually changing
problems, personal or social, is intellectually
and spiritually healthy; it indicates growth
in both science and religion. Thus in the
eighteenth century, these problems were
centered in the mechanical theories of
physics; in the nineteenth century, in the
evolutionary theories of biology, and in
the twentieth century, in the behavioristic
theories of psychology and __ sociology.
Through the very conflict of changing
ideas—indeed, because of it—scientists and
theologians have both advanced in their
understanding of life.
Before looking at these individual spheres
and their overlapping, let us consider the
problem of science and religion as it actually
occurs in the educational process. Some
years ago I was giving a college course
stressing cultural aspects of science. In
that connection, I invited a colleague, a
professor of history, to tell how science
has influenced political institutions in their
development. He began, “Students, what
i Imeioeve “laliswormy, ~ Ine sarc “is uae
study of man and his environment.” A
little later I requested another colleague, a
professor of philosophy, to discuss certain
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Or
VOL. 48, NO.
philosophical aspects of science. He, in
turn, queried, ‘“‘What is philosophy?” “Phi-
losophy is the study of man and his environ-
ment,’ was his own reply. The next year,
I began the course by asking, ‘““What is
physics?” ‘Physics,’ I admitted, “is the
study of man and his environment.” You
see, even I got the idea; after all, there is
only one study—man and his environment.
One cannot conceive of an environment
without a man, and one cannot conceive
of a man without an environment. In this
broad sense, only social studies exist; they
necessarily include all science. On the basis
of this definition, of course, the proper
study of man is not man alone; science 1s
concerned not just with environment, but
with man and his environment. The prob-
lem of man and his environment, however,
is sc complex that we must approach it
along different directions. Now we approach
this general problem specifically from the
viewpoint of the physical sciences, now
directly from the view of the biological
sciences, now from that of the psychological
sciences, now from that of the social sciences.
Along each of these approaches three
questions always arise in our minds. Is
this particular view true? Is it real? Is it of
value? The clarification and_ realization
of this quest in a particular science are
the philosophy of that science. To formulate
common questions and to seek common
answers, generally speaking, is philosophy,
although one must admit that modern
philosophizing seem to be concerned with
techniques for asking proper questions much
more than for attempting valid answers.
There are, indeed, three essentially dif-
ferent attitudes that one may take toward
getting answers to these philosophical
questions. One may claim dogmatically,
“We don’t know.” Such people are agnostics.
Sceptics say doubtfully, ““We do not know,
but....” Still others urge hopefully, “We
do not know, but we are finding out more
and more.” Such is the attitude of all faith-
ful men; of men who believe that the
answers are to be found in our material
environment, or in man himself, or in very
God. The first group of believers may be
called materialists; the second group,
humanists; the third, men of religion.
May 1958
Regardless of what you or I may wish, the
fact is the civilization has been built by
individuals who have had faith of some kind
or other; belef in matter, or belief in man,
or belief in God. Philosophy, then, including
that particular metaphysical interpretation
called theology, necessarily forms an educa-
tional link between science and _ religion.
In Raphael’s “School of Athens,” which is
on the wall opposite the ‘‘Disputation on
the Sacrament,’’ one sees the school of
Athens with Plato and Aristotle at its
center, Plato looking heavenward, Aristotle
pointing earthward—a parable of the diverse
theological and scientific attitudes of phi-
losophers.
In any ease, as a scientist I start with
the fact that “I experience something”’;
I may not always be intensely alert, or
even moderately sensitive, but I do ex-
perience something, ‘‘my shining hour,”’
‘my blue heaven,’ etc. Now over-all
aspects of any experience compel a total
(mystical) awareness, which finds expres-
sion in religion. Certain phases of an ex-
perience present more of an intellectual
(.e., selected) challenge which results in
science. The same experiences usually have
both aspects in varying degrees. No wonder
then, that confusion often exists between
science and religion. Evidently, it is neces-
sary right at the start to have clear concepts
of both science and theology. It would
certainly be presumptuous for me to speak
for theology. Accordingly I will limit my
definition to science and merely indicate
those features that it appears to have in
common with theology, and those emphases
which seem distinctive to it.
What is science? Science is the result of
the use of a scientific method. What, how-
ever, 1s a scientific method? It is a method
used by a scientist. In a similar fashion,
I believe, one can say that theology is
the result of the use of a theological method,
and that a theological method is a method
used by a theologian (it would not be im-
possible, though not desirable, to speak
of theology as a science.) In order that all
this phraseology may not appear to be
merely a play upon words, may I say that
I am trying to emphasize in both instances
the “what” as being less important than
SEEGER: SCIENTIST AND THEOLOGIAN?
147
the “how,” and the “how” as being less
valuable than the ‘‘who.” It is the scientist
and the theologian themselves who are
most significant. Therefore, we can never
regard science solely for the sake of science,
or theology primarily for the _ sake
of theology, but rather both science and
theology essentially for the sake of man.
In the case of science, we begin with the
empirical soil of our personal experiences.
First of all, we note that we ourselves are
always directly involved. It is I, the sub-
ject, who experiences something, the object.
The experience always involves a subject
and an object; these can never be completely
separated from each other. The very at-
tempt to eliminate either the object (ex-
treme existentialism) or the subject (ex-
treme positivism) is itself a subjective
process. Dependent upon the field, to be sure
various degrees of separation are practica-
ble; greater separation is generally possible
in science than in theology; the several
sciences themselves differ in this regard. At
any rate, there is no such thing as a sub-
ject in a vacuum, even though an exis-
tentialist might lke to denote everyone
with a capital “I”? or a positivist prefer
to label everything with a Roman numeral
“T.” For anyone to claim, “The subject
alone exists, is truly real, not the object,
which is dependent, phenomenal,’ merely
begs the question.
After noting this personal involvement,
we consider next our sense impressions. First
of all, we realize that all our views are based
upon an underlying assumption as to the
uniformity of nature, not only those views
of scientists but also those of theologians,
for whom dependability is a sina qua non.
We all start with sense impressions, ap-
pearances, or phenomena. These may be
more or less vivid; they may be past or
present; they may be given or sought—they
are the facts of life. There are generally
individual variations—no two stars, no two
flowers are completely the same. The dif-
ferences that make for individuality, I
believe, are emphasized by theology, whereas
the generic similarities are stressed by
science. It is undoubtedly true, moreover,
that science has consequently searched
more for standards of communication, which
148
have resulted in observed facts that are
commonly accepted. It is not that the
scientist categorically announces, “Blue is
this,’ but rather “If this is blue, then that
is blue.” One notes, on the other hand, the
difficulties that certain theological schools
have in attempting to communicate what
appears to be incommunicable, at times
intrinsically so, and at other time arti-
fically. Certain theologians, (cf. the theo-
logian Karl Heim’s so-called quasi Coperni-
ean revolution “which led to the discovery
of the non objective I-Thou space’). Certain
theologians moreover, have a tendency to
use symbolically common words with mul-
tiple meanings for certain specific fringe-
meanings. In this connection, science un-
doubtedly has a great advantage. When
necessary, it can and does introduce en-
tirely new words which it sharply defines.
As that eminent philologist Humpty
Dumpty, once remarked, “When I use a
word, it means just what I choose it to
mean—neither more nor less’. Now and
then pedantics seem even to delight in
using words with rather restricted technical
meanings in order to tantalize lay folk who
are accustomed to more general usages of
them. For example, originally the word
myth denoted specifically a story char-
acteristic of primitive people, often with
respect to popular supernatural ideas about
social and natural phenomena. Such a story
might be truthful in its significance, though
not necessarily historically true. Much more
commonly, however, a myth connotes a
tale devoid of truth, or a nonexistent thing
or event.
IT am even more concerned about current
existential statements like this one: “God
does not exist.’’ The phrase ‘‘to exist’’ here
is supposed to mean “to be human.” On
the other hand, we are told that “Being
connotes matter, the phenomenon; exist-
ence connotes the spirit, the noumen.”’
“The empirical world is not God’s creation,
the spiritual noumenal realm is,” suggests
another paradox owing to uncommon word
usage. The philosopher Martin Heidegger
actually defines time ‘‘as the temporariness
of human beings,” in order to set aside
the question of so-called objective time.
All these phrases may make some sense
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 9
in the technical usages of the terms. On the
other hand, they will be necessarily some-
what confusing to a layman who will
probably be regarding the words as familiar
ones.
Almost from the beginning of science
some philosophers have claimed that science
is nothing more than the sum total of ob-
served facts, plus certain inductive in-
ferences—the original positivism formulated
by the philosopher August Comte. Later,
however, it was recognized that not all
observations may be actually recorded;
indeed, there is a selection from all the
facts—the basis of the scientific positivism
expressed by the philosophical physicist,
Ernst Mach. More recently we have begun
to realize that there is not even a self-
evident relationship between the so-called
observed facts and their matrix of sense
impressions. On the contrary, the rela-
tionship itself must be operationally specified
in each instance—what is known nowadays
as logical positivism. In summary, we all
begin with individual experiences. As
scientists, we become generally aware of
some sense impressions and specifically note
certain observed facts among them, as
well as their relations. It is always the
scientist who observes, the scientist who
selects, the scientist who relates! As theo-
logians, too, we may be said to have certain
experiences of the whole, involving both
sense impressions and particularly sig-
nificant events, that result similarly in
religious facts. Likewise, it is the theologian
himself who is impressed, the theologian
who selects, the theologian who relates!
Out of the empirical earth, we move
up into the rational atmosphere, where we
all make a common basic assumption;
namely, the intelligibility of the universe.
We seek a common-sense interpretation of
Nature by applying reason to the empirical
earth.
In science we begin with the simple
process of identification. We group together
similar observed facts. The astronomer,
Johannes Kepler, noted that the paths of
the planets are all ellipses. Instead of
keeping tabular records of all planetary
positions, therefore, one can describe them
in terms of particular ellipses. Having
May 1958
identified similar units, childlike we then
proceed to make combinations of them in
the form of patterns, which involve simply
related factors. In many cases, we can
express the relations best by means of
creative concepts, such as the concept of
center of gravity of a ring. One does not
find specific gravity per se in nature, one
creates this idea through the mind. The
relations themselves may be sought pri-
marily for consistency (logic) or for sim-
plicity (with respect to economic or con-
venient purposes). In any event, it is the
scientist who relates the factors; it is the
scientist who creates the concepts! The
theologian would appear to play a similar
role except that the determination of
related factors is much more of a complex
problem in his case.
From the empirical soil and the rational
atmosphere, we move next into the realm
of imaginative vistas. I am using the Italian
word vista in the same sense as the Greek
word theory, meaning view. In this instance
we are trying to “save appearances,” to
look for some reality beyond or some mean-
ing hidden within phenomena. I would call
all such theories factitious inasmuch as
they are man-made. What is the motiva-
tion for such imaginative vistas? It may
be heuristic research, it may be intellectual
beauty (beauty being something beyond
and not within the reach of direct seeking),
it may be just common-sense analogues,
depending upon individual curiosity or
upon social factors (including birth, up-
bringing and status of the scientist). The
more speculative character of theology is
generally recognized because of the very
comprehensiveness of its problem.
What is all important is the freedom that
is involved in making such theories. Abstrac-
tion in science is comparatively free like
abstraction in art. The artist, Georges
Roualt, was once asked how he had learned
to portray a white tree in spring. He said
it was because he had looked at snow-clad
fields in winter. Such association is an
irrational element that is prominent also in
science. May I call to mind two celebrated
examples.
Perhaps it was not an apple that actually
struck Isaac Newton that day when he
SEEGER: SCIENTIST AND THEOLOGIAN?
149
first conceived the possibility of a law of
universal gravitation, but there was a
thoughtful impact in the idea that the moon
might be an apple and fall, or that an apple
might become a satellite and encircle the
earth. In either case, the same law of
gravitation would attract the moon-apple
toward the earth—a universal law. Thus
Newton arrived at the concept of a uni-
verse, distinct from the duoverse that had
been prevalent up to his day. Or, again,
here is a chain consisting of alternate rings
of copper and of iron. We start an electric
current in the copper. Instantaneously
the encircling iron ring becomes magnetized:
as its condition changes the next copper ring
exhibits an electric current, which mag-
netizes the neighboring iron ring, and so
on. A disturbance, both electric and mag-
netic in character, moves along the chain.
Let us now remove the iron rings so that
only the copper rings are left in place. We
find that a disturbance again moves along
the remaining rings. We now remove all
copper rings except the first one. Once more
we find an electromagnetic disturbance,
propagated this time out into space—a
radio wave. Certainly such a visualization
of a physical process in empty space taxes
the imagination of each one of us. Picture
then that scientist who first formed such an
image—the creative scientist who really
imagined it before it was realized.
What, you ask, is the value of a theory?
A physical theory is essentially an instru-
ment with a prescription of how to use it. As
such, it can be employed first of all for
description of what has been observed. In
this respect, it is cumulative in its growth—it
not only interprets past information, but
also embraces additional facts as they
become observed. All the observed facts
must be included in the total description.
A similar process might be true for the
theology, which, in turn, would have to
embrace new religious facts (including so-
called revealed ones) as they became known.
A second value of a scientific theory is
its ability to predict new phenomena. Here
we are reminded of the famous discovery
of the planet Neptune. The planet Uranus
had been observed not to follow the path
predicted by the Newtonian law of gravita-
150
tion. Someone later suggested that another
planet still farther out was responsible for
this discrepancy. A calculation was made
and a new planet postulated for a certain
region in the sky. In that very place the
planet Neptune was discovered! This ele-
ment of surprise in science is truly surpris-
ing: It lends credence to our belief in a
factitious theory. And yet, we are less
shocked when we recall that observed facts
always include less than the original sense
impressions, all of which are necessarily less
than the basic experience themselves: Our
observed facts are never abstracted com-
pletely and cleanly from the empirical
earth. In this characteristic of predictability,
theology seems to be woefully wanting in
its comparison with science.
We have now all the elements of any
scientific method, what we might generally
call the scientific method, which 1s fulfilled
in varying degrees depending on the field
of inquiry. We begin by asking Nature
certain questions; out of the answers we
select factors and relate them through
creative concepts, we then seek through
imaginative associations, a theory that 1s
factitious. On the basis of this new vista,
we ask other questions, we obtain additional
observed facts, we note other related factors,
we formulate a new factitious theory . . . the
cycle is repeated mn an ever growing
spiral—subject always to checks by Nature
and by other scientists. The unity of science
is made possible by the uniformity of Nature
and the community of scientists. It is the
very lack of adequate checks that retards
more rapid progress on the part of the
theologian. The complexity of his material
prevents the isolation and experimental
control more readily available in a science
like physics—not to mention his perpetual
problem of communication.
Let us consider again science and phi-
losophy in the light of this outline of the
nature of science. First of all, let us glance
back historically. We begin with the Greek
age of speculative science, when science and
philosophy were so intermingled that one
could not differentiate them. Aristotle
not only played an important role in that
period, but established a guiding principle
for ages to come by “insisting that phi-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 5
losophy proceeds to what 1s more self-
evident and intrinsically more intelligible”’.
In his Prime Mover, indeed, we have natural
theology appearing as natural philosophy.
At the same time, however, we note the
remarkable contributions of the Jonians
who believed that the world of phenomena
is understandable and that it is made up of
uniform stuff despite the many varieties
of forms.
The second great period is what one might
call the medieval age of rational science,
dominated by the Dominican Thomas
Aquinas, the Angelic Doctor who set up
two criteria for truth: first, deductibility
from intelligible principles, i.e., the “why,”
and secondly, a check with observations,
i.e., the “what”. It has always been rec-
ognized that the second criterion does
not necessarily give a unique solution. As
a matter of fact, the Invincible Doctor
William of Ockam, the disciple of Duns
Scotis, found it advisable to differentiate
philosophical truth and religious truth for
this very reason.
The third period is the modern age of
experiential science, that challenging com-
bination of facts and ideas which has
resulted in presentday technology and
science. It is understandable that modern
science developed first in astronomy where
observations had been continuously made
and where theories had been successfully
formulated. It became evident in the
Renaissance that specific astronomical ob-
servations could not be deduced from general
philosophical principles. Accordingly, there
were introduced ad hoc scientific principles
of a theoretical character which did describe
the observations, but which simultaneously
created a gap between theoretical science
and philosophy, a gap which has persisted
to this very day. It is in this spirit that
Newton made his famous remark, “I do
not make hypotheses.’”’ What he meant,
was that he did not make hypotheses of a
general philosophical nature; of course,
he did make hypotheses of a strictly theo-
retical, scientific character.
In this same period we find the beginnings
of modern philosophy. We note in this
connection the Cartesian dualism of matter
and motion as opposed to mind. It was the
May 1958 SEEGER: SCIENTIST
philosopher Immanuel Kant, however, who
sharply differentiated phenomena, the ap-
pearances of things, and things in them-
selves. He regarded metaphysics as being
concerned with ideas that cannot be checked
in Nature. Modern opinions still differ
widely about the precise relationship be-
tween such philosophy and science. In the
Encyclopedia Britannica, for example, phi-
losophy is regarded as filling gaps in science;
in the Soviet encyclopedia, on the other
hand, philosophy is viewed as being es-
sentially different from science. In either
case, we continue to see science being ex-
cluded from philosophy in the same manner
that science is being ignored by theology.
Regardless of this intellectual state, modern
philosophy and theology both must take
account of science. The primary question
is how.
A fashionable representative of the meta-
physical school today is neo-Thomism. In
this case, we have the opinion of the scho-
lastic philosopher Jacques Maritain that
science is free in its specific formulations
so long as they agree with general philo-
sophical principles. The mathematical phys-
icist Pierre Duhem, however, demanded
that philosophy itself choose from among
the various possible scientific principles. A
more radical emphasis upon the validity
of science is the positivistic philosophy
derived from August Comte. He introduced
sociology, a new discipline which was
originally concerned with the social factors
pertinent to scientific development. For
example, a scientific hypothesis like that of
Copernicus may be regarded as desirable
because of observational accuracy, because
of mathematical advantages, because of
common-sense reasonableness, or because of
conformity with the predominant philosophy
of the times. Whether the geocentric
hypothesis or the heliocentric one is pre-
ferred depends upon which of these factors
are regarded as being of primary importance.
At any rate, one concludes with only the
relative truth of such a hypothesis. In
positivism it is science that provides its
own integration and validation. In a certain
sense, in the vital issue between metaphysics
and positivism, we have revived again
the nominalist and realist controversy.
AND THEOLOGIAN? 151
In despair an individual might personally
wish to purge science of all philosophy.
This prospect, however, appears to be
unrealizable both practically and
theoretically. Whether or not we desire
metaphysical interpretations of science,
they will always exist. Philosophy, in
general, will always be nearer the common-
sense view of average people than science.
Science, indeed, usually challenges common-
sense opinions. (The common sense of today
is the uncommon science of yesterday. )
Thus we find in the case of the relativity
theory that it was opposed by the Nazis
as being too materialistic, but that it was
simultaneously opposed by the Soviets as
being too idealistic. In the case of the
quantum theory, we find George B. Shaw
the playwright saying “all is caprice,”’
while the astronomer Arthur S. Eddington
claimed it as being a great boon for the idea
of a free will and the physicist James H.
Jeans was thereby impelled to regard the
universe itself as a great thought. In this
instance the problem becomes focused on
causality, i.e., whether to regard a wave
function as fundamental and thereby retain
physical causality, or to prefer the square
of that function and thereby retain the
particle concept. In any event, science is
not uniquely determined. Sociological factors
are important. The interpretation of science
cannot be divorced from science itself—the
philosophy of science must be taken into
account.
Each one of us, therefore, has apparently
three practical choices: (1) to be agnostic
and thereby maintain an intellectual vacuum
in which moral commitments are meaning-
less—negativism, (2) or to note indis-
criminately all possibilities so that moral
commitments are neutralized—positivism,
(3) or to proceed wholeheartedly to develop
one viewpoint—metaphysics. In reality, I
suppose, our actions can never be so simply
determined—any course of action may well
show traces of all three choices at various
times. If any school of thought
momentarily strong, it will emphasize the
freedom to develop, and will attempt to
force its interpretation upon others. On
the other hand, if a group is weak, it will
insist upon freedom from philosophical
is
152
interpretations, and will try to maintain a
purge of philosophical interest.
One more point, what about the truth
of a scientific theory? By the term truth
here, I am restricting my use to the sense
in which we speak of something being ‘‘true
to observed facts”. You recall Plato’s
cave with the prisoners facing a path having
4 wall shielding the fire. All they saw were
shadows upon the wall, silhouettes. Exis-
tentialists argue that the prisoners alone
are important—the shadows are too
shadowy. Now no one would deny the
importance of the prisoners, but the objects
producing profile shadows, therefore, do
not appear less real. Let us pursue the image
a little farther in our own problem.
We begin with the appearances or phe-
nomena on our plane of experience. Out
of this plane we select observed facts and
construct the world of science. So, too,
we can select certain religious facts (in-
cluding “revealed” ones) and construct a
world of theology. One would hardly expect
to find a one-to-one correspondence between
these two worlds, the world of science and a
world of theology, worlds which may be
built in quite dissimilar fashions. A continual
conflict between theology as a particular
philosophy and any philosophy of science
would probably be inevitable.
What about the other side of the plane
of experience? Is there a world of Nature
beyond it?—a world of which this plane is
merely an outer surface? If so, is there
likely to be a one-to-one correspondence
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, NO. 5
between the superficial world of science
and such a fundamental world of Nature?
Not necessarily! I do believe, however,
that there is a closer over-all approximation
of the world of science to the world of
Nature as we progress. One gains continually
increasing confidence in the descriptiveness
and in the predictability of the world of
science. As Victor Hugo once said, “La
science est ’asymptote de la vérité.” To me,
the world of science is essentially a symbol
pointing to the world of Nature. Likewise,
I believe the world of theology can effec-
tively be a symbol pointing to the world
of Nature’s God.
You may recall that Dante Alighieri
despairingly begins his “Divine Comedy,”’
“Midway upon the journey of our life, I
found myself in a dark wood, where the
right way was lost.’’ He ends it hopefully
with “The love that moves the sun and
other stars.” Early in life Dante had met la
donna gentile, the gentle lady (earthly
philosophy), interposed between him and
la donna gentillisima, the most gentle
lady (heavenly theology). But theology
was not to be his ultimate satisfaction. In
the eyes of his beloved Beatrice (the
blessed), transported from earth to heaven,
he sees reflected the supernal light. It is
the beatific, ineffable vision of God alone
that finally fills him with joyful peace at
the close of his journey. So, too, I believe,
science and theology, including related
philosophy, must both point to the same
world of Nature and of Nature’s God.
The knowledge of nature as it 1s—not as we imagine it to be—constitutes true
science.—PARACELSUS.
May 1958
NICOL: THE PELECYPOD EULOXA
PALEONTOLOGY —The pelecypod Euloxa: Observations on new localities. Davip
Nico, Southern Illinois University, Carbondale, Tl.
(Received March 13, 1958)
For my first study on the monotypic
genus Huloxa, published in 1953, only about
a dozen museum specimens were available.
Recently I was fortunate enough to find
this rare pelecypod in the field and was
thus able to observe its stratigraphic
occurrence and its paleoecology. I now have
66 measurable specimens and several times
that number of fragments or unmeasurable
specimens from two new localities. Un-
fortunately, the Huloxa shells from both
areas were friable and had to be coated
with a solution of alvar and acetone.
A description of the two localities fol-
lows, and hereafter in the text they will
be referred to only as locality 1 and
locality * 2.
Locality ¥1. St. Mary’s formation;
Hanover County, Va.; 1.5 miles south of
Hanover Court House; turn west off U. S.
Highway 301 on to State Route 698 to Carry
Farm. This locality is a short distance south
and west of Cady Station on the Chesapeake
& Ohio Railroad. Huloxa occurs just below
the dam of an artificial lake in a channel
cut by the overflow of the dam.
Locality 2. St. Mary’s formation:
Henrico County, Va.; in a west-facing road
cut on U. 8. Highway 301; 0.3 mile south
of Hanover-Henrico County line. Euloxa
occurs at the base of the road cut.
These two localities are included in the
distribution map of Huloxa (Fig. 1).
At locality * 1 the thickness of the Luloxa-
bearing bed is approximately 1 foot. At
locality #2 the thickness below the base
of the road cut could not be determined.
At neither locality could the top or bottom
of the St. Mary’s formation be seen, and
for this reason the position within the forma-
tion of the bed containing HLuloxa could
not be ascertained.
On the State Geological Map of Virginia
(1928) the areas covered by the two lo-
calities are indicated as the Calvert forma-
tion; however, the presence of Hulova
latisulcata, Chlamys (Lyropecten) santa-
maria, and Anadara idonea proves quite
conclusively that these beds belong to
the St. Mary’s formation. Further paleonto-
logic and_ stratigraphic work is greatly
needed in this area.
PALEOECOLOGIC OBSERVATIONS
Some paleoecologic inferences can be
drawn from the lithology at the two lo-
calities. The sediment at both places is
exceedingly fine-grained; practically all of
it could easily be washed through an 80-
mesh screen. It is therefore apparent that
the animals lived on a silty or muddy bot-
tom.
Additional paleoecologic inferences can
be drawn from a study of the fauna as-
sociated with Huloxa at the two localities,
in some cases by comparing the faunas
of the two places (Table 1). Because the
shells are friable, it is impossible to identify
many of the species, but generic and sub-
generic determinations can be made. For
most conclusions of a general paleoecologic
nature, this amount of systematic alloca-
tion is adequate.
Some of the species from both localities
appear to be indigenous; other species, by
their rare occurrence and poor preserva-
tion, appear to have been washed into these
areas after death. The latter have been
marked with an asterisk in the faunal list
and can be omitted from any serious con-
sideration of the ecology at the two lo-
calities. This eliminates 10 of the 39 species
found at the two places.
At both localities the faunal assemblages
are typically marine. A study of the pelecy-
pods (data taken from Keen and Frizzell.
1953, pp. 23-25, and substantiated by
Thorson, 1957, pp. 508, 514) indicates
that the depth of the water was probably
not less than 7 m and not more than 40 m
at either locality. A further indication of
depth is the presence of the brachiopod
genus Discinisca, which in modern seas is
confined to shallow water.
In terms of number of species, peleeypods
predominate at both localities. In number
154
of specimens, however, gastropods (vir-
tually all Turritella plebeia) are almost as
numerous at locality *1 as are pelecypods
there. The almost total lack of gastropods
at locality 2 and the lack of variety of
eastropods at locality #1 are probably
due to the fact that gastropods do not
thrive on a silty substrate. Dr. F. M. Bayer
(oral communication) corroborates this
statement. His studies of living mollusks
reveal that few species of gastropods live on
fne mud bottoms, although in such en-
vironments the few existing gastropod
species may be represented by many
individuals.
There is some evidence of carniverous
gastropod activity at both localities, but
no shells of this type of gastropod were
found. At locality #1 one specimen of
Anadara and four specimens of Huloxa had
holes in their shells drilled by carniverous
gastropods. At locality #2, which had a
smaller number of pelecypods, more shells
had been attacked by gastropods—one
Mercenaria, one Euloxa, two Eucrassatella,
and fiye Spisula (Hemimactra). Clionid
sponge borings in the shells of Chlamys
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 9
are also common at locality *2 but very
rare at locality ¥*1.
It is particularly noticeable at locality
“1 that the faunal elements are in general
represented by small or thin-shelled forms
or both. Such genera as Discinisca, Denta-
lium, Turritella, Nucula, Hratella, Semele,
and Glossus all fit this description in one
or both respects. At locality *1 this leaves
only Anadara, which 1s rare, and Huloxa,
which is common but is only medium-
sized. It has been my observation, as well
as that of Dr. Bayer, that large, heavy-
shelled mollusks are rarely found on a
mucky or silty bottom. At locality *2,
where apparently the silty conditions were
not so extreme, there are more specimens of
large or thick-shelled mollusks: Huloxa,
which is common, and Anadara, Chione,
and Eucrassatella, which are rare. They
are greatly outnumbered by small or thin-
shelled forms, such as Dentaliwm, Tur-
ritella, Chlamys, Pododesmus, Spisula (Hemi-
mactra), Corbula, and Panope. The reasons
that large, thick-shelled mollusks do not
live on a silty substrate are probably me-
chanical ones.
Fig. 1—Map of part of Virginia showing general localities
where Euloza has been reported. Solid
triangles, specimens examined by me from these localities. Open triangle, specimens reported from
this locality in literature.
May 1958
NICOL: THE PELECYPOD EULOXA 155
TaBLE 1.—List or FAUNA FROM
THE Two LOCALITIES
(Asterisk indicates those which were probably
washed in after death.)
(Sequence of terms: Abundant, common,
rare, very rare.)
Species Locality *1 Locality *2
Anadara idonea
(@ommad) 4... ...... Rare Rare
LE ACTOUISSS) On ae “Very rare | *Very rare
Cerastoderma sp........ *Very rare —
COTE 30.5 *Rare Rare
Chlamys (Lyropecten)
santamaria Tucker...| Common Common
Slromd sp............- Very rare | Common
CORA. ¢ ou -— Very rare
Corbula (Caryocorbula)
maequalis Say....... Common Rare
Dentalium attenuatum
SOs ss52 6a Common Rare
Discinisca lugubris
(Conrad) ees... e Common ~—
BEpVONG Spee. .........| *Very rare -—
Eucrassatella sp........ — Rare
Euloxa latisulcata
(Conrad). 2... Common Common
HOSSUS S)0s ks ane Very rare —
Hiatella arctica
(AOTC) Very rare aes
Isognomon mazillata
(Deshayes).......... *Very rare a
WHEN CENOTIG SP........<. *Rare *Very rare
Nucula proxima Say ...| Abundant <=
TOWAOTCISD. 216.5. =. - Rare ==
HeOMOPE SD. .2........ — Rare
Parvilucina crenulata
(Comrade... 6... Rare —
LP OUGP 8) Ds desea eee ee *Very rare | *Very rare
Pododesmus (Monia?)
philippr Gardner. ...| Common Very rare
ISCTNUCILE?SD ik oes te ss Very rare —
Spisula (Hemimactra)
TOcs cads eee Rare Abundant
Turritella plebeia Say..| Abundant | Rare
Another observation should be noted.
Even in genera like Chlamys and Spisula,
the representatives at both localities tend
to run to small size. In the case of Chlamys
(Lyropecten) santamaria this is not inherent
in the species; specimens collected from a
more favorable environment sometimes be-
come twice as large. In the case of Spisula
(Hemimactra) species, there are few rel-
atively large specimens from localty ¥ 2
and none from locality ¥ 1.
The dominant elements of the fauna at
locality 1 are Turritella plebeia and
Nucula proxima; at locality *2, a few
miles away and with very similar lithology,
Turritella plebera is rare and Nucula proxima
is absent. The dominant fossil at locality
*2 is Spisula (Hemimactra) species; yet
this form is rare at locality #1. Among
the less abundantly represented species
there are, also, many discrepancies be-
tween the two localities. At locality *1 the
brachiopod Discinisca lugubris is rather
common, but not one specimen occurs at
locality #2. Pododesmus (Monia?) philippi
and Corbula (Caryocorbula) inaequalis are
much more common at locality 1 than
at locality 2. In addition, Pandora,
Parvilucina, Hiatella, Semele, and Glossus,
are represented by few specimens at lo-
cality 1, Parvilucina being the most
common, but are absent at locality 2.
The reverse is true of Panope and the thick-
shelled genus Hucrassatella, a few specimens
having been found at locality *2 but none
at locality * 1.
What are the reasons for these faunal
differences? That there was little or no
dissimilarity in geologic time is indicated
by the fact that the genus Huloxa, found
in the same beds, had only a short life span,
probably less than one million years. (See
Nicol, 1953a, pp. 706-707.) The differences
could be due, at least in part, to the condition
of the substrates; 1.e., although the matrix
is fine-grained at both places, the sediment
at locality *2 comprises much more shell
material and even the bottom may have
been firmer there than at locality 1.
The abundance or scarcity of shell material,
as well as the matrix itself, is a vital deter-
minant of the type of benthonic animal
which will live in an area, and this factor
must therefore be taken into consideration
when the paleoecology of a locality is
studied. Although the depth of the water
was probably not more than 40 m at either
locality, there may have been enough dif-
ference in water depth to contribute to
the dissimilarity in the faunal elements of
the localities. One other factor may have
played a part in the faunal discrepancies.
Brachiopods, as exemplified in these two
faunas only by Discinisca lugubris, are,
in general, gregarious animals. This same
eregarious habit may occur in some of the
156
mollusks as well and would explain the
presence or absence of a species at a partic-
ular locality. There is no evidence that
temperature of the water was a factor in
the faunal differences between the two
localities.
OBSERVATIONS ON EULOXA
Euloxa latisulcata was probably not
adapted too well to the conditions on a
muddy bottom because all indications so
far point to a period of existence for this
species of less than one million years. This is
a very short life span for a pelecypod species
and an extremely short life span for a
pelecypod genus. Within the two popula-
tions of Huloxa latisulcata that I have
examined there was a large number of
small or immature specimens, many of
which were not recovered from the matrix
because of their thin and fragile shells. 1
estimate that 50 per cent of the shells of
Euloxa latisulcata that I saw were less than
12 mm long, and the largest measurable
specimen was 25.8 mm long.
The well-preserved specimens of Euloxa
latisulcata show distinct seasonal (most
likely annual) growth rings on the outside
of the shell. The greatest number of growth
rings is eight. Most large specimens (20
or more mm in length) have five or six.
Specimens of less than 10 mm in length
show no growth rings. The latter probably
never reached sexual maturity, and perhaps
the specimens with only one growth ring
also did not.
The nearest living relative to Huloxa
latisulcata on which I have discovered any
data. on the matter of reproduction is
Mercenaria mercenaria. Like many other
pelecypods this bivalve is a protandric
hermaphrodite—the young specimens nearly
always being first male. After the sperm are
shed into the water, about half of the popula-
tion of young individuals becomes female.
(See Loosanoff, 1936.) H Huloxa latisulcata
reproduced in the same manner and if at
some time there was a preponderance of
sexually immature individuals and males,
the survival of the species must have de-
pended on the number of sexually mature
females. When the latter group became too
small in number, (the growth-ring data
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, NO. 5
indicate that many died before sexual
maturity) the species became extinct. This
may not be the reason that Huloxa latisulcata
survived for less than one million years,
but, on the other hand, it is a possibility,
and it is presented here merely as that.
No other reason, backed by any evidence,
can be presented at this time.
Some new morphological data, based on
examination of a much larger number of
specimens, can be added to the observations
that I made in my earlier paper. The average
specimen is 2 mm longer than high, and
even small specimens (less than 12 mm in
length) are nearly 2 mm longer than they
are high. There is more variation in large
specimens (more than 20 mm in length) in
the height-length ratio. Some specimens
are more than 4 mm longer than high while
one specimen has the same height and length
measurements. The convexity averages 64 per
cent of the length, but this percentage is
slightly higher in large specimens. The
average height for 68 specimens is 17.0
mm, the length 19.0 mm, and the convexity
12.1 mm. The maximum height observed
was 22.4 mm, the length 25.8 mm, and
convexity 15.4 mm. Each of these maximum
measurements was found on a different
specimen. No gerontic individuals were
found.
The outline of the valves varies from
subquadrate to subcircular. Small specimens
generally have a more truncated posterior
side. On some specimens, in front of the
prominent sulcus on the posterior fifth of
the shell, is a faint shallow depression which
is wider and more marked toward the ventral
border. A similar type of depressed area
in about the same area on the outside of the
shell, although somewhat larger, is seen
in some chionid species.
The anterior pedal retractor muscle scar
is small but well marked. It is located under
the hinge plate dorsally and slightly posterior
to the anterior adductor muscle.
On all large specimens and on most
smaller ones, tooth 1 in the right valve is
triangular and robust, and it lies per-
pendicular to the dorsal margin. However,
in some of the smaller specimens this tooth
is elongate and lies nearly parallel to the
May 1958
dorsal margin. Apparently the anterior
extension of tooth 1 disappears as the in-
dividual increases in size.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
I am particularly indebted to Shelton P.
Applegate, Jr., for the discovery of, and
the help in collecting at, the two new
localities where Fuloxa latisulcata was
found. Dr. F. M. Bayer was of great as-
sistance in the interpretation of the eco-
logical observations made by the writer.
RETARDATION OF COPPER CORROSION
157
LITERATURE CITED
Keen, A. Myra, and Frizzevtu, Don L. IIlus-
trated key to west North American pelecypod
genera, Stanford University Press, 1953.
LoosaNnorr, V. Sexual phases in the quohog.
Science 83: 287-288. 1936.
NELSON, WiLBUR A. Geologic map of Virginia.
U.S. Geological Survey, 1928.
Nicot, D. Systematic position of the pelecypod
Kuloxa. Journ. Pal. 27 (1): 56-61. 1953.
———. Period of existence of some late Cenozoic
pelecypods. Journ. Pal. 27 (5): 706-707. 1953a.
THorson, Gunnar. Bottom communities (sub-
littoral or shallow shelf). Geol. Soc. Amer.
Mem. 67: 461-534. 1957.
——— ai
RETARDATION OF COPPER CORROSION BY LIGHT
Sunlight or other intense light, which ordi-
narily accelerates the corrosion process in metals,
has been found to produce an opposite effect on
copper oxidation’—copper oxide growth is
actually retarded by the irradiation. This un-
usual behavior was observed at the National
Bureau of Standards as part of a continuing
research project on the corrosion of copper over
a wide range of controlled conditions.
In the present investigation, which was par-
tially sponsored by the Corrosion Research
Council, Dr. Jerome Kruger of the Bureau’s
corrosion laboratory immersed copper single
erystals in water and found that irradiation
retarded subsequent copper oxide growth.
Single copper crystals were used because their
relatively simple structure gives results that are
more easily calculated and understood.
The copper crystals, which were grown from
copper of 99.99 percent purity, were submerged
in air-saturated, distilled water. A water-jacketed
container was used to maintain a constant
temperature and to avoid overheating due to
intense light. All light was excluded from the
highly polished copper crystal except that which
shone through a small aperture in the jacket.
After three hours of uniform illumination at
room temperature by 3200°K tungsten lamp, the
entire crystal sphere was found to be much less
oxidized than when illuminated by room light.
To study this effect further, one-half of the
crystal was illuminated with the intense white
‘ Inquiries concerning further information on
copper corrosion should be addressed to Dr.
Jerome Kruger, Corrosion Metallurgy Laboratory,
National Bureau of Standards, Washington 25,
light from the tungsten lamp. It was found that
the irradiated portion had oxidized at a markedly
different rate than the unilluminated area. An
electrometric measuring technique showed a
film thickness of 120 A on the exposed side and an
average film thickness of 500 A on the other side.
When similar light was allowed to impinge on
part of a crystal already coated with a thick
film (1000-2000 A), the oxide on the illuminated
portion became considerably thinner than on the
unexposed part of the crystal. X-ray diffraction
studies of the films found on both the dark and
the irradiated parts of the crystal showed that
the films were composed of well-oriented cuprous
oxide.
Although the mechanism for this behavior is
not known, a possible explanation is a copper-
cuprous oxide photocell theory, which centers
upon the semiconductance of cuprous oxide.
Irradiation would cause an electron flow from
the cation-deficient semiconductor film of
CU:0 into the metal. This direction of flow is
just opposite to that during oxide growth and
hence could block further propagation of the
oxide. Other investigators?:? have found that
light favors oxidation of aluminum and tantalum
whose oxides are cation-excess semiconductors.
The present study indicates that there is a
direct correlation between the rate of the oxide
formation in water and the underlying erystal
structures. Crystallographic orientation studies
are now in progress to verify this.
27 N. CasBreERA et al., Comp. Rend. Aead. Sci.
(Paris) 224: 1558. 1947.
*D. A. VeRMILYEA, Journ. Applied Phys. 26:
489. 1955.
158
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 5
BOTANY .— Techniques involving the sowing of spores of the Filicinae for artificial
culture. BERNARD T. Bripcers, University of Maryland. (Communicated by
James H. Hibben.)
(Received January 20, 1958)
Numerous papers have been presented on
studies of prothalli of the Filicinae under
artificial conditions, and varied techniques
have been used for sowing the spores on the
substrata. The writer has not found any of
these methods to be completely suitable.
The object of this paper is to present a
technique for sowing the spores which may
be found applicable to germination studies
as well as studies of growth and develop-
ment of the prothalli.
Several writers, including Hires (1940)
and Steeves, Sussex, and Partanen (1955),
have used a bacterial inoculating loop to
streak the spores on the surface of nutrient
agar. Mohr (1956) described the use of a
soft brush, and Reuther (1953) reported
that sowing the spores was made through
lens paper.
To obtain a consistent homogenous and
not-too-compact distribution of spores by
these methods is difficult. If the number of
spores used is considered significant, these
methods are impracticable. A method which
has been found more satisfactory than the
reported techniques involves the prepara-
tion of a spore suspension, using sterile
water.
After the spores have been collected
they are passed through a fine lens paper to
remove any foreign matter, such as por-
tions of sporangia. The spore suspension 1s
then prepared. One is able to estimate the
amount of spores to be used in a given
volume of water and then the relative
number of spores is determined micro-
scopically by observing aliquants of the
suspension. However, accuracy is facilitated
by using a hemacytometer. This instru-
ment enables one to make a more exact
count of the spores to be used.
The suspension is thoroughly agitated
in order that the spores will become dis-
persed throughout the medium. Clumping
of spores is as common with ferns as with
fungi. To insure a homogenous dispersion
of spores Tween 20 may be added asep-
tically, at a concentration of 5 mg per 100
erams suspension. Then, considering the
number of spores desired for the study, a
measured amount of the suspension 1s
placed on the medium. A slight rotation of
the medium further aids the dispersion of
spores.
Practices of disinfestation of spores have
been variously discussed. In order to obtain
spores free from contaminates, disinfesting
the leaf before the opening of the sporangia
first was suggested by Perrin (1908) and
was later modified by Kleinschmidt (1957).
Hurel-Py (1950), however, abandoned the
method outlined by Perrin for a direct
treatment of the spores. For studies of
germination it 1s considered wise to elimi-
nate such treatments. As has been discussed
by Hurel-Py, variation in species must be
considered when selecting a concentration
of the disinfestant and time of treatment.
When the spores are passed through the
lens paper most of the foreign matter is
removed, and when sowing the spores is
performed under aseptic conditions, con-
tamination is held to a minimum. Con-
sidering the fact that germination studies
may be completed within ten days after
sowing, contamination should not be a
problem of too much concern.
For longer-termed studies a disinfestant
may be used. Steeves et al. (1955) used a
5 percent solution by weight of Pittchlor
(manufactured by the Columbia-Southern
Chemical Co., Pittsburgh, Pa.). This is a
modification of methods described by Hires
(1940) and Hurel-Py (1950). No quantita-
tive data are available concerning disin-
festation of spores, and the writer feels that
this should be done only with caution.
It is common for some germination to
occur over a relative long period. To facili-
tate subsequent growth studies and to
obtain a uniform beginning-point of de-
velopment, the spores may be sown on
May 1958
sterile water. Uniformly developing pro-
thalli, for example, at the 15- to 25-celled
stage, may then be isolated and placed on
the medium being investigated. Hurel-Py
(1950) has used a similar technique.
Thus, although the technique of sus-
pension of spores presented in this paper is
perhaps not applicable to commercial fern
producers, it may be helpful in quantita-
tive studies of cellular physiology and mor-
phology in the laboratory.
REFERENCES
Hires, C.S8. Growing ferns from spores on sterile
nutrient media. Journ. New York Bot. Gard.
41: 267-269. 1940.
SURFACE ATTACK BY BUFFER SOLUTIONS
159
Hurew-Py, G. Recherches préliminaires sur la
culture aseptique des prothalles de Filicineés.
Rev. Gén. Bot. 57: 637-735. 1950.
Kuernscumipt, W. F. A method of preparing
spores for fern culture. Amer. Fern Journ.
47: 95-98. 1957.
Monur, H. Die Beeinflussung der Keimung von
Farnsporen durch Licht und andere Faktoren.
Planta 46: 534-551. 1956.
PERRIN, G. Recherches sur les prothalles de
Polypodiacées. Thése. Université de Paris.
1908.
Reuter, L. A contribution to the cell-physiologic
analysis of growth and morphogenesis in fern
prothallia. Protoplasma 42: 1-29. 1953.
STEEVES, T. A., Sussex, I. M., and PARTANEN,
C.R. In vitro studies on abnormal growth of
prothalli of the bracken fern. Amer. Journ.
Bot. 42: 232-245. 1955.
—_——_—_—_—_—SSE EE ____..
SURFACE ATTACK BY BUFFER SOLUTIONS
Glass, like metal, undergoes a corrosion process
when partially immersed in certain solutions.
Both glass and metal may also be attacked much
more severely at the liquid-air interface than in
the bulk volume when immersed in the liquid.
Experiments performed at the National Bureau
of Standards by R. G. Pike and D. Hubbard
have demonstrated that the attack on glass at
the surface of a solution at pH 7.0 is equal to
the bulk-volume attack in a solution at pH 9.41
This finding is of value in understanding the
mechanical weakening of glassy materials at the
boundary of an aqueous solution.
An interferometer was used to measure the
attack on a glass composed of soda, lime, and
silica at the eutectic composition. Specimens
were ground and polished to optical flatness and
then partially immersed in the attacking solution
for a definite period of time at controlled condi-
tions of temperature and pH. After the desired
length of exposure they were withdrawn, rinsed
and dried, and covered with an optically flat
piece of quartz. Using a conventional interfero-
metric viewing apparatus, the displacement of
the optical fringes at the liquid-line and in the
solution interior was observed. If the specimens
were not attacked, the fringes were straight and
continuous. However, if the immersed part of
‘The increased chemical reactivity of the surface
compared with that in the bulk volume of Britton-
Robinson universal buffers, by Ropert G. PIKE
and Donaup Husparp, Journ. Res. NBC 59: 411.
December 1957. RP 2811.
the specimen surface had been attacked, each of
the vertical fringes was shifted laterally. If the
solution had caused swelling of the specimen, the
lateral shift was in the opposite direction.
This method also demonstrated the swelling of
the glass in the bulk volume of solutions at pH 4
and the etching of the specimen at the surface of
the same liquid. The attack in the bulk volume
TABLE 1.—DIFFERENCE IN pH VALUES PRopUCING
EQuaL ATTACK AT THE SURFACE AND IN THE
BULK-VOLUME OF BUFFER SOLUTIONS
B ee alka- Hae ces Sa Difference
pH volume alkalinity pH
auc!
i 9.4 | 2.4
8 9.6 1.6
9 10.4 1.4
10 10.9 0.9
1k 11.2 0.2
11.8 11.8 0.0
and the attack at the liquid surface were then
plotted over a pH range. These curves revealed.
for example, that the attack at a solution surface
at pH 7 is equal to the attack in the bulk volume
of a solution at pH 9.4 (Table 1). This surface
attack decreases rapidly at higher pH values,
becoming non-detectable at pH 11.8. Unfortu-
nately, because of the chemical durability char-
acteristics of the glass, no differentiation could
be made between the attack at the surface and
in the interior of solutions more acid than pH 7.
160
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 5
ZOOLOGY .—Two new crayfishes of the genus Procambarus from South Carolina.
Horron H. Hopss, Jr., Department of Biology, University of Virginia. (Com-
municated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.)
(Received January 31, 1958)
The two crayfishes described herein are
members of the Pictus Group, the range of
which appears to be restricted to the south-
eastern part of the United States. Included
in this group are: P. lepidodactylus Hobbs
(1947b: 25), P. pubescens (Faxon, 1884:
109), P. enoplosternum Hobbs (1947a: 5),
P. litosternum Hobbs (1947a: 9), P. pictus
(Hobbs, 1940a: 419), P. youngt Hobbs
(1942: 131), P. angustatus (LeConte, 1856:
401), P. lunzt (Hobbs, 1940b: 1), P. semz-
nolae Hobbs (1942: 142), P. lucifugus
lucifugus (Hobbs, 1940a: 398), P. lucifugus
alachua (Hobbs, 1940a: 402), P. pallidus
(Hobbs, 940a: 394), and the two species
described below.
A discussion of the interrelationships
among these crayfishes has been submitted
for publication under the title, “The Evolu-
tionary History of the Pictus Group of the
Crayfish Genus Procambarus” (Hobbs, in
press).
Procambarus hirsutus,' n. sp.
Procambarus sp. B. Hobbs (in press).
Diagnosis —Rostrum with marginal spines;
upper surface pubescent and hirsute at base of
acumen; acumen of moderate length and slender;
areola 2.5 to 3.5 times longer than broad, with
8 to 10 punctations in narrowest part, and con-
stituting from 25.5 to 30.0 percent of total length
of carapace; postorbital ridges terminating
cephalically in sharp spines; a single acute lateral
spine on each side of carapace; inner margin of
palm of chela of first form male with a poorly
defined row of eight to ten small tubercles; male
with hooks on ischiopodites of third and fourth
pereiopods. First pleopods of first form male
asymmetrically situated, reaching coxopodite of
third pereiopod, with a rounded hump on cephalic
surface, and terminating in four distinct parts:
mesial process subspiculiform and directed caudo-
distad and somewhat laterad; cephalic process
similar to mesial process, however, directed more
1 Hirsutus, Latin = shaggy; so named because
of the dense pubescence on the rostrum.
nearly distad; caudal element consists of a promi-
nent rounded protuberance on distal caudolateral
portion of appendage—caudal process and
adventitious process lacking; central projection
corneous, beaklike, and directed caudodistad.
Annulus ventralis broader than long with a
submedian depression and with an S-shaped sinus
that is inclined dextrally. Sternum cephalad of
annulus ventralis without prominences.
Holotypic male, form I.—Body subovate, com-
pressed laterally, abdomen narrower than thorax
(13.7 and 14.5 mm in widest parts respectively).
Width of carapace less than depth in region of
caudodorsal margin of cervical. groove (14.5
and 15.5 mm).
Areola broad (about 2.6 times longer than
broad) with 9 or 10 punctations across narrowest
part; cephalic section of carapace about 25.7
percent of entire length of carapace.
Margins of rostrum not swollen, subparallel
at base but strongly convergent from cephalo-
lateral margin of carapace to about midlength of
rostrum where they become subparallel and
continue to tips of acute marginal spines. Acumen
subspiculiform and extends cephalad to distal
end of peduncle of antennule; upper surface of
rostrum with a concavity near base and sub-
plane cephalically; entire dorsal surface with
setiferous punctations; setae at base of acumen
longer and prominent. The usual submarginal
row of setiferous punctations present. Sub-
rostral ridges weak but clearly defined, although
not evident in dorsal aspect.
Postorbital ridges prominent, weakly grooved,
and terminate cephalically in acute spines; sub-
orbital angle small and forming almost a 90°
angle; branchiostegal spine strong and acute. A
prominent acute spine present on each side of
carapace. Surface of carapace punctate dorsally
and strongly granulate laterally.
Abdomen longer than carapace (36.5 and
31.9 mm).
Cephalic section of telson with four spines
in each caudolateral corner.
Epistome (Fig. 8) broadly triangular and
hirsute.
May 1958 HOBBS: TWO NEW CRAYFISHES OF THE GENUS PROCAMBARUS 161
Fies. 1-12.—Procambarus hirsutus, un. sp. (pubescence removed from all structures illustrated except
in Fig. 9): 1, Mesial view of first pleopod of holotype; 2, mesial view of first pleopod of morphotype;
3, dorsal view of carapace of holotype; 4, lateral view of first pleopod of morphotype; 5, lateral view of
first pleopod of holotype; 6, antennal scale of holotype; 7, annulus ventralis of allotype; 8, epistome of
holotype; 9, distal podomeres of cheliped of holotype; 10, basipodite and ischiopodite of third pereiopod
of holotype; 11, basipodite and ischiopodite of fourth pereiopod of holotype; 12, lateral view of carapace
of holotype.
162
Antennules of the usual form with a strong
acute spine on lower surface of basal segment.
Antennae extend caudad to third abdominal
segment. Antennal scale (Fig. 6) of moderate
width and with a strong spine at extremity of
outer distal margin; lamellar portion with no
distinct angles.
Right chela elongate, moderately slender, and
except for fingers entirely tuberculate. Inner
margin of palm with poorly defined rows of
tubercles (in silhouette, 10 tubercles may be
seen extending above the surface). Lower surface
of palm with one tubercle somewhat larger than
the others at base of dactyl. Fingers not gaping,
both with poorly defined submedian ridges above
and below. Upper opposable margin of immovable
finger with a row ot three small tubercles on
proximal third and a larger one below this row
near end of middle third. Lateral margin of im-
movable finger with a row of setiferous puncta-
tions, and upper and lower surfaces with similar
punctations. Upper opposable margin of dactyl
with a row of five small tubercles on proximal
two-fifths and two larger tubercles below this row
near distal portion of proximal third. Opposable
margins of both fingers with crowded minute
denticles along entire length. Mesial, upper, and
lower proximal portion of dactyl with squamous
tubercles; elsewhere with setiferous punctations.
Carpus of first right pereiopod about 1.5 times
longer than broad with a broad shallow oblique
furrow above; lateral half of podomere with
scattered punctations, mesial half tuberculate.
Mesial surface with two acute tubercles: one on
upper distal margin and a larger one lying at a
lower level near midlength. Lower surface with
two spinous tubercles on distal margin: one
opposite the articular socket on propus and the
other mesial to it.
Merus of first right pereiopod with tubercles
on upper surface, two of the more distal ones of
which are acute and prominent. Lateral surface
with scattered punctations; mesial surface with a
few squamous tubercles distally. Lower surface
with a mesial row of 13 prominent tubercles and
a lateral one of 8. Small tubercles irregularly
strewn between and to the sides of these two rows.
Lower margin of ischiopodite with a row of four
prominent tubercles.
Ischiopodites of third and fourth pereiopods
bearing hooks (Figs. 10 and 11); hooks simple.
Those on third subacute, and those on fourth
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
* vou. 48; NO. 5
more truncate, recurved, and opposed by a promi-
nent knob on basipodite.
Coxopodites of fourth and fifth pereiopods with
the usual ventrally projecting prominences—
those on fourth heavy and rounded; those on fifth
compressed.
First pleopod (Figs. 1 and 5) reaching
coxopodite of third pereiopod when abdomen
is flexed. See diagnosis for description.
Allotypic female —Differs from the holotype in
the following respects: Rostrum extends cephalad
beyond peduncle of antennule; antennae extend
caudad to fourth abdominal segment, cephalic
section of telson with only three spines in the
caudodextral corner. There is an apparent second-
ary sexual difference in the chelae in that there is
but a single row of minute denticles along the
opposable margins of the fingers with a single row
of five small tubercles along proximal third of
dactyl and only two tubercles on immovable
finger. (The holotype, morphotype, and a second
form male of approximately the same size as the
female have several rows of minute denticies
instead of a single one.) Annulus ventralis (Fig. 7)
subovate with the greatest length in the trans-
verse axis. A slight elevation sets off an oblique
suboval depression through which the S-shaped
sinus courses. This elevation, more clearly visible
in some specimens than in the allotype, is con-
tinuous with a longitudinal furrow cephalically.
Sternum cephalic to annulus ventralis broadly
excavate with no caudally projecting promi-
nences. (See measurements.)
Morphotypic male, form II —Differs from the
holotype in only a few details. Rostrum with
margins less convergent; antennae extend caudad
nn
Holotype | Allotype |Morphotype
pares wah Seero nS eet et Ret AS Ee bd SEE
Carapace:
leichtanee sear eee ae 15.5 13.9
Widthe os earner 14.5 5 13.3
wencihreeeenetenee cee 21.9 26.4 29.3
Areola:
Wadtiicas teense Boil 3.1 3.4
WSVAIN oo sascqoo0sseone 8.3 Hav 8.2
Rostrum:
Width saree ee 5.4 4.2 4.9
jiengihe ep so ea eer 10.4 8.7 10.0
Right chela:
Length of inner margin |
OV fOMIlTN seocessoassee | 10.5 4.3 6.7
Width of palm......... len 38 4.7
Length of outer margin
Olsband eee eee eee | 20s02 ah le 17.0
Length of dactyl....... 12.32 6.2 8.9
2 Approximate, tips of fingers broken.
May 1958
to telson; cephalic section of telson with only
three spines in each caudolateral corner; fewer
tubercles in each group enumerated above; hooks
on third and fourth pereiopods reduced. First
pleopod (Figs. 2 and 4) with all terminal elements
described for holotype although none is corneous,
and each is reduced in size and is more obtuse.
Measurements (in millimeters).—As given in
table at foot of opposite page.
Color notes—Body dark brown with bright
orange mottlings over entire carapace and terga
of abdomen. A poorly defined dark saddle-like
marking present in the form of a transverse bar
across the caudal margin of the carapace and a
pair of forward-projecting lateral horns on the
lateral surfaces of the branchiostegites. This
pattern is frequently modified so that the lateral
horns are represented by two lateral pairs of dark
spots representing the anterior and posterior
portions of the horns. Upper surface of chelae
brownish orange with black tubercles, while the
tubercles on lower surface are light. Legs dark
gray above and below; fingers of chelate appen-
dages greenish blue as are distal podomeres of
fourth and fifth pereiopods.
Type locality —Salkehatchie River, 1.9 miles
south of Barnwell, Barnwell County, 8. C., on
State Highway 3. Here the river varies greatly
in width, quite narrow in deep areas and more
than 50 feet wide in the shallow reaches. The
dark brown water flows over a sand and mud
bottom and at the bridge are many rocks.
Vallesneria, Saururus cernuus, and Pontederia
are abundant. My specimens of P. hirsutus were
collected at night on the open mud bottom and
among the eelgrass. Associated with this species
here were P. troglodytes (LeConte) and P.
echinatus Hobbs.
Disposition of types.—The holotypic male, the
allotypic female, and the morphotypic male are
deposited in the U. 8. National Museum, nos.
101148, 101150, and 101149, respectively. Of the
paratypes, one male, form I, one male, form II,
and one female are in the Tulane University Col-
lection; two males, form I, two males, form II,
and one female are in the collection of the Charles-
ton Museum; 10 males, form I, nine males, form
II, 26 females, 17 juvenile males, and 13 juvenile
females are in my personal collection at the
University of Virginia.
Relationships.—Procambarus hirsutus has its
closest affinities with P. pubescens (Faxon) but
may be readily distinguished from it by the in-
HOBBS: TWO NEW CRAYFISHES OF THE GENUS PROCAMBARUS 163
flated caudal knob, the absence of the caudal
process, and the differences in form of the central
projection of the first pleopod of the first form
male. The orange mottlings on the carapace of
hirsutus have also been observed in P. pubescens.
Specimens examined.—As follows:
South Carolina: Aiken County—Bridge Creek,
10.6 miles north of Aiken on U. S. Highway
1 4701, 80AII, 49 2, 8 juv.c oH, 8 juv. 2 2),
April 19, 1955, EK. A. Crawford, T. R. Bello,
eyael Jets Isls Isl, Colllas Wows (UO > Hani 1
juv.@), September 13, 1955, H. H. H., coll.; Cedar
Creek, 10.6 miles southwest of Wagener on
State Highway 215 (c'II, 89 2, 5juv.2 2,32 9
with eggs), April 19, 1955, E.A.C., T.R.B., and
H.H.H., coll. Allendale County—Tributary of
Salkehatchie River, 3.4 miles south of Ulmers
(2A) June 7, 1949, R.D. Suttkus, coll.; 7.2
miles east of Allendale on State Highway 641,
Miller Swamp Creek (cI, 2 juv.2 2,1 juv.@),
August 15, 1947, H.H.H., coll.; stream 8.5 miles
north of Allendale on State Highway 28 (1<’I,
Io'II, ljuv.o, ljuv.?), August 15, 1947, H.H.H.,
coll.; between Appleton and Martin (2¢' II,
12), G. R. Lunz, Jr., coll. Bamberg County—
Georges Creek, 9 miles south east of Barnwell on
State Highway 64 27, 3 juv.c'o’, 2 juv.2 2),
September 3, 1949, W. R. West and H.H.H., coll.;
creek, 3.8 miles southeast of Olar on State High-
way 64 (1 juv.o”), September 3, 1949, W.R.W. and
H.H.H., coll.; Little Salkehatchie River, 4.3
miles east northeast of Ehrhardt on State Second-
any labielayayy PAL Chel, aeeetllls 74S Qo 1 nike.
1 juv.@), June 25, 1956, Anderson, Dunbar, and
Smoak, coll.; South Fork of Edisto River, 4.75
miles north of Denmark on U. S. Highway 321
(19), August 17, 1955, H. W. Freeman, coll.;
Lemon Creek, 8.8 miles south southeast of Bam-
berg on State Secondary Highway 84 (c'c'1I),
June 26, 1956, A., D., and S., coll. Barnwell County
—Type locality 2%d0I, 1# II, 22 2), September
3, 1949, W.R.W. and H.H.H., coll.; ibid. 77,
Coto 212 e% ¢ juv.cict. © juve? 2. I? with
eggs), April 19, 1955, E.A.C., T.R.B., and H.H.H..,
coll.; 3.5 miles east of Barnwell on State Highway
70, Bryan’s Chapel Creek (82 2, 3 juv.c'c’, 3
juv.2 2), August 16, 1947, H.H.H., coll.; near
Robbins (12), August 24, 1983, G.R.L., coll.;
Hattie Creek, 2 miles northeast of Hattieville
(12), March 30, 1953, H.W.F., coll.; Creek at
west city limits of Barnwell (ld II, 2° 2), April
19, 1955. EC Ac: STREB. and H-HVH., coll.
Calhoun County—Spring Creek on U. 8. Highway
176 (cI), August 11, 1955, H.W.F., coll. Colleton
County—15 miles northwest of Walterboro on State
Highway 64 (271), July 11, 1934, E. B. Cham-
Lexington County—north fork of
berlain, coll.
164
Edisto River, 6.2 miles northeast of Wagener on
Soe lane, 20s Giellll, BOO, i juny 2
juv.2 9), September 4, 1949, WG Niio5 Jelelsl Jal...
coll.; ibid. 271, 19,1 juv.?), April 19, 1955,
E.A.C., T.R.B., and H.H.H., coll.; headwaters of
Red Bank Creek, 3.2 miles southwest of Red Bank
Gototl Ds July 23) 1953) es Wene coll.; Black
Creek, 4.5 miles west southwest of Pelion on Wate
Highway 178 (idl, 22 2), July 5, 1956, HW
coll. Orangeburg County—north fork of Edisto
River on U. S. Highway 321 (0c'o@' II, 59 9, 14
juv.d'’, 12 juv.? ©), August 15, 1955, VV eee
coll.; Goodby’s Creek on U. 8. Highway 176, 2
miles south of junction with U. 8. Highway 301
(eal, Gorglll, SOC, AB juycict, A jue? 2),
January 31, 1955, H.W.F., coll.
The range of this species appears to be con-
fined to the drainage systems of the Edisto,
Salkehatchie, and Savannah Rivers in South
Carolina.
Remarks.—Procambarus hirsutus appears to be
abundant in the Salkehatchie drainage system
and is the only member of the Pictus Subgroup
represented in it. In the Edisto its range 1s ap-
parently overlapped by that of an undescribed
species of the subgroup, and it shares the
Savannah drainage system with P. pubescens.
Much collecting is needed in the coastal plain
tributaries of the Savannah River to determine
how widespread these two species are, and to what
extent, if any, their ranges overlap.
While there are a number of minor variations
in the specimens at hand, chiefly in the shape of
the rostrum, none of them is associated with a
restricted portion of the range.
As may be noted above, first form males have
been collected in January, April, June, July,
August, and September. Females with eggs have
been found in April.
Procambarus ancylus,’ n. sp.
Cambarus penicillatus Hagen (not LeConte), 1870:
54 (in part), figs. 95, 96; Faxon, 1884: 1388 (Gn
part); 1885: 36-38 (in part).
Hagen (1870: 54) identified two second form
males and two females (M.C.Z. no. 250) as C.
penicillatus. Faxon (1884: 138) stated that while
these specimens may be members of that species
“they differ in so many respects, that I suspect
they belong to another species.”’ In 1885 (p. 37)
Faxon pointed out wherein these specimens
3 Ancylus, Greek = curved; so named because
of the strongly and similarly curved terminal
elements of the pleopod of the male.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 9
differed from the male of C. penicillatus (= P.
barbatus) that he had from Georgia. Faxon
(1890: 621) reiterated the same opinion ex-
pressed in 1884 concerning these four specimens.
I have examined these four crayfishes and con-
cur with Faxon’s opinion that they belong to
“another species,’ and with the additional speci-
mens cited below am convinced that they
represent one which has not previously been
named.
Diagnosis—Rostrum with marginal spies or
with uninterrupted margins; acumen variable—
short and triangular or subspiculiform; areola
4.8 to 9.0 times longer than broad with two to
four punctations in narrowest part; length of
areola 32.0 to 35.0 percent of entire length of
carapace; inner margin of palm of chela bearing
irregularly strewn squamous tubercles; post-
orbital ridges terminating bluntly or in acute
spines; one spine (occasionally two), subacute or
tuberculiform, present or absent on each side of
carapace. First pleopods of first form male
asymmetrically situated, reaching coxopodites
of third pereiopods, with a slight hump, some-
times turned mesiad on cephalic surface, and each
terminating in four parts: mesial process non-
corneous, subspiculiform, and directed caudo-
laterad with its tip lying lateral to the lateral
surface of the main shaft of the appendage;
cephalic process noncorneous, long, slender, and
directed caudodistad; caudal element represented
by the inflated caudal knob; central projection
corneous, slender,
Annulus ventralis with a marked median longi-
tudinal depression (in ventral aspect) in the
caudal half of which courses a reversed C-shaped
sinus. Sternum immediately cephalic to annulus
ventralis with or without a pair of caudally pro-
jecting prominences.
Holotypic male, form I.—Body subcylindrical.
Abdomen narrower than thorax (11.1 and 13.0
mm in widest parts, respectively). Width and
height of carapace subequal in region of caudo-
dorsal margin of cervical groove (13.0 and
12.7 mm).
Areola moderately narrow (8.9 times longer
than broad) with one or two punctations across
narrowest part; cephalic section of carapace
1.9 times as long as areola (length of areola about
34 percent of entire length of carapace).
Rostrum with margins gently converging to
base of acumen where there is only the slightest
interruption setting the short acumen off from
and directed caudodistad-
May 1958 HOBBS: TWO NEW CRAYFISHES OF THE GENUS PROCAMBARUS 165
Figs. 13-24.—Procambarus ancylus, n. sp. (pubescence removed from all structures illustrated except
in Fig. 24): 13, Epistome of holotype; 14, mesial view of first pleopod of holotype; 15, mesial view of
first pleopod of morphotype; 16, dorsal view of carapace of holotype; 17, lateral view of first pleopod of
morphotype; 18, lateral view of first pleopod of holotype; 19, lateral view of carapace of holotype; 20,
annulus ventralis of allotype; 21, basipodite and ischiopodite of third pereiopod of holotype; 22, basipo-
dite and ischiopodite of fourth pereiopod of holotype; 23, antennal seale of holotype; 24, distal podomeres
of cheliped of holotype.
166
remainder of rostrum; acumen reaching base of
ultimate segment of peduncle of antennule;
margins of rostrum only slightly elevated, not
swollen; upper surface slightly concave; a single
submarginal row of setiferous punctations ex-
tends from base of rostrum to tip of acumen on
each side.
Postorbital ridges moderately well developed,
only slightly grooved, and terminating cephali-
cally bluntly; suborbital angle almost obsolete;
branchiostegal spines small, and not sharply
pointed; subrostral ridges moderately well de-
veloped but not evident in dorsal aspect. Lateral
surface of carapace with only one tubercle on
left side slightly larger than others, none on right.
Surface of carapace punctate dorsad and weakly
eranulate laterad.
Abdomen longer than carapace (31.0 and
26.0 mm).
Cephalic section of telson with three spines in
the left and four in the right caudolateral corners.
Epistome (Fig. 13) broadly subtriangular and
slightly emarginate, and with a small cephalo-
median projection.
Antennules of the usual form with a moderate
spine on basal segment of peduncle.
Antennae broken but in another specimen from
the type locality extends caudad to the third
abdominal segment. Antennal scale (Fig. 23)
moderately broad and with a small spine at
extremity of outer distal margin. Lamellar por-
tion with no distinct angles.
Right chela elongate, palm only slightly in-
flated and entirely tuberculate. Inner surface of
palm with several irregular rows of tubercles,
and when viewed in silhouette with 10 or 11
visible. Lower surface of palm with one moder-
ately conspicuous tubercle at base of dactyl.
Fingers not gaping. Upper and lower surfaces of
both fingers with low submedian ridges flanked
on each side by setiferous punctations. Opposable
surface of immovable finger with a row of three
rounded tubercles on basal half of finger and a
single large tubercle below this row at base of
distal third. Crowded minute denticles occur
along entire opposable surfaces of both fingers.
Lateral surface of immovable finger with a row of
setiferous punctations. Upper opposable surface
of dactyl with a row of five tubercles on basal
half. Mesial margin of dactyl with a row of six
tubercles on basal half distad of which is a row
of setiferous punctations.
Carpus of first right pereiopod about 1.4 times
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 9
longer than broad with a shallow oblique furrow
above. Mesial half of podomere tuberculate and
lateral half with scattered punctations. Only
four tubercles on podomere conspicuous and these
correspond in their positions to the spies de-
scribed for P. hirsutus.
Merus of first right pereiopod with tubercles
along upper surface, two of the more distal ones
of which larger than others. Lower surface with a
lateral row of 11 tubercles and a mesial one of 14;
small tubercles scattered between and to the sides
of these two rows. Ischiopodite with a row of six
tubercles on lower margin.
Ischiopodites of third and fourth pereiopods
(Figs. 21 and 22) with hooks; hooks simple, that
on fourth slightly heavier than that on third;
basipodite of fourth not swollen to oppose corre-
sponding hook on ischiopodite as in P. harsutus.
Coxopodites of fourth and fifth pereiopods as in
hirsutus.
First pleopods (Figs. 14 and 18) asymmetrically
situated (the left more caudal in position) and
reaching coxopodites of third pereiopods when
abdomen is flexed. For description see diagnosis.
Allotypic female —Differs from the holotype im
only a few minor details: Epistome narrower but
subtriangular; areola 4.8 times longer than wide
with three punctations in narrowest part; cephalic
section of telson with four spines in each caudo-
lateral corner; chela broader and shorter than in
holotype and dactyl with but a single row of five
tubercles on basal half; both fingers with a single
row of minute denticles. Annulus ventralis (Fig.
20) subovate with the greatest length in the
transverse axis; a broad, median, evenly con-
toured excavation traverses its length; a reversed
C-shaped sinus is situated in the caudal half of
the declivity. (See measurements.)
Morphotypic male, form II.—Difters from the
holotype only slightly: Epistome narrower as in
allotype; areola 5.8 times as long as wide; cephalic
section of telson with three spines in each caudo-
lateral corner; opposable margin of immovable
finger of right chela with two tubercles instead of
three in basal half; corresponding surface of
dactyl with a single curved row of five tubercles.
Secondary sexual characteristics with usual
reductions. First pleopod (Figs. 15 and 17) with
all elements of the holotype clearly represented
but cephalic process and central projection
shorter and heavier, and the mesial process,
while more massive, noncorneous. (See meas-
urements. )
May 1958
Measurements (n millimeters).—As follows:
Holotype | Allotype |Morphotype
Carapace:
Eth: 4 ee 12.7 11.0 12.0
Vis |) oo ee ee 13.0 11.0 12.0
[L@NGNIS Se eee eee 26.0 22.3 24.7
Areola:
Wit Gieemenre 2. be, 1.0 1.6 1.5
IEG oes cea eee eee 8.9 7160 8.7
Rostrum:
Witchbhtemersere Ge day ss 4.1 3.6 3.8
Wen ouhann et rcs tees 6.2 3
Wight chela:
Length of inner margin
Olepalamiye 8 ss. 8.5 4.6 7.5
Width of palm......... 7.0 4.3 6.0
Length of outer margin
Omnandemes sss: PH) 12.1 19.0
Length of dactyl....... 11.4 9.3
Color notes.—While the colors of the specimens
from the type locality are not known the following
applies to a first form male collected in Colleton
County, 8. C. Carapace dark brown dorsally
with a median light brown stripe (about the width
of the areola) running its full length. In the
cephalic region the light stripe is subtended by a
pair of dark stripes that extend caudally to the
level of attachment of the mandibular muscles
where there is a pair of distinct black spots.
Lateral portions of branchiostegites with a pair
of black stripes (corresponding to the horns of
the saddle described for hirsutus) below which the
color is lighter brown with cream splotches con-
centrated immediately below the black stripes.
Abdomen straw brown above and with the lower
portion of each pleoron bearing a light spot. Each
epimeron also with a light spot. Uropods and
telson concolorous with the abdomen but with
dark brown spots. Chelae dark brown above adn
with an olive-green cast below.
Type locality—Summerville, | Dorchester
County, 8S. C. No description of the habitat from
which the crayfish were taken is available.
Disposition of types.—The holotype, allotype,
and morphotype are in the collection of the
Charleston Museum (no. 33: 132). Two paratypic
males, form I, one female, and three juvenile
females are also in the same collection. One
male, form II, and one female are in the collection
of the U. 8. National Museum. One male, form
I, three males, form IJ, 13 juvenile males, and 47
juvenile females are in my personal collection at
the University of Virginia.
Relationships.—Procambarus ancylus, a mem-
HOBBS: TWO NEW CRAYFISHES
OF THE GENUS PROCAMBARUS 167
ber of the Seminolae Subgroup, has its closest
affinities with P. lunzi from which it may be dis-
tinguished readily by the more spiculiform
terminal elements of the first pleopod of the
male, and by the excavated annulus ventralis of
the female. More distantly it is related to P.
seminolae. All three members of the Seminolae
Subgroup frequent lentic habitats (ancylus and
seminolae are also found in lotic situations), and
in this respect differ from the typically lotic
members of the Pictus Subgroup.
Specimens examined.—As follows:
North Carolina: Bladen County—White Lake
(2A AII, 2juv.?), July 25, 1947, D. G. Frey, coll.;
ibid. (2 juv.c'", 4 juv.2 2) September 9, 1947,
D.G.F., coll.; Singletary Lake (19) March 2,
I ID KGrlt., Goll woud, Cert, WO), Nore) ia
1955, J. R. Bailey, coll. Brunswick County—
Wet Ash Swamp, 8 miles northwest of Shallotte on
Route 130) Goll, 19), Mareh 29, 1949° H. C.
Raney, coll. Columbus County—White Marsh,
1.9 miles east of Whiteville on U S. Highway 76
(lei, 42crcll 22, 8 juncte, 1 june G2),
September 1, 1949, W.R.W., H.H.H., coll. South
Carolina: Berkeley County—roadside ditch, 30.8
miles northwest of Charleston on Route 31 (29 2)
April 20, 1955, T.R.B., H.H.H., coll.; Richmond
Plantation, 40 miles up Cooper River from
Charleston (22 9, 3 juv.2 2), March 22, 1939,
T. K. Ellis, coll. Charleston Couwnty—U.S.N.M. no.
44438, no locality (1c II), April 22, 1911, Mearns,
Riley, and Brown, coll.; M.C.Z. no. 250, ‘‘Charles-
ton” 2 AII, 22 9); 21.1 miles west of Charles-
ton on U.S. Highway 17 (11 juv.c', 36 juv. 2 2),
September 3, 1949, W.R.W., H.H.H.., coll. Colleton
County—pond, 7.1 miles northwest of Walterboro
on State Highway 64 (oI, 2c Il, 3 juv.2 2),
September 3, 1949, W.R.W., H.H.H., coll.; pond,
8.3 miles northwest of Walterboro, State High-
way 64 (1 juv.c’, 3 juv.? 2), August 15, 1947,
H.H.H., coll.; roadside ditch, 7.6 miles north-
west of Walterboro on State Highway 64 (1 juv.¢,
5 juv.@ @), August 15, 1947, H.H.H., coll. Dor-
chester County—Summerville (type locality),
(Boe'oI, If Il, 12), May 28, 1982, G.R.L., coll.:
drainage ditch in Summerville (II), August
16, 1947, H.H.H., coll. Kershaw County—Town
Creek, 3 miles southeast of Camden on U. 8.
Highway 521 2@¢@I, 3¢7c@II, 42 9, ljuv.d, 1
juv.@), April 6, 1955, H.W.F., coll. Lee County—
2.5 miles north of Bishopville on U.S. Highway
15 (Aol, 19, 5 juv.2 2), December 22, 1956,
H.H.H., coll. Lexington County—north fork of
Edisto River, 6.2 miles northeast of Wagener on
State Highway 215 (1 juv.o’, 2 juv.@ 2), Septem-
ber 4, 1949, W.R.W., H.H.H., ecoll.; Black Creek,
168
4.5 miles west southwest of Pelion on U. 8. High-
way 178 (20° WI, 29 2), July 5, 1956, H.W.F., coll.
Richland County—approximately 100 specimens
from the eastern part of the county.
Remarks.—The variations within the specimens
of this species are about as numerous as are to be
found in any other species of the genus. The
majority of these differences appear to be corre-
lated with the habitat from which the specimens
were taken, and there are no variations that
have been demonstrated to be clinal or restricted
to a certain portion of the range. Specimens col-
lected from burrows or from temporary bodies of
water have, in general, a blunt acumen, lack
spines on the rostrum, the postorbital ridges,
and the sides of the carapace; and most of the
spines on other regions of the body are either
absent or are reduced to tubercles. In contrast,
those specimens collected from permanent bodies
of water, whether streams or lentic habitats
have acute spines in all the positions mentioned
above, and frequently have a spinelike acumen.
Of interest is the fact that all small juvenile
animals, regardless of the habitat from which
they were collected, are similar to adults living
in permanent bodies of water. The first pleopod of
the male is remarkably uniform throughout the
range, and except for the width of the longi-
tudinal excavation of the annulus ventralis it
exhibits little variation. The sternum immedi-
ately cephalic to the annulus ventralis frequently
bears paired caudally projecting prominences.
First form males have been collected in March,
April, May, and September, and females with
eggs in March and April.
Acknowledgments.—I wish to express my ap-
preciation to all those persons who have con-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 5
tributed the many specimens on which this paper
is based; their names are cited under the lists of
specimens examined. I also wish to thank Miss
Margaret Walton, who did the splendid job of
inking the figures utilized.
LITERATURE CITED
Faxon, WALTER. Description of new species of
Cambarus; to which is added a synonymical
list of the known species of Cambarus and
Astacus. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci.
20: 107-158. 1884.
. A revision of the Astacidae. Mem. Mus.
Comp. Zool. 10 (4): 1-179, 10 pls. 1885.
Notes on North American crayfishes,
Family Astacidae. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 12
(785) : 619-634. 1890.
Hacen, Herman A. Monograph of the North
American Astacidae. Ill. Cat. Mus. Comp.
Zool. (3): 1-109, 11 pls. 1870.
Hosss, Horton H., Jr. Seven new crayfishes of
the genus Cambarus from Florida, with notes on
other species. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 89 (8097):
387-423, figs. 14-22. 1940a.
A new crayfish from South Carolina.
Charleston Mus. Leaflet 14: 1-7, 10 figs. 1940b:
The crayfishes of Florida. Univ. Florida
Publ., Biol. Sci. Ser. 3 (2): 1-179, 3 text figs.,
11 maps, 24 pls. 1942.
Two new crayfishes of the genus Pro-
cambarus from Georgia, with notes on Pro-
cambarus pubescens (Faxon). Quart. Journ.
Florida Acad. Sci. 9 (1): 1-18, 32 figs. 1947a.
A key to the crayfishes of the Pictus Sub-
group of the genus Procambarus with the
description of a new species from South Caro-
lina. Fla. Entomologist 30 (8): 25-31, 12 figs.
1947b.
The evolutionary history of the Pictus
Group of the crayfish genus Procambarus.
(In press.)
LeContE, Joun. Descriptions of new species of
Astacus from Georgia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philadelphia 7: 400-402. 1856.
Hypotheses, and deductions from these, controlled by sense-observations and
analogies with what we know elsewhere, are to be thanked for all of scvence’s
results —WILLIAM JAMES.
May 1958
MOORE: OCCURRENCE OF STREPTOCEPHALUS SIMILIS
169
ZOOLOGY .—On the occurrence of Streptocephalus similis Baird in Mexico and the
United States. WautrerR G. Moors, Loyola University, New Orleans, La.
(Communicated by Fenner A. Chace. Jr.)
(Received January 2, 1958)
Streptocephalus similis is a little-known
fairy shrimp which has apparently been
taken only twice since its description by
Baird in 1852. The type lot was collected
by M. Sallé on the island of St. Domingo
in the West Indies; Baird’s description was
based upon specimens in the British Mu-
seum. Although incomplete in some re-
spects the description was accompanied by
good figures including details of the II
antenna of the male.
Packard’s (1883) monograph on North
American phyllopods quoted the original
description verbatim and was unaccom-
panied by figures. Daday (1910) studied a
paratypic series in the collections of the
Musée d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris, and
presented a detailed description of the
animal in his monographic revision of the
Anostraca. Daday’s treatment was accom-
panied by an excellent series of original
figures including illustrations of anatomical
details which had not been recorded by Baird.
A second lot of S. similis, collected by H.
E. Crampton in Isabella, Puerto Rico, in
1915, is in the collections of the American
Museum of Natural History (no. 2914).
The material was identified by E. P.
Creaser and served as the basis for the
latter’s treatment of the species in his well-
known study (1930) on North American
streptocephalids.
An unpublished record, consisting of a
single damaged male specimen, is in the
collections of the United States National
Museum (no. 81601). The specimen was
collected by J. W. Price in Jamaica, date
unrecorded, and was identified by J. G.
Mackin. As far as the writer can deter-
‘ine, no other collections of this species
have been reported in the literature. The
streptocephalids collected at Elolo in south-
western Ethiopia and recorded as Strepto-
cephalus similis Baird by Cannicci (1941)
were almost certainly misidentified. These
African specimens lacked the definitive
reatures of the II antenna and cereopods
which are characteristic of male S. s¢melzs.
A number of lots of unidentified strepto-
cephalids, taken in northeastern Mexico
during the summer of 1954, were presented
to the writer by the collector Ernest A.
Liner. Many of these specimens proved to
be Streptocephalus similis. During the sum-
mers of 1955, 1956, and 1957, the writer
revisited many of Liner’s stations and col-
lected at other localities in Mexico and
southwest Texas. A number of additional
collections of this form were obtained. In
view of the almost complete lack of dis-
tributional data relating to the species it
seemed desirable to place these collections
on record.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The writer is grateful to Mr. Liner for the
gift of his specimens and for providing habitat
data. Fred V. Weir, of the American Museum of
Natural History, and Dr. Fenner A. Chace, of
the United States National Museum, made
available for study and comparison the reference
material deposited in the collections of their re-
spective institutions. Dr. Robert Gordon con-
tributed specimens and pertinent data relating to
a west Texas habitat studied by himself and
Alan Chaney. Dr. Folke Linder of Sweden lent
the writer a number of annotated sketches of
streptocephalids which he had studied in the
U. §S. National Museum. A productive cor-
respondence with Dr. Ralph Dexter, Kent State
University, has been of inestimable value in con-
nection with these and other studies dealing with
the Anostraca. Dr. John H. Mullahy, S J.,
Loyola University, provided a translation of
Daday’s Latin description of the species. Andrew
Arata assisted the writer in field and laboratory
investigations during the summer of 1955. Field
studies were made possible by a grant from the
National Science Foundation (G@ 1738). For all
the assistance noted above the writer wishes to
express his sincere appreciation.
METHODS
Species of the genus Streptocephalus are differ-
entiated primarily on the basis of the structure of
the second antennae (“‘claspers’’), the frontal
170
appendages, and the cercopods of adult males.
Dissections were made and permanent mounts of
these diagnostic structures prepared by a variety
of methods including the techniques recom-
mended by Mackin (1942), and by procedures
involving the use of water soluble synthetic
mountants.
It was found that excellent preparations could
be very rapidly produced by dissecting the for-
malin or alcohol preserved specimens, and trans-
ferring the pertinent structures directly to poly-
vinyl alcohol mountant in concavity slides
protected by a cover slip. Of several formulae
tested, best results were obtained with that of Gray
and Wess (Gray, 1952, pp. 35-36). Preparations so
mounted became dry enough to handle within a
few hours and little clearing of the structures oc-
curred, a distinct advantage in the present
instance since surface features were of primary
importance. The customary alcohol and water
soluble stains could not be employed with this
technique because of the tendency of the stain to
‘bleed” into the mountant. However useful
preparations were made by soaking the preserved
specimens, with or without previous washing, in
5% silver nitrate solution and exposing them to
direct sunlight for a short time. Specimens so
treated were then dissected and the desired
structures transferred directly to Gray and
Wess’s mountant. The deposition of metallic
silver on the surface structures provided striking
vreparations for study as opaque objects by direct
illumination. Even more rapid superficial deposi-
tion of silver was obtained by adding strong
ammonium hydroxide to the silver-nitrate solu-
tion in which the specimens were soaked; in this
case the necessity of exposing the objects to sun-
light was eliminated.
REVIEW OF DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES
Of the New World streptocephalids only adult
males of S. seali and S. similis are characterized
by bowed cercopods, uniformly setose along the
margins of the proximal portions and with short
curved spines fringing the distal halves. In the
ease of S. sealt these cercopods are confluent at
their bases and attached to a very short but
cylindrical ninth abdominal segment; in S.
similis the cercopods are separately attached to a
small lobiform ninth abdominal segment, triangu-
lar in outline. In both species the cercopods of the
juvenile and immature males are uniformly
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 9
setose along the margins from point of attachment
to apex; it is only in fully mature specimens that
the characteristic hooklike spines appear on the
distal portions of these organs.
) —
ee
Fig. 1.—Streptocephalus similis Baird (Loyola
collection no. 994), male, left II antenna, medial
aspect. Fie. 2.—Streptocephalus seali Ryder
(882), right ‘‘finger’’? (inner branch of scissors),
anterior surface. Fie. 3.—S. similis (994), right
‘finger,’ anterior surface.
Of more diagnostic value in the separation of
these two species is the character of the second or
clasping antennae of the male. This second
antenna of the male streptocephalid has usually
been described as “‘3-jointed” or “triarticulate,”
the segments being identified respectively as a
basal joint, a curved intermediate joint, and a
characteristic “hand” or “‘scissors.’’ Linder has
shown (1941) that this interpretation is un-
tenable; that streptocephalids have the same two
joints to this limb as all Anostraca except the
Polyartemiidae; and that the supposed second and
May 1958 MOORE: OCCURRENCE OF
third joints are, in reality, simply distal out-
growths from the basal segment. The true second
or apical joimt is a curved, chitenous process,
quite normal in form but pushed to one side by
the above-mentioned distal outgrowths.
Diagnostic features of the II antenna of the
male of Streptocephalus similis are illustrated in
Fig. 1. Particular attention is directed to the
proximal anterior (or dorsal) margin of the inner,
shorter branch of the scissors. In S. sealz this
surface bears two processes or teeth; in S. svmilis,
as is apparent from the figure, three such teeth are
to be found. Creaser has stated that the middle
tooth of the series is less than half the size of the
adjacent teeth. Daday has given a somewhat
more detailed description of these diversified
processes. The anterior tooth, he reported, is
large and sharp pointed; the middle, smaller and
digitiform; the posterior process is characterized
as large and somewhat sickle-shaped, with a
bilobed anterior margin.
a
)
M
”)
IMM.
STREPTOCEPHALUS SIMILIS
M
~
5
; IMM.
S)
171
A comparison of the dorsal surface of the inner,
shorter branch of the scissors of SS. seali and S.
similis is illustrated in Figs. 2 and 3. These
sketches were made with the aid of a camera
lucida from polyvinyl alcohol mounted prepara-
tions, the appendage in question being oriented
by propping it in the desired position against
slivers of glass in a concavity slide. S. sealz (Fig. 2,
from a Louisiana specimen) is characterized by
the presence of two toothlike processes; the proxi-
mal one is broad at the base, sickle-shaped, and
turned medially; the distal process is somewhat
bilobed, with a short, rounded, laterally directed
portion, and a long, slender, pointed tooth, di-
rected medially. The comparable structures of S.
similis, illustrated by a specimen from Dimmit
County, Tex., are shown in Fig. 3. The proximal
tooth in this case is likewise broad at the base,
sickle-shaped, and turned medially. Lateral and
slightly anterior is a much smaller process,
directed vertically and confluent at its base with
oe
|
Fies. 4-7.—Frontal appendage, male: 4, S. seali (S82), Louisiana; 5, S. similis (A.M.N.H.
no. 2914), Puerto Rico; 6, S. similis (985), Mexico; 7, S. similis (987), Texas.
Fries. 8-10.—S. similis, male, right ‘‘finger,’’ anterior surface: 8, (A.M.N.H. no. 2914), Puerto
Rico; 9, (982), Mexico; 10 (1017), Mexico.
172
the proximal tooth. The third or distal process is
strongly bilobed with a short, rounded portion
directed laterally and a much longer, medially
directed, slender tooth.
The frontal appendage of the adult male
Streptocephalus, variable as it frequently is,
nevertheless may be a structure of some taxo-
nomic importance. In distinguishing these two
New World streptocephalids with spine-tipped
cercopods the character of this appendage
seems to afford a criterion of value. Ryder’s
(1879) original description of S. seali notes that
the ‘front of the head is prolonged into a straight
beak ...it is flattened anteroposteriorly, and
emarginate at its tip.” Creaser refers to a “median
lamina extending from forehead, branched into
two bulbs at apex.”’ The frontal appendage of a
typical Louisiana specimen is illustrated as Fig. 4;
the strongly bifurcate tip appears to be quite
characteristic of S. sealt.
In S. similis, on the other hand, the tip of the
frontal appendage is rounded or only slightly
divided. Baird speaks of the ‘“‘beak . . . flat, rather
broad, and slightly lobed at the extremity.”
Daday refers to a frontal process with a divided
apex; his accompanying figure shows this division
to be much less pronounced than is the case with
typical S. seali. Creaser, referring to the specimens
collected in Puerto Rico, describes the median
lamina as ‘‘evenly rounded or slightly bilobed at
apex.” Fig. 5 illustrates the character of this
structure in a Puerto Rican specimen (one of the
lot studied by Creaser), while Figs. 6 and 7 show
the extremes in variability of the frontal ap-
pendage encountered in the specimens collected
in Mexico and Texas.
VARIATION IN THE FEATURES OF
THE IL ANTENNA
It has been noted that the proximal and middle
processes, which are a feature of the dorsal surface
of the inner branch of the scissors of male S.
similis, are confluent at their bases in the Mexican
and Texas specimens here considered. Baird’s
description of the type lot, as well as Daday’s
more complete treatment of material from the
same collection, makes no mention of any such
association of these two processes. Creaser, like-
wise, did not mention any confluence of these
processes in specimens from Puerto Rico and the
writer’s examination of the latter lot verifies the
supposition that these teeth, while very closely
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 5
associated at their bases, nevertheless appear to
originate independently from the body of the
“finger” (the inner branch of the scissors).
Linder, who examined the damaged Jamaican
specimen in the collections of the U. S. National
Museum, expressed (personal communication)
some doubt as to whether it had been correctly
assigned to S. similis. He noted that the proximal
and middle processes of the finger were “merged
in the middle line.”’ This discrepancy presents a
not insurmountable difficulty, however, in view
of the considerable variation noted in the po-
sitions of these two processes in the Mexican and
Texas specimens.
Fig. 8 illustrates the quite complete lack of
conjunction of these proximal and middle
processes in a very typical specimen from the
Puerto Rican lot. The third, or distal, process is
strongly bilobed, a condition which Linder noted
in the Jamaica specimen but which escaped
mention (if it occurred) in Baird’s and, later, in
Daday’s description of the Santa Domingo type
lot. Fig. 9 shows a maximum degree of coalescence
of the proximal and middle processes—a con-
dition uniformly exhibited by a large series of
specimens from Tamaulipas, Mexico. Fig. 10 (and
also 3, previously cited) illustrates the nearly
complete separation of these processes typical of
specimens from Nuevo Ledén, Mexico, and
Dimmit County, Tex., respectively.
OTHER MORPHOLOGICAL CHARACTERS
Body size in Anostraca is not a particularly
useful taxonomic criterion. The animals become
sexually mature (as evidenced by the character of
the penes and the II antenna in males, and the
occurrence of eggs in the ovisac in females) long
before maximum growth is attained. The two re-
corded collections of S. similis indicated a rather
small body size for this species; Baird stated the
total lengths of males and females to be five-
eighths and one-half inch, respectively. Daday
noted the size range for the same collection to be
13-15.5 mm for males and 14-16 mm for females.
Creaser stated, with reference to the Puerto
Rican collection, that “the largest specimen that
I have examined is only 17 mm in length.”
Total body length, from the front of the head
to the tip of the cercopods, was measured in 5 to
10 randomly selected mature individuals of each
sex from several of the present collections. Egg
counts were also made in the case of the females,
May 1958 MOORE: OCCURRENCE OF
only fully developed, shelled eggs being included
in the counts. Typical results are shown in
Table 1. The specimens in Lot 982 approximate
in size the published collections, while Lots 994
and 1017 consist of notably larger individuals.
TaBLeE 1.—Bopy SIZE AND EGG CouNtTs FROM
REPRESENTATIVE Lots OF STREPTOCEPHALUS
SIMILIS
Total body length in mm Number of
Collection Hoe ae
TOC Males Females visac
Range Mean Range Mean| Range /|Mean
982 {13.0-15.0)14.1)12.0-12.5)12.3} 51-79 66
994 |17.5-19.5)18.4/16.5-17.5/17.0)135—225| 180
1017 |23.0-26.0/24.4/23 .0-25.0/23 .7/455-541| 498
Egg counts, other than serving as an indication
of sexual maturity and relative age, are likewise
of dubious taxonomic importance. In 8S. seali it
has been shown (Moore, 1955) that egg pro-
duction commences on a limited scale while the
females are still far from maximum size. The
process becomes increasingly active later in the
life cycle, with the maximum egg production
being affected not only by age and body size but
also by water temperature, food supply, physio-
logical state of the individual, and perhaps other
factors as well. Nevertheless, the larger, older
females usually carry considerably more eggs
than the smaller individuals—a_ relationship
which is well shown by the data in Table 1.
LOCALITIES
Fifteen lots of S. sumilis from 11 localities are
listed in Table 2. A representative series from
each lot has been deposited in the U. S. National
Museum. Loyola University collection numbers
are indicated in each case; these reference num-
bers have previously been used in citing the
sources of the material used for figures in this
paper. The number of males and females in each
collection is recorded; in collections numbering
several hundred specimens an aliquot of 100 only
was sexed. In habitats where one or more addi-
tional species of Streptocephalus occurred along
with S. similis the number of females of the
latter species could only be approximated, the
distinction being based chiefly on the relative size
and shape of the ovisac. However, dependable
criteria for the recognition of the females of the
various species of streptocephalids have not been
STREPTOCEPHALUS SIMILIS
175
established and sex ratios based on such col-
lections of mixed species are merely indicative, at
best.
A striking feature of the sex ratios of these
collections is the number of instances in which
one sex predominated. Even if one eliminates
from consideration the smaller lots (those totaling
less than 50 individuals), and collections con-
taining streptocephalids other than S. similis,
this unequal sex ratio prevails in many cases. In
the series, limited as above, the three lots with
sex ratios approaching unity were noted to be
immature or small mature individuals. These
three collections, together with their mean
lengths, were as follows: no. 983, 11.6 mm; no.
986, 11.8 mm; no. 982, 13.5 mm. The remaining
lots, showing unequal sex ratios, were no. 995,
15.5 mm, with a preponderance of females over
males of approximately 5 to 1; no. 994, 17.7 mm,
with a preponderance of females over males of
nearly 6 to 1; and no. 985, 25.2 mm, exhibiting
the reverse sex ratio with a preponderance of
males over females of 32 to 1.
In his study on S. seali the present writer
(op. cit.) has noted that young populations of
this species usually show a uniform sex ratio,
with the last survivors of a brood tending to be
predominantly of one sex. The data cited above
would indicate a similar situation prevails in
populations of S. semilis. Unfortunately succes-
sive samplings of particular populations of the
latter species throughout the course of their
development are not available and the conclusion
drawn must, for the present, remain tentative.
Tests were run in the field at each habitat for
temperature, hydrogen ion concentration, total
alkalinity, turbidity, and, occasionally, for dis-
solved oxygen and free carbon dioxide. Unmodi-
fied water samples were collected for later
laboratory determination of chloride, and chlo-
roform-preserved samples were taken for sulphate
analysis.
The hydrogen ion concentration of all S. stmzlis
habitats fell within the range of pH 7.8 to pH
9.0; only two showed a pH of less than 8.2.
Total alkalinity was relatively high in all cases;
the range was from 54 to 260 p.p.m. with only
two pools exhibiting a total alkalinity of less
than 100 p.p.m. (one of these tested 97 p.p.m.).
Both normal carbonates and bicarbonates con-
tributed to these values. Turbidities were gen-
erally high, from 100 to 5000 p.p.m. as deter-
174 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 5
TABLE 2.—NEw Locatity RECORDS FOR STREPTOCEPHALUS SIMILIS
ee Collector Date Locality Numbes oi Nupet o Associated Anostraca
977 | Liner VII-6-’54 26 miles west of Rey- 16 17 (?) | Thamnocephalus
nosa, Nuevo Leon, platyurus; Strep-
Mexico tocephalus sp?
979 | Liner VII-6-’54 | 0.5 mile southwest of 8 9 None
Gen. Bravo, Nuevo
Leén, Mexico
982 | Liner VII-13-’54 | 26 miles north of Valles, 46 | 54 None
San Luis Potosf, | (aliquot of 100
Mexico specimens)
983 | Liner VII-13-’54 | 42 miles north of Valles, 54 | 46 None
Tamaulipas, Mexico | (aliquot of 100
specimens)
985 | Moore & Arata | VII-7-°55 | Near Gen. Bravo, Oy | 8 None
Nuevo Leén, Mexico | (aliquot of 100
(Liner’s Sta. 979) specimens )
986 | Moore & Arata | VII-7-’55 | 0.5 mile west of China, 42 | 88
Nuevo Leon, Mexico | (aliquot of 100 | None (?)
specimens,
mostly im-
mature)
994 | Moore & Arata | VII-13-’55 | 6 miles south of Cata- 12 al None
rina, Dimmit County,
Tex.
995 | Moore & Arata | VII-14-’55 | 4 miles northeast of a 83 None
Rocksprings, Ed- | (aliquot of 100
wards County, Tex. specimens)
997 | Moore & Arata | VII-15-’55 | 12 miles southwest of 18 6 (2?) | Streptocephalus sp?
Sheffield, Terrell
County, Tex.
998 | Moore & Arata | VII-15-’55 | 13 miles east of Sonora, 63 37 (2) | Streptocephalus sp?
Sutton County,
Tex.
1017 | Moore V1-13-756 44 miles south of Nuevo 23 8 Thamnocephalus
Laredo, Nuevo Leon, platyurus
Mexico
1018 | Moore VI-18-’56 Same as Sta. 1017 10 12 (2?) | Streptocephalus sp?
1019 | Moore VI-20-’56 Same as Sta. 997 204 22 (2?) | Streptocephalus sp?
1071 | Moore VI-18-’57 Same as Sta. 998 23 48 (2?) | Streptocephalus sp?
1072 | Moore VI-18-’57 14 miles north of 25 9) Thamnocephalus
Sonora, Schleicher platyurus
County, Tex.
mined by the Jackson Turbidimeter, although
one productive habitat was characterized by
clear water with no measurable turbidity. In
these respects S. similis habitats did not differ
appreciably from ponds in the area which con-
tained only other species of streptocephalids.
Chlorides and sulphates were variable, from
a trace to a maximum of 82 p.p.m. Cl” and 20
p-p.m. SOs. The higher values were found in
habitats containing only S. similis, although one
is probably not justified in concluding that this
species is therefore more tolerant of these two ions
than other streptocephalids since the total num-
ber of habitats studied was relatively small.
All previously recorded collections of S. semalis
have come from the West Indies. If one may
assume that the species reached continental
North America from the islands to the southeast
then species-composition data for habitats m
the northern and western portions of its present
range should be of particular interest. The writer
has collected extensively to the western borders
of Texas, and north into the Texas-Oklahoma
panhandle. The most northwesterly S. similis
habitat known is a large, semipermanent cattle
tank in Terrell County, Tex. This pond was
seined by Gordon and Chaney in June 1952;
Dr. Gordon provided the writer with a large
May 1958 MOORE: OCCURRENCE OF
collection which included Anostraca and other
phyllopods. The habitat was subsequently visited
in the summers of 1955 (collection no. 997),
1956 (collection no. 1019), and 1957. The species-
composition of the anostracan population, males
only, is shown in Table 3.
TABLE 3.—SPECIES-COMPOSITION OF ANOSTRACA
POPULATION (MALES ONLy), TERRELL
County HapitaT
VI-11- | VII-15-| VI-20- | VI-17-
1952 1955 1956 1957
Streptocephalus sp.
COUT O18) ck 549 | 154 98 0
Streptocephalus sp. :
“Toe 1D)! eee 22, 2 D 0
Streptocephalus
SUIS 6. ae 0 18 | 204 0)
Mota 5 ek 571 | 174 | 304 0
In June 1952 the Anostraca population was
composed almost entirely of an undescribed
streptocephalid, here designated “Type A.” A
few “Type D” (which may be a variety of S.
texanus) were included, but no S. similis were
found in the collection which numbered over
1,200 specimens, females included. Three years
later, in July 1955, the same two forms were
present but, in addition, 18 male S. similis were
taken. In 1956 the proportion of S. samilis had
increased to the point where they constituted
two-thirds of the male anostracans present. When
last visited, in June 1957, it was found that carp
minnows had been introduced into the pond and
no phyllopods were present. Unless the pond
dries completely sometime in the future, killing
the fish, it seems unlikely that Anostraca will be
taken again from this habitat. Nevertheless, the
present rather circumscribed distribution of
S. sumilis together with its increase in numbers
from zero to a position of predominance within
four years in a habitat on the border of its range
would indicate that the species may be of rather
recent introduction into continental North
America, and that it is apparently competing
successfully with the native streptocephalids.
SUMMARY
1. Streptocephalus similis Baird, reported
only twice since 1852, is here recorded from
11 habitats in Mexico and Texas.
STREPTOCEPHALUS SIMILIS 75)
2. The diagnostic characters of the
species as illustrated by the present collec-
tions are compared with the published de-
scriptions and with certain museum speci-
mens from the West Indies.
3. Sex ratios and ‘egg counts are pre-
sented for the recent collections. In general
the younger populations of small individuals
exhibit a 1:1 sex ratio. Older populations of
larger specimens usually showed a striking
predominance of one sex over the other.
4. Certain physico-chemical factors of
the habitats are summarized. None of the
factors measured can be definitely corre-
lated with the occurrence of S. similis.
5. The changes in the species-composition
of an Anostraca habitat over a period of
five years is presented as indicating support
for the hypothesis that S. s¢milis may be of
relatively recent introduction into the
North American continent.
LITERATURE CITED
Bartrp, W. Monograph of the family Branchi-
podidae. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 20: 18-37.
1852.
Cannicct, G. Crustacea. Entomostraca. Missione
Biologica Sagan-Omo. Reale Accademia
d’Italia, Zool. 6: 249-261. 1941.
CrEASER, E. P. The North American phyllopods
of the genus Streptocephalus. Occ. Pap. Univ.
Michigan. Mus. Zool. 9 (217): 1-10. 1930.
Dapay, E. Monographie systématique des phyl-
lopodes anostracés. Ann. Sci. Nat. (ser. 9)
11: 91-492. 1910.
Gray, P. Handbook of Basic Microtechnique:
1-141. 1952.
LinpgER, F. Contributions to the morphology and
the taxonomy of the Branchiopoda Anostraca.
Zool. Bidrag Uppsala 20: 101-302. 1941.
Mackin, J. G. A new species of phylloped crus-
tacean from the southwestern short-grass
prairies. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 92 (136):
33-38. 1942.
Moorg, W.G. The life history of the spiny-tailed
fairy shrimp in Louisiana. Ecology 36 (2):
176-184. 1955.
PackKarRD, A. 8. A monograph of the phyllopod
crustacea of North America, with remarks on
the Order Phyllocarida. 12th Ann. Rep. U.S.
Geol. and Geogr. Surv. Terr. for 1878, pt.
1: 295-592. 1883.
RypER, J. A. Description of a new spectes of
Streptocephalus. Proce. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila-
delphia 1879: 200-201.
176
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 5
MARTIAN ATMOSPHERE RESTUDIED
Telescopic observations strongly suggest that
Mars has an atmosphere similar to, though more
transparent than, the atmosphere of the earth.
For more specific information on the Martian
atmosphere, astronomers have relied mainly on
the spectroscope or spectrograph, instruments
that analyze the sunlight reflected from the
planet’s surface. In principle, the gases present
should reveal themselves by their characteristic
absorption lines and bands, but results so far
have not been conclusive. However, the per-
sistence of inconclusive results despite increasing
sensitivity of observing techniques has led to
lower estimates of the quantities of gases,
such as oxygen, water vapor, and carbon
dioxide, that may be present on Mars.
Another attack on this problem has been made
by scientists of the National Bureau of Standards,
and they have now completed analysis of the spec-
trograms obtained during the close approach of
Mars in the late summer of 1956.1 Two husband-
and-wife teams—C. C. Kiess, H. K. Kiess, C. H.
Corliss, and E. L. R. Corliss—participated in
the investigation which was sponsored jointly by
the National Geographic Society and the Na-
tional Bureau of Standards.
Using more sensitive instruments than have
been previously applied to this purpose, the
scientists photographed the Martian spectrum
under the excellent observing conditions at the
new high-altitude observatory, operated by the
U. S. Weather Bureau, on Mauna Loa volcano
in Hawaii. Also, in an effort to extend observa-
tions farther into the infrared, another set of
spectrograms was made at the Georgetown
College Observatory in Washington, D. C.
The investigation concentrated mainly on a
search for oxygen and water vapor. The results
indicate that both of these, if present, occur in
quanties too small to be detected with the equip-
ment used. On the basis of laboratory tests of
spectrograph sensitivity to water vapor, this
means that there is less H2O in the Martian
atmosphere than there is in a film of water 0.08
mm (Moo in.) thick. The spectrograms also
showed no trace of the carbon-dioxide lines that
1 For further technical details, see High-dis-
persion spectra of Mars, by C. C. Krigss, C. H.
Coruiss, Harriet K. Kress, and Epiry L. R.
Corutss, Astrophys. Journ. 126: 579. Nov. 1957.
have been observed in Venus, or of spectral lines
of the noble gases.
It is believed that these results are not in-
compatible with the presence of water vapor in
amounts sufficient to explain, for example, the
transport of water from one polar cap to the
other. For it is now fairly well established that
the white polar caps of Mars consist of solidified
H.0, and it is reasonable to suppose that the
seasonal process in which one cap shrinks while
the other expands is due to the transfer of water
vapor over the Martian surface.
The results do raise the question, however, as
to whether the spectroscopic tests hitherto used
are delicate enough for the purpose. In the case
of H.O molecules, there is reason to believe that
the bands that have been used (because of
accessibility to present methods of observing) are
not the most sensitive ones. Both theory and
experiment indicate that much stronger bands
occur farther in the infrared, but different or
improved techniques are needed to detect them
on Mars. The use of spectrographs mounted
in high-altitude balloons, rockets, or artificial
satellites will reduce the difficulty further.
METHODS
The light from Mars, as received near the
earth’s surface, is really a composite of 3 differ-
ent spectra. Specifically, it contains absorption
lines originating (1) in the reversing layer of the
sun’s atmosphere, (2) in the atmosphere of
Mars, and (3) in the atmosphere of the earth.
The wavelengths of the solar lines are accurately
known and so can be easily identified. For the
much more difficult task of distinguishing lines
due to Mars from those due to the earth, 2
methods have been in use.
One method is to observe Mars at “opposi-
tion,” that is, when Mars, earth, and sun are
most nearly in a straight line, with the earth
between the other two. Its distance from the
earth being a minimum (or nearly so), Mars is
then at its brightest. Also, because the distance
between Mars and the earth is neither increasing
nor decreasing, absorption lines originating in the
atmosphere of Mars will not be separated by
Doppler shift from those originating in the
earth’s atmosphere; so that oxygen lines, for
example, from Mars will be super-imposed on
May 1958
those from the earth. In such a case, the line
may be noticeably intensified or, more likely,
distorted; that is, since the Doppler shift is not
negligibly small except for a brief interval, the
intensity profile of such a line, as measured with
a microphotometer, would be asymmetrical.
Such distortions might be detected more readily
by comparison with corresponding lines in the
spectrum of the moon (which has no atmosphere
of its own).
The second method is to observe Mars at some
time before or after opposition, when the Doppler
shift would separate clearly the Martian from
the terrestrial lines. Then, if there is oxygen in
the atmosphere of Mars, one might expect the
oxygen lines caused by the earth’s atmosphere
to have faint companions separated by the amount
of the Doppler shift.
Comparison with the spectrum of the moon,
obtained under similar conditions, would
allow the Doppler shift to be measured—for
example, by the relative displacement of the
solar lines. Comparing the Martian spectrum with
the more familiar spectrum of the moon would
also help in detecting any unknown lines that
might show up.
The second method was used in the present
investigation. Spectrograms were obtained about
7 weeks before opposition at Mauna Loa and
about 6 weeks after opposition at the Georgetown
observatory. In the earlier spectrograms the
Doppler shift was 0.22 A (angstroms) towards
the short wavelengths, and in the later ones
0.25 A towards the longer wavelengths. The
measured values of the shift agreed well with
the values calculated from the orbital velocities of
Mars and the earth.
INSTRUMENTS
The new study of the Martian spectrum was
undertaken in order to see what could be done
with the newer aids to observation. These include
better diffraction gratings and optical systems,
faster photographic plates, and more accurate
guiding mechanisms for prolonged photographic
exposures.
Before proceeding to Hawaii, the scientists
tested the feasibility of using high-dispersion
concave gratings for planetary spectroscopy at
the Georgetown observatory. Various arrange-
ments were tried out on Jupiter, which was then
about as bright as Mars would be in July 1956.
MARTIAN ATMOSPHERE RESTUDIED
177
The tests justified proceeding with the project
and showed that the mounting devised by Wads-
worth would be suitable for the grating.
Light is gathered from Mars with a siderostat,
a mirror that is motordriven (with manual fine
adjustment) so that the light is always reflected in
the same horizontal direction towards the rigidly
mounted telescope lens and spectrograph. The
telescope lens focuses an image of the planet
onto a slit, and the light passing through is
converted into a parallel beam by a collimating
mirror. The beam then strikes and is reflected
from a concave diffraction grating which spreads
the light out into its components according
to wavelength. The light as thus spread out—.e.,
the spectrum—falls upon a thin glass photo-
graphic plate which is curved to fit the focal
plane of the grating.
Two diffraction gratings were selected. One
was ruled by R. W. Wood at Johns Hopkins
University and has 15,000 lines per in. and a
(reciprocal) dispersion of 5 A per mm. The other,
ruled by H. G. Gale at the University of Chicago,
has 30,000 lines per in. and a dispersion of 2
A per mm. Both have the special virtue of con-
centrating much of the light in one of the first-
order spectra. The telescope lens, 12 in. in diame-
ter and 12 ft. in focal length, was made by J.
Clacey, former chief optician at the National
Bureau of Standards.
OBSERVATIONS
The observatory on Mauna Loa offers many
advantages to the astronomer. Situated in the
midst of the Pacific at an altitude of 11,134 feet,
it is free from the ruggedness of terrain that
produces turbulence in the surrounding air.
Particularly important is its height of about 1
mile above the inversion layer of the atmosphere.
This is the level at which the temperature of the
air starts to increase with increasing altitude;
the bulk of atmospheric dust and moisture are
trapped below it.
Built for the joint use of the U. 8. Weather
Bureau and the National Bureau of Standards,
the Mauna Loa observatory was only recently
put into service.? In fact, the scientists making
the present study arrived in time for the dedica-
tion ceremonies and began the Mars observations
immediately afterwards.
2 Mauna Loa observatory for high-altitude re-
search, NBS Tech. News Bull. 40: 137. Oet. 1956.
178
Spectra of Mars and the moon were obtained
successively on the same plate, the exposures to
Mars lasting 3 hours each. The Wood grating
was tried first. The spectrograms proved sufh-
ciently dense to warrant using the more dispersive
Gale grating, which was then set up to photo-
sraph wavelengths from 5800 to 7400 A.
The Doppler shift is clearly evident im the
best spectrograms. In several cases, lines of
solar origin that are hidden behind terrestrial
lines in spectrograms of direct sunlight are shifted
out of their hiding places and appear separately
in the spectrum of Mars. If any lines due to
water vapor or oxygen in the atmosphere of
Mars appeared in the spectrum, they should be
shifted by about 0.22 A from those of terrestrial
origin. However, there are no companion lines to
be seen with the strong lines either in the Fraun-
hofer B band of O2 (roughly 6870 to 6940 <A)
or in the a band of H.O (roughly 7200 to 7300 A).
Later, the spectrograph was set up again at
the Georgetown College Observatory. The aim
was to extend observation farther into the
infrared than was possible at the time on Mauna
Loa. The lower altitude of Washington, D. C.
made it necessary to use the Wood grating;
exposures to Mars were each about 5 hours long.
The portion of the spectrum from 5000 to 9000
A was photographed and scanned for lines of
atomic nitrogen, oxygen, and the noble gases, as
well as for the A band of O» (about 7600 to 7700
A), the HO band at 8200 A, and the CO: bands
at 7820 and 7889 A that were found (1932)
by W. S. Adams and T. Dunham, Jr., in the
spectrum of Venus. Again the Doppler shift was
clearly evident, but none of the lines sought for
could be detected.
INTERPRETATION
The results of this investigation, which ex-
tended over a greater wavelength range and
utilized higher dispersion than those previously
reported, confirm the findings of W. S. Adams
and T. Dunham, Jr.,3 in 1934 and 1941, with
respect to the low abundance of oxygen and
water vapor in the atmosphere of Mars. The
numbers of molecules of both gases are too small
to be detected with the equipment used.
3 The B band of oxygen in the spectrum of Mars,
by W.S. Apams and T. DUNHAM, Jr., Astrophys.
Journ. 79: 308. 1934; Some results with the coudé
spectrograph of the Mount Wilson Observatory, by
W. 8. Apams and T. Dunuam, Jr., Astrophys.
Journ. 93: 16. 1941.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 9
TABLE 1.—ABsoRPTION Banps oF H.2O IN THE
RED AND INFRARED PORTIONS
OF THE SPECTRUM
The second column gives, for each band, the
associated quantum numbers for the 3 fundamen-
tal modes of vibration (stretching, bending, and
distortion) of the HO molecule. The relative
transition probabilities are a measure of the in-
trinsic intensity of the absorption lines.
et | eee ee
1.379 @ 0, >6
1.135 Gee) 1.000
0.942 (2, 0, 1) 0.3
0.823 (Cala) Oat
NEPe eo Beds 31) 0.03
0.652 | (Bx ley 1) 0.005
In the case of water vapor, tests with a spec-
trograph of dimensions close to those of the one
used in this study were made in the Bureau’s
spectroscopy laboratory. Under conditions in
which the water vapor in the light path was
equivalent to a water film 0.15 mm thick, a few
of the strongest lines of the a band and the one
at 8200 A were detectable. Since none of these
were detected in the spectrum of Mars, the
water-vapor content of its atmosphere must be
less than that of a film of water 0.08 mm, or
half of 0.15 thick; this is because the light from
Mars passes twice through its atmosphere—
once coming from the sun and once after reflec-
tion from the Martian surface.
The spectrograph used in the present investiga-
tion could detect no HO bands beyond the
one at 0.823 microns (1 micron = 10,000 A).
However, theoretical analyses by E. K. Plyler
and W. S. Benedict! of the Bureau’s radiometry
laboratory, and others, indicates that the bands
at 0.942, 1.135, and 1.379 microns are more
intense. As shown in Table 1, the band at 0.942
is about 3 times, the one at 1.135 about 10 times,
and the one at 1.379 at least 60 times more
sensitive than the band at 0.823. C. C. Kiess
was able to detect the bands at 0.942 and 1.135
microns in the laboratory, where a strong source
of artificial light was available.°
Nonetheless, if water vapor is to be detected
4 Private communication from E. K. Plyler and
W.S. Benedict (1956).
5 Wavelengths of rotational lines in the water-
vapor bands at 0.93 and 1.13 microns, by Car:
Kiss, Journ. Res. NBS 48: 377. 1952. RP2325.
May 1958
in the relatively weak light from Mars by means
of the longer-wavelength bands, more efficient
detectors than the present types of photographic
plates are needed. Increased sensitivity could
also be obtained from balloon-, rocket-, and
AIR-POLLUTION STUDIES
179
artificial satellite-based spectrographs. Excellent
results have already been obtained in this way
on the spectrum of the sun, revealing hitherto
undetected portions in the infrared as well as in
the ultraviolet.
er
AIR-POLLUTION STUDIES
Air zoning, in addition to land zoning, may be
essential for American cities of the future. This
is the conclusion of Dr. Francois N. Frenkiel, of
the Applied Physics Laboratory of Johns Hopkins
University, in a report just published by the
Smithsonian Institution. :
Air pollution from factory smokestacks,
automobile exhausts, smoke from bonfires and
chimneys, and various other sources, Dr. Frenkiel
points out, each year is causing deaths of a large
but undetermined number of persons. Statistics
would be very difficult to compile. It is estimated,
however, that at least 4,000 died in London
during the intense ‘‘smog”’ of the winter of 1952.
This smog contained large concentrations of
poisonous sulfur dioxide which probably was
responsible, directly or indirectly, for most of the
fatalities. This particular case was closely asso-
ciated with peculiar local meteorological condi-
tions and perhaps never will be duplicated.
There can be little question, however, that the
air-pollution problem for large cities is becoming
more serious year by year. Much can be done
to modify conditions. Many large industries in
many places have largely eliminated the danger
from their smokestacks, but only by quite ex-
pensive methods which probably would be beyond
the means of individuals.
The only ultimate answer, Dr. Frenkiel be-
lieves, is “air zoning” applied both to city exten-
sions and clearance projects. Land zoning now
is an established practice to prevent deterioration
of residential neighborhoods, the growth of slums,
etc. )
Zoning air above communities, however,
would be a much more difficult problem, in-
volving knowledge of the possible sources of
pollution, local geographic and weather condi-
tions, chemical changes of pollutants in the
atmosphere, necessity for applying purification
methods, and several other factors.
More and more, he points out, the automobile
exhaust is looming as a major offender. Most of
the concentration takes place at points where
there are necessary stops and where many cars
pour out their fumes simultaneously. One phase
of air zoning may be to rearrange traffic patterns
to eliminate as many such points as possible.
It would be necessary, in planning for future
expansion, to give careful consideration to loca-
tion and limits of all industrial areas.
“Conventional land zoning,’ Dr. Frenkiel
says, “has for its main purpose promoting art and
amenity in urban building. The urban area is
divided into residential, commercial, industrial,
and other zones with specifications describing the
character and the use of the authorized buildings
and enterprises.
“Air zoning would specify the allowable levels
of concentration [of pollutants] for the atmos-
phere of each zone. However, building restrictions
for each zone must take into account the con-
tributions of the whole urban area to the contami-
nation of its atmosphere. The necessary restric-
tions will therefore depend on the meteorological
conditions of the urban area and result in different
requirements for the same classes of zones.
according to their location in the area.... One
must keep in mind that there will always be a
certain probability of exceptional meteorological
conditions that would produce an abnormally
high contamination. The probability of such an
occurrence can be reduced to any desirable degree
Difheult
problems will be involved, he points out, which
by appropriate zoning regulations.”
probably will require the use of high-speed
computers.
Using numerous data obtained in some lo-
Frenkiel
model of the sites with their meteorological
cations, Dr. states, a mathematical
conditions, traffic pattern, industry, and other
pollution sources can be constructed and used
to determine the relative responsibilities of each
of those sources to the pollution at every location.
The author discusses the need for a rational
180
planning of an urban area taking into account the
dangers due to pollution. He says, “There is
still need for much research to provide a quanti-
tative determination of the dangers, Inconven-
iences, and costs of atmospheric contamination.
Nevertheless, it is a recognized fact that several
urban areas produce too much pollution already
and that a further increase in the contamination
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48; NO: 9
of their atmosphere may become very dangerous
under certain meteorological conditions. Urban
areas must therefore face the problem of reducing
the degree of contamination without at the same
time seriously affecting many of those human
activities that are responsible for the contamina-
tion and which, as much as the clean air, are
necessary to the population.”
— thn
CRYOSTAT FOR PRECISE TEMPERATURE CONTROL OVER
VERY WIDE RANGE
The Cryogenic Engineering Laboratory of the
National Bureau of Standards Boulder (Colo.)
Laboratories has developed a cryostat that is
useful for low-temperature research concerned
with the behavior of electronic elements such as
a quartz crystal oscillator frequency standard.
The work was done in connection with a U. S.
Army Signal Corps Engineering Laboratory
project.
By employing several convenient liquefied
eases successively as refrigerants, the cryostat
controls the temperature of an electronic element
over a wide range of temperatures—at essentially
any value between the boiling point of liquid
helium and room temperature. The precision of
control ranges from approximately one one-
hundredth to one one-thousandth of a degree.
Although numerous cryostats for particular
purposes have been described in technical publi-
cations, some additional design problems are
posed in providing an easily adjustable control
system for such a wide temperature range. A
method must be provided for obtaining tempera-
tures between those of the available liquefied
vases. The system adopted by R. D. Goodwin of
the Cryogenic Engineering Laboratory is analo-
ous, in principle, to the operation of an ordinary
household electric oven. A thermometer or ther-
mostat in the oven automatically adjusts the
electric heat input to balance exactly the heat
loss to the cooler environment. The environment
employed in the cryostat is at the very low but
slightly variable temperature provided by a
liquefied gas, such as liquid nitrogen, which is
allowed to boil freely at atmospheric pressure.
Thermal conduction between “oven” and en-
vironment is controlled by adjusting the pressure
of a gas employed for heat transfer i the inter-
yening space. The “oven” contains a thermom-
eter and an electric heater. Manual adjustment
of the gross level of heating determines how “‘hot”
the cryostat “oven” will be compared to the
liquefied gas refrigerant. Automatic control of
the heating at this level maintains a constant
temperature, despite small changes in the tem-
perature of the liquefied gas environment or heat
effects produced in the “oven” by test elements.
The cryostat employs electric resistance ther-
mometers in electric bridge circuits which have
been designed both for ease of adjustment over a
wide temperature range and for optimum practi-
cal sensitivity per unit electric power developed
in the thermometer, since the latter is a limitation
upon resistance thermometers. The maximum
allowable change of temperature of the cryostat
“oven” produces a useful signal from the re-
sistance thermometer bridge of the order of one
microvolt. Utilization of such a small signal for
temperature control requires an electronic ampli-
fier with a gain of about one million. The amplifier
must not drift or produce spurious signals (noise)
ereater than about one-tenth of a microvolt. The
amplified signal then is applied to an electronic
power regulator for control of the electric heating
of the cryostat “oven.”
1Goopwin R. D., Design of simple de resistance
thermometer bridges for wide-range temperature con-
trol. Proc. 1957 Cryogenic Engineering Conf. (Aug.
19, 1957), Boulder, Colo.
2Goopwin, R. D., and Purceiu, J. R., Direct-
coupled power amplifier for cryostat heating con-
trol. Rev. Sci. Instr. 28: 581. 1957.
CONTENTS
: Page
Puinosopuy.—Scientist and theologian? RayMoND J. SEEGER......... tot
PaLEONTOLOGY.—The pelecypod Euloxa: Observations on new localities.
DAWIDUN ICO s esos 4 ee a ons HSER SS Ge 5 ae ee Bee 153
Borany—Techniques involving the sowing of spores of the Filicinae for
artificial culture: BERNARD T. BRIDGHRS....-........ . 203 158
ZooLoGY-—Two new crayfishes of the genus Procambarus from South
Carolina. Horton H. Hopes, Jf... 2.26.25 oes 6s so 160
ZooLoGy.—On the occurrence of Streptocephalus similis Baird in Mexico
and the United States. WALTER G. MOORE............ 72 a3Reee 169
IN GEGSw ee ING Weaie ss i) ote Bee A eek eee a To re A age 157, 159, 176-180
yA W223
VOLUME 48 June 1958 NUMBER 6
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
ieeeeeeee erretcren
Published Monthly by the
feet NG TON’ AC A’'DEM Y OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CuesteR H. Paaz, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RONALD BaMrorD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JounNaL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is aliowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PROCEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. RespEr, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year..........--+.-++++++++++++: $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol: 1 to-vol; 10; anel-—not.ayailable*= 0.22 — —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available .
for sale to libraries at $393.50.
Monocrapu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
InDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.............-..--+++++-:- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete............------+ ss sees $25.00
Single. volumes, unboutid .% | ..60.. 02.502 ee oe ont BS ese 2 2.00
Sine eunaMOOETS ao. boys et ees a ee eo erp ieee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’”’ and
a ia to the Treasurer, H. S. RAPPLEYE, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
Changes of Address —Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 48
June 1958
No. 6
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY .—Stabilized free radicals. Juuius L. JACKSON,? Na-
tional Bureau of Standards. (Communicated by C. H. Page.)
(Received March 29, 1957)
There has recently been a great surge of
interest in the subject of stabilized free
radicals. Chemists, rocket engineers, physi-
cists, even biologists and astronomers are all
interested, and persons from each of these
varied disciplines are doing free radical
research.’ In each of these fields there is the
anticipation that the relatively new tech-
niques of stabilizing at low temperatures
molecular fragments that are extremely
reactive at normal temperatures will shed
light on problems which had not yielded to
other techniques. There is also the hope that
we will be able to produce energy rich mix-
tures for fuel application and _ perhaps
stabilize new and interesting compounds
with free radicals at low temperatures.
There are many ways of producing and
stabilizing free radicals. One class of methods
involves providing energy to a suitably
chosen gas, while the gas is en route to a
surface that is maintained at a very low
temperature-liquid nitrogen to liquid helium
temperatures or thereabouts. If the energy
is great enough to break chemical bonds in
the gas and produce reactive molecular
‘An address before the Advanced Propulsion
Systems Symposium, Los Angeles, Calif.,
December 1957.
2 This work was performed under the National
Bureau of Standards Free Radicals Research
Program, supported by the Department of the
Army.
* As examples of published work in these fields,
we may note the following examples: physies-
Heterences |1, 13, 15]: chemistry-references
[11, 22, 23]; rocketry-references [2, 25]; astronomy-
reference [9]; biology-reference [8]. An excellent
review of the stabilized free radical field is con-
tained in reference [3]. Italic numbers in brackets
above and in the text refer to the papers listed
in the bibliography at the end of the paper.
181
fragments (i.e., free radicals), some of them
will, upon condensing on the cold surface be
surrounded by inert species. In this event,
as diffusion can hardly occur at such low
temperatures, radicals trapped in this way
will stay where they are. They will be able
to react only when the temperature is in-
creased and they can break out of their
trap. To provide sufficient energy to break
up the gas molecules any one of a large
number of methods may be used. Among
the more commonly used ones are (1)
microwave discharge [1, 17], (2) photolysis
[17], and (8) heat [22, 23].
One may also produce and trap free
radicals by irradiating a solid which is kept
at low temperatures. Any sufficiently
energetic radiation will do the trick—xX-
rays, electrons, protons, neutrons, y-rays,
etc., 1.e. [77, 16, 19, 26). If the solid is kept
sufficiently cold the free radical produced in
this way may find a site where it is sur-
rounded by inert species and remain
trapped there indefinitely as long as the
temperature is kept low enough.
To observed stabilized free radicals and
obtain information about them, every known
property of the free radical is being ex-
ploited. Absorption and emission spectra in
all frequency ranges have been taken and
analyzed in order to try to identify the
species present. Calorimetric experiments
are being performed to measure the amount
of chemical energy stored in free radical
mixtures. Warmed up free radical mixtures
are chemically analyzed to look for clues as
to what free radicals were present at low
temperatures. Measurements of electric and
SMITHSONIAN
INSTITUTION YUL 1 6 i¥o8
182
magnetic susceptibilities are being per-
formed.
One of the most important of detection
techniques is that of electron spin resonance,
wherein the absorption of microwave energy
by a sample is observed as a function of an
externally applied magnetic field. The
detailed shape of this magnetic absorption
spectrum carries the “signature” of the
radical that absorbs the radiation, which
enables one to identify the species. ree
radicals, in general, have unpaired electron
spins and thus have large net magnetic
moments. The gross absorption of energy is
due to the flipping of the magnetic moment
of the unpaired electron from a low energy
state parallel to the magnetic field to the
higher energy state in the opposite direction.
The fine details in the absorption are due to
the interaction of the electronic magnetic
moment with the smaller magnetic moments
of the nuclei of the free radical.
PERCENTAGES OF RADICALS’ OF
SPECIES TRAPPED
These techniques have already provided
us with important information. Some of the
most impressive results are the positive
identifications of large varieties of free
radical species. Spectral lines from free
radical mixtures of oxygen and nitrogen
have quite convincingly been identified as
atomic oxygen and atomic nitrogen lines.
Among the simpler free radicals that have
been identified by spin resonance tech-
ques there are the hydrogen atom [/4, 16],
the nitrogen atom [7, 10] and the methyl
radical [11, 19]. Many more complicated
organic free radicals have also been identi-
fied.
There are still, however, formidable
problems involved in the full explanation
of the properties and composition of sta-
bilized free radical mixtures. More precisely,
although we can say in some cases that such
and such a free radical is present in a
mixture condensed at low temperatures
under given circumstances, we cannot as
yet give a full account of all of the species
present and of their numbers.
The question of the number of free
radicals stabilized is not only of prime
importance from the viewpoint of possible
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 6
fuel applications but is also basic to our
understanding of what is happening. Precise
measurements of free radical concentrations
are extremely difficult and due to un-
certainties in the kinds of chemical species
present, often do not lead to unambiguous
interpretations. Thus most of the results
obtained are to be regarded as the best
estimates of the experimenter—estimates
based upon his best guess as to what is
happening. In the following table are listed
some of these estimates for stabilized
atomic free radicals. Most of the experiments
listed in the table were done at liquid helium
temperatures. The percentages given are the
molar percentages, i.e., 1 percent H atoms
means 1 hydrogen atom for every 99
hydrogen molecules. The figures given in the
table are generally conservative ones, which
means low in all cases but the sixth ex-
periment listed, where the figure is Dr.
Harvey’s upper limit. It should be em-
phasized that this ‘‘conservative” estimate
is always on the basis of the particular _
physical assumption of the experimenter and
if one does not agree with this assumption
one can get far different values.
The calorimetry method involves a direct |
measurement of the amount of energy stored |
in the deposited mixture. To obtain a figure |
for the number of free radicals one must |
know what processes give up this energy. |
If one assumes that all of the energy yield is |
due to the recombination of nitrogen atoms |
or oxygen atoms, respectively, one obtains an |
estimate for the number of free radicals; by |
metering the gas flow an estimate of the |
concentration is obtained. In the most |
recent work of Minkoff and Scherber, they |
measure the difference in the amount of heat :
needed to bring the deposited mixture up to |
a given temperature for two cases—first
with no discharge and then when the gas
passes through a discharge. The difference is |
presumably the energy stored by the free |
radicals. The range in their oxygen atom |
determination is due to the different re- |
actions possible. If one assumes that the
energy is released as a result of ozone |
formation one gets the larger figure, about |
16 percent; assuming that we have oxygen |
molecule formation the number is of the
order of 6 percent.
JUNE 1958
When oxygen is passed through a dis-
charge and collected at 4°K, it forms a
colorless deposit which turns violet upon
heating. If one recovers the gases after
warming up the deposit and analyzes them
one finds that much ozone has been pro-
duced. The assumption is that O atoms are
trapped in the deposited mixture and that
during warm up they migrate and combine
with O: to form ozone. Assuming simple
chemical kinetics after warmup, Ruehrwein
computed back to the initial oxygen atom
concentration from the measured ozone yield.
Contradicting this evidence is the work of
Harvey, who finds little or no increase in
ozone concentration, as measured by in-
frared absorption, when the oxygen deposit
is warmed. He obtains the indicated figure
3 percent as an upper limit for the trapped
oxygen atom concentration.
The spin resonance estimates are obtained
from the intensity of the absorption lines as
well as from the line broadening which can
be related to concentration.
The last row, it should be noted, involves
the irradiation of a solid at low temper-
atures. The figure quoted is the saturation
value, the apparent maximum that can be
produced by irradiation.
Although there are apparently many
contradictory indications in the table, there
is really more agreement than meets the eye.
If one takes into account the fact that the
experiments of Broida and Lutes were earlier
ones, indeed the first experiments of their
kind, and subject to greater errors, their
results are not difficult to reconcile with
JACKSON: STABILIZED FREE RADICALS
183
those of Minkoff and Scherber. Indeed, they
both agree that one gets higher oxygen con-
centrations than nitrogen concentrations.
The result that does appear incompatible
with the others is Harvey’s negative result
with respect to increase of ozone absorption.
What are the possibilities of increasing
these percentages and how could one go
about doing this? Two methods have been
suggested, (1) adding an inert diluent and
(2) depositing in a strong magnetic field.
The idea of adding a diluent is that inert
atoms could serve as buffers between re-
active free radicals. Preliminary indications
are that this is true and one can get higher
percentages of free radicals this way—that is
if one computes the free radical percentage
as the ratio of atomic free radicals to
molecules made up of those atoms. If one
computes the free radical percentage as a
fraction of all species present, counting the
diluent atoms, one apparently does not get
an increase. The results, however, are not yet
conclusive.
If one considers two hydrogen atoms
coming together they can form a stable
molecule only when their spins are in
opposite directions. If there is no magnetic
field present, there is no energy difference
between two atomic spin states and they will
be able to adjust without trouble if they are
unfavorably aligned initially. Putting the
system in a magnetic field creates an energy
difference between the spin up and spin
down states. If initially their spins are
aligned unfavorably for molecule formation,
it takes energy to get them to flip their spins
TABLE 1.—F REE RapicaL CONCENTRATIONS
Detection method Method of producing radicals Species ee Research group
(1) Calorimetry Microwave discharge N .2 | Broida and Lutes [5]
(2) Calorimetry Microwave discharge N 6.0 Minkoff and Seherber [20]
(3) Calorimetry Microwave discharge O 1 | Broida and Lutes [5]
(4) Calorimetry Microwave discharge O | 6-16 | Minkoff and Scherber [20]
(5) Chemical analysis Microwave discharge O (Wena Ruehrwein, Edwards, Hash-
| man [24]
(6) Infrared absorption Microwave discharge O 3 Harvey [12]
(7) Spin resonance Microwave discharge H | Jen, Foner, et al [14, 15]
(8) Spin resonance Irradiation of HClO, H .O1-.1 Livingston, et al [16]
and H,O
184
before they can form a molecule. Thus if
the system is in a magnetic field, the process
of molecule formation may be retarded.
The energy difference between spin up and
spin down states is 2uoH, where po is the
Bohr magneton, 1.86 xX 10-*° ergs/gauss.
If the system is at T°K, then the field which
produces a magnetic energy difference of the
same order of magnitude as the thermal
energy is given by setting the magnetic
energy equal to kT (where k is Boltzmann’s
eonetant 138) >< l0n!°ere/cdesnee elvan!)
The result is H ~ 7400T. For such a method
to be effective in increasing free radical
percentages one clearly needs high fields
and low temperatures. Regardless of the
possible uses of such an arrangement it
would be interesting scientifically if such an
experiment were tried.
On the basis of spectroscopic studies of
the emission from condensed mixtures dur-
ing warmup we are obtaining indirect
evidence that odd molecular species are
being stabilized. When experiments are done
with nitrogen one observes a group of green
lines which can be attributed to the *D-*S
transition of atomic nitrogen [1, 4, 13].
In the same experiment, when there is a
small amount of oxygen impurity present,
lines are seen in the warmup which can be
attributed to the 18-'D electronic transition
of atomic oxygen [2/]. The question is, why
should one observe excited atomic lines in
the warmup. The nitrogen transition in the
gas state has a very long natural lifetime,
calculated to be about 20 hours. In a solid,
its lifetime should be much shorter, of the
order of seconds, depending on the sym-
metry of its site. The oxygen transition,
however, has a natural lifetime of only 0.9
second. In actual experiments performed,
the deposited material has been kept cold for
times much longer than this and even so
what is thought to be the 'S-1D transition is
still observed in the warmup. Indeed there
seems to be no relationship between the
length of time the free radical mixture is
kept at liquid helium temperature and the
subsequent intensity of the line during
warmup.
How does one explain this phenomenon?
Can one freeze in an electronically excited
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, NO. 6
state of an isolated atom? The answer, on
the basis of quantum mechanics is an un-
equivocal no. How then can one account
for what one sees? During warmup, trapped
atoms may become mobile and recombine.
This process yields large quantities of
energy, more than the energy needed to
cause the electronic excitation of an atom.
Although this is energetically possible, it
seems like a most unlikely route for the
energy to take. The most interesting hypoth-
esis is that excited but metastable mole-
cules are being trapped and_ stabilized.
According to this hypothesis, only when the
temperature becomes hot enough for the
molecule to break up will the atom be able
to radiate. Quantum mechanically, this 1s
possible. Of course, this too, seems like a
very unlikely kind of thing to be actually
happening and there are as yet no detailed
theoretical calculations indicating the sta-
bility of whatever molecule the oxygen
atom may be a part of. However, the ex-
perimental results, too, are very unlikely
and whatever the accepted explanation
ultimately will be, it will certainly be one
that will appear strange at first.
In conclusion, it should be emphasized
that only a small number of the interesting
results and new problems in the free radical
field were discussed. Most free radical ex-
periments, at this stage of the game, yield
ereat quantities of unexplained data. On
strictly a priori grounds, merely by virtue
of the fact that so much is still so strange
and so puzzling, the indications are that free
radical experiments are going to teach us
much that is new and much that is im-
portant about physical chemistry.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Bass, A. M., and Brora, H. P. Spectra emitted
from solid nitrogen condensed at 4.2°K from a
gas discharge. Phys. Rev. 101: 1740. 1956.
2. Baum, L., Grorr, H., Hormats, ewe ware
Mog, G. Research on ultra-energy fuels for
rocket propulsion. Aerojet-General Corpora-
tion Report 1149 (final), July 31, 1956.
3. Brora, H. P. Stabilization of free radicals at
low temperatures. Ann. New York Acad.
Sci. 67: 530. 1957.
and Herzreip, C. M. Interpretation of
spectra of atoms and molecules in solid
nitrogen condensed at 4.2°K. Phys. Rev.
101: 606. 1956.
4.
JUNE 1958
~I
ile
12.
a
14.
JACKSON:
and Lutrxs, O. 8. Abundance of free
atoms in solid nitrogen condensed at 4.2°K
from a gas discharge. Journ. Chem. Phys.
24: 484. 1956.
and PeuaM, J. R. Phosphorescence of
atoms and molecules of solid nitrogen at
4.2°K. Phys. Rev. 95: 845. 1954.
Seon HARDING, J. 1, PELLAM, J. R., and
Yost, D. M. EPR spectrum of solid nitrogen
afterglow at 4.2°K. Journ. Chem. Phys.
27: 593. 1957.
. CoMMONER, B., TowNsEnpD, J., and Paks,
G. I. Free radicals in biological materials.
Nature 174: 689. 1954.
. Donn, B., and Urry, H. C. Chemical heating
processes in astronomical objects. Mem. Soc.
R. Sc. Liége, sér. 4, 18.
MHONMEE SA ON. JEN, C. K., CockraANn, EL; l.,
and Bowers, V. A. Electron spin resonance
of nitrogen atoms trapped at liquid helium
temperature. Journ. Chem. Phys. 28: 351.
1958.
Gorpy, W., and McCormick, C. G. Micro-
wave investigations of radiation effects in
solids: Methyl and ethyl compounds of tin,
zinc, and mercury. Journ. Amer. Chem.
Soc. 78: 3248. 1946.
Harvey, H. Absorption spectroscopy of species
from electrical discharges condensed at low
temperatures, a paper delivered at the Free
Radicals Symposium at the National Bureau
of Standards, September 1957.
HERZFELD, C. M. Theory of the forbidden
transitions of nitrogen atoms trapped in
solids. Phys. Rev. 107: 1239. 1957.
JEN, C. K. Free radicals trapped at liquid
helium temperature and their identification
by electron spin resonance, a paper delivered
at the Free Radical Symposium at the
STABILIZED FREE RADICALS
16.
if
18.
9).
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
185
National Bureau of Standards, September
1957.
- =, OND ie ING, (COtimennt, 10, ly Airs!
Bowers, V. A. Paramagnetic resonance of
hydrogen atoms trapped at liquid helium
temperature. Phys. Rev. 104: 846. 1956.
Livineston, R., ZeEtpES, H., and Taytor, E.
H. Paramagnetic resonance studies of atomic
hydrogen produced by ionizing radiation.
Faraday Soc. Disc. no. 19. 1955.
Manvor, J. L. The stabilization of the methyl
radical. Journ. Chem. Phys. 22: 1617. 1954.
McCartnuy, R. L. Chemical synthesis from free
radicals produced in microwave fields. Journ.
Chem. Phys. 22: 1360. 1954.
Marueson, M., and SMautuEr, B. Paramagnetic
species produced by gamma-irradiation of
organic compounds. To be published.
Minkorr, G. J., ScuerRBER, F. I., and Gat-
LAGHER, J. S. Abundance of active species
trapped at 4.2°K from gaseous discharges.
To be published.
Pryron, M., and Brorpa, H. P. Luminescence
de l’azote solide (4.2°K) contenant des atomes
ou radicaux libres. Effet de la dilution par
Vargon. Journ. Phys. Rad. 18: 593. 1957.
Rice, F. O., and Freamo, M. The formation
of the imine radical in the electrical discharge.
Journ. Amer. Chem. Soc. 75: 548. 1953.
and GRELECKI, C. The imine radical.
Journ. Amer. Chem. Soc. 79: 1880. 1957.
RUEHRWEIN, R. A., and Hasuman, J. S.
The formation of ozone from atomic oxygen at
low temperature. Submitted for publication
in Journ. Chem. Phys.
SzEGo, G. C., and Mick, E. A. A look at free
radicals. Astronautics, January 1958.
VEGARD, L. The spectra of solidefied gases and
theoretical atomic meaning. Ann. Phys.
6: 487. 1930.
Man is preeminently a creative animal, predestined to strive consciously for
an object and to engage in engineering—that is, incessantly and eternally to
make new roads, wherever they may end—Fropvor DostTorVskt.
186
JCURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, No. 6
ENTOMOLOGY —Two new species in the genus Armigeres Theobald, 1901, from
northern Thailand (Diptera: Culicidae).'! DEED C. THURMAN, JR.,2 AND ERNES-
TINE B. THURMAN.®
(Received April 4, 1958)
During an investigation of the species of
vectors and potential vectors of malaria and
other mosquito-borne diseases 1n northern
Thailand in connection with the expanded
malaria and filariasis control program being
conducted in that nation, two undescribed
forms of Armigeres Theobald, 1901, were
found. Though the descriptions are based on
single female specimens, the characters as
noted are not those of the currently recog-
nized species of Armzgeres.
Armigeres (Armigeres) bhayungi, n. sp.
Female medium sized, 5mm. Palpi, proboscis,
and tarsi dark, unbanded. Clypeus bare. Pos-
terior pronotal lobes with dorsal patch of narrow
dark scales. Sternites, propleura, and forecoxae
white scaled.
Head: Proboscis, palpi, and clypeus dark. Palpi
one-sixth length proboscis. Clypeus bare. Torj
with white scales on inner and dorsal surfaces.
Vertex with flat metallic blue scales, flat creamy
scales in midline on basal half; few upright
dark scales at nape; eye border of flat creamy
1 Miscellaneous Publication No. 294, Contri-
bution No. 2828, of the Maryland Agricultural
Experiment Station, Department of Entomology.
Acknowledgment is made of the support pro-
vided by the Division of Research Grants,
National Institutes of Health, U.S. Public Health
Service, under Grant E 809 awarded to William
E. Bickley, Department of Entomology, Uni-
versity of Maryland; and to the U.S. Operations
Mission to Thailand, International Cooperation
Administration; and the assistance rendered by
the United States National Museum, and by
Dr. Alan Stone of the Entomology Research
Division, United States Department of Agricul-
ture.
2 Sanitarian, Division of International Health,
U. S. Public Health Service, assigned as Regional
Malaria Control Adviser for Northern Thailand
with the U. S. Operations Mission to Thailand,
International Cooperation Administration. (Mr.
Thurman died suddenly in Chiengmai after having
served more than two years there. This manu-
script was completed by the junior author. )
3 Sanitarian (R), Division of Research Grants,
U.S. Public Health Service, formerly assigned as
Malaria Control Training Adviser with the U.S.
Operations Mission to Thailand, International
Cooperation Administration.
scales contiguous with lateroventral white
patches.
Thorax: Mesonotum with narrow, dark,
metallic blue scales; creamy scales form border
from front to wing roots; anterior pronotal lobes
and posterior pronotal lobes with flat white
scales, with few narrow, curved dark scales and
dark setae on dorsal portions; propleura and
forecoxae white scaled; patches on pleura white;
two lower mesepimeral bristles present; pre-
scutellum and scutellum dark scaled; capitu-
lum of halteres dark metallic blue; wings all
dark scaled; forelegs dark with femora white
beneath; midlegs dark with dark upper edge of
femora increasing in width from base to apex on
posterior surface; hind legs dark, femora white
to apex on anterior and ventral surfaces.
Abdomen: Tergal scales dark brownish with
blue metallic luster; small lateral semicircular
patches of white scales; all sternites with white
scales.
In general habitus A. bhaywngi appears near
Armigeres jugraensis (Leicester, 1908), Armigeres
malayt (Theobald, 1901), or Armigeres kuchin-
gensis Edwards, 1915, differing from the first
by having a light border around the front of the
mesonotum and having the forecoxae all white
scaled, and from A. malayi by having a definite
broad white mesonotal border to the wing bases
and the clypeus bare. It differs from the last
species by having dark blue metallic scales on
the mesonotum and dark scales on the dorsal
portion of the posterior pronotal lobes. In A.
kuchingensis the forecoxae and the sternites
II-VI may be all white scaled or show patches
of bronzy scales, while sternite VI is dark with
a subapical light band. In the holotype of A.
bhayungi the forecoxae and all sternites are white
scaled.
Holotype, female, USNM 63910. Male and
immature stages are unknown.
Type locality: Tad Muey Falls on Doi (Moun-
tain) Sutep, Chiengmai Province, Thailand,
elevation 4,000 feet. A single female was netted
by Manop Rattanapradith in a shady jungle
area near Tad Muey Falls (DC & EB Thurman
collection * M-545), February 15, 1953.
JUNE 1958
This species is named in honor of the late Dr.
Luang Bhayung Vejjasastr, director general
of the Department of Health, Ministry of Public
Health of Thailand, in recognition of his out-
standing achievements as a pioneer in the malaria
control program in Thailand, and in appreciation
for the privilege of having known him as a
friend and coworker during our assignment in
his nation.
Armigeres (Leicesteria) vimoli, n. sp.
Female medium sized, 5 mm. Palpi, proboscis,
and tarsi dark, unbanded. Clypeus bare. Abdom-
inal markings of white scales.4 Light scales on
thorax light yellow or drab white. -
‘Head: Palpi dark, a little longer than one-
half length of proboscis. Proboscis dark metallic
blue with ventral line of bluish-white scales.
Clypeus bare. Tori with white scales medially
placed and few gray ones above. First flagellar
segment with white scales. Occiput with dark
blue scales, light yellow scales around margin of
eyes,‘ in lateral patch, and at nape; few upright,
forked, light scales at nape; lateral patch followed
by dark patch; light scales under the head.
Thorax: Distinctly produced over the head;
bronzy-brown, narrow curved scales on mes-
onotum; pale yellow, broad shaggy scales on
front margin around to wing bases; drab tan
scales over wing bases, in midline on prescutellum,
and on mid and lateral lobes of scutellum. Pos-
terior pronotal lobes with pale yellow, shaggy
seales and a few hght weak bristles. Upper portion
of propleura with drab white scales, lower
portion with black scales. All other pleura light
scaled. Lower mesepimeral bristles absent.
Capitulum of halteres dark scaled. Wing scales
dark grayish brown, few tan scales at base of
costa; posterior and anterior cross veins sepa-
rated by the length of the latter. Legs: Forecoxae
light scaled with central patch of black; femora
dark above, white below; tibiae shorter than
4Since the initial writing of the description,
the specimen has become oily, and the white
scales now appear yellowish. The scales around
the eye margins are rubbed.
THURMAN AND THURMAN: TWO NEW SPECIES OF ARMIGERES 187
mid and hind tibiae, dark above, light below;
tarsi dark. Midcoxae white scaled; femora dark
anteriorly, few light scales in apical fringe,
light underneath; tibiae dark above, light below;
tarsi dark. Hind coxae white; femora dark on
narrow dorsum, light on sides and beneath,
tibiae dark above, light below; tarsi dark.
Abdomen: Tergites dark with scales of bluish
metallic luster; subapical lateral white spots
visible dorsally on tergites I[II-VI. Tergite
VIII with basal white spot. Lateral markings
all white. On tergite II lateral markings abruptly
angles, on tergites [II-VII not markedly concave,
the upper margin being almost straight. Sternite
II all white. Sternites III-VII with narrow apical
dark bands (grayish brown); VIII all drab
white scaled.
Holotype, female. USNM 63217. Male and
immature stages are unknown.
Type locality: Doi (Mountain) Sutep,
Chiengmai Province, Thailand, February 21,
1953 (Deedi- Ce ihurmant Jn WC. BT
collection *558). A single female was netted
while flying over a small stream in a shady
jungle valley, elevation 2,000 feet, near a rest
cabin owned by an American Missionary, Dr.
Richard Buker. This female was collected in
association with specimens of Armaigeres
annulitarsts Leicester, 1908, Armigeres longi-
palpus Leicester, 1904, and Aedes spp. A second
female which appears to be conspecific with 4.
vimolt was netted in the same location at the
same time by Manop Rattanopradith; however,
the specimen is damaged, and it is impossible
to make a positive determination.
In habitus A. vimolt appears to be
Armigeres digitatus Edwards, 1914, or Armageres
pectinatus Edwards, 1914, though differing in the
coloring and type of the scales on the posterior
pronotal lobes, A. vimolz possessing pale yellow,
shagey scales while the other two species have
white, flat scales.
It is a pleasure to name this species for Dr.
Vimol Notananda, Malaria Control Officer in
Chiengmai, a friend and coworker who is con-
tributing much to the control of malaria in
northern Thailand.
near
188
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, NO. 6
ICHTHYOLOGY —A new species of iniomous fish from the Gulf of Mexico. GILES
W. Meap, United States Fish and Wildlife Service.
(Received April 14, 1958)
The iniomous family Aulopidae is com-
posed of three genera. Hime includes H.
japonicus (Ginther, 1880: 72), which is
known from various localities in the western
Pacific, and H. damast (Tanaka, 1915:
340), from Japan. The Australian Latro-
piscis includes two closely related species,
L. purpurissatus (Richardson, 1843: 6)
and L. milesi (Cuvier and Valenciennes,
1849: 521; roy. ed. p. 386). Aulopus, hereto-
fore known only from the Mediterranean
Sea and adjacent Atlantic waters, includes
A. filamentosus Cloquet (1816: 128), pals
tirus (Rafinesque, 1810: 56), A. Jlacerta
(Risso, 1826: 463), A. filifer Valenciennes
(1836: 73), A. maculatus Valenciennes
(1836: 74), A. cadenati Poll (1953: 81) and
the new species described below. Although
Aulopus lacerta, filifer and maculatus are
conventionally included within the syn-
onymy of A. filamentosus, such allocation 1s
questionable. Not all of the differences
among the published descriptions can be
attributed to sexual dimorphism. Material
which would permit a review of the eastern
Atlantic forms is not now available.
I am indebted to G. E. Maul of the Museu
Muncipal do Funchal, Funchal, Madeira;
Dr. Enrico Tortonese, Museum of Natural
History, Genoa, Italy; and Dr. Max Poll,
Musée Royal du Congo Belge, Tervuren,
Belgium, for comparative specimens of
Aulopus filamentosus and A. cadenati trom
off Madeira, Italy, and equatorial Africa.
Aulopus nanae, n. sp.
(hig abled)
Holotype: A male specimen 223.0 mm in
standard length caught in the Gulf of Mexico
off Tortugas, Fla., by the United States Fish
and Wildlife Service exploratory vessel Oregon
at station number 1025 (April 19, 1954; 25°
12’ N. lat., 84° 05’ W. long.; 75 fathoms; 40-foot
flat shrimp trawl). USNM 158985.
Diagnosis: Similar to the eastern Atlantic
Aulopus filamentosus but differing principally
in the number of predorsal scales (12 cf. 15-16
in A. filamentosus), number of scales in lateral
line (48 cf. 52), number of vertebrae (48 including
the hypural cf. 51-52), the width of the bony
interorbital (3.6 percent of standard length cf.
4.1-5.0 percent), the length of the ventral fin
(27.6 percent cf. 19.6-25.6) and the length of
the anal fin, the last ray of which is much longer
than the depth of the fish measured at origin
of anal fin (15.2 percent of standard length cf.
7.6-9.6 in eastern Atlantic A. filamentosus males;
7.7 in A. cadenatt).
Description: The counts and proportional
measurements of the single known specimen of
Aulopus nanae are given in the first column of
Table 1.
Body subcylindrical, broadest at origin of
pectoral fin. Snout depressed, the ventral profile
nearly straight from tip of lower jaw to caudal
peduncle. Body deepest at origin of dorsal fin,
this depth 1.8 in length of head. Depth of body
at origin of anal fin 2.6 in head; least depth of
caudal peduncle 4.5 in length of head.
Top of head, snout and mandible naked.
Cheeks, opercles, body and base of caudal fin
scaled. Lateral line complete, terminating over
base of micaudal ray and formed of scales each
of which bears a simple tube but is otherwise
similar to the scales adjacent to the lateral line.
Scales on head and sides of body ctenoid, those
on ventral surface cycloid. Body scales relatively
large and imbricate, the cteni numerous and
irregular in size. Scales in axil of pectoral fin
lacking cteni and more closely imbricate than
body scales but of similar size and shape. Scales
in axil of pelvic fin vertically elongate but not
greatly enlarged.
Length of head 3.3 in standard length. Length
of snout 3.6 in length of head; lower Jaw termi-
nal. Nostril located about two-thirds of distance
from tip of snout to anterior edge of orbit.
Septum between anterior and posterior nostril
with a simple cirrus, the length of which is about
one-half the width of the bony interorbital. Eye
irregularly circular, entering into dorsal profile,
its horizontal diameter 4.3 in length of head. Iris
round. Horizontal diameter of orbit greater than
vertical. A notch along lower edge of orbit. Width
JUNE 1958
TABLE 1.—CouNTs AND PROPORTIONAL MEASUREMENTS (IN PERCENT OF STANDARD LEN
MEAD: NEW SPECIES OF INIOMOUS FISH
FROM THE TYPE OF AULOPUS NANAE AND COMPARATIVE EASTERN ATLANTIC SPECIMENS OF
A. FILAMENTOSUS AND A. CADENATI
189
GTH) TAKEN
Aulopus Aulopus
Aulopus cadenati, cadenatt,
alee ce. Aulopus Aulopus Aulopus ee pee
USNM ’ filamento- jfilamento- | filamento- Corte are
158985: sus; male; | sus; female;} sus; male; 95184: 951823:
male; Gulf Madeira Madeira Azores ae male: J
of Mexico tropical tropical
West Africa |West Africa
Counts:
IDIGIRSEL LENG 5 ~ 9: SBR eee See tae 1514 1616 15% 15% 14% 144%
PAELEL id TPE NS eine os wrcrascodinesl noe a cae 124% 12% 11% 11% 11% 124%
IPECOIE | ITs cae ean no 12/13 13/13 12/13 12/13 13/14 13/13
We miner et a. te Ney rg ww ee 9/9 9/9 9/9 9/9 9/9 9/9
CENGIDI Is 3 355 ete eee nee eae ee Se eee I—17-I I—17-I I—17-I I—17-I I—17-I I—17-I
Branehiestecalurays 4s... cyan coe ks eoee ee 15/16 16/16 16/16 16/16 15/16 16/16
Gallirakersm(tirst arch): 23. es oe fon ees 3+1+10 2+1+11 3+1+10 3+1+10 2+1+10 3+1+9
WORIGIOIER®. « dogc oe Beene eae nae 47+1 51+1 50-++1 50+1 49+] 49+]
Scalessmplatenslolimes 0... co cw iee cee sceerias eel 48 52 52 52 50 51
iPinaclorsall soles ata ie aan ore 12 15 15 16 13 13
Measurements:
Stamdancduleme tle (MM): issn e ccc esdecees nade s 223.0 292.0 278.0 217.0 197.0 TY
Weptheatroricimron dorsal fin.......4....--.+-2.2.s«.. 16.6 18.3 15.5 15.9 16.5 17.9
Depimatorciniof anal fins -..........00..00)2%.-... 11.7 11.8 ils 10.4 2 11.8
Depthyationgzin of adipose fin..........-.....2....+.- 9.4 9.9 9.9 9.4 9.8 9.7
ieastidepth of caudal peduncle....................... 6.6 7.0 6.5 6.9 6.4 | 6.1
Width of body at pectoral fin base.................... 15.0 14.6 14.9 = 15.8 16.6
iengthvot head (greatest). (20.00.00. eonc ss cwe lence. 30.0 31.5 30.4 30.4 31.5 32.4
Snout to uppermost point of gill opening............. 20.6 22.6 22.4 20.6 22.9 22.9
LEMGHA OF SOUR Ge eee ee eee ee 8.3 9.2 9.0 7.8 9.9 9.0
lonizontalidiameter Of eye... ....:.-....... 640.0000. 6.9 6.5 6.6 7.4 8.1 8.6
Werticaladiameter of Cye... 22.05... oe ele b esc kc.. 6.3 558} 5.7 6.0 6.5 6.6
Hostotbitaimlenethrot head 2. .2.<<).0.0cse.6«scee enn. 15.8 16.3 16.0 15.7 15.9 16.8
Posterior edge of eye to uppermest point of gill open-
DE eRe ee ee od Beene eS 5.6 lee, here, 6.5 6.0 6.5
WWadthtotsbonysinterorbitall.... 3.0: 0.44..5.--205.5.-- 3.6 4.8 4.3 4.J S58 ido Uleee sae
Menger imotmonemaxilary, cen. ncsaoseecaednseer... 14.6 16.1 15.8 1B.7 TRS
SHoumeororigimyof dorsal fin’.....................0... 36.4 37.7 B24 36.9 37.6 38.5
SUOUtLOLonm=imroranall fine.) ......0....0.4...0000 es 68.8 72.8 73.5 733 73.9 | 74.1
SHommioomeinvor pectoral fim —..................... 29.6 Blo a 31.5 30.6 32.0 32.5
SHOuUttOOrieimiot ventral fin’ -...............4....... 34.9 38.7 38.5 36.6 38.1 37.8
Origin of dorsal fin to origin of anal fin............... 38.3 38.0 37.8 40.4 38.9 39.8
Origin of ventral fin to origin of anal fin.............. 35.6 36.2 36.0 35.9 37.4 36.3
End of base of dorsal fin to origin of anal fin......... 18.8 19.0 19.2 20.3 20.1 20.2
ATU HO OMAN Oi AMON TiN, esse eaeee eke dddeueens te. 10.5 9.4 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.8
Kengthvotsbaseiof dorsalifin’........5...........-... 21.7 21.4 21.1 21.0 20.0 20.2
Weng thwotsbase of analofin.. 2. .6..4.).... 0625202, 13.9 12. AUS ia 1S5 11.4
Origin of dorsal fin to tip of longest ray (fin depressed). = 40.4 29.6 33.2 27.4 30.3
Origin of anal fin to tip of longest ray (fin depressed). . 29.1 2 illent 16.7 19.1 18.0 19.6
Wenetheotisecond dorsal ray, -9).5..)...2.0.......0 02. = 39.4 16.5 28.8 16.2 19.8
Length of penultimate dorsal ray..................... 18.6 15.9 9.9 14.7 9.4 11.9
enotheomsecond anal rays ss) .4.24..54.0.4...555.05. 12.8 11.0 8.6 10.6 8.4 10.3
Length of penultimate anal ray...................... 16.6 9.7 6.5 9.0 6.5 7.9
Pencthpotwlastranaliray ss)... 44.06.6240 6.. we. 15.2 9.6 5.8 7.6 G25 7.7
emeuhwotsoectoraly ime: 5. asssocneck hee ese cae: = 16.3 14.7 16.6 16.4 16.0
Wengtlwofiventral fimy) 2 y6 006 oe escsdcce ne ccc c eden. 27.6 24.6 19.6 25.6 | 20.3 20.2
of fleshy interorbital slightly greater than vertical
diameter of eye. Width of bony interorbital 1.9
in horizontal diameter of eye. Opercular flap
long and thin, extending posteriorly below and
beyond origin of pectoral fin, the posterior edge
formed by the subopercle.
Maxillary extending to below posterior fourth
of eye, its length 2.1 in length of head, expanded
posteriorly,
and bearing two supramaxillaries,
the larger of which overlies the posterior half of
the maxillary. Angle of gape below center of eye.
Anterior and lateral surfaces of lower jaw rugose.
Teeth on mandible, tongue and premaxillary,
vomer, and palatine bones. Symphysis of lower
broad band of
jaw edentulous. Rami with
pointed, conical teeth which
a
are straig
ht
or
190
———
slightly recurved. The mner teeth of this band
are longer than the outer, and are depressible.
Most of the larger outer mandibular teeth are
depressible; the smaller are fixed. A broad longi-
tudinal band of minute teeth on tongue. Teeth
on premaxillary in a broad band similar to those
on the mandible; the inner largest, conical and
pointed, slightly recurved and depressible; the
center smaller with some larger depressible teeth
and a greater number of smaller fixed teeth. A
patch of depressible teeth of various sizes on the
vomer, the series continuous across root of mouth
anteriorly. Two rows of conical teeth on each
palatine, the inner teeth longer and more easily
depressible than the outer. (The palatine teeth in
larger comparative specimens of A. filamentosus
from Madeira are in a broad band, those on a
fish of intermediate size from the Azores are
intermediate between a band and two parallel
rows. These rows probably fuse to form a band
with growth.)
Gill rakers present on first and second arches.
Those on first arch bear spines along the inner
side and at the tip; those on the second are cov-
ered with spines throughout, and on the third and
fourth arches patches of spines on the arches
themselves replace the gill rakers. Those on the
first arch are of moderate length; that at the
angle of the arch is about the same length as the
opposing gill filament.
Distance from snout to insertion of pectoral
fin 3.4 in standard length, the fin short, extending
to beneath the base of the seventh dorsal ray.
The upper two pectoral rays simple, the re-
mainder branched. Distance from snout to
origin of ventral fin 2.9 in standard length and
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
SSS
Fracure 1.—Aulopus nanae, holotype, U.S.N.M. 188985.
vou. 48, NO. 6
(Drawn by Nancy W. Mead.)
about equal to predorsal length. Ventral fin
long, 1.1 in length of head, extending beyond
anus. The first and last rays are simple, the rest
branched. The ends of the anterior four rays are
thickened. Snout to origin of dorsal fin 2.8 in
standard length, the fin long and high. (The an-
terior rays, which are filamentous in male A.
filamentosus but not greatly produced in 4A.
cadenati, may be broken in this specimen.)
Length of penultimate dorsal ray 1.2 in length of
base of dorsal. Anterior two dorsal rays simple.
Adipose fin inserted over sixth anal ray, its
length equal to width of base of ventral fin. Snout
to origin of anal fin 1.5 in standard length;
length of base of anal fin 2.2 in length of head.
Height of fin (insertion to tip, fin depressed) al-
most equal to length of head. Length of penulti-
mate anal ray much greater than depth of body
at origin of anal fin, 1.8 in length of head. Dis-
tance from end of base of dorsal fin to origin of
anal fin 5.3 in standard length. Anus to insertion
of anal fin 2.8 in length of head.
Color in alcohol: Head purple, body yellowish
with purple blotches of irregular size and not
bilaterally symmetrical. Pectoral and anal fins
colorless. Ventral fins, especially the thickened
tips of the anterior rays, reddish. Tips of anterior
four dorsal rays black, the rest of the fin dusky.
Caudal fin dusky with a darker spot on the middle
of each lobe.
NOMENCLATORIAL NOTE ON AULOPUS
FILAMENTOSUS
Under the name of “der Borstenlachs,” Bloch
(1792: 424, pl. 9) described and illustrated a fish
specimen from Livorno, Italy. No scientific name
JUNE 1958 MEAD: NEW
was given for this species, which he recognized
as new. C. 8. Rafinesque-Schmaltz (1810: 56)
described but did not figure a new Mediterranean
species, Salmo tirus. This fish, probably identical
with Bloch’s ‘“‘Borstenlachs”’, has been considered
a synonym of Aulopus filamentosus since that
hame combination was first proposed in 1816.
This name combination appeared twice in the
French dictionaries of 1816. Both entries were
based on a Cuvier manuscript. Bose (1816: 78)
proposed Aulopus as a subgenus of Salmo; his
entry was not accompanied by a diagnosis or
description. Cloquet (1816, suppl. p. 128) ac-
corded Aulopus full generic status and published
a short diagnosis of A. filamentosus. Cuvier’s
description followed a year later (1817: 170).
It now seems likely that there are several
species of Aulopus in the eastern Atlantic. In the
absence of adequate series of eastern Atlantic and
Mediterranean specimens, it is impossible to
determine whether or not Rafinesque’s poorly
described Salmo tirus is identical with the Awulo-
pus filamentosus of Cuvier or the ‘“Borstenlachs’”’
of Bloch. Aulopus filamentosus is used here for
the eastern Atlantic form typified by Cuvier’s
description and Bloch’s figure in preference to
Rafinesque’s earlier but at present dubious
species. The trivial name should be credited to
Bosc or Cloquet, not to Bloch (a common prac-
tice) or to Cuvier (prevalent in the Italian litera-
ture).
SPECIES
OF INIOMOUS FISH 191
LITERATURE CITED
Buocu, Marcus Enieser. Beschreibung zweier
neuen Fische. Schrift. Ges. nat. Freunde
Berlin 10: 422-424, tab. 9. 1792.
Bosc, L. A. G. Aulopus filamentosus, in Nouveau
dictionnaire d’hist. nat., appl. aux arts, a
VOOURMC, » s+ Oe (is. anes, Wile,
CLoquet, H. Aulopus filamentosus, in Dic-
tionnaire des scien. nat... .3: suppl., p. 128.
Paris and Strasbourg, 1816.
Cuvier, G. L. C. F. D. Le régne animal ... ed.
il, 748 GS joo. Wares, ISIZ.
and VALENCIENNES, ACHILLE. Histoire
naturelle des poissons 22: 532 pp. (roy. ed.,
395 pp.). Paris, 1849.
GUNTHER, ALBERT. Revort on the shore fishes. Rep.
Sci. Res. Challenger ..., Zool. 1 (6): 82 pp.,
32 pls. 1880.
Pout, Max. Poissons. III Téléostéens Malacop-
térygiens. Expéd. Océanogr. Belge .. . (1948-
1949), Res. Sei. 4(2): 258 pp., 8 pls. 1953.
RaAFINESQUE-SCHMALTZ, C. S. Caratteri di alcuni
nuovr genery... Sicilia, 105 pp., 20 pls.
Palermo, 1810.
RicHaRDsON, JOHN. [cones piscium, 8 pp., 5 pls.
London, 1843.
Risso, ANTOINE. Histoire naturelle des principales
productions de l’Kurope meridionale... 3:
480 pp., 16 pls. Paris and Strasbourg, 1826.
TANAKA, SHIGEHO. igures and descriptions of the
fishes of Japan ...19: 319-342, pls. 91-95.
1915.
VALENCIENNES, ACHILLE. Ichthyologie des iles
Canaries ...in Webb, P. B., and Berthelot,
S., Hzstotre naturelle des tiles Canaries 2(2):
109 pp., 25 pls. Paris, 1836-44.
The most beautiful thing we can experience is the mysterious. It is the source
of all true science and art.— EINSTEIN.
192
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 6
ICHTHYOLOGY :—Garmannia zebrella, a new gobsid fish from Trinidad, with
notes on the species of the subgenus Tigrigobius Fowler.’ C. RicHarp RoBINs,
Marine Laboratory, University of Miami. (Communicated by E. A. Lachner.)
(Received March 24, 1958)
Recently the writer and James E. Béhlke
compared some gobiid fishes from Florida,
the Bahamas, and other stations in the
Gulf and Caribbean. It was apparent that
the name Garmannia macrodon (Beebe and
Tee-Van) had been applied to two distinct
but closely related species, the second of
which is described below as new.
Apart from the original descriptions little
additional information has been forthcoming
on Garmannia macrodon and G. pallens
Ginsburg. Recent collections in the Florida
Keys enable the writer to provide descrip-
tive and behavioral notes on macrodon.
For the loan of material and for helpful
information and many kindnesses received
at their respective institutions I am in-
debted to James E. Boéhlke of the Academy
of Natural Sciencies of Philadelphia and
Leonard P. Schultz of the United States
National Museum. Giles W. Mead, Ernest
A. Lachner, and Robert H. Kanazawa have
aided me in many ways during my visits to
the National Museum. I am especially
indebted to Isaac Ginsburg for advice and
for providing unpublished data on G.
pallens.
This study represents a portion of the
work supported by the National Science
Foundation (NSF-G-3881) and constitutes a
technical report to that organization. The
writer gratefully acknowledges this assistance.
Garmannia zebrella, n. sp.
Fig. 1, Tables 1-2
2?Gobiosoma multifasciatum, Metzelaar, 1919: 139
(misidentification; for account of this record see
Ginsburg, 1933: 55). ?>Koumans, 1931: 53 (ap-
parently based on Metzelaar’s material).
Gobiosoma macrodon, Fowler, 1931: 401 (mis-
identification; characters in part, incorrectly
described). Ginsburg, 1933: 53 (in part: Curagao
records probably referable to zebrella).
Material examined.—The holotype, ANSP
53387 (standard length, 21.0 mm) and two
1 Contribution No. 197 of the Marine Lab-
oratory, University of Miami.
paratypes, ANSP 53388 and ANSP 53389
(standard lengths 16.1 and 15.5, respectively)
were collected at Monos Island, Trinidad, on
June 27, 1950, by L. Wehekind.
Diagnosis—In preservative, a straw-colored
goby with 13 prominent and sharply defined
dark brown bands on the body behind the
pectoral fin. Six additional bands in front of the
pectoral fin. Body naked with a few modified
ctenoid scales at the caudal base and on the
posterior portion of the body. Spinous dorsal
of seven elements, the first filamentous. Distance
between spines 5 and 6 and 6 and 7 much greater
than between any of the first five spines. Dark
bands fairly broad, subequal to the light-colored
interspaces. Two large and very prominent
canines in anterior portion of inner row of teeth
on the lower jaw.
Description Thirteen dark brown bands
cross the body behind the pectoral fin. They
are arranged as follows: the first crosses the
dorsum in front of the insertion of the dorsal
fin but not in contact with it. This band slopes
slightly caudad to pass immediately behind the
insertion of the pectoral fin. It is not continued
across the midline of the belly but a faint sugges-
tion is present on each side of the base of the
pelvic disc at a point opposite the lower end of
the band. The next three bands pass through
the base of the spinous dorsal and each is rep-
resented by an adjacent dark squarish mark in
the fin membrane. These three bands, as well
as all posterior ones, become thinner and some-
what less distinct on the venter. The first of
eroup of three bands does not cross the mid-
ventral line but the others do although the mid-
ventral portion is poorly defined. Five bands
pass around the body through the base of the
second dorsal fin in a manner similar to those
under the first dorsal. A square blotch, fused to
the band, extends for some distance upward in
the fin membrane. The first of these five bands
circles the belly just behind the genital papilla
and in advance of the anal-fin insertion. Three
of the remaining four circle the belly under the
anal-fin base and the fourth passes just caudad
JUNE 1958 ROBINS: NEW GOBIID FISH FROM TRINIDAD 193
TaBLE 1.—FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTIONS OF FIN-RAY COUNTS IN GARMANNIA MACRODON
AND GARMANNIA ZEBRELLA
Dorsal spines Dorsal rays Anal rays Pectoral rays | Caudal rays
Species a Re
VI vit 11 12 9 10 11 16 17 18 19 16. | 47
GRMOCrOdOn. ....<....-- 1 Aly s Sule 8 3 36* 3) 4 69* | 11 — 4 37
Gueeprella 05... 20.) 3 2 1 — 3 — — | — 4 Z, -- 3
TABLE 2.—FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTIONS OF Bopy PRoportTIONS EXPRESSED IN HUNDREDTHS
OF STANDARD LENGTH
Species and size range in eleag! lenge eae Camm
millimeters
WS | Dr | DB 29 30 31 32 33 34 5 6 if 8 9 10
G. macrodon:
>30 1};—|]— 1 — oo — — — if 1};—/—}]—] —
25-29 — 1 5 4 3 2 — — == = 5 8 1}; —)|—
20-24 = | = 2 1 3 3 = == = —= | — 3 4 1) —
<20 — 1 2 1 6 3 1 Il 1 — | — if 6 3
G. zebrella:
16-21 —|—|— — 2 1 — — — — | — | — 2 1} —
Prevent Depth at vent
M1 55 | 56 | Sr) SB | SO 60 61 @ | & 1B | I@ | 2 21 22
G. macrodon:
>30 —|— 1 1}; —}]— —— — — — — | — | — — 2
25-29 — 1 3 6/— 3 1 —— —- 2 — 2 3 5 4
20-24 — | —|— 2, 2; 33 il — — — — 1 yy 4 2
<20 1}—]— 2 2 3 5 — _ 1 1 it 3 Beale ed
G. zebrella: |
16-21 — | —|]—] — 1 | — — 2 — — — | — | — 2 1
Length of pectoral fin Depth at nape
DS | 2 | OR | 3 | DB | BO 31 32 33 34 AO | Ot || op 230 eens
G. macrodon:
> 30 — 2;/—/—)—|— -— — — — 1 | — 1 - aa
25-29 2, 2 2, 3 Il 3 — = — — 2 2 Onley _-
20-24 | By. Bla) Si tr} = = — cee Ee os -
<20 —|;—|— il il 2 4 1 2, — 4 5 5 2 1
G. zebrella: |
16-21 1}—;}/—]—] — 1 —- a a 1 = 2 1 — —
Predorsal length Length of pelvic fin
Se SIs SP SE SS SG NAGS I I IO oy She See pe oxy ox | 9575 26") 128. |.-28
G. macrodon: |
>30 — 1 | — 1};/—/}—/-I—-—| 11 1;—/—{|—/]—/]—]—|—-—j—
25-29 1} — 1 I 5 4/2i——| 1 5 4 3/—|— il — | —
20-24 —|— il Z il 3/1) uo —}] — 2 3 1 2 -| -
<20 —|—|— 3 3 LS 1} — 1 2 ase 3 3 3 1); — l
G. zebrella:
16-21 —|—|— 2/—}—]1l-— 1| — 1 - l —
194
cof the insertion of the last anal ray. All are well
defined ventrally. Two bands circle the caudal
peduncle and do not contact any fin. The twelfth
of the thirteen bands on the body behind the
pectoral fin circles the body through several
‘anterior procurrent caudal rays. The final band
is incomplete on the dorsal and ventral surfaces
and extends as a vertical bar external to the
posterior edge of the hypural plate and thus
near the bases of the main caudal rays.
Six bands are present in advance of the pectoral
fin making 19 bands in all on the fish. The first,
a single medium band, extends from the tip of
the snout across the upper lip (not visible on
Fig. 1). It continues after a slight gap on the
lower lip and ends on the mid-gular region. The
‘second band begins medial to and slightly be-
hind the posterior nostril and continues down-
ward and forward across the medial surface of
the tubular anterior nostril, across the upper
lip, and onto the lower lip. It is interrupted here
but continues caudad across the branchiostegal
membranes in somewhat irregular fashion. Band
three is almost semicircular in outline; starting
on the midline of the nape and then splitting to
both sides, it extends onto the upper surface of
the eye, continues downward across the anterior
margin of the eye and then caudad across the
posterior end of the maxillary where it ends.
A slight mark on the lower cheek and another
on the branchiostegal membranes represent
its continuation. The band actually splits on
the upper edge of the eye to form a small open
circle but owing to the dark pigment of the eye
this is not easily seen. Bands four and five cross
the back in semicircular fashion, the open side
of the bow being forward. Band four extends
forward and ventral across the posterior edge
of the eye where it may be interrupted, and then
crosses the cheek. Band five is much broader
than bands one to four and nearly as broad as
those on the body. It crosses the side of the head
behind the eye and terminates on the lower
edge of the interopercle. The last of the bands
anterior to the pectoral fin crosses the dorsum
as a straight line and extends downward through
the opercular membrane to end at the insertion
of the lowermost pectoral ray.
The width of the dark bands is diagnostic
for the species, the dark areas being only slightly
narrower than the intervening pale area. The
- combined width of the 2 dark bands far exceeds
the width of the intervening light-colored one.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, NO. 6
All fin membranes are liberally covered with
melanophores. Frequency distributions of fin-ray
counts and of morphometric data are given in
Tables 1 and 2. All three specimens possess
seven dorsal spines. Spines | to 5 are evenly spaced
and the first is filamentous. The space between
spines 5 and 6 is twice that between any of the
preceding rays and spine 7 is only a little less
distant from spine 6, the gap being about one
and one-half times that between any of the first
five spines. There are 11 or 12 dorsal and 10
anal rays. Total caudal elements number 28 or
29 (procurrent elements included). Of them, 17
are cross striated in all three specimens. There
are 18 or 19 pectoral rays. Each pelvic fin con-
sists of one spine and five rays, the two fins
joined to form the typical gobid disc. The disc
is free from the body. A frenum is well developed
and heavy, firmly uniting the two pelvic spines
and forming a pocket across the anterior end of
the disc. The anal fin is inserted under the third
dorsal ray.
The body is nearly scaleless. Four modified
ctenoid scales are evenly spaced at the base ot
the caudal fin and a patch of from 9 to 12 ctenoid
scales are present on the sides of the caudal pe-
duncle between the tenth and twelfth dark bands.
A broad patch of depressible teeth is present
on the dentary. The outer row is directed slightly
forward and its teeth are somewhat larger and
flatter than those of the other rows. The dentary
patch is broad across the region of the symphysis
but tapers rapidly along the sides of the jaw.
About midway along these projections are two
large recurved fangs, one on the inner and outer
edge of each process. The premaxillary teeth
are similar but the patch is not so broad anteriorly
as that of the dentary. Its outer row is similarly
enlarged and directed forward. The tooth patch
narrows considerably but reaches the end of the
maxillary process of the premaxillary. At its
tip are one or two fangs, not so large as those in
the lower jaw but nonetheless conspicuous.
The gill opening is restricted; its origin is
opposite the second pectoral ray, its lower ex-
treme just below and forward of the last pectoral
ray. There are 8 gill rakers on the holotype, one
on the upper and seven on the lower limb.
Range.—G. zebrella is known only from the
type locality, Monos Island, Trinidad.
Name.—The diminutive of zebra in reference
to the banded color pattern.
JUNE 1958
Garmannia macrodon (Beebe and Tee-Van)
Fig. 1, Tables 1-2
Gobiosoma macrodon Beebe and Tee-Van, 1928:
226 (figure, description).
Garmannia macrodon, Ginsburg, 1933: 538-55
(Synonymy in part, characters, relationships).
Ginsburg, 1939: 63 (related to Garmannia
pallens). Fowler, 1941: 96 (recorded from
Sanibel Island, southwest coast of Florida).
Ginsburg, 1944: 379 (placed in subgenus T7gr?-
gobius of Garmannia).
G. macrodon is described in some detail by
_ Ginsburg (1933: 53-55) and only a few features
need be discussed here. Fin-ray counts and
morphometric data are presented in Tables 1
and 2. Since some body proportions vary with
specimen size, these data are arranged by size
classes. Of 41 specimens examined 37 had 17
cross-striated caudal rays and 4 had 16. The
bands on the body are arranged precisely as
Island, Trinidad.
are omitted.)
ROBINS: NEW GOBIID FISH FROM TRINIDAD
Lower: Lateral view of an adult Garmannia macrodon, UMML 873 (1, 37
Dinner Key at Miami, Fla. (The figures are to show the diagnostic color patterns and general body
form. The fine structure of the fins are generalized and such details as the scales on the caudal pedunele
195
that described for zebrella. The dark bands are
narrow, their width being less than one-third
of the pale interspace. The second band behind
the eye is bowed on the dorsal surface of the
head. In life the dark bands have a maroon cast
and at least during the winter months the elon-
gate first dorsal spine is yellowish.
The gill opening is restricted, its width only
slightly exceeds the width of the pectoral base.
The gill rakers are short and stubby and usually
number | + 7, the uppermost on the lower limb
being near the angle. Counts for five specimens
are: 1 + 7(8),1 +8(1),2 +7(1).
A black streak extends along the dorsal-fin
membrane about one-third of the distance from
the base to the fin edge. The distal two-thirds of
the caudal fin and the entire pelvic disc are
largely dark. The anal fin is dark except for
narrow basal and distal stripes. Four ctenoid
scales are present at the caudal base in all in-
arte,
SAS Pag scam
Srey Ms.
MOLL TEE
K~OOO
Fig. 1—Upper: Lateral view of the holotype of Garmannia zebrella, ANSP 538387 (1, 21)
from Monos
from
196
dividuals examined but the remainder of the
squamation varies. Usually there are four or
five scales on the posterior portion of the caudal
peduncle, most below the midline.
During January 1957 this species was observed
in the Florida Keys on the bay side of Crawl
Key where a deep quarry nearly a quarter mile
across and more than 50 feet deep had been dug
years before. The quarry is broadly connected
over a shallow sill to the ocean. It has stabilized
and supports a rich tropical fish fauna. In the
winter little algal growth occurs on the rock sides
and silted rubble bottom. At this time two gobud
fishes, Coryphopterus glaucofrenum Gill and
Garmannia macrodon abounded. The bridled
eoby, C. glaucofrenum is found on the terraces
from 5 to 20 feet below the surface, always lying
near a hole or the side of a rock into or under
which it can retreat. G. macrodon perches on top
of the rocks in the same depth range, swimming
along their surfaces in the manner characteristic
of the neon gobies (Elecatinus). Despite their
prominent bands they are difficult to perceive.
No collections were made at this time.
When the same area was revisited on October
12, 1957, by Raymond B. Manning and mysell,
C’. glaucofrenum was still in its usual haunts
but no Garmannia could be found after extended
survey. A third goby, Barbulifer ceuthoecus
(Jordan and Gilbert) was observed at Crawl
Key on this occasion, usually in water less than
one foot deep. Here on well silted rubble bottom
it occurs under the rocks and is never numerous.
It avoids the vertical walls and at least in our
experience does not ecologically overlap either
Coryphopterus or Garmannia.
The vertical rock ledges were covered by a
dense net of algae, pale reddish but somewhat
variegated in color. A cloud of rotenone was
released along this algal mat from the surface
to 15 feet. Every few feet along the poisoned
wall, between a depth range of 5 and 15 feet
Garmannia emerged, usually in pairs, one large
and one small individual. In general these proved
to be males and females; the latter apparently
rarely exceed 20-22 millimeters in standard
length. None were found away from the algae
or even on the non-vertical portions of the rock
wall. No nests or eggs could be found in the loose
mat which was extensively tunneled. G. macrodon
seemed very disturbed. when placed away from
the wall. They swam in circles and were unable
to return even when only a yard or two from the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, NO. 6
wall. When taken out over deep water (down a
few feet from the surface) they completely lost
their orientation and swam in tight gyrals.
Often they were upside down. This erratic be-
havior ceased when we placed a hand to the
goby. Immediately it regained its orientation
and swam over and under it always with its
ventral surface closely appressed to the surface.
Thus it would be upside down on the lower side
just as it moves along its more normal rock and
algal haunts. Apparently macrodon depends
completely on contact with the substrate and
loses orientation when such is not available.
A specimen from off Dinner Key at Miami,
Fla. (UMML 873) was supposedly taken from a
fire sponge (Tedania). This may have been an
unusual circumstance for the species has not
been noted among the material collected from
sponges in our field program.
The holotype recorded by Beebe and Tee-Van
(1928: 226) as no. 7462 in the Tropical Research
Collection of the New York Zoological Society is
now at the United States National Museum
(USNM 170896).
Range.—G. macrodon is known from Sanibel
Island (Fowler, 1941: 96) on the southwest
coast of peninsular Florida and Dinner Key at
Miami on the southeast coast southward through
the Florida Keys. Elsewhere it is recorded from
Port-au-Prince Bay, Haiti (Beebe and Tee-Van,
1928: 226-227). Its supposed occurrence in
Curacao needs verification for Metzelaar’s (1918:
139) record would seem applicable to zebrella.
Material examined.—Haiti: USNM 170896
(1, 29) notoryeE. Florida: UMML 878 (1, 37),
Dinner Key, Miami; UMML 1612 (99, 16-31)
ANSP 79168 (10, 20-28), Crawl Key, Florida
Keys; USNM 73094 (2, 18), USNM 723096
(1, 21), USNM 57410 (1, 29), USNM 73095
(1, 25), USNM 93745 (2, 16-19), USNM 73093
(1, 20), USNM 118168 (2, 14-17) all from various
localities in the Florida Keys.
Garmannia (Tigrigobius) pallens Ginsburg
Garmannia pallens Ginsburg, 1939: 63 (original
description). Ginsburg, 1944: 379 (placed in
subgenus Tigrigobius, compared with macrodon).
Ginsburg’s (1939: 63) brief account of G.
pallens anticipated a fuller description in a later
monograph which unfortunately has never been
published. Reexamination of the holotype,
USNM 107327 (1, 12) reveals a badly faded
specimen in rather poor condition. Only ten
JUNE 1958 ROBINS: NEW GOBIID
bands are still discernible behind the pectoral
base. The band immediately behind the eye is
semicircular in outline but the next is nearly
straight. The anterior nostril is tubular. The
following diagnosis, from Mr. Ginsburg’s un-
published files may facilitate its identification.
Diagnosts.—Anterior part of body naked;
posterior part scaled, the scales imbricated;
scales extending forward to under bases of sixth
to eighth dorsal rays, in about 9-12 oblique rows;
anterior bare areas above and below tapering to
a little behind base of dorsal and anal; 4 scales
in row on caudal (scales partly missing and above
statements subject to correction). First spine
of male prolonged, reaching to base of fourth
ray, not prolonged in female. Dorsal rays 11;
anal rays 9 (same count in 2 specimens) ; pectoral
rays 15 or 16. Head well compressed. Maxillary
reaching slightly past posterior margin of eye
in male, to under posterior margin of pupil in
female.
Ground color light yellowish, crossed by
narrow dark bands, narrower than the inter-
spaces, the bands rather faint as compared with
macrodon; 13-14 bands from base of pectoral
to that of caudal, 3 or 4 of the bands in scattered
positions confined to a short distance at the
dorsal profile; 3 bands on head behind eyes
confined to dorsal aspect; bands on head and
anterior part of body fainter than posterior
ones; in female bands in general still fainter
than those in male, those on head and anterior
part of body nearly obsolescent; a very fine,
faint, somewhat interrupted, longitudinal, median
streak on posterior part of body; male with a
dark somewhat elongate spot under eye, near
its posterior margin, and a more diffuse dark
streak running obliquely from directly under
middle of eye to posterior end of maxillary.
Discussion.—The three species currently as-
signed to Tigrigobius form a closely knit group.
When the structure and relationships of gobiid
genera are better known, the three may be
treated as a species group in a more inclusive
subgenus. The type species of Tigrigobius needs
clarification. Fowler’s (1931: 401) Gobiosoma
macrodon is Garmannia zebrella and no material
of macrodon was in the collection at the Academy
of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia at the time
of that paper. Thus the subgenus Tigrigobius is
based on specimens of zebrella (the holotype and
paratypes listed above) which were erroneously
identified with macrodon. Since the two species
are clearly to be placed together in any generic
FISH FROM TRINIDAD 197
or subgeneric alignment the problem is purely
a technical one. My interpretation of the current
rules of nomenclature leads me to consider
Garmannia macrodon (Beebe and Tee-Van) as
the type species.
The banding is best developed in zebrella,
thinner in macroden and somewhat reduced in
pallens. The dark bands are wider than one-half
of the light colored interspace in zebrella and
less than one-third of the interspace in macrodon.
G. pallens differs in having the second band be-
hind the eye forming a straight line across the
occiput while it is bowed in zebrella and macrodon.
G. zebrella differs at least from macrodon in
having the bar on the cheek remote from the
end of the jaw instead of bordering it (see Fig.
1). This feature could not be determined for
the faded holotype of pallens. The pectoral
rays vary from 18 and 19 in zebrella to 16-18 in
macrodon and 15-16 in pallens. The scalation is
best developed in pallens, somewhat reduced in
zebrella, while only a few scales are present in
macrodon. The characters thus do not form a
gradient. Specimens from intermediate areas
are required to more fully evaluate the specific
status of the three forms. Material of pallens is
especially wanting.
Metzelaar (1919: 139) and Koumans (1931:
53) confused zebrella(?) with Gobiosoma multi-
fasciatum and Fowler (1931: 401) related
macrodon ( =zebrella) to Gobtosoma viridistriatum
(a synonym of multifasciatum—see Ginsburg 1933:
27). Despite this, the species of Tigrigobius
bear no direct relation to the banded species of
Gobiosoma. Its relations lie with Garmannia as
discussed by Ginsburg (1933: 54). In addition
to basic differences in squamation, etc. discussed
by Ginsburg, Gobiosoma multifasciatum does
not closely resemble the species of Tigrigobius
in its pigmentation. A specimen of multifasciatum,
USNM 117415 (1, 20) was examined and the
following notes recorded. Superficially it differs
from macrodon and its two allies in being dark
colored with very discrete narrow pale bands
and in having a circular dark humeral spot,
which is separated from a large wedge-shaped
mark by a pale band. The spot is only slightly
smaller than the eve and the wedgeshaped mark
(reddish in life?) begins above the gill slit and
stops just short of the eye. The dark bars on the
body have a narrow black border and the pelvic
disc is much shorter (2.7 mm in this specimen).
Fin-ray counts were: dorsal, VII,12; anal, 10;
pectoral 20-20.
198
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, NO. 6
LITERATURE CITED
BEEBE, WILLIAM, and TEE-VAN, JoHN. The
fishes of Port-au-Prince Bay, Haiti, with a
summary of the known species of marine fish of
the island of Haiti and Santo Domingo. Zoo-
logica 10(1): 1-279, many figs. 1928.
Fowier, Henry WEED. Fishes obtained by the
Barber Asphalt Company in Trinidad and
eames om 1080, Proc, Acacl Nat. Sel.
Philadelphia 83: 391-410, 6 figs. 1931.
Notes on Florida fishes with descriptions of
seven new species. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philadelphia 93: 81-106, 17 figs. 1941.
Grxspure, Isaac. A revision of the genus Go-
biosoma (family Gobiidae) with an account of
the genus Garmannia. Bull. Bingham Ocean.
Coll. 4(5): 1-59, 3 figs. 1933.
e
——.. Twenty one new American gobies. Journ.
Washington Acad. Sci. 29(2): 51-63. 1939.
—_. A description of a new gobid fish from
Venezuela, with notes on the genus Garmannia.
Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 34(11): 375-
380. 1944.
Koumans, FREDERIK Perrus. A _ preliminary
revision of the genera of the gobiord fishes with
united ventral fins. Drukkerij ‘‘Imperator”’
INV... Lisse (Curacao))s Tal 74 agate
MrErzELAAR, JAN. Report on the fishes collected by
Dr. J. Boeke, in the Dutch West Indies, 1904-
1905, with comparative notes on marine fishes
of Tropical West Africa. Rapp. Viss. Zeeprod.
Kolonie Curacao Gravenhage: 1-315, 64
figs. 1919.
—Sa
RIVER BASIN SURVEYS UNEARTH BIG PLAINS INDIAN TOWN
Remains of what probably was the biggest
“town” of the Plains Indians in the Missouri
Basin have been uncovered by Smithsonian
Institution archeologists working in the area to
be flooded by the large Oaho Dam. At the time of
occupation the village consisted of earth lodges,
customary habitations of the sedentary northern
Plains tribes, and accessory buildings which
covered an area of 4,000 by 1,500 feet. Indications
are that there were some 400 dwellings and 4
large ceremonial lodges located there.
This large community, which must have had
several thousand inhabitants, was located on the
left bank of the Missouri River some 20 miles
above Pierre, 8. Dak., according to a River
Basin Surveys report. It was noted and recorded
during earlier preliminary reconnaissance by a
eroup from the Missouri Basin Project of the
River Basin Surveys. During the summer of 1956
testing operations were carried out by a party
under the direction of Dr. Robert L. Stephenson.
At that time a detailed map was made of the
area and the site was staked off into 100-foot
blocks. A 5-foot square test hole was excavated
at each 100-foot stake along the sides of the site.
In addition two trenches were dug and a house
quadrant excavated. The testing was for the
purpose of determining where a maximum of
information could be obtained from a minimum
of digging.
Dr. Stephenson returned to the site with a
larger party in the summer of 1907 and with the
work of 1956 as a guide began a series of excava-
tions. This party uncovered the remains of 13
circular earth lodges and one and one-halt of the
four large ceremonial lodges. The house pits
ranged from 25 to 60 feet in diameter and were 2
to 4 feet deep. Entrances were to the southwest,
eenerally, and two distinct architectural patterns
were observed. One was composed of closely set
double rows of small, outer-wall posts. The other
was composed of widely spaced single rows of
outer posts with leaner posts outside of them.
This suggests two closely related occupational
patterns and the artifacts recovered support such
a differentiation. There were certain indications
that there had been an earlier occupation fea-
turing rectangular houses, but no such structures
were found in the areas excavated. Cache pits
were abundant and were found to range from
small holes to large bell-shaped pits 7 feet in
diameter and 7 feet deep. Artifacts were abundant
in the fill in such pits and an outstanding speci-
men, a red-stone plaque with figures of buffalos
engraved on each side, came from one of them.
Included in the collection are stone and bone
tools, stone knives and arrowheads, several
catlinite pipes, several ornaments made from
marine shells, an ornament of turquoise, and
different kinds of potsherds.
Skeletal materials for study by physical anthro-
pologists were also recovered. The major occupa-
tion at the site appears to have been by the
Arikara or their immediate ancestors during the
period 1600 to 1750 and since little is known
about the physical type of the people the skeletal
material will help to fill that gap in the knowledge
of the Indians of that period.
JUNE 1958
AUTOMATIC SORTING MACHINE
199
AUTOMATIC SORTING MACHINE FOR LETTER MAIL
A laboratory prototype machine for the auto-
matic, high-speed sorting of letter mail has been
developed by the Rabinow Engineering Co.
under a contract arranged and supervised by the
National Bureau of Standards for the Post Office
Department. The machine is designed to sort at
the rate of 36,000 letters per hour into as many
categories as may be needed. Sorting can be
directed either by a built-in electronic control,
by human operators, or by a combination of both.
The system is of modular design and thus adapta-
ble to the varying needs of different post offices,
with regard to both sorting complexity and
spatial requirements. The machine has proved
successful in laboratory tests, and the Post
Office Department has recently let a contract for
the construction of a 1000-pocket production
prototype to be used in a post office.
For some time the Post Office Department has
been seeking mechanized sorting methods to
assist its personnel in keeping up with the con-
tinuing rapid growth of letter mail. Because of
its specialized experience with data processing
machines and electronic equipment, the National
Bureau of Standards has been aiding the Post
Office on various mechanization problems. NBS
has been developing methods and machines to
speed the handling of mail. Much of the equip-
ment development and nearly all construction
have been placed in the hands of private industry.
Two basic problems are involved in mecha-
nized letter sorting. One is concerned with the
information content of the address and with the
mechanics of the control that must be provided
by some computer-like device for directing the
mail sort. The other problem is concerned with
the physical handling of the mail. Today’s
envelopes and their contents are obviously not
designed for mass handling by machine. This fact
complicated the design of the present machine.
If eventually standardized envelopes and_ ad-
dresses could be made acceptable for wide scale
use the task of the machines would be much
easier and cost reduced.
Work on these problems at the Bureau has
proceeded along several lines. Data have been
and are being collected in representative cities to
form an engineering basis for the system and
machine design. These data include such items
as the general nature of the mail, i.e., the size and
shapes of envelopes, the percentage of hand-
written vs. typewritten mail, and the range of
color of envelopes; the number of letters handled
each day and their distribution by times of day;
and the nature of distribution of local mail and
outgoing mail. Studies are under way on methods
of converting the written or printed address into
a code printed on the envelope either with visible
or invisible inks, or with magnetic materials.
Development of special phosphorescent inks for
this use is also in process.
The sorting machine developed by the Rabi-
now Engineering Co. consists essentially of a
large number of pockets on an endless conveyor
and electromechanical equipment that controls
the dropping of a letter from a pocket into a
specific fixed receptacle. Accompanying each
pocket on the conveyor is a steel rod carrying 12
Nylon wheels. Each wheel can be shifted laterally
on the rod into one of two positions. Thus, there
are 2” or 4096 combinations of wheel positions.
As the conveyor moves, each set of 12 wheels rolls
over tracks designed so that when the correct
destination is reached all of the wheels drop into
depressions and the letter is released.
The mechanical sorting and coding of letter
mail begins at the code printer. Here letters from
a stack of “faced”? mail, moved by a conveyor
belt, are picked off one at a time and mechanically
placed in a reading-and-coding position in front
of an operator. He reads the addresses, abbrevi-
ates their important parts, and types these
abbreviations on the back of the envelope by
means of a special printer.
The print coding is in a binary form, requiring
6 bits for each alphanumeric character. For out-
going mail, the coding operator may merely
abbreviate the city and the state. The choice
depends on whether all the coding is to be done
at the initial location or part of the coding at the
final destination, and on whether the city to
which the letter is addressed is or is not equipped
with automatic machinery. In sorting for local
distribution, the city need not be mentioned, and
only the street number and street name will be
coded. In any case, not more than 64 bits would
be required for the entire abbreviated address.
The operator then chooses, by push-button
operation, one of four possible destinations—
local, outgoing, airmail, or miscellaneous—and
sends the coded letter through its first sort. The
mechanism actuated by the push button opens a
200
trap door and sets a directing vane so that the
coded letter drops into the proper pre-sort when
it is released from the code printer.
It is expected that only a few seconds will be
required to code an average letter. This operation
may ultimately become the only human one in
the entire sorting process. The reading head of
the code reader is physically located in the reader-
feeder-inserter mechanism immediately _ pre-
ceding the point where the letter is dropped into
the conveyor. The sorting system 1s organized so
that when adequate automatic reading machines
become available they can be incorporated into
the sorter with a minimum of alteration.
An electronic directory (sometimes called
memory or translator) receives the coded, abbre-
viated address from the code reader, ‘looks up”
the sorting destination for each address, and con-
trols the delivery of the letter to that destina-
tion receptacle. The electronic directory output
drives the code wheel setter which sets each group
of code wheels on the conveyor carts to the appro-
priate coded arrangement to drop each letter in
its final sort receptacle. The entire sequence
involved in looking up the destination and setting
the wheels is accomplished in approximately
one-tenth of a second.
The electronic directory is an electro-mechan-
ical-optical device specially designed to meet
the requirements of the sorting machine. It
converts, according to a pre-arranged schedule,
the information in the 64-bit code of the abbre-
viated address on the envelop into a 12-bit code
corresponding to the receptacle where the letter
is to be dropped by the conveyor. The directory
consists of a stack of 64 thin plates of stainless
steel, each approximately 1 foot square. Each
plate has etched into it 40,000 small round holes,
about Moth of an inch in diameter, spaced on
\y,e-inch centers. The plates are so suspended
that they can be moved by an electromagnet
from left to right 1{gth of an inch. The plates are
initially covered with an opaque black ink that
fills the holes completely. Some of the holes are
punched out to provide the directory with its
address conversion data. Each plate corresponds
to a dot position of the binary address code. li
the code contains the full 64 dot positions, and
if, by convention, each plate moves to the right
if the dot is present and remains stationary if the
dot is absent, each address will cause the plates
to move into a unique set of positions.
Behind this set of plates are located 12 photo-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 48, NO. 6
tubes, each of which sees an area of roughly 3 by
4 inches of the plate stack. These areas do not
overlap. In front of the plates is a source of hight
that illuminates the whole area of the plate stack.
Removing the ink from certain of the holes in
each plate to permit the light to reach any de-
sired combination of phototubes creates a func-
tion table which converts a 64-bit input into a
12-bit output. This 12-bit output is the control
for setting the 12 wheels that accompany each
letter in the conveyor.
Etching holes in the plates and then filling
them with ink ensures an accurate position for
each final hole so that any set of 64 corresponding
holes in the stack will line up. The directory con-
tains approximately 1.5 million bits and no
trouble with mechanical alignment of the holes
has been experienced so far. The plates can be
moved easily in Moth of a second, thus keeping
up with the rate of the sorting conveyor. This
type of optical directory can also be used as any
general-purpose function table. A much larger
number of holes per plate, larger plates, or sev-
eral sets of plates in parallel could be used and
many variations of the basic scheme are possible.
The memory in its present form could handle a
city of 100,000 to 200,000.
Each letter is inserted by the reader-feeder-
inserter into a separate pocket on the conveyor.
At the same time the code wheels for each pocket
are set according to the output of the directory
so that its letter will be deposited into the proper
final sort receptacle. A code wheel resetter re-
turns all code wheels to their “zero” position
following the dropping of the letter into the
receptacle. The empty pockets are then reloaded
and their corresponding code wheels are set for
another sort.
In a less complex version of the machine, letter
sorting is controlled by human operators in-
stead of the equipment which reads the dot code
printed on the envelope. The operators sit beside
the conveyor belt, and letters are delivered to
them automatically. Each operator reads the
address, decides which receptacle of the conveyor
the letter is to go into and depresses a combina-
tion of keys. This operation sets the position of
wheels accompanying the pocket into which the
letter will be dropped. At no time does the
operator touch the letter. Such a machine can
sort mail at rates as fast as 1 per second for each
operator. It is expected that the initial version of
the machine will sort letters at the approximate
JUNE 1958
rate of 10 per second, thus requiring 10 to 12
operators.
The sorting conveyor can be built in small
modules so that machines of various sizes can be
constructed to suit the particular size of the post
office or of the sorting system used. The conveyor
ean be assembled in many layers so as to best
utilize the available space in a particular building.
Because the letters are carried vertically, and
their motion is perpendicular to their faces, the
overall speed of the conveyor can be kept low.
Gravity drops are employed both for placing
the letters into the conveyor and for removing
them from the conveyor into their final recepta-
cles. Considerable effort was spent to design the
machinery in such a way that the “facing” of
the letters will be preserved, that is, that the
addresses on the envelopes will still face in the
same direction after being sorted. Thus, refacing
will not be necessary for any subsequent proc-
essing.
COLOR RESPONSE OF THE HUMAN EYE
201
Special provisions are being made to enable
the conveyors to be stacked in various arrays so
that the letters can transfer from one conveyor
to another for multiple sorting. The Bureau is
making studies to find systems of sorting mail
which will be economical both in cost of machin-
ery and in the effective employment of operating
personnel. It is possible to sort letters by short
conveyors and use several successive sorts, or to
use long conveyors and fewer sorts, or combina-
tions of short and long conveyors so that some
mail is sorted only once while other mail is sorted
more often, depending on the volume and statis-
tical distribution. Many of the factors involved
in system design are difficult to evaluate, for
example, the repeated handling of envelopes not
designed for machine use as compared to the
cost of large machinery where the letter need be
handled only once. Actual experience with these
machines in a post office should help to settle
such problems in the next few years.
er
COLOR RESPONSE OF THE HUMAN EYE
To further the development of color standards
and measurement methods, the National Bureau
of Standards has been participating in an inter-
national study of color vision. Purpose of the
study sponsored by the International Commis-
sion on Illumination,! is to define the color
response of the average human eye. Pertinent
physical properties of color standards can be
measured by strictly physical methods; however,
to compute a valid numerical specification of a
perceived color from the physical measurements
requires a determination of the eye’s color re-
sponse, technically expressed as ‘“‘color-mixture
functions.”
A recent Bureau experiment for this study
provides an approximate method for measuring
the pigmentation that affects color judgment.
The experiment confirmed the belief that the
amount of lens pigmentation increases as a
person grows older, but it showed that macular
pigmentation remains relatively constant with
age.? Results of the experimental data evaluated
1 Frequently referred to as either the CIE
or the Commission Internationale de I’Kclairage.
* For further technical details, see Observer
differences in color-mixture functions studied
by means of a pair of metameric grays, by KENNETH
L. Keuty, Journ. Research NBS 60: 97. 1958.
UP? 2825.
by K. L. Kelly of the Bureau’s colorimetry
laboratory, are expected to be of value in deter-
mining the eye’s color-mixture functions.
The pigmentation that affects color vision in
the normal eye occurs only in the lens and macula.
The macula is the so-called ‘‘yellow spot” in the
center of the retina. The iris, which gives the eye
its external color—for instance, brown, gray,
blue—is opaque, and does not affect color judg-
ment. It is well known that the lens becomes
yellower as a person grows older, but no method
has been available to estimate the amount of
yellowing either in the lens or in the macula. By
utilizing a pair of metameric gray plaques devised
by W. C. Granville, the NBS investigators were
able to measure the pigmentation present in the
eyes of 39 persons with normal color vision,
ranging in age from 18 to 77 (see Table 1).
THE EXPERIMENT
One of the plaques, a ‘‘simplex” gray,
produced by a mixture of white and black pig-
ments, and the other, a “complex” gray, by a
mixture of yellow, green, purple, and white
pigments. When a person of ‘‘average’’
was
eolor
8 Melameric color and the macular pigment,
by W. C. GRANVILLE and D. B. Jupp, Journ. Opt.
Soc. Amer. 39: 632A. 1949.
202 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 6
TABLE 1.—OBSERVERS CLASSIFIED AccorpDING TO Sex, AGE, EyE anp Harr Coror;
DESCRIPTION OF TEST PANELS; AND ReEcIPROcAL CoLoR TEMPERATURES
REQUIRED FOR RED-GREEN BALANCE
Ob- Sie ae ate elas Color of simplex relative to complex mee co
server age
10° Bp 10° De Diff.
1 | M55 blue brown red green 204 91 113
2 | M45 hazel brown red green 238 103 135
3. | F56 brown brown red green 179 AT 132
4 | M27 hazel d. brown pink pink 278 196 82
5 | M44 blue brown red green 196 84 ft?
6 | F39 blue d. brown red green 213 132 81
7 | M51 d. brown black slightly pink | green 213 78 135
8 | M41 blue blond pink green 256 149 107
9 | M88 blue red pink green 200 110 90
10 | M21 hazel auburn pink green 238 84 154
11 | F50 hazel brown pink slightly pink 256 189 67
12 | M39 blue blond pink pink 250 179 7h
13 | M62 blue brown pink green 172 118 54
14 | M34 blue brown red green 222 135 87
15 | M46 blue brown pink green 213 71 142
16 | M29 d. brown black pink green 263 182 81
17 | M34 d. brown black pink pink 286 213 73
18 | M47 blue brown match green 189 65 124
19 | F44 brown d. brown pink green 238 159 79
20 | M42 brown brown pink match 227 149 78
21 | M48 brown brown pink green 222 175 47
MR | LIS d. brown d. brown lavender green 227 2 100
7p |) Ls brown brown pink pink 256 164 92
yak | Jel) brown brown lavender lavender 270 208 62
DS | WAS blue brown red match 278 154 124
AD |) 12725) hazel 1. brown lavender match 250 170 80
27 | M53 blue brown match green 95 —14 109
28 | M52 brown brown match green 170 2 168
29 | F42 d. brown d. brown pink slightly pink 256 175 81
30 | M66 blue brown green green 91 — 40 131
31 .| M68 blue brown green green 130 —28 158
32 | M21 hazel blond red green 233 110 123
33 | M36 blue blond red green 196 29 167
34 | F18.5 hazel brown pink pink 278 170 108
35 | M28 green blond pink pink 270 161 109
36 | M38 brown 1. brown pink pink 263 192 71
37 =| M56 blue brown red green 196 84 112
38 | M31 d. brown black pink pink 256 182 74
29 | M77 blue brown green green —118 |}<—118 =
Averages Al .3 214 <A ae tO)
vision views these plaques in daylight from a
near position, the simplex gray appears redder
than the complex gray. The near position is one
at which the plaques subtend a visual angle of
10°. When the observer steps back a few paces to
a position from which the samples subtend a
visual angle of 2°, the simplex gray then appears
greener than the other.
This phenomenon occurs because the retinal
image of the samples at the 10° position covers
both the macula and a large portion of the sur-
rounding retina, while at the 2° position the
retinal image falls wholly within the eye’s
macular pigment, which is yellow. The effect is
somewhat analogous to placing a yellow filter
in front of the eye for the 10° position, thus
JUNE 1958
reducing the color temperature of the light source,
that is, making it redder. Consequently, the 10°-
field results depend primarily on the lens pigmen-
tation and the 2°-field results depend not only on
the lens but to a large extent on the macular
pigmentation.
In the Bureau’s experiment, each observer
viewed the two samples side by side at the 10°
position. The color temperature of the light source
was then reduced until neither sample appeared
redder or greener than the other. This point was
ealled the cross-over point, and was recorded as
the reciprocal color temperature in micro-recipro-
eal degrees (urd) of the source. The test was
repeated at the 2° position. The reciprocal color
temperature at each position was then plotted
against age of the observer.
RESULTS
The observers were classified into five groups:
(1) red-red; (2) red-match; (3) red-green; (4)
match-green; and (5) green-green. The youngest
observers, considered to have the least lens
pigmentation, described the simplex gray as
redder than the complex gray at both the 10°
and the 2° positions. These observers were put
into group 1. Those in group 2, with a little more
pigmentation, said the simplex appeared redder at
the 10° position but that it matched the complex
at the 2° position. Group 3, which included most
of the observers, described the simplex as redder
at the 10° position and greener at the 2° position
than the complex gray. Group 4, with still more
lens pigmentation, said the simplex matched the
complex at the 10° position but that it was
greener than the complex at the 2° position.
Several of the observers, including the older ones,
were considered to have the most pigmentation
because they saw the simplex greener at both
positions. They were put in group 5.
The reciprocal color temperature of the source
required to produce a red-green balance between
the Granville grays was found to vary widely
from one observer of normal color vision to
another. However, the cross-over value of recipro-
eal color temperature for any one observer serves
to characterize his color vision in an approximate
but useful way. The value (of reciprocal color
COLOR RESPONSE OF THE HUMAN
EYE 203
temperature) required in a 10° field for red-green
balance is tentatively taken as a measure of the
yellow pigmentation in the lens of the observer’s
eye. Similarly, the value required in a 2° field for
red-green balance of the Granville grays is a
measure of both lens and macular pigmentation.
The difference in these two values (value for 2°
field minus value for 10° field) is tentatively
taken as a measure of the macular pigmentation
of the observer.
The tentative measure of lens pigmentation
afforded by the Granville grays correlated well
with the age of the observer, but the tentative
measure of macular pigmentation showed no cor-
relation with age. Neither measure showed sig-
nificant correlation with the color of the iris or
of the hair. Of the 39 persons studied, eleven
were female.
The color of the eyes of all the observers
ranged from blue through hazel, light brown,
brown, dark brown, to almost black; hair color
ranged from ash blond through red, light brown,
brown, dark brown to black. It was interesting
to note that among the ‘‘red-red’”’ observers—
those with the least lens pigmentation—a num-
ber had heavily pigmented skin, irises, and hair.
Results of the tests were compared with four
statistical definitions of a standard observer. The
comparison showed that the three standard
observers compiled in recent years were not
superior for the 2° observation to the CIE
standard observer recommended in 1931. How-
ever, data on a specific age group for the 10°
standard observer developed by Dr. W. 58. Stiles?
of the National Physical Laboratory in England
agreed very well with the average of the actual
observers in the same age group in the present
experiment.
Further work is scheduled to obtain
responses on textile and vitreous enamel samples.
Data derived from these studies will be correlated
with the work now being performed by Dr. Stiles
in England and the combined results will be
evaluated for a possible revision in the 1931 CLE
eolor
standard observer.
4 Interim report to the Commission Internationale
de l’Eclairage, Zurich, 1955, on the National
Physical Laboratory’s tnvestigation of colour-
matching, by W. S. Sriues, Optica Acta 2: 168.
1955.
204
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, NO. 6
PROBLEM SOLVING ON THE HIGH-SPEED COMPUTER
Large-scale digital computers are helping the
National Bureau of Standards carry out its funda-
mental program of research on properties of
matter and methods of measurement with in-
creasing speed, efficiency, and thoroughness.
As knowledge of the computer’s capabilities
becomes more widespread, its use is being ex-
tended to more and more of the Bureau’s work—
from basic calibration services to complex studies
of nuclear properties.
Moreover, the growing indispensability of
high-speed computers, both to management and
to scientific and engineering research generally, is
clearly shown by the variety, extent, and im-
portance of the problems that have been solved
on the Bureau’s computers. These problems
come from every major field of physical science
and technology, from statistical analysis, and
from government and business administration.
At present, projects are serviced at the rate of
about 150 per year, up to the limit of machine
time available. Submitted by the Bureau’s
laboratories and by other Federal agencies, these
range from “single-shot” problems, requiring a
run of only an hour or two, to comprehensive
programs carried out on a continuing basis for
several years at a time. From 1950 to 1957 such
problems were solved on the Bureau’s home-built
SEAC; in 1957 an IBM computer, type 704,
was acquired. In addition, at the request of
other agencies, the computation laboratory
programs problems for NORC, UNIVAC, and
other machines outside the Bureau.
The problems worked on the Bureau’s com-
puters illustrate not only the increasing number
of fields in which the potentialities of the digital
computer are being exploited, but also the wide
range of computational techniques now available.
In some cases, as in geometrical optics, the
mathematics is essentially elementary. Here the
main contribution of the computer is its great
speed; but this also permits the inclusion of
refinements that lead to better as well as faster
results. Solution of systems of ordinary linear
differential equations and of many partial differ-
ential equations is now almost a routine matter.
More sophisticated procedures are found, for
example, in studies of radiation penetration
which apply Monte Carlo techniques and
methods for solving integral equations; in
calculations of crystal lattice constants, in which
the coefficients of 3-dimensional Fourier series
are determined; and in evaluating government
contract bids which apply the techniques of
linear programming. Still other methods are
illustrated in an extensive program for calcu-
lating thermodynamic properties of materials and
in the handling of large masses of data for payroll
calculations. These and other problems, selected
from those solved or now being calculated at the
Bureau, are discussed further below.
GEOMETRICAL OPTICS
Essentially, the only way to design a lens
system of the kind found in an aerial camera or
telescope is by ray tracing. This consists in
selecting a number of light rays emanating
from some object point, determining by ele-
mentary geometry the path of these rays through
the lenses, and finding their intersections with
the plane of the final image or photographic
plate. The deviations of these intersections from
the desired image point furnish a measure of
the quality of the lens system. The procedure
may then be repeated for other object points and
possibly for light of other wavelengths. Also, the
parameters of the optical system—lens separa-
tions, curvatures, and indices of refraction—
may be varied to improve the sharpness of the
images.
For each choice of parameters, the number of
arithmetic operations may run into millions,
making use of a high-speed computer mandatory.
A computer also has the advantage that it can
handle skew rays—those not lying in a plane
through the optical axis—as easily as rays that
do lie in such a plane; in ray tracing by hand,
skew rays are usually avoided as too difficult.
As a result, the solutions provided by the digital
computer are more thorough and accurate.
The principal application of automatic com-
puters to such problems at the Bureau has been
to compare the images formed by series of pro-
posed lens designs in order to select the one best
suited to a particular purpose. The computer
output is automatically converted to graphical
form, thus showing directly the appearance of
images of point sources. In addition, ways are
being studied for adapting methods of lens-
system design to a fuller exploitation of computer
capabilities. Results of such studies should be of
use to the optical industry as well as to the
defense establishment.
JUNE 1958 PROBLEM SOLVING ON
Ray-tracing computations were begun at the
Bureau in 1950, when SEAC was put in opera-
tion, and are now on a continuing basis under the
sponsorship of the Air Force. The construction
and testing of prototype photographic objective
lenses has become so expensive that a major
computing effort is justified in order to assure
that only optimum designs are actually built.
THERMODYNAMICS, STATISTICAL MECHANICS
For the past 7 years, the computation and
thermodynamics laboratories have been engaged
jointly in the development of high-speed com-
puter techniques for calculating thermal proper-
ties of materials. Needs of research on propulsion
systems provided the original stimulus for this
project, but the computed data have a far wider
range of application. Thus far most of the work
has dealt with gases, and the results are in the
form of tables of various thermodynamic and
transport properties over a range of pressures
and temperatures. Among the properties included
are specific heat, entropy, heat content, vapor
pressure, sound velocity, viscosity, and Prandtl
number. With the aid of such tables it is possible,
for example, to calculate the amounts of heat
generated or other details on the course of chemi-
cal reactions inside a combustion chamber and the
thrust of the resulting jet.
Since they form the starting point for many
other calculations, the ideal-gas thermodynamic
functions (for atoms, atomic ions, molecules,
molecular ions, and radicals) were the first to be
programmed. Programs were then developed for
calculating (1) equations of state based on a
virial representation of data of state, (2) gas-
imperfection corrections to the thermodynamic
properties for compounds and mixtures of fixed
composition, and (8) equilibrium compositions
and properties for chemically reacting gaseous
systems.!
One phase of the work is summed up in NBS
Circular 564, which contains data for air, argon,
carbon dioxide, hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, and
steam.” Plans are being considered for applying
‘Mechanized computation of thermodynamic
tables at the National Bureau of Standards, by
J. HrusenratH and J. H. Weastein, in Pro-
ceedings of Conference on Thermodynamic and
Transport Properties of Fluids, Institution of
Mechanical Engineers, London, July 1957 (in
press).
? Nat. Bur. Stand. Cire. 564, Tables of thermal
properties of gases, by J. HILSENRATH and others,
1955.
HIGH-SPEED COMPUTER 205
the same techniques to a systematic calculation of
thermal properties for all atoms and their ions at
temperatures up to 1,000,000°K.
A few of the other projects in thermodynamics,
recently completed or still in progress, are con-
cerned with calculation of improved molecular
energies and wave functions, and a related study
of self-consistent fields; calculation of collision
integrals used in transport theory; evaluation
of triple integrals for entropy calculations; and
calculations to test the value of exchange integrals
in molecular computations.
COLOR COORDINATES
Use of the standard CIE-chromaticity? co-
ordinates for describing colors has the advantage
that the coordinates can be obtained from spec-
trophotometer measurements of the light and
do not depend on color judgments by the human
eye. However, for industrial purposes the widely
used Munsell system of color coordinates, based
on perceived value, hue, and chroma, has the
advantage that equal increments in the co-
ordinates correspond to equal perceived differ-
ences (at least, within the range of normal
individual variation). In the work of the Bureau’s
photometry and colorimetry laboratory it is
therefore frequently necessary to translate the
more easily measured ClIE-chromaticity co-
ordinates into the more directly useful Munsell
system.
Since no usable mathematical formula is
known for the relation between the 2 systems,
the conversion must be based on direct experi-
mental comparison of spectrophotometer meas-
urements with estimates of color spacing by
human observers.* For purposes of computer
calculation, the results of such comparisons by
the Optical Society of America® for about 5,000
discrete points of a grid in “color space’ are
being punched on cards. For colors corresponding
to points other than these grid points, the
conversion will be made by 3-dimensional inter-
polation between the values at adjacent grid
points.
3 “CIE”’ stands for Commission Internationale
de ’Eclairage (International Commission on II-
lumination).
4 Prelimary report of the O.
on the spacing of the Munsell colors, by 8. M.
NEWHALL, Journ. Opt. Soe. Amer. 30: 617. 1940.
®> Final report of the O.S.A. Subcommittee on
the spacing of the Munsell colors, by 8S. M. New-
HALL, D. NicKERSON, and D. B. Jupp, Journ.
Opt. Soc. Amer. 33: 385. 1943.
S.A. Subcommittee
206
To convert CIE-chromaticity coordinates for
a single color to Munsell coordinates and to check
the results, requires about 30 minutes by hand
calculation. From trials of the program now being
prepared for the digital computer, it is expected
that the same operation will be performed on
this machine in about one-hundredth of that
time. A few minutes must also be allowed for
setting up the computer, but this is negligible
when a considerable number of conversions must
be made.
SATELLITE CALCULATIONS
Working in cooperation with the Naval Re-
search Laboratory, the Bureau is engaged in
programming and computing for a number of
satellite problems. The most important of these
relates to the determination of upper atmosphere
properties. Thus, by combining recent high-
altitude rocket measurements with observations
of the rate of change of period for the first Russian
satellite (Alpha 2), it was possible to obtain
reasonably good values for the atmospheric
density at altitudes up to 400 km. At 200 km
the results agree well with typical earlier esti-
mates, but at 400 km a density 40 times greater
was found. One consequence of this finding is
to reduce estimates of satellite lifetime by the
same factor for orbits with a perigee (i.e., mini-
mum) altitude near 400 km. Other projects
deal more directly with satellite lifetime and
with the satellite’s final dying period and point of
impact. A theoretical investigation on the “in-
terpretation and ambiguity resolution” of Mini-
track observations is also under way.
In still another project, the computation
laboratory has prepared a program for an ap-
proximate satellite ephemeris (or table of posi-
tions), using the basic equations provided by
NRL. The program is designed for rapid cal-
culation of the position of the satellite in a form
convenient for use by Minitract stations and
tracking radars. The program first integrates
the equations of motion, with atmospheric drag
included, and then transforms the satellite
position to spherical coordinates fixed in the
earth. In accordance with the aim of providing a
quick, approximate table of positions, the pre-
cession of the orbit plane and the rotation of
the line of apsides are included in a phenom-
enological form in the second part of the pro-
eram. The printed output gives the latitude and
longitude of the satellite, as well as its position
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 43Nomo
relative to a number of observing stations, at
intervals of 1 minute. The printout may be
restricted to any specified range in latitude and
longitude.
RADIATION PENETRATION
Computations on radiation penetration form
one of the very large computer projects at the
Bureau. This work stands out both for the mag-
nitude of the operation and for its scientific and
practical value. The results are directly useful in
fundamental physical research, radiology, reactor
design, and evaluation of effects of nuclear
weapons.
The problem is to find out what happens to a
beam of radiation when it traverses bulk matter.
The particles in the beam—gamma-ray photons,
electrons, neutrons, or others—collide with
atoms of the matter and then are absorbed or
scattered into different directions, often with
ejection of particles or photons from the atoms;
scattered and ejected particles can then enter into
further collisions. The specific problem is to
determine the number of particles at a given
depth of penetration and moving in a given
direction with a given energy.
There are two main approaches to this prob-
lem. The Bureau’s nuclear physics laboratory
has made contributions to each method.® In
the first, the desired distribution is expanded into
series with respect to two of the three independent
variables, and the coefficients are found to satisfy
certain linear integral equations. These are
approximated by systems of linear algebraic
equations that prove to be of a type that can be
solved recursively. The other method is an appli-
cation of the Monte Carlo technique, which
consists in setting up a numerical analogue to the
situation under study.
The complexity of the problem arises from the
many possible ways in which the radiation and
atoms may interact and from the complicating
effects of special conditions—for example,
6 A descriptive summary is given in Penetration
and diffusion of gamma rays, NBS Tech. News
Bull. 40: 144. Oct. 1956. For further technical
details see, for example, Penetration of X- and
gamma-rays to extremely great depths, by U. Fano,
Journ. Res. NBS 51: 95. 1953. RP 2439; Penetration
and diffusion of X-rays: calculation of spatial
distribution by polynomial expansion, by L. V.
Spencer and U. Fano, Journ. Res. NBS 46: 446.
1951. RP2213; Reflection and transmission of gamma
radiation by barriers: semianalytic Monte Carlo
calculations, by M. J. Bercer and J. DoGcsETT,
Journ. Res. NBS 56: 89. 1956. RP 2653.
——
JUNE 1958 PROBLEM SOLVING ON
different shielding materials, source geometries,
energy distributions of incoming particles, and
boundary conditions at the interfaces between
media. The computations thus far apply mainly
to gamma rays, but increasing attention is being
given to electrons.
CRYSTAL STRUCTURE
Crystal structure calculations, based on X-ray
diffraction measurements, are a powerful tool for
determining the arrangement of and distances
between atoms in crystalline solids. Results of
such calculations at the Bureau supply a steady
stream of information for solid state physicists,
chemists, and crystallographers.
When a beam of X-rays impinges on the regular
array of atoms in a single crystal the rays are
diffracted to form a pattern of isolated spots
as detected, for example, on a sensitive screen.
Information about the crystal structure is
obtained from the positions and intensities of
these spots. However, except in the simplest
cases, this cannot be done without extensive
calculations.
The procedure is based on the relation that
exists between the diffraction pattern and the
density distribution of the electrons that surround
the atoms in the crystal. When the electron
density distribution is expressed as a 3-dimen-
sional Fourier series, each coefficient (called a
“structure factor’’) in the expansion is a complex
number that represents the intensity and phase
of an individual spot in the diffraction pattern.
Since only the intensities of the spots can be
measured, additional assumptions based on
chemical experience must be made. The com-
puting methods enable any such assumption to
be tested, and various devices have been de-
veloped to avoid excessive trial-and-error steps.
Also, the computer is being used to evaluate
methods of determining crystal structure without
the need for conjectures based on chemical
experience; such methods would be highly
impractical without the use of high-speed com-
puters. Since the atoms are located at the centers
of electron clouds, their positions can be deter-
mined from the electron density distribution.
The computer is also used to refine the results of
previous calculations by determing the correc-
tions required by improved experimental data.
When a crystal is ground into powder, the
diffraction pattern becomes a series of concentric
rings. From the location and intensities of these
HIGH-SPEED COMPUTER 207
rings it is possible to identify the chemical
composition of the crystal, and this technique is
now widely used in industry. The ring pattern
is related to the spacings between planes in the
various systems of parallel planes that pass
through atoms in a single crystal. Such spacings,
called ‘‘d-values”’, are computed from results on
single crystals and serve as indices for identifying
different materials. This computation is then
done in reverse, using d-values obtained from
Bureau laboratory measurements to correct the
structure constants.’
PROCUREMENT BID EVALUATION
The analysis of bids to determine the “low
bidder” among potential contractors is more
involved than first appears. In the case of Govern-
ment procurement bids there are an average of
20 bidders, each of whom may have different
sliding scales relating prices and quantities,
may quote different prices for work done at
different plants, may set minimum or maximum
quantities, may be able to supply goods only to
certain Government depots, or may accept an
award only if he also receives—or does not
recelve—the award on some other bid. Also to be
considered are the requirements of the various
Government supply depots and the transporta-
tion costs from each potential plant to each
depot. Additional complications enter when the
Government furnishes raw materials, for example,
textiles for uniforms.
Not all bids involve all of these difficulties,
but often they are sufficiently complex that it
takes months to analyze them. Even then,
rough judgments must be substituted in part for
exact caleulations—unless the assistance of a
high-speed computer is obtained. The speed,
accuracy, and thoroughness of computer evalua-
tion of bids assure prompt action and impartiality
to the bidder and the least possible cost to the
Government.
Methods for applying computers to this
task have been developed by the Bureau for the
7 X-ray diffraction patterns for identification of
inorganic solids, NBS Tech. News Bull. 37: 189.
1953. Results on erystal powders are published as
Nat. Bur. Stand. Cire. 539, Standard X-ray dif-
fraction powder patterns, by H. E. SwANson and
others. Volumes 1 to 7 have appeared (1953-1957)
thus far; they are available from Superintendent
of Documents, U. 8. Government Printing Office,
Washington 25, D. C. at 45 cents per copy for
volumes 1-5 and 40 cents per copy for volumes 6
and 7.
208
Department of Defense over the past several
years, and a total of about 150 bid problems
have thus far been analyzed. The basic problem
is of the type known as a “transportation prob-
lem” which, in turn, is one kind of problem in
linear programming. The Bureau’s methods are
based on the simplex method of G. Dantzig as
modified for the transportation problem. With
experience in its use, the technique has been made
more versatile, so that many of the complicating
factors can be taken into account in a single
run of the computer (requiring only a few min-
utes). Previously, separate runs were needed for
each complicating factor over and above the
basic transportation problem pattern.
PAYROLLS
In January 1956 the Bureau adopted a me-
chanical pyroll system using punched-card equip-
ment to compute and assemble in finished form
the payroll for its nearly 3,000 employees as well
as various personal service reports. This system
has proved definitely superior to the former
hand operation; however, certain phases of the
operation are still too time-consuming. It is
therefore planned to explore the possibility of
achieving greater flexibility and efficiency by
utilizing a commercial high-speed computer.
To give some idea of the magnitude of the
task the operation will be required to provide
minimum reports under 10 different heads:
payroll for personal services, check issue and
statement of earning cards, time cards, devision
total payroll control, bond schedule, bond
purchase list, employees cumulative earnings
report, labor distribution report, annual individ-
ual pay record, and withholding tax statement.
It is expected that the results of this study, now
under way, will also be of interest to other
Government agencies and to private organiza-
tions.
TRAFFIC TRENDS
A somewhat different type of problem arising
in Government administration is illustrated by a
project recently completed for the Bureau of
8 SEAC determines low bidder, NBS Tech.
News Bull. 38: 179. 1954. For further technical
details see Experiences with the bid evalua-
tion problem, by H. Bremer, W. Hatt, and M.
PAULSEN, Nav. Res. Logist. Quart. 4: 27. 1957.;
Linear programming in bid evaluation, by E. D.
STANLEY, D. P. Honie, and L. Ga1nen, Nav. Res.
Logist. Quart. 1: 48. 1954.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 48, No. 6
Public Roads. This problem involved the relative
accuracy of 4 proposed methods for predicting
changes in traffic patterns. Accurate anticipation
of trends in traffic distribution would clearly
help in planning more effective road and highway
networks. The computer was used for calculating
predictions by the various methods and for
comparing the results with data obtained by a
home-interview sampling technique in the Wash-
ington (D. C.) metropolitan area in 1948 and
1955. It was estimated at the outset that 25
million unit computations would be required;
on the very optimistic allowance of 10 seconds
per computation, this would require about 35
man-years for completion by hand methods.
The actual computer time was 30 hours, which
includes additional computations not considered
in the original estimate.
TECHNOLOGICAL PHYSICS
The many computer projects that may be
grouped under the heading of technological
physics can be represented by those on stresses in
a wall foundation, fire resistance of T-Beams,
and gas tube characteristics. In the first of these,
wall-foundation stresses are computed for given
values of the length and height of the wall and
the unit shortening due to shrinkage. This in-
volves the solution of a biharmonic partial
differential equation.
In the project on fire resistance, better in-
formation is sought on the relative fire-endurance
performance of various reinforced concrete
structures. Calculations are being made of the
heat flow on the cross section of a T-Beam in
contact with furnace fires. Results are expressed
in terms of the time required to reach a certain
predetermined temperature at various points on
the cross section.
Considerable simplification of the process of
designing cold cathode gas tubes for optimum
performance is expected as an outcome of the
project on gas tube characteristics. Voltage-
current static characteristics are being computed
from a system of differential equations together
with data on gas properties, electrode materials,
and tube geometry. Interest centers on the
critical negative slope region which determines
the tube’s breakdown characteristics. These
results will permit the theory to be compared
with new experimental measurements.
Also, increasing use is being made of digital
computers in the calculations needed in calibrat-
JUNE 1958
ing measuring instruments and reference stand-
ards. Examples are the calibration of thermom-
eters and gage blocks. An investigation of more
general significance has grown out of work on
problems associated with the measurement
of human hearing. In this project, mechanical
impedances are calculated on the basis of a
methed of measurement developed by the acous-
tics laboratory for determining the resistive and
reactive components of the impedance of the
human head and mastoid, or of other high
mechanical impedances.?®
MATHEMATICAL TABLES
The development of the high-speed. computer
has not made the use of mathematical tables
obsolete, but it has changed some of the char-
acteristics that are expected of them. For use in
computer operations, ‘‘skeleton’ tables are
useful, giving values to many significant figures
and accompanied by auxiliary functions for
calculating intermediate values. Tabular material
covering only a few pages can thus replace tables
that formerly occupied several volumes. More-
over, those without access to a large scale com-
puter still need tables of the elementary functions
and an increasing number of the higher func-
tions—for example, confluent hypergeometric,
spheroidal, and Sievert functions.
To meet these new needs, the Bureau is
preparing a Handbook of Mathematical Tables'®
which will include graphs and text material as
well as tables. There will be 28 chapters including
tables of mathematical constants, powers and
roots, elementary and higher transcendental
functions, and basic tables for combinatorial
analysis, numerical analysis, and_ statistics.
The text material will give for each function the
9 Mechanical impedance of the forehead and
mastoid, by E. L. R. Cortiss and W. Koipan,
Journ. Acoust. Soc. Amer. 27: 1164. 1955.
10 Handbook of mathematical tables, NBS Tech.
News Bull. 41: 94. June 1957.
PROBLEM SOLVING ON HIGH-SPEED COMPUTER
209
important mathematical properties that are useful
in computational problems. With considerable
help from the Bureau’s computer, the prepara-
tion of the volume is now well advanced.
The Handbook is sponsored by the National
Science Foundation, and its contents are being
determined by Bureau staff members with the
assistance of a Committee on Revision of Mathe-
matical Tables appointed by the National
Research Council. The primary aim is to include a
maximum of useful information within the limits
of a moderately large volume (about 1,000 pages),
with attention to the needs of scientists in all
fields.
Apart from work on the Handbook, which was
started within the past year, the computation
laboratory has been producing individual mathe-
matical tables of general utility ever since SEAC
was put into operation. Among those recently
completed are tables of L-shell conversion co-
efficients, exponential integrals for complex
arguments, modified Airy integral, and Coulomb
wave functions over the range of interest in
current nuclear research.
PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES
Before a problem can be set into a computer,
it must be programmed, a task which is performed
by the Bureau’s computation laboratory or by
personnel of the originating section or agency.
Programming for a new problem may require
anywhere from a few hours to several months;
then the machine may do its work in minutes or it
may take hundreds of hours. When later a
similar problem is submitted, the old program
can often be adapted to the new data without
much delay. It is thus important to accumulate a
library of program routines and subroutines that
may be assembled like standard parts to fit as
wide a range of problems as possible. In addition,
the possibility of using the computer itself
in working out programs is being actively studied
and promising results have already been obtained.
210
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 6
PROCESSING PICTORIAL INFORMATION ON DIGITAL COMPUTERS
Exploratory experiments in manipulating the
information content of pictures! have recently
been carried out on SEAC, the National Bureau
of Standards Electronic Automatic Computer.
With the aid of appropriate scanning and display
equipment, the computer converts pictures into
digital form suitable for input, processes the
information according to some pre-arranged
routine, and displays the results as a visual
output. Experiments are being carried out by
R. A. Kirsch of the Bureau’s Data Processing
Systems Laboratory to increase knowledge in
the possible applications of high-speed electronic
computers for picture processing.
The greatest impetus for the development of
automatic data processing techniques has been
the need to process at high speed alphabetical or
numerical information. Ordinarily, such infor-
mation exists already in digital form. If not, it
can be translated into digits. In either case,
it can be assembled manually to be fed into
computers with suitable input devices. As a result
of the great need for processing such conventional
data, only recently has any attention been given
to the use of general-purpose computers in
in conjunction with special-purpose input de-
vices for gathering unconventional types of
data. In particular, there has been a lack of
investigation into the use of digital computers for
automatically gathering and processing infor-
mation that naturally occurs in the form of
pictures, diagrams, or other graphical con-
figurations designed for visual use by human
beings. Although considerable effort has been
directed to such problems as recognition of
printed alphabetical and numerical characters,
this effort has been concerned mostly with the
construction of specialized equipment for per-
forming very specific functions. To provide more
general information, the Bureau initiated a series
of exploratory experiments involving the use of
general-purpose digital computers to help under-
stand the nature of pictorial information.
EQUIPMENT FOR INPUT AND OUTPUT
In order to feed pictorial information into
1 For further technical information, see Hz-
periments in processing pictorial information with
a digital computer, by R. A. Kirscu, L. Cann, L.
C. Ray, and G. H. Ursan, Proceedings of the
Eastern Joint Computer Conference (IRE-AIEE-
ACM), 1957.
SEAC, a simple mechanical drum scanning
device is used to digitalize the information in a
picture. The photograph to be scanned is mounted
on a drum approximately 24 in. in diameter.
As the drum rotates, a photomultiplier and a
source of illumination mounted on a lead screw
move parallel to the axis of the drum. The pitch
of the lead screw is such that the photomultiplier
moves 0.25 mm for each revolution of the drum.
A mask in the optical system illuminates a
0.25-mm square, and a strobe disc produces
optical pulses each 0.25 mm of drum rotation.
Thus, the photomultiplier can examine the rela-
tive reflectance of each 0.25-mm square. Through
the electronic circuitry of the scanner, a dark
square on the picture is converted into a binary 1.
A sufficiently white square produces a binary 0.
The entire picture is scanned in 25 sec or less.
Since the picture is 44 by 44 mm, it is converted
into 30,976 binary digits, occupying 704 words
of SEAC’s memory.
To display a picture that has been fed into the
computer from the scanner, a program was
prepared to derive a pair of coordinate numbers
for the position of each binary 1 in the picture
stored in the memory. When decoded, the num-
bers produce a pair of analog voltages that are
applied to the vertical and horizontal inputs of an
oscilloscope, thus generating a visual display.
PROCESSING PICTURES ON SEAC
In pattern recognition the aim is to reduce the
amount of information to the minimum neces-
sary for recognizing one pattern from a group of
patterns. In these experiments the approach was
to develop a library of computational processes
for simplifying patterns in order to obtain their
most significant features. Preliminary experi-
ments were concerned with determining those
manipulations which would prove to be the most
informative. The compilation of discrete routines
for the performance of these elementary manipu-
lations would provide the basis of a flexible
system for simulating many widely diversified
pattern identification logics. After determining
the intended course of his pattern analysis, the
programmer needs only to refer to this file and
to select those routines which in combination will
best serve his purpose.
Furthermore, it is possible for the analyst to
sit at the computer console and to draw from
JUNE 1958 PICTORIAL INFORMATION
this tape library several routines which he can
select pragmatically after studying the results
of any preceding operations, and thus guide the
computer step by step toward recognition of the
pattern being studied. Two forms of output can
be distinguished in these routines—numerical
data and transformed pictures. Numerical data
can be read directly from the computer but
pictorial information must be converted before it
ean be displayed by the picture output scope.
The picture display routine is used in such cases.
One of the simplest routines in the lbrary
counts the total black area in a pattern. This
program examines each bit in sequence and tallies
when the bit represents a black area. Advantage
is taken of the fact that in many patterns there
will be numerous words that are aJ! black or all
white. By comparing whole words against con-
stants of all zeros or all ones, much time is saved.
The area counting process requires approximately
thirty seconds on SEAC.
A routine was designed to count the number
of objects in a picture. A black area is defined to
be an “object”? when it is completely surrounded
by white areas. When a photograph containing
53 objects was fed into SEAC, the computer
produced the correct count. Although some of
the objects might be intuitively interpreted as
two or more overlapping objects, this intuitive
definition of an object was not used.
The routine for counting objects was not
limited to counting solid, simply connected
objects. When a picture of 9 abstract shapes were
fed into SEAC, it produced the correct count
even though the objects contained re-entrant
profiles (i.e., a spiral) or were multiply connected
(a letter B) or were interspersed among other
objects. Another type of question that SEAC
was programmed to answer involved evaluating
the area of each of the objects counted. The area
of an object was defined as the total black part
of the object and did not include, for example,
the white circle enclosed by a black annular area.
By combining the object-counting routine with
the area-counting routine, it became possible to
feed a picture into the scanner on SEAC to
determine the number of objects having areas
ereater than a certain value. This eliminated
specks of dirt from consideration. By a trivial
modification of the program objects could have
been counted and put into classes according to
their areas.
AND DIGITAL COMPUTERS 7A HS |
SIMULATING COMPLEX PROCESSES ON SEAC
One of the most powerful features of a general-
purpose computer with a picture input and output
facility is the ability to study the performance
of picture-processing mechanisms by simulating
their behavior with a computer program. In
this way mechanisms can be ‘“‘tested’”? in some
cases under conditions that would be difficult to
create under laboratory conditions.
Automatic character-sensing (print reading)
machines constitute a particularly important class
of picture-processing devices. A study was
undertaken of various logical schemes that have
been proposed for the recognition of printed
characters. A routine was written to study a
character recognition logic based upon the identi-
fication of unique areas for each character in
an alphabet. Under such a logical procedure for
recognizing printed characters there are certain
parts of each character which are black for that
character and not for any other character. These
unique areas serve to identify the characters.
The routine that was proposed for SEAC to
study this recognition logic compared several
photographs of different characters and deter-
mined which parts of the viewing matrix were
(1) black for all letters concerned, (2) white for
all letters concerned, or (3) sometimes black and
sometimes white. This last area is the only part
of the whole viewing frame that can be used
to identify characters. Studies can now be
made of characters in different fonts to de-
termine the percentage of useful recognition areas
that characterise the different fonts.
One shortcoming in this routine is the fact
that it produces results that are very sensitive to
rectilinear translations of the characters being
analyzed. To overcome this difficulty, a SEAC
program was prepared that calculates the center
of gravity of any picture and then shifts the
picture so as to move the center of gravity to
any desired place in the matrix—usually the
center. The overlapping areas routine is being
used to study characters that have been oriented
with the shifting routine.
EFFECTS OF SIMPLE OPERATIONS ON PICTURES
Programs were coded for SEAC to perform
simple operations on each of the spots in a
30,000-spot picture. In each of these operations
only the immediate neighborhood of a spot was
considered by the computer in determining how
212
to operate on that spot. Simple routines of this
type can readily be mechanized in the form of
equipment, so experiments were performed to
see whether such simple operations could produce
important overall effects on a picture.
The first routine was one to add noise to a
picture. It was coded so that random binary
digits could be used to replace any spot in the
picture. Another random number generating
routine was used to determine which spots would
be disturbed by the noise. The ability of the
computer to simulate any desired type of noise
distribution and to produce corresponding
photographs enables quite elaborate studies to
be made of the effects of noise upon ease of
recognizing photographic information.
Another simple operation on pictures that
produced unusual results was a kind of spacial
differentiation. In this operation the computer
investigates every black spot. If it is completely
surrounded by eight other black spots, then it is
converted to a white spot. In any other case, a
black spot is written. The effect of such an opera-
tion is to preserve the boundaries of an image
while erasing all the internal area. After doing
this operation the computer inverts all the digits
of the picture, that is, it converts black to white
and vice versa. This constitutes one so-called
“custer” of a picture. Even after custering 50
times, some traces of the image still remain.
Additional trials show also that noisy figures
seem to be stable under the custering operation.
OTHER PICTURE-PROCESSING ROUTINES
In addition to these routines some other simple
routines have been written. These include rou-
tines to superimpose pictures, to smear pictures
by translating and superimposing them, to
magnify pictures so as to make their fine detail
visible, to record pictures in permanent form on
tapes and wire, and a routine to analyze a set
of pictures to determine the number of spots
that are always black or always white in the set
of pictures.
These experimental picture-processing routines
serve mainly to illustrate the variety of picture-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 6
processing procedures that can be performed on a
general purpose facility like SEAC with its
picture input and output. In addition to these
experimental investigations, studies have been
made of the feasibility of programming SEAC to
demonstrate some picture-processing operations
of considerable practical importance. In each of
the following cases these studies have shown that
SEAC could be programmed to do the operation
described, although none of the programs has
actually been written.
1. Automatic coding of chemical and electrical
diagrams. For purposes of storage of information,
pictorial representation of diagrams is very
inefficient. For example, in a picture of the size
used as SEAC input one could represent a simple
transistor oscillator schematic or a structure
diagram for the chemical compound phenol.
But the useful information in each of these
cases is no more than about 100 or 200 bits
(binary digits), whereas 30,000 bits are needed in
the picture. Thus a machine procedure to accept
a photograph and produce a coded output for
storage by a computer would result, in this
case, in a storage capacity requirment of less than
one-half percent of that needed for storing the
picture.
2. Simulation of logical procedures for recog-
nition of printed characters. If the more complex
recognition schemes were programmed and ana-
lyzed, the result might be a saving in equipment
construction costs since a simulated test might
lead to radical changes in a piece of proposed
equipment.
3. Photogrammetric analysis of stereographic
photographs. The intended purpose here is to
produce contour maps from photographic in-
formation. There is reason to believe that it may
even be possible to do photo interpretation by
machine. This would require that a program be
prepared to recognize and classify objects im an
aerial photograph in order to superimpose cultural
information on a map or to provide various other
types of overlays. Some of the problems en-
countered here border upon the subject that has
come to be known as “pattern recognition,”
and further research is still needed in this area.
Vice-Presidenis of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Perecommicat oociety Of Washimgton. 66.56 cf ede ae ce ce be nb alnb ect ce nade. L. Marton
Amturopelogical Society of Washington... ........0...0. 56-60 vee e eee FRANK M. SETZLER
miortcal society of Washington... 2.2.25). 50. eee ele eee ee ees HERBERT FRIEDMANN
Mecomenesocieny of Washington. . 2... 6... 2 cia hee ce eles ce be eh wenes W. W. Watton
Pnronmlorcal Society of Washington . 7.2... 6... ee ee ee ee eee Haroup H. SHEPARD
taut eeoetaphic SOCILY (61... ke ee See ee Stee eee ees ALEXANDER WETMORE
Wedionerisociety of Washington. 2.2... 6.6.60. s00ee cance dee eesades Louris W. CurRIER
Mediesloociety ot the District of Columbia....................6..05. FREDERICK O. CoE
Miinmrmoeeisvorical Society... 6.5. ... 62sec cd cae decd a dh Seb devedioes U.S. Grant, 3D
Boameresocichy Of Washington... 1. 06.60.0055 0.5065 c eee eens cee deehas CARROLL E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters..................... FLIPPO GRAVATT
Macmmapennsociety Of HmMgineers.......... 0260.50 c eee eee eee et Hersert G. DorsEy
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers..... JOHN HowarpD PARK
Helmimthological Society of Washington................4.0.0.05. Donatp B. McMuLLEN
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists................. BERNICE Eppy
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers................ JOHN O’ KEEFE
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers........................- Harry WELLS
National Capital Section, American Society of Civil Engineers........... D. E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine.......... WILE W. SMITH
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. HERBERT C. VACHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research...... W. T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F. N. FRENKIEL
DC. Branch, American Meteorological Society...................----.- JEROME NAMIAS
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers.......... a
CONTENTS
Page
PuysicaL CHEMISTRY.—Stabilized free radicals. Jutius L. Jackson.. 181
EnroMoLoGy.—Two new species in the genus Armigeres Theobald, 1901,
from northern Thailand (Diptera: Culicidae). Drep C. THURMAN,
Jn., and Henustine B. ‘TeugMAN......-...-----> 422 4eeeee et et SG
IcHTHYOLOGY.—A new species of iniomous fish from the Gulf of Mexico.
Gumus W: MBAD...0 fs cc Sees dened. ete nee S21 eee 188
IcHTHYOLOGY.—Garmannia zebrella, a new gobiid fish from Trinidad,
with notes on the species of the subgenus Tigrigobius Fowler. C.
RigHARD ROBINS: 65. SS ee ee 8 192
Notes AND NEWS:
River Basin Surveys unearth big Plains Indian town........... 198
Automatic sorting machine for letter mail...............--.--- 199
Color response of the human eye................. =. 233 201
Problem solving on the high-speed computer................-- 204
Processing pictorial information on digital computers.......... 210
| VOLUME 48 July 1958 NUMBER 7
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
cenveereccceecen
Published Monthly by the
WASHINGTON Aa ALD BMY. O-r,. S.C. FEN CES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
: Editor: Cuester H. Paasz, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BaAMForD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 33)4 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PROCEEDINGS should be sent to Haraup A. ReupEerR, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year...........-.--.----+++++- . $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $393 .50.
Monoararu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,” by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS............--+----+++++++- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete..................-5.0e sees $25.00
Single volumes, unbound... 5.252: .75.. 22-2 oe deep se ee the 2.00
Single mumbersi.: 2). 3. G23 why eee ee a earns eet aepiniasferacraee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’ and
adress to the Treasurer, H. S. RAPPLEYE, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
Changes of Address —Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered ag second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 48
July 1958
No. 7
PHYSICS.—Gravitation an enigma.! R. H. Dicks, Princeton University. (Com-
municated by S. Silverman.)
(Received June 3, 1958)
I am deeply appreciative of the oppor-
tunity to deliver this year’s Joseph Henry
lecture. As a Princetonian I am particularly
grateful, for although the Philosophical
Society of Washington may claim Joseph
Henry as its founder and first president,
Princeton also has a claim. For it was much
earlier as professor of natural philosophy at
Princeton University that Henry made many
of his important discoveries. He might have
been the first and was certainly not the last
scientist to sacrifice his opportunity for re-
search in order to serve the United States
Government as an administrator.
Is gravitation an enigma? I fear that many
of my colleagues would say no! In fact, for
the past 250 years there have been only two
accepted theories of gravity, each of which
has enjoyed wide spread approval, of course
not at the same time. The approval of
General Relativity is such that for the past
40 years most physicists have not felt a need
for any new fundamental experiments on
eravitation.
It is difficult to realize how venerable is
the original Newtonian theory of gravita-
tion. For example, in 1837 when Joseph
Henry was experimenting on electromagnetic
induction at Princeton, Newton’s law of
gravitation had already been stated 150
years previously. A very extensive literature
on the dynamics of the solar system had been
produced including the important works of
Kuler, Lagrange, and Laplace.
Prior to Newton’s theory of gravitation
there had been no theory in the modern sense
The 27th Joseph Henry Lecture of the Philo-
sophical Society of Washington, delivered before
the Society on April 18, 1958.
21.
of the word. An elaborate philosophical
description due to Descartes attributed
gravitation to complicated vortices in an
ether filled space called a plenum, but this
was hardly a theory.
It is interesting to note that Newton’s law
of gravitation was not immediately accepted.
As late as 1730, 43 years after the publica-
tion of Newton’s Principia, Voltaire wrote,
“A Frenchman who arrives in London will
find philosophy like everything else very
much changed there. He had left the world
a plenum and now he finds a vacwum.’ The
opposition to Newton’s theory was largely
philosophical. The inverse square law of
interaction seemed to imply ‘‘action at a
distance.”’ The idea that two bodies could
exert a force on each other at a distance and
in a vacuum was highly objectionable, par-
ticularly to the French school brought up on
the Cartesian philosophy.
Newton himself never regarded his theory
of gravitation as more than an ad hoe formal-
ism which seemed to work. In fact he wrote
that, to suppose “‘that one body may act
upon another at a distance through a
vacuum, without the mediation of anything
else ...is to me so great an absurdity that
I believe that no man, who has in philo-
sophical matters a competent faculty for
thinking, can ever fall in to it.’
He conjectured that gravitation might be
associated with a variation in density of the
ether from one place to another, with a body
being pushed from a region of high density
to a region of low density.
2 WHITTAKER, History of the theories of the
ether, 1: 29. London, 1951.
3 NEWTON, Principia.
4 WHITTAKER, loc. cit.: 28.
»)
SMITHSONIAN .n-n 3: 4
40KR2R
214
GENERAL RELATIVITY
Compared with the long period of diffi-
culty. experienced by Newton with his
theory of gravity, Einstein’s difficulties were
short lived. For it is characteristic of
Einstein’s genius that he was able to con-
struct a theory of gravitation which seemed
to work and was esthetically satisfyig. He
was able to account for a small discrepancy
observed in the orbit of Mercury as com-
puted from Newton’s laws. Further, his
theory predicted an anomalous deflection of
light by gravity, and this was later observed.
In a certain limited sense, Einstein’s
theory of gravitation, or the General Theory
of Relativity, represent a return to the
Cartesian philosophy, for Einstein’s theory
is a field theory, that is, the gravitational
force acting on a body is assumed to have
its origin in the space surrounding the body
and not to be an “action at a distance.” On
the other hand, it must also be said on the
philosophical side that General Relativity 1s
not considered to be an ether theory of
eravity, for the field is thought to represent
the geometrical properties of the vacuum
and not the properties of a “plenum.” In
fact the demise of the ether in 1905 was due
in large measure to Einstein’s contributions
to the idea of Special Relativity and Lorentz
invarience.
Einstein’s theory of gravitation stems pri-
marily from a single simple assumption. It
had long been known that the gravitational
acceleration of a body is quite accurately
independent of its composition. Thus all
objects in a freely falling box fall with it,
and an observer in this box would be un-
aware of the presence of the gravitational
field. Conversely an elevator accelerated in
eravity-free space would seem to a passenger
to be in a gravitational field. This suggests
that a uniform gravitational field is com-
pletely equivalent to a uniform acceleration.
This assumption is known as the “Principle
of Equivalence.”
From this point of view the common gravi-
tational acceleration experienced by any
small body at a given point in space is to be
regarded as a property of the geometry of
the four dimensional space-time continuum.
Stated another way, a body projected at a
given space-time point in such a way as to
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48; NOP 7
pass through another space-time point has
followed a unique curve in the four dimen-
sional space-time continuum between the
two points and this curve is assumed to be
determined by the geometrical properties of
space. Following Einstein, the obvious
curves uniquely determined by the geometry
of space-time are the geodesics, 1.e., curves
representing the “shortest”? distance, more
properly extremum, between the two points.
It is found that to represent gravitation
the proper definition of distance between
two space-time points in the space is such
that the resulting space is Riemannian.
That is, the infinitesimal distance (ds) be-
tween two neighboring space-time points 1s
defined by
ds = >> gi dx’ ie | (1)
iG |
Here as usual, the indices 7 and j are summed
over 1, 2, 3, and 4. dz‘ are coordinate differ-
entials of the four coordinates necessary to
specify the space time point. The metric
tensor, with elements g;; which are functions
of the coordinates, completely specifies the
geometrical properties of both the coordi-
nate system and the space. The trajectory
of a particle between two space-time points
is specified by the requirement that the
distance along the trajectory between the
two points be a minimum, i.e., by the varia-
tional principle.
s | as =0 (2)
where the integral is a line integral along the
path. It should be emphasized that the defi-
nition of distance encompassed in equation
(1) is assumed to be not completely arbi-
trary but to be the time or space interval
which would be measured by actual material
clocks or rods.
As stated above, in Einstein’s gravita-
tional theory there is no specific gravitational
field quantity. The gravitational field is
given wholly by the metric tensor g.; which
also specifies the various curvatures of space.
The metric tensor is determined by a field
equation in the form
8G
Rix a = gir R = Farts T ix (3)
G
JULY 1958
Here A&R 1s a curvature tensor of the space.
It is a function of the metric tensor and its
first and 2nd derivatives. R is the curvature
sealar.
li, = aR
xg (4)
G is the gravitational constant, c the velocity
of lhght and 7; the energy-momentum
tensor of matter with the matter energy
density as the 4-4 component. The field
equation (3) results from a variational
principle
0=5/@+RV=gde 6)
where L is the Lagrangian density of the
matter and »/—g d‘z is an element of vol-
ume in space-time. It should be stated that
the equations of motion of matter are con-
tained in the field equation (3) and that (2)
is actually superfluous.
Equation (3) has been solved for the case
of a spherically symmetrical mass distribu-
tion (Schwarzschild solution). The resulting
metric tensor when inserted into equation
(2) gives an equation of motion for the
planet mercury about the sun which is in
satisfactory agreement with the observations
and accounts in a satisfactory way for the
anomalous rotation of the periheleon of the
orbit. It also predicts a deflection of very
rapidly moving particles (e.g., photons) by
the sun by an amount just twice what would
have been expected from Newtonian me-
chanics. The gravitational red shift is also
predicted. The first two effects seem to be in
satisfactory agreement with observations
and the third is qualitatively satisfactory.
We have here presented only enough of
the frame work of general relativity to form
a basis for discussion, and we now return to
the question previously raised. Is gravitation
an enigma?
GRAVITATION AS GEOMETRY
As a first point we notice an enigmatic
dichotomy. Gravitation is described in a
completely different way from other inter-
actions. Gravitation is ascribed to the geo-
metrical properties of empty space, but all
other interactions are traced to local inter-
actions between particles.
DICKE: GRAVITATION AN ENIGMA
215
This is a peculiar situation with an inter-
esting history which requires a bit of elabora-
tion. We have seen how the difficulties en-
countered by Newton toward the end of the
seventeenth century in obtaining acceptance
of his law of gravitation were due to the con-
flict between the concept of ‘‘action at a
distance” and the concept of local action of
an ether on matter.
Interestingly enough, after the success of
Newtonian mechanics in dealing with plane-
tary motion became known, the pendulum
had swung the other way. Action at a dis-
tance became the accepted concept, and the
ether filled plenum was not required again
until the beginning of the nineteenth cen-
tury when Young’s important experiments
demanded a light wave for their explanation.
To the physicist of this period, a wave with-
out a medium to propagate it was unthink-
able.
The idea of force fields in the form of local
interactions of a tenuous medium (the ether)
on matter was fundamental all through the
nineteenth century. In fact, after Maxwell’s
electromagnetic theory, it became clear that
light and all electromagnetic phenomena
could be described in terms of waves in such
an ether.
With Ejinstein’s famous paper on special
relativity in 1905, the ether concept was
again in disrepute and for all practical pur-
poses has been dead for the last 50 years.
Its demise came about in a strange way. A
number of electromagnetic experiments
toward the end of the nineteenth century
had been unsuccessful in measuring the
velocity of the earth relative to the ether. It
was shown by Lorentz and others that a
contraction of matter in the direction of
motion and a slowing down of the rate of
clocks in motion, both by a factor
[1 — (v/e)?]!” (6)
where v is the velocity of the earth relative
to the ether, would explain these results.
Also it was later shown by Lorentz that these
contractions would in fact result from his
ether theory of the electron with a certain
reasonable assumption as to the electron’s
structure. He furthermore showed that the
mass of an electron in motion should increase
by a factor of the reciprocal of (6).
216
In 1905 Einstein suggested that since it
appeared to be experimentally impossible to
measure a velocity relative to the ether, all
inertial frames were equivalent and an in-
ertial frame with the ether at rest was physi-
cally meaningless. Once again serious doubt
was expressed concerning the existence of an
ether. He argued that if the concept of
velocity relative to an ether is physically
meaningless, the ether must not exist, other-
wise this motion would be physically mean-
ingful. We shall return later to this question.
By 1916 the vacuum had become ecomph-
cated. The curvature of space represented
the gravitational field. The vacuum also
carried the electromagnetic fields. One sus-
pects that with empty space having so many
properties, all that had been accomplished
in destroying the ether was a semantic trick.
The ether had been renamed the vacuum.
This was a useful trick, however, as the me-
chanical connotation of the old name had
been left behind.
After the discovery of the photon and the
development of quantum mechanics in 1927,
it was realized that what was formerly re-
carded as an abstract electromagnetic field
in the vacuum could be visualized as a swarm
of particles, the photons, being continuously
created and destroyed. The electromagnetic
forces could be traced to purely local inter-
actions of the photons with charged parti-
cles. Thus what had been thought to be a
vacuum was not a vacuum but contained
photons. Furthermore, it was then realized
that there were other forces (e.g. nuclear)
and these also could be attributed to purely
local interactions between particles. Only
eravitation remained as a field property of
empty space.
In recent years space has been getting
even more complex, with a charged particle
being surrounded by a halo of both photons
and electron-positron pairs in virtual states.
These particles do not materialize as proper
well behaved specimens but have only a
transient existence, being continuously re-
placed by new ones.
We thus see that all ordinary forces (e.g.,
electromagnetic and nuclear) are, from a
physical point of view, believed to be due to
purely local interactions of particles with
each other. For example, the strong attrac-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 433 Nomen
tion between nucleons in the nucleus is
believed due to collisions with virtual mesons
(pions) which are being continually created
and annihilated. Only gravitation and in-
ertia are singled out as forces associated with
empty space. This is an anomaly to which
we shall return.
GRAVITATION A WEAK INTERACTION
The second way in which gravitation 1s
anomalous is In its strength. It is the weakest
of all known interactions.
It might seem strange to call the force of
2 X 108 tons, required to keep the earth in
its orbit, a weak force. However, stated on a
per particle basis, and compared with other
forces, it is extremely weak. For example,
in the hydrogen atom the gravitational force
between the electron and the proton is only
5 X 10-*° that of the electrostatic interac-
tion.
The fact that the strength of the gravita-
tional interaction is so different from other
interactions might tend to strengthen the
belief that it is completely different from
other forces.
There are some reasons for believing that
this is true. For over 35 years Einstem and
many others attempted to extend the geo-
metrical notions of General Relativity to
obtain a theory of the structure of particles,
and hence of other interactions, but without
notable success. These attempts were called
unified field theories. It is said that one
well-known physicist, in referring to the uni-
fied field theories, commented, “‘Let no man
join together what God hath put asunder.”
On the other hand, there are empirical
reasons for believing that the strength of the
eravitational interaction is related to both
the scale of the universe and the strength of
the strong atomic interactions. By a strong
interaction we shall mean an electromag-
netic or nuclear interaction.
The empirical relations in question were
first discovered by A. S. Eddington and are
known as the Eddington numbers.® As the
first of these dimensionless numbers we
could take the ratio of the electrical to gravi-
tational force between an electron and a
proton. As was stated previously this is
5 Eppinaton, The philosophy of physical science.
Cambridge, 1939.
JULY 1958
2
39
= 7
a BSG (7)
In similar fashion the age of the universe
(T = 12 X 10° years) expressed in units of
atomic time is
3
Tm.¢€
2
=4>x 10” (8)
Another significant number is the square
root of the number of heavy particles in the
visible part of the universe. With the as-
sumption of an average density of matter in
space of p = 10-*° gms cm ® this is roughly
1/2
Aor !
3 R'p
= ly <a" (9)
Mp
Here R = Tc is the “Hubble radius” of the
universe. The approximate equality of these
three numbers would seem to imply some
sort of a connection between gravitational
and atomic quantities.
It should be noted that the first number
represents a connection between quantities
usually called physical or atomic constants
whereas the other two involve astrophysical
or cosmological quantities expressed in
atomic units.
An interesting derived quantity is ob-
tained by squaring (9) and dividing by (7)
and (8). This quantity which can be called
the ratio of gravitational energy to matter
energy in the universe is
a R’oG
See = (36
: (10)
It should be emphasized that these numbers
are inaccurate. In particular the accuracy
with which the density of matter in the uni-
verse 1s known Is very poor.
What interpretation can be made of the
Eddington numbers? That these relations
should be accidental seems unlikely, but
what is their significance?
DIRAC’S COSMOLOGY
A number of yearsago P. A. M. Dirac®
made an interesting suggestion regarding
6 Dirac, Proce. Roy. Soc. A165: 199. 1938.
DICKE: GRAVITATION AN ENIGMA
217
the Eddington numbers. He noted that one
of the numbers (8) is proportional to the age
of the universe. With the assumption that
the rough equality of (7), (8), and (9) is
independent of time, he concluded that,
compared with electrical interactions, the
gravitational interactions are steadily get-
ting weaker. More exactly, the gravitational
constant G varies inversely as the age of the
universe. He also concluded from the
equality of (7) and (9) that the number of
particles in the visible part of the universe
varies aS the square of the age of the uni-
verse. This later conclusion does not neces-
sarily imply the creation of new particles as
the boundary of the visible part of the uni-
verse may move outward to encompass more
particles in the interior.
Dirac’s hypothesis is very interesting as it
suggests that the gravitational interaction
between two particles is not a purely local
phenomenon but depends upon distant mat-
ter. As the amount of matter in the visible
universe becomes greater, the gravitational
interaction becomes weaker.
If Dirac’s hypothesis is correct, there are
many important implications for geologists
and astrophysicists. Some of these have been
previously discussed.’ We here merely sum-
marize very briefly some of the important
effects.
(a) The radiation rate of the sun varies as
G’. The sun must then have been hotter in
the past.
(b) With a constant albedo (i.e., visual
surface reflection coefficient) the surface
temperature of the earth would vary with
the age of the universe as the —2.25 power
of the age.
(c) The albedo of the earth would actually
change with the water vapor content of the
atmosphere. This would tend to stabilize
the earth’s temperature for the past few
billion years.
(d) For an age of the universe of 12 X 10°
years, and an age of the solar system of
4 X 10° years, the increased radiation rate
of the sun in the past would have required
a conversion of roughly 20 % of the hydrogen
into helium. The rapid burning in the past
would have been obtained through the use
7 For a summary see R. H. Dicker, Rev. Mod.
Phys. 29: 355. 1957.
218
of the carbon cycle rather than the p-p re-
action presently the dominant one. This
would lead to a convective core in the sun
serving to mix the helium throughout the
core. It is possible that a thorough mixing of
helium throughout the whole sun might have
occurred at some time in the past.
(e) In addition to the effects associated
with an original high surface temperature,
there are many other important geological
effects. For example, the earth gradually ex-
pands with time. This could be an explana-
tion for the apparent relation between the
coast lines of the land masses bordering the
Atlantic Ocean and the mid-Atlantic ridge.
(f) The gradual decrease of gravitation
would lead to a continuous slowing of the
rate of revolution of the planets and the
moon compared with the rotation rate of the
earth. This seems to be observed although
there are several other possible explanations,
including an increased rotation rate of the
earth produced by atmospheric tides, melt-
ing 1ce masses etc.
(g) The gradual reduction of pressure in-
side the earth leads to a continual slow con-
vection of the earth’s mantle carrying heat
to the surface. The computed rate of heat
transfer is about 5 X 1077 cal/cm? sec and
this is compatible with the observed rate of
heat flow after making allowance for heat.
from radio-activity. There appears to be
some geological evidence that such a convec-
tion does actually exist in the earth’s mantle.
By comparing these conclusions, and
many others, with the observed history of
the solar system, it may be possible to ex-
clude Dirac’s hypothesis. It would be truly
remarkable if geology and astronomy could
answer such a fundamental physical ques-
tion about the gravitational interaction.
Although there are a number of reasons
for accepting Dirac’s hypothesis, there is
also some evidence to the contrary. For ex-
ample there is evidence for glacial deposits
over 1 billion years old. It is difficult to
understand such deposits if the sun were
substantially hotter at these times.
It is interesting to note therefore that
Dirac’s argument has a logical loop hole. To
infer the time dependence of the gravita-
tional interaction requires more than a
simple observation that the reciprocal of the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, No. 7
eravitational constant and the age of the
universe, when expressed dimensionalessly,
are now nearly equal. It is also necessary to
assume that now is a random time. But is it?
The present epoch is conditioned by the
fact that the biological conditions for the
existence of man must be satisfied. This re-
quires the existence of a planetary system
and a hot star. If we assume an evolutionary
cosmology starting with the formation of
hydrogen 12 billion years ago, there is an
upper limit for the epoch of man which 1s
imposed by the following two conditions.
First, hydrogen is being continually con-
verted to helium and heavier elements. Per-
haps 20% has already been “burned.” The
formation of new stars is thus limited to
perhaps the first 10"! years. Second, there is
an upper limit on the radiating life of a star.
If the star is massive (10 times the sun’s
mass) it lives riotously, burning its hydrogen
like a wastrel. For a light star (14 9 the sun’s
mass) hydrogen is burned slowly and the
star is capable of living much longer than
the sun, 100 times as long. However, if the
star is much smaller than this, its central
temperature never rises high enough to cause
nuclear reactions to take place. Such a light
star radiates until its gravitational energy is
gone and then it cools off. It 1s seen there-
fore that the longest life of a star is very
roughly 102 years and this puts an upper
limit on the epoch of man.
There is also a lower limit on the epoch of
man. With the assumption that initially
only hydrogen exists, it 1s necessary to pro-
duce other elements in the stellar caldrons
and distribute them about the universe
before a planetary system of our type can
be formed. It is a bit difficult to estimate
this time but it would seem that 1 billion
years would be a reasonable lower bound on
the epoch of man.
It is thus seen that the epoch of man is not
random but is fairly sharply delineated.
Thus it is possible that the strength of the
eravitational interaction is not determined
by the immense scale of the universe, but
that conversely the scale of the universe and
the present epoch is determined by the rela-
tive strengths of the strong and weak inter-
actions.
From this point of view the Eddington
=e ———————
———EE
——
JuLY 1958
number (7) is fundamental, (8) is deter-
mined by biological considerations and only
(9) requires an explanation. Presumably the
significance of (9) is lost in the mystery of
the original creation of hydrogen, for this
number is determined by the density of
matter. We shall return later to a possible
explanation of this number.
One unsatisfactory feature of the above
explanation of the numerical relations (7),
(8), and (9) is that it does not give a satis-
factory account of the enormous size of these
numbers. It would be hoped that eventually
an atomic constant such as the dimension-
less number (7) would result from some
theory of particles. But how could a number
such as 10%? be expected to appear in a
theory for which all other dimensionless
numbers are small?
Here, Dirac’s cosmology is more satisfac-
tory. The large size of the Eddington num-
bers is considered to be purely accidental
since the epoch now is taken to be random.
It is possible to construct cosmologies
which lie somewhere between these two ex-
tremes. It could be assumed that the epoch
now is not random but determined by the
strengths of the weak interactions in the
manner previously described. On the other
hand the strength of the weak interactions
might be determined by the structure of the
universe. I’or example the number of parti-
cles in the universe might be large as a result
of some chain reaction and this large number
might determine the strength’s of the weak
interactions in some way not presently
understood.
It is evident that all these cosmological
models are highly speculative. However, one
feature they have in common is not easily
avoided. They all imply some sort of inter-
relation between the strong and gravita-
tional interactions.
ABSOLUTE SPACE, MACH’S PRINCIPLE
AND GRAVITATION
It will be recalled that it was largely
Einstein’s influence which led to the rejec-
tion of an absolute space as an allowable
physical concept. However, Hinstein’s theory
of gravitation does make use of some of the
concepts of an absolute space. For example
inertial coordinate systems are assumed to
DICKE: GRAVITATION AN ENIGMA
219
have a well defined meaning even in the
absence of gravitating matter.
Also it appears to be a basic assumption
of Einstein’s theory that such geometrical
concepts as points, curvatures, and geodesics
are meaningful for a vacuum. The concep-
tual difficulty of defining these concepts and
of describing motion relative to such an
empty physical space is ameliorated by
imagining space filled with a set of massless
test particles. By moving on geodesics of the
space, these particles serve to make evident
the underlying geometrical structure of
space. This underlying geometrical struc-
ture is thus regarded as a property of an
absolute space. While it is true that the
geometry of space is affected by the presence
of gravitating matter, General Relativity is
usually thought to give meaningful results
even in the absence of matter.
The conceptual difficulties with ascribing
physical properties to a vacuum have been
long apparent. That there should be pre-
ferred coordinate systems (the inertial Sys-
tems) in empty space is difficult to compre-
hend. This is a very old problem, and still
without a solution. Many years ago Mach®
made an interesting suggestion which has
come to be known as Mach’s Principle.
According to this principle it is not accelera-
tion relative to empty space that produces
an inertial force. This force is considered to
be due to the acceleration relative to distant
matter in the space. From the point of view
of a strict relativist, the effect can also be
said to be due to an acceleration of the
distant matter relative to the stationary par-
ticle experiencing the inertial force.
The inertial force is not considered to be
a new and different type of force but simply
the gravitational interaction with distant
matter. A particle at rest with respect to
distant matter finds itself surrounded by a
spherically symmetrical universe, and all
gravitational forces cancel. If distant matter
is accelerated, there is an unbalanced gravi-
tational force acting on the particle in ques-
tion and this force is called the inertial
force.?
For example, the earth accelerating to-
ward the sun ean be considered at rest in a
ed. 6. 1904.
8 HE. Macu, The science of mechanics,
9D. Scrama, M. N. 118: 34. 1953.
220 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
particular coordinate system for which the
total gravitational force on the earth is zero.
This force is composed of the gravitational
pull of the sun on the earth and the gravita-
tional interaction of the remainder of the
universe.”
From the point of view of Mach’s Princi-
ple, the inertial mass of a particle is deter-
mined by distant matter. From the point of
view of Einstein’s theory the inertial mass is
a purely local property of the particle.
Interestingly enough, the actual structure
of the universe appears to be compatible
with Mach’s Principle, at least to the extent
that the structure is known. This 1s easily
seen by considering an old problem solved
by Thirring.!° Thirring used the weak field
solution to Einstein’s field equations to find
the rotation of the inertial coordinate sys-
tems inside a massive rotating spherical
shell. He found that the inertial coordinate
axes rotated with an angular velocity w
relative to distant inertial axes where
SGm
3a (11)
() == {@Ji)
Here wy is the angular velocity of the rotat-
ing shell, m is its mass and a its radius.
In similar manner, from the point of view
of Mach the Coriollis force experienced in a
rotating laboratory is due to the gravita-
tional field produced by distant matter
wheeling around in a set of concentric shells.
In this case the rotation rate of the inertial
coordinate system w is equal to the rotation
rate of the distant matter w. and Eq. (11)
becomes
(12)
Here the distant matter is treated as a set
of concentric shells out to the Hubble radius
R. [p] is an effective density of matter and
is equal to the observed density only for
r < R, for the weak field solution is valid
only under this condition. It would be ex-
pected that equation (12) could be written
approximately as
GM
ine:
10 Phys. Zeit. 19: 33. 1918; 22: 29. 1921.
1 (13)
VOL. 435 sNoued
where MW is the mass in the visible part of
the Universe.
The relations, equations (12) and (13)
appear to hold for the actual universe to
within the accuracy of the observation. See
equation (10).
It must be emphasized that General Rela-
tivity itself does not require a condition of
the form of equation (12) but that such a
condition is compatible with General Rela-
tivity. Hence, it is conceivable that some
solutions of Einstein’s field equations are
compatible with Mach’s Principle and that
Mach’s Principle determines which are
physically meaningful solutions.
From this point of view it would be hoped
that Mach’s Principle should appear as a
boundary condition upon solutions to
Einstein’s field equations, the allowed solu-
tions being only ones which are compatible
with Mach’s Principle. Attempts of Komar
and others to introduce such conditions into
Einstein’s theory have not yet been suc-
cessful.
It is also possible that the absolute inertial
properties of space are an essential part of
Einstein’s theory of gravitation and that the
theory is incompatible with Mach’s Princi-
ple. Indications exist that this ISU:
Einstein’s theory may not be compatible
with Mach’s Principle. Consider, for exam-
ple, the space inside a hollow spherical mass
shell. According to the interior Schwarz-
schild solution of Einstein’s equation, the
space is flat and has inertial properties inde-
pendent of either the mass or radius of the
sphere or of the existence of other exterior
concentric mass spheres. Thus according to
Einstein’s theory the presence of this matter
has no locally observable effect on the in-
terior.
However, consider again equation (GRP) ea
can be combined with equation (13) to give
OS yt
WO YM a
(13a)
with y a number of the order of unity. This
expresses the ideas of Mach very neatly.
The ratio of the two precession rates 1s m
the ratio of the masses and inversely in the
ratio of the radii of the mass spheres. On the
other hand, the ratio 7/R, as seen locally,
is easily changed. For example, the rotating
JULY 1958
sphere could be surrounded by a large fixed
spherical shell, in addition to distant galac-
tic matter, effectively changing the integral
in equation (12) and hence the effective ratio
M/R. According to equation (18a) such a
change would result in a change in the ratio
w/w, a locally observable effect. From equa-
tion (11) this implies a change in the
quantity
ac?
This change is to be traced to a change in
the inertial forces. On the other hand, with
local units defined in terms of atomic units,
m and a are unchanged by definition. Also
c could not change or there would be large
observable violations of the Principle of
Equivalence.!! The only possibility is a
change in G as it is observed locally. With
this interpretation, equation (12) gives the
locally observed value of G7! as an integral
over all the observed matter assumed to be
isotopically distributed. With this interpre-
tation, however, the numerical constant of
equation (12) must also be questioned as it
is based on General Relativity which is now
invalid under this interpretation.
It should be noted that from equation (12)
the presence of near by matter affects the
local gravitational constant by an apprecia-
ble amount. Although the sun is hardly dis-
tributed isotropically about the earth its
presence should change G by an amount of
the order of
= =§6 = = =2 10" a4
Another possible effect of distant matter
on inertial mass would appear as a velocity
dependence of the gravitational constant.
The uniform motion of a laboratory relative
to distant matter might result in a change in
the gravitational constant observed in the
laboratory. Any such change should be pro-
portional to the square of the velocity rela-
tive to distant matter.
Mach’s Principle provides a possible ex-
planation for the Eddington number’s,
equations (7), (8), and (9). We note first
that equation (10), after making allowance
11 R. H. Dicks, Rev. Mod. Phys. 29: 368. 1957.
DICKE: GRAVITATION AN ENIGMA jo),
for the inaccuracies in the numbers, is
equivalent to equation (12). Secondly, the
gravitational constant and the size of (7) is
conditioned by the size of the universe,
through equation (12). The number (8) is
determined by biological conditions in the
manner previously described. The number
(10) is determined by (7), (8), and (11). The
enormous size of (7) is related to the large
number of particles in the universe and the
reason for this will not be understood until
a mechanism for the creation of matter is
found.
Dirac’s hypothesis that G varies with the
age of the universe is understandable from
the point of view of Mach’s Principle. In
fact equation (12) implies that G is constant
only if M/R is constant as the universe
evolves. On the other hand, the structure of
the universe may be such that the ratio
M/R does not change with time. Thus with
the assumption of this form of Mach’s
Principle G can be either varying or constant
as a function of the time.
MACH’S PRINCIPLE AND THE ETHER
As we have seen, only gravitation and
inertia are considered to be field properties
of the vacuum. All other forces are assumed
to be caused by local interactions between
particles, real or virtual. To ascribe such
physical properties to the vacuum has long
been considered objectionable.
It has been seen from the strength of the
gravitational interaction that there are rea-
sons for believing that gravitation is not
completely different from other interactions.
This suggests that gravitation be treated
like other forces. It might be imagined that
a gravitating mass is surrounded by a swarm
of virtual particles and that the gravita-
tional interaction involves only local inter-
actions with these particles. It would be
expected that a quantization of the gravi-
tational field might result in such a par-
ticle picture of gravitation.
This picture of gravitation has several ad-
vantages. The dichotomy between gravita-
tion and ordinary forees has disappeared,
eravitation is not a property of the vacuum,
local interactions between particles can be
treated in accordance with the general rela-
tivity principle, and an action at a distance
DD, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
principle is not needed. The general rela-
tivity principle states that the only physi-
cally meaningful motions are a matter
relative to other matter. Mach’s Principle
follows from the general relativity principle.
Inertia effects would be treated in the
manner described previously as a gravita-
tional imteraction with matter at great
distance. Thus the contribution to the den-
sity of the virtual particle field falls off as
r— and distant matter 1s more important
than near by matter in determining the
inertial properties of space.
Such a picture of space provides the extra
degree of freedom needed for a variable
eravitational constant (@). Two regions of
space, both free of gravitational fields, may
have different densities of virtual particles
and different gravitational constants.
It will be noted that the picture of gravi-
tation which is being drawn is very similar
to the ether theories long rejected. In this
connection it is interesting to note that the
old objection of Einstein and others to the
ether concept no longer holds. An ether
consisting of a swarm of virtual particles,
all in motion, may present the same appear-
ance to two observers moving relative to
each other. If it be assumed that the velocity
distribution of the virtual particles is
Lorentz invarient, the swarm of virtual
particles (the ether or plenum) would look
the same to all uniformly moving observers.
There is one difficulty with such an as-
sumption. Such a distribution implies parti-
cles with arbitrarily high momentum states.
If such momenta are excluded, Lorentz in-
varience would not be exact. Anomalies
would show up at very high energies. From
this point of view Lorentz invarience is not
the simple fundamental invarience that is
presently believed. It does not have the
fundamental significance of the general rela-
tivity principle.
MODELS AND FORMALISM
One can hardly drag the “ether’’, kicking
and screaming, back into the laboratory for
serious consideration without saying a bit
about the role and significance of such a con-
cept as the ‘ether’ for modern physics.
Since the time of Newton there have been
voL. 48, NO. 7
two diametrically opposed techniques for
inductive reasoning in physics. Hach has
contributed a great deal to the development
of physics.
Newton was probably the first exponent
of the formal approach. In the Principia
Newton states: “I have not been able to dis-
cover the cause of those properties of gravity
from phenomena and I frame no hypoth-
esis!”
In the formal approach to the physical
world, only the physical observables are re-
earded as of physical significance, and the
role of theory is one of giving a purely formal
description of the relations between observa-
bles. The great advantage of this technique
is that a problem is simplified to its bare
essentials. A complicated substratum, exist-
ing perhaps only in the human mind, is
ignored.
Thermodynamics is a very good example
of a formal theory. The observables are such
quantities as temperature, density, heat,
energy, etc. The complicated substratum of
moving molecules is ignored in constructing
the theory.
A good example of the model approach to
inductive reasoning is furnished by the
molecular model of a gas and the resulting
kinetic theory and statistical mechanics.
This model is very old and was used by D.
Bernoulli in 1738 to formulate a primitive
kinetic theory of gases. The model was ig-
nored for 100 years thereafter until the
middle of the nineteenth century when it
was again used to explain a variety of things.
It should be remembered that practically
the whole of the presently accepted kinetic
theory of gases and statistical mechanics
was originally based on a model which was
not at the time subject to a direct experi-
mental check.
For the past 30 years formal theories have
dominated physics, and this has been
coupled with an insistence on an operational
definition of the observable quantities. This
is in marked contrast with the nineteenth
century when the model approach was the
dominant one. If the present atmosphere of
a completely formal approach had been
dominant during the nineteenth century, it
is very doubtful that the kinetic theory of
:
|
|
|
|
|
:
|
|
~ a ES Se ee eee SSS
JULY 1958
gases would have appeared until it had been
forced by direct experimental observation of
the molecules.
What then is the significance of a model
such as the ‘ether’? This has a simple
answer. To the extent that the model is
beyond observation, it is simply a figment
of the imagination has has no place in
physics. However, to the extent that the
model represents phenomena which are ob-
servable or may be some day observable,
and to the extent that the model suggests
new experiments and new theoretical de-
velopments, it is useful. One can go too far
in requiring a strict and immediate observa-
ble significance for all physical concepts
employed. What is important is the realiza-
tion that the end results should be subject
to observation.
SUMMARY
We started with Descartes’ gravity, a
maelstrom in a plenum, and ended with the
speculation that both gravitational and in-
DICKE: GRAVITATION AN ENIGMA
223
ertial forces may be due to a bath of particles
in rapid motion interacting with matter. We
considered the mysterious Eddington num-
bers, Dirac’s hypothesis of a time varying
gravitational constant, and the implication
of Mach’s Principle. The remarkable fact
was considered that the history of the solar
system seen through the eyes of astronomers
and geologists may enable fundamental con-
clusions to be drawn regarding physical
interactions in the past.
The chief conclusion that can be distilled
from the above discussion is that it is a
serious lack of observational data that keeps
one from drawing a clear portrait of gravita-
tion. Each tiny fragment of information
appears as a star shining through a murky
haze. Conclusions regarding the most funda-
mental of physical concepts are based on
numbers which may be off by a factor of 100.
In any case it appears clear that there is
little reason for complacency regarding
gravitation. It may well be the most funda-
mental and least understood of the interac-
tions.
SSE SS
If we were to select the most intelligent, imaginative, energetic, and emotionally
stable third of mankind, all races would be represented.—F RANz Boas.
224
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. Se eNiomen
PHYSIOLOGY —The physiology of aging—a research approach. JOSEPH W. STILL,
Washington, D.C. (Communicated by C. H. Page.)
(Received May 28, 1958)
In a previous paper entitled Are organis-
mal aging and aging death necessarily the
result of death of vital cells in the organism? (a
cybernetic theory of aging) (1) 1t was shown
that it is possible for a multicelled organism to
die (be disorganized) even though all its vital
cells might still be alive. Thus, a sharp
distinction was drawn between cell life (and
death) and multicelled organismal life (and
death). From that fact it was inferred that
unicellular aging (if it occurs) is an entirely
different phenomenon from multicellular
aging, which is the aging phenomenon most
interesting to us as humans.
That article also presented a simplified
model of the central control panel in the
brain which regulates the organism as a
whole through nervous-endocrine mechan-
isms.
In this paper an attempt will be made to
relate those ideas of central control to the
physiology of peripheral cells in order to
make an operationally more complete theory
of aging so as to suggest, as the result of this
analysis, some further research steps which
need to be taken.
In the paper mentioned above the overall
change in physiological response with ad-
vanecing age was illustrated by means of
the accompanying ideograph (Fig. 1).
This graph indicates that while, with
advancing age, the range of response to both
acute and chronic stimuli may narrow some-
what, the mosi striking change is a slowing
of the rate of response. The changes in acute
nervous reaction times are so well known as
to require no proof here. To present the
chronic changes in more detail, the following
ideograph [Adopted from Selyes’ Stress (2)|
which compares the General (endocrine)
Adaptation Syndrome response of young and
old animals to chronic stressing agent(s) has
been prepared (Fig. 2).
In the older animal the phases of reaction
and recovery are somewhat slower, Just as
in acute nervous responses. Hence, the re-
sistance phase is later in developing. Also,
the old animal is unable to withstand a
chronic stress for as long as the young
(adult) one, and so the exhaustion phase
ending in death arrives earlier in the old
than in the young animal. Possibly the
resistance to many chronic stressors is
actually stronger in the middle than in
younger life, but measurements and data are
not yet sufficient to allow us to discuss such
fine points as this at present.
These chronic curves provide an over-all
description of the changes in resistance of
the whole organism to stressors at the young
and old stages of life. If we are going to
learn how to increase the resistance (1.e.,
change the G.A.S. curve) of the older
individual toward the youthful curve we
must learn what is going on at the cell level
and eventually at the molecular level zn the
cells of the control center. I believe cybernetic
principles can help us take this step.
Let us begin with a schematic “‘cell’s-eye’””
view of life (Fig. 3), which summarizes the
principal events which may occur and the
mechanisms which control them at the
cellular level for all cells.
Each cell swims and lives in a little pool of
interstitial fluid called ground substance.
This is a remarkable solution which is in a
constant state of physico-chemical change in
many ways. It carries food, oxygen, and
other materials to the cell from the blood
capillary highways serving that cell. The
eround substance also returns metabolic
wastes from the cell to the capillaries. At the
edges of the interstitial pools are the re-
markable all-purpose capillary highways,
which bring fresh food, oxygen, etc., from
afar to replace those which the cell removes
from its ground substance pool. These
highways also remove waste products which
the cell dumps into its pool and thus main-
1T hope the reader will excuse my talking in
allegorical fashion as I describe the cell’s life. I
do so because it greatly simplifies the problem of
description, and also avoids the need for exces-
sively precise statements which would slow down
the description and add nothing to the meaning.
IN RESPONSE
PHYSIOLOGICA
TO STR
JuLYy 1958
STILL: PHYSIOLOGY OF AGING
eee --—— LIFESPAN ——
Fria. 1.—Characteristic age change, in homeostatic response to stressors, of physiological variables
(such as temperature).
tains the pool’s sanitary state. Life is pretty
simple for the average cell, but there are
‘oroblems”’ and “‘worries” at the cell level,
too. It is important that the fluid in the
pool remain pretty stable in many different
respects. It must be neither too hot nor too
cold. It must have a pretty steady salt
content. Its degree of acidity must be pretty
steady. The pool must contain various
amounts of the different food elements:
sugars, fats, proteins, and vitamins, as well
as the necessary work orders (enzymes,
hormones, ete.) which its cell requires to keep
it working in harmony with all the other
cells of the organism. Finally, the fluid pool
must be liquid (juicy) enough so these
substances can easily pass to and from the
cell as needed. If the pool fluid gets too
gel-like—too thick—we can easily imagine
the difficulties this would create.
One of the ‘“‘worries”’ of a cell is due to the
fact that there is a traffic control operator at
the ‘‘corner’’ where its particular stretch of
highway begins. Through some mysterious
mechanism not understood by the cell, this
traffic control operator can increase, reduce,
or even stop traffic (blood flow) completely.
This traffic control mechanism is, of course,
a small (precapillary sphincter) circular
muscle, which can constrict or dilate and
thereby reduce or increase the flow of
(blood) traffic. Fortunately for the cell we
YOUTHFUL RESPONSE
=_—_—
REACTION
PHASE
EXHAUSTION
a cae .\ PHASE
HYPER- / OLDER RESPONSE <<
RESISTANCE /
PHASE ie
Ee
STRESSING AGENT APPLIED a $$
TIME
Fie. 2—Comparison of young and old response to chronic stressing agents.
226 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 7
AUTONOMIC NERVES
(SYMPATHETIC AND
PARASYMPATHETIC)
MESSAGES TO
PERIPHERAL
OPERATORS
ACUTE HORMONES
(ADRENALIN &
PITRESSIN)
INTERNAL REPORTS
~—— DIRECTION OF FLOW
ND SEX GLANDS)
MUSCLE OPERATORS
iy
a —_ ||
eH
eramaes CHRONIC HORMONES
(THYROID ADREN. CORTEX,
Fic. 3.—Cell’s-eye view of life.
are talking about, complete stoppage has
never occurred for very long, so it has never
suffered anything worse than mild hunger.
But the potentiality of starvation obviously
exists.
Another source of ‘‘worry”’ is the fact that
at times the highway may get overloaded
with unneeded quantities of useful or even
with harmful chemical objects. When this
occurs, some of these may spill over into and
accumulate in the cell’s pool. Such chemical
substances, perhaps entirely harmless when
present in normal amounts, can become
awful nuisances and even may threaten the
life of the cell when they pile up in chroni-
cally excessive amounts. Sometimes this
causes the pool to get pretty thick and then
the movement of oxygen, food, and metabo-
lites is impeded. This state of affairs reminds
us of the gardener who is happy to have a
few insects and birds in his garden, but
whose garden can be destroyed if too many
of them enter it. From the standpoint of
stress, it is the chronic hormone substances
which most concern the cells. Perhaps in
prolonged periods of excessive stress the
enzyme operators get overwhelmed with too
many work orders. Perhaps a kind of chemi-
cal confusion results.
These cell ‘‘worries’”’ are very real, for
there is so very little the cell can do about
them except to “worry.” The flow of traffic,
as well as the amounts of the different
materials flowing down the highway, is
beyond the control of the cell. The only way
the cell can modify its environment is
indirectly by sending out its metabolic
wastes which serve to advise central head-
quarters of the state of affairs at the periph-
eral cell level. These reports may or may
not be heeded, depending on the general
needs of the organism as a whole. _
In this narrow sense the life of the
individual cell does not extend beyond its
interstitial pool. Yet it is influenced by its
environment and by means of its “feed-back
messages” it is able to report to the central _
control headquarters and so it may in-
fluence its own environment indirectly. We
must never forget that the life of the organ-
ism as a whole depends on the successful
coordination by means of this control
system of the billions of individual cells
which make up our bodies. Therefore, indi-
vidual cells often are sacrificed for the gen-
eral good of the billions of cells which consti-
tute the whole organism.
Now I have let one simple round cell
stand as a symbol for all the billions of cells
of the human body, but we all know that
there are actually a hundred or more dif-
ferent kinds of cells in our bodies. But this
Juty 1958
is not important for our present purposes.
Regardless of differences, all of their
individual cell lives are controlled by nerves
and hormones through peripheral operators
and mechanisms as shown in this schematic
simplified picture of a cell and its environ-
ment.
Now let us look again at the headquarters
in the brain which carries out the remarkable
coordination job which makes a single
organism out of billions of individual cells.
It is a very complex headquarters in detail,
but in its essence it is not really so compli-
cated at all. A schematic picture of it is
shown in Fig. 4.
There is an Intelligence Division where
reports come in both from outside and from
inside the organism. Our eyes, ears, nose,
and skin pick up the outside reports. The
inside reports are of course the metabolic
feed-back messages already mentioned,
INTELLIGENCE
DIVISION -
STATISTICAL
CLERKS
INTEGRATION \S
COORDINATION |COORDINATION
AND UNITS
MESSAGE
CENTER ae
CODE
CLERK
/ Go
by ”
ps a |
MESSAGE / 3
CHANNELS : 5
=
ANTAGONISTIC
PAIRS OF
PERIPHERAL
OPERATORS ls
RANGE OF VARIABILITY
OF FACTORS
CELL’S SWIMMING POOL
STILL: PHYSIOLOGY OF AGING WUT
which are constantly being given off by the
cells of the body. Internal reports also are
carried centrally over autonomic and pro-
prioceptive pathways. Specialized statistical
clerk cells (in appetite, thirst, and other
centers) are constantly receiving and count-
ing these internal and external reports, and
in some manner issuing statistical summary
reports to the integrating and coordinating
units in the message center (vasomotor, re-
spiratory, and other nuclei). Here, the various
reports are digested, integrated, weighed
and analyzed. Final decisions are made,
translated into work order messages and
transmitted by the code clerk cells over the
various message channels which the or-
ganism possesses.
It may ultimately prove to be over-
simplified but at present we can identify
three kinds of messages to the operators in
the field: (1) those which travel over the
EXTERNAL
REPORTS
INTERNAL
REPORTS
(FEEDBACKS)
DIFFERENT
TYPES OF
ESSAGES TO
PERIPHERAL
PLUS
Fig. 4.—Cybernetic model of headquarters central control center.
228
autonomic nervous system to the capillary
operators which direct the traffic control
muscles (pre-capillary sphincters) which
regulate the capillary traffic of specific cells;
(2) those fast-acting endocrines like adrena-
lin, which can act only at those same points
where the muscle operators possess special
receivers (autonomic myoneural junctions),
and (3) those slow-acting endocrines like
the hormones of the thyroid, adrenal
cortex and sex glands which can act on the
chemical enzyme operators found in all
cells and in their interstitial pools.
Through these three basic mechanisms,
the lives of individual cells, groups of cells,
and the cells of the whole body are ordered,
controlled, and regulated for the benefit of
the organism as a whole.
As pointed out in my previous aging
theory paper, it does no good in complex
decision-making if the information needed
comes too late to be used. So, it is in this
vital center. The statistical clerks, the
integrating cells, and code clerks must all
do their jobs and they must send their
messages and reports to ARRIVE ON TIME. It
may be, as suggested in that paper, that
the basic physiological defect of aging is an
increase in the message transmission time
in the central headquarters. Such an event
would account for:
1. The increased autonomic nervous-
endocrine reaction time which is the one
characteristic change seen in many, if not
all, physiological activities in which time is
measured.
2. The decreased capacity for fine co-
ordination by way of the autonomic nervous-
endocrine system in senescence, especially
under conditions of extensive stress and for
3. The lessened capacity of the older
organism to resist disease and death.
So far our focus has been an organismal
aging for that is the kind of aging which
interests us. None of us minds losing a few
cells, more or less—after all, we lose millions
every day. But cybernetics has taught us
that the most vital area of a complex system
involving feed-backs to a control center is
the control area itself. In higher organisms
the hypothalamus, and related control and
integration nuclei, form such a center and so
are our most vital cells. Thus, our interest
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, NO. 7
focuses on the cells of this area. What could
occur in these cells which would acceunt for
the physiological changes we have noted?
Now the histologists tell us that the cells
of the nervous system do not “turn over.”
(Muscle cells also do not ‘‘turn over.”’) They
are never replaced as are the cells of most
other tissues (3). An interesting aging ex-
periment reported in 1930 by Sonneborn (4)
caused me to wonder if some of the chemical
materials of our nerve cells might also not
turn over. Sonneborn studied a species of
flat worm which reproduces asexually by
dividing itself into an anterior and posterior
half. He found that the longevity of posterior
halves which had to develop new heads
ereatly exceed the longevity of anterior
halves which had only to develop new tails.
It occurred to me that this difference in
longevity in the worms might be due to a
basic difference in the “vitality” of the
stable materials of the homeostatic control
center cells. The newly formed control center
cells of the posterior halves being more
“vital” more “reactive” than the cells of the
older control cells of the anterior halves
because the former ones were made of new
materials.
To test this idea in mammals, a litter of
mice was produced with Cy, labeled proteins
by feeding the dam Cu: labeled glycine and
serine during the last six days of pregnancy
and the first 12 days of lactation. The young
were then killed at various intervals and
their tissues were separately analyzed. The
experiment (5) is summarized in Table 1.
The principal conclusions which may be
drawn from these data are these:
4UNeiepot iL,
Counts per min. per gram of
tissue (wet basis)
Dam} Si Se Ss | St
Day Kolledy aye ere 34 | 18*| 34 | 52-| 164
OTH h dae Semel eee are ewer | 1 |-92) |) 34 oes
Heart and lungs........:.| 0 | 30>) (310s iets
[GAVE Te ne, Ae eee tee eed Ta L 1 2
Kidney and spleen? 735-- 15°) 3303s
Skeletalemuscle 555s 5 on Ga) ai TAPAZ,
* Last day radioactive amino acids were fed.
+ These samples were lost through technical
error.
JuLy 1958
(1) The rate of carbon turnover (or
preferably ‘“‘washout’’) in the sibling brains
when administered under the conditions of
this experiment was slow indeed as compared
with that in liver, kidney and _ spleen.
Whatever the uptake in the dam’s brain may
have been, there was practically no residual
Cys by day 34.
(2) Skeletal muscle and the heart and
lung aggregate (probably the residual activ-
ity here was principally due to heart
muscle) also retained considerable radio-
activity by day 164. There appears to be
greater “washout” in muscle than in brain
though this data does not permit too close
quantitative comparisons of this kind.
(3) In line with much evidence from histo-
logical and chemical studies, liver, kidney,
and spleen did turn over their carbon so
rapidly that by day 164 no detectable Cis
remained.
Because it has been demonstrated (6) in
plant cells that nuclear material is absolutely
stable and not undergoing turnover, it is
inviting to speculate, in the light of the
above mouse data, that this is also true of
animal cells. Such speculation is encouraged
by the well established fact that brain and
muscle cells are not replaced after these
organs have been fully formed (3).
Such speculation leads one to recall the
Folin concept of separate endogenous and
exogenous protein turnover, recently re-
viewed by Mitchell (7). It appears that those
organs whose cells are constantly dying and
being replaced would exhibit both types of
turnover but nerve and muscle cells which
normally are not being destroyed and
replaced would show only exogenous turn-
over.
Further studies of this design, now under
way, should identify the cellular location of
and nature of this stable material and also
indicate the precise degree of its stability.
When this work is complete, we may, assum-
ing the basic aging theory is correct, have
narrowed the problem of understanding
organismal aging down to that of learning:
What could be happening chemically to
these static brain (and muscle) proteins
which could account for the physiological
aging changes observed?
STILL: PHYSIOLOGY OF AGING
229
These possibilities seem reasonable:
(1) That some kind of internal bonding
occurs (perhaps purely as the result of the
passage of time) in the proteins of the cells
of this area which make them less chemically
reactive to the various information inputs
coming into these headquarter cells. Bjork-
sten (8) has discussed the possibilities of
‘“‘eross-linkages” between proteins as a
cause of aging.
(2) That bombardment of these stable
cells by cosmic (or other) rays gradually
reduces the number of control cells by
destroying some of them—thus, reducing
the cellular reserve (redundancy) of the
system. Possibly such rays might also
damage the stable material of some cells
without actually killmg them, but leaving
them in a less reactive state.
(3) That each memorized “bit” of infor-
mation is a chemical event which reduces
the reactivity of the system by so much.
Certainly the total amount of all forms of
remembered information increases with liv-
ing. Not only do our minds contain an
increasing amount of information which may
be recalled to consciousness. But in the
present context, we may look at such
activities as conditioning and antibody
formation as forms of unconscious memory.
LITERATURE CITED
(1) Sritt, JosepH W. Are organismal aging and
aging death necessarily the result of death of
vital cells in the organism? Med. Ann. District
of Columbia 25: 199. 1956.
(2) Setye, Hans. Séress. Acta Inc. 1950.
(3) LeBuonp, C. P., and Wauner, B. E. Ke-
newal of cell populations. Physiol. Rev.
36: 255. 1956.
(4) SONNEBORN, Tracy. Genetic studies on
Stenostomun inecaudatum. Journ. Exp. Zool.
57: 57. 19380.
(5) Strtu, JosepH W. Amino acid turnover in
brain compared with turnover in other tissues.
Journ. Heredity 48 (5). Sept—Oct. 1957.
(6) Tayuor, J. H., Woops, P. S., anp HueHss
W.L. The organization and duplication of
chromosomes as revealed by autoradiographic
studies using trittwm-labeled — th
Proc. Nat. Acad. Sei. 43: 122. 1957.
(7) Mircuett, H. H. The validity of Folin’s
concept of dichotomy tn protetn metabolism
Journ. Nutrition 55: 198. 1957.
(8) BrorKstTEN, J. Cross-linkages in protein chem
istry, Advances in protein chemistry, edited
by Anson, Edsall, and Bailey, €: 3438. New
York, 1951.
> - >
/2U7ATNE.
230
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48; NOs
BOTANY —New or noteworthy ferns from Colombia and Ecuador. A. H. G. Atston,
British Museum (Natural History). (Communicated by Joseph Ewan.)
(Received June 2, 1958)
The Pteridophyta collections reported on
here were made by Prof. Joseph Ewan, of
Tulane University, during his field work
in Colombia and Ecuador as botanist with
the Cinchona Division of the Foreign
Economic Administration, 1944-45. The
scope of the Government exploration pro-
gram was described with particular reference
to Ecuador by W. C. Steere (Science 101:
177-178. 1945, and Sci. Monthly 61: 114—
126. 1945). Professor Ewan collected 1,367
numbers of vascular plants in Colombia
and Ecuador, chiefly in the Departamento
de Narifio and the Intendencia de Putu-
mayo, Colombia, and the vicinity of Quito,
Ecuador. Twenty-seven collections of the
total constitute the bases of newly described
species published by various authors. Nearly
one-third of all the Ewan collections were
Pteridophyta (427 numbers), of which 345
numbers have been studied by the present
author. The types of the new species
described in this paper are in the British
Museum (Natural History) (BM), though
the prime set is in the U. 8S. National
Herbarium (US), and partial sets in the
Instituto de Ciencias Naturales, Bogota,
Colombia (COL), Tulane University, New
Orleans (NO), the Gray Herbarium (GH),
and the University of California, Berkeley
(UG).
GLEICHENIACEAE
Gleichenia Sm.
Gleichenia melanoblasta Alston, sp. nov.
Species ex affinitate Gleicheniae longipinnulae
Hook., sed venulis majus approximatis differt.
Rhizomatibus repentibus, elongatis, ca. 2 mm
crassis, glabris, protostelicis; rhachidibus sub-
teretibus, tenuiter puberulis, apicem versus ca.
2 mm in diametro, dichotomis, apice inter pinnis
dichtomiae alabastro nigro-squamato terminato;
squamis, nigrescentibus ca. 1.25 mm longis, 0.4
mm latis, lanceolatis, acuminatis, opacis, crebre
ciliato-dentatis, pinnis ultimis ca. 30 cm longis,
3.5 em latis, pedunculatis; pendunculis ca. 1.25
cm longis, vel sessilibus et subtus dichotomias
continuatis; rhachidibus subtus paleaceis, paleis
alabastrium similibus; segmentis ultimis usque
ad 18 mm longis, 3 mm latis, oblongo-linearibus,
apice rotundatis, basi adnatis, sinubus ca. 2 mm
separatis, supra subglabris, subtus squamulis
irregulariter stellato-laciniatis indutis, numquam
glaucis, costis supra tenuis, sparse squamulosis,
leviter impressis, subtus crassioribus, prominenti-
bus; venulis parallelis, basi unifurcatis, liberis,
supra impressis, subtus prominentibus, vix ad
marginem attingentibus, ca. 0.25 mm inter se
distantibus; soris plerumque 3-4 sporangia
gerentibus, fere costalibus; sporangis 0.4 mm
longis; annulo ca. 20 cellulato; sporis monoletis,
anguste fabiformibus, ca. 37 u longis, laevibus.
CotompBiA: Putumayo: Quebrada Blanca,
along camino Precipicio, Rio Afiladores, 2,130 m,
Ewan 16280 (BM, holotype).
This species bears some resemblance to Glev-
chenia blepharolepis Sod., but it is pubescent be-
low, and to G. leucocarpa Sod., but the segments
are more parallel-sided and pubescent below. It
belongs to the subgenus Mertensia Hook. as de-
fined by Holttum (Reinwardtia 4: 266. 1957).
The specific epithet is from Greek peAavos =
black, and BAacros = bud.
CYATHEACEAE
Cyathea Sm.
Cyathea anacampta Alston, sp. nov.
Species ex affinitate C. firmulae Domin (Hemi-
telia firma Bak.) sed differt rachidibus pallide
brunneis (nec fuscis) et aculeatis (nec laevibus).
Filix terrestris arborescens, caudice breve;
stipitibus aculeatis, frondibus ca. 2 m longis (ex
schedula), ca. 1 m latis; rhachidibus ca. 1 cm
(in sicco) in diametro, pallide brunneis, distante
aculeatis, aliter glabris; pinnis alternis, ambitu
anguste oblongo-lanceolatis, apice acuminatis,
basi petiolulatis, petiolulis ca. 3 cm longis; pin-
norum rhachidibus laevibus, pinnatis, et apice
pinnatifida; pinnulis ca. 23 utroque latere, ca. 12
em longis, 1.5 cm latis, fere ad costam profunde
pinnatifidis, costis subtus subglabris, supra
minute, dense et appresse puberulis, segmentis
ultimis ca. 9 mm longis, 3 mm latis, anguste
oblongis, leviter falcatis, subcoriaceis, margine
apice versus crenato-serratis, costulis utrinque
glabris, venulis ca. 14 utrinque latere, supra in-
SI
JuLy 1958
conspicuis, subtus majus prominentibus, ple-
rumque furcatis; soris submedialibus, in venu-
lorum bifurcationem gerentibus; receptaculis vix
elevatis; Indusis non visis; sporangiis pilis stel-
latis intermixtis; sporis triletis, ca. 38 w in di-
ametro, subtriangularibus, laevibus.
CotomsiA: Putumayo: confluence of Rio
Ticuanayoy and Rio Caquetdé, 1100 m, Hwan
16801 (BM, holotype).
In addition to C. firmula Domin., which differs
by its smooth dark rachis, the new species bears
some resemblance to C. lindeniana Presl, which
has larger segments, C. incana Karst., which has
pubescent costae, C. mettenii Karst., which has
shorter pinnules and convex segments and to C.
ocanensis Bak., which has a different texture.
The name is derived from Greek ava = up, and
KauTas = turned, from the concave segments
with upturned margins, which in the dried state
help to distinguish this species.
Cyathea catacampta Alst on, sp. nov.
Species ex affinitate C. Kalbreyeri Bak. sed
costis puberulis differt.
Filix terrestris arborescens, 3-5 m alta (ex
schedula) ; rhachidibus basi breviter aculeatis, in
parte superiore aculeis minutis indutis, supra
puberulis, subtus glabrescentibus, in sicco pallide
brunneis; frondibus ca. 70 cm latis, bipinnatis,
pinnis alternis ca. 5 cm inter se distantibus, basi
aérophoris oblongis, glabris, ad superficiem in-
feriorem indutis, ambitu anguste lanceolatis,
apice acuminatis et pinnatifidis, pinnatis, pin-
nulorum rhachidibus supra puberulis, subtus
squamulis irregulariter laciniatis et aculeis ver-
ruciformibus sparse vestitis, ca. 35 cm longis, 12
em latis, pinulis ca. 24 utroque latere, ca. 7 em
longis, 1.25 cm latis, anguste oblongis, apice
acuminatis, basi oblique truncatis, catadromicis,
subsessilibus, fere ad costam pinnatifidis, costis
supra crebre puberulis, subtus puberulis et plus-
minusve squamosis, segmentis ultimis ca. 8 mm
longis, 2.5 mm latis, anguste oblongis, subacutis,
leviter falcatis, coriaceis, margine leviter crenata,
costulis supra glabris, subtus squamosis, squamu-
lis nonnullis albidis bullatis indutis; venulis
utrinque inconspicuis, ca. 10 utroque latere,
bifurcatis; sori medialibus in venulorum bifurea-
tionem gerentibus; receptalculis elevatis pilosis
indusiis conspicuis, membranaceis; sporis triletis,
ca. 50u in diametro, grosse verrucosis.
Cotomsra, Narifio: in Chusquea thickets, be-
tween Rio Miraflores and Rio San Martin, Vol-
ALSTON: FERNS FROM COLOMBIA AND ECUADOR
231
cin de Cumbal region, 2,680 m, Hwan 16153
(BM., holotype).
The rachis is lacking in the type of Cyathea Kal-
breyert Bak., but that species appears to differ
by the completely glabrous costae above and by
having more flat scales on the under surface of the
costae. Cyathea purpurascens Sod. has some
toothed black scales on the costa, and C. cysto-
lepis Sod. bullate white scales.
Cyathea ewanii Alston, sp. nov.
Species ex affinitate Cyatheae choricarpae
(Maxon) Domin sed differt costis, hic et ille
squamis peltatis albidis instructis, soris mediali-
bus (nec inframedialibus), indusiis fugaciis et
sinubis minus profundis.
Caudice non viso, frondibus 2.0-2.5 m longis
(ex schedula), ca. 45 cm latis, pinnatis, rhachidi-
bus supra sulcatis, subtus rotundatis et laxe
tenuiter lanuginosis, mox glabrescentibus; pinnis
suboppositis, ca. 7 cm inter se distantibus, an-
guste oblongis, sessilibus, patentibus vel leviter
ascendentibus, basi supra truncatis, subtus
rotundato-truncatis et brevioribus, ca. 23 cm
longis, basi 2.2 em, et supra mediam 4 cm latis,
lobatis, lobis basi 9 mm latis rotundatis, leviter
crenatis, sinubis ca. 7 mm _ profundis; costis
costulisque utrinque elevatis, supra glabris, sub-
tus glabrescentibus et squamis albidis nonnullis
instructis; venulis utrinque elevatis, prope costis
costulisque anastomosantibus, utrinsecus 9-10
sed loborum apices versus furcatis nec anastomo-
santibus; soris in lineis medialibus vel vix supra-
medialibus, crebre dispositis, uniseriatis subtus
sinus continuatis; indusiis desinentibus; recep-
taculo capitato, setulifero; sporangiis subsessili-
bus, obovoideo-trapezoidalibus; sporis ca. 20 u in
diam., triletis, a dorso subtriangularibus elongato-
areolatis.
CoLomBIA: Putumayo: Common in wet
ground between Mocoa and Urcusique on the way
to Umbria, 900 m, Hwan 16729 (BM, type;
isotypes, US, NO).
Among the South American species this is most
likely to be confused with Cyathea subincisa
(Kunze) Domin, but the pinnae in that species
are much less deeply lobed as in C. guatemalensis
(Maxon) Domin and the sori are more distant.
This species is named after Prof. Joseph A. Ewan,
of Tulane University.
Cyathea leucolepismata Alston, sp. nov.
Species ex affinitate Cyatheae ecuadorensi
232
Domin (Alsophila sodiroi Bak.), sed differt seg-
mentis minus dissectis rhachidibusque distante
aculeatibus.
Filix terrestris arborescens, 3-5 m alta (ex
schedula), frondibus bipinnatis fere 1 m latis;
rhachidibus brunneis, distante aculeatis, aculeis
1.5 m longis, basi 0.75 mm in diametro, rectis,
rhachidibus etiam pubescentibus, subtus pilis
longis patentibus 1.25 mm longis, basi bulbosis,
supra pilis brevioribus densioribus subappressis;
pinnis plus-minusve alternis, ca. 8 cm inter se
distantibus, ambitu anguste oblongis, apice
acuminatis, basi truncatis, bipimnatis, ca. 19
pinnulis utroque latere, apice pinnatifidis, basi-
stipitatis, stipitibus ca. 1.5 cm longis; pinnulis
ambitu oblongis, 6.5-9 cm longis, 1.3-2 cm latis,
apice acuminatis, basi oblique rotundato-trun-
catis, breviter petiolulatis, stipite ca. 1.25 cm
longe, patentibus, supra subglabris, pinnularum
costis hirsutis exceptis, subtus praecipue ad
costules venulasque longe hirsutis, hic et ille
squamulis albidis instructis, profunde pinnatifidis,
sinubus ad 1.25 mm ex costas attingentibus;
segmentis oblongis, 6-7 mm longis, 3-4 mm latis,
crenatis, apice subacutis, venulis c. 8 utroque
latere, furcatis, vel simplicibus, liberis; soris
supramedialibus, in venulorum bifurcationem
gerentibus; receptaculis puberulis; indusiis non
visis.
Cotompra: Putumayo: Fairly frequent along
selva borders, near San Diego de Colorado, be-
tween Umbria and Puerto Asis, Ewan 16784
(BM, type; isotypes, US, NO).
The figure of Cyathea jivariensis (Hieron.)
Domin is very similar to this species, but from the
description it lacks the white scales on the costae
and the rachises are said to be unarmed.
POLYPODIACEAE
Microgramma Presl.
Microgramma acatallela Alston, sp. nov.
Species inter M. piloselloides (L.) Copel. et M.
tecta (Kaulf.) Alston, comb. nov. (Polypodium
tectum Kaulf. Enum. Fl. 87. 1824), sed differt
foliis heteromorphis, sterilibus anguste oblongo-
lanceolatis et fertilibus anguste linearibus.
Rhizomatis late repentibus, ramosis, juventute
filiformibus, demum robustioribus, in specimenis
visis 40 cm longis, sed certe frequenter longiori-
bus, 1-2 mm diametro, ramulis an longis, an
brevibuset 1.5-2cm longis, crebre squamosis;
squamulis imbricatis, appressis, ferrugineis, 3
mm longis, 0.5 mm latis, anguste oblongo-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, NO. 7
linearibus, peltatis, medio rufo-punctatis, im-
tegris, cellulis elongatis; frondibus distantibus,
patentibus, dimorphis, sterilibus ca. 6 cm longis,
8 mm latis, anguste oblongo-lanceolatis, apice
attenuatis, basi cuneatis, supra glabris, subtus
squamulis linearibus, basi ampliatis, frugaliter
indutis, stipitibus 1.3 mm longis, anguste alatis,
costis utrinque conspicuis, subtus distante
squamosis, squamulis anguste oblongo-linearibus;
venis secondariis conspicuis, anastomosantibus;
areolis utrinsecus uniseriatis, oblongis, venulis
singulis simplicibus liberis inclusis et ceteros
prope marginem parallelos ferentibus; frondibus
fertilibus anguste linearibus, soros utrimsecus
prope costam uniseriatos ferentibus; seris rotun-
dis, 2 mm in diametro; sporangus squamulis
aciculatis intermixtis glabris, longe stipitatis;
stipitibus eglandulosis; annulis 12- cellulatis;
sporis monoletis, fabiformibus, 60 u longis, 45 pu
latis, crebre verrucolosis.
CotomBia: Putumayo: 3 kilometers above
Mocoa, on trail to San Antonio, 600 m, epiphytic,
Ewan 16706 (BM, type; isotypes, US, NO); be-
tween Puerto Asis and confluence of the Rio
Guamues with the Rio Putumayo, 375 m,
epiphytic, Ewan 16760 (BM, type; isotypes,
Us, NO).
Perv: Loreto: Left bank of Rio Santiago,
above Pongo de Manseriche, on twigs of large
forest tree, 200 m, Weria 6144b (BM).
The specific name is taken from the Greek
axataddedros = heterogeneous, on account of the
heteromorphous fronds which separate this plant
from Jf. piloselloides (L.) Copel.
THELYPTERIDACEAE
Goniopteris Presl.
Goniopteris fendleri (Eat.) Alston, comb. nov.
Aspidium fendleri Eat., Mem. Amer. Acad.
new ser. 8: 210. 1860; Dryopteris fendlert
(Eat.) O. Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 812. 1891;
C. Chr., K. Danske Vid. Selsk. Skrift. 10 (2):
i732 t23. 192:
CotomsBia: Narifio: Quebrada Ensillada near
Altaquer, Rio Guabo, 3400 m., Ewan 16810.
Previously recorded from Colonia Tovar, State
of Aragua, Venezuela.
Thelypteris Schmidel
Subgenus Lastrea (Bory) Alston, comh. nov.
Lastrea Bory, Dict. Class. Hist. Nat. 6: 588.
1824, and 9: 232. 1826, p- p-
Dryopteris subgenus Lastrea (Bory) C. Chr.
in Rosenv. Biol. Arb. til. Warming 79. 1911.
JULY 1958
Thelypteris bonapartii (Ros.) Alston, comb. nov.
Dryopteris bonapartit Ros. in Fedde Repert. 7:
303. 1909; C. Chr., K. Danske Vid. Selsk.
Skrift. 10 (2): 146. f. 16a. 1912.
CotompsiA: Narino: Near summit of Cordillera
Oriental, above Rio de Potreros, headwaters of
Rio Tellez, 3,200-3,400 m, Hwan 16527. Previ-
ously known from Ecuador.
Thelypteris brausei (Hieron.) Alston, comb. nov.
Dryopteris brauset Hieron. in Hedwigia 46:
aoiemumontion 11. 1907.
Ecuapor: Carchi: near Pun, Rio Chingual,
Ewan 16313. Originally described from Colombia
(valley of Rio Paez, Cord. Central, Tolima region,
Sttibel 145). .
Thelypteris caucaensis (Hieron.) Alston, comb.
nov.
Nephrodium caucaense Hieron. in Engl. Bot.
Jahrb. 34: 444. 1904.
Dryopterts caucaensis (Hieron.) C. Chr., K.
Danske Vid. Selsk. Skrift 4 (4): 286. fig. 13.
1907; 10 (2): 139. 1912.
CotomsiA: Narifio: San José, Rio Chingual,
below Victoria, 2,650 m, Hwan 16211. The stipes
are more pubescent than in the type collection
(Lehmann 3102) as represented in the British
Museum.
Thelypteris elegantula (Sod.) Alston, comb. nov.
Nephrodium elegantulum Sod. Crypt. Vase.
Quit. 243. 1893; C. Chr., K. Danske Vid. Selsk.
Skane 10) 2) 156. 1912:
Cotomstia: Narifio: 18 kilometers above Pasto
on Tangua road, 2,700 m, Hwan 15923.
Ecuapor: Carchi: 5 kilometers south of Tul-
can, Altos de Boliche, 2,960 m, Ewan 16300. I
refer these specimens to this species with some
doubt; it was originally described from the Pal-
latanga Valley, about Puente de Chimbo,
western Cordillera of Ecuador.
Thelypteris funckii (Mett.) Alston, comb. nov.
Aspidium funckit Mett., Ann. Sci. Nat. ser. 5.
2: 246. 1860.
Dryopteris funckit (Mett.) O. Ktze. Rev. Gen.
ieeaersl 2s ISO ©. Chr 1K: Danske Vid:
Selsk. Skrift. 4(4): 299. 1907; 10(2): 139. 1912.
Ecuapor: Pichincha: Corazon Peak, 2,800 m.,
Hwan 16420. Recorded from Costa Rica, Vene-
zuela, Colombia, and Peru, but I have seen no
published record from Ecuador. The character-
istic scales on the rachis are deciduous but present
on the young fronds.
ALSTON: FERNS FROM COLOMBIA AND ECUADOR
Thelypteris lanipes (C. Chr.) Alston, comb. nov.
Dryopteris lanipes C. Chr., Smithsonian Misc.
Coll. 52: 394. 1909; K. Danske Vid. Selsk.
Skrift. 10(2): 153. 1912.
Cotompia: Putumayo: near Quebrada Pata-
yaco, Rio Mocoa, 2,100 m, Hwan 16669. This
species was originally described from Guatemala
and the specimen is placed here with some doubt.
Thelypteris lepidula (Hieron.) Alston, comb. nov.
Dryopteris lepidula Hieron., Hedwigia 46: 328.
teu ise AeelOO Or Chins ke Danske» Vad-
Selsk. Skrift. 4(4): 281. 1907; 10(2): 137. 1912.
CotomsiA: Narifo: 3 kilometers above San
José, on trail to Las Mesas via Quebrada San
Francisco, 2,700 m, Hwan 16566. Ewan’s plant
has a few scattered hairs on the surface of the
lamina, which are lacking in the type collected by
Sttibel 332 at Miraflores, 2,700 m.
Thelypteris lindigii (C. Chr.) Alston, comb. nov.
Dryopteris lindigit C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 275. 1905;
Hieron., Hedwigia 46: 328. 1907; C. Chr., K.
Danske Vid. Selsk. Skrift. 4(4): 282. 1907.
Cotompia: Narifio: Avenida de las Jajas,
Ipiales, 2,835-2,895 m., Hwan 16127.
Thelypteris muzensis (Hieron.) Alston, comb. nov.
Dryopteris muzensis Hieron., Hedwigia 46:
301. t. 4. fig. 6. 1907; C. Chr., K. Danske Vid.
Selsk. Skrift. 4(4): 280. 1907; Smithsonian
Mise. Coll. 52: 373. 1909.
Cotompia: Narifio: 2 kilometers above San
Juan, Hwan 16030.
Thelypteris pachyrachis (Kunze) Proctor, Bull.
Inst. Jamaica 5: 62. 1953.
var. bogotensis (C. Chr.) Alston, comb. nov.
Dryolterts pachyrachis var. bogotensis C. Chr.,
K. Danske Vid. Selsk. Skrift. 4(4): 306. 1907.
CotomsiaA: Antioquia: Quebrada San Julian,
between Argelia and ‘El Tigre’, 1,800 m, Ewan
15782.
Thelypteris piloso-hispida (Hook.) Alston, comb.
nov.
Nephrodium piloso-hispidum Hook., Spec.
Fil. 4: 105. 1862.
Dryopterts piloso-hispida (Hook.) C. Chr., Kx.
Danske Vid. Selsk. Skrift. 10(2): 148. 1912.
CoLomBiIA: Cauca: 4 kilometers north of
Popayan, 1,680 m, Hwan 15875. Ranges from
Mexico to Bolivia, but Christensen cites no speci-
men from Colombia.
234
Thelypteris scalaris (Christ) Alston, comb. nov.
Aspidium scalare Christ in Bull. Herb. Boiss.
ser. 2. 6: 159. 1905.
Dryopteris scalaris (Christ) C. Chr. in K. Danske
Vid. Selsk. Skrift. 4(4): 323. fig. 47. 1907.
Cotompia: Cauca: 4 kilometers north of
Popayan, 1,680 m. Hwan 15876. Recorded from
Mexico to Costa Rica.
Thelypteris tablaziensis (C. Chr.) Alston, comb.
nov.
Dryopteris _ tablaziensis Christ, in’ Bulle
Herp. Boiseser 62) me 2024 1907.) ©.1Chie
in K. Danske Vid. Selsk. Skrift. 4(4): 278.
fig. 6. 1907; 10(2): 136. 1912.
Cotompra: Antioquia: Foot of Santa Elena, 2
kilometers east of Medellin, 1,800-2,100 m,
Ewan 15696. Previously known from Costa Rica
and Panama.
Subgenus Glaphyropteris (Presl) Alston, comb.
nov.
Glaphyropteris Presl in Abh. Bohm. Ges. Wiss.
ser. 5. 5: 344. 1848.
Dryopteris subg. Glaphyropteris (Presl) C. Chr.
in Ros. Biol. Arb. til Warming 80. 1911.
Thelypteris cafiadasii (Sod.) Alston, comb. nov.
Nephrodium canadasit Sod. Rec. Crypt. Vasc.
Quito 48. 1883; Crypt. Vase. Quit. 236. 1893.
Dryopteris caftadasvi (Sod.) C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 256.
1905; Hieron. in Hedwigia 46: 339. 1907; C.
Chr. in K. Dansk. Vid. Selsk. Skrift. ser. 4.
4: 322. fig. 44. 1907; 10(2): 158. 1912.
Ecuapor: Pichincha: Corazon, 2,800 m, Hwan
16424. The type was from the Hacienda Niebli at
2,000 m on the western slope of Voledn Pululahua,
Chimbarazo region, Ecuador.
Thelypteris mapirensis (Ros.) Alston comb. nov.
Dryopteris mapirensis Ros. in Fedde Repert.
6: 315. 1909; C. Chr. in K. Danske Vid. Selsk.
10 (2): 189. fig. 18. 1910.
Cotomst1a: Narifio: Quebrada Ensillada, near
Altaquer, Rio Guabo, 3,400 m, Ewan 16811. This
species has been previously recorded as from
Bolivia.
ATHYRIACEAE
Diplazium Sw.
Diplazium subnudum (Karst.) Alston, comb. nov.
Asplenium subnudum Karst. Fl. Colomb. 2:
93. t. 148. 1865.
Asplenium lindbergii Mett. in Ann. Sci. Nat.
ser. 5. 2: 236. 1864, pro parte quoad plantae
andina.
Cotompia: Putumayo: Rio Mocoa, between
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48), Nea
Sachamate and San Antonio, 1,700 m, Ewan
16699. The Andean specimens are more deeply
lobed than the typical Diplazium lindbergu
(Mett.) Christ of Brazil.
ASPIDIACEAE
Rumohra Raddi
Rumohra trianae (Mett.) Alston comb. nov.
Aspidium trianae Mett. in Ann. Sci. Nat. ser. 5.
2: 243. 1864.
Dryopteris trianae (Mett.) O. Kuntze, Rev. Gen.
Pl. 2: 814. 1891; C. Chr. in K. Danske Vid.
Selsk. Skrift. 6(1): 109. 1920.
Cotompta: Narifio: Quebrada La Toma, on
Rio Telembi, between Rio Pimbi and Rio Cuembi,
above Barbacoas, 70 m, Ewan 16861. The type
specimen was from Via de Tuquerres, Barbacoas,
Triana 32, which Christensen wrongly attributed
to Venezuela. It must have been taken in the
same general area as Professor Ewan’s locality.
This species has also been recorded from Peru.
Polystichum Roth
Polystichum mexiae Copel.
CotomBia: Putumayo: Near Quebrada Pata-
yaco, between San Francisco and Sachamate,
2,100 m, Hwan 16671. The type collection, Mexia
7679, was from Mount Pichincha in Ecuador. It
has more scales on the rachis, but these are
probably deciduous.
LOMARIOPSIDACEAE
Elaphoglossum Schott
Elaphoglossum ambiguum (Mett.) Alston, comb.
nov.
Acrostichum ambiguum Mett. ex Christ in
Denkschr. Schweiz. Natur Ges. 36: 60. 1899.
Cotompta: Santander: 5 kilometers northeast
of Charala, 2,300 m, Ewan 15663. The three
species, Acrostuchum compactum Mett., A. fend-
leri Mett., and Elaphoglossum sporadolepis
(Kunze) Moore, are similar, but as Acrostichum
ambiguum Mett. appears to be the best match,
that epithet seems preferable.
POSTSCRIPT
Arthur Hugh Garfit Alston died on March 17,
1958, in Barcelona, Spain, while on a holiday. He
had been in poor health in recent years. During
1954-55 Mr. Alston traveled and collected in
Indonesia toward the preparation of an account
of the Pteridophyta for the Flora Malesiana.—
J.E.
Juty 1958
LOOMIS: MILLIPEDS ON BARRO COLORADO ISLAND
230
ZOOLOGY .—A new family of millipeds on Barro Colorado Island, Canal Zone.
H. F. Loomis, Miami, Fla.
(Received May 16, 1958)
On June 6, 1923, the writer accompanied
the late Dr. O. F. Cook, ef the U. 8. Depart-
ment of Agriculture, on a visit of several
hours to Barro Colorado Island, in the
Canal Zone, for the purpose of seeing that
newly designated wildlife preserve, studying
a few of its palms, and collecting millipeds.
A number of the latter were found, and in
identifying them some months later in the
United States a single female was noted that
appeared to belong to one of the families, of
the order Merocheta, whose members are
capable of rolling themselves into a near
perfect sphere when disturbed. Closer inspec-
tion, however, revealed characters that
seemed to prohibit its inclusion in any of the
known families, and it was put aside to
await collection of additional specimens,
especially males, so that its classification
might be more exact.
In the years that followed, attempts were
made through written and oral appeals to
scientists stationed or visiting in the Canal
Zone to have the species recollected, but
these failed. However, in the spring of 1958
the writer and his wife were able to spend a
week collecting on Barro Colorado, and
some additional time elsewhere in the Canal
Zone and in several Panamanian localities.
In spite of the very dry conditions en-
countered nearly everywhere, fair numbers
of millipeds were found, among them being
two immature specimens of the desired
form, discovered by Mrs. Loomis in a
decaying palm inflorescence on the ground
near the Shannon Trail on Barro Colorado.
While these two specimens, together with
the original female, may not form the best
material on which to base a new family, its
characters are readily seen and are so
distinctive it cannot be confused with any
previously established family. Accordingly,
a description of it is presented.
Dorsoporidae, n. fam.
Description.—Body small, strongly convex,
about four times as long as broad, smooth and
shining and capable of being tightly rolled; its
sides vertical, with lateral carinae produced
downward but an even shorter distance than are
those of the Cyclodesmidae.
Head hispid below the vertex; labrum broad,
with margin straight and having the usual three
median teeth; antennae rather stout and sub-
clavate.
First segment trapezoidal; second segment
much larger than any other, of the shape of the
third segment in the family Cyclodesmidae; en-
suing segments without a sulcus crossing the
dorsum but with a distinct longitudinal sulcus
separating the lateral carinae from the dorsum;
pores in normal sequence, opening high on the
sides of the dorsum and far removed from the
lateral carimae; segments without a supple-
mentary margin; last segment short and broad
but not as broad as the margin of the penultimate
segment on either side of it; lateral carinae of
segments 5 to 14 with a tuberclelike process pro-
jecting downward from near the middle of the
inner surface, its apex separated from the carina
wall by a deep sinus into which the margin of
the next carina appears to fit when the body is
rolled.
The most striking character of this new family,
and one which will instantly identify it, is the
presence of repugnatorial pores in normal se-
quence, not on the lateral carinae, as in any other
family of the order having pores, but high on
the sides of the dorsum itself.
It is doubtful if the systematic position of the
family can be determined until males are exam-
ined. On other characters, the enlarged second
segment, associated with the presence of repug-
natorial pores, might indicate relationship with
the Oniscodesmidae, but in that family the seg-
ments are divided into two sections by a trans-
verse sulcus that is not indicated in the Dorso-
poridae and the lateral carinae are very oblique,
extend much further from the body and support
the pores. The smooth, strongly convex dorsum
without a transverse sulcus across the segments,
vertical and rather small, descending
lateral carinae are characters common to the
Cyclodesmidae and the Dorsoporidae but the
presence of pores; carinae separated from the
sides
236
dorsum by a sulcus; and the second segment being
enlarged, rather than the third, distinguish the
latter family.
Dorsoporus, n. gen.
Genotype: Dorsoporus barroensts, n. sp.
Description —Body relatively broad and capa-
ble of being rolled into a compact ball; dorsum
strongly convex with vertical sides; surface
smooth and shining.
Head hispid from the labrum to the upper
limits of the antennal sockets above which it is
smooth and shining: median groove of the vertex
very faint; antennae rather stout, subclavate,
hispid; joints 2, 3, 5, and 6 subequal in length
with joint 4 shorter.
First segment trapezoidal; anterior margin
with a raised rim; posterior margin simple, some-
what shorter and overlapping the anterior margin
of the second segment between the lateral lobes;
lateral margins oblique, nearly straight.
Second segment greatly expanded on the sides
in front and below, similar in appearance to the
third segment of Cyclodesmus, obscuring the
head and some of the first segment in lateral
view (Fig. 1).
Ensuing segments, including the penultimate,
without a transverse sulcus or supplementary
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL, 43) sNonma
margin but with lateral carinae separated from
the dorsum by a distinct sulcus extending for-
ward from a small notch located in the posterior
margin far below the line of the pores; lateral
carinae of segments 5 to 14 each with a descend-
ing process elevated from the surface on the inner
side near the middle, as shown in Fig. 2, and in
the sinus formed between the carina and the
process the edge of the carina of the next seg-
ment rests when the body is rolled.
Pores arranged in normal sequence, beginning
on segment 5 and ending on segment 19, but
placed high on the sides of the body, far above
the lateral carinae although approaching them on
segments 18 and 19.
Last segment rather small, transverse, not as
broad as the carinae of the penultimate segment,
the margin nearly straight and simple (Fig. 3).
Legs long and very slender, capable of reaching
well beyond the sides of the body; joints 2, 3 and
6 subequal in length, each about double the
length of joints 4 and 5 combined; sterna very
narrow (Fig. 4).
Males unknown; females with the ventral sur-
face of the third segment developed behind the
legs into a conspicuous triangular lobe projecting
over the sternum of the next pair of legs.
Fries. 1-4.—Dorsoporus barroensis, n. gen. and n. sp.: 1, Lateral view of segments 1 to 7; 2, anterior
view of segment 12; 3, segments 17 to 20 from behind; 4, first leg of segment 6.
Juty 1958
Dorsoporus barroensis, n. sp.
One female (type) collected June 6, 1923, by
O. F. Cook and H. F. Loomis, and two immature
specimens (paratypes) collected March 16, 1958,
by E. M. and H. F. Loomis, all on Barro Colorado
Island, C. Z. These specimens deposited in the
U.S. National Museum.
Description —Length of mature female 6 mm,
width 1.5 mm.
Head moderately thickly beset with stiff, erect
hairs of medium length from the upper limits of
the antennal sockets to the labrum; vertex
smooth but with a median groove faintly im-
pressed; antennae gradually thickened from the
base to the end of the fifth joint, the joints after
the first finely hispid, the sixth joint with 2 very
long hairs near the distal end; joints 2, 3, 5, and
6 of about equal length, joint 4 shghtly shorter.
First segment transverse, trapezoidal, nearly
twice as broad as long; anterior margin con-
siderably longer than the posterior margin,
paralleling it and with a raised rim; posterior
margin overlapping the front margin of segment
2; anterior lateral angles rather sharply rounded,
the posterior ones broadly rounded.
LOOMIS: MILLIPEDS ON BARRO COLORADO ISLAND
230
Second segment greatly enlarged, each side
produced forward and downward; posterior
margin with a definite notch just above the ex-
panded portion on each side; sides of the segment
with a raised rim extending from opposite the
posterior angle of segment 1 to the notch in the
back margin; behind this rim is a broad, concave
channel into which project, obliquely downward,
long, narrow extensions of the higher surface be-
hind the channel.
Anterior lateral surface of the segments after
the second noticeably reticulated on the portion
which is hidden beneath the segment in front,
when the body is rolled.
Pores and lateral carinae as previously de-
scribed except that reduced processes are present
inside the carinae of segments 3 and 4 but lack
the sinus found on ensuing segments.
Last segment relatively small as compared
with the penultimate one and not as broad as its
carinae; twice as broad as long, the posterior
margin slightly rounded and with 7 to 8 setae;
anal valves flattened but with raised margins;
preanal scale large, over half as long as wide and
rounded-triangular.
en
To produce and multiply endlessly, without ever reaching the last possibility of
excellence, and without committing herself to any end, is the law of Nature—
JOHN BURROUGHS.
238
ZOOLOGY —Further notes on Sarsiella tricostata.| MrrepitH L. Jones, Oceano- i
oraphic Institute, Florida State University, Tallahassee, Fla.”
(Received May 29, 1958)
Recently the description of the ostracod
Sarsiella tricostata from San Francisco Bay
appeared in this Journal (Jones, 1958). By
and large it was presented from the z00-
logical standpoint and was based almost
entirely on the soft parts of the animal.
Subsequent to the publication of the
description, the author has had several
contacts with paleontologists who stressed
the necessity, from their viewpoint, of a
detailed description of ostracod hard parts.
The present work then, while it makes no
alteration of the preceding description, will
deal with the structure of the hard parts and
will represent an augmentation of the
original description. The observations re-
ported here are based on paratype material
collected by the author from Point Rich-
mond, San Francisco Bay, Calif., and are
part of the series from which the holotype
and allotype were chosen. The discussion
which follows is based on shell of females,
for several reasons. First, a female was
designated as the holotype; second, females
are more common than males in the field;
and third, there are no sexual differences
embodied in the characters to be discussed
here. Such morphological differences as do
exist between males and females are to be
found in the species description (Jones,
1958).
A second item concerning the original
description is that Sarszella is best considered
to be of the family Sarsiellidae rather than
of the Cypridinidae.
SHELL-SURFACE ORNAMENTATION
In the previous work on Sarsvella tri-
costata it was implied that the shell surface
1 Contribution no. 105 from the Oceanographic
Institute, Florida State University.
2 Address: Research Division, U. 8. Navy Mine
Defense Laboratory, Panama City, Fla.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, NO. 7
was smooth, except for the obvious ridges, |}
and was covered with fine hairs. Further |
observations have shown that the fine hairs |}
originate from punctations which are visible |
under reflected light, and which cover the ||
surface of the shell in the areas between the |
various ridges (Fig. 1). In addition, there are |
two pits at the posterior end of the ridge |
separating the dorsal and the postero- |
ventral fields.
HINGE STRUCTURE
The hinge of Sarszella tricostata is of the |
“ridge and groove” type (Fig. 3, a, 6) in |
which the ridge is on the right valve and the
eroove on the left. A dorsal flange of the J
left valve overlaps the right valve (Fig. 2). ;
Immediately below this is the groove which |
receives the ridge of the right valve.
TYPE MATERIAL
In addition to the distribution of types }
and paratypes listed in the previous paper |
(U. S. National Museum; Museum of
Paleontology, University of California, Acc. |
No. 1846; and the British Museum, London)
paratypes have been deposited with the
Henry V. Howe Collection at the School of |
Geology, Louisiana State University. |
The authors wishes to acknowledge the |
kind advice and criticism of Dr. Harbans |
Puri, Florida Geological Survey, Tallahassee, |
and of Neil C. Hulings, Oceanographic |
Institute, Florida State University. |
LITERATURE CITED
Jones, Merrepita L. Sarsiella tricostata, a
new ostracod from San Francisco Bay (Myodo- |
copa: Cypridinidae). Journ. Washington Acad. |
Sei. 48: 48-52. 1958.
Juty 1958 JONES: NOTES ON SARSIELLA TRICOSTATA 239
Fic. 1.—Surface view of left shell of adult female Sarszella tricostata (anterior end is to the left).
Fig. 2.—Dorsal view of adult female Sarsiella tricostata (anterior end is to the left).
Fig. 3.—Hinge structure of adult female Sarszella tricostata. 3a, view of interior of left shell; 3b, view
of interior of right shell.
240
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, NO. 7
ENTOMOLOGY .—Armigeres (Armigeres) baisasi, a new mosquito from the
Philippine Islands (Diptera: Culicidae).! ALAN STONE, Entomology Research
Division, U. S. Department of Agriculture, and ERNESTINE B. THURMAN,?
National Institutes of Health, Public Health Service.
In a series of Philippine mosquitoes origi-
nally determined as Armigeres (Armigeres)
kuchingensis Edwards, 1915, in the collection
of the U. S. National Museum, the males
differed from kuchingensis in the structures
of the terminalia, although they appeared
as kuchingensis in general habitus. Females
of the two species may be separated by the
presence of a subapical white band on
sternite VII in kuchingensis, the band being
apical in the new species.
Baisas (1935) includes kuchingensis in his
notes on Philippine mosquitoes and figures
the structures of the male terminalia in
Plate 3, figs. 1, 3, 5, and 7. Although his
description for the most part is applicable to
kuchingensis, his figures of the structures of
the claspette, dististyle, and phallosome do
not agree with those of the type in the
British Museum as noted by the senior
author. We are convinced that Baisas figured
the male of Armigeres (Armigeres) bazsasz,
nesp. (hie. 1):
Bohart (1945) lists kuchingensis and
Armigeres (Armigeres) joloensis (Ludlow,
1904) as synonyms of Armigeres (Armageres)
obturbans (Walker, 1860). We consider both
kuchingensis (Fig. 2) and joloensis (Fig. 3) to
be valid species (Thurman, 1958) and dis-
tinct from obturbans (Both species have a
long dististyle which, when pressed against
the basistyle, reaches the base of the
claspette.); and that obturbans, sensu stricto,
does not occur in the Philippines, and
kuchingensis probably does not. A. obturbans
of Barraud (1934) et auctorwm (nec Walker,
1860; nec Bohart, 1945) is Armuageres
(Armigeres) subalbatus (Coquillett, 1898),
which is the common oriental species dis-
tributed from Japan, China, and Taiwan
1 Acknowledgment is made of the support
provided by the Division of Research Grants,
National Institutes of Health, Public Health
Service, D. H. E. W., under Grant E 809 awarded
to William E. Bickley, Department of Ento-
mology, University of Maryland.
2 Sanitarian (R), on detail from the Division of
Research Grants, N.I.H.
south and west through Thailand to India
and Ceylon.
Armigeres (Armigeres) baisasi, n. sp.
Male—Medium sized, wing 3.5 to 4 mm.
Head.—Proboscis and palpus dark; palpus
longer than proboscis by 44 the length of the last
segment. Torus white scaled. Clypeus bare.
Vertex covered with white flat scales, few light
bronzy scales scattered laterally and medially,
few dark upright forked scales at nape.
Thorax-—Mesonotum with dark coppery,
narrow scales; mesonotal border wide, white;
prescutellum with medial white spot extending
onto the midlobe of the scutellum, the posterior
scales broad. Scutellar setae coppery. Halteres
with coppery capitulum and light base. Anterior
pronotal lobe, posterior pronotal lobe, fore coxa,
and propleuron all white scaled. One lower
mesepimeral bristle present. Hind femur with
dark stripe on dorsum, white scales to apex on
anterior and venter. All tarsi are dark with blue
metallic luster. Midclaws equal.
Abdomen.—Tergites dark with coppery metal-
lic luster. Tergite VIII with basal white spot.
Sternites II-VI all white scaled. Sternite VII dark
basally with apical white band. Lateral white
markings form a straight line on tergites I-Ill
(II-IV in some paratypes); tergites IV—VI show
slight convexity (semicircles).
Male terminalia (Fig. 1).—Basistyle (Bs) long,
slender, 3:1. Dististyle (Ds) short, medially ex-
panded, not reaching base of setae of claspette
when pressed against basistyle; 20 teeth on apical
half, each tooth with a deep medial groove;
apical tooth (Ds-AT) slightly longer than others;
2 or 3 setae on apical third of dorsum. Claspette
(Cl) with two sharp setae usually curving toward
basistyle, a few finer setae and spiculation on
interbasal fold. Phallosome (Ph) with distinct V-
shaped division in ventral lobe, the basal portion
composed of four processes in graduated sizes
and a median process. Ventral surface of dorsal
lobe with wavy creases and small crenulations.
Female.—Similar in size and coloration to the
male. Palpus nearly one-fourth as long as probos-
Juty 1958
cis. White lateral markings on tergites III-VII
are small semicircles which may be slightly
triangular on IV—V.
Larva and pupa.—We do not describe these at
the present time because the quality of the ma-
terial does not permit accurate descriptions.
Holotype, male, U.S.N.M. no. 64105.
Type locality, Abuyog, Leyte, P. I.; November
1944 (O. H. Graham).
Paratypes——Three males, one female, data of
holotype. One male, Baguio, Luzén; August 26,
1945 (Shields). Three males, San Fernando, La
Union, Luzén, P. I., 24 MSU #416; August 2,
1945 (S. E. Shields). One female, Camp Stotsen-
STONE AND THURMAN: ARMIGERES BAISASI
241
berg, [Luzon], P. I.; August 15, 1924 (Maj. W. H.
Teffs). One female, Camp Stotsenberg, Pam-
panga, Luzdén, P. I. One male and one female,
Angeles, Pampanga, [Luzon], P. I. (Dr. Whit-
more). Two males, four females, Calicoan Island,
P. I.; February 12, 1944 (J. H. Paullus, #109).
One male, one female, one larval skin, Leyte
Culige e129 Avand 412-23, oe (Oe a:
Medler). One female, Leyte, P.1.,32 MSU 368;
January 6, 1945. One female, Leyte, P. I., 32
MSU #306; December 19, 1944. One female,
Leyte, P. I., APO 72; December 19, 1944 (K. V.
Krombein, *306). One male, five females from a
series of specimens from Jolo Jolo, without
Fic. 1.—Armigeres (A.) baisast, n. sp.: Structures of the male terminalia.
242
further data. Six males, 14 females, Gandara,
Samar, P. I.; February and November. One
female, Camp Overton, Mindanao, P. I. One
male, P 818, Kalingan, Lanao, [Mindanao]; April
25, 1946, reared from coconut shell (8S. A. Edgar,
J. Enke, E. Gutierres, and A. Corcega). One
female, P-975-3, Lasang, Davao, [Mindanao];
May 2, 1946 (J. Enke, H. Hoogstraal, P. Feli-
ciano, and A. Corcega). One male, P-975, reared
from coconut husks, Davao, [Mindanao]; May 7,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vot. 48, NO. 7 |
1946 (J. Enke, H. Hoogstraal, P. Feliciano, and |
A. Corcega). One female with larval and pupal |
skin, P-978-1, Lasang, [Mindanao], reared from |
fallen coconut leaf in shade; May 7, 1946 (J. Enke, |
H. Hoogstraal et al.). One female, P-996-1, |
Lasang, Davao, [Mindanao], reared from fallen |
coconut leaf sheath; May 7, 1946 (J. Enke, H. |
Hoogstraal et al.).
This species is named for Dr. F. E. Baisas of |
the Division of Malaria, Department of Health ||
Fia. 2.—Armigeres (A.) kuchingensis Edwards, 1915: Structures of the male terminalia.
JuLY 1958
STONE AND THURMAN: ARMIGERES BAISASI
243
VENTRAL &
VIEW
Fic. 3.—Armigeres (A.) joloensis (Ludlow, 1904): Structures of the male terminalia.
of the Philippine Islands, in recognition of the
valuable contribution he has made and is making
to the study of the Culicidae.
LITERATURE CITED
Barsas, F. E. Notes on Philippine mosquitoes.
I. The Armigeres group. Philippine Journ.
Sei. 56: 485-497. 1935.
Barravp, P. J. Family Culicidae. Tribes Megar-
hinint and Culicint. Fauna of British India,
including Ceylon and Burma: Diptera 5,
463 pp. London, 1934.
Bowart, R. M. A synopsis of the Philippine
mosquitoes. U.S. Nav. Med. 580, 88 pp. Wash-
ington, 1945.
THURMAN, ERNESTINE B. Revalidation of three
species of Armigeres Theobald, 1901 (Diptera:
Culicidae). Journ. Washington Acad.
48: 186. 1958.
rz
Sel.
244
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL: 48,Nos 7%
HIGH-TEMPERATURE TRANSFORMATIONS
In the high-temperature research program of
the National Bureau of Standards, attention is
given not only to measurement of properties of
materials at elevated temperatures, but also to
the way in which materials are transformed and
their properties change as the temperature rises.
Interest centers on the rates at which various
properties change, temperature ranges in which
special phenomena occur, sudden transitions
that take place at fixed temperatures, and changes
induced by combining high temperature with high
pressure. The usefulness of a material for high-
temperature applications is largely determined
by the nature and extent of such changes.
As a solid is heated it expands, and the ex-
pansion may continue smoothly up to the melting
point. However, for certain solids the volume
may change abruptly at some fixed temperature
even well below the melting point; this signals a
major structural change, called an «inwersion,
caused by rearrangement of the atoms into a
different crystal pattern. As heating continues,
the atomic arrangement may change to allow a
certain amount of freedom in the interatomic
bonding, so that the solid begins to flow or creep,
with important consequences for the engineering
properties of the material.
At a definite temperature transformation
from solid to liquid occurs—that is, the solid
melts. Interest then shifts to such properties as
viscosity and surface tension and their rates of
change with temperature. In some cases, if the
temperature of the liquid is suddenly and sub-
stantially reduced, the material solidifies in the
noncrystalline, vitreous state. The constitution
of such quenched or frozen liquid-glass is a
subject of special study.
The transition from solid or liquid to gas is
another change of prime importance at high
temperatures; the rates at which such changes
occur determine the stability of the material to
erosion and evaporation. The effects of other
oases in the environment, which often have con-
siderable influence on the evaporation process,
must also be studied.
Superimposed on all the transformations men-
tioned are the effects of impurities, whether
present in large or only trace amounts.
Finally, the role of an increase in pressure must
be considered. Its effect on the properties of solids
is usually opposite to that of an increase in tem-
perature. Study of the interplay of these 2 factors
has proved one of the more interesting areas of
modern high-temperature physics and chemistry.
Research at the Bureau is concerned with
each of these various changes in the behavior of
materials as they are heated. In the following,
brief descriptions are given of work being done
on some of them.
INVERSION
Inversion studies are of interest because they
contribute to our knowledge of the volume sta-
bility of materials in various temperature ranges.
At the Bureau such studies have been made on
refractory oxides, including the technologically
important substance, silicon dioxide. This com-
pound has several forms, including quartz and
cristobalite. Quartz is a low-temperature form,
while cristobalite can exist in 2 modifications that
are stable at low and high temperatures re-
spectively. The temperature at which inversion
from high- to low-temperature cristobalite occurs
has been reported at different values from 180°C
to 270°C. In the past this variation has been
attributed to heat treatment—the higher the
temperature of preparation, the higher the in-
version temperature.
This inversion has been reinvestigated by the
Bureau, using specially purified material. The
results show that inversion occurs at a fixed tem-
perature (271°C) provided that the cristobalite
has been prepared at a sufficiently high tempera-
ture (above 1,400°C) to effect proper crystal
perfection.!
Several other refractory oxides that show solid-
phase inversion have also been studied. One of
the more interesting is zirconium oxide. At low
temperatures the crystallographic form of zir-
conium oxide is monoclinic, but above 1,000°C it
inverts to a tetragonal form which is stable up
to the melting point. However, the addition of a
small amount of calcium oxide to the zirconium
oxide stabilizes another (cubic) form; this form
persists from melting point down to room tem-
perature without inversion, and therefore without
the undesirable volume change that accompanies
inversion. Zirconium oxide is thus converted to a
useful, volume-stable refractory.
1 The inversion temperature of cristobalite, by
R. F. Waker, 8. Zerross, 8. F. Houury, and
L. J. Marston, Journ. Amer. Ceram. Soc. Gn
press).
JuLY 1958
CREEP AND CRYSTAL DEFECTS
Plastic deformation (creep) and _ ultimate
strength are among the physical properties of
solids that depend strongly on the presence of
lattice defects and impurities. The Bureau is
investigating such processes in metallic oxides;
and among these, aluminum oxide was chosen for
concentrated study because it is one of the
strongest of the refractory materials and is
available both as large single crystals and in
polyerystalline form.
It was found? that single-crystal aluminum
oxide begins to exhibit creep at 900°C; at 1000°C
some of the crystals could be stretched by 2 per-
cent. This extension always results from the same
type of motion relative to the crystal structure—
that is, by slip along the hexagonal base plane in
the direction of an “‘a’”’ axis; so that plasticity at
1000°C is an extremely anisotropic property. For
extension to occur, the tensile stress must be
applied obliquely to the base plane; if the stress
is either parallel or perpendicular to the base
plane no creep appears until the temperature is
increased to 1600°C, when some other, unidenti-
fied, mode of deformation becomes active. How-
ever, at 1500°C a crystal subject to a tensile stress
at 45° to the hexagonal base plane can be ex-
tended to more then twice its original length.
The deformation occurring in these crystals
has two characteristic features. First, it requires
an incubation period at 1000°C for as long as 70
hours under stress before measurable creep occurs.
If the specimen is then held at the same tempera-
ture and under constant stress, there is first a
period of increasing creep rate after which the
rate decreases, approaching a constant value.
At higher temperatures the incubation period is
shorter or absent altogether, and a final period of
accelerated creep (associated with ‘“‘necking”’ of
the crystal) may occur.
Secondly, at a given temperature, a certain
value of stress—the creep yield stress—must be
exceeded to initiate measurable creep; this value
of the stress is strongly temperature dependent.
At 1400°C a tensile stress of 250 kg/em2 is suffi-
cient to initiate creep; at 900°C, 1560 kg/cm? is
required; and at lower temperatures the speci-
mens always failed in a brittle manner without
measurable plastic deformation. Further experi-
2 Plastic deformation of ceramic-oxide single
crystals IT, by J. B. WAcHTMAN, JR., and L. H.
MaxweEL.Lt, Journ. Amer. Ceram. Soc. 40: 377. 1957.
HIGH TEMPERATURE TRANSFORMATIONS
245
ments showed that once creep had started at
1000°C, it would continue at a stress considerably
below the creep yield stress.
The presence of impurities can raise the stress
required to start creep; at 1200°C specimens with
less than 1 percent chromium oxide had a creep
yield stress about twice as large as that for pure
aluminum oxide. These results call for interpre-
tation in terms of the stress necessary to move
dislocations in the aluminum oxide structure.
Polycrystalline aluminum oxide* behaved in a
completely brittle manner at room temperature.
However, at 1000°C it exhibited a type of plastic
deformation quite different from that found in
single crystals. Small amounts of creep took
place at stresses well below the creep yield stress
for single crystals; the creep began immediately
on application of load and the creep rate steadily
decreased thereafter. When the load was re-
moved after 10 hours, as much as half the total
deformation was recovered by creep in the op-
posite direction in the following 10 hours. The
mechanism of this creep and subsequent recovery
is thought to be grain boundary slip.
Creep in aluminum oxide and in other re-
fractory metal oxides which have been studied in
less detail depends on two types of defects—dis-
locations and grain boundaries—and on their
interaction with impurities. Dynamic measure-
ment of elastic moduli and internal friction pro-
vide a sensitive means for studying defects and
impurities; a method has been developed for
making such measurements at temperatures
above 1000°C. Experiments are now under way
to study the effects of grain boundary viscosity
and dislocation motion on the temperature,
frequency, and time-dependence of Young’s
modulus and the internal friction.
VAPORIZATION AND SUBLIMATION
Advanced research on rockets and nuclear
power plants has emphasized the inadequacy of
present knowledge regarding vaporization or sub-
limation processes at high temperatures. The
lack of knowledge results in part from the view—
held not too long ago—that the vapor phase
plays no important role in the high-temperature
processing or technological application of solids.
However, a growing body of evidence suggests
3 Creep of crystalline nonmetals, by J. B. Wacut-
MAN, JR., tn ‘“‘Creep and Recovery.’’? American
Society for Metals, 1957.
246
that while sublimation processes may not in
eeneral be rate-determining, they often have a
major influence on reactions at high temperatures.
In line with the changed outlook, it is no
longer common to assume that metals vaporize as
monomers, or that ionic compounds retain in the
vapor phase the valency relations characteristic
of the solid phase. High-temperature chemical
studies have in many cases revealed a complete
reversal of low-temperature behavior; so that the
experimenter is faced with the possible existence
of a large number of molecular species quite
beyond his usual experience.
Four main aspects of high-temperature vapor
phenomena are of current interest. These may be
termed the kinetic, microscopic, thermodynamic,
and chemical aspects, and are concerned, re-
spectively, with: (1) the quantity of material
that vaporizes from unit area in unit time, or the
rate of linear regression of a surface in a vacuum
or in contact with various gases; (2) the mecha-
nism by which individual atoms or ions acquire
sufficient energy to leave the surface; (3) the
energies associated with phase changes and reac-
tion; and (4) identification of the vaporizing
species and the reactions occurring at the inter-
face between solid or liquid and gas phases.
These aspects are not entirely independent.
Thus, if kinetic data on loss of weight in a vacuum
is combined with data on molecular weights of
the vaporizing species, one can calculate the
equilibrium vapor pressure and the heat of
vaporization. Or, knowing the elements involved
and the order of magnitude of the thermodynamic
functions, a reasonable estimate can be made of
the vaporizing species present.
Recently the Bureau has been measuring the
loss in weight at high temperature of single and
polycrystalline specimens of known surface area.
Changes in weight are measured with a Gulbran-
sen-type microbalance designed for loads up to 4
erams and with a sensitivity of 1 microgram.
Specimens are suspended from the balance and,
if they are electrically conducting, are heated by
direct induction. If nonconducting, they are sus-
pended in an inductively heated furnace; 1.e., the
specimen is held near a “‘susceptor’’, or material
capable of being heated inductively. Choice of
material and design for the susceptor present
severe problems, since the susceptor can inter-
fere with the free escape of molecules from the
specimen and can also react harmfully with both
the specimen and surrounding gases.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 43.5Noemn
This problem is also being approached with the
help of a solar furnace, and various other measur-
ing techniques are being used. Both the Knud-
sen technique and transpiration methods find
application in the problems under study, and it is
planned eventually to use mass-spectrometric
methods to establish the molecular weights of the
vaporizing species. Studies are now being made
of the different measurement techniques to deter-
mine the relative merits of each.
As an example of the results obtained thus far,
it has been possible to show that water vapor has
no measurable effect on the rate of evaporation of
alumina up to 1600°C, but that at the melting
point (2050°C) it considerably enhances the rate
of evaporation. Furthermore, by increasing the
partial pressure of oxygen in the surrounding
region, the rate of evaporation can be retarded.
HIGH TEMPERATURE PLUS HIGH PRESSURE
It is well known that greater pressure favors
the formation of compounds with higher density;
so that, for example, the pressures existing far
below the earth’s surface are largely responsible
for the formation of gems and other high-density
substances with unusual properties. An investi-
cation now under way aims to imitate this
natural process and, by a simultaneous applica-
tion of high temperature and high pressure, to
synthesize crystals of high purity and to measure
precisely their properties.
Thus a form of tale has been produced in which
part of the water is replaced by fluorine; this new
form has proved stable, that is, it persists after the
pressure and temperature are returned to normal.
Similar experiments with water and with lime, on
the other hand, generated crystalline forms that
continued only as long as the extreme conditions
were maintained. Also, the plastic, polytetrafluoro-
ethylene, was found to take several new but
temporary forms. In another experiment, the
gem, beryl (8BeO-Al,03-68i02) was synthesized
and its stability limits, as well as those of natural
beryl, were determined.
An unusual piece of apparatus used in this
work is a 7.5-carat diamond confiscated from a
smuggler by the Bureau of Customs and turned
over to the National Bureau of Standards by the
General Services Administration. The diamond
is a flawless specimen of the rare type II that 1s
transparent to infrared radiation up to wave
lengths of 20 microns. This has the advantage
JuLY 1958
that, when the diamond is used as a pressure cell,
it is possible to obtain the infrared transmission
spectrum of the material being studied; and this,
in turn, yields important information about
changes taking place in the arrangement of the
atoms within the material.
The original emerald-cut diamond was modi-
fied into a pressure cell by drilling a hole 0.015 in.
in diameter through its center. Two pistons of
hard tool steel that closely fit the hole are inserted,
one from each end, with the sample under study
between them. Because of the small cross-section
of the cell, a force of only 80 lb is required to
STUDIES IN ELECTROLESS PLATING
247
bring the internal pressure to 450,000 psi (the
maximum that can be attained without danger
of splitting the diamond).
Among the other equipment for such studies
are steel bombs fitted with opposing pistons of
special alloys. External force is applied by hy-
draulic press and internal pressures as high as 1
million psi and temperatures up to 1500°C are
obtained. Alterations of the specimens within the
pressure chambers are followed by measuring
the changes in volume and electrical properties;
in some experiments more indirect methods
must be used.
STUDIES OF ELECTROLESS PLATING
Increased understanding of the conditions
favoring ‘electroless plating” has resulted from
recent research at the National Bureau of Stand-
ards. This chemical deposition process! for plat-
ing nickel and cobalt on metal surfaces, was de-
veloped a decade ago by the Bureau. It is similar
in many respects to electroplating but does not
employ an electric current. Although adapted by
a number of industries for specific applications,
electroless plating has not been systematically
studied to any great extent. Thus, to obtain
further information on the nature of the deposi-
tion, C. de Minjer? and A. Brenner of the Bu-
reau’s electrodeposition laboratory have been
investigating the variables that effect the rate of
nickel plating and the degree of protection that
the coating provides.’
Unlike electrodeposition, electroless plating
can be used to build up smooth, uniform coatings
to a definite thickness over irregularly shaped
objects without producing nodular deposits on
edges and corners. In other chemical processes
for metallic films, the depositing inetal is ran-
domly distributed over the container walls as
well as over the objects immersed in the solution.
Also, after several minutes, the reaction runs to
an end and the exhausted solution must be dis-
carded. With the electroless process, however, a
nickel coating is deposited only on certain
catalytic metals, such as iron, nickel, cobalt, and
! Electroless plating on metals by chemical reduc-
tion, NBS Tech. News Bull. 31: 111, 1957.
2 Present address: Philips Research Laboratory,
Kanstanje Laan, Eindhoven, Holland.
’ For further technical information, see Studies
on electroless nickel plating, C. DE MingER and A.
BRENNER, Plating 44: 1297. 1957.
palladium; deposition does not occur elsewhere
in the bath. Furthermore, by periodically re-
plenishing the bath with the appropriate chemi-
cals, the system can be run continuously for
hours or even days. Since the reaction is auto-
catalytic, that is the nickel itself catalyzes the
process, the deposition continues once a nickel
surface is obtained on any object. Non-catalytic
metals can be made catalytic by immersion in a
dilute solution of palladium chloride, which coats
the metal surface with an almost invisible film
of catalytic palladium.
Electroless nickel deposits are not pure nickel
but consist of a nickel-phosphorus alloy contain-
ing about 8 percent phosphorus. The deposits
are bright and much harder than pure nickel
deposits.
The electroless process involves the reduction
of hot nickel salt solutions, such as the chloride
or sulfate, with pure sodium hypophosphite. An
organic acid, such as glycolic or citrie acid, is
added to the bath as a combined buffering and
complexing agent. Actually the reaction utilizes
only about one-third of the hypophosphite reduc-
ing power because a concurrent reaction between
the hypophosphite and water produces hydrogen
and phosphite.
Experiments were conducted on the rate of
deposition at various values of pH. The originally
developed electroless bath deposited coatings
at the rate of only a few tenths of a mil per hour
and rates of the order of 1 mil per hour were de-
sirable. Although the acidity increases during
operation of the bath, it was not feasible to con-
trol the pH during the plating. Instead, a rela-
tively large volume of the bath (1 liter), was used
248
to plate a relatively small specimen (having an
area of only 12 em?). Under these conditions, the
change in hydrogen ion concentration was not
significant.
An increase in the acidity of the bath consid-
erably reduced the rate of plating. For example,
a decrease in the pH of the bath from 5 to 4
halved the rate. Ordinarily a higher pH could be
maintained by continually adding alkali but the
upper value of the pH is limited by the precipita-
tion of nickel phosphite. This reaction 1s unde-
sirable because the presence of a precipitate leads
to spontaneous decomposition of the bath. Thus,
the optimum pH of the electroless bath is limited
at the lower level by the decrease in the rate of
nickel deposition and at the higher level by the
diminishing solubility of nickel phosphite. The
most satisfactory pH for the acid bath was found
to be between 4 and 4.5.
The organic acids used for the buffering and
complexing in the baths were found to have
specific effects on the rate of deposition. Hydroxy-
acetic (glycolic) acid yielded a higher rate of
deposition than most of the other acids, with the
exception of lactic acid. However, the lactic acid
bath was not as stable and produced rougher
deposits. The rate of deposition reached a maxi-
mum at a specific concentration for each acid.
Since the acids do not change the chemistry of
the reaction, they may influence the rate through
adsorption on the active nickel surface. Thus, the
maximum in the rate curve can be explained on
the basis that a low adsorption of the acid ac-
celerates the reaction while a high adsorption
poisons the catalytic surface.
Several hypotheses have been suggested to ex-
plain the electroless plating mechanism. The sug-
gested theory involves a two-step process. In the
first step, hypophosphite is catalytically decom-
posed to release hydrogen. In the second step,
energy liberated in the discharge of hydrogen is
transferred to the nickel ion, and activates the
latter so that it can react with the hypophosphite
ion. The nature and rate of hydrogen release de-
termine the rate and efficiency of the nickel de-
position. The hydrogen overvoltage on a metal
surface may be taken as a measure of the ease of
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL, 48) (Nomad
hydrogen liberation on the surface. A low over-
voltage should facilitate the discharge; however,
the energy for activating the nickel ion would
also be low. The hydrogen should possess more
energy for activation, if released from a high-
overvoltage surface but its discharge would occur
less readily. Consequently, some intermediate
overvoltage should be the optimum for the
deposition of nickel.
The suggestion that there should be a correla-
tion between overvoltage and rate of plating led
to a study of the influence of certain reagents on
electroless plating. Although the correlation be-
tween overvoltage and the plating rate was not
actually established, it was found that small con-
centrations of certain addition agents appreciably
increased the rate, slightly higher concentrations
decreased the rate while still higher concentra-
tions prevented deposition. Certain substances,
classified as catalytic poisons, in concentrations
of about one part per million of solution markedly
raised the rate of deposition. As with organic
acids, the effect of these substances reached a
maximum ata certain concentration. Thiourea and
potassium thiocyanate gave the most significant
effect. The former greatly increased the rate of
deposition, producing a noticeable effect even in
a concentration as small as 0.1 mg/l. As yet, it
has not been determined whether these additives
can be used in practical plating operations.
Outdoor exposure tests were made of plated
steels to compare the protective value of electro-
less nickel deposits with that of electrodeposited
nickel and nickel-phosphorus alloys. Samples were
prepared from both acid and alkaline types of
electroless baths. Results showed that electroless
nickel coatings—from acid baths—offered steel
ereater protection against rusting than did elec-
trodeposited coatings. Although somewhat tar-
nished, the electroless plates had only a few rust
spots at the end of a 15-month period, while the
electrodeposited nickel of the same thickness
and under the same conditions rusted con-
siderably. The protective value of the electro-
less nickel deposits was equivalent to that of the
electrodeposited phosphorus alloys which con-
tained about 9 percent phosphorus.
Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences
2 ESAIG DU ee A. T. McPuerson, National Bureau of Standards
PERE SPOLCTEL-CLECE ic. osc on kk oe ee es ee FRANK L. CamMpBELL, National Research Council
RTE cod) ee ic is Ks itn ovations Heinz Specut, National Institutes of Health
_ OR Howarp 8. Raprueye, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey (Ret.)
20 Morris C. Lerxinp, Armed Forces Institute of Pathology
Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications
Haravp A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum
Elected Members of the Board of Managers:
ED. a DERUIENT AG LS Ora le F. N. FRENKIEL, F. L. CampBeu
peomianmary 19G0., .... cc2he dee Pak ages i oe wl ea H. A. Bortuwicxk, T. D. Stewart
) arbanuary LOG)... e cee ce ce eden Bourvon F. Scripner, Kerra JoHNSON
Board of Managers......... All the above officers plus the Editor and Vice Presidents
S28. 36 eee ee CHESTER H. Paces, National Bureau of Standards
wicemuue Commitiee.............. A. T. McPuerson, F. L. CampsBeti, Heinz Specut,
Howarp S. RaprpLeye, Lapistaus Marton
Committee on Meetings...... GeEorGE W. Irvina, JR. (chairman), Howarp W. Bonn,
CuirrorD Evans, Toomas D. Fontaine, L. G. Henpestr, Louis R. Maxwe tt,
Int ScHOONOVER, CarL H. WALTHER
Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent............. Lro ScHuBERT (chairman),
MarGareET Pittman, HERMAN Branson, W. J. YouDEN, PHOEBE KNIPLING
Committee on Membership...... CHURCHILL EISENHART (chairman), JEROME CoRNFIELD,
SoLtomMon Kuuupack, Wayne C. Hawi, Eviiotr W. Monrtroti, Pure Davis,
Ricoarp B. Roserts, THEODORE PrrRRos, LAwreNncE M. KusHner, WILBurR S.
Hinman, L. K. Downine, JosepH M. Catpwetu, T. Date Stewart, Joun A.
O’BRIEN, Jz., Paut Bowman, Expert L. Litrte, Gtorcrk Dickson, GEOFFREY
Epsauu, Marx K. Woops, Haroutp E. Fintey, Epwin W. RoEppER
Commiitee on Grants-in-Aid for Research............... B. D. Van Evera (chairman),
Harry W. WELLS, FRANKLIN YEAGER, MarGarEetT PATTERSON
Committee on Bylaws...... Haroup H. SHEPARD (chairman), DorLAND Davis, ASHLEY
B. Gurney, James I. HorrmMan, JASON SWALLEN, Hernz Specut (ex officio)
Committee on Monographs:
femiasaty W959. 2 ek eee le eee nen ALBERT Ler Taytor, W. W. Watton
siomscmmuaty VIGO ccs ke ee ee RicuarpD K. Coox, Pauu H. OrHsEeR
fHomaniwary 1961s... 22... 06... sees Dean B. Cowtk (chairman), J. P. H. Morrison
Committee on Policy and Planning:
Mioriamiary 1959 . 05. ee hoe cc ee oe ek Marcaret Prrrtman, Waupo L. Scumitt
MkemEIMU ey a LOOO ooo gs Se ee ee Es ba eee ee R. E. Gipson, Joun C. Ewers
Momanuary 1961....... 5. Francis M. DeraNporF (chairman), FRANK M. SETzLER
Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement: CHartus R. NazsER (general chairman)
For Biological Sciences...... Witiie W. Smite (chairman), GILBERT ASHWELL,
Kumer M. Netson, H. W. ScHorenzBorn, Resse I. Salter,
; CarLETON R. TREADWELL
For Engineering Sciences...... FRANK A. BIBERSTEIN (chairman), Howarp L.
ANDREWS, JosePpH M. Caupweut, Micnart Goupsere, Tuomas J. Hick ey,
Tuomas J. Kinitran, Paut A. SmrrH, Horack M. Trent, Bruce L. Witson
For Physical Sciences...... Maurice M. SHarrro, VIRGINIA GRIFFING, LADISLAUS
Marton, Ratpo D. Myers, J. Leon SHERESHEVSKY, SHIRLEIGH SILVERMAN
For Teaching of Science...... Joun R. Mayor (chairman), HomER CarHart, JOHN
CoLeMAN, Kerrx C. Jonnson, PHonsBe Knipiine, Howarp B. Owens,
MARGARET PATTERSON
Committee on Science Education:
Mion amuaty 1959). osc. se see sds vce sens dau eon ARNOLD H. Scott, JoHN K. Taytor
Movjanuany 1960)... cc Hee sees ees PHOEBE H. KNIPLING, REGINA FLANNERY
co sanuary 196). 02. oo ccs5 cass: RaymonpD J. SEEGER (chairman), FALCONER SMITH
Committee on Public Relations...... Rospert D. StTreHLER (chairman), Tuomas G.
ANDREWS, Cart H. Dane, Lewis K. Downine, Karu Frank, RAaureu B. KEnNNARD,
Epwarp F. Kniptinc, THomas R. McGuire, Joun A. O’Brien, REUBEN Woop
CONTENTS
Page
Puysics.—Gravitation an enigma. R.H. DICKE.............-...--. ZAS
Puystotocy.—The physiology of aging—a research approach. JOSEPH
WA Cornea 2 ee ee LUND, ie bets eal Si ae so enn 9g 224
Borany.—New or noteworthy ferns from Colombia and Ecuador. As
TH Ge AgstONG oe 2G shee ie ten ei) te oe eo
ZooLocy.—A new family of millipeds on Barro Colorado Island, Canal
Tene. * HME) LOOMIS. 26 9d ue a 2d ae A 235
ZooLoGy.—Further notes on Sarstella tricostata. MerepiTu L. Jonges.. 238
EnromoLtocy.—Armigeres (Armigeres) batsasi, a new mosquito from the
Philippine Islands (Diptera: Culicidae). ALAN STONE and ERNES-
TINE Do RHURMAN.o, 90 te. oa Si ee Gece eine sere ee to. 240
Nores AnD NEws:
High-temperature transformations... .....---++++++sseee trees 244
Studies of electroless plating..........-..-- tale) 247
; eB) a VW“ 2&3
VOLUME 48 August 1958 NUMBER 8
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
———$=—
SS
| Published Monthly by the
jm’ ASHINGTON a On Dane Yo" “Or RY SG TF BN CB Ss
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CHESTER H. Paas, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNaLD BaMrorD, University of Maryland
Howagp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JourNAt is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the JouR-
NAL or the PROCEEDINGS should be sent to Haraup A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNaL.—Per Year.....--.--------++++sss0007 $7 .50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*..............-. _ —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......-. $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......-.. 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......-- 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JourNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available _
for sale to libraries at $393.50.
Monoarapu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,” by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.........--- oo ee $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.........--.-------+++ssrreee $25.00
Single volumes, unbound..... BO Ne ORE ele oe lad a a rr 2.00
Single mumbers. 2. 4.12. -0iiqee os a eer eee eae Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and
ade ct to the Treasurer, H. S. RappLeYE, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
OTN
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48
August 1958
No. 8
ACADEMY OPENS HEADQUARTERS OFFICE
The President and the Board of Mana-
gers of the Washington Academy of
Sciences takes pleasure in announcing to
the members of the Academy the establish-
ment of its first central office, at 1530 P
Street, NW., Washington 5, D. C. The
telephone is ADams 4-5323.
For some time the Board has recognized
that the growth of the Academy and the
increased scope of its activities would make
it necessary to set up an office at a fixed
address where its business operations would
be conducted. At the Board’s 499th meeting
on April 16, 1957, the Policy and Planning
Committee recommended and the Board
unanimously voted that, “It shall be the
policy of the Academy to establish a head-
quarters office in Washington, preferably
in cooperation with its affiliated societies.”
In the ensuing months of 1957 President
Rubey and members of the Executive Com-
mittee explored various possible locations
and arrangements for a headquarters office
without success, owing to the shortage of
space such as the Academy was looking for.
Early in 1958 a special committee on
headquarters was appointed as follows:
Frank M. Setzler, chairman; Howard S.
Rappleye, Leo Schubert, B. F. Scribner,
Raymond J. Seeger, Atherton Seidell, and
Joseph Still. This committee looked into
many possibilities. Finally, in May, the
Academy’s need came to the attention of
the staff of the Carnegie Institution of
Washington. Having been impressed by the
scientific program of the Academy, the
Institution made arrangments for a room
in its building to be assigned to the
Academy. This room, No. 101, is immedi-
ately to the right of the entrance on P
Street. The offer of this room was gratefully
accepted.
In June the Executive Committee ap-
pointed James I. Hambleton, recently re-
tired from the Agricultural Research
Service, U. S. Department of Agriculture,
as a consultant to set up and staff the
office. Mr. Hambleton called upon the of-
ficers of the Academy and reviewed with
them their various activities to determine
what operations should initially be under-
taken at the headquarters and what records
and materials should be kept there. He then
procured and installed the essential fur-
niture of the office, including more than 200
feet of steel shelving for back issues of the
JouRNAL of the Academy, etc. At the same
time he interviewed candidates for employ-
ment in the new office.
The Executive Committee met in the
new office on July 3 and appointed Mrs.
Mary L. Fell, a graduate of the University
of Virginia, as staff officer, and designated
President-Elect Frank L. Campbell to as-
sume general oversight of the office. Mrs.
Fell has had extensive experience in edi-
torial work, writing, teaching, and _ office
operations and is especially well qualified
for the varied duties of the position with
the Academy. Mrs. Fell came on part-time
duty on July 18, and, by the time this an-
nouncement reaches the readers of the
JOURNAL, she will have become familiar
with many of the operations of the
Academy and will be on duty full time,
8:30 to 5:30, Monday through Friday. The
building and the office will be closed eve-
nings, and on Saturdays, Sundays, and holi-
days.
Hereafter, those having business with
the Academy should write or telephone to
the office at 1530 P Street, NW. To avoid
confusion the name of the Carnegie In-
stitution is not to be used in the address.
249
CRAITL Eee rea rc aa
250
The telephone, ADams 4-5323, is on a
separate line and does not go through the
Carnegie Institution switchboard. If, for
any reason, Mrs. Fell cannot be reached by
phone, any urgent messages for her may be
left at Dr. Frank L. Campbell’s office at
the National Academy of Sciences.
The new headquarters office will serve
as the mailing address of the Joint Board on
Science Education, which is sponsored
jointly by the Academy and the 5) ©:
Council of Engineering and Architectural
Societies and conducts or coordinates all
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, No. 8
the activities of the area having to do
with the promotion of science education.
The officers of the Academy take this
opportunity publicly to thank Dr. Rubey
and members of his Board who initiated
the plan for the headquarters and did much
preliminary exploration, and Mr. Setzler
and members of his committee who were
successful in locating a home for the
Academy. Special thanks go to the staff
of the Carnegie Institution for providing
the space needed by the Academy in a
building so well suited for its headquarters.
LIFE HISTORY OF MEADOWLARK
The meadowlark, described as “the most
characteristic bird of the American Tam,” 1S 2)
homesteader. Early each spring the male “stakes
out” an area of 6 to 200 acres which is guarded
as the exclusive domain of himself and his
family—he may have two or three wives—until
the start of the next winter. This territorial
exclusiveness is described by Dr. Alfred O.
Gross, noted American ornithologist, in a bul-
letin recently issued by the Smithsonian In-
stitution.
The meadowlark, Dr. Gross says, hardly can
be considered a migrant, as are some of its
relatives. With the coming of winter, however,
it retreats a hundred miles or more southward
from the northern limits of its range in southern
Canada. Usually about the middle of March
the birds start northward again.
“The first migrants,” says Dr. Gross, “are
old males, few in number and quiet in manner,
which have wintered far to the south. By the
end of March the migrant males become abun-
dant. The first resident males arive in the
latter part of March. They are active in the
mornings and late afternoon, but during mid-
day they often retire to a common feeding
ground which the birds from different territories
share without any apparent hostility.”
But this “era of good feeling” is brief. The
females arrive in waves about two weeks after
the males. Their coming, says the bulletin, stim-
ulates the first song peak of the males whose
songs become longer, more brilliant and ani-
mated. Just before this, however, “the resident
male leaves his companions and selects a ter-
ritory, preferably a grassland or meadow, be-
cause of the great abundance of food as well
as his decided liking for this type of habitat.
“The size and shape of the territory depend
chiefly on the area of suitable land available,
the local abundance and strength of competing
males, the relative concentration of food supply,
and certain barriers and individual range re-
quirements of the male. The size of the territory
may be increased as a result of polygamous
relations, particularly if the females choose
widely separated nesting sites, but the average
size of 15 territories at Ithaca, N. Y., was
found to be about 7 acres. The more con-
centrated the food supply the less need there
is for foraging and the smaller the area fre-
quented.
“Of two territories studied by G. B. Saunders
throughout the breeding season of 1931, one
contained 9 and the other 20 acres; but due
to the abundance of food in a meadow sepa-
rating the two families, one monogamous and
the other with three females, this common
feeding ground was shared.
‘Important to the male are the various
commanding perches from which he can survey
his territory. He selects one for his primary
headquarters. Here he sings and watches during
the day, usually roosting nearby at night. This
territorial center is frequented faithfully during
the entire season, unless his routine is changed
by polygamy, in which case secondary head-
quarters are often established nearer his mates.
As he may have as many as three females,
each having two broods, the chief center of
interest in the territory may change as each
female reaches the peak of sexual responsive-
ness.
Aveust 1958
“By intimidating songs and alarms, displays
and disputes, the male meadowlark defends his
domain against rivals. It is clear from the be-
ginning of his tenure that the male has a
definite conception of his territorial acreage and
chases all resident males of his species beyond
these boundaries. The competitors may come
to blows, but it is usually a matter of vehement
displays or competitive singing, ending when
the vanquished bird takes wing. The loser may
be pursued rapidly beyond the boundary line;
the victorious male then returns to the sentinel
station, singing a spirited flight song as he
flies.”
During the courtship period, Dr. Gross re-
lates, there is intense rivalry. Two rival males
have been seen tumbling about on the ground
on their backs with their feet firmly locked
together, striking at each other with their bills
in mortal combat. The courtship, Dr. Gross
continued, is featured by elaborate displays,
spectacular flights and intensive singing. An
instance is recorded where a male, on his head-
quarters perch, sang steadily for 19 minutes
with an average of 11 songs per minute. The
soughtafter female often answers each song
with a soft, conversation-like chatter.
The meadowlark is primarily a bird of the
grass lands, meadows, and pastures. Its nests,
however, occasionally are found in corn, al-
falfa, and clover fields and in grassed islands
among plowed fields. Most of the nests have
LIFE HISTORY OF MEADOW LARK
251
a dome-shaped roof constructed of grass more
or less interwoven with the attached and grow-
ing parts of the clump of grass or weeds against
which it is built. Sometimes there is a covered
passageway leading to the nest, especially in a
field where the tall grass was not cut during
the previous season.
Some of the nests are so well hidden that
they are very difficult to find and are discovered
only when the bird is flushed by the accidental
approach of somebody walking through the
field.
Shortly after hatching the nestling reacts to
the food call of the mother and holds up its
mouth in a wobbly, uncertain fashion. By the
third or fourth day a slithke opening appears
in the eyelids so that the nestling can see when
it is fed or disturbed. The eyes are fully opened
on the fifth day. By the eighth day the young-
ster is very alert. They may be seen frequently
preening their feathers. During the remaining
days in the nest they become so active that the
nest is wrecked and the roof torn away, ex-
posing the nestlings to the hot direct rays of
the sun. When thus exposed they pant violently
in order to control their temperature. Some-
times they leave the nest and by the eleventh
or twelfth day they take their final leave. The
stage now is set for the appearance of a
second brood.
The rapid progress true science now makes, occasions my regretting
sometimes that I was born so soon. It is impossible to imagine the height
to which may be carried, in a thousand years, the power of man over
matter. We may perhaps learn to deprive large masses of their gravity,
and give them absolute levity, for the sake of easy transport. Agriculture
may diminish its labor and double its produce; all diseases may by sure
means be prevented or cured, not excepting even that of old age, and our
lives lengthened at pleasure even beyond the antediluvian standard. O
that moral science were in as fair a way of improvement, that men would
cease to be wolves to one another, and that human beings would at length
learn what they now improperly call hwmanity!—BENJAMIN FRANKLIN,
in a letter to Joseph Priestley, February 8, 1780.
252
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, No. 8
PHILOSOPHY.—On scientist and theologian? Luo Francis Kocu, University of
Illinois. (Communicated by C. H. Page)
(Received July 11, 1958)
The attempt by Dr. Raymond J. Seeger
in his article Scientist and Theologian?
(this JournaL. 48: 145-152. 1958) to de-
stroy the myth of separation of science and
values is noteworthy but not effective. The
title itself is indicative of a dualistic philos-
ophy in which the role of the theologian is
favorably compared to that of the scientist.
Having made this initial assumption,
Seeger properly concludes that Dihy US WON
personal belief that from a practical point
of view there are two spheres which will
never be either completely separated or
wholly coincident, but will always overlap
to some degree” (p. 146).
“Evidently,” he writes, “it is necessary
right at the start to have clear concepts of
both science and theology.” But then he
contradicts himself by saying: “It would
certainly be presumptuous for me to speak
for theology. Accordingly I will hmit my
definition to science and merely indicate
those features that it appears to have in
common with theology, and those emphases
which seem distinctive to it.” Evidently we
are to take the words of theologians at their
face value but not those of scientists.
This already less than ideal situation is
ageravated by Seeger’s disclosure that
“certain theologians have a tendency to use
symbolically common words with multiple
meanings for certain specific fringe-mean-
ings. In this connection, science undoubtedly
has a great advantage. When necessary, it
can and does introduce entirely new words
which it sharply defines” (p. 148). From
this observation, it would seem that Seeger
has done just the opposite of what common
sense would dictate. If theological concepts
are ambiguous, they should be clarified; if
scientific concepts are sharply defined, why
redefine them?
Alas, the answer is clear that the more
ambiguous the definitions, the easier it will
be to establish the overlapping of science
and theology, of which he speaks.
And so with Seeger, we ask “What is
science?” He answers, “Science is the re-
sult of the use of a scientific method.
What, however, is a scientific method?
It is a method used by a scientist.” He
continues, “In a similar fashion, I be-
lieve, one can say that theology 1s the
result of the use of a theological method,
and that a theological method is a
method used by a theologian (it would
not be impossible, though not desirable,
to speak of theology as a science)” (p.
147).
Such a bit of circular reasoning I have
not encountered since reading E. W. Sin-
nott’s The biology of the spirit. 1 strongly
recommend Sinnott’s book as a source
for all the logical fallacies in their sim-
plest and starkest forms.
The excuse for this follows: “In order
that this phraseology may not appear to
be merely a play upon words, may I say
that I am trying to emphasize in both
instances the ‘what’ as being less impor-
tant than the ‘how,’ and the ‘how’ as be-
ing less valuable than the ‘who.’ It is the
scientist and the theologian themselves who
are most significant.”
Seeger’s plan of analysis takes form. He
has now established that the scientist and
the theologian are both human beings!
Then, “After noting this personal involve-
ment, we consider next our sense impres-
sions. First of all, we realize that all our
views are based on an underlying assump-
tion as to the uniformity of nature, not only
those views of scientists but also those of
theologians, for whom dependability is a
sina qua non” (p. 147). Yes, he concludes,
both human beings have identical sense or-
eans and therefore perceive their environ-
ments in a similar manner.
On the next page (148) comes the coup
détat: “Out of the empirical earth, we move
up into the rational atmosphere, where we
all make a common basic assumption;
namely the intelligibility of the universe.”
The identity is complete. The only differ-
ence Seeger has noted between science and
theology is that (p. 147) “the differences
Aveust 1958
(in phenomena) that make for individu-
ality, I believe are emphasized by theology,
whereas the generic similarities are stressed
by science.”
What, may I ask, has happened to the
much-discussed objectivity of science? Is
empirical experimentation no longer the pri-
mary basis of science? If so, what is to ac-
count for the striking progress of scientists
in the past three centuries contrasted with
the striking lack of progress by theologians?
The going is even rougher when Seeger
attempts to classify attitudes that one may
take toward getting answers to philosophi-
cal questions. “One may claim~_dogmati-
cally, ‘We don’t know.’ Such people are ag-
nostics. Sceptics say doubtfully, ‘We do not
know, but ...’ Still others urge hopefully,
‘We do not know, but we are finding out
more and more.’ Such is the attitude of all
faithful men; of men who believe that the
answers are to be found in our material en-
vironment, or in man himself, or in very
God. The first group of believers may be
called materialists (scientists?) ; the second
group, humanists (scholars of the humani-
ties?) ; the third, men of religion.”
The trichotomy is clear; name your poi-
son! If a scientist is not a humanist or man
of religion, then he must be a materialist,
and presumably also a dogmatic agnostic!
The materialist category obviously includes
such diverse theories as mechanism, vital-
ism, naturalism, scientism, and positivism.
The “Vitalistic-Mechanistic Contro-
versy” has been discussed at length by me
in the Scientific Monthly of November 1957.
In that article I tried to indicate that mod-
ern scientists quite generally employ proc-
ess concepts, or as John Dewey might have
said, the transactional view, instead of any
lineal descendant of vitalism or mechanism.
In Seeger’s trichotomy it is clear that a
materialist and a humanist are mutually
exclusive categories and that he himself is
bridging the unbridgeable gap. He uses hu-
manism in its Renaissance sense, as it is
used by many scholars of the humanities.
As an example one might cite Howard
Mumford Jones. Unfortunately, many of
these self-styled humanists are almost as
antiscientific as their theological brethren.
One of them is Karl Shapiro, a philosopher
KOCH: SCIENTIST AND THEOLOGIAN
253
of some reputation who wrote an article
Why Out-Russia Russia? recently for the
New Republic (June 9, 1958). His biased
view of science and scientists is nicely
shredded in letters to the editor in several
subsequent issues.
Seeger might have been helpful if he had
explored the potentialities of more modern
varieties of naturalistic or religious Hu-
manism, which in this country are organized
as the American Humanist Association,
with headquarters at Yellow Springs, Ohio.
Many Unitarians and Universalists as well
as the Ethical Culturists are of Humanistic
convictions, which are based on scientific
knowledge rather than antagonistic to it.
Such Humanism might well be the basis for
a healthful synthesis of the materialistic or
naturalistic and humanistic lines of thought
implied by Seeger.
Outstanding examples of spokesman for
such a Humanistic outlook, or way of life,
are John Dewey, especially in his book, A
common faith, and Corliss Lamont, in a re-
cent paperback volume, The philosophy of
humanism. A Nobel prizewinner, Hermann
J. Muller, noted geneticist and professor at
the University of Indiana, is now president
of the American Humanist Association.
The most unsatisfactory link in Seeger’s
chain of reasoning is his unqualified accept-
ance of the “very God” as one of his three
alternatives, without any proper designa-
tion of what he might mean by that term.
It is customary among most people to in-
terpret a word in its usual, or commonly ac-
cepted, dictionary-sense if it is not specifi-
cally defined in context. Therefore one must
conclude that Seeger is a theist of the ortho-
dox variety, or neo-orthodox subvariety.
One might rationalize such a conclusion
because it is well known that Christians,
so-called, use the term God arrogantly, as
if there were only one valid concept of it.
It so happens that the Christian sect is a
minority group among the great religious
organizations of the world, and to speak as
if it were the only important one is cer-
tainly the height of presumption.
Quite in line with Seeger’s classification
of attitudes toward getting answers to phil-
osophical questions, is his trinitarian group
of philosophies. “Each one of us, therefore,
254
has apparently three practical choices: (1)
to be agnostic and thereby maintain an in-
tellectual vacuum in which moral commit-
ments are meaningless—negativism, (2) or
to note indiscriminately all possibilities so
that moral commitments are neutralized—
positivism, (3) or to proceed whole-
heartedly to develop one viewpoint—meta-
physics” (p. 151).
Apparently a metaphysician in this sense
is anyone who has the gumption to hold an
opinion other than agnostic or positivistic.
But a positivist certainly may “proceed
wholeheartedly” to develop his viewpoint
and so is a special kind of metaphysician 1f
we apply Seeger’s definition. The dichotomy
of positivism versus metaphysics arose with
Comte, the originator of the organized posi-
tivistic school, who expressly repudiated all
other views as essentially “theological” or
“metaphysical.”
Comte used the term in the Kantian sense
as referring to a realm of pure reason, sepa-
rate from the material realm—a dualistic
system, in other words. Seeger, apparently,
would prefer to use the term metaphysics in
a more modern sense, as the ‘“‘analysis of ex-
perience, in the broad sense,” as delimited
in the unabridged Merriam-Webster dic-
tionary (p. 1546, 1934 ed.).
Note that in Comte’s sense of the term,
a scientific philosophy would be a form of
positivism and opposed to a metaphysical
view, whereas in Seeger’s analysis, science
would be lumped with the metaphysical
point of view and opposed to the positivists.
With one bold stroke, Seeger has accom-
plished his aim, that of reducing scientific
philosophy to a level with theology as if
both were merely insignificant variations of
a central theme of faith in something.
This desired unity, or overlapping of sci-
ence and theology is explicit in these two
statements (p. 147): “First of all we realize
that all (sic!) our views are based upon an
underlying assumption as to the uniformity
of nature, not only those views of scientists
but also those of theologians, ...” (p. 148)
and “Out of the empirical earth, we move
up into the rational atmosphere, where we
all (sic!) make a common basic assump-
tion; namely the intelligibility of the uni-
verse.”
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, No. 8
It is most curious that the staunchest ad
vocates of the orderliness of the univers:
and its intelligibility are among the reli-
gionists, most of whom believe in the ex-
istence of a supreme being, who is the al-
mighty creator and sovereign of that
universe. At one and the same time they be-
lieve in a dependable universe, behaving in
accordance with materialistic laws, and yet
they also believe that this universe is sub-
ject to the whim and fancy of a being with
unmistakable anthropomorphic characteris-
tics. Apparently the orderliness of the uni-
verse is matched only by the disorderliness
of the human intellect.
Although it is perfectly true that the sci-
entist, the theologian, the historian, and the
philosopher, among others, all have one
common subjectmatter to investigate, in
Seeger’s phrase, “man and his environment,’
it is nonetheless also true that each of these
specialists relies upon a certain method of
investigation, and consequently produces a
type of knowledge which is uniquely differ-
ent. To say that all men share certain char-
acteristics of physique, emotions, and mind
is to state a biological fact. But to conclude
from that that the scientist as a scientist is
merely a kind of metaphysicist is to murder
the English language and set back knowl-
edge about 1500 years.
The present widespread illusion that val-
ues are not influenced by science must be
dispelled rapidly if western civilization 1s
to continue in a position of cultural leader-
ship. The values inherent in science and sci-
entific method, however, are not necessarily
identical to the values of theology.
Values inherently implicit in science are
primarily those which can be derived from
a knowledge of the biological nature of
man. Survival values are basic for all living
organisms but in man’s social evolution,
certain ethical values are equally impor-
tant. Group survival and individual sur-
vival are not always completely in agree-
ment and very often certain individual
values related to freedom must be sacrificed
in favor of group survival.
Values associated with the practice of
scientific method are not quite in the same
category as survival values unless one is
willing to grant that survival itself 1s now
Aucust 1958
<otally dependent on the practice of scien-
sie method. Only an extreme scientism or
advocate of some faddist cult with a
pseudo-scientific orientation would make
such a claim. Nevertheless, the leaders of
western civilization and people generally
have much to learn about scientific atti-
tudes and how they may help us to extricate
ourselves from the present moral and ethi-
KOCH: SCIENTIST AND THEOLOGIAN
259
cal impasse which may yet lead us to de-
struction.
If Dr. Seeger’s address on Scientist and
theologian? did nothing else than to stimu-
late serious thought about this crucial social
problem, it certainly has been worthwhile
and a valuable contribution to social evo-
lution.
WORM BEHAVIOR
Worms, supposedly almost at the bottom of
animal life, are creatures of rhythms and moods.
They sulk, loaf, and have bursts of extreme ac-
tivity. Their lives, like those of many higher or-
ganisms (perhaps including man), seem to be
regulated by “internal clocks.” This is reported
by Dr. G. P. Wells, zoologist of the University of
London, in the most recent annual report of the
Smithsonian Institution.
Dr. Wells has studied particularly lugworms,
creatures about the size of a fountain pen, which
are found at low tide by digging in beaches of
muddy sand. These worms live in a fairly per-
manent burrow, eating the sand, digesting some
of the organic content, and ejecting the unwanted
remainder on the surface. These residues collect
as a heap of sandy cylinders, familiar to many
beach frequenters.
The lugworm, Dr. Wells reports, has a brain—
of sorts. This is small and the nervous system is
quite simple. The creature leads an extremely
sheltered life, surrounded by sand which is both
its food and its protection. Owing to these facts
one would expect to find its behavior quite simple.
For example, [says Dr. Wells] one might expect
it to start eating when its stomach is empty, go
on until the stomach is full, and then stop, and
make a backward trip to the surface to shoot out
a sand cylinder as soon as the intestine is loaded.
But the facts are quite otherwise. Under natural
conditions it feeds in little bursts, each lasting for
a few minutes, with rests of a minute or so
between. If you watch it in a glass tube of sea
water without any sand to eat you often see a
similar alternation of feeding movements and rest.
The important point is that each of the outbursts
subsides although there has been no satisfaction by
eating.
Again under natural conditions a lugworm
moves backward to the surface and shoots out a
sand cylinder once about every 40 minutes. A
fasting worm in a glass tube can often be seen to
make similar backward trips although it has no
urge in the form of residues of sand to discharge.
It looks as if the worm had ‘physiological alarm
clocks’ in its organization which go off spontane-
ously every so often, irrespective of its needs,
and compel it to make a burst of feeding move-
ments or a backward trip.
In the case of the feeding rhythm the ‘alarm
clock’ has been located. If you remove the front
part of the esophagus, put it in a dish of sea
water, and watch it carefully you see that this
little fragment of the worm has a complicated
automatic rhythm of its own. For a few minutes
it 1s vigorously active, with waves of contraction
running along it in regular sequence from the
front end to the back, then it becomes quiet for
a couple of minutes, and so on.
It can be shown quite convincingly that this
behavior of the esophagus is the cause of the
intermittent feeding of the intact worm. When
the esophagus is active its activity spreads
through the nervous system to most of the muscles
of the body, affecting them in various ways and
producing periodic feeding movements.
The actual mechanism of the clock, Dr. Wells
says, still cannot be explained adequately, any
more than the exact mechanism of the heart beat.
which it somewhat resembles.
The lugworm is a creature of moods. This is
shown clearly, Dr. Wells says, by automatic re-
cordings of its movements and other behavior.
Alternatively it may lie still and do nothing,
make violent, chaotic wriggles and other rhythmie
patterns, apparently quite apart from feeding
behavior. One of these “moods” generally is per-
sistent for several hours, Dr. Wells says, and then
passes suddenly into another.
“It looks,” he says, ‘as if the lugworm’s be-
havior is governed mainly by an elaborate in-
ternal organization, perhaps even up to the level
of the long-term changes of mood. The same ean
be said of other marine worms. Their activities
are patterned in time, sometimes with strikingly
regular rhythms and changes of mood. The regu-
lar patterns are characteristic of the species. Each
has its own characteristic kind of wriggle.”’
256
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, No. 8
MYCOLOGY .—Some new or rare Discomycetes from South America. EIT K. Casa,
Crops Research Division, Agricultural Research Service, United States De-
partment of Agriculture.
(Received June 5, 1958)
Most of the fungi discussed below are
among a collection of Discomycetes made
bya Dre bie Corner in South America in
1948. Among them two species from Brazil,
two from Bolivia, and one from Peru appear
to be undescribed and are therefore named
here as new. In addition, the occurrence of a
rare Discomycete collected by the late
Roland Thaxter in Trinidad is reported,
and a new species of Molliszella, also from
that locality, is described. Type specimens
of the new species are deposited in the
National Fungus Collections, Beltsville, Md.
1. Dasyscypha chermisina, sp. nov.
Apothecia sparsa, stipitata, globosa dein
cupuliformia usque patellata, molle carnosa,
0.2-1 mm in diametro, testaceo-rubra, albo-
tomentosa, hymenio chermisino, margine pallide
roseo, stipite 0.1-0.2 xX 0.1 mm; asci cylindrici,
brevi-stipitati, ad apices obtusi, poro ope iodi
caerulescenti, octospori, 40-45 xX 3-3.5 pb; as-
cosporae aciculares, unicellulares, hyalinae,
20-26.4 x 0.5-0.7 p; paraphyses rectae, rigidae,
ascos superantes, ad apices angustatae, 55-60 X 1
wu; excipulum prosenchymaticum, pallidum, pilis
hyalinis, verrucosis, 60-90 x 2 w, ad apices non
inflatis, interdum exsudato brunneo in caespitulis
agelutinatis obsitum.
Apothecia scattered, stipitate, occasionally
nearly sessile, globose then cupulate to applanate
when old, soft fleshy, 0.2-1 mm in diameter, stem
and exterior Japan rose to terra cotta’ in dried
specimens, Chatenay pink to shell pink toward
the margin, white tomentose, hymenium deep
Corinthian red to carmine; stipe 0.1-0.2 x 0.1
mm, concolorous with the exterior; asci cylindrical,
short stipitate, obtuse at the tips, pore bluing with
iodine, 8-spored, 40-45 X 3-3.5 m; ascospores
acicular, unicellular, hyaline, 20-26.4 X 0.5-0.7
uw; paraphyses erect, stiff, exceeding the asci,
pointed at the tips, 55-60 x 1 yu; exciple hyaline,
prosenchymatic ; excipular hairs hyaline, ver-
1 Color readings made from Ripeway, R., Color
standards and color nomenclature. Washington,
ID), Ga, LU:
rucose, 60-90 X 2 yw, not swollen at the apex,
sometimes agglutinated in tufts by a brownish
exudate.
On dead petioles of Alsophila sp., Brazil:
Corcovado, Rio de Janeiro, December 19, 1948,
BK. J. BH. Corner 1226.
This species on Alsophila petioles differs from
Dasyscypha ulec Wint. and D. dicranopteridis
Seaver & Whetz., two red species found on fern
stipes, in the stipitate apothecia and longer, nar-
rower ascospores, as well as in the host.
2. Mollisiella trinitensis, sp. nov. (Fig. 1)
Apothecia 0.2-0.5 mm in diametro, hypophylla
in stromatibus atris orbicularibus 1-1.5 mm in
diametro, singula vel caespitosa, cupulata, molle
carnosa, fusca usque atro-olivacea, tenuiter pul-
verulenta, hymenio griseo-citrino usque gTiSeO-
olivaceo, sicco fuscescenti, margine undulato; asci
cylindrici, longe stipitati, ad apices rotundati,
octospori, 50-60 X 5-7 pw; ascosporae uniseriatae,
hyalinae, globosae, glabrae, 3.5-4 uw in diametro;
paraphyses hyalinae, eramosae, ascos superantes,
ad apices 1.5 w; hypothecium pallidum, plec-
tenchymaticum; cortex pseudoparenchymaticum,
brunneum, cellulis parvis, crassitunicatis hexa-
gonis ad marginem clavatis compositum.
Apothecia 0.2-0.5 mm in diameter, hypophy!l-
lous on black circular phyllacharoid stromata
1-1.5 mm in diameter, single. or caespitose, cupu-
late, substipitate, soft-fleshy, hymenium citrine
drab or grayish olive, black when dry, exterior
fuscous to olivaceous black, finely pulverulent,
margin undulate; asci cylindrical, long stipitate,
rounded at the tips, not turning blue with iodine,
8-spored, 50-60 X 5-7 pw; ascospores uniseriate,
hyaline, globose, smooth, 3.5-4 u in diameter;
paraphyses hyaline, unbranched, exceeding the
asci, 1.5 w in diameter at the tips; hypothecium
pale yellowish, plectenchymatic; cortical layer
pseudoparenchymatic, composed of dark thick-
walled hexagonal cells, changing to clavate
hyphal ends at the margin.
On sterile stromata of Phyllachoraceae (?) in
leaves of unknown tree, Trinidad: Arima, [1912-
1913], R. Thaxter. No date is given on the label
AvueGeust 1958
with this specimen. It was presumably collected
during Thaxter’s stay in Trinidad in the winter of
1912-1913 (Mycologia 25: 79. 1933).
Several species of Discomycetes have been
described as parasitic on or associated with species
of the Dothideales, most of them differing, how-
ever, from WMollisiella in having ellipsoid or
oblong spores, as well as in other characters.
Species of Mollisiella are frequently associated
with other fungi of various families in the Basi-
diomycetes and Ascomycetes. M. anonyma Rehm
found on Auerswaldia baccharidis Pat. in Ecuador
is apparently the only member of the genus
growing on a host fungus in the Dothideales. The
Trinidad fungus differs from M. anonyma in
having darker apothecia and larger spores; the
same characters also distinguish M. trinitensis
from another species from Ecuador, M. myri-
ostylidis Rehm, described on leaves of Myriostylis
in association with black sclerotia.
3. Ombrophila fusco-purpurea, sp. nov. (Fig. 2)
Apothecia sessilia vel substipitata, dispersa vel
gregaria, gelatinoso-carnosa, cupulata usque
patellata, 3-5 mm in diametro, violaceo-brunnea,
sicca atro-violacea, hymenio concolori, extus
minute pruinosa; asci cylindrici, brevi-stipitati,
ad apices rotundati et subattenuati, poro ope
iodi caerulescenti, octospori, 90-100 x 7-8 uy;
ascosporae infra uniseriatae, supra irregulariter
biseriatae, unicellulares vel pseudoseptatae, sub-
hyalinae usque pallide brunneolae, longe ellip-
soideae vel fusoideae, 13-15 x 3-4 wu; paraphyses
filiformes, ad apices subcurvatae flavidulae et
usque ad 3-4 yw inflatae; stratum subhymeniale
200-300 mw crassum, gelatinosum, hyalinum;
cortex subhyalinus, parvi-cellularis, caespitulis
hypharum obscuriorium praecipue ad marginem
obsitus.
Apothecia sessile to substipitate, scattered or
gregarious, gelatinous-fleshy, shallow cupulate to
patellate, 3-5 mm in diameter, sorghum brown to
Hay’s brown, drying dark vinaceous black,
hymenium concolorous, externally slightly prui-
nose; asci cylindrical, short stipitate, rounded and
slightly attenuated at the tips, pore bluing with
iodine, 8-spored, 90-100 x 7-8 wu; ascospores
uniseriate below, irregularly biseriate above, uni-
cellular or pseudoseptate, subhyaline to pale
brownish, straight or slightly curved, long-ellip-
soid to fusoid, 13-15 x 3-4 wu; paraphyses
filiform, shghtly curved, yellowish and inflated to
3-4 uw at the tips; subhymenial layer 200-300 u
CASH: DISCOMYCETES FROM SOUTH AMERICA
257
thick, gelatinous, hyaline, of loosely woven
hyphae; cortical layer thin, subhyaline, pseudo-
parenchymatic, with clumps of darker cells scat-
tered over the surface, particularly toward the
margin.
On decaying wood on ground in forest, Bolivia:
Riberalta, February 2, 1948, E. J. H. Corner
NZI
The distinctive characters of this Bolivian
Ombrophila are its violaceous brown apothecia
Mollisiella
2, Ombrophila fuscopurpurea, X43; 8, Polydiscidiu
martynit Wakef., X1.
Fies. 1-3.—1, trinitensis,
X 20;
258
and narrow spores. Apothecia of several other
species of the genus are described as tinged with
lilac or violet, but are all whitish or pallid. Darker
species, such as O. aterrima Mass. and O. nigres-
cens P. Henn., lack the brownish coloration of O.
fusco-purpurea and differ also in the shape of the
ascospores.
4. Polydiscidium martynii Wakef. (Fig. 3)
On rotting log, Trinidad: Mora Forest, April
1913, R. Thaxter.
Polydiscidium martyni was described in 1934
(Kew Bull. Misc. Inform. 1934: 256, fig. 2), and
so far as the writer is aware it has not been re-
ported since the original collection from British
Guiana in 1929. Apparently it is a rare species,
since so conspicuous a fruiting body would
scarcely escape notice. Thaxter’s specimen from
Trinidad consists of a compact, densely branched
black mass with small apothecia at the tips of the
branches, the compound fructification measuring
5 < 3.cm and 1-2 em high when dried. Thaxter’s
note with his specimen, labeled as “strange
Discomycete” reads: “five times as large when
fresh.’ The asci measure 45-50 Xx 5-7 m,; the
ascospores are pale brown, uniseptate, 7-10 X 3-5
u, very slightly larger than noted for the type
specimen.
5. Rutsroemia boliviana, sp. nov.
Apothecia in areis atratis petiolorum disposita,
stipitata, usque 6 mm in diametro, coriacea,
cupulata, lutea vel ochraceofulva, sicca rubra
usque rubro-castanea, hymenio brunneo-rubro,
stipite fusco-ferrugineo, 2-12 mm longo, margine
suberenato; asci cylindrici, poro ope iodi caeru-
lescenti, basim versus attenuati, octospori, 90-
100 x 10-12 py; ascosporae uniseriatae, hyalinae
usque pallide brunnescentes, suballantoideae
apicibus obtuse rotundatis, cuttulatae, 14-15 X
4-5 pu; paraphyses filiformes, ad apices brun-
nescentes et usque ad 2 uw inflatae; hypothecium
tenue; stratum medianum 300-400 » crassum, ex
hyphis tenuibus intertextis compositum; cortex ex
hyphis crassetunicatis brunneis ad caespitulos
marginales agglutinatae compositum.
Apothecia on blackened areas of leaf petioles,
stipitate, up to 6 mm in diameter, coriaceous,
wrinkled when dry, yellow to ochraceous-tawny
when fresh, morocco red to garnet brown dried,
hymenium Victoria lake to maroon, stipe 2-12
mm long, fuscous-ferruginous, margin slightly
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, NO. 8
crenate; asci cylindrical, pore bluing with iodine,
eradually attenuated toward the base, 8-spored,
90-100 x 10-12 yu; ascospores uniseriate, hyaline
to slightly brownish, suballantoid with ends
obtusely rounded, having one large central
guttule and a smaller one at each end, 14-15 X
4-5 w; paraphyses filiform, brown and slightly
swollen to 2 p at the tips; exciple composed ofa
thin hypothecium, an intermediate layer 300-400
u thick of fine brown interwoven hyphae, and a
cortex of heavy, thick-walled brown hyphae
agglutinated in clumps which form the crenate
margin.
On dead petioles of Bertholletia im forest,
Bolivia: Conija, January 31, 1948, E. Jest
Corner 1217.
Rutstroemia boliviana is similar in many re-
spects to R. sydowiana (Rehm) W. L. White,
which occurs on leaves of Quercus and Acer in
Europe and North America. While resembling in
color the following species from Brazil, it differs
from the latter in having a longer stipe and
larger asci and ascospores.
6. Rutsroemia corneri, sp. nov.
Apothecia stipitata, in venis foliorum atratis
epiphylla, subcoriacea, patellata usque eonvexa,
1-4 mm in diametro, sulphurea, sicca badia,
hymenio concolore, margine tenui, revoluto,
stipite 0.5-1 (-2) x 0.2-0.3 mm; asci cylindrici,
brevi-stipitati, ad apices rotundati et crasse
tunicati, octospori, poro ope iodi exigue caerules-
centi, octospori, 75-80 (-90) x 7-10 w; ascosporae
1-2-seriatae, hyalinae, reniformes usque lunatae
apicibus obtusis, guttulatae, 10-125 xno 4 os
paraphyses simplices vel ramosae, granulosae, ad
apices viridi-luteae vel viridi-brunneae et sub-
inflatae; hypothecium tenue, ex hyphis pallide
brunneis compositum; stratum medianum cras-
sum, plectenchymaticum, ex hyphis pallide
brunneis tenui-tunicatis laxe intertextis consti-
tutum; cortex obscurior, pseudoparenchymaticus,
hyphis fasciculatis crassis atrobrunneis strigosus.
Apothecia short- to long-stipitate, epiphyllous
on blackened leaf veins, subcoriaceous, patellate
to convex when fully expanded, 1-4 mm in diam-
eter, clear sulphur yellow when fresh, mahogany
or ox-blood red to maroon in dried specimens,
hymenium concolorous, margin thin, uneven,
stipe 0.5-1 (2) x 0.2-0.8 mm; asci cylindrical,
short-stipitate, rounded and wall thickened at
the apex, 8-spored, 75-80 (-90) x 7-10 pw, pore
faintly blue with iodine; ascospores 1—2-seriate,
Aueust 1958
hyaline, reniform to lunate, obtuse at the ends,
having two large guttules, 10-12 x 3-4 u; pa-
raphyses simple or branched, granular, greenish
yellow or greenish brown and slightly swollen at
the tips; hypothecium of thin, pale brown parallel
hyphae; intermediate layer very thick plecten-
chymatic, composed of pale thin-walled very
loosely interwoven hyphae; cortex darker, sub-
parenchymatic, streaked with fascicles of thick
dark brown hyphae.
On the upper surface of dead leaves, Brazil:
Corcovado, Rio de Janeiro, December 4 and 8,
1948, E. J. H. Corner 374 (type) and 1221. Thin
black lines along the leaf veins are the only indi-
cation of any stromatic development in this
fungus. The apothecial characters are clearly
those of a folicolous Rutstroemia, similar in color
and dimensions of the asci and ascospores to R.
renispora (Ell.) W. L. White, a species found only
on leaves of Nyssa in the eastern United States.
7. Trichoglossum peruvianum, sp. nov.
Ascophora angusto-clavata vel clavato-cylin-
drica, fuscoatra, 1-2.5 cm alta, parte fructifera
dimidium investienti, interdum compressa, 1.5-2
mm in diametro, parce setosa; stipes aequalis,
ater, setosus, 5-10 x 1 mm; asci longe cylindrici,
ad apicem abrupte et basim versus gradatim
attenuati, poro ope iodi caerulescenti, octospori,
120-130 x 8-11 uw; ascosporae elongato-fusoideae,
in centro crassiores et utrinque attenuatae, saepe
infra acutiores, olivaceae, uniformiter 7-septatae,
50-75 x 2.5-3.5 uw, plerumque 66 x 3.5 u; pa-
CASH: DISCOMYCETES FROM SOUTH AMERICA
259
raphyses septatae, infra tenues et hyalinae, supra
abrupte usque 5-6 w inflatae apicibus clavatis
rectis vel leniter recurvatis, subhyalinae usque
pallide brunnescentes; setae atro-brunneae, ad
basim subconstrictae et pallidiores, ad apices
acutae, 150 x 5-6 yp.
Ascophores narrow-clavate to clavate-cylin-
drical, fuscous black, 1-2.5 cm high, the fruiting
portion covering about half the length, occasion-
ally compressed, 1.5-2 mm in diameter, sparsely
setose; stipe even, black, setose, 5-10 x 1 mm;
ascl long-cylindrical, narrowed sharply at the
apex and gradually toward the base, pore blue
with iodine, 8-spored, 120-130 x 8-11 py; asco-
spores elongate-fusoid, broadest near the center
and narrowed toward both ends, often more
acutely below, olivaceous, uniformly 7-septate,
50-75 x 2.5-3.5 u, mostly 66 x 3.5 uw; paraphyses
septate, slender and hyaline below, abruptly in-
flated above to 5-6 yw, the clavate tips erect or
slightly recurved, subhyaline or pale brownish;
setae dark brown, slightly constricted and paler
at the base, acute at. the tips, 150 x 5-6 yu.
On the ground in forest, Peru: Iquitos, April
11, 1948, E. J. H. Corner 1233.
The ascospores in this species are noticeably
uniform in septation and size, being invariably
7-septate and a very large percentage measuring
65-67 uw in length. The asci are smaller and the
ascospores narrower and more acute than those of
Trichoglossum confusum Dur., resembling those of
T’. octopartitum Mains in shape, but considerably
shorter.
SaEnASRRERNRRIERTmInRes =. __...aeammeenmemememmneeet
Prove all things; hold fast that which is good—Sr. Pauu.
260
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 48, NO. 8
ZOOLOGY .—A new Eulithobius, with a key to the known American species (Chilo-
poda: Lithobiidae). Raupx E. CraBILL, Jr., Smithsonian Institution.
(Received May 14, 1958)
It seems characteristic of the rich lithobiid
fauna of temperate North America that it is
in general highly endemic. The same can be
said for the lithobiids of western Europe,
so that not only is each region inhabited by
species which are for the most part peculiar
to itself, but many of the species-com-
plexes—some regard them as genera or
subgenera—appear to follow sum, Wane
Appalachians, the Southwest, OC! ME
Pacific coast all support genera many of
which have no apparent counterparts or
representation in the western Palearctic,
though a persistent Asian flavor is quite
often evident.
Eulithobius can now definitely be said to
be represented, however poorly, in both
regions by species which are unquestionably
very closely akin. Having had the uncommon
opportunity of being able to compare
Austrian specimens of £. punctulatus (C. L.
Koch) (? = validus (Meinert))! directly
with two of the three known American
species, sphactes n. sp. and fattigz Chamber-
lin, I can say unhesitatingly that the
generic characters and distinctive general
habitus that they share seem not the result
of evolutionary convergency, but of parallel
descent.
The Austrian specimens differ signifi-
cantly from both sphactes and fattegr in
several respects, e.g.: spur VTiP is present
in both American species but entirely absent
in punctulatus; pretarsal unguiform (inner)
accessory claws occur on legs 14 of punctu-
latus but not on those of sphactes or fattigz;
1 Thanks to the kindness of the late Carl graf
Attems I have been able to obtain European
specimens of this and a few other species, generally
most uncommon in American collections. Attems
had labeled them as validus Meinert, 1872, and had
collected them at Graz, Austria. Broelemann,
Verhoeff, Latzel, and Attems all equated punctu-
latus, 1847, with validus, 1872, though only Broele-
mann used the older name. The others used
validus, evidently because it could be identified
from its original description, whereas they felt
punctulatus could not be assigned with equal
confidence. But if we agree that both names apply
properly to the same zoological entity, then the
older Koch name sk »uld be used.
punctulatus has two pectines’ on each of the
first 13 proximo- and distotarsi, whereas
neither American form has two proximotar-
sal pectines; and perhaps most strikingly of
all, in my specimens of punctulatus no
pretarsus has an outer (setiform) accessory
spur, whereas they occur on each of the
first 13 legs of the American species. In
most other features, however, the three are
very similar.
Eulithobius sphactes, n. sp.
The new species seems most like £. fattigr,
known only from Boston, (in southcentral)
Georgia, and northeastern Alabama. In both, the
plectrotaxy is quite similar, as are the numbers of
basal gonopod spurs and the ocellar arrangements.
However, they differ most conspicuously in that
the female gonopod claw is tripartite in fattigr but
undivided in sphactes. In addition, the distotarsal
pectines of sphactes are double, while those of
fattigi are single. Finally, fattigi is apparently a
smaller form with fewer antennal articles and
prosternal teeth.
Holotype: #. Oklahoma, Muskogee County,
Fort Gibson, Dresser’s Cave. January 28, 1958;
Thomas C. Barr, leg. U.S. National Museum
Myriapod No. 2467.
Bopy LENGTH. 29 mm. Conor. Antennae, first
5-6 articles deep brownish red, those following
becoming browner and finally yellowish. Cephalic
plate, first tergite, predominantly deep red tinged
with brown, the remaining tergites essentially
mahogany except for areas of muscle attachment
which are yellowish. Legs, first 13 with yellowish-
orange prolateral surfaces, their postlateral sur-
faces whitish yellow to white, the tarsi entirely
yellowish orange; last two pairs of legs entirely
mahogany. Prosternum and prehensors reddish
light brown. Sternites yellowish light brown.
ANTENNAE. Left, incomplete, with 34+
articles; right, complete, with 46 articles, 18 mm.
All articles longer than wide. Vestiture increasing
distally, relatively sparse on first and second,
very dense distal to twelfth or so. CEPHALIC
2See the discussion of pectines and pectinal
setae following the key to species at the end of the
article.
Avueust 1958
PLATE. Wider than long (w = 3.8 mm, 1 = 3.5
mm); sides nearly straight, very slightly diverging
anteriorly; large abrupt lateral interruptions
present. Very sparsely, shortly setose. OcuLAR
AREA. Organ of Témésvary and single posterior
isolated ocellus both large, the latter weakly
reniform. Upper ocellar series with larger, elon-
gate ocelli, ocelli of remaining series essentially
circular. 45-50 ocelli, disposed irregularly in 8-10
indistinct rows. PREHENSORIAL SEGMENT. Pro-
sternum anteriorly sparsely setose, posteriorly
glabrous. Prosternal teeth blunt, robust; 13-13,
the diastema U-shaped; right porodont socket
distinct, left porodont and socket totally absent.
Tereires. Posterior angles of 6-7-9-11-13 pro-
duced; those of 9-11-13 very strongly, with long
acute points; those of 7 very broad as in Neo-
lithobius; those of 6 relatively shorter, apically
rounded and margined. Surfaces of first two
major tergites (pedal 1 and 3) smooth, succeeding
major tergites tuberculate, each tiny pointed
tubercle bearing a minute seta. Lateral margins
of all tergites pronounced. Setae sparse, very
small. Legs 1-13. All tarsi distinctly divided,
their sutures incomplete dorsally but without true
condyles. Kach pretarsus with a conspicuous inner
(unguiform) and outer (setiform) accessory claw
or spur. Pectines of distotarsi double, the setae
relatively strong, decumbent; pectines of proxi-
motarsi single. Leas 14-15. Tarsi divided but
each with a true dorsal condyle. Pretarsi without
accessory claws. Penult legs each with a long,
shallow, ventral prefemoral and a femoral groove;
prefemur also with a dorsal groove. Inner surfaces
of femur, tibia, and whole tarsus minutely
porigerious. As a whole, each leg very long and
thin, without sexual modifications. Ultimate legs
each with a long shallow groove dorso-mesally on
the prefemur; femur, and tibia without grooves.
Ventrally a long shallow groove on prefemur and
femur. Femur, tibia, and tarsus each minutely
porigerous on inner surfaces. As a whole very
thin and long (17 mm), without sexual modifi-
cations. CoxaL pores. Present on legs 12-15, i.e.,
10-11-10-9. Most pores extremely elongate, oc-
curring on each coxa in a linear series sunken in a
deep groove. Last three coxae laterally armed.
POSTPEDAL SEGMENTS. Pregenital sternite rela-
tively densely setose, medially deeply diastemate;
gonopods uniarticulate, minute.
Allotype: @.See data for holotype.
Except for the following significant departures,
the female allotype agrees closely with the
CRABILL: A NEW EULITHOBIUS
261
MALE HOLOTYPE
Dorsal Ventral
CP P Be ea | Tir, P F Ti
1 amp | ap| a mp | amp | amp
2 amp | ap/| ap amp | amp | amp
3 amp | ap | ap amp | amp | amp
+ amp | ap| ap amp | amp | amp
5) amp | ap} ap amp | amp | amp
6 amp | ap | ap amp | amp | amp
a amp | ap/| ap amp | amp | amp
8 amp | ap | ap amp | amp | amp
9 amp | ap/ ap amp | amp | amp
10 amp | ap/ ap amp | amp | amp
11; a | amp | ap] ap amp | amp | amp
12 | a | amp| ap] ap| m | amp | amp/ amp
13 | a | amp | ap| ap| m | amp | amp amp
14; a | amp] p/| p/m | amp| amp] am
1) | > || Boy | Jo m | amp | amp! am
*C = coxa, P = prefemur, F = femur, Ti
tibia, Tr = trochanter; a = anterior spur, m
medial, p = posterior.
holotype. Body length, 30 mm. Antennae, right
absent, left was 46 articles, 19 mm long. Color as
in holotype except for cephalic plate and first
tergite which are less reddish and more brownish.
Prosternal teeth, left 9, right 7; porodonts in-
distinct. Longest ultimate leg 14 mm, unmodified.
Gonopods with 2 + 2 basal spurs, each evenly,
gradually acuminate (not abruptly, angularly so
as in fattigi); claw strictly single, undivided,
apically sharply pointed.
Plectrotaxy as in the holotype, except that
DCA begins on 10 rather than 11.
Paratype: o. See data for holotype.
Except for the following, very similar to the
holotype. Body length, 26 mm. Antennae, right
broken, 388+ articles; left with 46 articles. Pro-
sternal teeth, right 8, left 9; porodonts large and
distinct.
Plectrotaxy differing from that of holotype as
follows: 15V = 01331 (recently regenerated):
DFA = 1-12, DTiIA = 1-12.
Paratype o. See data for holotype.
Differing significantly in the following features:
body length 24 mm; antennae, right broken, 21+,
left with 47 articles; prosternal teeth, left 7,
right 9, porodonts distinct. Plectrotaxy unknown,
most legs lost.
AMERICAN SPECIES OF EULITHOBIUS
The following key should usually facilitate the
identification of the three forms known presently
from the United States. It is admittedly weak in
262
its attempt to separate the males, especially those
of hypogeus which are known to me only through
the original description. There should be no
problem in distinguishing between either sex of
sphactes and fattigi: the pectinal setae of the
distotarsi alone will suffice. But since plectrotaxy
seems untrustworthy and many of the important
details of hypogeus are unknown, we cannot
predict with certainty at this time how its males
can be expected consistently to differ from those
of the other species.
{uswPemsles. 0.50.82. ome ee 2
tbe Malesdi Ge or eee ee ee 4
2a. Gonopod claw undivided; basal spurs 2+ 2,
each apically evenly, gradually acumi-
nate, not abruptly or angularly so. Disto-
tarsi 1-13 each with 2 pectines...........--
sphactes, n. sp.
2b. Gonopod claw tridentate; basal spurs 2 + 2
or 3 + 3 (in fattigi each apically abruptly,
angularly acuminate). Distotarsi 1-13, at
least of fattigi, each with one pecten....... 3
3a. Basal spurs of gonopod 2 + 2.........----
fattigi Chamberlin
3b. Basal spurs of gonopod 3 + 3........------
hypogeus Chamberlin
4a. Antennal articles of adults numbering on
the order of 35-37. Ocular area apparently
not containing the usual large single pos-
terior ocellus. (15D = 10210, 15V = 01321,
14Vo—Oissl)2s Se hypogeus Chamberlin
4b. Antennal articles of adults numbering on
the order either of 37 or 46-47. Ocular area
with a clearly separated larger posterior
ocellus. (15D = 10310, 15V = 01331, 01882,
142M = 01381 01G32) 9 ee eee, 5
5a. Distotarsi 1-13 each with two pec-
tines. Antennal articles varying around
AGREES Fen: Cine ee sphactes, n. sp.
Ns eee ee
3 There is reason to suspect that the quantita-
tive plectrotaxic formulae for legs 14 and 15 are
not invariable, hence are not altogether reliable,
at least in the case of these species.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vot. 48, No. 8
5b. Distotarsi 1-13 each with but one pecten.
Antennal articles varying around 37.......
fattigi Chamberlin
CONCERNING THE PECTEN AND PECTINAL
SETAE
A new morphological character, never hereto-
fore employed, has proved most useful, indeed in-
dispensible, in the study of these species.
If we examine the ventral surface of any of the
first thirteen tarsi of sphactes, we find setae ar-
ranged in two ways: A) randomly disposed as on
the dorsal surface, these setae inclined at different
angles and varying somewhat in length and thick-
ness; B) disposed in one or more rows parallel to
the axis of the tarsus, these setae strongly, uni-
formly decumbent, equal in length and width,
and slightly stouter than the others. Tf these
seriate setae were longer and more curved, and if
their rows were dorsal, they might easily remind
us of the calamistrum of a cribellate spider.
Since such a row of setae roughly resembles a
kind of comb or rake, I have named it a pecten
(plural, pectines), and its constituent setae,
pectinal setae.
In sphactes the proximal tarsal article (the
proximotarsus) bears one pecten, as does that of
fattigi, but there are two such pectines in the
European punctulatus. The distotarsus of sphactes
bears two pectines, as does that of punctulatus,
while in fattigi we find only one.
This character promises to resolve problems in
certain other lithobiid groups where a number of
significant pectinal conditions have been identi-
fied. In some of the smaller forms, e.g. Nadabius
pullus (Bollman), the pectinal setae, though less
obvious, are still distinctive in being strongly
decumbent and seriate, hence identifiable.
Aveust 1958
HARTMAN: A NEW NEREID WORM
263
ZOOLOGY .—A new nereid worm from Warm Mineral Springs, Fla., with a review
of the genus Nicon Kinberg.1 Ouca Hartman, Allan Hancock Foundation, Uni-
versity of Southern California. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.)
The discovery of a unique fauna in Warm
Mineral Springs, Sarasota County, Fla., by
Dr. James Lackey, led to the find of a small
nereid which exists in flourishing popula-
tions in an environment which is unusual
in its high temperatures and its concentra-
tions of certain minerals. The species is
here newly described and its affinities with
other species of the genus related. The type
is deposited in the United States National
Museum (no. 29627). z
Family NEreEIDAE
Genus Nicon Kinberg, 1866
Nicon lackeyi. n. sp.
Figs. 1-5
Ovigerous adults measure 5 to 6 mm long
and are 0.3 mm wide without parapodia; the
body consists of 33 or fewer setigerous segments.
The prostomium is trapezoidal in outline, about
as long as wide and has a pair of cirriform
frontal antennae, each about as long as the
prostomial length. The four eyes are moderately
large, reddish in color, and subcircular in out-
line; they are located on the posterior third
of the prostomium, with the two of a side
nearly touching and widely separated from
those of the opposite side. Palpi are large and
project in front of the prostomium (Fig. 1)
or they are directed ventrally and best seen
from below.
The pharynx, seen only by dissection and
in cleared whole mounts, is believed to lack
paragnaths or papillae, as characteristic of the
genus Nicon Kinberg. The paired maxillae or
jaws are very delicate, translucent pale yellow
in color, with the two of a side similar; each
1s longer than wide and broadest at the base,
tapering to a slender, distally recurved tip and
six lateral, subequal, oblique teeth along the
cutting all (Fig. 3). The teeth arise from an
elevated ridge and are difficult to see unless the
jaw piece is rolled on edge.
The first visible segment is very short and
bears the four pairs of peristomial cirri. The
*Contribution no. 228 of the Allan Hancock
Foundation.
dorsal and ventral cirri of the first pair are
short and the first are inflated in their basal
half (Fig. 1). The cirri of the posterior pairs
are slenderer and taper distally. The longest, or
second dorsal cirri, are about as long as the
first seven setigerous segments.
The second visible segment is the first setig-
erous. The parapodia of this and the second
segment are small and uniramous; they lack
dorsal cirri and notopodia. From the third
segment the parapodia are larger and con-
spicuous; they have dorsal cirri and well-de-
veloped biramous parts. Typical parapodia
have well-developed, laterally projecting lobes
with neuropodia somewhat the larger ; their
lengths increase slightly in more posterior seg-
ments. The dorsal cirrus, or cirrophore, is
long, tapers distally, and merges directly into
the dorsal cirrus (Fig. 2) so that the fusion of
the two parts is not always clearly made out.
The distal end of the dorsal cirrus extends
obliquely out to the ends of the long setae.
The notoacicular lobe of anterior segments has
long superior and inferior lobes; the upper one
is postacicular and the lower is preacicular. In
anterior segments these two lobes are about
equally long. In middle segments the upper lobe
diminishes in length and in posterior segments
both lobes decrease gradually in size so as to
be absent far back.
Notopodia are distally oblique, with the
longest edge below. They are provided with
single pale yellow acicula and 7 to 12 composite
spinigerous setae with homogomph articulation.
Neuropodia resemble notopodia but are distally
oblique in the opposite direction, with the su-
perior edge the longer one. They also have single
embedded yellow acicula, completely covered
or the distal tip may emerge for a short distance
just below the uppermost part of the lobe.
Neuropodial setae are of three kinds. The
uppermost are homogomph spinigers, like those
in notopodia. They are accompanied by two or
a few heterogomph spinigers with cutting edge
conspicuously serrated (Fig. 5). The latter are
shorter than the others and easily overlooked.
Subacicular setae are heterogomph falcigers in
which the length of the appendage varies from
long to short, or 4 to 10 times as long as wide;
eo me omen
Z
SS
Pi
So
A.
=f
sic
~~
SZ
Yj
h
Fics. 1-5.—Nicon lackeyi, n.sp.: 1, Anterior end including first 8 segments, in dorsal view, X Ml Zen2:
twelfth parapodium in anterior view, X 635; 3, maxilla dissected from retracted pharynx, X 1,400; 4,
parapodium, X 1,210; 5, neuropodial het
inferior heterogomph falciger from a median
ger with serrated edge, X 1,210.
264
4
“ap
"g
*
ae
ae
m.
5
erogomph spini-
Aveust 1958
the shortest are in inferiormost positions. The
cutting edge is smooth (Fig. 4). A typical or
median parapodium has 7 to 12 spinigerous
notosetae, 7 homogomph neurosetae, 2 hetero-
gomph spingers, and about 7 heterogomph
faleigers.
The anal end terminates in a pair of short,
triangular ventral lobes at the sides of the anal
pore, and a pair of long, laterally directed cir-
riform processes, their length about that of the
last six segments.
Ova are giant in size and few in number, with
at most four to six in a segment, present in
most of the body behind the pharyngeal region
(Fig. 1). Development is probably direct, with-
out epitoky. Color in life is dusky overlain by
a greenish tinge, with most pigment concen-
trated at the sides of the prostomium and in
the segmental grooves.
The specific name is for Dr. James Lackey,
to whom I am indebted for the collection and
the physical data (below). Dr. Lackey was able
to collect living adult stages and kept them
alive in the laboratory where they continued to
give rise to young stages.
Locality —“About 2 miles south of the bridge
where U. S. highway 41 crosses the Myakka
River in Sarasota County, in a large first magni-
tude spring, with a flow of 7,000,000 to 9,000,000
gallons per day of water which has a constant
temperature of 86° F., contains no dissolved
oxygen, but does contain 0.162 parts per million
of hydrogen sulphide. The spring also contains
about 17,000 ppm of dissolved solids, principally
chlorides, sodium, and potassium, and has a
pH at 7.2 + 0.2. These features are constant.”
These data are taken from a report by Dr.
Lackey to the Florida Academy of Sciences
presented at a meeting on December 6, 1957.
Genus Nicon Kinberg, 1866, emended
Hartman, 1948
Type, Nicon pictus Kinberg, 1866.
This is a small genus of Nereidae, character-
ized for having biramous parapodia as in
Nereis Linnaeus but with a proboscis lacking
paragnaths or papillae. Notopodia are typically
provided with spinigerous setae only. Neuro-
podia have spinigers and falcigers. Most known
Species are small to moderately large. Develop-
ment is direct or accompanied by epitoky. Six
of the ten known species are from the Western
Hemisphere; the others are from the Southern
Hemisphere, in extra-American areas.
HARTMAN: A NEW NEREID WORM
2695
The following species are regarded congeneric:
Nicon aestuariensis Knox, 1951, from New Zea-
land.
Nicon ehlersi Hartman,
Islands in deep water.
Nicon lackeyr, new species, from Warm Mineral
Springs, Florida.
Nicon maculata Kinberg, 1866, from off La Plata,
Argentina.
Nicon mexicana (Treadwell) 1942, as Leptonereis
mexicana, from western Mexico.
Nicon moniloceras (Hartman) 1940, as Leptonereis
glauca moniloceras from Santa Catalina Island,
California and western Mexico. New combina-
tion.
Nicon pictus Kinberg, 1866, off Brazil in 20-30 fms.
Nicon punctata (Wesenberg-Lund) 1949, as Lep-
tonereis punctata, from the Gulf of Iran. New
combination.
Nicon tahitanus Kinberg, 1866, from Tahiti.
Nicon virgint Kinberg, 1866, from the Strait of
Magellan.
1953, from Falkland
KEY TO SPECIES OF NICON KINBERG
1. Neuropodia provided with some simple brown
fAlciGersp Mew st ae te sale N. punctata
Neuropodia without simple falcigers........ 2
2. Notopodia with falcigers in addition to spini-
POTS MeL R ee me te ts Ri MU wae N. tahitanus
Notopodia with spinigers only.............. 3
3. Peristomial cirri and prostomial antennae dis-
talllyaearticledeyare en eee N. moniloceras
Peristomial cirri and antennae not articled.. 4
4. Peristomial cirri very short; becoming epitokous
N. mexicana
Peristomial cirri moderately long; development
direct or becoming epitokous............. 5
5. Dorsal cirri inserted at terminal end of dorsal
Lolo ir tar Ay eae a Stee” N. lackey
Dorsal cirri inserted at or near superior base
Of dorsalmlober = 1a een onal) “ae ya 6
6. Posterior neuropodia provided with 8 or 4 thick-
shafted heterogomph falcigers..... N. ehlerst
Posterior neuropodia without such falcigers.. 7
7. With a long lobe behind the neuroaciculum.
resembles one of main parapodial lobes and
increases in size posteriorly........] N. pictus
Without such long lobe behind the neuro-
AUCTCUINUNOTE Sete a oe a Si ek ee RA 8
8. In the posterior half of the body, the middle
parapodial lobe is larger and longer than the
Gorse lAtlOber cnet eee N. maculata
In the anterior part of the body the dorsal
lobe is larger and broader than other lobes
N. aestuartensis
REFERENCES
Hartman, O. Polychaetous annelids. Part II:
Chrysopetalidae to Goniadidae. Allan Han-
cock Pacific Exped. 7: 173-287, pls. 31-44.
1940.
. The marine annelids erected by Kinberg.
Arkiv Zool. 42A: 1-137, 18 pls. 1948.
266
_ Non-pelagic Polychaeta of the Swedish
Antarctic Expedition 1901-1903: Further zo-
ological results, 4(11): 1-88, 21 figs. 1953.
Kryserc, J. Annulata nova. Forh. Ofv. Vet-Akad.
Stockholm, 22: 167-179. 1866.
Knox, G. The polychaetous annelids of Banks
Peninsula. Rec. Canterbury Mus. 5: 213-229,
5 pls. 1951.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
TREADWELL, A. Polychaetous annelids from Lower
California and the Philippine Islands in the
collections of the American Museum of Nat-
ural History. Amer. Mus. Novit., no. 1172:
1-5, figs. 1-15. 1942.
Wesenserc-LunD, E. Polychaetes of the Iranian
Gulf. Danish Scientific Investigations, Iran,
pt. 4: 247-400, 47 figs. 1949.
Milton Abramowwits
With the sudden death of Mitton ABRAMO-
witz of a heart attack on July 5, 1958, a great
loss was felt by family, friends, community, and
scientific world. His life was a marked departure
from the so-called ivy-tower existence.
Born in 1915 to Phillip and Rose Abramowitz,
he attended preparatory schools in New York.
His bachelor and master’s degrees as well as
a gold medal for excellence in mathematics were
awarded by Brooklyn College. At its inception,
he started work with the Mathematical Tables
Project, the scientific program of which was
sponsored by the National Bureau of Standards,
and at night continued his studies for his
doctorate, which was granted in 1948 by New
York University. As a member of the Mathe-
matical Tables Project he saw a total of about
32 volumes published as an aid to the scientific
world. During this time, he became interested
in the application of commercial machines of
every type to scientific computing. This interest
did not waver in his lifetime. Starting with
adding and accounting machines then available,
he became interested in the application of the
most advanced electronic digital computing ma-
chines. At the time of his death he was chief
of the Computation Laboratory of the National
Bureau of Standards, eagerly awaiting newer
and faster machines.
In addition to the volumes published under
the auspices of the Mathematical Table Proj-
ect, he published many scientific papers and
was influential in the publication of a large
number of the 52 volumes of the Applied Mathe-
matics Series, of the National Bureau of Stand-
ards. During the war years, he was on loan
to the U. 8. Navy Hydrographic office. As a
result of his efforts and his interest in machine
computation, the many volumes of Loran tables
made their appearance. For his work, he was
awarded the Meritorious Civilian Service Award
by the United States Navy.
While working, he continued his teaching
activities as a member of the staff of Brooklyn
College and on his transfer to Washington in
1950, on the staff of the American University
and the University of Maryland. His students
could be found conferring with him at all
hours of the day or night. The door to his office
was open at all times to all those with a problem
to solve. His efforts were unsparing in aiding
students, colleagues and staff members. He en-
couraged continued schooling, obtaining of ad-
vanced degrees and the writing of scientific
papers. His knowledge was eagerly imparted
tonal’
With all this scientific activity, he found time
for marriage and family life. He was the devoted
husband of Lillian Abramowitz and proud
father of Barbara and Edward. Evenings, he
could be found enjoying the latest plays, or
playing chess or pingpong, in addition to over-
seeing the children’s homework and caring for
their fish, parakeet, duck, or neighbor’s dog.
His sports interests covered football, basketball,
and baseball. He was an avid reader of historical
works, poetry, and biographies as well as de-
tective stories and westerns. His interest in
gardening extended from vegetables to peren-
nials. Community projects found him eager to
lend a helping hand—bond drives, blood dona-
tions, scout activities, parent-teacher meetings,
neighborhood improvements, religious education
of children. Even do-it-yourself kits found their
way into his home.
He possessed an amazingly retentive memory
not only for scientific facts but also for people
and places. His early interest in mathematical
tables and special functions of mathematics and
physics led him to the preparation of a hand-
book of mathematical functions, under the
sponsorship of the National Science Foundation.
As planned under his direction, the volume is
to contain about 28 chapters with formulas,
tables, and graphs of the elementary trans-
cendental functions as well as the higher func-
tions. He himself had already prepared the
chapters on Struve functions, Coulomb wave
functions, and elementary analytical methods,
and was working on the chapter of spheroidal
wave functions at the time of his death. He had
contributed to the planning of almost all the
other chapters in the volume. He felt that the
wide dissemination of such a handbook among
high school and college students would inspire
many to scientific careers as well as aid those
already working in this field.
Let us hope that his endeavors will bear fruit
manyfold.
vou. 48, No. 8
Aveust 1958
IWAI: LUMINOUS ORGAN OF AN APOGONID
267
ICHTHYOLOGY .—A study of the luminous organ of the apogonid fish Siphamia
versicolor (Smith and Radcliffe). Tamorsu Iwai, Kyoto University, Maizuru,
Japan. (Communicated by Ernest A. Lachner.)
(Received June 27, 1958)
The luminous organs of fish have re-
ceived much attention and have been re-
viewed comprehensively by Harvey (1957,
p. 345). Despite the fact that the luminous
behavior of large numbers of both elasmo-
branch and teleostean species has been re-
ported, the data available on the luminous
organs of apogonid fishes are sparse and
inadequate. The first information on a lu-
minous apogonid was made by Kato (1947,
p. 195). He found that Apogon marginatus
Jordan and Snyder possesses three organs
on the bend of the intestine and on either
side of the rectum immediately before the
anus. Iwai and Asano (1958, in press)
found similar luminous organs on Apogon
elliott Day, and concluded that the nominal
species A. marginatus is identical with and
predated by A. ellioti. This was the only
species of apogonid known to possess lu-
minous organs until the silvery gland of
Suphamia was suspected.
Siphamia, a genus of the family Apo-
gonidae, is characterized by having a sil-
very gland extending from the isthmus to
the lower corner of the caudal peduncle
along the ventral contour of the body
(Weber and de Beaufort, 1929, p. 356;
Schultz, 1940, p. 404; Lachner, 1953, p.
413). The general appearance of this gland
resembles the luminous organs found in
certain other fish, e.g. Paratrachichthys
prosthemius Jordan and Fowler, but no at-
tempt has been made to clarify the func-
tion of this remarkable structure. Knowl-
edge of whether this structure has relation
to luminescence is desirable, for such in-
formation would give us a better under-
standing of the relationships and classifi-
cation of the luminous apogonids with
other members of the family. The author
had the privilege of examining some speci-
mens of Siphamia versicolor (Smith and
Radcliffe) through the courtesy of Dr.
Ernest A. Lachner of the United States
National Museum. The present communi-
cation consists of observations on _ this
material.
The author is indebted to Prof. Kiyo-
matsu Matsubara, under whose direction
the present work was undertaken. Grateful
acknowledgment is made to Dr. Ernest A.
Lachner for his critical reading of the
manuscript.
The study material consisted of three
specimens, U.S.N.M. no. 112269, measuring
20.0-24.5 mm in standard length. These
were collected from Cataingan Bay, Mas-
bate, Philippines, on April 18, 1908, by
the Albatross Expedition. Of these one
specimen was dissected and the lower por-
tion of the body was serially sectioned by
the usual paraffin method at a standard
thickness of 10 micra. The serials were
stained with Mayer’s hemalum and eosin.
For comparison, one specimen of the
luminous berycoid, Paratrachichthys pros-
themius Jordan and Fowler, which has a
subcutaneous striated band along the lower
surface of the body somewhat like S. versi-
color, was also sectioned.
All drawings were made by camera
lucida tracing, although the detailed struc-
tures were diagrammatized.
RESULTS
Siphamia versicolor is a small species
attaining a standard length of approxi-
mately 30 mm and appears to be an en-
demic form to the Philippine Archipelago.
The body is deep and compressed, the ratio
of depth and width to the standard length
being 2.1-2.4 and 4.6-5.4, respectively. The
head is remarkably large, its ratio to the
standard length being 2.1-2.5. The ground
color in alcohol is dusky silver with three
longitudinal brown stripes. The uppermost
stripe begins on the tip of the snout and
runs posteriorly along the dorsal contour
of the body to the caudal peduncle. The
second one extends from the tip of the
snout through the eye to the caudal base.
The lowermost one originates on the upper
edge of the maxillary and extends back-
wards passing through the pectoral base
to the ventral corner of the caudal pe-
268
duncle. Along the ventral border of the
third stripe a curious silvery band lies be-
tween the isthmus and the caudal peduncle.
On the ventral aspect the band originates
on either side of the brownish midline-
keel of the isthmus, and extends and ex-
pands on each side posteriorly to the base
of the ventral fin. At this level the band is
ereatest in width: it occupies a wide area
between the lower edge of the pectoral base
and the midline of the belly. From there
it extends posteriorly in parallel branches,
one on each side, and each tapers gradually
to the rear at the ventroposterior corner
of the caudal peduncle (Fig. 1).
Histologic#l examination revealed that
this band is the longitudinal muscle bundles
lying just beneath the dermis. They are
sheathed with an extraordinarily developed
epimysium which is composed of opaque
fibrous connective tissue (Fig. 2, A, B, C,
mb and fs). The microscopic feature of this
sheath is essentially the same as the re-
flector-like structure mentioned below. Ex-
ternally, the muscle bundles are lined with
thin layers of the dermis and epidermis
enclosing the imbricated scales.
Structural evidence of these muscle
bundles is quite similar to that of Para-
trachichthys prosthemius, though the epi-
mysium of the latter species is more
densely dotted with melanophores. In his
work on the luminous organ of P. prosthe-
mius, Haneda (1957, p. 18) gave the
name ‘filiform body” to the muscle bun-
dles lying posterior to the base of the
ventral fin and “keel muscle” to those
lying anterior to the ventral base. He con-
cluded that these structures take charge
of diffusion of the light emitted from the
luminous organ.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 48, No. 8
Within the body wall and immediately
before the base of the ventral fin, there
extends a curious organ which is composed
of three distinct elements. The striking and
perhaps most functional element is a com-
pact mass of polyhedral cells lying in the
middle layer of the organ. The mass itself
is small, bean-like in shape (Fig. 1, lo).
It measures 2.0 mm in length, 1.4 mm in
width, and 0.25 mm in thickness in a
specimen measuring 24.0 mm in standard
length. The cells, forming the mass, are
somewhat long and polyhedral and are
packed together, not arranged in a row.
The cytoplasm of each cell is filled with
eranular secretion stained deeply by eosin.
The blood supply is evidently connected
with the base of the mass.
Dorsally, the main structure mentioned
above is wholly covered by an opaque
stratum of fibrous connective tissue (Fig.
2, rf). This layer is comparatively thick,
it being as thick as the mass structure, and
occasionally dotted with melanophores. Its
dorsal surface is exposed to the abdominal
cavity and it is recognized as a white
marking. This structure is virtually the
same as the reflector of the luminous organ
of Apogon ellioti (Iwai and Asano, in
press). The fact that this layer covers the
proximal edge of the organ like a cap
would lead one to suppose that it may act
as a reflector of light as is the case with
the luminous organs of some fishes.
The third element, a well-defined, thick
layer, is composed of a pair of longitudinal
muscle bundles, and is located on the ven-
tral side of the main structure. The cross
section of these bundles is roughly ellip-
tical in shape (Fig. 2, le). The amange-
ment and general feature of these muscle
Fig. 1—Ventral aspect of Siphamia versicolor, showing longitudinal muscle bundles (mb) and posi-
tion of luminous organ (lo); an, anus.
Avuaeust 1958 IWAI: LUMINOUS
A Gil
°
e °
. e
ei Wanen Scoala e
aod °
SS
ALY Aaa
ISOM AnAlC
Sora ;
ae
ORGAN OF AN APOGONID
a
269
lo
9) en y
g
Fig. 2.—Transverse sections of lower portion of the body of Siphamia versicolor at levels indicated
in Fig. | as a, b, and c.: fs, fibrous sheath; in, intestine; le, lens; lo, luminous organ; mb, longitudinal
muscle bundle; pg, pelvic girdle; rf, reflector; s, scale.
bundles resemble the lens of the luminous
organ of Acropoma japonicum noted by
Haneda (1950, p. 218). The pelvic girdle
is inserted between these muscle bundles
and the aforementioned keel muscle.
In evaluating the results of the dissec-
tion, it seems highly probable that the mass
structure of polyhedral cells lying above
the pelvic girdle would be a luminous organ
(Fig. 2, lo). Neither an opening to out-
side of the body nor a connection to the
alimentary canal is present in this lumi-
nous organ. Photogenesis of this species,
therefore, appears to be intracellular. The
polyhedral cells with a granular secretion
would be photogenic cells.
DISCUSSION
No definite decision in regard to the
function of the curious organ in Siphamia
versicolor is tenable, since no physiological
result 1s available. However, it may be of
value to provide a brief outline of sugges-
tive evidence obtained by the microscopic
anatomy. This may form a basis for inter-
preting the possible function of this organ.
Insofar as it was observed, the mass struc-
ture bears, like the luminous organs of some
other fishes, peculiar accessory structures
such as: (1) a reflectorlike structure of fi-
brous connective tissue, (2) longitudinal
muscle bundles which may serve as a lens,
and (3) longitudinal muscle bundles with
fibrous sheath lying along the ventral con-
tour of the body. These structures as well
as the position of the mass structure in the
abdominal body wall, imply the possibility
of the luminous function of this organ.
Haneda (1957, p. 19), in making observa-
tions with living material of P. prosthemius,
reported that by means of mechanical stim-
ulation of the luminous organ situated near
the anus, the luminescence occurs along
the keel muscle and the filiform body. The
latter two structures are equivalent to the
longitudinal muscle bundles lying on the
ventral margin of the body of Siphamia.
This supports further the above mentioned
postulation.
Lachner (19538, p. 413)
wrote that the
270
subcutaneous glands form a hollow canal.
This study indicates that these are longi-
tudinal muscle bundles covered by the stra-
tum of fibrous connective tissue.
There is an urgent need for examination
of living specimens assigned to Siphamia
in order to confirm their luminescence. This
structure is sufficiently distinct to char-
acterize the genus Siphamia, as was pointed
out by various authors.
Fowler (1938, p. 40) proposed a new sub-
eeneric name, Aulotrachichthys, for the
deep-sea berycoids, Paratrachichthys latus,
and P. prosthemius, based on the subcu-
taneous striated tubes of the lower body
surface. Haneda (1957, p. 19) pointed out
that these tubes consist of the muscle bun-
dles and serve as an accessory structure of
the luminous organ.
The luminous organ of S. versicolor
agrees in both its position at the thoracic
region and the accessory muscles bundles
with that of P. prosthemius, but it is prob-
ably neither homologous nor analogous
with that of the latter species. The funda-
mental differences between them are exem-
plified in other structures. The luminous
organ of Siphamia consists of a compact
mass of polyhedral cells with granular cyto-
plasm and lacks openings to the outside of
the body or to the alimentary canal,
whereas the organ of Paratrachichthys
comprises ramified ducts surrounding the
anus and has openings to the exterior. Pho-
togenesis appears to be intracellular in the
former species in contrast to the luminous
bacteria of the latter species.
The luminous organ of S. versicolor also
differs from that of the luminous apogonid,
Apogon elliot. The latter species possesses
three luminous bodies composed of colum-
nar cells with eosinophil secretions located
on the second bend of the intestine and on
either side of the rectum immediately be-
fore the anus. Each opens into the intes-
tine (Kato: 1947, p. 195; Iwai and Asano:
1958, in press).
In view of the marked peculiarity shown
in the luminous organ, it is conceivable that
not only the differentiation of the muscle
bundles but also other structural evidence
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 48, No. 8
of the luminous organ are enough to sub-
stantiate the generic position of Sxphamaia.
SUMMARY
1. Siphamia versicolor (Smith and Rad-
cliffe) possesses a curious organ within the
body wall immediately before the base of
the ventral fin, which is probably lumines-
cent.
2. The organ is lined dorsally with a
structure like a reflector and ventrally with
a structure like a lens. Photogenesis ap-
pears to be intracellular.
3. The silvery gland lying along the ven-
tral contour of the body is composed of
longitudinal muscle bundles sheathed with
a fine stratum of fibrous connective tissue.
This may act as an important element to
diffuse the light emitted from the luminous
organ.
LITERATURE CITED
Fow.er, Henry W. Descriptions of new fishes ob-
tained by the United States Bureau of Fish-
eries steamer Albatross, chiefly in Philippine
seas and adjacent waters. Proc. U. 8S. Nat.
Mus. 85: 31-135, 56 figs. 1938.
Hanepa, Yata. Luminous organs of fish which
emit light indirectly. Pacific Sci. 4 (3): 214-
227, 6 figs. 1950.
_ Observations on luminescence in the deep
sea fish, Paratrachichthys prosthemius. Sci.
Rep. Yokosuka City Mus. (2): 15-22, 3 figs.,
Lepla toa
Harvey, E. Newton. The luminous organs of
fishes. In The physiology of fishes, vol. 2, Be-
havior: 345-366, 5 figs. (M. E. Brown, ed.)
New York, 1957.
Iwa1, Tamotsu, and Asano, Hirorosui. On the
luminous cardinal fish, Apogon ellioti Day.
Sci. Rep. Yokosuka City Mus. (3): 4 figs.
(In press.)
Kato, Kosiro. A new type of luminous organ of
fish. (In Japanese.) Zool. Mag. 57 (12): 195-
198, 4 figs. 1947.
LacHner, Ernest A. Family Apogonidae. In Fishes
of the Marshall and Marianas Islands, vol. 1,
Families from Asymmetrontidae through
Siganidae. (L. P. Scuuttz, ed.) U. S. Nat.
Mus. Bull. 202: 412-498, 16 figs. 1953.
ScHuttz, Leonarp P. Two new genera and three
new species of cheilodipterid fishes, with
notes on the other genera of the family. Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus. 88: 403-423, 2 figs. 1940.
Weser, Max, and pve Beaurort, L. F. The fishes
of the Indo-Australian Archipelago. vol. 5.
Anacanthini, Allotriognatht, Heterosomata,
Berycomorphi, Percomorphi: xiv + 458 pp.,
98 figs. Leiden, 1929.
Aveust 1958 ENERGY DISTRIBUTIONS AND TEMPERATURE DETERMINATIONS IN FLAME 271
~ENERGY DISTRIBUTIONS AND TEMPERATURE
DETERMINATIONS IN FLAMES
The National Bureau of Standards is con-
ducting a program of basic research, sponsored
by the Air Research and Development Com-
mand, on the physical and chemical processes
occurring in flames and other high-temperature
gases. In this work spectroscopic methods are
employed to observe hot gases in both flames
and electrical discharges. The data thus ob-
tained are proving useful not only in reaching
a better understanding of the combustion proc-
ess but also in the development of accurate
spectroscopic methods for measuring high tem-
peratures. In addition, the program provides
information on atoms and free radicals which
is applicable to upper atmosphere chemistry
and physics, and chemical kinetics.
When present methods of temperature meas-
urement are applied to certain systems of hot
gases, several different temperatures are ob-
tained. These temperatures must be related to
the Thermodynamic or International Temper-
ature Scales before valid thermodynamic cal-
culations are possible. Detailed spectroscopic
studies on well-controlled systems are thus
needed to provide the basic information re-
quired in this area.
In measuring flame temperatures spectro-
scopically, molecular distributions are calcula-
ted from observed spectral intensities and com-
pared with distributions predicted theoretically
for certain temperatures. For the distribution
calculations the relative intensities of a group
of related spectral lines emitted or absorbed
by the flame are first measured. Then from
these relative intensity values and the known
values for the probabilities of emission or ab-
sorption of radiation, the numbers of molecules
in the various energy levels given rise to
spectral lines are determined.
The experimentally observed distribution
may also be compared with distributions pre-
dicted theoretically for a range of equilibrium
temperature values. If a certain temperature
can be found which has a theoretical distribu-
tion agreeing with the observed one, then this
is the temperature associated with the levels
under study; or when the flame is substantially
in equilibrium, the temperature of the flame as
a whole. However, the observed distribution
doen not always correspond to any temperature
value.” Even if it does, a parallel investigation
of another group of energy levels in the same
system may give a different temperature.
In using the observed distribution of mol-
ecules in the possible energy states to study
rate processes and equilibrium conditions, three
general types of behavior are found. Essentially
they differ in the amount of interaction, or
coupling, between the various groups of energy
states in the system being observed. Examples
of each type are discussed below.
STRONG INTERACTION
The simplest case is complete equilibrium.
Here all the observed energy levels correspond
to the same temperature, so that the measure-
ments constitute a reliable temperature deter-
mination. An example of this situation is a
recent investigation of the emission spectrum
of iron atoms added to a hydrogen-oxygen
flame.” Here the intensity distribution in the
emission spectrum corresponds to a temperature
of 2845°K. The temperature determined from
the emission spectra of OH radicals in the
flame is 2770°K, which is also the temperature
determined from the corresponding absorption
measurements. The temperature calculated from
the known energy release in the flame is
3100°K. The approximate agreement of these
values indicates that the flame is essentially
in equilibrium, that the several groups of energy
levels have interacted strongly enough to come
to the same temperature. Here the observed
distributions do not depend on the details of
the excitation process.
NO INTERACTION
A second, quite different type of behavior is
found in observing the OH radical emission
spectrum in the reaction zone of an acetylene-
oxygen flame.* Under certain conditions ob-
servations reveal an abnormal rotational dis-
*See Incomplete equilibrium and temperature
measurement, by C. M. Herzretp, Journ. Washing-
ton Acad. Sci. 46: 269. 1956.
*Spectroscomc study of electronic flame tem-
peratures and energy distributions, by H. P. Brora
and K. E. SHuter, Journ. Chem. Phys. 27:
1957.
* Rotational temperatures of diluted flames, by
W. R. Kane and H. P. Broma, Journ. Chem. Phys.
21: 237. 1953
933.
272
tribution in the electronically excited state,
corresponding to a temperature approaching
10,000°K. However, the heat released in burn-
ing is sufficient to produce an equilibrium
temperature no higher than 2,000°K. Results
of this kind have been a puzzling contradiction
for some time, since molecules which have
such an excess of rotational energy are known
to lose this excess quickly in collisions with
ether gas molecules at a lower temperature.
Why there seems to be no interaction between
the abnormally populated rotational levels and
other groups of energy levels in the system has
not been understood.
This contradiction has now been resolved by
the following considerations.» ° The observed
electronically excited OH molecules are origi-
nally formed with a large excess of rotational
energy. If this excess is to show up in the
spectrum, the molecules must radiate before
they have undergone enough collisions with
other molecules in the flame gases to bring
their energy back to normal. A study of the
fluorescence of these OH radicals in flames has
shown that this electronic excitation energy is
lost at almost every collision, so that the ex-
cited molecules do not live long enough in the
flame to undergo the number of collisions—
approximately 10—which are necessary to affect
their rotational energy. Changing conditions in
the flame cannot change the distribution unless
they affect the excitation process itself.
In the experiments bearing on this point, an
acetylene-oxygen flame burning at a few thou-
sandths of an atmosphere pressure is illumi-
nated by an intense source of light. This hght
is absorbed by the OH radicals in the burnt
gas. If there were no deactivating collisions,
all of the light absorbed would be re-radiated
as fluorescence. However, the fluorescence is
found to be much weaker than expected. There-
* Fluorescence and average lifetime of OH? *
in flames, by H. P. Broma and T. Carrineton,
Journ. Chem. Phys. 23: 2202. 1955.
> Electronic quenching of OH*Z* in flames, and
its significance in the interpretation of rotational
relaxation, by T. Carrincton. (To be submitted
to Journ. Chem. Phys.)
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, No. 8
fore, most of the energy is lost in deactivating
collisions, which must have a high efficiency.
PARTIAL INTERACTION
In the third possible type of behavior, the
interaction between the several groups of energy
levels is only partial, rather than being almost
complete as in the hydrogen-oxygen flame, or
non-existent as in the abnormal OH spectrum
mentioned above. In this intermediate case the
distribution of molecules in the accessible en-
ergy levels, and therefore the apparent tem-
perature, is affected by molecular collisions.
These collisions tend to adjust the observed
distribution to a form consistent with the dis-
tributions in other groups of energy levels and
with the total energy content of the system.
A theoretical treatment of certain processes of
this type has recently been completed’ and
relevant experimental data have been obtained
from atomic flame and afterglow systems.” *
Obtaining such data is complicated by the dif-
ficulty in distinguishing between changes in an
observed distribution due to changes in the ex-
citation process, and changes in the distribution
due to collisions following excitation. With these
problems in mind, studies are being made of
the spectra emitted when nitrogen atoms react
with introgen and oxygen molecules and with
simple organic molecules. Such studies have
shown, for example, the rotational distribution
of electronically-excited CN radicals to be so
strikingly affected by pressure increases that
only at high pressures can a well determined
temperature be assigned to this group of energy
levels.
5 Studies on nonequilibrium rate process. I.
The relaxation of a system of harmonic oscil-
lators, by E. W. Montrott and K. H. SHULER,
Journ. Chem. Phys. 26: 454. 1957.
7 Spectra of afterglows and discharges from
nitrogen-ozygen mixtures, by U. H. Kurzwee,
A. M. Bass, and H. P. Brompa, Journ. Mol. Spec.
1: 184. 1957.
§ Emission spectra from mixtures of atomic
nitrogen and organic substances, by N. H. Kress
and H. P. Bromwa. (To be delivered at 7th
International Symposium on Combustion, London,
England, Aug. 1958.)
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
imasonhical society of Washington... ). 0.0.00. 6s ceca ead eecdecescuscveee. L. Marton
Anthropological Society of Washington......................c.000-. FRANK M. SETZLER
Bralpeical Society of Washington™.............0.0.0600.ccceecneeee HERBERT FRIEDMANN
S@iearesl society of Washington... ...-... 2... 602... okt oo eve ce cccabene. W. W. WaLton
Hntomolozical Society of Washington. .........0....00.6.6.ececcceee Haroup H. SHEPARD
PamenamGeographic Society.......6.. 6006 o oe ek doce ee oes ALEXANDER WETMORE
Geolezical Society of Washington. ..............00.0000cbs ees cele le. Louts W. CuRRIER
Medical society of the District of Columbia................:......-.. FREDERICK O. CoE
MeanitiotaullistOrical SOCLebY! . .-.3s2 os. ends Hal oe ova cece pele cect ecka ca ece: U.S. Grant, 3p
Baisureal society of Washington......... 0.056.006. 0ceccecccccucceccees CaRROLL E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters..................... Furppo GRAVATT
Washimegton Society of Hngineers...............600ccceccseeccs ences HERBERT G. DoRSEY
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers..... JoHN HowarpD Park
Helminthological Society of Washington......................... Donatp B. McMvuLien
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists................. BERNICE E\ppY
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers................ JOHN O’ KEEFE
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers......................... Harry WELLS
National Capital Section, American Society of Civil Engineers.....,..... D. E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine.......... WILuir W. Smit
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. HERBERT C. VACHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research...... W. T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society......................-.. JEROME NAMIAS
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers....... Bate
CONTENTS
Page
PuiLosopHy.—On scientist and theologian? Lro Francis Kocu...... 252
Mycotocy.—Some new or rare Discomycetes from South America.
Borre Ki CASH Og oo a BE or — 256
ZooLocy.—A new Eulithobius, with a key to the known American species
(Chilopoda: Lithobiidae). RautpH E. CRaABILL, Jr............... 260
ZooLogy.—A new nereid worm from Warm Mineral Springs, Fla., with
a review of the genus Nicon Kinberg. OuGA HARTMAN........... 263
IcuTHYOLOGY.—A study of the luminous organ of the apogonid fish
Siphamia versicolor (Smith and Radcliffe). Tamorsu Iwal....... 267
NotTeEes AND NEWS:
Academy opens headquarters office................. 5 33eee 249
Life. history .of meadowlark....)......0....... “See oe 200
Worm behavior, 200) ol ee. Se 255
Milton Abramowitz (1915-1958)... ......0......25. 2 ee 266
Energy distributions and temperature determinations in flames 271
7
. \ / a 4
VOLUME 48 September 1958 NUMBER 9
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
AN
| Jeeceteteeceercete
MANA
(ota ae on p=
Published Monthly by the
ee INGTON ACAD EM Y OF S Gat EON’ C. ES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuester H. Paasz, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RonaLD Bamrorp, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonp, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JourNaL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type- |
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 33/4 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the JouR-
NAL or the PROCEEDINGS should be sent to Haraup A. RespER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL Per Year... ....-:.>25---- eee $7 .50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*..............-- — —
Vol. 11 to vel. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 —. Cee
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
-* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available |
for sale to libraries at $393.50. ;
Monoeraru No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS..........----+---+++++++5- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete..............--+-+-++++-- ... $25.00
Single volumes, unbound..... Zo lie oy Uae MCAS is sese desees aR ie isis I gener 2.00
Single mumbers.- 4346 -5..€- SE 59es 323: EE os Me OEE Sn on SE Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘“‘Washington Academy of Sciences” and
a to the Treasurer, H. S. RappLeye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
. Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949. ;
JOU ON Ate
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vo.. 48
September 1958
No. 9
PHYSICS.—The electrostatic field and the symmetry of snowflakes. Roaup A
SCHRACK, Washington, D.C. (Communicated by C. H. Page.)
(Received July 25, 1958)
The symmetry of snowflakes has long
evoked admiration and awe. Several theories
have been advanced to account for snow-
flake production, but they are inadequate
to explain the observed high degree of
symmetry.t:* This paper presents a new
theory that attempts to account for both
the observed symmetry of individual snow-
flakes and their infinite variation. It is not
a complete theory of snowflake develop-
ment, since it does not consider those en-
vironmental conditions which control the
rate of snowflake growth and type of snow
crystal formed. A thermodynamic analysis
of the snow ecrystal’s growth in its environ-
ment would be necessary to form a complete
theory. Work in this field has been done by
others. * The theory presented is based
on the observations of Nakaya in his com-
prehensive study of snow crystals.1
The snowflake is an oblate snow crystal
whose most commonly observed form has
symmetry corresponding to the two-dimen-
sional group De—i.e., it has sixfold rota-
tional symmetry and reflection about each
dendrite. Occasionally snowflakes possess-
ing symmetry corresponding to the groups
Dz, D3, and Die (ie., two-, three-, and
twelvefold rotational symmetry and reflec-
tion about each dendrite, respectively) are
observed, but they are variants of the more
common Dg variety. Many other varieties
of snow crystals have been catalogued, and
a correlation between the variety and en-
vironmental conditions existing at the time
of their formation has been observed.
*Snow crystals, natural and artificial, Ukichiro
Nakaya, Harvard University Press, 1954.
*Mason, B. J., Snow crystals, natural and arti-
ficial, Endeavor 10(40): 205. October 1951.
The keystone of the theory presented in
this paper is that the rotational symmetry
of the snowflake is maintained throughout
its growth by means of its electrostatic
field, which arises from a charge distributed
over the surface of the snowflake. The snow
crystal is assumed to be a relatively poor
conductor (having a relaxation time of
about 10~® seconds). It attains its charge
by the collection of ions generated in the
atmosphere by cosmic ray bombardment.*
The sign and magnitude of the charge on
the snowflake probably vary greatly during
its growth period (which may be several
hours long). The sign of the charge is im-
material, but the magnitude controls the
strength of several essential processes in
the snowflake’s growth. Only those snow
crystals that develop under the special con-
ditions that allow the charge on the crystal
to play the dominant role in the symmetri-
cal growth process will be considered in this
paper. The majority of snow crystals are
thus excluded: the highly symmetrical type
forms only a minority of all snow crystals
observed. Irregular snow crystals, having
no symmetry, are formed when the environ-
mental conditions are unfavorable to the
special temperature, electrical, and water
vapor requirements that favor the sym-
metrical development.
The snowflake acquires water for its
growth in two ways; both are influenced by
the electrostatic field. The first method
is that of water vapor accretion. This
method is based on the interaction of the
water vapor molecule with the electrostatie
“Gunn, R. Electrification of precipitation and
thunderstorms, Proc. Inst. Radio Eng., 45(10):
1331. October, 1957.
73
SMITHSONIAN
INSTITUTION NOV 7 = 4958
274
field of the snowflake. The water vapor
molecule may be either neutral or charged.
The neutral molecule will always be at-
tracted because of the interaction of the
large dipole moment of the water molecule
and the electrostatic field* The charged
molecule will be attracted or repelled de-
pending on the relative signs of the charge
of the snowflake and the molecule. Water
droplet accretion is the second method
of growth. The water droplet may also be
either neutral or charged. Neutral droplets
may be acquired through the induced-dipole
interaction with the electrostatic field of the
snowflake or by direct collision. Charged
droplets will be attracted or repelled depend-
ing on the relative signs of the snowflake
and the droplet.
The suggested development of the snow-
flake will now be traced. The snowflake
probably starts as a small right hexagonal
prism of ice (about 0.001 mm in size) car-
rying an electric charge. At this stage, the
water vapor molecule mode of accretion is
probably most important because OF whe
small geometrical cross section of the snow-
flake that presents itself for collision with
water droplets, which are also about 0.001
mm in size. The forces on the molecule are
greatest where the radius of curvature of
the snowflake is smallest. Water vapor
molecules are thus selectively attracted to
the edges of the crystal. The water diffuses
over the surface to an extent dependent on
the temperature and the migration-inducing
forces.
A neutral snow crystal would be expected
to grow as a hexagonal prism, in conformity
with crystal forces. The charge on the snow-
flake causes an additional factor to enter.
The snowflake as a charged conductor has
energy residing in its associated electro-
static field and will grow in such a manner
that its electrostatic energy is as low as
possible, with minor corrections due to
crystal forces. The oblate form of the snow-
flake has a lower electrostatic energy as-
sociated with it than the prism form and
thus the prism form is unstable.
In certain cases, however, the snowflake
*Pout, H. A. The motion and precipitation of
suspenoids in divergent electric fields. Journ. Appl.
Phys. 22 (7): 869. July 1951.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vot. 48, No. 9
may develop as a prism until it is about
0.06 mm in size. Nakaya observes that at
about this point the crystal will develop
‘two observable hexagonal end plates. Only
rarely will both plates compete successfully
for the available water vapor and grow
equally, leading to the rare snowflakes with
Di. symmetry.
Usually, the snowflake will not grow very
long in the unstable prism form, but will
quickly assume the lower energy oblate
form of the hexagonal plate. It will grow as
a hexagonal plate as long as the surface
diffusion process is dominated by the erystal
forces. The electrical field, however, induces
surface migration toward the vertices (op-
posite to the direction of migration caused
by the crystal forces).? Also, the water
vapor is electrically attracted to the verti-
ces. These factors will act to cause the
snowflake to begin to grow dendrites at each
of its six vertices.
The snowflake now consists of a hexagonal
center plate with six dendrites radiating
from the vertices. While the tips of the
dendrites will still grow by electrostatic
interaction, the main process of accretion
is probably now collision with water drop-
lets. Nakaya observed that under conditions
of snowflake production the droplet does not
freeze where it contacts the snowflake. The
charge content of the droplet distributes
itself over the snowflake rapidly. Ii the
thermodynamic conditions are favorable,
the water content will have time to dis-
tribute itself in such a manner as to achieve
a configuration with the lowest potential
energy consistent with the snowflake’s
electrostatic field before it freezes. This dis-
tribution is another aspect of the electro-
statically induced surface migration.®
Water collected as droplets or vapor at
the interior of the snowflake will, under
the influence of the electrostatic field, mi-
erate to the nearest dendrite edge. An addi-
tional aspect of the electrostatic field now
acts to maintain the symmetry of the den-
_ ° Field-induced | surface migration is discussed
in the review article by W. P. Dyke and W. W.
Dolan, “Field Emission” appearing in Advances
in Electronics and Electron Physics 8. 1956.
° Pout, H. A. Some effects of nonuniform fields
of dielectrics. Journ. Appl. Phys. 29 (8): 1182.
Aug. 1958.
SEPTEMBER 1958 SCHRACK:
dritic structure. The water as a high di-
electric liquid is acted upon by electrostric-
tive forces arising from the electrostatic
field configuration of the snowflake. The
fluid will migrate when there are forces that
are tangential to the surface of the liquid.
The edges of the dendrites are acted upon
not only by their own charge distribution
but also by that of all the other dendrite
edges. (On the Dg snowflake there are 12
such edges to consider.) The tangential
forces on one dendrite edge arising from the
charge distribution on another dendrite
edge will be at a minimum when the adja-
cent edges are symmetrical in shape with
respect to a reflection axis half way between
them. The best symmetry is always achieved
on an individual dendrite, with the center
of the dendrite serving as the symmetry re-
flection axis. The radial bisector of the space
between any two dendrites serves as another
symmetry reflection axis. (There are a total
of 12 symmetry reflection axes for the Dg
snowflake. )
Thus, any out-of-symmetry addition to
the pattern on any dendrite will perturb the
electrostatic field and create tangential elec-
trostrictive forces which will cause the du-
plication of the addition in subsequent
growth of the other dendrites. Of course,
no single dendrite has a unique controlling
influence; the process of perturbation and
Gompencation is carried on continually on
all dendrites.
The electrostatic field does not act to
maintain equal length of the dendrites, but
a uniform supply of water to all the den-
drites will do so. If, however, the dendrites
ELECTROSTATIC FIELD AND SYMMETRY OF SNOWFLAKES 275
attain unequal radii, the electrostatic field
acts to attain a lower order of symmetry.
This action accounts for the occasional ob-
servance of Ds and Ds symmetry in snow-
flakes.
The infinite variety of snowflakes is
caused by the random accretion of water on
the dendrites in the atmosphere.
Admittedly, much research must be done
to test the different aspects of this theory
of snowflake production. It should be
pointed out that the general mechanism of
snowflake production as outlined above can-
not be tested by growing crystals of hexag-
onal symmetry from solutions because of
the absence in these situations of the all-
important role played by the electrostatic
field.
Summary.—The basic assertion of the
theory here presented is that the electro-
static field of the charged snow crystal has
a controlling influence on the shape of the
crystal during its growth. The influence of
the electrostatic field is exerted through
field-induced surface migration, which
causes symmetrical growth as the continu-
ous lowest energy state. The theory takes
into account the observed variations in sign
and magnitude of the charge on snowflakes.
The mode of development of snowflakes
having shape symmetry corresponding to
the two-dimensional rotation group Dg, as
well as to the less commonly observed Dp ,
Ds, and Dy» shapes, is indicated. The in-
finite variety of symmetrical forms is seen
as resulting from the random nature of
water accretion by the flake.
It is advisable here to make a remark which ought to be well considered
by hasty observers. When a purely speculative discovery is announced
to the public, it cannot be done with too much prudence. No one is obliged
to discover either a planet, a comet, or a satellite; and whoever makes a
mistake in such a case exposes himself justly to the derision of the mass —
From JULES VERNE’s Around the Moon.
276
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 48, No. 9
MATHEMATICS.—A new characterization of group. HowaRD CAMPAIGNE, Amer-
ican University.
(Received August 26, 1958)
V. V. Vagner has defined an “inverse
semigroup” to be a semigroup for which
for each element a there is a unique simul-.
axa = a
rax = x
Since any solution to the single equation
axa = a implies a simultaneous solution to
the two, it is a temptation to try to define
the concept in terms of this single equation.
To merely say it has a solution is too weak.
To say it has a unique solution is too strong,
for then the semigroup becomes a group.
It is not possible to. state Vagner’s concept
in terms of the one equation.
But the last observation is interesting in
itself and gives a definition for group which
is more compact than the standard one. It
is: A group G is a set of elements a, 0, c, ---
such that
I. It is a semigroup.
Il. For each element a in G there is a
unique element x in G such that axa = a.
To prove that this is equivalent to the
usual definition, refer to page 16 of Car-
michael. It is easily verified that the set
described there satisfies the two conditions
taneous solution to the equations
above. To prove the converse note that the
element ax is idempotent, axax = ax. Now
examine the element y = vax; notice that
aya = axata = ara = a, so that by the
uniqueness of II y = xax = x. Consider any
idempotent e, e2 = e; the subset eGe 1s
closed under multiplication, and an element
Sis im eGe 1 and only 1 es — se—asem or
any element g we have ege = a is in eGe.
Let x be the inverse of this a, ava = a; then
t= tar = xeger = xox so taaumoyeuie
uniqueness of II g = a = ege is in eGe, and
it follows that eGe = G. If f is an idem-
potent then ef = | —-fe amd wjeju aa
and using the uniqueness of II again we
have e = f. Thus ¢ is the only idempotent of
G, and for each element a there is the
unique inverse x such that ax = e = 2a,
completing the proof.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
CarMIcHAEL, Rosert D. Introduction to the the-
ory of groups of finite order. 1937.
Preston, Gorpon B. A note on representations of
inverse semigroups. Proc. Amer. Math. Soc.
Be) 44S Ae 9S
VaGNerR, V. V. Obobscennye gruppy: Doklady
Acad. Nauk SSSR 84: 1119-1122. 1952.
_In respect to other things there may be times of darkness and times
of light, there may be risings, decadences, and revivals. In science there
is only progress.
... What is gained by scientific inquiry is gained for-
ever; it may be added to, it may seem to be covered up, but 1t can never
be taken away.—Sir MicHaEL Foster.
SEPTEMBER 1958 BLAKE: TWO SPECIES
OF HIBISCUS FROM TEXAS
277
BOTANY.—Two species of Hibiscus from Texas. S. F. Buaxr, New Crops
Research Branch, U. 8. Department of Agriculture.
(Received August 5, 1958)
Ivan Shiller, of the Pink Bollworm Sec-
tion, Entomology Research Division, has
been interested in host plants of the
pink bollworm (Pectinophora gossypiella
Saund.), one of the greatest insect enemies
of the cotton plant, since it was first found
out-of-doors in the United States at Hearne,
Tex., in 1917, and since 1940 he has devoted
himself particularly to. the collection of
these hosts. Study of his Texas herbarium
material of Hibiscus, the most important
host genus for this insect aside from Gossy-
pium, has brought to light one very distinct
new species, at present known only from a
single locality in Trinity County, and an-
other species, found earlier by other collec-
tors, which has been misidentified as H.
lastocarpos Cav. or H. lambertianus H.B.K.
but which proves to be identical with a spe-
cies (H. cubensis A. Rich.) described from
the vicinity of Habana, Cuba, where it is
now rare or perhaps extinct.
Hibiseus dasyealyx Blake & Shiller, sp. nov.
Herba perennis 1.5 m alta; caulis glaberrimus ;
folia paene usque ad basin hastate o-partita
petiolata glaberrima, segmentis linearibus at-
tenuatis serratis interdum ad basin incisis saepe
4-8 cm longis 3-6 mm latis; flores 6-7 per
caulem in axillis superioribus solitaru; peduncu-
lus supra patenti-hirsutus prope medium ar-
ticulatus ca. 1.5 em longus; bracteoli ca. 12
anguste lineares attenuati intus et margine dense
hirsuti extra sparse hirsuti v. subglabri ca. 1.5
em longi 1-1.5 mm lati calyce ca. 4 breviores;
calyx ca. 2.5 cm longus campanulatus extra
densissime albido-hirsutus jintus densissime
flavescenti-pilosus pilis subappressis, lobis del-
toideis ca. 7 mm longis apiculatis; corolla alba
purpureo-oculata sicc. ca. 6 em longa prope
apicem patens; ovarium dense et subappresse
flavescenti-pilosulum.
Herb 1-1.5 m high; stem greenish, terete, 3
mm thick above; upper internodes mostly 38-5
em long; petioles slender, 3-5 cm long; leaf
blades 5-9 cm long, about 3-10 em wide at base
across the lobes, divided to within 2-4 mm of
the top of the petiole, rather light green above,
still lighter beneath, the lobes sometimes entire
toward base, sometimes incised there, serrate
above, the teeth mostly 3-15 mm apart; styles
free above and there pilose; fruit unknown.
Texas: Trinity County, west of the Neches
River about 13 miles west of Lufkin (which is
in Angelina County), June 23, 1955, Ivan
Shiller 231 (type no. 2261376, US. Nat Herb.).
This very distinct species is allied to H. coc-
cineus Walt. and H. militaris Cav., having leaves
much like those of the former species and corolla
more like that of the latter, but it is at once
distinguished from both and from all other
United States species by its densely spreading-
hirsute calyx.
Hibiscus cubensis A. Rich. in de la Sagra, Hist.
Fis. Polit. y Nat. Cuba, 2. pt. Hist. Nat., 10
(Botanica): 51. 1845.
Herbaceous perennial, up to 3 m high, densely
gray-velutinous throughout except on corolla
(including both surfaces of leaves and of calyx)
with short stellate hairs; stem, sometimes also
the petioles and peduncles, remotely or rather
densely aculeate with straight spreading at
length corky-based prickles 3 mm. long or less,
these densely short-hairy below, glabrous above
and tipped with a deciduous bristle, the prickles
apparently sometimes lacking; petiole 2-6 em
long, mostly ¥3— as long as blade; leaf blades
oblong or ovate-oblong, 8-11 em long, 3.5-5
cm wide, acute to acuminate, at base sub-
truncate to shallowly cordate, crenate-serrate on
margin throughout, papery, mostly 5-nerved
with the 2 lateral pairs of veins much weaker
than the median one, not at all or only ob-
scurely greener above than below; peduncles
solitary in the upper axils, 2-(fruit) 3.5 em
long, jointed almost at the base: bractlets
about 12, narrowly linear or in age somewhat
involute-margined and linear-filiform, 1.2-1.5
em long, 0.5-1.5 mm wide, sometimes sparsely
hispid as well as densely velutinous, erectish. in
age reflexed; calyx in flower 2.5-2.8 em, at ma-
turity about 3.2 em high, sometimes more or
less hispid outside especially on the nerves. the
broadly triangular acuminate teeth about
equalling the tube; corolla S-9 em long, “purple
278 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
or orchid with dark reddish blotch,” the petals
with spreading tips; capsule subglobose, abruptly
apiculate (apiculus 1 mm long), densely spread-
ing-hispid outside with ochroleucous hairs and
between them minutely hispidulous, glabrous
inside; seeds densely and shortly rufescent-
velvety, 2.5 mm long; styles united to apex;
stigmas oblong.
Kaw)
Ke
one q
“fy ie 30 Fi ah’ }
lai Bm FY)
Witte «
S Way i
a i
i}
GA
ey
V
Pe (! asd r' - f s-254
: SRN NASL EON SOPRA ay eRe
se Wr if ‘d = oP Wey) w
RA LAT EAE Bg
~ ANY SORIA AES ee
», ‘ ye
\ f
voL. 48, No. 9
Cupa: Banks of Laguna Majana, Havana,
Oct. 31, 1918, Bro. Leén et al. no. 8485, and
Dee. 5, 1918, no. 8516 (both in herb. INGY:
Bot. Gard.). Texas: Midfield, Matagorda
County, July 23, 1927, B. C. Tharp 4743
(U.S. Nat. Herb.) ; Calhoun County, Aug.
15, and Oct. 8, 1953, I. Shiller 251 (U.S. Nat.
Herb.); cultivated (from last locality) ,
Fic. 1—Hibiscus dasycalyx. Plant and corolla, X¥2; calyx CGncluding inside view), about X%.
SEPTEMBER 1958 BLAKE: TWO SPECIES OF HIBISCUS FROM TEXAS 279
Brownsville, Shiller (U.S. Nat. Arb.); Ti- N. L. Britton as Hibiscus lambertianus
voli, Refugio County, Aug. 14, 1939, G. L. H.B.K., and the late Dr. T. H. Kearney,
Fisher 39104 (U.S. Nat. Herb.). to whom I sent a sheet of Shiller’s materia]
The Cuban material was identified by not long before his death, returned it la-
Fic. 2.—Hibiscus cubensis. Plant, capsule, seeds, calyx, corolla, and inside view of calyx; all X15
except the magnified view of seed, which is X4. From Shiller 251 and Fisher 39104.
280
belled doubtfully as this species. Hibiscus
lambertianus H.B.K., of which the U.S.
National Herbarium possesses a number of
sheets from North and South America as
well as a photograph of the type (from
Guigui, Aragua Valley, Venezuela), has the
leaves green and sparsely stellate-pubescent
above and sparsely or sometimes densely so
(but never velutinous), consequently green
or dull grayish beneath, as well as essen-
tially glabrous to lightly stellate-puberu-
lent stems. Although evidently allied to H.
cubensis, it is surely distinct from the lat-
ter, which is at once recognizable by the
dense and essentially uniform velvety pu-
bescence on all parts of the plant except the
corolla.
In the Flora de Cuba (3: 255. 1953),
Brother Alain calls this plant H. lamberti-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vot. 48, No. 9
anus H.B.K. and places H. cubensis A. Rich.
and H. sagraeanus Merc. under it as syno-
nyms. I consider the name H. sagraeanus
Mere. (Bull. Bot. Seringe 1: 169. 1830), too
dubious to adopt in place of the later H.
cubensis A. Rich. Mercier’s description
agrees in most respects with H. cubensis,
but his description of the pubescence, the
strongest distinctive character of H. cuben-
sis, does not fit too well. He says the
branches are glabrous below, pubescent and
spiny above, and that the oblong-lanceo-
late leaves are green above and gray be-
neath, pubescent or muricate (pubescentia
muricatave) on both sides with very nu-
merous short soft hairs mixed with more
rigid 3-fureate hairs, the nerves beneath
more rufescent-pilose. }
———
GYROMAGNETIC RATIO OF PROTON REDETERMINED
The gyromagnetic ratio of the proton—a
measure of its interaction with magnetic fields—
has been redetermined by the National Bureau
of Standards with significant imcrease in ac-
curacy. This result not only provides a better
standard for magnetic fields but also makes pos-
sible more accurate values for many of the
fundamental constants of physics whose values
depend upon magnetic field measurements. Ex-
amples are the electron charge-to-mass ratio
e/m, the magnetic moment of the proton, and
Planck’s constant h.
The redetermination was made by R. L.
Driscoll and P. L. Bender of the Bureau staff
using facilities provided by the Fredericksburg
Magnetic Observatory of the U. S. Coast and
Geodetic Survey.
The new value for the proton’s gyromagnetic
ratio will be especially useful in the design and
development of scientific and industrial appa-
ratus in which it is important to know accu-
rately the spatial distribution of a magnetic
field or to regulate it closely. Here the proton
can be used as a very sensitive probe to de-
termine magnetic intensity in terms of the pre-
cisely known gyromagnetic ratio. Problems of
this sort arise widely in the use of scientific
: -apparatus eyclotrons, mass spectrographs, and
beta-ray spectrometers—and in industrial
equipment such as servo mechanisms and electro-
magnets.
The present work was carried out as part
of a broader program which seeks to obtain
more accurate values for important constants,
such as the speed of light, the acceleration of
eravity, and the various atomic constants. These
constants of nature, when determined to ex-
tremely high accuracy, provide invariant bases
for the reproduction standards of many physi-
cal quantities such as length, time, and electric
current. They thus serve to lock present stand-
ards and units of physical measurement into the
phenomena of science. Because the proton’s gyro-
magnetic ratio is theoretically related to many
of these constants, it provides a connecting link
between them and the accepted standards of
measurement.
Like other atomic nuclei, the proton, or hy-
drogen nucleus, behaves as a small magnet.
When placed in a magnetic field, it tends to
orient its axis along the direction of the field.
However, the proton is also spinning rapidly
about its axis, and the resulting angular mo-
mentum causes it to act like a gyroscope. Thus,
instead of lining up with the field, the proton
actually precesses about the field direction.
SEPTEMBER 1958
The ratio of the angular precession frequency to
the magnetic field strength gives the gyro-
magnetic ratio.
In 1949 H. A. Thomas, R. L. Driscoll, and
J. A. Hipple made the first precise measurement*
of the proton gyromagnetic ratio, using as pro-
tons the hydrogen nuclei contained in a small
water sample. Their result was combined with
other data to give a more precise absolute value
for the proton magnetic moment than had pre-
viously been possible. More accurate values were
also obtained for a number of the fundamental
constants of physics, such as the electron charge-
to-mass ratio and Planck’s constant.
In the 1949 measurement, the gyromagnetic
ratio was determined by measuring the magnetic
field and radio frequency required for magnetic
resonance absorption in the proton sample. A
strong magnetic field of about 5000 gausses was
used, and its value was determined by finding
the force exerted by the magnetic field on a
wire carrying a known current. This magnetic
field measurement was difficult and was the
principle limitation on the accuracy of the
result obtained.
The present method reduces the error of the
earlier one by a factor of four by using simpler
techniques that have been developed since 1949.
In this method the hydrogen protons in a water
sample are caused to precess in a magnetic field,
and the precession rate is obtained from the
frequency of the voltage induced in a pickup
coil surrounding the sample. The gyromagnetic
ratio is then obtained as the ratio of the angular
precession frequency to the field strength.
Increased accuracy is obtained by using a
magnetic field that can be calculated to very
high precision. This field is produced by an ac-
curately measured current flowing through a
solenoid whose important dimensions are known
to one part in a million. However, as the field
strength obtained in this way is only 12 gausses,
spurious magnetic fields from other apparatus,
electrical currents, or vehicles must be carefully
avoided. For this reason, the measurements have
been carried out at the Fredericksburg Mag-
netic Observatory of the U. 8. Coast and Geo-
detic Survey. The Observatory is about 10 miles
* Measurement of the proton moment in abso-
lute units, by H. A. Tuomas, R. L. Driscoun, and
J. A. Hiprre. Journ. Res. NBS 44: 569. 1950.
RP2104; see also Magnetic moment of the proton,
NBS Tech. News Bull. 33: 57. May 1949.
GYROMAGNETIC RATIO OF PROTON REDETERMINED
281
south of Fredericksburg, Virginia, on a site
chosen to be as free as possible from magnetic
field disturbances. A separate nonmagnetic
building, with large coils for compensating the
earth’s magnetic field, was made available for
the experiment. At this location man-made
magnetic field fluctuations are negligible and
corrections for variations in the earth’s field
can be obtained from the Observatory magneto-
erams.
The proton sample consists of distilled water
contained in a glass sphere about 2 em in di-
ameter. The sample is placed in a strong mag-
netic field in order to build up a large magnetiza-
tion of the protons along the direction of the
magnetic field. It is then shot about 15 meters
through a pneumatic tube into the center of the
solenoid, within the nonmagnetic building. With
the sample in the solenoid, a short pulse of
radio-frequency magnetic field near the pre-
cession frequency is applied to tip the magnetic
moments of the protons so that they are left
nearly perpendicular to the magnetic field di-
rection. They then precess about the magnetic
field direction at a frequency corresponding to
the strength of the field. The flux through a
pick-up coil surrounding the sample changes
at the same frequency at which the magnetiza-
tion of the sample is precessing. The frequency
of the induced voltage across the pick-up coil
is measured accurately against standard fre-
quency broadcasts by the Bureau’s radio sta-
tion, WWV, and the resulting value is combined
with the magnetic field strength to give the
proton gyromagnetic ratio.
A preliminary value of (2.67515 + .00001) x
10" radians/(sec gauss), uncorrected for dia-
magnetism of the water sample, was obtained
for the proton gyromagnetic ratio in terms of
the ampere as now maintained at the Bureau.
The value obtained in 1949 was given as
(2.67523 + 0.00006) Xx 10‘ radians/(sec gauss).
If the present result is combined with a recent
determination® by Driscoll and Cutkosky of the
ampere as maintained at the Bureau in absolute
units, the value becomes (2.67513 + .00002) x
10° radians/(see gauss).
4. 1958. RP 2845; Redetermination of the stand-. -
ard ampere, NBS Techn. News Bull. 42. 21
February 1958.
282
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, No. 9
BOTANY —Notes on South American phanerogams—I. LYMAN B. Smite, De-
partment of Botany, U. 5. National Museum.
(Received August 5, 1958)
The present notes are largely an effort to
provide names for certain of my own col-
lections obtained in southern Brazil in 1956—
57 with the help of a grant from the Na-
tional Science Foundation. However, it has
been possible to include some items from
other countries that would be too small to
publish by themselves. Dr. Robert J. Downs
of the Plant Industry Station, U. S. De-
partment of Agriculture, has joined me in
proposing names that were the outcome of
our joint studies, and has prepared the il-
lustration.
Family XYRIDACEAE
Xyris subuniflora Malme, Rec. Trav. Bot. Néerl.
9: 129. 1912.
Xyris capillaris Steyermark, Fieldiana, Bot. 28,
no. 1: 107. 1951. Not Malme, Ark. Bot. 24A,
MONDE o- 1932:
Guiana, Venezuela, Colombia.
Family LILIACEAE
Herreria Ruiz & Pavon, Fl. Peruv. & Chil. Prodr.
48, pl. 35. 1794.
The following synopsis is the byproduct of
identifying certain Brazilian specimens in the
United States National Herbarium and does not
pretend to be a revision of the genus. However,
it does account for all names whether of valid
species or of synonyms.
KEY
1. Capsule horizontally ridged, retuse, broader
than long; leaves linear, coriaceous, glaucous,
densely and strongly nerved, the margins
revolute; tepals 5-6 mm long; plant caules-
Cenbev@hilecc wai eee el 1. H. stellata
1. Capsule even, truncate or rounded or (where
not known) the leaves much broader than
linear. Brazil, Uruguay, Paraguay, Argentina.
2. Plant long-caulescent, scandent; inflorescences
lateral.
3. Inflorescence glabrous.
4. Leaves not over 9 mm. wide; capsule
higher than wide; anthers not over 1.3
mm long; tepals not over 4 mm long
2. H. montevidensis
4. Leaves to 35 mm. wide; capsule wider
than high (unknown in H. glaziovit).
5. Stem aculeate especially toward base;
anthers scarcely more than 1 mm.
long; tepals 5-6 mm. long, green.
3. H. salsaparilha
5. Stem unarmed; anthers 2.5 mm. long;
tepals 4-5 mm. long, brown.
4. H. glaziovii
3. Inflorescence hispidulous.
6. Branches of the inflorescence alternate.
5. H. latifolia
6. Branches of the inflorescence opposite or
verticillate or the inflorescence simple. .
6. H. interrupta
2. Plant stemless, erect; inflorescence terminal.
7. Scape naked; inflorescence branched, the
branches strict... °2- oe 7. H. stricta
7. Scape bracteate; inflorescence simple.
8. H. ophiopogonoides
1. Herreria stellata R. & P. Fl. Peruv. & Chil. 3:
69, pl. 303. 1802. |
Herreria verticillata Molina, Sagg. Chile, ed.
7, NBS, el),
This species from the vicinity of Concepcion
in south-central Chile is the type of the genus.
2. Herreria montevidensis K]. ex Griseb. in Mart.
Mi Bras. 3, pi. 12 24.2.48822)
Paraguay, northern Argentina, southern Bra-
ail, Uruguay.
2a. Herreria montevidensis var. montevidensis
Leaves mostly 4-9 mm wide.
2b. Herreria montevidensis var. bonplandii (Le-
comte) L. B. Smith, comb. nov.
Herreria bonplandu Lecomte, Bull. Soc. Bot.
France 56: 346. 1909.
Herreria tuberosa Rojas, Bull. Géogr. Bot.
28: 158. 1918.
Dioscorea tuberosa Rojas, Bull. Géogr. Bot.
28: 158. 1918. In synonymy.
Herreria linearifolia U. Dammer, nomen.
Field Museum photo no. 10005.
Leaves mostly 3 mm wide or less. This nar-
row-leaved variety appears to intergrade with
the typical one but is so striking that it needs
some designation.
3. Herreria salsaparilha Mart. in Spix & Mart.
Reise Bras. 1: 545. 1823; Schultes, Syst.
Veg. 7: 363. 1829; Griseb. in Mart. Fl. Bras.
3, pt. 1: 23, pl. 4, 5. 1842.
Herreria parviflora Lindl. Bot. Reg. 12: pl.
1042. 1827.
Rajania verticillata Vell. Fl. Flum. Icon. 10:
pl. 115, 1835; Arch. Mus.” Nace piiotide
Janeiro 5: 424. 1881.
Herreria brasiliensis Hort. Berol. ex Kunth,
Enum. 5: 294. 1850. In synonymy.
Herreria grandiflora Griseb. Kjoeb. Vidensk.
Meddell. 152. 1875.
Herreria verticillata (Vell.) Stellfeld, Trib.
Farm. Curitiba 12: 133. 1944. Not Molina,
1810.
SEPTEMBER 1958
Eastern Brazil from Bahia to Minas Gerais
and Rio de Janeiro. There is some possibility
that more material will show a distinction be-
tween H. salsaparilha of Bahia and H. parviflora
of Rio de Janeiro.
4. Herreria glaziovii Lecomte, Bull. Soc. Bot.
France 56: 347. 1909; L. B. Smith, Contr.
Sci. Los Angeles County Mus. no. 23: 4.
1958.
Southern Golds in central Brazil.
5. Herreria latifolia Woodson, Ann. Missouri Bot.
Gard. 37: 397. 1950.
Western Minas Gerais, Brazil.
6. Herreria interrupta Griseb. in Mart. Fl. Bras.
Samuel) 245) 1842.
Herreria salsaparilha var. “H.” interrupta
Baker, Journ. Linn. Soc. 18: 232. 1880.
Sao Paulo, Brazil. The type of the species is
a Sellow collection (B) without locality data and
in rather poor flowering condition (Field Mu-
seum photo no. 10004). Novaes 1144 (US) is
from Campinas, Sao Paulo, thus localizing the
species. Widgren smn. (US), doubtfully noted as
from Minas Gerais, is in fruit and has both
simple and branched inflorescences, indicating
that this distinction is of no value here. The
capsule is very short and broad as in H. salsa-
pariha.
7. Herreria stricta L. B. Smith, sp. nov. Fias. a, b
Acaulis, florifera metralis; foliis strictis, line-
aribus, acuminatis, 12 cm longis, 7 mm latis,
dense valdeque nervatis; scapo 3 mm diametro,
ebracteato, sulcato; inflorescentia pauciramosa,
glabra; ramis strictis, gracilibus, ad 21 cm
longis; bracteis ovatis, acutis, quam pedicellis
subduplo brevioribus; pedicellis gracilibus, fruc-
tiferis ad 6 mm longis; floribus ignotis; capsulis
late oblongo-ellipticis, late rotundatis apicula-
tisque, 15 mm longis.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no.
1573005, collected in campo, Estancia Primera,
Apa, Paraguay, by Pedro Jorgensen (no. 4758).
8. Herreria ophiopogonoides (Kunth) Nieder-
lein, Bol. Mens. Mus. Prod. Argent. 3, no.
31: 334. 1890.
SMITH: NOTES ON SOUTH AMERICAN PHANEROGAMS
283
Clara ophiopogonoides Kunth, Enum. 5: 296.
1850.
Southern Brazil, northeastern Argentina, Uru-
guay. I am indebted to Dra. Nélida S. T. de
Burkart of the Instituto de Boténica Darwinion
for verification of the Niederlein reference.
Family CUNONIACEAE
Lamanonia Vell. Fl. Flum. 228. 1825; Icon. 5:
pl. 104. 1835; O. Kuntze, Rev. Gen. 1: 227,
1891.
Belangera Camb. Cunon. Syn. in St.-Hil. FI.
Bras. Merid. 2: 204. 1829; Engler in Mart.
Fl. Bras. 14, pt. 2: 151. 1871; Pflanzenfam.
ed. 2. 18a: 229. 1930; Pampanini, Annali di
IBOli, 249 BW, IGLOS.
The name Belangera has not been conserved
and there is no doubt of the identity or priority
of Lamanomna. Therefore it is difficult to under-
stand how Engler could have been following the
International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature
in using Belangera as late as 1930.
Lamanonia ternata Vell. Fl. Flum. 228. 1825;
Icon. 5: pl. 104. 1835.
Belangera glabra Camb. Cunon. Syn. in St.-Hil.
Fl. Bras. Merid. 2: 204, pl. 115. 1829.
Lamanoma glabra (Camb.) O. Kuntze, Rey. Gen.
1: 227. 1891. Not Vell. 1825.
Both the description and plate of Lamanonia
ternata indicate three-foliolate leaves as does the
specific name itself. Yet it has always been
equated with Belangera speciosa, a species that
is consistently five-foliolate.
Lamanonia speciosa (Camb.) L. B. Smith, comb.
nov.
Belangera speciosa Camb. Cunon. Syn. in St.-Hil.
Fl. Bras. Merid. 2: 206, pl. 117. 1829.
Lamanoma ternata sensu O. Kuntze, Rey. Gen.
1: 227. 1891. Not Vell. 1825.
Lamanonia chabertii (Pampanini) L. B. Smith,
comb. nov.
Belangera chabertii Pampanini, Ann. Consery.
& Jard. Bot. Genéve 7-8: 328. 1904; Engler,
Pflanzenfam. ed. 2. 18a: 236. 1930.
Lamanonia ulei (Engler) L. B. Smith, comb. noy.
Belangera ulei Engler, Pflanzenfam. ed. 2. 18a:
236. 1930.
©.
oP
p>)
b \
Fia. 1.—a, Herreria stricta, plant, X1/10; b, fruit, <1.
284
Family CoNVOLVULACEAE
Ipomoea delphinoides Choisy, Cony, Rar 13).
1838; Mém. Soc. Phys. Geneve 8, pt. 1: 5B.
1838: DC. Prod. 9: 352; 1845; O’Donell, Lilloa
23: 480. 1950. In adnot.
Convolvulus campestris Vell. Fl. Flum. 74. 1825;
Icon. 2: pl. 66. 18385. Not Ipomoea campestris
Meissn. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 7: 254. 1869.
Ipomoea trifurcata Choisy, Conv. Rar. 131. 1838 ;
Mém. Soc. Phys. Genéve 8, pt. 1: 53. 1838;
DC. Prod. 9: 352. 1845; O’Donell, Lilloa 23:
480. 1950. In adnot.
Ipomoea polymorpha Riedel ex Meissn. in Mart.
Fl. Bras. 7: 252. 1869. Not R. & S. Syst. Veg.
4: 254. 1819.
Two names published on the same page, /po-
moea delphinoides and I. trifurcata were avail-
able for this species, and O’Donell chose J. del-
phinoides. This widely distributed species of
southern Brazil is commonly found in the her-
barium under the name of J. polymorpha.
Family RUBIACEAE
Borreria G. F. W. Meyer Section Galianthe K.
Schum. in Mart. Fl. Bras. 6, pt. 6: 41. 1888;
Standl. Field Mus. Pub. Bot. 8: 393. 1931.
Galianthe Griseb. Goett. Abh. 24: 156. 1879.
First valid publication.
Section Galianthe of Borreria is charac-
terized by its cymose inflorescences and dichoga-
mous flowers and is limited to southern Brazil
and closely adjacent areas. K. Schumann ar-
ranged the species largely according to the form
of the style, a character which could be expected
to vary widely in dichogamous flowers. Standley
noted this in the discussion following his B. luteo-
virens (Field Mus. Publ. Bot. 8: 393) but
failed to follow out his own line of reasoning
and continued to identify and cite material of
this section obviously using a process of match-
ing. Once the character of the style is discarded
there is nothing of significance to separate B.
fastigiata and B. leiophylla or B. verbenoides
and B. valerianoides.
Borreria fastigiata (Griseb.) K. Schum. in Mart.
Fl. Bras. 6, pt. 6: 68. 1888.
Galianthe fastigiata Griseb. Goett. Abh. 24: 157.
1879.
Borreria leiophylla K. Schum. in Mart. FI. Bras.
6, pt. 6: 66. 1888.
The species is characterized by even, pre-
sumably rather fleshy, leaves with faint or
wholly obscured lateral nerves, a glabrous in-
florescence, and short broadly triangular sepals.
Borreria laxa yar. vestita Smith & Downs, var.
nov.
Borreria paraguariensis Chodat & Hassler, Bull.
Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 186. 1904.
Borreria valerranoides sensu Smith & Downs,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, No. 9
Sellowia no. 7: 79, pl. 28, figs. h, t. 1956. Not
Cham. & Schlecht. 1828.
Inflorescentia plus minusve vestita.
In our treatment of the Rubiaceae of Santa
Catarina, Dr. R. J. Downs and I laid too much
emphasis on indument and confused Borreria
lara with B. valerianoides. Actually B. laxa is
well distinguished by its irregular inflorescences,
broad thin leaves, and curving stem. Herbarium
material indicates that it is probably somewhat
scandent.
Borreria verbenoides Cham. & Schlecht. Linnaea
Si ole Slee
Var. verbenoides
Borreria valerianoides Cham. & Schlecht. Lin-
naea 3: 335. 1828.
Borreria thalictroides K. Schum. in Mart. FI.
Bras. 65 pt. 6271. 1383:
Corolla glabrous, remainder of the inflores-
cence glabrous to sparsely vestite.
Var. eupatorioides (Cham. & Schlecht.) Smith &
Downs, comb. nov.
Borreria eupatorioides Cham. & Schlecht. Lin-
naea 3: 327. 1828.
Borreria centranthoides Cham. & Schlecht. Lin-
naea 3: 328. 1828.
Corolla vestite, remainder of the inflorescence
densely vestite until after anthesis.
Hedyotis dusenii (Standl.) Smith & Downs, comb.
nov.
Oldenlandia dusenu Standl. Field Mus. Pub. Bot.
8: 343. 1931. Brazil: Paranda, Santa Catarina,
Rio Grande do Sul.
Psychotria carthaginensis Jacq. Enum. Pl. Carib.
16. 1760; Sel. Stirp. Amer. pl. 174, fig. 22. 1763;
Standl. Field Mus. Bot. 13, pt. 6: 183, 187.
1936; N. M. Bacigalupo, Darwiniana 10: 34,
fig. 1. 1952; A. L. Cabrera, Man. Fl. Alrede-
dores de Buenos Aires 446. 1953.
Psychotria alba R. & P. FI. Peruv. 2: 58, pl. 205,
fig. a. 1799; Standl. Field Mus. Bot. 13, pt. 6:
182. 1936; Smith & Downs, Sellowia no. 7:
50, pl. 14, figs. a-e. 1956.
After using P. alba in our Rubiaceae of Santa
Catarina we are forced to admit that the lne
between subsessile flowers in P. carthaginensis
and short-pedicellate ones in P. alba is too dim
to follow.
Psychotria vellosiana Benth. Linnaea 23: 464.
1850.
Coffea sessilis Vell. Fl. Flum. 64. 1825; Icon. 2:
pl. 20. 1835. Not Psychotria sessilis Vell. 1825.
Psychotria axillaris Vell. Fl. Flum. 67. 1825;
Icon. 2: pl. 32. 1835. Not Willd. 1798.
Psychotria sessilis (Vell.) Muell. Arg. in Mart.
Fl. Bras. 6, pt. 5: 358. 1881. Not Vell. 1825.
In using the Flora Brasiliensis for making
identifications, botanists have generally over-
looked the fact that Psychotria sessilis (Vell.)
Muell. Arg. is a later homonym and must he
replaced by P. vellosiana Benth.
SEPTEMBER 1958
NICOL: PELECYPOD CLASSIFICATION
285
ZOOLOGY .—Trends and problems in pelecypod classification (the genus and sub-
genus). Davip Nicox, Southern Illinois University, Carbondale, III.
(Received August 26, 1958)
Many of the ideas set forth in this paper
are not original, and the application and
manipulation of certain data are, at least in
part, not new. However, it is certainly true
that many of them are little known and
have been overlooked by the present genera-
tion of taxonomists. The reason for this
seems to be that while the thoughts and
writings of certain workers are widely read
and often accepted without question, others
are ignored or forgotten. It behooves us all
to examine the data and ideas of some of the
less-known or less generally accepted work-
ers in taxonomy and evolution, for even if
we do not agree with their conclusions we
may gain a new insight into some of our
present problems.
CONCEPT AND SCOPE OF THE
GENUS AND SUBGENUS
The essence of classification is the group-
ing of animals on the basis of their rela-
tionship to one another, the genus or sub-
genus being the lowest taxonomic category
for the grouping of related species. It is
unfortunate that the lack of proper group-
ing, among other causes, has led to so much
splitting of pelecypod genera and subgenera
that the genus is no longer a pragmatic cate-
gory in preliminary identification of speci-
mens; that is to say, pelecypod specimens
must first be pigeon-holed as to family
because the identification of finely deline-
ated genera is often not possible at first
elance.
It is acknowledged, of course, that diffi-
culties of pelecypod classification stem not
only from the minute delineation of genera
but also from the size of the entire class.
From the standpoint of described living
species, the phylum Mollusca is a compara-
tively large one. I say comparatively large
because it is not more than one-tenth the
size of the Arthropoda. Malacologists doing
taxonomic work estimate that there are
nearly 100,000 described living species.
About three-fourths of these are gastropods,
and most of the remainder (around 20,000)
are pelecypods. The class Pelecypoda is a
prominent fossil group throughout all but
the early part of its geologic history (Ordo-
vician to Recent). Nearly 8,000 generic and
subgeneric names have been proposed in
the class during the past two centuries, in
striking contrast to Linné’s original estab-
lishment of a mere 15 genera (including
Teredo, which Linné did not recognize as a
pelecypod). The number is steadily increas-
ing. For instance, a cursory examination of
the Zoological Record for the five-year
period of 1950 through 1954 reveals that
the average number of new genera and sub-
genera proposed annually is 23. (The ac-
tual number is probably slightly higher
than this for reasons that need no explana-
tion.) The proposals of new genera and sub-
genera were made by relatively few taxono-
mists during this 5-year period.
There have been a few complaints in
recent years concerning the number of new
genera and subgenera proposed for mollusks.
Perhaps the most recent is that of Burch
(1956, p. 144). Earlier, Cotton and Godfrey
(1938, in their authors’ preface) made the
following statement:
Here we may note that if all the so-called
genera introduced and available for South Aus-
tralan shells were used, there would be very few
genera with more than one or two species. We
have endeavoured to steer a middle course. For
the purposes of this handbook, we have used the
stronger forms of subgenera as full genera, and
wholly discarded the weaker ones.
And still earlier, Grant and Gale (1931, p.
88) made the following assertions:
One extreme is the old Linnean policy of class-
ing the whole of the mollusca under a score or
two of genera; the other extreme is to have a
genus for every species. There is something to be
said for the former extreme, for a few names are
easy to remember and to use and they divide the
class into two [sic] groups each of which is easier to
handle as a unit than the whole class. Nothing can
be said in favor of the latter extreme, for it is
the equivalent of discarding generic names al-
together and making specific names twice as long
286
and more than twice as hard to handle. The
Linnean system was meant to be binomial, and
to be most useful the generic name was meant to
be markedly different in breadth of application
from the specific. Even a generic name for every
well-marked species is almost obviously too close
to the more unreasonable of the two extremes,
for it makes the nomenclature too cumbersome,
with too many names, all apt to be involved in
nomenclatorial, time-wasting difficulties. Besides,
the genera are needed for showing broader rela-
tionships, and the unit of the well-marked species
and its close or doubtfully distinct relatives can
be handled more satisfactorily in other ways.
Grant and Gale continued in this vein on
1D, ws).
It is a true, though very unfortunate, circum-
stance that arguments in justification of a multi-
plication of names are too often merely a form
of ratiocination engendered, usually subconsciously,
by a desire for the supposed glory of being author
of the new names. During times when the multi-
plication of names is popular, many writers 1n-
dulge in it as a sort of speculation not unlike
speculative inflation of the stock market, and the
process keeps on until the market is glutted with
such securities and deflation and hard times ensue,
it not a nomenclatorial panic, followed by a grad-
ual return to a more reasonable intermediate po-
sition. Such fluctuations are costly in wasted en-
ergy, and it is better for science not to speculate
too much in this way.
There have been a few additional doubters
as to the good that continual splitting of
genera will do for the classification of the
Mollusca, but these few outcries of caution
have done little or nothing to stem the
flood of new generic and subgeneric names.
On the other hand, there are many tax-
onomists who give reasons for splitting
genera and subgenera of mollusks. Only
a few of them will be reviewed here.
One of the biologically least sound rea-
sons for generic splitting was plainly stated
by Crickmay (1932, p. 445) in his work on
the Trigonidae.
In the first place, the number of species is now
so large, there being about 900 of them, that to re-
tain Trigonia as a comprehensive genus defeats
the prime object of classification, as it did with
“Ammonites” and “Belemnites”.
Simpson (1945, p. 16) rebuts Crickmay
with the following statement:
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 9
The practical classifier grants to a genus a
certain “size,” by which is meant, as a rule, a cer-
tain morphological scope, with the implication that
this scope tends to approximate a certain degree
of phylogenetic differentiation, to include all ani-
mals related to each other within certain limits.
This morphological scope may be almost entirely
filled or exploited by known species if the genus
has many (is polytypic), or only one or a few
species may be known, leaving much of the as-
signed scope blank.
It seems clear that Crickmay did not have
in mind the concept of size as expressed by
Simpson when he suggested the splitting of
Trigonia. Crickmay’s idea of size is the one
venerally expressed by taxonomists of the
Mollusca—mere number of species, regard-
less of morphologic scope. ge
Crickmay’s other reasons for splitting
the genus Trigonia are certainly more valid
and are as follows:
In the second place, the genus Trzgoma, as for-
merly conceived, is an incongrous one: certain of
the groups which it comprises, for instance,
Costatae and Clavellatae, are clearly distinct
throughout their entire geologic history. Hach one
is very unlike the other, yet each bears re-
semblances to separate species among the ancestral
genus Myophoria in the broad sense. In the
third place, even the conservative characters of
each of the many groups of species are so dif-
ferent as to merit nomenclatorial distinction.
Lastly, a comparative view of taxonomic methods
brings into evidence a great and undesirable dis-
crepancy between the comprehensiveness of the
genus Trigonia and the limitation of genera of
other classes of animals.... Other families of
pelecypods furnish excellent illustrations of the
narrow limits assigned to genera by modern
zoologists. For instance, some of the genera of the
Veneridae differ only in the manner of shell
ornament.
The last reason quoted above is not entirely
supportable. The discrepancy between the
comprehensiveness of some genera and the
limitation of others, although regrettable, is
not a sound basis for continuing an unwise
practice. For example, it would be the
height of taxonomic folly to split all families
to the extent that the Inoceramidae have
been split, merely to eliminate discrepancies
in comprehensiveness.
Bartsch (1955, p. 5) in his paper on the
Pliocene pyramidellids of Florida gives |
SEPTEMBER 1958
the following reason for additional splitting:
Since it is my belief that it will be easier for
students to become acquainted with the members
of smaller genera, I shall herein elevate some of
the subgenera used by Dall and Bartsch to generic
rank.
If Bartsch deems it necessary to study small
groups, why can he not study them as sub-
genera? In raising their rank he has in no
way diminished their size and has elimi-
nated a useful category. Furthermore, he
has defeated his own stated purpose (viz.,
making things “easier’) by necessitating
the students’ becoming acquainted with
more numerous genera and genera which,
being more finely delimited, are more dif-
ficult to distinguish from one another.
Nevertheless, in this same paper Bartsch
proceeds to erect two new genera, one new
subgenus, and one new pseudogenus, what-
ever that is.
Marwick (1957, p. 144) in his discussion
of the Turritellidae has stated:
The genus Turritella, as widely interpreted,
comprises over 1,000 named species and _ sub-
“species, ranging in age from the Lower Cretaceous,
perhaps Jurassic, to Recent, and _ distributed
throughout the world. It is thus too comprehensive
to be as useful in taxonomy, stratigraphy, or
palaeogeography as it could be if more restricted.
I disagree with Marwick on the grounds
that the splitting of genera solely for the
sake of stratigraphy and paleogeography
(paleobiogeography?) is not valid. Splitting
should be based on the differentiation of
distinct morphologic characters. Especially
in the Paleozoic strata, a species, let us
say, collected from Silurian strata is often
allocated to one pelecypod genus, and a
species very similar in all morphologic
characteristics collected from undoubted
Devonian strata is allocated to a different
genus. To what genus does the stratigrapher
allocate the species if he is not certain
whether he is dealing with Silurian. or
Devonian strata? This whole idea strongly
smacks of Werner’s catastrophism.
Here again the application to stratigraphy
comes to the fore. Among the most notorious
“splitters” have been the paleontologists
with basic interests in stratigraphy. Ac-
cording to their view, the more narrowly
NICOL: PELECYPOD CLASSIFICATION
287
defined a genus or a species is, the more use-
ful it will be in narrowly delimiting strati-
graphic units. They contend there should
be a name for every variation, and true
taxonomic relationship (i.e., the nomen-
clatorial expression of morphologic scope)
is disregarded. This giving of scientific
names for every minor or local variant
by some stratigraphers may help to solve
some local stratigraphic problems, but it
defeats the larger purpose of world-wide
correlation which is the major interest of
other stratigraphers. See Newell, 1956, pp.
GOE7 3:
And finally, coming back to the relatively
lengthy discussion by Grant and Gale on
this subject, they state some reasons in op-
position to the splitting of genera (p. 89).
A strange argument has recently been put forth
to justify creating many new generic names and
confining the older well-known names to small in-
significant groups of species, namely that as the
older names are usually of doubtful nomenclatorial
status and their exact application is often subject
to change, fewer species will be involved in the
changes. In other words, it is suggested to make the
unwelcome changes now to avoid the possibility of
having to make them later. It might be noted
here that if genera are used in a broad sense,
such changes will usually mean merely a rear-
rangement of subgenera. Another argument to
justify creating new generic names and limiting
old ones is that the inclusion of various species in
a genus should indicate that they are fairly
closely related, whereas we often do not know
whether they are or not, except that they appear
to have a number of characters in common. If
genera were smaller there would be less risk of
including heterogeneous elements. However. if
there were no genera, there would be still less
risk, so the problem falls back again on the
principle of the convenience of taking some risks
in order to express relationships still imperfectly
known, and the amount of risk that should be
taken must be governed by the special circum-
stances of each ease.
Undoubtedly the most unfavorable as-
pects of generic splitting have been the hap-
hazard and irresponsible way in which it
has been perpetrated in many cases. Some
of the proposals of new genera and sub-
genera are found in faunal monographs.
The faunal monographers too often do not
know the range of variation of morphologi-
eal characters within a family and, further-
288
more, do not know which characters are
relatively stable and which are variable
within a family. As an example, Iredale
(1939, p. 302) erected Tucetopsis as a sub-
genus of Tucetona on such superficial and
unstable characters as arrangement of the
prionodont teeth on the hinge plate, the
elevation of the adductor muscle scars, stria-
tions on the interior of the shell, and the
shape of the crenulations on the interior
ventral margin. Tucetopsis is Just another
meaningless name to be burdened with in
the pelecypod family Glycymerididae. I
can also see no reason for Finlay and Mar-
wick’s subgenus Cucullona (1937, p. 19)
when Latiarca Conrad, 1862, is available;
their attempt (p. 20) to distinguish between
the two subgenera is certainly not convinc-
ing. Other examples could be brought forth,
but these two should suffice. Such methods
of erecting new genera and subgenera on
shallow foundations, although some prove
to be valid and useful, do more mischief
than good.
Almost equally undesirable, however,
would be the opposite extreme, an attempt
to return to the methods of 150 years ago.
The old Linnean and Lamarckian interpre-
tations of generic names, although still
used by many conservative workers, are so
generalized—so lacking in preciseness of
connotation—as to be uninformative. This
deficiency can be illustrated by a compari-
son of the old, generalized (sensu lato),
Lamarckian interpretation of Arca with the
modern (sensu stricto) concept of Arca.
The advantage of the latter is that it tells
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Arca, sensu lato
Quadrate, subcircular, or rectangular in outline.
Longer than high or higher than long.
Attached by byssus or free living.
With or without byssus and byssal gape.
Living at shallow or moderate depths—0-2,500 ft.
Living in tropical, temperate, or boreal regions.
Water temperature 38° to 80°F.
Living on rocky, sandy, or occasionally even silty
substrate.
Glycymeris, sensu lato
Outline of valves subcircular or subquadrangular.
Radial ribs present or absent, raised or flattened,
with or without superimposed radial striae.
Geologic range Cretaceous to Recent.
vou. 48, No. 9
us a great deal about a species without
benefit of a detailed description or picture,
or both. Another illustration is provided in
the consideration of the old (broad) and
modern (restricted) concepts of Glycymeris.
(See below.)
In other words, a genus name should tell
us in some detail the following facts abouts
species to which it is applied: its morpho-
logic scope, its geographic distribution, its
habitat, and something about its strati-
eraphic range if it has a geologic history.
(I repeat, however, that a genus should
not be split on the basis of the latter factors
if a morphologic reason is lacking.)
Why, then, do some taxonomists still
use only the Linnean and Lamarckian con-
cepts of genera in their faunal studies?
The answer is obvious: Many modern
genera have been so finely delineated and
are now so difficult (if not impossible) to
distinguish from each other that the taxono-
mist seeking to allocate a species cannot
find just one appropriate genus to the ex-
clusion of all others. I.e., his species might
fit the descriptions of several different
genera. Even an examination of the type
species of the various genera may provide
no solution, for the species in question may
have a few characters in common with each
of several different type species but, in
totality, be no more closely related to one
than to another. The taxonomist solves or
evades his problem in one of three ways:
1. He creates a new genus or subgenus
for the species at hand, thus compounding
the difficulties of future workers.
Arca, sensu stricto
Rectangular in outline.
Longer than high.
Attached by byssus.
With byssus and byssal gape; byssal fibers en-
closed in a sheath.
Living at shallow depths—0-350 ft.
Living in tropical or warm temperate regions.
Water temperature 55° to 80°F.
Living on rocky substrate.
Glycymeris, sensu stricto
Outline of valves subcircular.
Radial ribs flattened with superimposed radial
striae.
Geologic range Oligocene to Recent.
SEPTEMBER 1958
2. He arbitrarily assigns the species to
i existing modern genus on grounds other
than morphology—perhaps geography or
stratigraphy—thus confounding the true
purpose of taxonomy.
3. He resorts to vagueness, allocating the
species to a time-honored and unprecise
caus as established by Linné or Lamarck.
TAXONOMY AND THE PATTERN OF EVOLUTION
A knowledge of the progress of evolution
in any group of organisms, even if the proc-
ess is not wholly understood, is so inti-
mately linked to classification that to ig-
nore it courts taxonomic chaos. The next
x
OF GENERA
NUMBER
SPECIES
NUMBER OF
Fic. 1—Two examples of the hollow curve
of distribution; number of genera plotted against
number of species in each genus of pelecypods.
Vertical scale is approximately five times that
of the horizontal scale. Dashed line—data taken
from Deshayes (1835-1836); number of genera
97, of which 11 are monotypic, 15 have 2 species,
largest genus has 135 species. Solid line—data
taken from H. and A. Adams (1858); number of
genera 327, of which 42 are monotypic, 31 have
2 species, 31 have 3 species, 27 have 4 species,
23 have 5 species, largest genus has 126 species.
The Adamses’ classification is a much more mod-
ern treatment.
NICOL: PELECYPOD CLASSIFICATION
289
several paragraphs of this paper will be
an attempt to show the broad pattern of
evolution, in a very general and abbreviated
way, and to show its essential relationship
to taxonomy.
Any taxonomist who has an interest in
a group of animals, whether it be a phylum,
class, order, or family, soon realizes from
the standpoint of synthesis (the practice
of putting things together by showing rela-
tionships or similarities; see Simpson, p. 22,
1945) that relatively few groups have nu-
merous species; Many more groups have
few species. One has only to look at the
relative size of the animal phyla to see this
truism. On the basis of described living
species, no animal phylum is more than one-
tenth the size of the Arthropoda. There are
some modest-sized phyla headed by the
Mollusca, Protozoa, and Chordata. There
are many more that are quite small; for
example, the Entoprocta, Echiuroida,
Ctenophora, and Chaetognatha all have less
than a thousand described species each.
Some groups of animals seem to have re-
mained small in numbers of species through-
out their geologic history as, for example,
the scaphopods among the Mollusca. Of
course, others are small today because they
are apparently nearing extinction. The fact
remains, however, that certain animal
phyla have been much more “successful”
than others, having a very large number
of species, having many modifications of the
basic body-plan, and having through adap-
tive radiation invaded a wide variety of
habitats.
Much of this suecess has been attributed
to the ability of the group to adapt itself
to the environment. But when one examines
families or genera one is likely to grasp
the idea that the basic reason is most often
genetic. J. C. Willis (1949, pp. 355-369)
has noted that in groups of plants certain
morphologic characters and certain combi-
nations of morphologic characters are com-
mon within a particular family, while other
possible combinations are rare or absent.
Restrictions of morphologic scope are, of
course, the basis for defining the family;
hence, among the peleeypods, a specimen
exhibiting only the characters of an arcid
cannot be classified as a eardiid. But even
290
within the individual family there is a
reasonably great range of possibility in the
combinations of morphologic characters,
and the important fact is that some combi-
nations are far more ‘‘successful” (1.e., com-
mon) than others. For a hypothetical ex-
ample, let us take the following possibilities
of characters—ABCD and abcd—within a
family having 200 described species.
A BC D combination occurs in 100 species.
A BC d combination occurs in 60 species.
A Bc d combination occurs in 20 species. ©
A bc d combination occurs in 10 species.
a b c d combination occurs in 3 species.
a BC D combination occurs in 2 species.
a b C D combination occurs in 2 species.
a bc D combination occurs in 1 species.
a BC d combination occurs in_ 1 species.
a Bc d combination occurs in_ 1 species.
The other possible combinations of char-
acters either await discovery or have never
existed.
A more concrete example of this is the
type of ribbing found in the pelecypod
family Glycymerididae. There are six pos-
sible combinations of radial ribs, or lack
of them, within the family.
1. Flattened main radial ribs with superim-
posed radial striae. This type of rib pattern occurs
in more than half of the 700 described species of
glycymeridids and is exemplified by the genus
Glycymeris.
2. Raised radial ribs with no superimposed
radial striae. This type of radial rib, with some
modifications, occurs in more than 100 species of
glycymeridids and is typified in the genera
Tucetona and Grandaxinaea.
3. Flattened radial ribs with no radial striae
superimposed. This type of ribbing occurs in less
than 50 species of glycymeridids and is typified
by the genus Pseudazinea.
4. Raised radial ribs with superimposed radial
striae. This type of ribbing is very rare but is
most often seen in some of the most primitive
glycymeridids.
5. Radial ribs absent. Less than 10 described
species of glycymeridids have this lack of ribbing,
typified by most species of Postligata.
6. Primary ribs absent but secondary radial
striae present. This is seen in a few species,
probably less than 10, of Glycymeris.
For some unexplainable reason, concentric
ribs are not present among the glycymeri-
dids or, at least, species having them are
as yet undiscovered.
The foregoing is admittedly a slight over-
simplification of the rib patterns in the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 9
Fic. 2—Typical distribution pattern of species
within a family or subfamily. Outer circle repre-
sents family or subfamily; smaller circles repre-
sent genera and subgenera; dots represent species.
elycymeridids. The fact remains that the
character of the radial ribs is one of the
best criteria for dividing the family into
genera and subgenera.
Another interesting morphological phe-
nomenon in the Glycymerididae is that
probably more than 99 percent of the
species have crenulations on the interior
ventral border. These crenulations may
have an adaptive significance in that they
may act as a supplementary locking device
for the valves when closed. However, if the
crenulations truly are an adaptive, rather
than genetic, character, is 1t not strange
that they rarely occur in the Limopsidae,
a family having similarly shaped shells
and the same type of hinge teeth? Addi-
tional genetic inferences may be drawn from
the fact that although few glycymeridids
lack radial ribs and even fewer lack crenu-
lations, these two negative characters gen-
erally occur together in the same species,
possibly indicating that they are genetically
linked.
The phenomenon of genetic linkage is an
indisputable basis for the commonness of
certain combinations of morphologic char-
acters and the scarcity of other combina-
tions. If linkage is combined with one or
more inversions, crossing over will be in-
hibited, and there is then little likelihood
SEPTEMBER 1958
that new combinations of morphologic char-
acters will appear. Undoubtedly there are
other genetic reasons, but the fact that there
are more genes than chromosomes is cer-
tainly significant in the commonness of
some combinations of morphologic charac-
ters and the scarcity or absence of others.
J. C. Willis in his book Age and area
(1922) has been credited with the idea that
the size of genera and higher categories is
exemplified statistically by “the hollow
curve of distribution.” (Lotka, 1956, p.
313, calls the hollow curve a “hyperbola of
the generalized type.’’) Briefly the idea of
the hollow curve is this: If, for example, a
family of 1,000 described species having 50
genera is examined, it is generally noted
that there will be one, occasionally two,
large genera containing perhaps half the
species; the next genus, although fairly
large, may contain only 250 species; the
next will have about 150; then there will
be many genera with a few species; and
finally the pleurality of genera will be
monotypic. When the number of genera is
plotted against the number of species in
each genus, a hollow curve is derived. Two
hollow curves are shown in figure 1. An-
other hollow curve could be made by
plotting the number of orders against the
number of families in each order of
mammals on the data given by Simpson
(1945, p. 35). For other hollow curves see
Ferris (1928, p. 115) and Willis (1949, pp.
260-261). For a good review of the hollow
curve distribution see Chamberlin (1924,
pp. 350-374).
Another way in which the distribution
of a species can be depicted (figure 2) is by
drawing a circle to represent a family.
Within the large circle are smaller circles
representing genera. Within each of the
smaller circles are one or more dots repre-
senting species. It will be seen that most of
the dots (species) occur in one or two large
circles (genera), while most of the circles
contain very few dots. This portrays the
morphologic affinities of species within a
family.
The significance of this short review of
the hollow curve of distribution and related
ideas is to show that in nature, from the
standpoint of numbers of species, there are
NICOL: PELECYPOD CLASSIFICATION
291
a few large genera, families, and groups of
higher rank. At each level there is a much
larger number of modest-sized groups and
a still larger number of small groups. Most
zoologists strive for what they term a nat-
ural classification, by which is meant the
grouping together of animals on the basis
of phyletic relationship, when known, and
morphologic affinity—e.g., all gastropods
in one large group, all pelecypods in one
medium-sized group, and all scaphopods in
one small group. It cannot be overempha-
sized that large, medium-sized, and small
groups all are natural; and, returning to the
subject of the Pelecypoda, any attempt to
“equalize” the groups by splitting the vastly
polytypic genera or lumping together the
monotypic genera will ultimately discredit
the science of taxonomy.
CONCLUSIONS
There must be a distinct morphological
gap between a genus and its nearest rela-
tives. To put it more pragmatically, if a
species 1s morphologically assignable to
more than one genus, the genera have been
split too finely. The generic category is
basically nothing more than a key for the
morphologic grouping of species, just as
the familial category is a key for the group-
ing of genera. In other words, if a key can-
not be made to distinguish the genera from
each other on morphologic grounds, then
generic splitting has either gone too far or
been poorly done, or both.
The matter of size has nothing to do
with the case, except as Simpson uses the
word—to connote morphologic scope; one
genus may properly have as many as 1,500
species and another in the same family may
have but one species. If the genus is an
artificial category, as so many of the modern
taxonomists insist, at least it should be a
pragmatic category; otherwise it is useless
and meaningless. Such statements as “for
practical reasons the genus, to be a econ-
venient category in taxonomy, must in gen-
eral be neither too large nor too small”
(Thorpe, 1940, p. 357) have little taxonomic
merit, despite the fact that this statement
has been quoted and, by implication, en-
dorsed by Mayr (1942, p. 283) and Mar-
wick (1957a, p. 12). I see no convenience
292
in arbitrarily assigning a quota of species
to each genus. On the contrary, considerable
inconvenience arises when, as often happens,
the genera are delimited so finely and on
such tenuous grounds that a single species
is allocable to more than one genus. Also,
from the standpoint of a phylogenetic clas-
sification, this artificial uniformity of size
does not make any sense. The genus should
stand for a concept of morphologic char-
acters just as much as the species. The word
“convenience” has been used with great
regularity when discussing sizes of genera
and higher categories in papers on taxonomy
written in the past 15 years. I must ask:
What is “convenient” about having genera
all the same size? For whom is this “con-
venient?”
On the same page Thorpe decries “that
reductio ad absurdum the monotypic genus.”
It would be interesting to see what he would
do with the monotypic genus Huloxa, which
various paleontologists have placed in at
least three different pelecypod families. If
Eulozxa is so distinctive that even its family
is doubtful, how could it be incorporated
into another genus?
The problem, then, is to find a reasonable
mean between the extremes of splitting and
combining. When should a new genus be
proposed? As a good “rule of thumb,” if a
taxonomist believes he has discovered an
undescribed genus, having canvassed the
literature in the field and found nothing like
it previously described, the more difficulty
he has in placing it in a family, the more
likely it is that he has actually discovered
an undescribed genus. This thought is cer-
tainly not an original one; most taxono-
mists use it either consciously or sub-
consciously.
Recent workers in the field of taxonomy
would do well to read the chapter on Classi-
fication (pp. 108-127) im the late G. EF.
Ferris’ excellent work, The Principles of
Systematic Entomology, which was pub-
lished in 1928. Ferris (p. 111) makes one
point which every taxonomist should re-
member:
To divide a genus artificially merely for the
sake of “convenience” is the negation of scientific
method. If there are actually five hundred species
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, NO. 9
in any group so closely related that their rela-
tionships can best be expressed by keeping them
in a single genus it were inexcusable from any
scientific point of view to break up the genus
merely to get smaller groups.
On page 123 Ferris makes another good
point.
It has already been indicated—but it may here
be repeated with greater emphasis—that the
essence of classification is grouping. The genus is
essentially a growp of closely related species. It is
clear then that the tendency should be rather to
hold species together—to conserve groups—than
to separate them, unless that separation be the
separation of groups. In other words, the mono-
typic genus, 7n general, is undesirable. This is not
to say that monotypic genera should never be
named, for there unquestionably are numerous
forms so isolated from their nearest known rela-
tives that to insist on keeping them attached to
another group merely to avoid naming a mono-
typic genus would merely obscure the fact of
their divergence.
There is no field of biology where good
judgment and the application of common
sense are more needed than in taxonomy.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The writer is particularly indebted to Dr.
Edna Dudgeon of the Department of Zo-
ology at Southern Illinois University for
some ideas in genetics.
LITERATURE CITED
Apams, H., and Apams, A. The genera of Recent
Mollusca, etc. 2: 661. London, 1858.
BartscH, P. The pyramidellid mollusks of the
Pliocene deposits of North St. Petersburg,
Florida. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 125(2): 102,
18) plse 1955,
BurcH, J. Q. Taxonomic characters in Mollusca.
Systematic Zool. 5(3): 144. 1956.
CHAMBERLIN, J. C. Concerning the hollow curve
of distribution. Amer. Nat. 58(657): 350-374.
1924.
Corton, B. C., and Goprrey, F. K. The molluscs
of South Australia, Part I. The Pelecypoda:
314, 340 figs. Adelaide, 1938.
Crickmay, C. H. Contributions toward a mono-
graph of the Trigonudae, I: Amer. Journ.
Sei., ser. 5, 24(144): 443-464, 2 pls. 1932.
DersHayes, G. P. Histoire naturelle des animaux
sans vertébres, etc., ed. 2. 6-7. Paris, 1835-36.
Ferris, G. F. The principles of systematic ento-
mology. Stanford Univ. Publ. Biol. Sci.
95(3): 169, 11 figs. 1928.
SEPTEMBER 1958
Finuay, H. J., and Marwick, J. The Wangaloan
and associated molluscan faunas of Kaitangata-
Green Island Subdivision. New Zealand
Paleont. Bull. 15: 140, 18 pls. 1937.
Grant, U.S., IV, and Gatz, H. R. Catalogue of
the marine Pliocene and Pleistocene Mollusca
of California and adjacent regions, etc. Mem.
San Diego Soc. Nat. Histo. 1: 1036, 32 pls.
1931.
TREDALE, T. Great Barrier Reef Expedition 1928-
29, Scientific Reports, Mollusca Part I 5(6):
209-425, 7 pls. 1939.
Linné, Kart von. Systema naturae, ed. 10, 1:
824. 1758.
Lorxa, A. J. Elements of mathematical biology:
465, 72 figs. New York, 1956.
Marwick, J. Generic revision of the Turritel-
lidae. Proc. Malacol. Sci. London 32(4): 144—
166, 70 figs. 1957. :
ARAUCANIAN WITCHCRAFT
293
New Zealand genera of Turritelliidae, and
the species of Stiracolpus: New Zealand
Paleont. Bull. 27: 55, 5 pls. 1957a.
Mayr, E. Systematics and the origin of species:
334, 29 figs. New York, 1942.
Newe.u, N. D. Fossil Populations (The species
Concept in Palaeontology, edited by P. C.
Sylvester-Bradley.) Systematics Assoc. Publ.
2: 63-82. London, 1956.
Stmpson, G.G. The principles of classification and
a classification of mammals. Bull. Amer.
Mus. Nat. Hist. 85: 350. 1945.
TuHorre, W. H. Ecology and the future of sys-
tematics (The New Systematics, edited by
Julian Huxley): 341-364. Oxford, 1940.
Wiis, J. C. Age and area: 259. Cambridge,
England, 1922.
The birth and spread of plants. Boissiera
8: 561. Geneva, 1949.
SannnennnnNIIRNOSesacs cee
ARAUCANIAN WITCHCRAFT
Witches, male and female, are potent, ma-
levolent figures amoug the Araucanian Indians
of southern Chile and Argentina. Each witch, or
kalku, had his personal supernatural formula
for doing evil, but occasional meetings are held
in the forest for exchange of professional ex-
periences. They may even trade secrets, which
apparently are only variations of generally
known formulae. The calling, however, is a
perilous one for the practitioner.
The prevailing witchcraft customs are de-
seribed by Sister M. Inez Hilger, Benedictine
nun of St. Joseph, Minn, in a report recently
issued by the Smithsonian. She carried out her
studies while on a research expedition among
the Araucanians.
A favorite point of attack, either for a fee
or from pure malevolence, is a wheatfield. ‘““The
medium used,” says the report, “is the mean of
any 4-footed animal and/or eggs, which are
bewitched and buried in the field.” If a crop
shows signs of failure there is little question on
the part of the owner as to the cause of what
must be done about it. An informant told the
investigator: “They will then search in the
field for meat—it is usually wrapped in a rag
and can be found. ... If they [the owners] find
the meat, they hang it over the edge of the fire
in the ruka so that it will dry up. This will
cause the one who buried it to dry up, also.
Others stick it full of needles and lay it in the sun.
The one who did the damage then feels the pain
of the needles. ... Soon after that a terrible
sickness will come over him. ... His entire body
will tremble. If the sun shines, he will go out and
stay in the hot sunshine [something not done by
sane persons].” |
According to another informant, “the kalku
can use eggs in place of meat, if he wishes to.
... After the bewitched meat or eggs are in the
field for several days, the wheat in that field
either turns yellow or shrivels up. If they find
the buried meat, they will hang it over a fire
and cause the person who did the damage to
shrivel up just like the wheat. ... But if the one
whose field was injured does not wish to take
revenge,...he will throw the meat into the
river.” The suspected kalku may be a close
relative or even a personal friend.
Once the meat is found the unfortunate kalku
can be kept on tenterhooks, however, for as long
as the intended victim wishes. As related by an
Arancanian school teacher, an old woman was
caught burying eggs and meat in the field of
her brother-in-law. He immediately dug up the
meat and hung it over a fire. The woman took
sick with asthma and began to lose weight. She
was sick for two years. By that time the man
took pity on his brother, the woman’s husband.
and threw the meat into the creek. As it took
shape slowly by absorbing the water the woman
gradually got better and finally got well.
In another area a common form of revenge
against the witch is to poke two sticks at right
angles through one of the eggs found in a field
and then hang the egg over a fire. The one who
did the damage will become blind or have an
arm paralyzed.
294
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 48, No. 9
HERPETOLOGY.—A new lizard of the genus Leiocephalus from Cuba (Squa-
mata: Iguanidae). Jerry D. Harpy, Jr., University of Maryland. (Communi-
cated by Doris M. Cochran.)
(Received July 25, 1958)
Barbour (1937) list four species of the
genus Leiocephalus from Cuba. One of
these, carinatus, is represented in the Ba-
hamas by a number of subspecies and the
Cuban population is now divisible into two
races subsequent to the description of
aquarius by Schwartz and Ogren (1956).
The form carinatus virescens of the Ba-
hamas has recently been introduced in the
United States in the vicinity of Miami,
Florida (Carr and Goin, 1956). The remain-
ing Cuban representatives of the genus
(cubensis, raviceps, and macropus) are en-
demic species which until now have been
considered monotypic.
A recent examination of Leiocephalus
macropus Cope indicates that it 1s more
variable than previously supposed and that
the population occurring south of the Sierra
Maestra Mountains is worthy of subspecific
recognition. The new form is to be known
as
Leiocephalus macropus immaculatus, n. subsp.
Holotype—US.N.M. 1388412 collected in the
vicinity of Ocujal, Oriente Province, Cuba, be-
tween August 29 and 31, 1956.
Paratypes—A total of 41 specimens as fol-
lows: U.S.N.M. 188378-86, Ocujal, vincinity of
the town spring, August 28, 1956; U.S.N.M.
138387, 138405-11, 138418-17, Ocujal, August
29-31, 1956; U.S.N.M. 1388388—98, from sea level
to 800 feet on the south slope of Pico Turquino
(near QOcujal), August 31, 1956; US.N-M.
138399404, Ocujal, near the town spring, Sep-
tember 1, 1956*; U.S.N.M. 81680, Rio Magda-
lena, 1930; M.C.Z. 42384, South of Pico Tur-
quino.
Distribution —All but one of the known speci-
*This much of the type series, including the
holotype, was collected by the author and the
following persons who accompanied him on a
privately sponsored collecting trip during the
summer of 1956: John E. Cooper and Clyde
Prince, of the Natural History Society of Mary-
land; Anthony Picciolo, Department of Zoology,
University of Maryland; and Donald Marlow of
Alexandria, Va.
mens have come from the vicinity of Ocujal,
Oriente Province, Cuba. The single exception is
from Rio Magdalena (Fig. 4).
Diagnosis —Generally similar to Lezocephalus
macropus macropus Cope, but differmg in the
following details: Generally a lack of union be-
tween the internasals and the anterior median
prefrontal (Fig. 1); a higher frequency of speci-
“mens with one or two median prefrontals than
with three or more; the absence in males of a
well-defined black shoulder patch (Fig. 2); a
moderate proportional difference in the head
shape of males (Fig. 3) ; an over-all dorsolateral
pattern of almost uniform light brown as op-
posed to the more metallic shades and variable
pattern of macropus macropus.
Description of the holotype—A male,
U.S.N.M. 138412, having a snout-vent length of
75.1 mm. Head length (snout to the anterior
margin of the ear) 17.8 mm. Width of head 13.8
mm. Head depth, 10.9 mm. Interorbital dis-
tance, 10.6 mm. Distance between the nostrils,
3.1 mm. Eye diameter, 3.4 mm. Length of fourth
toe, 19.8 mm. The tail is broken with only 10.9
mm of its original length remaining. The fore
limb, when appressed, reaches a point 2 mm
anterior to the hind leg insertion; while the
hind leg, appressed, reaches the middle of the
eye.
Head scales enlarged, smooth anteriorly be-
coming strongly striated toward the back of the
head. Nasals and internasals in contact with the
~!
t
OUD:::
Scns
pe
x
Leiocephalus m. macropus_ Leiocephalus m. immaculatus
Fig. 1—Typical head scales
SEPTEMBER 1958 HARDY: NEW LIZARD OF THE GENUS LEIOCEPHALUS
295
Fig. 2.—Diagrammatic illustration of the grading system used in studying differences in shoulder
markings of male Lezocephalus macropus.
rostrum. Internasals oblique, broadly in contact
with the nasals. Two median prefrontals, the
anterior one kite-shaped, the second hexagonal
and in contact with the frontals. Frontals much
larger than the frontoparietals which are dis-
tinctly asymmetrical. Interparietal about equal
to the anterior median prefrontal, bordered
anteriorly by three small anomalous scales. Parie-
tals in two pairs, the outermost broader than
the inner. Circumorbitals 7g; supraoculars 74.
Upper labials 8g, the third being somewhat
longer than the rest. Infralabials 747, the second
in contact medially with the second chin shield
and the anterior-most sublabial. An extensive
lateral nuchal pocket having a posterior skin
fold which becomes continuous with the dorso-
lateral ridge. A well-developed lateral fold be-
tween the legs. Scales of the shoulder and neck
region conspicuously small, but not granular,
indistinctly keeled. Dorsal scales strongly keeled,
ventrals smooth and much broader than long.
Dorsal scale keels in longitudinal rows in the
anterior dorsal region, but running obliquely
on the posterior and lateral surfaces. Seventy-
five scale rows encircle the body, and there are
63 scales along the middorsal line from the pos-
terior margin of the parietals to a point approxi-
mately above the anterior lip of the anus. Sub-
digital lamellae of the fourth toes, 2749.
The color notes refer to the specimen after one
year in preservation. Ventrally uniform bluish
white except beneath the hind limbs and tail,
which have a faint brownish hue. Laterally a
broad band of dark brown about 14 scales in
width. This band is darkest in the region of the
neck and on the sides of the head. Dorsally
there is a well defined broad band of light green-
ish brown mottled faintly with lghter brown.
The raised middorsal scales are somewhat darker
than the scales immediately adjacent to them.
The head seales are hight brown; but many of
them have been lost thus giving the top of the
head a grayish appearance. A small vertically
oriented white bar occurs over the insertion of
the right arm, but 1s missing on the left side. A
similar white mark, more or less horizontally
oriented, is located on the posterior margin of
each thigh at a point approximately one fourth
of the way from the base of the tail to the knee.
Variations in the paratypes—The snout-vent
length of mature specimens ranges from 44.6 to
83.3 mm. Females range from 44.6 to 65.2 mm
=
e—
O
FL
=
(a)
<<
au
==
FZ
=
a
ui
=
@ macropus
O immaculatus
9
5 INTERORBITAL DISTANCE 12
5
ef
Tra f
» INTERNOSTRIL DISTANCE
tr
—t 4 - a --
5 INTERORBITAL DISTANCE 12
Fie. 3—Graphic representation of head meas-
urements of the two races of Lezocephalus macropus
showing proportional differences in the males.
with a mean of 58.8; which the males range
from 63.6 to 80.3 with a mean of 73.7 mm.
The number of subdigital lamellae of the
fourth toe ranges from 27 to 32 in males with a
mean of 28.7; in females the mean is 28.2 with
a range of 23 to 30. The number of median
dorsal scales varies in males from 58 to 71 (M
63.7) and in females from 59 to 68 (M 63.6).
The males are uniform brown dorsally, gen-
erally without, but occasionally with an ill-de-
fined black shoulder patch. There is generally
a faint middorsal brown spot or cross bar in
the sacral and pectoral region. The throats and
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, No. 9
chins of adults are white or bluish; but young
specimens tend to have them strongly mottled
with gray. Occasional individuals have the chin
very light blue, flecked with ivory. The fe-
males are more variable than the males in color
and pattern, the dorsolateral color ranging from
light brown to grey, frequently with much light
cross mottling. The chins of females are usually
more mottled with grey than are those of the
males. All color notes refer to material which
has been preserved for one year.
Comparisons—The series of zmmaculatus has
been compared to 45 specimens of macropus
macropus in the collections of the United States
National Museum and Museum of Comparative
Zoology.
The two forms are most readily distinguished
by the presence or absence of a dark shoulder
patch. This is a sexually dichromatic character
strongly developed in males and occurring only
rarely as a poorly defined mottling in females.
A grading system for various modifications of
the shoulder patch was devised (Fig. 2) and
male specimens classified accordingly.
Class 1 2 3 4 5 No.
immaculatus 1 5 15 2 23
Macropus 20 8 2 30
If a separation is made between classes 2 and
3, 96 per cent of the immaculatus population
falls between classes 3 and 4, while only 7 per
cent of the macropus population is within this
range.
The use of head scales as a taxonomic charac-
ter in Leiocephalus is complicated by their fre-
quently anomalous arrangement. The accom-
panying diagram (Fig. 1) shows normal head
scale arrangements for the two subspecies. Only
the median scales anterior to the frontals have
been counted and these are collectively referred
to as the median prefrontals, although some
workers might consider the anterior one the
frontonasal, and the posterior one, in some cases,
might actually be a fragment of one of the
frontals.
The degree of variation in head scales is of
about equal magnitude in both sexes, so that
data for males and females have been combined.
Two head scale arrangements are recognizable;
in the first the imternasals are touched, thus
shghtly or completely separated by the ante-
rior median prefrontal; in the other the inter-
nasals and the anterior median prefrontals are
SEPTEMBER 1958 HARDY: NEW LIZARD OF THE GENUS LEIOCEPHALUS
not in contact. The first condition is referred to
as internasal type A; the second as internasal
type B. The two forms can be separated as be-
low on the basis of this character.
Type A Type B
immaculatus 81% 19%
macropus 12% 88%
The number of median prefrontals varies con-
siderable, but there is an observable shift from
macropus to immaculatus.
Prefrontals 1 2 3 4 5 No. Mean
ammaculatus 1 25 15 2 43 2.4
macropus 5 33 2 2 42 3.1
Although the means are close it is possible to
demonstrate an apparent difference. between
the populations based on this character through
the employment of the method of Ginsburg
(1938) for the separation of subspecies.
SAN LUIS @
Qt
oy S N
ae PICO TURQUINO®
»)
RIO PUERCOS
@/ CABO CRUZ
PORT TANAMO
PUNTO ICACOS
297
Prefrontals 1 2 3 4 5
immaculatus .023 581 .348 .046 . 000
macropus . 000 .119 . 786 .048 .048
Least overlap . 000 .199 . 348 046 . 000
The raw data have been converted to per-
centage figures and the percentage of least over-
lap noted for each unit. When these percentages
are summed and divided by two, the resultant
figure represents the average intergradation be-
tween the two populations. This figure is 0.256
and falls very close to Ginsburg’s percentage
limit for subspecies (25 percent).
Intrasubspecific variations in the arrange-
ment and number of anterior head scales occur
frequently in both macropus and immaculatus,
but these tend to follow basically recognizable
patterns (Fig. 5). Note the intergradation repre-
sented in parts D, K, and L of this figure.
BARACOA
@ MONTE VERDE
@ GUANTANAMO
SN,
BS thle SS
E50!
7A
Fia. 4.—Map of Oriente Province, Cuba, showing localities mentioned in the text plus the Sierra
Maestra Mountains south of which Letocephals macropus immaculatus occurs.
VOL. 48, No. 9
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
298
Fig. 5—Characteristic variations in the head scales of Leiocephalus macropus. A-F, macropus mac-
macropus immaculatus. (The basic scale diagram was taken from Barbour and Ramsden,
ropus. G-L,
1919, pl. 10, fig. 5.)
SEPTEMBER 1958 HARDY: NEW LIZARD OF THE GENUS LEIOCEPHALUS
A series of measurements was made, three
of which tended to indicate proportional differ-
ences in the head shape of males of the two
forms. The data for these measurements have
been plotted on scatter graphs and a line drawn
in each case that would give maximum separa-
tion of the subspecies (Fig. 3). The percentages
thus established are as follows:
Above Below
macropus 85% 15%
immaculatus 11% 89%
Internostril/Interorbital distance
Above Below
macropus 94% = t%
ammaculatus 16% 84%
Median head length/Interorbital distance
No distinct proportional differences are ob-
servable in the females as indicated by the same
data plotted for female samples.
Cochran (1941) points out that the chin
and throat patterns of Leiocephalus are excel-
lent characters for separating the numerous
subspecies of persontaus occurring on Hispan-
iola. Although these characters are generally use-
ful throughout the genus, they are of no diag-
nostic value in the present species since they
are subject to both ontogenetic change and re-
gional variation.
The type series of Leiocephalus macropus
macropus Cope —tThe 11 cotypes of Leiocephalus
macropus macropus in the collection of the
United States National Museum have not been
included in the foregoing discussion owing to
uncertainty as to the exact type locality. Cope
(1862) in his original description of macropus
gave the type locality simply as ““Hastern Cuba.”
Stejneger (1917) restricted this to Monte
Verde on the basis of an old label in the jar with
the cotypes. This label is no longer available.
There is, however, a Monte Verde shown on the
Military Map of Cuba for 1906, situated approx-
imately 17 miles northeast of Guantanamo. It
is reasonable to assume that this is the correct
type locality, but there will always be some
doubt.
US.N.M. 25819 best fits the measurements
given by Cope (loc. cit.) and is, therefore, desig-
nated as a lectotype of the subspecies macropus
macropus.
The cotypes in the U.S.N.M. agree with
Leiocephalus macropus macropus as herein de-
299
fined. Two of the specimens are males and have
well-defined shoulder patches. Data for the
other differentiating characteristics are as fol-
lows:
Internasal No.
No. Type Prefrontals
12254A
12254B
12254C
12254D
25812
24826
25820
25919
25822
25823
25825
ie)
io)
m4
eo
40 40 10 Qi 10 40 10 10 10 10 Q
eof cvllcoll oil cca aloeiloe veil voll cx)
® ew ew & We wD WH RP
The single eotype in the collection of the
Museum of Compatative Zoology has not been
examined.
Specimens examined—Specimens used in this
study include the type material of macropus and
immaculatus as listed plus the following speci-
mens of macropus macropus: U.S.N.M. 26769,
Santiago de Cuba, C. W. Richmond, April 24,
1900; U.S.N.M. 29793, San Luis, W. Palmer,
February 16, 1902; U.S.N.M. 29795, Baracoa,
W. Palmer, January 30, 1902; U.S.N.M. 29847,
Baracoa, W. Palmer, 1902; U.S.N.M. 59156~7,
-60-61, Guantanamo Bay, Henderson and
Bartsch, not dated; U.S.N.M. 804024, Port
Tanamo, Parish-Smithsonian Expedition, 1930:
US.N.M. 81671-2, 81674, Rio Puerco, Paul
Bartsch, 1930; U.S.N.M. 81681-4, Punto Icacos,
Paul Bartsch, 19380; U.S.N.M. 81688-9. Cabo
Cruz, Paul Bartsch; U.S.N.M. 138423, -25-30,
Cabo Cruz, J. D. Hardy, Jr., September 5, 1956;
M.C.Z. 11208, 11214, 12067—-70, 14020-22, Bara-
coa; M.C.Z. 11436-3838, Guantanamo; M.C.Z.
11435, Cabo Cruz; M.C.Z. 6922 (two speci-
mens) Santiago de Cuba; M.C.Z. 47048—9, Bara-
coa (Joar); M.Z.C. 42518, El Junque de Bara-
coa.
Discussion—The difficulties inherent in em-
ploying trinomial nomenclature to local popula-
tlons are, at present, quite great due to the
almost universally realized subjectivity of the
subspecies concept and the complete lack of any
real standards. At least three circumstances oe-
cur in the Cuban herpetofauna which result in
apparently distinct populations within the same
species. The first of these is the simple cline.
Such a cline has been pointed out by Cochran
(1941) who demonstrates a gradual increase
from east to west in the number of ventrals in
300
the snake T'yphlops lumbricalis. Likewise, it is
becoming increasingly obvious that the two
named subspecies of Alsophis angulifer repre-
sent such a cline with no distinct breaks clearly
in evidence. The second circumstance involves
highly variable species in which local popula-
tions seem unique. Thus several “new species’’
of Hyla have been named from Cuba all of
which are currently in the synonomy of the
quite variable Hyla septentrionalis. The third
condition, and certainly the one to which a tri-
nomial can most validly be applied, involves a
number of quantitative and/or qualitative dif-
ferences all of which break along approximately
the same line in the species range, and in
which a definite physiographic or environmental
barrier can be correlated with the line of inter-
gradation.
The last situation seems applicable to the
population of Leiocephalus macropus immacu-
latus. The coastal area south of the Sierra
Maestra Mountains is exceeding narrow and low
and has been completely inundated by the sea
within comparatively recent geological times.
The flooding was apparently sufficient to make
islands of the high mountain peaks and cause
isolation of formerly continuous, homogeneous
populations. Presumably these populations di-
verged slightly and with continued isolation may
have evolved into full species; but with the re-
ceding of the sea they re-invaded the coastal
region and various degrees of gene exchange
with adjacent populations have since been pos-
sible.
‘The immaculatus population has remained
relatively stable as a result of its habitat prefer-
ence and limited vertical distribution. Thus far
it has been taken only as high as 800 feet in the
mountains, and probably does not occur much
higher. Its habitat includes relatively open for-
est, meadow lands and the sandy Coccoloba
forests just back of the beaches. The numerous
rivers, some of them semi-torrential, which flow
across the costal region, coupled with the dense
vegetation along their banks, probably are im-
portant limiting factors in gene exchange be-
tween zmmaculatus and macropus. Leiocephalus
is completely lacking along these river gorges
and is replaced in abundance by various anoles,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, No. 9
especially Anolis argenteolus. Allee et al. (1950)
suggest that populations of animals surmount
river barriers by invading their headwaters, thus
going around the river. Since the habitat of
immaculatus is limited to the lower slopes of
the mountains, this course seems improbable,
and the subspecies is at present relatively iso-
lated.
Acknowledgments—For the use of specimens
in the collections under their care, | am grateful
to Dr. Doris M. Cochran, of the United States
National Museum, and Dr. Ernest Williams,
of the Museum of Comparative Zoology. I
especially appreciate the many excellent manu-
script suggestions offered by Dr. Cochran as well
as her enthusiastic interest in my West Indian
studies. My gratitude is extended also to the
Personnel Department of the Smithsonian In-
stitution whose Summer Intern Program made
possible the laboratory work involved in this
problem.
LITERATURE CITED
ALLEE, W. C., Emerson, ALFRED E., Parks, Or-
LANDO, Parks, THomas, and ScHmipt, Karu P.
Principles of animal ecology, 837 pp. 1950.
Barsour, THomas. Third list of Antillean reptiles
and amphibians. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 82
(2): 77-166. 1937.
Barzsour, THoMaAs, and RAMSDEN, CHARLES T. The
herpetology of Cuba. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool.
48 (2): 71-218, pls. 1-15. 1919.
Carr, ARCHIE, and Gorn, Coteman J. Guide to
the reptiles, amphibians and fresh-water fishes
of Florida, 231 pp., 67 pls. 1955.
CocHrAN, Dorts M. Typhlops lumbricalis and
related forms. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci.
14 (8): 174-177. 1924.
The herpetology of Hispaniola. U. S.
Nat: Mus. Bull. 177: 12393 5pisaet— 2040
Corr, Epwarp D. Contributions to neotropical
saurology. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia
14: 176-188. 1862.
GinspurG, Isaac. Arithmetical definition of the
species, subspecies and race concept, with a
proposal for a modified nomenclature. Zoolog-
ica 23 (3): 253-286. 1938.
ScHWwartz, ALBERT, and Ocren, Larry H. A col-
lection of reptiles and amphibians from Cuba,
with a description of two new forms. Herpe-
tologica 12: 91-110. 1956.
STEJNEGER, LEoNHARD. Cuban amphibians and rep-
tiles collected for the United States National
Museum from 1899 to 1902. Proc. U. S. Nat.
Mus. 53: 259-291. 1917.
SEPTEMBER 1958
ROBINS AND MANNING: MICRODESMIDAE
301
ICHTHYOLOGY.—The status and distribution of the fishes of the family Micro-
desmidae in the Western Atlantic. C. Ricuarp Rosins and Raymonp B.
Manninc, The Marine Laboratory, University of Miami. (Communicated
by E. A. Lachner.)
(Received July 24, 1958)
The family Microdesmidae encompasses
a widely distributed but little-known group
of tropical marine fishes. Placed by most
workers in the suborder Blennioidea, Gos-
line (1955) has recently suggested their
transfer to the Gobioidea. He also aligned
Gunnelichthys with the Microdesmidae
instead of with the Pholichthyidae or Chae-
nopsidae. Smith (1958) followed this ar-
rangement and (1) synonymyzed Paragobi-
oides with Gunnelichthys, (2) erected
Clarkichthys for Cerdale bilineata, (3) con-
sidered Clarkichthys, Muicrodesmus and
Gunnelichthys as subgenera of Gunnelich-
thys, and (4) changed the family to Gun-
nelichthidae (= Gunnelichthyidae). Earlier,
Reid (1936) had reviewed the species known
at that time and synonymized Cerdale and
Leptocerdale with Mucrodesmus. Clark
(1936), Myers and Wade (1946) and Kana-
zawa (1952) have also contributed to our
knowledge of the family. Tentatively the
writers persist in maintaining Microdesmus
and Gunnelichthys as separate genera and
thus the family name Microdesmidae. We
do not comment on Clarkichthys.
At present, four species, Microdesmus
longipinnis (Weymouth), M. aethiopicus
(Chabanaud), M. woods: Kanazawa and
M. floridanus (Longley) are recognized in
the Atlantic Ocean. Of the four, aethiopicus
is known only from the eastern Atlantic
and, since we can add nothing to Reid’s ac-
count it will not be discussed further. The
other three, from the tropical western At-
lantic are especially interesting since they
represent the extremes of body form in the
genus, longipinnis the elongate form and
floridanus the short-bodied form.
Our interest in the Microdesmidae was
aroused by the capture of a specimen at
night using a light at the dock of the Marine
Laboratory, Florida (UMML) which an-
*Contribution No. 214 from The Marine Lab-
oratory, University of Miami.
swered equally well the descriptions of
longipinnis and woods.
We are indebted to James E. Bohlke at
the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia (ANSP) and to Leonard P. Schultz
and Ernest A. Lachner at the United States
National Museum (USNM) for the privi-
lege of examining material in their care.
Daniel M. Cohen loaned material from the
Florida State Museum at the University of
Florida (UF). Robert H. Kanazawa pro-
vided additional data on woods: from his
notes and Giles W. Mead provided the
X-ray photographs of National Museum
material. Material from the Alan Hancock
Foundation (AHF) was examined at the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadel-
phia where it was on loan to Dr. Bohlke.
Loren P. Woods provided information on
the holotype of M. woods.
Material examined.—Microdesmus longi-
pinnis: Louisiana: USNM 64157 (1 speci-
men, 208 mm. in standard length) , holotype.
USNM 64158 (1, 171), paratype. USNM
107251 (1, 119). USNM 107753 (1, 186),
USNM 117614 (2, 66-73). USNM 133654
(1, 46). Mississippi: USNM 121990 (1, 76).
USNM 121989 (1, 56). AHF unecat. (4, 40-
60). Florida: UMML 1901 (1, 170).
Microdesmus floridanus: Florida: USNM
102050 (1, 58), holotype. UF 7048 (1, 64).
ANSP uneat. (4, 42-65). Bahamas: ANSP
80576 (1, 38), ANSP 81371 (1, 32), both
from New Providence Island.
Microdesmus affinis: Panama:
84300 (1, 98), holotype.
Microdesmus longipinnis (Weymouth)
Tables 1 and 3
Leptocerdale longipinnis Weymouth, 1910: 142-
144, figs. 1-2 (description, type locality: Cam-
eron, Louisiana; type species of Leptocerdale,
good illustration).
Microdesmus longipinnis, Reid, 19386: 71-72 (char-
acters, relationships). Kanazawa, 1952: 95 (char-
USNM
acters, compared with afints and woodst).
Microdesmus woodsit Kanazawa, 1952: 93-95, fig.
302
TaBLE 1.—FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTIONS OF FIN-
RAY AND VERTEBRAL Counts OF Microdesmus
longipinnis (WEYMOUTH) (* INDICATES HOLO-
TYPE OF M. longipinnis, | THE HOLOTYPE OF
M. woodsi KANAZAWA). COUNTS SUPPLEMENTED
witH Data FROM WeyMmoutH (1910:144)
Dorsal fin ray
over origin
of anal fin
Pectoral
rays
Total dorsal
elements Anal rays
27/ | 28/ | 29/ 63 | 64
69) 70)71|72)41|42)43|44)45| 12 | 13 28 | 29 | 30
66/67/68
1) 2)6*
7/37] 1) 1/6* Bou Ge Sipe ey] By es fap) ae
5
TABLE 2.—FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION OF FIN-
RAY AND VERTEBRAL Counts oF Microdesmus
floridanus (LONGLEY AND HILDEBRAND) (* IN-
DICATES HOLOTYPE)
Dorsal fin
Total dorsal Pectoral ray over Verte-
elements Anal rays rays origin of brae
anal fin
43 | 44] 45] 46) 27) 28) 29) 30) 31) 13 14
ZZ ora
16/17 |17/18| 45
1B} Bp i
13 (description, type locality: St. David’s Is-
land, Bermuda).
Fin-ray counts and morphometric data are
provided in Tables 1 and 3. Of the material
listed above from which our data were taken
only two are from the type series. The other
10 paratypes are at Stanford University (SU
2139) as noted by Bohlke (1953: 100). Dorsal-
and anal-ray counts listed by Weymouth (1910:
144) have been added to Table 1. Despite the
completeness of the description and the excellent
figure of the holotype there has been consider-
able confusion about longipinnis. The body
form depicted by Reid (1936: fig. 9g) is much
too slim and is either based on a badly preserved
specimen or was poorly executed. Similarly,
Reid’s (1936: fig. 12c) figure of the head of
longipinnis shows too sharp a snout. The data
on depth of body and head length as described
by Weymouth (1910: 144) and by Reid (1936:
71) disagree. For example Weymouth expressed
body depth in terms of total length which
should yield a higher figure. However, the range
of variation shown by him, 24 to 33', is
lower than the 28.3 to 34.4 listed by Reid (based
on the same material) in terms of standard
length. The length of head presents a similar
picture. The two specimens from the type series
examined by us are in poor condition, their
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, NO. 9
bellies much shrunken and the body flaccid. In
elongate fishes such as the microdesmids, changes
in body conditions will profoundly affect mor-
phometrie data. This is especially true when one
attempts to express a small body part in terms
of the very long body. In a fresh specimen
(UMML 1901) the greatest body depth entered
standard and total lengths 20.0 and 21.2 times
respectively. Comparable data for head length
were 12.6 and 13.3.
Since the collection on which Weymouth’s de-
scription was based was made in 1906 consider-
able distortion of body form could have oc-
curred. Significantly, Reid’s data, taken many
years later, show even more distortion. Wey-
mouth’s data are presumably the more accurate.
Reid’s review indicates that there are corre-
lated differences in fin-ray and vertebral counts
and in body proportions for most of the species
of Microdesmus. A species in such a group based
only on a few proportional differences incites
some question.
Kanazawa (1952: 94) gives the following data
for woodsi: “Dorsal fin rays 71; anal 44; pec-
toral rays 18; ventral I, 3; vertebrae 63 (x-ray
count)” and later states (1952: 95) that “this
species may be distinguished from all others of
this genus by the number of vertebrae, the num-
ber of dorsal and anal rays, and the position of
the vent.” However, the dorsal, anal and pec-
toral ray counts are within the variation of
longipinnis (Table 1) and, although few data
are available, these are probably shared by af-
finis as well. Kanazawa lists 63 vertebrae (in-
cluding the terminal vertebra which bears the
hypural plate). Weymouth (1910: 142-148) lists
62 vertebrae and the hypural plate or a total of
63. Reid (1936) attributes 62 vertebrae (28
body and 34 caudal) to both affinis and longi-
pinnis but fails to mention if the hypural plate
was included. |
X-ray photographs were taken for USNM
64157, the holotype of longipinnis, USNM
107251, a specimen from Louisiana labeled
woodsi, and USNM 84300 the holotype of affinis.
Vertebral counts for these three specimens are
64 (31 + 33), 64 (30 + 34) and 63 (30 + 33)
respectively. The count for the holotype of
woods: (63) is not an unexpected variant and
is matched by one of the cotypes according to
Weymouth’s data.
Additional differences between woods: and
longipinnis were tabulated by Kanazawa (1952:
SEPTEMBER 1958
ROBINS AND MANNING: MICRODESMIDAE
303
TABLE 3.—PRoporTIONS oF Bopy Parts or Microdesmus longipinnis (WEYMOUTH) EXPRESSED AS
PERCENTAGE OF STANDARD OR (*) HEAD LENGTH
Pre-anal fin length
46 | 47 | 48 | 49 | 50 51 92 53 9 10 11 12
ee aml
Caudal fin
length
Pre-dorsal fin length
Greatest Depth at anal fin
Head length body depth origin
| WE |) © 7 8 3 4 5 3 ANS
— | 2 2 |—]| 2 tt if! 2 2 1 | 1
| |
Pre-vent Eye diameter”
95). Of them one stems from a clerical error for
Kanazawa (in litt.) notes that the 1.3 measure-
ment for the snout to anus distance in the col-
umn headed “longipinnis” should read 2.1; the
latter figure compares well with the 2.0 for
woodsi. The position of the vent varies about
the midpoint of the body. Thus the pre-vent
distance varies from 45 to 51 percent of the
standard length and the distance from the vent
to the tip of the hypural plate from 47 to 54
percent (see Table 3). The other differences as
already noted result from poorly preserved speci-
mens or are not of sufficient magnitude to be
judged of specific value.
Thus we synonymize M. woods: with M. longi-
pinnis. M. affinis from the eastern Pacific dit-
fers in haying a more restricted gill opening and
in a more anterior placement of the anus. It is
a close ally of longipinnis and additional mate-
rial may show that the two forms are conspe-
cific. Counts for the holotype of affinis are:
dorsal-fin elements, 69, anal rays, 43, pectoral
rays, 12, vertebrae, 63. Morphometric data ex-
pressed as percentages of standard length are:
pre-anal fin length 54, greatest body depth 6,
depth at anal fin origin 5, caudal fin length 6,
origin of anal fin to midpoint of hypural plate
45, and pre-vent 50.
All the specimens of Microdesmus examined
have 17 striated caudal rays. The number of
striated caudal rays may aid in aligning genera
and/or subgenera in the Microdesmidae.
Habits—The Miami specimen was taken us-
ing a night light at The Marine Laboratory
Dock and kept alive for a short time. The body
and particularly the fins were flushed with pink,
evidently a result of superficial blood circula-
tion. It was very active and swam much like
the worm eel, Ahlia egmontis, which was col-
lected the same evening. Subsequent night-lght
operations failed to yield additional specimens.
Range—M. longipinnis is known from the
northern Gulf of Mexico in Louisiana and Mis-
sissippi to southern Florida and Bermuda. Al-
though the material is limited, it is obvious that
this little known bottom fish enjoys a wide geo-
graphic distribution. The species has not been
recorded previously from Florida.
Microdesmus floridanus (Longley)
Tables 2 and 4
Cerdale floridana Longley, 1934: 259 (description).
Microdesmus floridanus Reid, 1936: 60-62 (charac-
ters, figures, relationships). Longley and Hilde-
brand, 1940: 275-276 (characters, fig. 24, gill slit
erroneously depicted). Myers and Wade, 1946:
165 (generic position).
As may be seen from Tables 2 and 4, M. flori-
dana differs markedly from longipinnis. A short-
TABLE 4.—PROPORTIONS OF Bopy PARTS OF
Microdesmus floridanus (LONGLEY AND HILDE-
BRAND) EXPRESSED AS A PERCENTAGE OF STAND-
ARD oR (*) Heap LENGTH
|
Pre- a
anal | Pre-dorsal fin Greatest | Depth at
fin length Head length body anal fin
length < depth origin
]
50 |51)52/18)19)20)21)22)23
_
4/15
16| 17] 11] 12] 13 10| 11] 12) 13
| |
|
Paar ae |
Te SUM WeTUL TU in ae GM Sates He ak Meath at ess ya eat eee Ml)
|
|
, 5 Anal fin origin to |
Caudan midpoint hypural | Pre-vent |Eye diameter
5 plate
| | ] fe ee a . r co
10] 11 | 12| 13} 14| 45| 46] 47 | 48 | 49] 50 | 49 | 50] 51 4 a 21
anal es Bile,
SS = s
PP SClou EIN Talal Sh ohaa ar Rep ahee | gett
{
304
bodied form with few fin rays and vertebrae it
is not surprising that it was placed in a separate
genus. Any single character including the gill
slit position appears to form a graded series
when Pacific and African species are considered.
All eight specimens examined possessed 17 stri-
ated caudal rays which seems constant for the
genus Microdesmus.
Range —M. floridanus is now known from the
Dry Tortugas, the Florida Keys (Big Pine Key),
and the Bahamas (New Providence Island).
LITERATURE CITED
BOHLKE, JAMES E. A catalogue of the type speci-
mens of recent fishes in the Natural History
Museum of Stanford University. Stanford
Ichth. Bull. 5: 1-168. 1953.
Cuark, Howarp Watton. The Templeton Crocker
Expedition of the California Academy of Sci-
ences, 1932. New and noteworthy fishes. Proc.
California Acad. Sci., ser. 4, 21(29): 383-396.
1936.
Gosting, Wiuuiam A. The osteology and relation-
ships of certain gobiord fishes, with particular
reference to the genera Kraemeria and Micro-
desmus. Pac. Sci. 9(2): 158-170, 7 figs. 1955.
Kanazawa, Rospert H. More new species and new
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vou. 48, No. 9
records of fishes from Bermuda. Fieldiana,
Zool., 34(7): 71-100, figs. 9-13. 1952.
LoneLtey, Wiututiam H.. Studies on West Indian
fishes: Description of six new species. Carnegie
Inst. Washington Yearbook 33: 257-260. 1934.
LoncLEY, WILLIAM H., and HILDEBRAND, SAMUEL F.
New genera and species of fishes from Tor-
tugas, Florida. Carnegie Inst. Washington,
Papers Tortugas Lab. 32: 223-285, 28 figs,
1 pl. 1940.
Myers, Georce S., and Wapr, CHartes B. New
fishes of the families Dactyloscopidae, Micro-
desmidae, and Antennarudae from the west
coast of Mexico and the Galapagos Islands
with a brief account of the use of rotenone
fish poisons in ichthyological collecting. Allan
Hancock Pacific Expeditions 9(6): 151-179,
pls. 20-23. 1946.
Rew, Eart D. Revision of the fishes of the fam-
ily Microdesmidae, with description of a new
species. Proc. US. Nat. Mus. 84: 55-72, figs.
9-12, pl. 2. 1936. ;
SmitH, J. L. B. The gunnelichthid fishes with de-
scription of two new species from East Africa
and of Gunnelichthys (Clarkichthys) bilinea-
tus (Clark), 1936. Dept. Ichthyology, Rhodes
Univ., Ichth. Bull. 9: 123-129, 2 figs. 1958.
WEYMOUTH, FRANK Watter. Notes on a collection
of fishes from Cameron, Louisiana. Proc. US.
Nat. Mus. 38: 133-145, 2 figs. 1910.
My dear collaborators, keep your enthusiasm, but let its inseparable
companion be rigorous control. Do not advance any idea which cannot
be proved in a simple and decisive manner. Cultivate the critical spirit.
In itself, it 1s neither a provoker of ideas nor a stimulant to great things.
It always has the last word, however—PAstTEur.
Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences
PRT see see De eas A. T. McPuerson, National Bureau of Standards
ert -CLECL 20.0 8 ee ee a Frank L. CampsBewu, National Research Council
EDI ET gS a Heinz Specut, National Institutes of Health
ECESUTED. «2.52 21s Howarp 8. Rappers, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey (Ret.)
EL ar aes Morris C. Lerxinp, Armed Forces Institute of Pathology
Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications
Haratp A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum
Elected Members of the Board of Managers:
Marramuary L900... hades. bee eee ee ee hee bee F. N. FRENKIEL, F. L. CAMPBELL
Memicmuary (960% 252). cscs one ees tea ss ee eee H. A. Bortuawick, T. D. STEwART
iorlanuary 196! . 22... 2... se tee ee: Bourpon F. Scripner, KertH JOHNSON
Board of Managers....... All the above officers plus the Editor and Vice Presidents
Efitire 5 ee en er Cuester H. Pages, National Bureau of Standards
Executive Committee.............. A. T. McPuerson, F. L. Campspeti, HEINZ SPECHT,
Howarp 8. RappLeyE, Lapisuaus Marton
Committee on Meetings...... GrorcE W. Irvine, JR. (chairman), Howarp W. Bonn,
Ciirrorp Evans, THomas D. Fontaine, L. G. HENBEST, Louis R. MaxweE tu,
Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent...........-. Lro ScuuBeErt (chairman),
Marcaret Prrrman, HERMAN Branson, W. J. YoUDEN, PHOEBE KNIPLING
Committee on Membership...... CHURCHILL EISENHART (chairman), JEROME CORNFIELD,
Sotomon Kuuupack, Wayne C. Hau, Exiiotr W. Montroiu, PHILIP Davis,
Ricoarp B. Roserts, THEODORE Prerros, Lawrence M. KusHNeER, WILBUR S.
Hinman, L. K. Downtne, JosepH M. CaLpWELL, T. Date Srewart, Joun A.
O’Brien, JR., Paut Bowman, Evperr L. Littie, Grorce Dickson, GEOFFREY
Epsauu, Marx K. Woops, Haroup EH. Finutey, EDwIN W. RoEDDER
Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Research. ...........--- B. D. Van Evera (chairman),
Harry W. WELLS, FRANKLIN YEAGER, MarGareT PATTERSON
Committee on Bylaws...... Haroup H. SHerarp (chairman), DorLAND Davis, ASHLEY
B. Gurney, James I. HorrMan, JASON SwWALLEN, HEINZ SpecuT (ex officio)
Committee on Monographs:
Momiemiany 999) foes. lane chee eee ge ALBERT LEE TayLor, W. W. WALTON
oetanuary 1960. 2.52.26. 5s 5. eee ee ee eee Ricuarp K. Cook, Paut H. OEHSER
hoadanuary VO6I.: 22.00.02. . os Dean B. Cow (chairman), J. P. E. Morrison
Committee on Policy and Planning:
eoramiiary 1909... ck oe nk ee eee ets MarGARET PittmaN, WaLpo L. ScuMITT
Miomlamuary, LOGO. 2. soe cg cee we oe ee ee ae R. E. Gisson, Joun C. EwEers
Mo wanuary 1961......... Francis M. Deranvorr (chairman), FRanK M. SETZLER
Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement: CHaRLES R. NAESER (general chairman)
For Biological Sciences...... Wiutuie W. Smite (chairman), GILBERT ASHWELL,
For Engineering Sciences...... Frank A. BrsEersTeIn (chairman), Howarp L.
AnpREws, JosePpH M. CaLtpweLt, MicuaEL GOLDBERG, Tuomas J. HICKLEY,
Tuomas J. Kruuran, Paut A. Smrra, Horace M. Trent, Bruce L. WILSON
For Physical Sciences...... Maurice M. SHaprro, VIRGINIA GRIFFING, LADISLAUS
Marron, Ratpn D. Mysrs, J. LEON SHERESHEVSEY, SHIRLEIGH SILVERMAN
_ For Teaching of Science...... Joun R. Mayor (chairman), Homer CarHart, JOHN
Coteman, Keita C. Jounson, PHorBE Kniptine, Howarp B. OWENS,
Committee on Science Education:
Momiauuanry 19004. 6422. dbg os es ace een nese = Arnoup H. Scott, JouN K. TAyLor
moreamumary LOGO s. 6 86 lo rece seen PuHorsEe H. Knrpiine, REGINA FLANNERY
Ror vanuary V9Gl. Vas... ss 3: Raymonp J. SEEGER (chairman), FALCONER SMITH
Committee on Public Relations...... Rosert D. STiesueR (chairman), THomas G.
CONTENTS
Page
Puysics.—The electrostatic field and the symmetry. of snowflakes. —
ROALD A BCHRACK 2. 3c teas 2-2 a 273
Matuematics.—A new characterization of group. Howarp CAMPAIGNE. 276 ,
Botrany.—Two species of Hibiscus from Texas. S. F. Buake......... 277
Botany.—Notes on South American phanerogams—I. Lyman B.
NMED © GR eh UH Ei Bape ts) 4
Zoouocy.—Trends and problems in pelecypod classification (the genus
and subgenus). Davin Nicon..........2:.-.. =<. re 285
HERPETOLOGY.—A new lizard of the genus Lezocephalus from Cuba
(Squamata: Iguanidae). Jerry D. Harpy, JR........ See 294
IcHTHYOLOGY.—The status and distribution of the fishes of the family
Microdesmidae in the Western Atlantic. C. RicHarp RosIns and
RAYMOND BoIVIANNING: . 2... Os cemo + 04.55.20 eee 2 Ae 301
Nores AND NEws:
Gyromagnetic ratio of proton redetermined..................-.- 280.
Araucanian witcherdit. 2.0.03 4..2.. 7). eee eee 293
: a ae
.DawWw2a3
VOLUME 48 October 1958 NUMBER 10
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
is
=
ceeteeteectetecter
“ Se
HSON;aS\
¢ “Y ‘
on one
Oa &
ie nail
{i oy :
( JAN 1.41959 |
y,
Published Monthly by the
ae oH INGTON ACADEMY: OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: Cuester H. Paas, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BAMForRD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonp, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL EsTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAx is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JourNnau and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors. —
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprints of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 33)4 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PROCEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. Reup=ER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year..........-..-..-+--+-+-0+:- $7 .50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol 10, incl:-—not available*:*.22.222-2-2- =. — —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $393.50.
Monocraru No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50 |
INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS...............----+++-++- $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete...............----.+--++-:5: $25.00
Single volumes; unbound... 5. 2.02... - 20.2 20509- 2 os 2.00
Sinele mumbers. os a5-5 o.u5e ao en ee ee tae ee Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘“‘Washington Academy of Sciences’ and
addr =ed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
DAC:
Changes of Address —Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Second class postage paid at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 48
OctToBER 1958
No. 10
MATHEMATICS—A note on the group commutator of A and A*. OLGA TAUSSKY
California Institute of Technology.
(Received September 17, 1958)
The following theorem (in generalized
form) was proved by Putnam and Wintner
[1] and Herstein [2].
TueorEM 1. Let A, B be nonsingular
n X n matrices over a field F of character-
istic zero; suppose that A commutes with
AB — BA. Then 1 is the only characteristic
FOOL Ol) Zi Wb waevay
This theorem gives a new and very brief
proof of the following theorem (see Putnam
[3], Kato and Taussky [4], Kaplansky in
Halmos [5], Kleinecke [6], Sirokov [7]):
THEOREM 2. Let A be a matrix with com-
plex elements and A* the transposed and
complex conjugate matrix of A. Then A
does not commute with AA* — A*A unless
the latter 1s zero.
Proof of theorem 2. Let A be nonsingular.
Assume that A commutes with AA* — A*A.
Theorem 1 applied to the case Bb = A* shows
that A~!1A*—1AA* has only 1 as a charac-
teristic root. Since this commutator is the
product of two positive definite hermitian
matrices it 1s similar to a diagonal matrix,
hence it must be the unit matrix. This shows
that AA* = A*A. In singular matrices we
replace A by A + rI where r is a suitable
number and J the unit matrix.
A more general theorem obtained by the
same method is the following:
THEOREM 3. Let A, B be n X n matrices
with complex coefficients. Let AB and BA
be hermitian and positive definite and let
A commute with AB — BA. Then AB = BA.
I. Kaplansky raised the question whether
the condition that AB and BA are positive
definite hermitian implies that AB = X X*
and BA = X*X for some matrix X. This is
the case. For AB and BA have the same
eigen values, hence are unitarily similar, 1.e.
AUG == (SAO™ ioe some wWamienay Ul lei
X = (AB)!U and the relations follow.
REFERENCES
[1] Purnam, C. R., and Wintner, A. On the spectra
of group commutators. Proc. Amer. Math.
Soc. 9: 360-3862. 1958.
[2] Herstemn, I. N. On a theorem of Putnam and
Wintner. Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 9: 363-364.
1958.
[3] Purnam, C. R. On the spectra of commutators.
Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 5: 929-931. 1954.
[4] Kato, T., and Taussxky, O. Commutators of
A and A*,. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 46:
38-90. 1956.
[5] Hatmos, P. R. Commutators of operators II.
Amer. Math. Journ. 76: 191-198. 1954.
[6] Kurreckre, D. C. On operator commutators.
Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 8: 535-536. 1957.
[7] Sirokov, F. V. Proof of a conje clure of Kaplan-
sky. Uspehi Matematiceskih Nauk. 11: 157.
1956.
Physico-mechanical laws are, as it were, the telescope of our spiritual
eye, which can penetrate into the deepest night of times past and to come.—
H®LMHOLTZ.
305
| SONIAN
Ean DECI 5 1998
306
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 10
MATHEMATICS.—On matrix commutators. R. C. THOMPSON, California Institute
of Technology. (Communicated by O. Taussky.)
(Received September 17, 1958)
Let M be an n row square matrix with
elements in a field F. Shoda [/] proved that
if F is algebraically closed, matrices A and
B with elements in F exist such that MW =
AB — BA if and only if trace M = O.
Later Albert and Muckenhoupt [2] removed
the restriction that F be algebraically
closed. In this note we shall obtain a more
special fact concerning Hermitian matrices
with complex coefficients and zero trace. It
X is a matrix of complex numbers, then by
X* we denote the conjugate transpose of X.
TuroreM 1. If M is a Hermitian matrix
of complex numbers and if trace M = O, then
a matrix A of complex numbers exists such
doc WL = AA = ALA
Proof. There exists a unitary matrix U
such that UMU* = D where D = diag
(d,, do, ---, dn) is a real diagonal matrix
with diagonal elements di > d2 2 --: 2
d, . Since O = trace M = trace D, we have
d, > 0 and d, < 0. It- suthces! to find B
such that D = BB* — B*B (for then we take
A = U*BU). We assume tentatively that
Os OP Orme)
B a
O @ Opt
OOO)
and we shall prove that the numbers 61,
--- . 6, 4 can be found such that D —
BB* — B*B. A simple calculation shows
(ieee: = B35 = Claw Clo, | Oe =
a Pe peat eet |AOr=>)erel Oenil
Since d; > 0 we can determine 0; such that
| bi 2 = di. By induction we find the re-
maining b;. Suppose that 61, 75 (ORS
(1 < k <n — 2) have been found such that
lh P= dy
| bo |? — | bi |? = de
| by |? — | bea |? = dh -
If digi + | bx |? => 0, we may select B11 such
that
| bets? —-| Del Sorcerer
Moreover, it is not possible that diy +
|b. |? < 0. For in this event we should have
dis < 0, and hence daa << Odea <9 0,
D9 5 Oh < 0. Since d; + otek s ae Gin =P Ut =
|b. 2 + dey: < 0, it would follow that
digests - + d, < 0, contradicting the
hypothesis that di + --- + dz = 0.
Thus we may find bi, “ee0;ueelete-
mains to verify that d, = —| 6,4 /. Since
d, + --- +d, = 0, we have
(Or)? eC |)b2)? =) |r aie
=F Giosen, P a | ba A2) == dy, a 0
and hence d, = —! 6,1 |?. This completes
the proof.
Note that there is considerable freedom
in the choice of A. We indicate two of the
possibilities in Corollaries 1 and 2 below.
Corollary 1. In Theorem 1 it 1s possible to
choose A to be nonsingular.
Proof. If I is the n row identity matrix,
then if D = BB* — B*B with B and D as
above, we have D = (6 > )(G5 waa
CB se TOU ae 10).
Corollary 2. With M as in Theorem 1,
complex matrices X and Y eaist such that
M = AA*= A+A and A — eae
Proof. From trace B = O, it follows that
trace A = O, and so, by the Shoda-Albert-
Muckenhoupt result, 4 = XY — YX ior
certain matrices X and Y with complex co-
efficients.
If MW is a matrix of real numbers, then
M* = M7, the transpose of MW. If M is real
and symmetric there exists a real orthogonal
matrix O such that OMOT7 is a real diagonal
matrix. Since the matrix B in the proof of
Theorem 1 may be chosen to be a matrix of
real numbers, we can establish the follow-
ing Theorem 1’.
Tureorem 1’. Jf M is a symmetric matrix
of real numbers and if trace M = O, there
exists a real matrix A such that M = AAT —
OcTOBER 1958 DETERMINATION OF ACETYLENE IN LOW CONCENTRATIONS
ATA. Moreover, we may choose A to be non-
singular or such that A = XY — YX for
suitable real matrices X and Y.
It was shown by Shoda in [/] that every
unimodular matrix with complex coefficients
can be expressed as the multiplicative com-
mutator of two matrices: M = C—D-!CD.
if D = C*, we have the following
fact characterizing matrices of the form
POCO =] (C*C)7CC*.
TuroreM 2. Let M be a unimodular matrix
of complex numbers. Then a matrix C of
complex numbers exists such that M =
OO) 0C 7 and only if M — HUH U~
where H is positive definite Hermitian and U
1s unitary.
307
Proof. Suppose that M = (C*C)1CC*.
Let C = UK be the polar decomposition of
C, where U is unitary and K is the positive
definite square root of C*C. Then M =
IK AGIA JEMUTE- IO i Val as ie
Comraneshn, mi IW ==) 16QUa-U xe
Ke Hand pun C — Uke bhen My —
(CROACG™.
The author wishes to thank O. Taussky
for suggesting these problems.
REFERENCES
[1] SHopa, K. EHinige Sdtze iiber Matrizen. Jap.
Journ. Math. 13: 361-365. 1936.
[2] Atpert A. A., and Mucxennoupt, B. On ma-
trices of trace zero. Michigan Math. Journ.
Zhe 1B, BY.
DETERMINATION OF ACETYLENE IN LOW CONCENTRATIONS
FOR AIR-POLLUTION CONTROL
A rapid, accurate, colorimetric method for
detecting and measuring minute quantities of
acetylene in air has been developed by the Na-
‘tional Bureau of Standards in cooperation with
the U. S. Public Health Service. Since acetylene
in the air is associated with the contaminants
from automobile exhaust gases, the method is
expected to be useful in the study and monitor-
ing of urban air pollution. The process,’ devel-
oped by E. E. Hughes and R. Gorden, Jr., of the
Bureau’s gas analysis laboratory, permits de-
tection of acetylene concentrations as low as 10
parts per billion. The equipment required is
simple and portable, so that the method is well
suited for field studies.
The first step in the procedure is to concen-
trate a measurable amount of the dispersed
acetylene by adsorption on silica gel. The quan-
tity of acetylene present is indicated by the
depth of color produced when the silica gel sur-
face is treated with a solution of ammoniacal
cuprous chloride. Then the exact concentration
is determined by visually comparing this color
with those produced by gas samples containing
known concentrations of acetylene.
1 For further technical information, see HuGHEs,
EK. E., and Gorpon, R., Jr., A simple method for
the determination of acetylene in air tn concentra-
tions from one part per million to ten parts per
million, Anal. Chem. (in press).
URBAN AIR CONTAMINANTS
A normal urban atmosphere contains a wide
variety of gaseous inorganic and organic con-
taminants. These come mainly from industrial
processes and vehicles—the internal combustion
engine is a major source of the organic con-
taminants. Although the quantities of water va-
por and oxides of nitrogen and carbon in ex-
haust gases have been determined, the organic
fraction of “traffic gas” has never been com-
pletely analyzed. This remainder contains nu-
merous hydrocarbons whose individual concen-
trations are too low for quantitative detection
by previously available methods. The develop-
ment of rapid procedures for the qualitative or
quantitative determination of such substances
has become of great importance for the early
detection of changes in pollution patterns of
certain areas. In particular, the analysis of cer-
tain substances—such as acetylene—which have
been found in relatively constant concentrations
in traffic gas, serves as a simple and practical
means of determining the degree of contamina-
tion.
Besides its use in the study of air pollution,
this method ean be applied to other industrial
or laboratory processes requiring the determina-
tion and fractionation of air constituents. For
example, accumulation of solid acetylene in lig-
uid air generators has caused numerous costly
308
and dangerous accidents. Although the permis-
sible level of acetylene in the intake air is quite
low, it can easily be detected by this procedure.
PROCEDURE
To begin the determination, a definite volume
of air contaminated with the acetylene is drawn
through a long, small-diameter glass tube con-
taining highly purified silica gel. As the air
sample passes through the tube, which has been
cooled to the temperature of dry ice, acetylene
is adsorbed on the gel’s surface. A column of
fine glass beads bounds the gel layer at each end
of the tube, making possible easier detection of
slight color changes. Because the acetylene col-
lects mainly on the initial portion of the gel,
the tube is allowed to warm to room tempera-
ture for a short time to obtain a homogeneous
distribution. An ammoniacal solution of cuprous
chloride—obtained by mixing a solution of am-
moniacal cupric chloride with hydroxylamine
hydrochloride—is then introduced into the tube
and the copper acetylide formed precipitates
directly on the gel surface. The resulting color
ranges from pink to brown, depending on the
quantity of acetylene.
When the concentration of acetylene in the
atmosphere is 10 ppm or above, detectable
quantities can be adsorbed at room temperature.
At concentrations below 10 ppm, the gel must
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 48, No. 10
be cooled to —78°C, the temperature of dry
ice. Because of increased adsorption at this tem-
perature, it has been possible to detect concen-
trations as low as 10 parts per billion.
The concentration of acetylene in the un-
known air sample is determined by comparing
the color of the unknown with that of a tube
exposed to a sample of known concentration.
Mixtures of acetylene and air for the compari-
son samples are made by succesive dilution of a
single gas mixture containing 1 percent acetylene.
Acetylene collected in the field can either be
treated with the reagent immediately, or stored
at a reduced temperature in liquid nitrogen and
then returned to the laboratory for analysis.
The final analysis does not have to be made im-
mediately, because the collected acetylene which
has been treated with the cuprous chloride solu-
tion can be stored for at least 48 hours without
apparent loss of color. |
In general, experiments indicate that this
method can identify total adsorbed quantities
of acetylene as low as 0.01 pg contained in 12
ml of air at a volume concentration of 1 ppm.
To detect an equal amount of acetylene at a
concentration of 0.1 ppm, it was only necessary
to sample a volume of air ten times greater.
Differences of 0.012 pg between specimens of
acetylene were easily observed in the range of
0.00 to 0.237 ug.
Even though nature has the better of man, seeming to keep many of her
secrets from him, he has an advantage of his own in that his thoughts may
soar beyond nature while yet not fully comprehending her.—GoeETHE.
OcToBER 1958
NICOL: NOTES ON PRIONODONT PELECYPODS
309
PALEONTOLOGY.—Notes on prionodont pelecypods. Davin Nicon, Southern
Illinois University, Carbondale, Il.
(Received September 4, 1958)
TIME OF ORIGIN OF THE PRIONODONTA
Newell (1954, p. 168) has given the first
known appearance of several of the families
and superfamilies of pelecypods. Unfortu-
nately, however, he gave only the geologic
Period in each case.
Data of a more precise nature on the
first known appearance of the genera and
higher categories of the Pelecypoda are of
prime importance and should be presented
when known. There are two reasons
why this information is valuable. One 1s
for the study of the phylogeny of the Pele-
eypoda. The second reason, which is the
more immediately practical one, is the ap-
plication to stratigraphy. This type of
datum would be particularly important in
regions where the stratigraphy is little
known. Most families and orders appear
quite suddenly in the record and become
abundant and geographically widespread in
an amazingly short geologic time. These
major groups are usually quite distinct
from their nearest relatives and can easily
be identified even by the nonexpert.
One such sudden arrival on the scene is
the very distinct pelecypod suborder Pri-
onodonta, represented by the genus Paral-
lelodon. The Prionodonta comprise the
families Parallelodontidae, Cucullaeidae,
Arcidae, Glycymerididae, and others. The
prionodonts suddenly make their appear-
ance in strata of the Hamilton Group of
North America and the nearly correspond-
ing (in time) Hifelian and Givetian Stages
of Europe. In more general terms, this
would be the Middle Devonian. Therefore,
we can now say that if a stratum contains
specimens of Parallelodon it probably 1s
not older than Middle Devonian. Further
study could probably delineate the first
appearance of the prionodonts more pre-
cisely.
ADDITIONAL CUCULLAEID GENERA
Because of the continual introduction of
new genera and the reranking or reallocating
of others, the study of any family of pele-
cypods should be periodically reconsidered.
W. H. Dall is said to have contended that
any generic review of a molluscan family
would be out of date and in need of re-
vision within 25 years.
My study of the Cucullaeidae (Nicol,
1954) lacks one subgenus and one genus.
The former I had overlooked, and the latter
was proposed after my paper was published.
To bring my work up to date, I now call
them to the attention of other paleontolo-
gists. This brings to 23 the number of
validly proposed genera and subgenera of
cucullaeids.
Pleurogrammatodon Ichikawa and Maeda,
1958, pp. 63-64. Type species (original designa-
tion): Pleurogrammatodon splendens Ichikawa
and Maeda, 1958; Upper Cretaceous, Campan-
ian and/or Maestrichtian; Awaji Island and
the Izumi mountain-range, Japan. Figured by
Ichikawa and Maeda, 1958, pl. 1.
Spinarcullaea Chavan, 1952, pp. 10-11. Type
species (original designation): Arcullaea (Spin-
arcullaea) cristata Chavan, 1952; Upper Ju-
rassic, Astartien = Kimeridgian; Cordebugle
(Calvados) France. Figured by Chavan, 1952,
THER RS BS Olle Tl, wes, IEE),
LITERATURE CITED
Cuavan, A. Les pélécypodes des sables astartiens
de Cordebugle (Calvados). Mem. Suisse Pal.
69: 132, 4 pls. 1952.
IcHikawa, K., and Magpa, Y. Late Cretaceous
pelecypods from the Izwumet Group Part I.
Cucullaeidae (Pleurogrammatodon, nOov.,
Nanonavis, and Indogrammatodon). Journ.
Inst. Polytech. Osaka City Univ., ser. G, 3:
61-78, 2 pls. 1958.
Newe .., N. D. Status of invertebrate paleontology,
1958. V. Mollusca: Pelecypoda. Bull. Mus.
Comp. Zool. 112(3): 161-172. 1954.
Nicot, D. Nomenclatural review of genera and
subgenera of Cucullaeidae. Journ. Pal. 28(1):
96-101. 1954.
310 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 10
BOTAN Y.— Notes on South American phanerogams—ITI. LYMAN B. Smit, Depart-
ment of Botany, U. 8. National Museum.
(Received September 3, 1958)
As in the previous number of this series, ing : ee stem cures
. . . r ac VW
the following notes are mainly the result of ing; leaves linear-lanceolate, shghtt
es enlarged at base...... 7. H. rivulare
revisions that were necessary to name some 9. Plant simple: stem erecemeernen®
of my own collections made in southern 10. Leaves attenuate at base, linear;
Brazil in 1956-57 with the help of a grant plant with many lateral leafy
from the National Science Foundation. The 1-flowered pe. = Oe
plate has been prepared by Dr. Robert J. 10. Leaves enlarged at base, linear-lan-
Downs, of the Plant Industry Station, U. ee Anes
S. Department of Agriculture. 11. Plant with many-flowered lateral
branches... .9. H. lorentzianum
Family GUTTIFERAE 11. Plant with few-flowered lateral
Hypericum lie Sp. Pl. 783. ior H. G. Reichardt branches; leaves 4 em long.
in Mart. Fl. Bras. 12, pt. 1: 181. 1878; R. Keller, 10. H. altissimum
Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 8: 175. 1908; Pflanzenfam. 8. The leaves broader or flat.
eel, 4, Palle iq, GPAs. 12. Leaves lanceolate, acute- or subacute.
11. H. brasiliense
KEY TO THE SPECIES OF EASTERN SOUTH AMERICA 12. Leaves oblong to elliptic, obtuse.
1. Leaves more or less perfoliate-connate, broadly 13. Base of leaf decurrent-clasping.
ovate; styles usually 5. 12. H. megapotamicum
2. Inflorescence 3-parted with a naked central 13. Base of leaf not decurrent-clasping.
peduncle and leafy laterals; leaves connate 14. Leaves rounded at base, 11 mm
for less than half their width. wide.....13. H. teretiusculum
1. H. subliberum 14. Leaves attenuate at base, much
2. Inflorescence uniform; leaves nearly or com- narrower.
pletely connate. 15. Sepals exceeding the capsule.
3. Leaves thin, subconcolorous, flat; inflores- 14. H. campestre
cence many-flowered. 15. Sepals distinctly shorter than
2. H. eaprifoliatum the capsule.
3. Leaves coriaceous, glaucous and black-glan- 15. H. laxiusculum
dular beneath; inflorescence few-flowered ; 4. Styles 3 or rarely 4.
styles usually 5, rarely 3. 16. Leaves reduced to minute subulate scales,
3. H. connatum appressed; branches of the inflorescence
1. Leaves not at all perfoliate, mostly narrower. strict, fastigiate; low herbs.
4. Styles 5. 16. H. gentianoides
5. Leaves imbricate, without axillary fascicles; 16. Leaves broader, foliaceous.
internodes much shorter than the leaves; 17. Plants low, soft, diffuse annuals; leaves
plants fruticose or suffruticose; inflores- ovate to oblong, obtuse.
cences 1-few-flowered at the ends of the 17. H. mutilum
branches; cortex friable. 17. Plants perennial with at least the bases
6. Petals 7-10 mm long; stems much woody; leaves mostly narrower, often
branched, to about 1 meter high. acute.
7. Leaves to 4 cm long, acuminate, rufes- 18. Flowers 5-6 mm in diameter; plants
cent beneath; pedicels 8-12 mm long. suffruticose.
4. H. meridionale 19. Leaves flat, narrowed toward base,
7. Leaves about 1 cm long, broadly sub- hnear, obtuse; sepals lanceolate.
AGWILG Hie ewe oe 5. H. sellowianum 18. H. myrianthum
6. Petals 15 mm long; stems simple or few- 19. Leaves revolute, enlarged toward
branched, 15-45 em high; leaves nar-
rowly lanceolate, concolorous; pedicels
2 amiine Ones se: 6. H. microlicioides
5. Leaves lax or with axillary fascicles; inter-
nodes mostly longer than the leaves;
plants suffruticose or herbaceous; inflo-
rescences few-many-flowered; cortex
base; sepals ovate.
20. Stem deliquescent, merely angled;
leaves lanceolate, acute.
19. H. pelleterianum
20. Stem erect, alate; leaves linear,
ObtuSe= sa eee 20. H. notiale
18. Flowers 10 mm or more in diameter.
mostly persistent. 21. Leaves broadly ovate or elliptic with
8. The leaves linear or linear-lanceolate, a cordate base.
revolute, obtuse. 22. The leaves 3-nerved.
9. Plant much branched at base and form- 21. H. cordiforme
OcTOBER 1958
22. The leaves 1-nerved.
93. Stem erect, 1 meter high; leaves
12-18 mm long.
22. H. rigidum
23. Stem prostrate; leaves 5-10 mm
long.
24. Leaves opposite; styles 3.
23. H. denudatum
24. Leaves ternate; styles 3-4.
24. H. ternum
91. Leaves narrower, not cordate.
25. The leaves oblong to elliptic or
broadly lanceolate, flat.
26. Inflorescence dense, many-flow-
ered, its bracts but slightly
reduced from the leaves;
fascicles in the axils of the
major leaves.
25. H. perforatum
26. Inflorescence lax, few-flowered,
its bracts greatly and abruptly
reduced from the leaves; fas-
cicles wanting in the axils of
the major leaves.
26. H. bonariense
25. The leaves linear, mostly revo-
lute.
27. Inflorescence many-flowered ; se-
pals 4-8 mm long.
28. Sepals 4 mm long, ovate.
27. H. polyanthemum
28. Sepals 7-8 mm long, lanceo-
JEN Wes eas anew ee 28. H. legrandii
27. Inflorescence very few-flowered ;
sepals 10-20 mm long.
29. Sepals pellucid-punctate, 10-12
mm long, equaling or ex-
ceeding the petals.
29. H. hilaireanum
29. Sepals black-punctate, 15-20
mm long. ....30. H. piriai
1. Hypericum subliberum L. B. Smith, sp. nov.
Fic. 1, a-f
Suffrutex, 6-8 dm altus, glaber, basi ramosus;
caulibus erectis, plerumque simplicibus, basi
teretibus, ca. 2 mm diametro, internodiis su-
premis ad 6 cm longis, inferioribus gradatim
minoribus; foliis late ovatis, subacutis, 20 mm
longis, 17 mm latis, basi breviter vel brevissime
connatis, integris, distincte plurinervatis, subtus
rufescentibus et dissite nigro-punctatis; cymis
terminalibus, latis, sublaxis, ternatis, ea cen-
trali submultiflora, pedunculo nudo_ praedita,
duabus lateralibus paucifloris, pedunculis folio-
sis praeditis; axibus valde compressis, ad api-
cem versus ampliatis; bracteis lineari-lanceolatis,
acuminatis, infimis 8 mm longis; pedicellis gra-
cilibus, ad 4 mm longis, suleatis; sepalis parum
inaequalibus, lanceolatis, acuminatis, 6 mm
longis, integris, 5-7-nervatis, nigro-glandulosis ;
petalis sepala subaequantibus, valde asymmetri-
SMITH: NOTES ON SOUTH AMERICAN PHANEROGAMS
oll
cis; staminum phalangibus quam petalis brevi-
oribus, 15-20-andris, antheris valde inaequali-
bus; gynaeceo 4.5 mm longo, stylis 5, gracilibus,
apice incrassatis; capsula ignota.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no.
2266168, collected in bog, 22 km west of Curiti-
banos on the road to Campos Novos, near mu-
nicipal boundary between the two, Santa Cata-
rina, Brazil, altitude 850-950 meters, December
5, 1956, by L. B. Smith and R. Klein (no. 8318).
Isotypes in Herbario “Barbosa Rodrigues” and
Museu Nacional do Rio de Janeiro.
Additional specimen examined:
Braziu: Santa Catarina: Mun. Chapeco: In
campo, Fazenda Campo Sao Vicente, 24 km
west of Campo Eré, alt. 900-1,000 m, December
27, 1956, L. B. Smith, Retz & Sufridim 9342-A
(SUBIR. IR, UIs).
2. Hypericum caprifoliatum Cham. & Schlecht.
Linnaea 3: 125. 1828.
Southern Brazil.
3. Hypericum connatum Lam. Encycl. 4: 168.
1772 Soba Rie Ws eBrasilk pl 612 1828:
Southern Brazil, Uruguay, Paraguay, north-
ern Argentina.
4. Hypericum meridionale L. B. Smith, nom. nov.
Hypericum rufescens Kl. ex Reichardt in Mart.
Fl. Bras. 12, pt. 1: 194. 1878. Not Lam. 1797.
Southern Brazil: Parana, Santa Catarina.
The Sellow collections which were the basis of
Hypericum rufescens Kl. gave no location be-
yond southern Brazil. Collections from the vi-
cinity of his route in Santa Catarina from Lajes
to Mafra show considerable variation, but Smith
& Klein 10665 (HBR, R, US) from Mafra agrees
most closely with the photograph (F 9141) of
Sellow material.
5. Hypericum sellowianum R. Keller, Bot. Jahrb.
58: 195. 1923. Not Kl. ex Reichardt in Mart.
Fl. Bras. 12, pt. 1: 189. 1878. Nomen in syn-
onymy.
Brazil. No state or locality given.
6. Hypericum microlicioides L. B. Smith, sp. noy.
Pres ft, g-t
Suffrutex parvus, facie MWcroliciam simulans,
elaberrimus, basi pauciramosus; caulibus erectis,
15-45 em altis, gracillimis sed lignosis, paucira-
mosis, anguste alato-quadrangulatis, maxima ex
parte denudatis, imternodiis 1.5-5 mm longis;
foliis liberis suberectis, dense imbricatis, anguste
lanceolatis, late subacutis, ad 15 mm longis, + mm
latis, haud glandulosis, integris, concoloribus,
anguste cartilagineo-marginatis, trinervatis, ner-
312 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 10
d
SS ie
WZ.
WW
Y
Ze
=
=
LSA
2s
ASS
aX &
2—
Ls
Zs,
ES
Vs oes
Fic. 1.—a, Hypericum subliberum, inflorescence, X 1/2; b, leaves, X 1; c, flower, X 1; d, sepal, X 1;
€, phalange of stamens, X 1; f, gynoecium, X 1; g, Hypericum microlicioides, apex of plant, X 1; h, se-
pal, X 4;7, gynoecium, X 1; 7, Hypericum rivulare, plant, X 1/2; k, sepal, X 1; 1, gynoecium, X 1; m,
Hypericum piriat, plant, X 1/2; n, sepal, X 1; 0, petal, X 1; p, gynoecium, X 1.
OcTOBER 1958 SMITH: NOTES ON
yis supra impressis, subtus prominentibus et
mediano basi alatocarinato; inflorescentus in
apicibus ramulorum terminalibus, unifloris vel
paucifloris; pedicellis 2 mm longis; sepalis ae-
qualibus, subfoliaceis, anguste lanceolatis, acu-
minatis, 12 mm longis, integris; petalis valde
asymmetricis, subellipticis, 15 mm longis; staml-
num phalangibus quam petalis subtriplo breviori-
bus, ca. 15-andris; stylis 5, gracilibus, recurva-
tis, apice capitatis.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no.
2266167, collected in alpine bog above general
tree line, slopes of Morro Iquererim, Municipio
of Campo Alegre, Santa Catarina, Brazil, alti-
tude 1,500 meters, December 10, 1956, by L. B.
Smith and R. Klein (no. 8535). Isotypes in the
Herbario “Barbosa Rodrigues” and the Museu
Nacional do Rio de Janeiro.
7. Hypericum rivulare Arech. Anal. Mus. Nac.
Montevideo 3: 109. 1898; Arech. Fl. Uruguay
1: 109. 1898. Pre. i, 7=l
Uruguay. The type is from the banks of the
Arroyo Tambores, Tacuarembo, Arechavaleta
s.n. (MVFA).
8. Hypericum linoides St.-Hil. Fl. Bras. Merid.
P3385. 1827.
Southern Brazil.
9. Hypericum lorentzianum Gilg ex R. Keller,
Bot. Jahrb. 58: 199. 1923. In note under H.
altissumum.
No specimen is cited, but there is a photo-
graph (F 9134) of Sellow 4341 (B) from south-
ern Brazil, that is labeled as this species. This
collection was cited under H. campestre in the
Flora Brasiliensis but is obviously different. The
characters of H. lorentzianum were not given
directly, but inferentially by comparison with
AT. altissimum.
10. Hypericum altissimum R. Keller, Bot. Jahrb.
58: 199. 1923.
Paraguay.
11. Hypericum brasiliense Choisy in DC. Prodr.
1: 547. 1824; Reichardt in Mart. FI. Bras. 12,
Othe ILS WCB, fol. CYS WSS.
Receveura graveolens Vell. Fl. Flum. 237. 1825;
Icon. 5: pl. 120. 1835.
lla. Var brasiliense.
Hypericum brasiliense var. angustifolum Rei-
chard in) Mart. El) Bras. 12, pt. I: 198. 1878:
Leaves ca. 3 mm wide.
Southern Brazil, Uruguay, Paraguay, Argen-
tina.
SOUTH AMERICAN
eo)
PHANEROGAMS Bil
11b. Var. latifolium Reichardt in Mart. Fl. Bras.
114, jou, Ile IB). Westies.
Hypericum punctulatum St.-Hil. Fl. Bras. Merid.
1: 334. 1827.
Hypericum brasiliense var. punctulatum (St.-Hil.)
R. Keller, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 3: 1126. 1903.
Leaves ca. 5 mm wide.
Southern Brazil.
Hypericum brasiliense is extremely variable
and extensive field studies are needed to define
its limits and those of the related species noted
here. Some of the latter are probably no better
than forms.
Ark.
12. Hypericum megapotamicum Malme,
BOs ABVA\5 no), 42 Ily, IBY),
Southern Brazil.
13. Hypericum teretiusculum St.-Hil. Fl. Bras.
Mende a 33ile. 1827.
Southern Brazil. This species was left as doubt-
ful and not keyed in the Flora Brasiliensis, but
a photograph (F 35261) of Saimt-Hilaire 1385
(P) indicates its affinity with H. brasiliense.
14. Hypericum campestre Cham. & Schlecht.
Linnaea 3: 122. 1828.
Southern Brazil. In its extreme form with
broadly rounded elliptic leaves, H. campestre
appears distinct, but there are many intermedi-
ate forms between it and H. brasiliense.
15. Hypericum laxiusculum St.-Hil. Fl. Bras.
Mende 3321827 selanta Use brass ple oe.
1828.
Southern Brazil.
16. Hypericum gentianoides (L.) B. S. P. Pre-
lim. Catal. New York 9. 1888.
Sarothra gentianoides L. Sp. Pl. 272. 1758.
Braziu: Rio Grande do Sul: In wet sand,
Osorio, Jan. 3, 1950, Rambo s. n. (US).
Hitherto the known range of this species has
been wholly in the United States, from Florida
and Texas to Maine and Wisconsin. It might be
regarded as an introduction in the southern ex-
tremity of Brazil, but Padre Rambo is sure that
its habitat indicates that it is native there and
the rather similar range of Proserpinaca palus-
tris L. (ef. Sellowia no. 6: 239, 240. 1954) would
lend support to the idea of its being an old dis-
junct of the coastal plain.
17. Hypericum mutilum LL. Sp. Pl. 787. 1758.
Hypericum euphorbioides St-Hil. Fl. Bras.
Merid. Ll: 3382, pl. 69. 1827.
314
Southern Brazil and adjacent areas, northern
Andes, eastern United States and Canada.
18. Hypericum myrianthum Cham. & Schlecht.
Linnaea 3: 123. 1828.
Southern Brazil.
19. Hypericum pelleterianum St.-Hil. Fl. Bras.
Merid. 1: 334, pl. 70. 1827.
Hypericum tamariscinum Cham. & Schlecht.
Linnaea 3: 124. 1828.
Southern Brazil.
20. Hypericum notiale L. B. Smith, nom. nov.
Hypericum parviflorum St.-Hil. Fl. Bras. Merid.
1: 333. 1827. Not Salisb. 1796, nor Willd. 1802.
Southern Brazil.
21. Hypericum cordiforme St-Hil. Fl. Bras.
Merid. 1: 330. 1827; Reichardt in Mart. FI.
Brass L2e pus | 190s pl e3s Gaal One:
Southern Brazil.
22. Hypericum rigidum St.-Hil. Fl. Bras. Merid.
1: 336. 1827.
Southern Brazil.
23. Hypericum denudatum St-Hil. Fl. Bras.
Merid. 1: 336. 1827.
Hypericum rigidum var. humile Reichardt in
Mart. Fl. Bras. 12, pt. 1: 189. 1878.
Southern Brazil.
24. Hypericum ternum St.-Hil. Fl. Bras. Merid.
1: 330. 1827.
Southern Brazil. This is another case where
a species treated as doubtful in the Flora Brasili-
ensis is clarified by a photograph (F 35262). It
indicates that the species as shown by Saint-
Hilaire 1585 closely resembles H. cordiforme in
habit.
25. Hypericum perforatum L. Sp. Pl. 785. 1753.
Native of Europe, widely naturalized in tem-
perate regions of North and South America.
26. Hypericum bonariense Griseb. Goett. Abh.
24: 41. 1879.
Northwestern Argentina. The specific name
would indicate the vicinity of Buenos Aires, but
I find nothing to verify such an eastern range.
27. Hypericum polyanthemum Kl. ex Reichardt
in Mart. FI. Bras. 12, pt. 1: 189. 1878.
Southern Brazil.
28. Hypericum legrandii L. B. Smith, nom. nov.
Hypericum ericoides Arech. Anal. Mus. Nac.
Montevideo 4, pt. 1: 18. 1902. Not L. 1753.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 10
Uruguay. The type is from Rivera. The new
specific name is in honor of Dr. C. Diego Le-
grand, Director of the Museo de Historia Natu-
ral, Montevideo, who has been most helpful in
clarifying the Uruguayan species of Hypericum.
29. Hypericum hilaireanum L. B. Smith, nom.
noy.
Hypericum tenwfolium St.-Hil. Fl. Bras. Merid.
1: 337. 1827. Not Pursh 1814.
Southern Brazil.
30. Hypericum piriai Arech. Anal. Mus. Nac.
Montevideo 3: 108. 1898; Arech. Fl. Uruguay
1: 108. 1898. Fic. 1, m-p
Uruguay. The type is from Pan de Azucar
near Castillo de Piriapolis.
DOUBTFUL AND EXCLUDED SPECIES
Hypericum anceps Larrafiaga, Eseritos D. A.
Larranaga 2: 239. 1923.
According to Dr. C. Diego Legrand, no her-
barium specimens of Larrahaga’s types now exist,
and it is doubtful that he ever prepared any.
His descriptions are inadequate for any positive
comparison with species already well known.
H. anceps may well be a synonym of H. brasili-
ense Choisy.
Hypericum botterr R. Keller, Pflanzenfam. ed.
2. Zl: 183. 1925. Nomen.
This species is included in a key and might
therefore be considered as validly published, but
the final heading includes it with two other spe-
cies without any distinction.
Hypericum carinatum R. Keller, Bull. Herb. Boiss.
Il. 8: 181. 1908.
There can be no doubt that this species is
validly described by its inclusion in a com-
pletely definitive key. However, no specimen
or photograph of it is now available, and the
characters given in the key do not distinguish it
clearly from the species in the foregoing synop-
Hypericum cyathifolium Larrafiaga, Escritos D. A.
Larranaga 2: 239. 1923.
As in H. anceps there is no type specimen and
the description is inadequate. Probably it is a
synonym of AH. connatum Lam.
Hypericum paraguense R. Keller, Bull. Herb. Boiss.
II. 8: 181. 1908.
As in the case of H. carinatum, the species is
validly published by inclusion in a key, but
without material or further description it is not
possible to place it in the present synopsis.
OcTOBER 1958 PITTENDRIGH: A NEW BROMELIAD 31!
OU
Borany.—A new bromeliad from the Northern Range in Trinidad. Coin 8. Prr-
TENDRIGH, Princeton University. (Communicated by Lyman B. Smith.)
(Received September 16, 1958)
The peaks of the Northern Range oi
mountains in Trinidad are covered with a
dense montane forest and in places with
Elfin woodland. These forests carry a rich
flora of epiphytic bromeliads including at
least one endemic (Vriesia broadwayt
Smith) and several other species (Glomero-
pitcairnia erectiflora Mez, Aechmea ari-
Fig. 1.—Aechmea downsiana Pittendrigh: 1, Asingle biramous spike; rhachis and stipes with a dense
tomentum. 2, Flower; note the deep epigynous tube; petal scales stippled; anthers not available on
the type specimen. 3 and 4, Sepal; note slight rugosity of carina. 5 and 6, Floral bract.
316
pensis (N. E. Brown) Pittendrigh,? Vriesia
Johnstonti (Mez) Smith & Pittendrigh)
which are known elsewhere only in the
similar forests on the mountains of the
adjacent Paria Peninsula and of the Island
of Margarita.
The only peaks in the Trinidad Northern
Range that have been thoroughly studied
are El Tucuche and El] Cerro del Aripo. A
collection made on the previously unstudied
Mount Chaguaramal in March 1942 re-
vealed the expected Glomeropitcairnia
erectiflora and Aechmea artpensis, and it
included a new endemic Aechmea described
below.
Aechmea (Aechmea) downsiana Pittendrigh,
Fig. 1
Acaulis, ad 1 m alta; foliis rosulatis, sub-
erectis, 6-10 dm longis et 4-6 cm latis, lgulatis,
acutis, spinose serratis; scapo robusto, ad 1.25
em diametro, erecto vel suberecto, densissime
albo-lanato; scapi bracteis membranaceis, inter-
nodia superantibus, ellipticis, acuminatis, in-
tegris, lanatis; inflorescentia paniculata, plus
=
minusve 15 cm longa, plus minusve 7
spec. nov.
em dia-
1 Aechmea aripensis (N. E. Brown) Pittendrigh,
comb. nov. Basionym: Gravisia aripensis N. E.
Brown, Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 53: 466. 1926.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 10
metro, dense cylindrica, apice late rotundata,
basi plus minusve interrupta; rhachi robusta,
lanata; bractels primariis eis scapi similibus, in-
ferioribus ramos superantibus, superioribus quam
ramis brevioribus; ramis in bractearum primari-
arum axillis binis, basi sterilibus nudisque, alibi
omnibus usque ad apicem fertilibus, dense co-
rymbosis, 10-15 floris; spicis paucifloris, genicu-
latis; bracteis florigeris plerumque quam ovario
brevioribus sed rarissime ipso aequantibus, late
cuneiformibus et valde mucronatis (mucro ad
4 mm), mucro incluso 11 mm longis, dense
tomentoso-lepidotis, nervatis, floribus polystiche
ordinatis, sessilibus; sepalis valde asymmetricis,
liberis vel ad 2 mm connatis, mucronatis (mucro
3 mm longo), mucro incluso 12-13 mm longis,
glabris; petalis liberis, 17-18 mm longis, caeru-
leis; ligulis binis 4 mm longis crenato-serratis
praeditis; filamentis ad apicem versus plus
minusve contortis; stylo stamina haud super-
ante, incluso; stigma trifida; ovario ellipsoideo,
8 mm longo, glabro; tubo epigyno 3-4 mm pro-
fundo, placentis apicalibus, ovulis obtusis.
Epiphytic in the Clusia intertexta association,
Mount Chaguaramal at 2500 feet, Trinidad,
C. 8. Pittendrigh 1301. Type in the U. 8. Na-
tional Herbarium. The plant is named in honor
of my friend and fellow bromeliad student Dr.
W. G. Downs.
All natural changes take place in such a way that the existing state of
things suffers the least possible change —Mavrertuis (1747)
OcToOBER 1958 DRAKE AND CHAPMAN: NEW NEOTROPICAL HEBRIDAE
al7
ENTOMOLOGY .—New Neotropical Hebridae, including a catalogue of the Amer-
ican species (Hemiptera) Cart J. Drake, Smithsonian Institution, and
Haroup C. CHapMANn, Rutgers University.
(Received August 26, 1958)
The present paper is based entirely upon
specimens of the family Hebridae in the
collections of the authors. It comprises the
descriptions of four new species of the genus
Hebrus Buchanan-White and one new Mer-
ragata Curtis, all inhabiting the Neotropical
Region. The allotypes, both males, of two
species of Hebrus recently described from
the United States are also characterized. The
catalogue enumerates a total of 40 species
from North, South, and Insular Americas.
Types of the new species are in the Drake
Collection (U. S. N. M.).
In order to facilitate identification of
species, the right parameres of 5 species of
Merragata and of 14 species of Hebrus are
illustrated. The male allotypes of H. amni-
cus Drake and Chapman (Fig. 1) and of H.
tuckahoanus Drake and Chapman (Fig. 2)
are also figured. Without illustrations, es-
pecially of male parameres, many hebrids
are rather difficult to identify. The combina-
tions of shape, sculpturing, and pilosity of
the parameres provide reliable characters
for the separation of the more troublesome
species. Parameres of several hebrids not
included in the discussions are also figured.
We are indebted to Mrs. Richard Froesch-
ner, Bozeman, Mont., for making Figs. 1 and
2 and to Mrs. Jerome Rozen, Alexandria,
Va., for the rest of the illustrations.
Because most species of hebrids at pres-
ent are known only in the macropterous
state, we are listing below the different
species (with distribution) represented by
either apterous or brachypterous forms in
our collections.
Apterous form: Hebrus tuckahoanus
Drake and Chapman (Fig. 2) is known so
far only in the totally apterous condition
from the type, allotype, paratypes, and a
‘Paper of the Journal Series, New Jersey Agri-
culture Experiment Station, Rutgers University,
State University of New Jersey, “Department of
Entomology.
few other specimens, all collected near
Tuckahoe, N. J.
Brachypterous form: Hebrus ammnicus
Drake and Chapman (Fig. 1) 1s represented
solely by short-winged specimens—holo-
type, allotype, and other specimens netted
near Calhoun, Ga. The wing-pads are very
long, with apices reaching beyond middle
of abdomen. Alate form is unknown.
H. merce: Porter (Fig. 6d) is represented
by a single brachypterous specimen from
Arizona (Oak Creek Canyon). H. consoli-
dus Uhler (Fig. 5c) is not infrequently taken
in both long- and short-winged forms. We
have many brachypterous specimens from
Florida (Cocoa, Mims, Center Hill, Apopka,
and Titusville). H. burmeisteri Lethierry
et Severin (Fig. 56) is probably more fre-
quently encountered in pterygodimorphic
condition than other members of the genus.
Brachypterous specimens of the latter are
at hand from Washington, D. C., Virginia
(Fairfax County), Pennsylvania (Phila-
delphia), New York (Long Island), and
New Jersey (Andover, Helmetta, James-
burg, Tuckahoe, and New Brunswick).
Merragata hebroides Buchanan-White
(Fig. 46) occurs almost always in the long-
winged state. However, we have brachyp-
terous specimens from Ohio (Ira), Florida
(Merritt Island), and Canada (Quebec).
On the other hand, M. brunnea Drake (Fig.
4c) 1s commonly found in both short- and
long-winged forms. Our collections contain
brachypterous forms from Ohio (Hebron,
Rockbridge, Prentiss, and Hocking County),
Michigan (Ingham, Livingston, and Wash-
ington Counties), New Jersey (New Bruns-
wick), and Florida (Center Hill, Orlando,
Indian River City, Union Park, Holly Hill,
Mims, Gainesville, and Titusville).
Distribution: Merragata and Hebrus are
the only genera of hebrids represented in the
New World, and all the 40 boat ribed species
are indigenous; VW. hebroides is by far the
vot. 48, No. 10
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
318
‘ad AqoT][V oye “DO 2® °C snuvoyoyon}, SnigaH—Z OA
OcTOBER 1958 DRAKE AND CHAPMAN: NEW
most generally and widely dispersed species.
Although originally described from the Ha-
waiian Islands (probably introduced there
from the Americas) it is an inhabitant of all
the Americas, save perhaps Chile. M. lind-
bergi Poisson described from Canary Islands
has recently been suppressed as a synonym
of hebroides.
As depicted in Table 1, the hebrid fauna
is richest in species in the Neotropical Re-
eion, especially in the tropics. The Nearctic
region is inhabited by 15 species and the
Neotropical by 31. Six species are shared by
both regions.
TABLE 1.—DISTRIBUTION OF AMERICAN. HEBRIDAE
Faunal regions ume
of species
Genus Number inhabiting
of species : Neo. BOtH
Nearctic tropical | regions
Merragata...... 9 3 8 2
A COIUS a ose a. BL 12 23 4
TOs . ua ee 40 15 ol 6
Merragata lacunifera (Berg) (Vig. 3)
Lipogomphus lacuniferus Berg 1879: 287.
Merragata lacunifera Champion 1898: 198.
Known only in macropterous form. Widely
distributed in Argentina, Brasil, Bolivia, Uru-
guay, and Paraguay. Often found in numbers at
the water’s edge of ponds, slow-moving parts of
sluggish streams, and quiet, secluded coves of
lakes. The male can be separated at once from
other members of Merragata by the subapical
spine (Fig. 3b) on the hind face of the posterior
tibia. The male paramere (Fig. 3a) is also dis-
tinctive.
Merragata accola, n. sp.
Macropterous form: Small, brownish testa-
ceous, with posterior part of pronotum and ex-
terior margins of scutellum tending to be black-
ish; hemelytra fuscous black with space between
closed cell and a short basal stripe within next
to mner vein brownish or testaceous; veins
blackish tending to become brownish basally ;
body beneath dark reddish fuscous with sterna
and pleura brownish testaceous. Appendages
testaceous. Length 1.80 mm; width (across hu-
meri) 0.72 mm.
Head 0.40 mm wide across eyes, with median
longitudinal furrow. Antennae testaceous, mod-
NEOTROPICAL HEBRIDAE 319
erately slender, with last two segments fairly
slender, sparsely and rather shortly hairy, meas-
urements) le 10h ih Se Ml 17 Ie 20s Wabi
long, extending to abdomen. Legs testaceous,
moderately stout. Pronotum very coarsely punc-
tate, width across humeri much greater than
~ median length (58: 32), with front lobe shorter
(14: 18) and narrower than hind lobe (42: 58)
with lateral sides of both lobes convex; front
lobe with collar set off by an encircling row of
pits, also with a transverse row of larger pits be-
tween lobes; hind lobe with several large pits,
broadly, subfureately impressed on median line,
with a double row of pits at bottom of furrow,
the humeral angles within marked off by a longi-
tudinal impression. Scutellum twice as wide at
base as median length (30: 16) with exterior
margins raised, with low median carina, with
apex broadly truncate and not bifid.
Holotype (male), Los Amates, Guatemala, col-
lected by Dr. Kellerman. Female unknown.
Narrower and paler than M. brevis Champion
with apex of scutellum truncate and not incised,
pronotum with double row of punctures in shal-
low median longitudinal furrow, antennae dis-
tinetly shorter. Separated from M. truzali Por-
ter by shallower median furrow of pronotum,
truncate apex of abdomen and antennal measure-
ments.
Hebrus amnicus Drake & Chapman (Fig. 5f)
Hebrus amnicus Drake and Chapman, 1953: 10.
This species was originally described from a
single brachypterous female, found hibernating
under a stone, Calhoun (Gordon County), Ga.,
411.1953. Recently the junior author collected
four males and seven females, all brachypterous,
from the same, tiny, spring-fed stream (type
spot) by washing them off of the wet, grassy
bank adjacent to the edge of the water into the
stream. Efforts to collect this hebrid on the sur-
face of the water before pouring water up on
the bank were entirely fruitless.
Brachypterous male (Fig. 2): Shghtly smaller
than female but with same form, color, markings,
and general aspect. Wing-pads long, reaching
beyond middle of abdomen, blackish fuscous,
with a very small, basal, pale spot on each side
adjacent to the scutellum. Antennal measure-
ments as in female. Allotype (Fig. 2) and a
paramere (Fig. 5f) of another male specimen
are figured. Macropterous form unknown. Length
2.10 mm; width (humeral angles) 0.70 mm.
320 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 10
Fie. 3.—Merragata lacunifera (Berg) (male): a, Right paramere; b, hind tibia showing subapical spine
Lely,
Fic. 4—Merragata, right male parameres: a, brevis Champ. (paratype); b, hebroides B.-W.; c, brunnea
Drake.
OcToBER 1958 DRAKE AND CHAPMAN: NEW NEOTROPICAL HEBRIDAE BVA
Fic. 5.—Hebrus, right male parameres: a, comatus D. & H.; b, burmeisterit L. & 8.5 ¢, consolidus Uhler;
d, tuckahoanus D. & C.; e, buenot D. & H.; f, amnicus D. & C5 g, limnaeaus D. & C.
O22
Hebrus tuckahoanus Drake and Chapman
(Wigs. 2; 5d)
Hebrus tuckahoanus Drake and Chapman, 1954:
152.
Originally characterized from two females,
collected by submerging vegetation growing in a
small drainage ditch in a fresh water impound-
ment and then dipping the specimens from the
water surface, 2.vi.1953, Tuckahoe, N. J. Since
the species was originally described, eighteen
additional specimens comprising both sexes, have
been taken in another fresh water impoundment
near Tuckahoe, N. J., 20.1x.1954 and 11.v.1958.
The latter specimens were obtained by splashing
water against the low, wet, grassy sides of the
ditch in order to wash the hebrids into the water.
Apterous male: Shghtly smaller than female,
with same form, color, markings, and general
appearance. Wing-pads also absent. Allotype
and paramere of another male (Fig. 5d) are
figured. Macropterous form unknown. Length
1.70 mm; width 0.70 mm.
Hebrus major Champion (Fig. 65)
Hebrus major Champion, 1898: 118, fig.
Hebrus acapulcana Drake and Chapman, 1954: 152.
As a study of more specimens of major and
of acapulcana from Mexico shows that these
two names apply to the same species, the lat-
ter is here placed in synonymy. (New syn-
onymy.)
Hebrus engaeus, n. sp.
Large, blackish fuscous with hemelytra lighter
in color, more brownish fuscous and marked on
each side with a small, basal, whitish spot ad-
jacent to scutellum; head, pronotum and body
beneath with some grayish blue pruinose, espe-
cially next to eyes; head and pronotum above
sparsely furnished with very short golden pubes-
cence, the basal part of hemelytra more abun-
dantly provided with slightly longer, golden
pubescence; sterna and median part of venter
clothed with short, yellowish brown hairs. Length
3.00 mm; width (across humeri) 1.05 mm.
Head moderately declivent, with median longi-
tudinal furrow. Labium long, pale fuscous, ex-
tending to venter. Antennae long, brown, clothed
with short, pale hairs, last three segments quite
slender, measurements: I, 28; II, 25; III, 29:
IV, 22; V, 20. Legs unarmed, brownish fuscous
with tibiae and tarsi blackish, clothed with short,
pale, pubescent hairs.
Pronotum with front lobe strongly concavely
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 10
constricted laterally, much wider across humeral
angles than at widest point of anterior lobe (55:
88); anterior lobe depressed, coarsely pitted,
with two rows of pits forming a shallow, median,
longitudinal furrow and also a pair of furrows,
one on each side of the median furrow; collar
short, set off by an encircling row of small pits;
posterior lobe transversely convex, with pits
largely inconspicuous, the humeral angles shghtly
elevated. Scutellum deeply impressed, with lat-
eral and hind margins carinate, with prominent
median carina, wider at base than median length,
rather sharply obliquely narrowed on lateral
sides to apical two-fifths, thence with lateral
sides slowly rounded, the apex bluntly rounded
and without notch. Hemelytra as long as the
abdomen, not completely covering connexiva;
veins raised, wide, the inner vein slowly con-
vexly rounded on inner and apical margins. Fe-
male feebly larger than but very similar in gen-
eral aspect to male.
Holotype (male) and allotype (female) , Tucu-
man, R. A., Argentina, 2,000 meters, 8.x.1948,
P. Wygodzinsky.
This species is a little larger than most of the
South American members of the genus. The
structure of the pronotum, shape of scutellum,
and especially the long male parameres are dis-
tinctive characters.
Hebrus lacunatus, n. sp. (Fig. 6h)
Small, dark brown tinged with fuscous, median
longitudinal part of head, scutellum and hemely-
tra largely dark fuscous. Body beneath dark
fuscous with venter black-fuscous and shiny.
Dorsal surface of head, pronotum and hemely-
tral veins sparsely furnished with tiny, scalelike,
golden pubescence. Legs yellowish testaceous
with upper face of femora largely dusky, clothed
short pubescence. Length 2.00 mm; width (across
humeri) 0.85 mm.
Head with distinct, median, longitudinal
groove. Labium extending between hind coxae,
flavous; bucculae flavous, sides of suleus dark
brown to dark fuscous. Antennae brownish testa-
ceous, clothed with yellowish pubescence, the
hairs a little longer on last three segments, meas-
urements: I, 13; II, 10; WI, 17; Vea
Pronotum much wider across humeral angles
than median length (64: 35), with pits largely
inconspicuous except on hind part of front lobe,
with a moderately wide, deep, longitudinal fur-
row extending posteriorly from just behind col-
lar to base of hind lobe, with a deep pit in
OcTOBER 1958 DRAKE AND CHAPMAN: NEW NEOTROPICAL HEBRIDAE 323
b
Fria. 6.—Hebrus and Merragata, right male parameres: a, H. nubilis D. & H.; 6, H. major Champ.; ¢
H. sobrinus Uhl. d, H. piercei Porter: e, H. concinnus Uhl.; f, H. catus D. & C. (holotype); g, M. leu
costicta Champ.; th 'H. lacunatus D. & C. (holotype.)
324
bottom of furrow between lobes; front lobe de-
pressed, with lateral sides forming a convex line,
much shorter and narrower than hind lobe;
humeri within set off by a longitudinal furrow.
Seutellum with median carina, rimmed on lateral
and hind margins, bifed at apex. Hemelytra
dark brown with a small, sharply defined small
basal white spot on each side of scutellum ; veins
dark brown, with apical vein closing cell black-
ish and sharply obliquely truncate. Legs moder-
ately stout. Brachypterous form unknown.
Holotype (macropterous male) taken in a
small, deep, stagnant pool near a river, Ciudad
Valles, Mexico, 8.viii.1950, C. J. Drake. Para-
type (male), Tampico, Mexico, 16.vii.1950, taken
in a small drainage ditch.
This species can be distinguished from H. so-
brinus Uhler by its smaller form, and the clearly
defined, small, basal, white spot on each side
of the scutellum. The parameres are also dit-
ferent (Fig. 6c, h). This species also resembles
H. limnaeus, n. sp. from southern Brasil, but is
smaller and also has differently shaped para-
meres.
Hebrus catus, n. sp. (Fig. 6f)
Small yellowish brown with humeral angles
and hemelytral veins brownish fuscous; mem-
brane infuscate with three, small, fairly distinct,
whitish spots; base of elytra between veins and
next to scutellum pale; body beneath yellowish
testaceous; dorsal surface sparsely provided with
tiny, scale-like, golden pubescence. Length 1.80
mm; width 0.70 mm.
Head with prominent, median, longitudinal
furrow; eyes coarsely granulate, dark fuscous;
labium yellowish testaceous, extending between
hind coxae. Antennae brownish testaceous, with
first segment longer than second, other seg-
ments missing. Pronotum with punctures be-
tween lobes moderately large and distinct, with
a wide, rather shallow, median, longitudinal fur-
row; front lobe depressed, much narrower than
hind lobe (42: 58), with the short collar set
off by an encircling row of small pits, with lateral
sides forming a convex line; hind lobe with punc-
tures largely concealed, transversely convex, with
humeral angles set off within by a shallow, longi-
tudinal furrow. Scutellum slightly wider at base
than median length, with distinct median carina,
with exterior margins rimmed, the apical part
rounded and notched at middle. Inner vein of
elytra with interior margin slowly rounded, ob-
liquely truncate at apex. Legs yellowish brown.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 10
Holotype (male), Canal Zone, Panama,
10239 8C) Je Drake:
The structures of pronotum and scutellum as
described above and the male paramere (Fig.
6f) distinguish this species from other Neotropi-
cal members of the genus.
Hebrus limnaeus, n. sp. (Fig. 5g)
Small, rufous-brown with median longitudinal
part of head, posterior part of front lobe of
pronotum fuscous; hemelytra with a small basal
white spot on each side of scutellum, with veins
blackish fuscous; hemelytral membrane dark
fuscous, without spots; head beneath, bucculae
and labium flavo-testaceous, the labrum extend-
ing between hind coxae. Legs flavus with dorsal
surfaces of femora and tibiae mostly dark
brown or dark fuscous, the pubescence short
and pale. Antennae brownish, pubescent, with
last three segments missing. Length 2.25 mm;
width 0.85 mm.
Pronotum with moderately large pits, those
between lobes larger than the others, with me-
dian longitudinal furrow, wider across humeri
than median length (68: 40). The front lobe
much narrower than hind lobe (48: 68). Front
lobe depressed, with lateral sides forming a con-
vex line, with a large pit in deepest part of me-
dian sulcus (almost between the two lobes) ;
collar very short, set off by an encircling row of
small pits; hind lobe transversely convex, with
a row of pits bordering hind margin, the humeri
moderately prominent. Scutellum incised at apex.
Hemelytra clothed with short yellowish brown
hairs on coriaceous part, with veins prominent,
nearly straight, with margin behind closed cell
obliquely truncate. Abdomen beneath blackish
fuscous, with matted, grayish pubescence. Male
parameres as in Fig. 1.
Holotype (male), Santa Catarina, Nova Teu-
tonia, Brasil, 26.v.1941, Fritz Plaumann.
The small white spot at base of each hemely-
tron and the male parameres separate it from
other Brasilian species.
Family HesripaE Fieber, 1851
Hebrides Amyot et Serville, 1843
Naeogeidae Kirkaldy, 1902
Type genus, Hebrus Curtis, 1833.
Genus Merragata Buchanan-White, 1877
Lipogomphus Berg, 1879: 286
Type species, Merragata hebroides Buchanan-
White, 1877.
OcTOBER 1958 DRAKE AND CHAPMAN: NEW NEOTROPICAL HEBRIDAE
. aceola Drake and Chapman, n. sp. Guat.
2. brevis Champion, 1898: 122. Mex., Guat., Pan.,
US. (Fla., Texas, Calif.)
3. brunnea Drake, 1917: 105. U.S. (east of Rocky
Mts.), Canada (southern)
4. hebroides Buchanan-White, 1877: 114. Amer-
icas from southern Canada into Argentina (not
reported from Chile); Hawanan Islands; Af-
rica (Cape Verde Islands)
foveata Drake, 1917: 103.
slossont Van Duzee, 1921: 133.
lindbergi Poisson, 1954: 2.
5. leucosticta Champion, 1898: 122. Guat., Nic.,
Pan.
6. lacuniferus (Berg),
Bol bara, Urug.
. quieta Drake, 1952: 194. Colom., Mex., Pan.
. sessoris Drake and Harris, 1943: 44. Bras.
. truxali Porter, 1955: 27. Mex.
Genus Hebrus Curtis, 1879
Naeogeus Laporte de Castelnau, 1832
1897: 287. Arg., Bras.,
Cc 00 ~IJ
Type species, Hebrus pusillus (Fallen) (as Ly-
gaeus).
10. amnieus Drake and Chapman, 1953: 10. US.
(Ga.)
11. beameri Porter, 1952: 9. U.S. (Kans.)
12. bilineatus Champion, 1898: 119. Mex.
13. buenoi Drake and Harris, 1943: 52. US. (N.Y.,
Nee Mass Va, Pa, Wash. D.C., Miss, Pla.,
Ohio, Mich., Wis., Ill., Iowa, Kans., Colo.)
14. burmeisteri Lethierry et Severin, 1896: 51.
Miexem Poe CN Ys IN J Pa Via, Md. Mass.
DCs CrGa. ila. Ky, Mich., Wis, lowa,
Mommi<an. Iill>)
pusillus Burmeister, 1835: 214 (in part, nec
Fallen).
15. eamposi Drake and Chapman, 1954: 151. Ecua.
16. eatus Drake and Chapman, n. sp. Pan.
17. comatus Drake and Harris, 1943: 53. US. (N.
Mex., Tex.)
18. concinnus Uhler, 1894: 221. W.I. (Grenada),
Peru, Pan, Costa Rica, Mex., U.S. (Mass.,
Neem Ne eas Md No Car, 1S, Car, lay
iP ColewArize No Mex. Calit. Okla, Wash.)
19. econsolidus Uhler, 1894: 222. WI. (Grenada,
Trinidad, Kingston, Jamaica), Pan., Guat.,
MiexeUrs: (lua, Miss. lay)
20. ecuadoris Drake and Harris, 1943: 55. Ecua.
21. engaeus Drake and Chapman, n. sp. Arg.
22. gloriosus Drake and Harris, 1943: 47. Bras.
23. hirsutus Champion, 1898: 119. Mex.
24. hubbardi Porter, 1952: 10. U.S. (Calif.)
25. hungerfordi Drake and Harris, 1943: 58.
Ecua.
26. lacunatus Drake and Chapman, n. sp. Mex.
27. laeviventris Champion, 1898: 120. Pan.
28. limnaeus Drake and Chapman, n. sp. Bras.
29. major Champion, 1898: 118. Mex., US. (Ariz.,
Calif.)
acapulcana Drake and Chapman, 1954: 56.
30. nubilis Drake and Harris, 1943: 56. Mex.
31. parvulus Stal, 1858: 60. Bras.
32. paulus Drake and Harris, 1943: 47. Bras.
BY45)
33. piercei Porter, 1942: 147. US. (Ariz., N. Mex.,
Tex.)
34, plaumanni Porter, 1952: 12. Bras.
35. priscus Drake and Harris, 1943: 57. Bras., Peru,
JPapor, Jeeyrezi,
36. pudoris Drake and Harris, 1943: 56. Mex.,
Costa Rica
37. sobrinus Uhler, 1877: 452. U.S. (Ga., Va., Tex.,
Calif., Vt., Ariz., N. Mex.)
38. suleatus Champion, 1898: 120. Pan.
39. tuckahoanus Drake and Chapman, 1954: 152.
Was, CNA)
40. usingeri Drake and Harris, 1943: 54. Mex.
LITERATURE CITED
Brrc, Carouus.
1879.
BucHANAN-WHITtE, F. Descriptions of new species
of Hemuptera-Heteroptera collected in the
Hawauan Islands by Rev. T. Blackburn. Ann.
Mag. Nat. Hist. 20 (4): 110-114. 1877.
BurMeIster, Hermann. Handbuch der Entomolo-
gie 2: 214. 1835.
Cuampion, G. C. Biologia Centrali-Americana
Rhynch. 2: 117-123, 12 figs. 1898.
Drake, Cart J. A survey of the North American
species of Merragata. Ohio Journ. Sci. 17 (4):
103-105, 2 figs. 1917.
A new tropical hebrid. Pan-Pacific Ent.
23 (4): 194. 1952.
Drake, Cart J., and CuHapman, H. C. Distribu-
tonal data and description of a new hebrid
(Hemiptera). Great Basin Nat. 13 G2) 2 9=
Il, aS.
New American water-striders (Hemip-
tera). Florida Ent. 37 (3): 151-155. 1954.
Drake, Cary J., and Harris, H. M. Notas sobre
Hebridae del Hemispheric occidental (Hemip-
tera). Notas Mus. Plata (Argentina), Zool. 8
(64): 42-58. 1943.
Letuterry, L., ur Severin, G. Cat. Gen. Hem.-
lle, Be Hl. WAG.
Poisson, Raymonp. Deux Hebrides (Hem -Het.)
nouveaux des Canaries. Soc. Sci. Fennica, Com.
Biol. 14 (4): 1-4, 2 figs. 1951.
Porter, T. WaynE. Three new species of Hebridae
(Hemiptera) from the Western Hemisphere.
Journ. Kans. Ent. Soc. 25 (1): 9-12. 6 figs.
1952. ‘
A new species of Hebridae (Hemiptera)
from the Southwest. Journ. Kans. Ent. Soe.
25 (4): 147-149, 4 figs. 1952a.
Brachypterous form of Hebrus consolidus
Uhler (Hemiptera, Hebridae). Journ.
Ent. Soc. 27 (1): 38-39, 2 figs. 1954.
A new species of Merragata (Hemiptera)
from Mexico. Journ. Kans. Ent. Soc. 28 (1):
27-28, 4 figs. 1955.
Stax, Cartos. Bidrag till Rio de Janeiro-Trakeens
Hemiptera-Fauna. Vet. Akad. Handl. 1: 60.
1858.
Unter, Puiutre R. Report upon the insects col-
lected by P. R. Uhler during the explorations
Hemiptera
Argentina: 1-316.
b)
Kans.
———__.
326
of 1875, including monographs of the families
Cydnidae and Saldidae, and the Hemiptera
collected by A. S. Packard. Bull. Geol. and
Geogr. Surv. 1877, 2: 355-475. 1877.
On the Hemiptera-Heteroptera of the Is-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 10
land of Grenada. Proc. Zool. Soc. London
1894: 221.
Van Duzsr, Epwarp P. Characters of some new
species of North American hemipterous in-
sects, with one new genus. Proc. California
Acad. Sci., Ser. 4, 11 (10): 11-144. 1921.
|)
ELECTIONS TO THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (1955, 1956)
(Resident members unless otherwise indicated)
January 18, 1956
MaxweEtt KENNETH CarRON, in recognition
of his contributions to geochemistry and ana-
lytical chemistry.
Ropert FRANKLIN DRESSLER, in recognition
of his original contributions to applied mathe-
matics, particularly in elasticity, aerodynamics,
and hydraulics.
Ricuarp Hersert Foote, in recognition of
his contribution to the taxonomy of Diptera,
particularly of the blood-sucking species.
Joun Prerer HaceEn, in recognition of his out-
standing research in solar and galactic physics
by means of the methods of radio astronomy.
Epwarp WILLIAM HAwTHORNE, in recognition
of his work on renal physiology.
Joun Drake HorrMan, in recognition of his
contributions to the physical chemistry of long
chain compounds and in particular his researches
in the theory of dielectrics.
Jerome Namias, in recognition of his out-
standing work in developing methods of ex-
tended weather forecasting and his leadership
in research in synoptic meteorology research.
Rotanp M. Narponeg, in recognition of his
research on the metabolism of Protozoa.
Laura E. RetcHen, in recognition of her
research work on methods for determining trace
elements and her contributions to chemical min-
eralogy.
CULBERTSON WHITFIELD Ross, in recognition
of his work on the structural behavior of ma-
sonry and reinforced concrete structures and of
clay building brick and for his work on the de-
sign of shore structures subject to wave attack.
Frank Lester Roru, in recognition of his
contributions to the physics and technology of
rubber and in particular his researches on stress-
strain-time relations, including his part in the
development of the strain tester.
Rogpert Homer Simpson, in recognition of
his original work in research in tropical meteor-
ology and the structure of hurricanes.
CHARLES VICTOR STRAIN, in recognition of his
significant contributions to nuclear physics, par-
ticularly in specialized aspects of atomic energy.
Wiuram ALBert ZIsMAN, in recognition of
his contributions to the field of surface chemis-
try, in particular his work on adsorbed layers,
and the discovery of means of preparing oleo-
phobic monolayers.
February 15, 1955
Cuarutes A. Dovcias, in recognition of his
contributions in the field of atmospheric trans-
missometry.
SamurL Newton Foner, in recognition of his
contributions in mass spectrometry and in par-
ticular his study of free radicals using mass
spectrometric techniques.
Rosert Boyp Hosss, in recognition of his
contributions to leather and paper research and
technology, and in particular his researches on
instrumentation and techniques for evaluating
the properties of these materials and products
made from them.
Joz Tuomas Massey, in recognition of his
contributions to microwave spectroscopy, par-
ticularly to the study of the internal rotation of
the hydrogen peroxide molecule.
Rosert JosHua Rvusin, in recognition of his
research work in chemical physics and in par-
ticular his contributions to an understanding of
the exuded volume problems.
Kurt Econ SuHuuer, in recognition of his
contribution to chemical physics and in particu-
lar his studies of reaction kinetics in flames.
SIEGFRIED Frep SINGER, in recognition of his
researches on cosmic-ray physics, the physics
of the upper atmosphere, and his contributions
to a better understanding of the age of meteor-
ites.
Zaka I. SLAwsky, in recognition of his re-
searches on hyperballistics and his contributions
to a better understanding of the effect of molecu-
lar forces in very dense gases.
HarrELL LeRoy SrriMp_e, in recognition of
his contributions to paleontology, and in par-
ticular his researches on Paleozoic Echinoder-
mata. (Nonresident.)
OcTOBER 1958
April 19, 1955
THomas WILLIAM AMSDEN, in recognition of
his work on Silurian fauna of Tennessee and
Silurian brachiopods of Tennessee, Oklahoma,
and Alaska. (Nonresident.)
CHARLES SHERRILL GILMAN, in recognition
of his scientific attainments as shown by his pub-
lished papers and his independence of thought
in scientific matters and activities in meteoro-
logical research and development.
ALAN JEROME HoFFMAN, in recognition of his
contributions to mathematics, in particular to
the new field of linear programming, of which he
is one of the principal representatives in this
area, and to numerical analysis.
Kermit WILLIAM KREITLOW, in recognition
of his contributions to plant pathology and in
particular his research on rusts, smuts, and
other diseases of forage crops.
Irving May, in recognition of his contribu-
tions to our knowledge of fluorimetric methods
for the quantitative determination of small per-
centages of uranium and thorium in rocks and
minerals.
Rees FERNEAU TENER, in recognition of his
ontribution to the advancement of rubber tech-
nology and to the development of methods of
test and specifications for organic and fibrous
materials.
_ ARNOLD WEXLER, in recognition of his con-
tributions to techniques of humidity measure-
ments by precise means in the laboratory and
by less precise but quick responding elements
in the upper air.
May 17, 1955
G. GILBERT ASHWELL, in recognition of the
discovery of two new 5-carbon sugars revealed
in studies of carbohydrate metabolism in spleen
extracts, one of which had been postulated in
photosynthetic reactions.
JEROME CORNFIELD, in recognition of his
contribution to the theory of the probit method
and his application of statistical methods to ex-
perimental biology and medicine, especially to
smoking and lung cancer, bioassay of endocrine
products, and photosynthesis.
Haroup F. Dorn, in recognition of his studies
of the distribution of cancer in human popula-
tions and the effect of public health measures
upon population growth, by statistical and epi-
demiological methods.
PrereR Herman HeEtnze, in recognition of his
work on the physiology of fruits and vegetables
and its relationship to their quality and nutri-
tional value, for his studies on photoperiodic
responses of plants and plant organs, and for his
contributions in the chemical analysis of plant
tissues.
ELECTIONS TO THE ACADEMY
o2/
Epwarp Frep KNIPLING, 1n recognition of
his contributions to basic and applied research
and to the direction of research on the biology,
taxonomy, and control of insects and other
arthropods that affect man and animals.
Oscar THEODORE MArzkE, in recognition of
his services to the field of metallurgy, especially
his able direction of industrial research resulting
in improved products and also the direction of
fundamental research in government laborator-
1€s.
DEWITT STETTEN, Jr., in recognition of stud-
ies on the metabolism of fats and carbohydrates,
particularly as related to metabolic diseases.
June 14, 1956
ALLEN L. ALEXANDER, in recognition of his
contributions to the protective coatings field, in
particular his studies of the relationship between
toxic pigment and organic binder in antifouling
paints.
L. L. ASHBURN, in recognition of his studies
on sulfonamide agranulocytosis, for recognition
of the cardiac lesions characteristic of thiamin
deficiency in rats, and for clearly differentiating
the anatomical sequence of events in liver cir-
rhosis.
GEORGE BRECHER, in recognition of his dis-
covery and study of gold thioglucose obesity,
for numerous studies on histopathology and
hematology of radiation damage, and for stud-
ies on parabiosis and transfusion effects in irra-
diated animals.
JOSEPH J. BuNIM, in recognition of his con-
tributions to the diagnosis and treatment of
collagen diseases and definitive studies of endo-
crine effects in experimental animals and man.
FRANCIS EUGENE CLARK, i1n recognition of
contributions to soil microbiology (particularly
to the microflora of plant roots, to the ecology
of soil-borne root-rotting parasites), to the ana-
erobic and aerobic sporulating bacilli and to the
soil corynebacteria, and to soil biology in rela-
tion to soil nitrogen and soil organic phosphorus.
NaTHAN B. Eppy, in recognition of his scien-
tific contributions to the field of narcoties and
analgesics and international leadership in ac-
tivities relating to the study of drug addiction.
Hewitt G. Fiercuer, Jr., in recognition of
his contributions in the field of ribose chemistry,
particularly the recent elucidation of the ear-
bohydrate moiety in stevioside.
Rosert AVERY FULTON, in recognition of his
contributions on materials, methods, and equip-
ment for the chemical control of insects.
Prerer HIpNERT, in recognition of his eontri-
butions in the field of thermal expansion of
metals, alloys, and other materials.
JoHN C. Krresztesy, in recognition of his
328
contributions toward the isolation and identi-
fication of the B vitamins and his extensive
studies on the action and chemistry of the citro-
vorum factor.
Kortoman Lakt, in recognition of his studies
in protein chemistry and structure, particularly
as related to contraction and coagulation.
Eric Mosertic, in recognition of his contri-
butions in the field of alkaloid and medicinal
chemistry, activities in the antimalarial pro-
gram, and structural elucidation and rearrange-
ments of certain anthracene compounds.
Harotp R. SanpsTEAD, in recognition of his
studies on human starvation and his appraisal
of nutritional status and formulation of nutri-
tion programs under various conditions in many
parts of the world.
ApraHam M. SHANES, in recognition of his
studies on electrical phenomena in nerve, ionic
transfer, and effects of electrolytes and drugs
on nerve transmission.
Curtis R. SINGLETERRY, in recognition of his
contribution to colloid science, in particular the
study of soap micelles in nonaqueous systems.
RussELL BRADFORD STEVENS, in recognition
of his contributions to mycology and plant
pathology, especially on approaches and con-
cepts useful in teaching these subjects.
BERNHARD WITKOP, in recognition of his con-
tributions to the chemistry of amino acids
through work with labile metabolites, and par-
ticularly for recent studies on the biochemical
transformations of tryptophan to various me-
tabolites of physiological and pathological im-
portance.
July 27, 1955
RoBeERT Coun, in recognition of his pioneer
development of electroencephalography and
particularly for his critical studies of physiologi-
eal and pathological correlates with electroen-
cephalogram.
KENNETH STEWART COLE, in recognition of
his outstanding work in biophysics, particularly
his measurements of impedance in nerve and the
changes of this factor with nerve activity.
THEODORE ROOSEVELT GARDNER, in recogni-
tion of his contributions to the biological control
of insect pests, particularly his work on the in-
troduction of parasites from various foreign
countries into the United States, and on funda-
mental studies of the parasites themselves.
WarRREN Exuiotr Henry, in recognition of
his contributions to solid-state physics and in
particular his researches on magnetic interaction
between atoms.
UrRNER LIDDEL, in recognition of his funda-
mental work with infrared, especially studies on
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vot. 48, no. 10
hydrogen bonding and molecular condition of
vater, his development of practical uses of infra-
red in industrial chemistry, and his optical re-
search and development for the Navy.
JOHN CUNNINGHAM LILLY, In recognition of
his outstanding work in biophysics and physiol-
ogy; has devised a nitrogen meter and a capaci-
tance manometer which are widely used in
studies of respiration and circulation and made
important contributions to physiology of cere-
bral cortex.
Frank Martosst, in recognition of his contri-
butions to molecular spectroscopy, in particular
infrared and Raman spectra of solids and elec-
troluminescence.
ManvueL F. Moraes, in recognition of his
outstanding work in physical chemistry of bio-
logical systems and his work in mathematics of
biological processes.
Witsur Tippits PENTZER, in recognition of
his research on physiological changes in fruits
and vegetables during maturation and on the
biological aspects, refrigeration, storage, and
transportation of these agricultural products.
THEODORE PETER PERROS, in recognition of
his contributions to iorganic chemistry, par-
ticularly the chemistry of rare earths and other®
less familiar elements.
IcHis1 TAsAKI, in recognition of his out-
standing work in biophysics and physiology. He
is generally recognized as one of the world’s
leading authorities and as one of the most
brilliant researchers in the field of neurophysi-
ology.
RoaLtp KLINKENBERG WANGSNESS, 1n rec-
ognition of his work on the theories of nuclear
and ferromagnetic resonance.
November 15, 1955
JosHuA RoBERT CAaLLowAay Brown, in rec-
ognition of his contributions in acarology on
the histology and mechanism of feeding of
trombiculid mites, and his investigations in
cytology on the isolation and characterization
of cell particulates from tissue homogenates.
Jacop Martin Lutz, in recognition of his
work in postharvest horticulture.
Rogpert Hate NELSON, in recognition of his
contributions to economic entomology, partic-
ularly his work on the control of the gladiolus
thrips and on the relative toxicity of synthetic
organic insecticides.
MarGarET E. PAtTrerson, in recognition of
outstanding accomplishments in the discovery
and encouragement of science talent.
SaRAH ELIZABETH STEWART, in recognition
of her earlier contributions on the toxins and
toxoids of the gas gangrene bacteria, and for
OcToBER 1958
her present contributions on neoplasms in mice
inoculated with cell-free extracts or filtrates of
leukemic mouse tissues.
January 17, 1956
Witi1aM JOHN BalILey, in recognition of his
work in organic chemistry; in particular his
investigations on the organic chemistry of high
polymers.
JOHN SHERRARD COLEMAN, in recognition of
his contributions to under-water acoustics and
high-speed electronic counters as well as his
services as editor and principal contributor to
the technical reports of NDRC on subsurface
warfare.
GrorGE P. CRESSMAN, in recognition of his
basic contributions to the motions of planetary
waves in the atmosphere and his leadership in
application of numerical weather forecasting.
GEOFFREY EDSALL, in recognition of his con-
tributions to immunology, particularly his out-
standing studies in the immunological responses
to diphtheria and tetanus toxoids and typhoid
vaccine and the use of blood and blood frac-
tions in public health.
RicHarp ALLAN FERRELL, in recognition of
his important contributions to several fields of
theoretical physics including the first interpre-
tation of the fine structure of positronium, his
contributions to the understanding of effects
of electron correlation on various solid state
problems, and his work with W. M. Visscher,
giving a possible explanation to the anomalously
long lifetime of carbon-14.
JoHN Roprrick HeLter, Jr., in recognition
of his extensive studies and services in the
field of public health, particularly concerning
venereal diseases and cancer, and for his direc-
tion and administration of Federal cancer re-
search programs.
Istpor HELLER, in recognition of his work
in the field of mathematics, particularly as
applied to logistics problems.
Wooprow C. Jacoss, in recognition of his
contributions to the understanding of the en-
ergy budget of the oceans and his application
of the science of climatology to practical prob-
lems. |
Hetmur E. Lanpsperc, in recognition of
his basic contribution to the sciences of scis-
mology, meteorology, and climatology and _ his
organizing ability and leadership in the geo-
physical sciences.
Kiuis R. Lipprncorr, in recognition of his
work in physical chemistry, in particular for
his researches in infrared and Raman spectros-
copy and related fields.
ELECTIONS TO THE ACADEMY
329
Epwarp A. Mason, in recognition of his
work in molecular physics and in particular
for his work on intermolecular potentials for
nonpolar molecules.
RaupH Duane Myers, in recognition of his
contributions to the theory of nuclear reactions
and to solid state theory. He has been princi-
pally responsible for the development of the
active graduate program in physics at the
University of Maryland. His Ph.D. thesis in-
cludes the first development of the group-
theoretic treatment of nuclear reactions.
WILLIAM FREDERICK SAGER, 1n recognition
of his studies of oxidation-reduction reaction
in general, and particularly in organic chem-
istry.
Leo SCHUBERT, in recognition of his con-
tributions to a better understanding of in-
organic and analytic chemistry through his
work on complex ions and fluorometric analysis.
Jack Coats THOMPSON, in recognition of
his application of basic laws of meteorology
and probability of weather forecasting.
PuHitie DuncAN THOMPSON, in recognition
of his contributions to the application of nu-
merical analysis to the theory of large-scale
disturbances in the atmosphere.
JOHN SAMPSON TOLL, in recognition of his
contributions to the theory of scattering and
to quantum field theory.
March 20, 1956
JOHANNES Martinus BurGeErs, in recogni-
tion of his outstanding contributions to physics,
particularly to fluid dynamics and rheology.
JoHN Irvin Hoover, in recognition of his
significant contributions to nuclear physics, and
especially to reactor physics. He was largely
instrumental in demonstrating the low neutron
cross-section of zirconium, which makes this
element extremely important for fission re-
actors. He has served as a highly effective
leader of the radioactivity branch of the Nu-
cleonics Division, Naval Research Laboratory.
Isao Imat, in recognition of his contributions
to aerodynamics, particularly to the theory of
two-dimensional compressible flows. (Non-
resident.)
Rospert JAstrow, in recognition of his out-
standing contributions to nuclear theory, no-
tably the Jastrow hadeore model of the nucleus,
and his stimulating influence on his colleagues,
both in theory and experiment.
JOSEPH KAPLAN, in recognition of his con-
tributions to geophysical sciences, and in par-
ticular his important research on upper-atmos-
phere physics.
Roman Ropney Miturr, in recognition of
330
his contributions to the technology of liquid
metals, and in particular for his investigations
of the thermodynamic properties of alkali metal
systems at high temperature.
Marcet Riesz, in recognition of his con-
tributions to mathematics, particularly to the
study of the wave equation. (Nonresident.)
RaMoND CLIFFORD WADDEL, in recognition
of his many scientific contributions, notably
those in electronics research. In addition. Dr.
Waddel has been an indispensable collaborator
in, and frequently leader of, a wide range of
investigations at the Naval Research Laboratory,
some of high importance to the U. 8. Navy.
His current services as consultant to the Nu-
eleonics Division of the Naval Research Lab-
oratory are distinguished and invaluable.
Rospert T. WEBBER, in recognition of his
original contributions to theory and under-
standing in the field of solid-state physics, es-
pecially in the interpretation of transport phe-
nomena in metals; and he has been very active
in the development of research of cryogenics.
JOHN WILLIAM WRENCH, Jr., in recognition
of his research in the field of numerical analysis.
Elected May 15, 1956
Puiuip J. Davis, in recognition of his work
in approximation theory and functional analysis.
FREEMAN KENNETH HILL, in recognition of
his contributions to fluid dynamics, in particular
to the experimental study of hypersonic flow.
DaLE WILSON JENKINS, In recognition of re-
search contributions in field of medical ento-
mology, particularly acarology, mosquito bi-
ology, and research on radioisotopes in biology
and entomology.
Morris NEWMAN, in recognition of his con-
tributions to mathematics, in particular the
theory of numbers and the exploitation of auto-
matic computers in that field.
Epwin Woops Roepper, in recognition of
his work in the study of silicate equilibria and
its application to geological and industrial
problems.
Jack T. SPENCER, in recognition of his con-
tributions to the improvement of pasture and
meadow grasses.
Har~an Noyes WorTHLEY, in recognition of
his contributions to the chemical control of
deciduous fruit insects and his administrative
contributions to the strengthening of national
defense in chemical and biological warfare.
June 19, 1956
Harry C. ALLEN, Jr., in recognition of out-
standing work in the analysis of molecular
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 48, no. 10
spectra and the determination of molecular
constants.
ERNEST AMBLER, in recognition of his con-
tributions to solid-state physics, in particular
his researches on nuclear alignment at very
low temperatures and contributions to magnetic
research.
ArNnotp M. Bass, in recognition of his con-
tributions to molecular physics, and in par-
ticular his measurements on new molecular
bands at very high and at very low tempera-
tures.
Cartes W. BEcKETT, 1n recognition of his
contributions to our knowledge of molecular
structure and thermodynamic properties of hy-
drocarbons, and compounds of titanium, boron,
fluorine, and deuterium.
Lours M. Branscome, in recognition of work
leading to the first successful observation of
the photodetachment of negative- ions under
laboratory conditions.
Wiuuiam 8. Connor, Jr., in recognition of
substantial contributions to the design of ex-
periments, in particular the theory of paired
comparisons.
Hans P. R. FREDERIKSE, In recognition of
his contributions to low temperature physics,
in particular adsorption of helium; and to
solid-state physics, in particular his work on
germanium and on intermetallic compounds.
ABRAHAM §S. FRIEDMAN, in recognition of his
contribution to thermodynamics, in particular
the experimental investigation, theoretical cal-
culation, and compilation of the properties of
deuterium compounds.
MELVILLE 8. GREEN, in recognition of his
contributions in the field of quantum and sta-
tistical mechanics and in particular his studies
of the theory of irreversible processes.
CHARLES M. HERZFELD, in recognition of his
contributions in solid-state theory, and in par-
ticular his interpretations of crystal field effects
on atomic nitrogen.
RautpH P. Hupson, in recognition of his con-
tribution to cryogenic physics, and in partic-
ular his researches in magnetic thermometry
leading to the improvement of standards in
this field.
Karu G. Kessier, in recognition of his con-
tributions to the field of spectroscopy.
HERMANN HERBERT KurzwWEG, in recognition
of his research work in supersonic aerodynamics
and aerodynamic development of long-range
rockets.
THomas R. McGurre, in recognition of his
contribution to the field of magnetism through
his work on paramagnetic susceptibility of
metals and ferrimagnetic material; and on elec-
OcToBER 1958
tronic microwave magnetic resonance of anti-
ferromagnetics and ferromagnetics.
October 16, 1956
Henry A. ANTOSIEWICZ, in recognition of
his work in the stability theory of ordinary
nonhnear differential equations.
Tuomas B. Douauas, in recognition of his
valuable contributions in the field of high-
temperature thermodynamics, specifically in the
accurate measurements of heat capacity and
enthalpy.
WiituiaM 8. Ropney, in recognition of his
contribution in the field of high precision meas-
urements of refractive index of halide crystals
and other transparent media, particularly in
the infrared region of the spectrum.
TRENE A. STEGUN, in recognition of out-
standing work in the organization, direction,
and execution of consulting services in numer-
ical analysis and computational methods for
research and development groups in many sci-
entific (and military) areas, and valuable per-
sonal contributions to the world’s library of
mathematical tables.
Davin WaATSTEIN, in recognition of distin-
guished work and authorship in the field of
structural engineering, and in particular for his
researches on reinforced concrete and masonry.
LeRoy L. Wyman, Sr., in recognition of his
contributions to physical metallurgy, metal-
lography, and X-ray diffraction, particularly
in connection with powder metallurgy, tungsten
and cemented carbides, copper oxidation, and
alloy studies.
November 27, 1956
DEAN Burk, in recognition of his many out-
standig contributions to the fields of plant
physiology and cancer metabolism, in partic-
ular those relating to nitrogen fixation, quan-
tum efficiency of photosynthesis, and metabolic
characteristics of normal and neoplastic cells.
Utysses 8. Grant, III, in recognition of
his contributions in civil and military engineer-
ing, and in particular his distinguished work
in conserving the beauty of the country as a
member of the National Park and Planning
Commission.
GzorceE H. Hickox, in recognition of his
contributions to our research knowledge in the
field of hydraulic engineering, especially in the
ELECTIONS TO THE ACADEMY
()
dl
fields of cavitation, scaling laws, and friction
coefficients.
Louis Levin, in recognition of his contribu-
tions to biochemistry and physiology of endo-
crine function, particularly to structure and
mode of action of estrogenic substances, puri-
fication and characterization of gonadotrophins,
and metabolic effects of pituitary and adrenal
hormones.
Henry Emmons Rosinson, in recognition
of contributions to knowledge of thermal in-
sulating means for buildings, including air
spaces with reflective (metal foil) surfaces; also
conductivities of metals and other solids.
JAMES F. SwINDELLs, in recognition of his
work in rheology and in particular for the
completion of the accurate determination of the
viscosity of water leading to the adoption of
this water value as the international standard.
December 18, 1956
THoMAS GAYLORD ANDREWS, in recognition
of research contributions in experimental psy-
chology and psychometric methods and his re-
search administration.
WituiaAmM E. Bickiey, in recognition of his
work in the field of insect morphology and
taxonomy and medical entomology.
Karu FRANK, in recognition of his studies
of the central nervous system by intracellular
and intrafiber electrical measurements. His
work has resulted in important contributions
to knowledge of nerve cell activity and synaptic
transmission.
PHyLuis TRUTH JOHNSON, in recognition of
outstanding contributions to the control of
vector-borne diseases through systematic and
ecological studies of the vectors and transmis-
sion studies of viruses and rickettsiae.
ALEXANDER F. RoBeRTsoN, in recognition
of achievements in fire research, especially his
applications of principles of modern physics to
solutions of problems on the fire resistance of
structures, the flammability of finishes, and
the extinguishment of fires.
Henry Wrturam ScHOENBORN, in recogni-
tion of his studies on the physiology of Protozoa.
ARTHUR JAMES SHANAHAN, in recognition of
his contributions to microbiology, particularly
on morphology and effects of antibioties.
SAMUEL ZERFOSss, in recognition of his work
on growth of single erystals.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
voL. 48, No. 10
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY
477TH MEETING OF BOARD OF
MANAGERS
The 477th meeting of the Board of Managers,
held in the Tayloe Room of the Cosmos Club,
January 18, 1955, was called to order by the Presi-
dent.
Dr. McPherson, chairman of the Committee on
Encouragement of Science Talent, reported that
the visit of the Junior Academy to the Franklin
Institute in Philadelphia was a great success. Be-
cause of the excellent coverage given the trip by
the Washington Post-Times Herald, the Secretary
was instructed to write a letter of appreciation to
the editor.
Dr. McPherson also proposed a new standing
Committee on School Contacts and outlined its
functions. After discussion it was referred to the
Committee on Policy and Planning for further
consideration.
The Secretary reported the death of A. O.
Leuschner on April 22, 1953, and of Frances E.
Fox on December 29, 1953.
Qualifications for the retired list were discussed.
The question was referred to the Committee on
Policy and Planning for recommendation or for
reinterpretation of Article II, Section 2, paragraph
2, of the Bylaws.
President Defandorf thanked the members of
the Board for their cooperation throughout the
year. After the meeting adjourned, refreshments
were served by courtesy of the retiring President.
MEETING OF EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
A meeting of the Executive Committee of the
Board of Managers was held on February 1, 1955,
at which a tentative budget for the year was pre-
sented by the Treasurer.
A discussion of the effect of implementing the
recommendations of the Committee on Improve-
ment of the Journal was held. Dr. Cook cited a
letter from the Waverly Press to Mr. Oehser indi-
cating that printing rates would increase about
423 percent in 1955. A discussion of methods for
meeting publication costs of the Journal followed.
Suggested alternatives to increased charges were
to omit alternate issues or to solicit advertising.
Mr. Rappleye’s estimate for the Journal was ac-
cepted for presentation to the Board of Managers.
Nominations for Editor and Associate Editors
for the Journal were considered. Dr. Pittman was
to contact those selected and to present their
views at an executive meeting prior to the next
meeting of the Board of Managers.
The revision of the Red Book was postponed
until 1956.
478TH MEETING OF BOARD OF
MANAGERS
The 478th meeting of the Board of Managers,
held in the Tayloe Room of the Cosmos Club,
February 15, 1955, was called to order by the
President. ;
Dr. Pittman reported on the Executive Com-
mittee meeting, indicating that progress im con-
sidering several nominees for Editor has been
made, but that final recommendations had not
been completed.
Dr. Scott, chairman of the Committee on Meet-
ings, reported that the address of the retiring
President, Dr. Defandorf, would be given at the
February meeting, that presentations by the re-
cipients of Academy awards would be given at
the March meeting, and that the April meeting
would be held jointly with the Junior Academy.
Dr. Curtis reported an organization meeting of
the Committe on Membership.
Chairman Poos, of the Committee on Awards
for Scientific Achievement, asked the Board to
consider giving more awards, saying that current
categories are too broad. He reported that during
the past year at least five or more nominations in
each area seemed equally eligible to the Commit-
tee. Dr. Frenkiel spoke in favor of more awards,
especially in physical sciences, but felt that addi-
tions should be quite limited. Dr. Pittman asked
the Policy and Planning Committee, through Dr.
Crittenden, chairman, to consider this matter.
Dr. Crittenden called attention to the fact that
there were AAAS honorary memberships for high-
school students to be nominated through the
Academy and the Junior Academy. He was in-
structed to check this matter with Dr. A. T.
McPherson.
In the absence of committee action on ques-
tions arising at the last Board meeting with regard
to the remission of dues for certain members, Dr.
Crittenden’s letter of January 10, 1955, was filed
outlining certain evidence to be considered in
these cases.
Chairman McPherson, of the Committee on
Encouragement of Science Talent, called on Dr.
Mebs to describe a meeting of Drs. Mebs, Snelling,
and Read at the Bladensburg Senior High School
with the junior class on Career Day. Dr. Mce-
Pherson urged again that the vice-presidents of
the affiliated societies produce more contributions
from them to support the science field. He also
announced the Westinghouse trip winners’ exhi-
bition.
Secretary Specht reported on a survey of the
financial status of State academies and similar
groups in the United States which was presented
at the AAAS meeting in Berkeley, Calif. The
Treasurer and the chairman of the Grants-in-Aid
Committee asked to see the report, which was
turned over to the Treasurer. Payment to the
Cosmos Club for use of the rooms for meetings
was discussed and referred to Dr. Defandorf and
Dr. Gibson for final disposition.
The Treasurer reported the death of Theodore
Lyman in October 1954. Approval was given to
the placing of the following members on the re-
tired hst: Raymond L. Sanford, H. Freeborn John-
son, H. D. Miser, and M. A. McCall.
Mr. Rappleye then submitted the following
OcToBER 1958 PROCEEDINGS
budget for 1955, which the Board unanimously
approved:
1954 1955
Receipts (est.)
(Esti.)
IDWES. oon Vie ee ne eee $4,729.17 $4,800.00
Ji@waanell SulKOayO HONS 6 ssoeunsoeae seleoe 1,714.50 1,800.00
SIGS Las 3e-ca be Se ee ee 532.68 150.00
Interestmande dividends: 1 5..9..5.5.. 2,087.70 2,000.00
$9.064.05 $8,750.00
Disbursements
Journal and Journal Office. ........... $6,536.79* $6 ,900.00*
Secretanyesm @mice, 7 anes suse alos 747.21 600.00
Measumer:See OMe kG os5 oe ce es 204.98 200.00
Meetines) Committee... ................ 504.69 500.00
Membership Committee ............... -- 15.00
PAU. CIN AS UTE or 8 foetus Eo a aes — 10.00
Custodian and Subscription Manager . 21.67 50.00
Committee on Encouragement of Sci-
Gm Cevmmleall ermine oye nc has one es sas 45.90 50.00
Committee on Science Education...... 17.11 50.00
SclencesHainme.s.05 4... tae Bi eae wevard cieee 300.004 300.00
Seience Chilleincleies sas adeune gon socedueee 75.00 75.00
$8,453.35 $8,750.00
*Plus charges to authors.
+ Budget amount.
Dr. Pittman introduced a letter from Dr. Fren-
kiel proposing the creation of ex-officio members,
specifically, the elected Chief Executive of the
District of Columbia, the School Superintendents,
and similar individuals in private and parochial
schools. This matter was referred to the Commit-
tee on Policy and Planning.
Dr. Hess inquired as to policy regarding the
Journal. A discussion and amplification of the
report by Dr. Campbell for his committee fol-
lowed.
479TH MEETING OF BOARD OF
MANAGERS
The 479th meeting of the Board of Managers,
held in the Tayloe Room of the Cosmos Club,
March 15, 1955, was called to order by the Presi-
dent.
Dr. Scott reported that in connection with a
display of their projects, two Westinghouse win-
hers were to give 5-minute talks at the April
meeting. It was announced that the May meeting
would be held joimtly with the Meteorological
Society.
The Committee on Policy and Planning re-
ported through Chairman Crittenden on five topics
assigned to it. In connection with item 1, Dr.
McPherson moved that the President be author-
ized to call a meeting of the key people of so-
cieties and other groups interested in science edu-
cation for the purpose of developing a unified
plan. This was unanimously approved.
Dr. Walton spoke on the need to be able to
“deliver the goods” in dealing with schools and
to have a working list of people who ean give
practical assistance as speakers, science counsel-
lors, or consultants on science projects. Dr. Me-
Pherson spoke of the Wheaton area where students
OF THE ACADEMY
were being supervised by a team of local scientists
under the leadership of Dr. Lashof and Mrs. Roger
M. Wilson. Dr. McPherson suggested that school
contacts could be handled in a joint committee
with other scientific organizations.
In response to item 1C (teachers’ salaries), Dr.
Gurney asked whether there was any differential
with regard to teaching field. Dr. Mebs asked if
it would help to stress that industry pays a pre-
mium to trained teachers which attracts them
away from teaching. Dr. Frenkiel suggested that
a way to remind the public of this and to help
hold teachers in the area would be to organize
summer employment for teachers in various gov-
ernment laboratories. Dr. Mebs noted that New-
ark holds its science teachers by an arrangement
for summer jobs in the Libbey Owens Glass
Works. Dr. Walton surmised that this plan might
result in defections by teachers wishing to continue
their summer work as permanent work.
Dr. Gurney’s motion to follow the recommen-
dations of the Committee in item 2 was carried.
Item 3 called for changes in the standing rules
of the Board of Managers concerning the selection
of candidates for awards. A motion to accept the
changes as recommended was tabled for the
present.
Item 4 dealt with relief from dues on retire-
ment. A number of fiscal questions were raised,
and this part of the report was referred to the
Treasurer for further study.
Item 5 was referred to the committees con-
cerned: Ways and Means and Improvement of
Publications.
A copy of the report made by the Committee
on Encouragement of Science Talent. together with
a list of the 16 high-school seniors* selected out
of 75-100 applicants for awards, was turned over
to the President. Dr. McPherson’s motion that
the awards be made was approved. Dr. McPher-
son’s further motion that Miss Margaret Patter-
son be especially awarded for her contribution
to the recognition and encouragement of science
talent, particularly for her activities in connection
with the Junior Academy of Sciences, was carried
unanimously.
The Secretary presented Orland E. White’s re-
quest for retirement, which was approved.
The Secretary also reported an inquiry from
Henry H. Armsby regarding the policy of the
Committee on Grants-in-Aid regarding high-school
students. Until now, grants have been made only
to individual, mature investigators. The President
referred this matter to the Committee on Grants-
in-Aid for research.
The Treasurer reported a donation of $100 for
the Science Fair from Dr. Francis B. Silsbee,
representing his honorarium for participation in ex-
amination of the papers of contestants in the
14th National Science Talent Search for the West-
inghouse Science Scholarships. The Secretary was
directed to send him a letter of appreciation.
* This JournaL 45: 163. May 1955
ao4
480TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS
The 480th meeting of the Board of Managers,
held in the Tayloe Room of the Cosmos Club,
April 19, 1955, was called to order by the Pres-
ident.
The Secretary reported the nomination of Dr.
Chester H. Page as Editor of the Journal. He
was unanimously elected, to begin his editorship
with the January 1956 number.
Dr. Frenkiel reported that the Membership
Committee had met at the offices of Science
Service and found it to be a suitable place for
the purpose. For assistance in establishing criteria
for nominees in the social sciences, the Committee
was advised to consult Dr. Leonard Carmichael.
Chairman Cooper of the Committee on Mono-
graphs requested instructions on monograph pub-
lication, the Academy’s first monograph being
still in considerable supply. Dr. Gurney and Mr.
Rappleye commented that the issuance of a new
monograph should not necessarily depend on the
sale of the prior monograph. Dr. Gurney pointed
out that the experience of the Chemical Society
was that the salability of monographs seemed
to increase with the number of monographs under-
taken, that certain salability criteria should be
considered, and that perhaps an alternation of
salable with less salable material would ease the
financing problems of publication.
Chairman McPherson reported for the Com-
mittee on Encouragement of Science Talent that
$50 had been received from Paul Lichman for
the Science Fair and that half the expense of
the souvenir program which had been prepared
could be borne by the Junior Academy. Mr.
Dill moved that the Academy assume the whole
expense, and it was decided that this should be
borne by the Committee on Meetings. Dr. Scott
pointed out that provision should be made in the
future for budgeting such items.
Mr. Keith Johnson reported that the Junior
Academy would have an executive session to
which all members of the Academy were invited.
He then discussed some of the selection problems
and complications which arose in connection with
the Washington Science Fair. He emphasized that
arranging for a fair is becoming more and more
difficult and that the coordination of fairs in Mont-
gomery, Arlington, and Prince Georges Counties
and the District of Columbia is becoming im-
perative. He spoke of the lack of a sponsor to
send the two winners and accompanying teacher
to the National Fair at Cleveland. Considerable
discussion centered on the cost of such sponsor-
ship, Dr. Gurney pointing out the economies of
automobile transportation and of modest lodging
arrangements.
The Secretary read a letter to the President
from Dr. Sherman Ross of the University of
Maryland regarding the prospects of affiliating a
contemplated society of human engineering with
the Academy. President Pittman noted that this
request was in the area of scientific interest
mentioned earlier by Dr. Frenkiel and that it
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 10
would be handled by the Committee on Policy
and Planning.
The Treasurer laid before the board a request
from the Massachusetts Investors Trust for per-
mission to reveal the names of shareholders to
prospective investors who inquire about the type
of institutions holding shares. In the opinion of
the Treasurer, no objection should be made be-
cause such information is already a matter of
public record. He was instructed to reply favor-
ably to the request and to ask that such informa-
tion not be used in direct advertisement.
Dr. Cook, of the Board of Editors, reported
that the April issue of the Journal would contain
a column of Washington news of scientific in-
terest, that subsequent journals would carry a
column of letters to the Editor or short papers
somewhat in the nature of articles appearing in
the “Comptes Rendus.” Dr. Frenkiel remarked
on the continued need for a strong editorial
authority and a stated policy with regard to the
content of the Journal. ;
481ST MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS
The 481st meeting of the Board of Managers,
held in the Tayloe Room of the Cosmos Club,
May 17, 1955, was called to order by the President.
The Executive Committee met prior to the
Board meeting and discussed with the Editor (a)
the nomination of assistant editors and (b) the
possible actions in response to a more than 600
percent increase in charges for reprints by the
Waverly Press, printers of the Journal.
Dr. Curtis reported on points of concern to
the Membership Committee. It was decided that
the two policy problems he brought up (the
modus operandi for nomination of honorary mem-
bers and the need for a class of membership to
be added to the Bylaws in Article II, Section I,
to cover those having “outstanding achievement
in science education”) should be taken up by the
Committee on Policy and Planning.
Chairman Rice, of the Committee on Grants-
in-Aid for Research, reported that universities
and colleges within a 25-mile radius of the
Capital had been notified of the availability of
the grants-in-aid fund, but to date only two
applications have been received. It was recom-
mended that Dr. Burkey advise the Committee
about the application which is in his field.
Dr. McPherson made a special report of the
activities of his Committee on Encouragement of
Science Talent, the main features of which were
the presentation of certificates of merit to 16
students and of a special award to Miss Margaret
Patterson of Science Service; the great success
of the Science Fair, for which almost twice as
many exhibits were submitted as could be ac-
commodated; and the sending of two students
to the National Science Fair in Cleveland. The
students were Joel F. Lubar, of Montgomery
Blair High School, and Betty Marie Coder, of
Northwestern High School. The latter received
special recognition at the National Fair.
Officers elected at the final meeting of the
OcTOBER 1958 PROCEEDINGS
Junior Academy were: President, Robert Menzer ;
Vice President, Barbara Reason; Secretary,
Robert Moore; Treasurer, Charles Gray; Coun-
cillors, Stewart Lichman, Margaret Mix and Diana
Banks; Alumni Councillors, Mr. and Mrs. Charles
L. Kimbell and Ernest Lum.
Dr. McPherson then nominated Robert Ed-
ward Ambrose and Betty Marie Coder to mem-
bership in the AAAS. Unanimously approved. Mr.
Keith Johnson, present at the meeting by invita-
tion, promised to furnish a full financial report
on the fair. He estimated the total cost of the
fair at something over $1,400, the transportation
to the National Fair coming to $460.
In connection with plans to cooperate with
local teachers during the annual meeting of the
National Science Teachers Association, to be held
in Washington this year, Dr. Frenkiel suggested
that there should be an affiliation of some
teachers’ association, perhaps this one as well as
others, with the Academy. Dr. Watson remarked
that some teachers are already members of certain
of the affilated societies, particularly the Phil-
osophical Society.
Dr. Seeger, of the Committee on Science Edu-
cation, reported prospective meetings of teachers
at various levels in biology, mathematics, and
physics. This type of meeting he called “vertical”
as contrasted with “horizontal” meetings such as
conferences of all teachers at a certain grade or
within certain grade levels. He also reported
planned meetings with the students of Maryland
State Teachers College and a meeting he had
with Friends School science students regarding
science careers.
Mr. Rappleye, Treasurer, reported that it has
been decided that he will receive, immediately
after the general mailing of the Journal, all “over
copies’ and will keep them to issue to new
members on request for a period slightly in
excess of one year and then transfer them to
Dr. Rehder for the normal issuance of back
numbers.
The President read the proposed changes in
the Bylaws regarding the duties of the Committee
on Awards for Scientific Achievement as recom-
mended by the Committee on Policy and Plan-
ning:
Standing Rules of the Board of Managers, Item 8:
It shall be the duty of the COMMITTEE ON AWARDS
FOR SCIENTIFIC ACHIEVEMENT to recommend one or
more candidates each for the Biological Sciences, the Engi-
neering Sciences, the Physical Sciences, and for the Teaching
of Science. A candidate must reside within 25 miles of
Washington, and except for an award for the Teaching of
Science shall not have passed the 40th anniversary of the date
of his birth by the end of the calendar year for which the
award is made; recommendations by the committee must
reach the Board of Managers not later than the meeting
immediately preceding the annual meeting of the Academy
in January. Each recommendation to the Board must be
accompanied by a written suporting statement giving the
necessary information concerning the candidate, together
with a citation covering not over 80 spaces, as ‘‘in recog-
nition of his distinguished service in... (80 spaces) ...”
OF THE ACADEMY 335
There was a discussion as to how to handle the
intention to make only a limited increase in the
presentation of awards. It was agreed that no
hmiting statement be placed in the Bylaws, but
that the consensus of the Board and the Com-
mittee be made available through the meetings.
Mr. Rappleye reported on the amendment of
Article II, Section 2, of the Bylaws with regard
to retired members. His motion that the amend-
ment state that “the price of the Journal to
retired members shall be one-half the price to
nonmembers” and that “nothing in this paragraph
shall operate to change the status of members
of the Academy who have already been placed
on the list of retired members” was approved.
It was agreed that both these matters will be
placed on ballots in the fall for the general mem-
bership vote.
President Pittman dissolved the Committee on
Improvement of the Journal with a statement
of thanks to Chairman Campbell and committee
for its work. She pointed out that the remaining
problems were largely ways and means, for which
she would appoint another committee. The Pres-
ident noted that another Board meeting must
be held to vote on the election of members
nominated at this meeting. The date of June
14 was set.
482D MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS
The 482d meeting of the Board of Managers,
held in the Tayloe Room of the Cosmos Club,
June 14, 1955, was called to order by the President.
Dr. Pittman announced the appointment of F.
N. Frenkiel, chairman, F. M. Defandorf, Paul H.
Oehser, and B. F. Scribner to the special Com-
mittee on Ways and Means of Improving the
Activities of the Academy.
The Executive Committee nominated as As-
sociate Editors for the Journal Dr. Howard W.
Bond (Chemistry) and Dr. I. Estermann (Phys-
ics), who were unanimously elected.
Dr. Curtis, chairman of the Committee on
Membership, presented a list of 14 individuals for
first reading. Dr. McPherson remarked that the
average age of these nominees was over 40 years
in contrast to recent nominees, and Dr. Frenkiel
pointed out that this indicated that eligible men
had been available for prior nomination by the
previous committees. Dr. Scott noted that the
balance of fields was still in favor of physics-
mathematics, with biological fields a close second.
Dr. Curtis asked for the sentiment of the Board
regarding the age level, and Dr. Frenkiel ex-
pressed the opinion that eligible young members
should still be sought.
The Secretary read a communication from
Chairman Rice, of the Committee on Grants-in-
Aid for Research, recommending a $200 grant
to Allen F. Woodhour, of Catholic University.
Unanimously approved. Dr. Rice wrote also that
* This JourNAL 45; 232. July 1955.
336
on his doctor’s recommendation, he was resign-
ing from the chairmanship.
Dr. McPherson suggested that a news item
regarding the grant funds be placed in the Jour-
nal. The Secretary read a letter from Hans
Nussbaum of the AAAS regarding the status of
the grant funds, at present totaling $524.50, for
which a check will be sent “upon receipt of the
following information: name of the applicant(s)
selected ...; his address and institution; his re-
search project; the special purpose for which he
intends to use the funds; the amount of the
grant.”
Dr. Curtis presented the second reading of
nominations for membership. The motion to elect
those proposed carried unanimously.
The President, who served as Chairman of a
Special Committee on coordinating activities in
promoting science talent in the Greater Wash-
ington Area, reported that this committee, com-
posed of representatives from the D. C. Council
of Engineers and Architects and individual so-
cieties active in promoting science talent, in-
cluding the Washington Academy of Sciences,
had accepted a plan drawn up by a subcommittee.
It was decided that the plan be referred to the
Committee on Policy and Planning for an opin-
ion on mechanism and that the committee report
back to the Board by August 1.
The Secretary reported the death of Dr. John
Putnam Marble on June 6, 1955.
4883D MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS
The 483d meeting of the Board of Managers,
held in the Cameron Room of the Cosmos Club,
July 27, 1955, was called to order by the President.
A group of nominees for membership was put
up by Dr. Curtis and unanimously approved by
the Board.
The main business of the meeting was the
consideration of a report of the Policy and
Planning Committee regarding the cooperative
effort between the Washington Academy and its
affiliates and the D. C. Council of Engineering
and Architecture and its affilates for science
promotion in the Greater Washington Area. A
discussion followed Dr. Crittenden’s presentation
and comments. It was suggested by Dr. Crittenden
that the President set up a committee with wide
representation from the affiliates of the Academy.
Dr. Mason asked about the activities of the
National Science Foundation and the National
Research Council in using Arlington County as
a pilot area for the encouragement of science
talent through the PTAs and school boards.
Dr. Gibson’s motion that the Crittenden report
be accepted with (3) modified to direct that the
President set up a Planning committee for co-
ordinating present group activities, for handling
urgent matters, and for developing new activities
and facilities as needed, was unanimously ap-
proved.
Regarding other matters handled by his com-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 10
mittee, Dr. Crittenden stated that no change need
be made in the Bylaws or standing rules to pro-
vide for electing honorary members. However,
the committee drew up a set of instructions for
the use of those who wish to nominate honorary
members. Mr. Setzler suggested that these in-
structions be included in the files which are passed
from one Committee chairman to the next.
The Policy and Planning Committee had con-
cluded that is not desirable to change the Bylaws
to create a new class of members in the educa-
tional field. This was unanimously approved, as
was the opinion of the Committee that affiliation
with the National Science Teachers Association
is inappropriate, since the Academy is authorized
to act “as a Federal head of the affiliated scien-
tific societies of Washington.”
It was pointed out that science teachers are
often members of affiliated societies of the Wash-
ington Academy.
484TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS
The 484th meeting of the Board of Managers,
held in the Conference Room of the National
Science Foundation on October 18, 1955, was
called to order by the President.
Dr. Pittman announced the appointment to the
Planning Committee for Coordinating Science
Education Activities of various groups of: Keith
C. Johnson, Martin A. Mason, Arnold H. Scott,
Raymond J. Seeger, and John K. Taylor. With
five representatives from the D. C. Council for
Engineering and Architectural Societies the Joint
Board on Science Education for the Greater
Washington Area has been formed. The Academy
is a sponsor for the 1956 Engineers’ Week As-
sembly. Dean Martin A. Mason was appointed
to the General Chairman’s advisory committee.
The Secretary reported the action of the Ex-
ecutive Committee in nominating as Associate
Editor, Ronald Bamford. The nomination was
approved.
In the absence of Dr. Curtis, the Secretary
distributed a list of nominations for membership.
In the absence of Chairman Seeger, Dr. Pitt-
man presented a report: that the Board should
consider disposition of the present Committee on
Science Education, whether to dissolve it or con-
tinue it, either with representatives from the
Academy on the cooperative committee with the
D. C. Council or as an advisory committee to
the President of the Academy. Discussion was in
favor of continuing the committee.
Dr. Rubey asked if the Academy was following
the science education activities of the National
Research Council. Dr. Pittman answered in the
affirmative, giving examples.
There was discussion regarding the level of
presentation necessary to interest secondary-school
teachers. Dr. Frenkiel suggested that there be
developed more contact with the teachers in the
various secondary schools and suggested that the
OcTOBER 1958 PROCEEDINGS
President ask the affiliated societies to attract
eligible teachers to membership in their societies.
The Committee suggested that the Board of
Managers match the $200 contribution of the D.
C. Council to defray the expenses in connection
with the activities of the Joimt Board to take
eare of the present need. This was voted and
carried as a nonrecurrent item.
President Pittman then read a letter from
President-elect Gibson pointing out that among
3,100 industries employing scientists, very few are
doing anything to support science and mathe-
matics in schools and are only belatedly be-
coming aware of their concern in this matter and
that there is a serious problem which will become
worse in the future.
Ways and Means Chairman Frenkiel spoke on
the various activities of his committee relating
to (a) the increase in the price of reprints, (b)
the general future of the Journal, (c) the use of
Journal space for a long article with extensive
mathematical tables. While the Committee con-
ceded that this type of material is not represent-
ative of the physical sciences papers, the par-
ticular paper was important and its publication
_well justified.
Dr. Frenkiel went on to outline the possibility
of publishing a bulletin issued with the Journal
but not bound in it, in which one or two pages
from each affiliated society might be printed, and
the possibility of using advertising matter of
an appropriate character in such a bulletin. He
noted that the problems in connection with the
costs of the Journal and reprints were causing
considerable dissatisfaction among authors likely
to publish in the Journal.
It came out in discussion that the actual cost
to the Academy is about 25 percent less than
the published cost of reprints, this differential
represents the overhead of the editorial office.
Dr. Cook pointed out that tear sheets might
be provided to authors at no cost. Dr. Gurney
brought up the possibility of reducing the cost
to authors who have no support and marking up
the cost to institutes bearing this expense, as is
customary with some other journals. He pointed
out that the heterogeneous character of our Jour-
nal makes the use of reprints more desirable
than is the case with other journals.
Further discussion brought out the fact that
the total printing figure might have an effect
on the unit cost.
Dr. Cook pointed out that although the cost
per copy of the Journal is 40 cents, overprinting
copies are only 10 cents, and Editor-elect Page
had found that such overprinting, indicating a
particular article by the author on the cover,
might be substituted for the reprinting of a paper.
The treasurer reported that a $1,000 bond had
come due, and been cashed. His request that he
be authorized to reinvest this sum in the Wash-
ington Mutual Investors Fund was approved.
OF THE ACADEMY
-_—
el
485TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS
The 485th meeting of the Board of Managers,
held in the Tayloe Room of the Cosmos Club,
November 15, 1955, was called to order by the
President.
Dr. Poos, chairman of the Committee on
Awards for Scientific Achievement, reported that
nominations for awards were being processed and
asked who was responsible for the preparation
of the presentation program. It was determined
that this is ordinarily set up by the Meetings
Committee with the assistance of the Awards
Committee.
A report for the Committee on Encouragement
of Science Talent was given by Dr. McPherson,
who then brought up questions regarding the area
in which merit awards may be given. The com-
mittee had heretofore drawn only from the West-
inghouse science talent winners. He pointed out
that there are four other competitions sponsored
by national science groups which could be brought
into this area of recommendation. No action was
taken.
Dr. Frenkiel called attention to the fact that
National Science Fair exhibitors who were run-
ners-up in the area of the Institute for Aeronautic
Sciences were sent letters of congratulation and
invited to visit local laboratories. He recom-
mended the Institute’s activity to other societies.
Dr. Hough added that the astronomy winners
were invited to the Army Map Service for sim-
llar recognition.
Dr. Walton stated that in his opinion and
that of others with whom he had discussed the
matter many entries in past science fairs were fine
hobby-show material but did not represent re-
search or even science projects and that with this
in mind he would suggest the Academy take a
stronger hand in pointing up criteria for scientific
content. A discussion brought out that judging will
be even more complex, with four area fairs rather
than a single one as in the past.
President Pittman reported for the Chairman
of the Committee on Science Education that the
special meetings of science teachers in the four
disciplines had been held; about 200 teachers
were reached. She said that on December 9 the
activities of the Joint Board and its subecom-
mittees would be presented to especially invited
representatives from all the affiliated societies
of the Academy and the Council. Dr. McPherson
pointed out the importance of this meeting, at
which the matter of raising funds and of opening
a central office will be taken up.
Dr. Curtis presented a slate of nominees for
membership.
Dr. Wood reported the activities of the Nom-
inating Committee and indicated that further
nominations from the membership can be made
under the rules set up in the Bylaws.
The Chairman of the Committee on Ways
and Means, Dr. Frenkiel, reported that the
Committee has concluded that the reasons for
338
a change of printer were less cogent than sup-
posed.
Dr. Frenkiel pointed out that the problem
of preparing tear sheets could be met by an
expedient which was incidentally achieved in the
last issue by starting each paper at the head of
a page, thus facilitating the separation of papers,
and by arrangements that extra copies of the
Journal could be used for such a purpose.
Dr. Frenkiel reported that his committee is
seriously considering a report which will recom-
mend temporary but immediate means to relieve
the situation regarding reprint costs such as the
item mentioned above and permission to authors
to buy copies of the Journal in lieu of reprints.
Dr. Frenkiel observed that considerable con-
sultation will be necessary before the bulletin can
be planned.
Recommendations of the Committee on Ways
and Means about notices are: (1) to include
them in the lists distributed to libraries and
institutions not regularly carrying Academy news,
(2) to distribute large notices for posting, and
(3) to forward to each Vice President of the
affiliated Societies a number of notices for dis-
tribution to their members who are not also
members of the Academy, this number to be
determined by consultation with the Vice Pres-
idents. Also, Journals should be mailed to the
Secretary of each affiliated Society which does
not normally receive them.
Mr. Rappleye pointed out that since Dr.
Frenkiel’s remarks impinge on the budget and
financial arrangements of the Academy, items of
his discussion relating to expenditures should be
referred to the Executive Committee. Dr. Frenkiel
then asked that his implied recommendations be
considered only as a report and stated that a
written report will be made to the President for
further action.
The Secretary reported the death of Harold
R. Sandstead on November 1. Members of the
Board reported the death of George E. Holm
on November 11.
The Treasurer read a letter from Dr. H. C.
Hayes requesting retirement and one from Dr.
Mary E. Reid requesting that her membership
be changed to an associate category, but in view
of her long membership Mr. Rappleye moved
that she, as well as Dr. Hayes, be placed on the
retired list. The motion was unanimously carried.
Mr. Rappleye reported the reinvestment of ma-
tured series E bonds in the Washington Mutual
Investors Fund to the extent of $1,002.
President Pittman reported that Dr. Cook was
leaving the Washington area, but that the opera-
tions of the Journal would be carried on by
Dr. Fenner Chace for the balance of the year.
Dr. McPherson asked for an opinion on
criteria for honorary membership. He pointed
out that there are a number of Washington area
members of the National Academy of Sciences
who have the qualifications for honorary member-
ship in the Washington Academy of Sciences.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 10
President Pittman brought up the matter of
popular attitudes toward scientists and active
discussion developed regarding means to improve
them.
486TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS
The 486th meeting of the Board of Managers,
held in the Tayloe Room of the Cosmos Club
on December 20, 1955, was called to order by
the President.
It was announced that the annual meeting
would be held at the Kennedy-Warren on Jan-
uary 19, 1956, the address to be by a Department
of Agriculture speaker on the world food supply.
A motion by Dr. Frenkiel that the President
make a short summary of actions of the Academy
and select from the Committee reports material
for a single report at the annual meeting was
approved.
Dr. Branham reported for the Subcommittee
on Biological Sciences, recommending Lt. Col.
Robert Traub and a joint husband and wife
award for Dr. Clifford Evans and Dr. Betty J.
Meggers.
Dr. Hickley, representing the Engineering Sci-
ences Subcommittee, recommended Mr. E. Arthur
Benney; Dr. Snavely, Physical Sciences Subcom-
mittee, recommended Dr. Terrell Leslie Hill in
the field of chemistry; Dr. Mason, the Teaching
Sciences Subcommittee, recommended Mrs. Helen
Nale Cooper and suggested that the Board might
ask Dr. Watson Davis to assist in presenting the
award. All the foregoing recommendations were
passed.
In Dr. Seegar’s absence, President Pittman
reported that a meeting of the Committee on
Science Education had been held with repre-
sentatives from the affiliated societies and that
a list of the Board members and the school
contact scientists for the secondary schools had
been issued. A letter is being sent to the af-
filiated societies to raise funds.
The Secretary distributed a list of nomina-
tions furnished by Dr. Curtis, chairman of the
Committee on Membership.
Dr. Frenkiel reported for the Ways and Means
Committee: (1) that registers of the WAS mem-
bership will be made available to committees or
their chairmen indicating the affiliations with re-
spect to employment and membership in societies
and the general area of the members’ experience ;
(2) that it was planned to publish a Directory
in 1956.
He then moved that the Board consider the
formation of a special committee on public re-
lations that might ultimately become a standing
committee. Dr. Frenkiel pointed out that such
a committee could immediately act in connection
with the annual meeting and would constitute
a going committee when new officers take over.
It was mentioned that the present participation
of the Academy in the weekly science calendar
already amounts to $75. Dr. Frenkiel stated that
the Academy needs more than simple listing,
that there should be press releases so worded that
OcTOBER 1958
reporters unacquainted with scientific vocabularies
could use them, and that advance copy with re-
gard to speeches and other presentations made
at the meetings should be procured. He observed
that laboratories and other institutions can help.
He added that school contact operations, now
taken care of by a separate committee, should not
be among the activities of the proposed public
relations committee.
Dr. Page described the public relations com-
mittee as dealing with an unspecified public rather
than special areas of interest. Dr. Stevenson said
that some of the affiliated societies should be
served by such a committee since they are largely
uninformed about specific activities of the WAS.
Dr. Page pointed out that members of societies
are likely to be interested only in specific activ-
ities which the committee could sort out for them.
Dr. Scott noted that the meetings committee
is constrained to delay its issuance of notice
until the third week of the month, and Dr. Poos
pointed out that some of the societies meet before
the Academy does; therefore sufficient advance
notice should be given to reach their member-
ship.
The original question was called for, and the
motion was passed.
Dr. Frenkiel reminded the Board that rec-
ommendations already made in regard to cost
of reprints were to be supplemented by a report,
of which he distributed copies. Dr. Mason rec-
ommended that the report he tabled until a state-
ment of the cost can be shown to the Board. Dr.
Frenkiel replied that the committee did not feel
that it was recommending an action which would
result in increased costs. Mr. Rappleye pointed
out that the whole matter was discretionary with
the Editor, since he was given a lump sum budget
item plus charges to authors which he could
handle as he saw fit. Dr. Frenkiel noted that the
Editor had requested no further monies, although
authorized to do so. Dr. Mason took the position
that there was a policy question involved in these
recommendations bearing on finances. Dr. Frenkiel
agreed in part that this was true with regard to
(1) page charges, and (2) exemptions from reg-
ular page costs. Dr. Gurney felt that some action
should be taken since he understood that the
situation he had resulted in new members being
held from proposal and papers being held out
of the Journal until some solution to the problem
could be effected. Dr. Gibson observed that authors
had come to expect much more than they were
prepared to pay for. He pointed out again the
proposal with regard to tear sheets and _ the
changed pagination and he also pointed out that
it was the Editor’s responsibility to set up the
reprint cost in a realistic manner. Dr. Gibson
said that the only matter for consideration should
be the page charges and that the Board should
leave to the Editor the problem of what charges
he would solicit from authors and organizations.
A motion by Dr. Gibson, that the Editor explore
the possibility of page charges and whatever al-
ternatives might be available, was unanimously
passed.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 339
Dr. Frenkiel pointed out that the exemption
from payment was a delegated authority which
the Editor needed to exercise because in some
cases papers were sent to the Journal on the
Editor’s invitation and a fixed policy could create
difficulty. The Ways and Means Committee was
given a vote of thanks for its detailed activity in
connection with the matter of the financing of
the Journal.
The Secretary reported that the Smithsonian
Institution could no longer house the back num-
bers of the Journal which are stored there. Dr.
Gurney moved that a committee on the disposal
and storage of this material be appointed. Passed.
The Treasurer reported that Chauncey G.
Peters had died on December 15, 1955.
FEATURED SPEAKERS AT ACADEMY
MEETINGS IN 1955
408th (Annual) meeting, January 20, 1955:
“Hxploring the Past in Panama,” by Dr. MatrHEWw
W. Srirtine, Director of the Bureau of American
Ethnology, Smithsonian Institution, illustrated with
color film lent by the National Geographic So-
ciety.
409th meeting, February 17, 1955: “A Tree from
the Viewpoint of Lightning,’ by Dr. Francis M.
DeEFraNnporF, retiring President of the Academy,
Chief of the Electrical Instruments Section,
National Bureau of Standards. Published in this
Journal 45: 333-339. November 1955.
410th meeting, March 17, 1955, “Detecting Tran-
sient Constituents of Chemical Reactions,” by Dr.
SamugEL N. Foner, Group Supervisor, Applied
Physics Laboratory, Johns Hopkins University;
“Recent Developments on Ocular Toxoplasmosis,”
by Dr. Lron Jacoss, Head of the Section on Pro-
tozoan Diseases, National Institute of Allergy and
Infectious Diseases; and “Solidation of Metals,”
by W.S. PELiINI, Superintendant of the Metallurgy
Division, Naval Research Laboratory.
411th meeting, April 21, 1955, “Use of Preserved
Tissue Grafts in Surgery,’ by Lt. Winu1am H.
SeweLut, M.C., U.S.N.R., Naval Medical Research
Institute.
412th meeting, May 19, 1955, “The Proposed
U.S. Meteorological Program for the International
Geophysical Year,” by Dr. Harry Wexter, Chief
of the Scientific Service Division, U. S. Weather
Bureau.
413th meeting, October 20, 1955, “Hydrology
by Tritium Measurement (Movement of Water
in the Atmosphere and on the Earth’s Surface
as Revealed by Cosmic Ray and Man Made
Tritium),” by Dr. W. F. Lippy, Member, U. 8.
Atomie Energy Commission.
414th meeting, November 17, 1955, “Long Term
Medical Effects of Radiation in Man,” by Lt. Col.
Cart F. Tessmer, M.C., US.A., and “Recovery
from Acute Radiation Injury,” by Capt. F. L.
Jennines, M.C., US.A.
415th meeting, December 15, 1955, “Genetics
in the Service of Man,” by Dr. BENTLEY GLAss,
Professor of Biology, Johns Hopkins University.
340
58TH ANNUAL MEETING
The 58th Annual Meeting of the Academy was
held as a dinner meeting in the ball room of the
Kennedy-Warren Hotel on the evening of Jan-
uary 19, 1956. President Margaret Pittman pre-
sided.
After dinner Dr. Pittman called the meeting to
order and the minutes of the 57th Annual Meeting
were approved as published in this Journal 45:
86-92. 1955.
The Treasurer reported on the financial status
of the Academy, and the Auditing Committee re-
ported the Treasurer’s statements to be in order.
In lieu of separate reports by various officers,
President Pittman presented a brief report sum-
marizing the activities of the Academy and the
Board in 1955. Formal reports of the officers and
committees were filed with the Secretary.
Award for scientific achievement for the Bio-
logical Sciences was presented jointly to Clifford
Evans and Betty J. Meggers in recognition of
their outstanding contributions in the field of
Archeology. They were introduced by Dr. Rem-
ington Kellogg, Director, U. S. National Museum.
A second award in the Biological Sciences was
made to Robert Traub in recognition of his
distinguished contributions in the field of ento-
mology. He was introduced by Brig. Gen. John
R. Wood, Commandant, Walter Reed Army In-
stitute of Research. Award for the Engineering
Sciences was made to E. Arthur Bonney in rec-
ognition of his outstanding contribution in the
field of supersonic aerodynamics. He was intro-
duced by Dr. Ralph E. Gibson, Director, Applied
Physics Laboratory, Johns Hopkins University.
Award of the Physical Sciences was made to
Terrell Leslie Hill in recognition of his notable
contributions in the field of physical chemistry.
He was introduced by Capt. Wilbur E. Kellum,
Commanding Officer, Naval Medical Research
Institute. An award was made for the teaching of
science to Helen Nale Cooper in recognition of her
distinguished career in the teaching of high school
mathematics. She was introduced by Mr. Watson
Davis, Director of Science Service and of Science
Clubs of America. The meeting was then addressed
by Dr. Gustave Burmeister, Assistant Admin-
istrator, Foreign Agricultural Service, U. 8S. De-
partment of Agriculture, on the subject of world
agriculture and food supply situation. In addition
to his oral presentation, Dr. Burmeister showed
a motion-picture film on the procedures used in
growing rice in the Orient and in the United States,
showing how modern methods have enabled the
United States to compete in this agricultural field
in foreign markets.
The following nominees for Vice Presidents
representing the Affiliated Societies were elected
by the Academy:
LAwrRENCE A. Woop—The Philosophical Society of Washing-
ton.
Frank M. SetzLter—Anthropological Society of Washington.
Hersert G. De1GNAN—Biological Society of Washington.
WittiAM W. Wartton—Chemical Society of Washington.
F. W. Poos—Entomological Society of Washington.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48. no. 10
ALEXANDER WETMORE—National Geographic Society.
Epwin T. McKnicHt—Geological Society of Washington.
FREDERICK O. CorE—Medical Society of the District of
Columbia.
GILBERT GROSVENOR—Columbia Historical Society.
S. L. EMSwreLLer—Botanieal Society of Washington.
GEORGE F. Gravatt—Society of American Foresters.
HERBERT G. DorsEY—Washington Society of Engineers &
Institute of Engineers.
ARNOLD H. Scorr—American Institute of Electrical En-
gineers.
RICHARD
eineers.
JoHn 8. ANDREwS—Helminthological Society of Washington.
Lioyp A. BurkKEy—Society of American Bacteriologists.
FLoyp A. HoucH—Society of American Military Engineers.
Dovueias E. Parsons—American Society of Civil Engineers.
W. C. Herti—Society of Experimental Biology & Medicine.
Tuomas G. Dicces—American Society for Metals.
Rosert M. SterHaN—International Association for Dental
Research.
F. N. FRENKIeEL—Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.
FrANcIs W. REICHELDERFER—American Meteorological So-
ciety.
S. Dirr—American Society of Mechanical En-
The following members were reported to the
membership as deceased in 1955 and in prior years
as shown:
W. M. JARDINE January 17
GH; sPARKER: 2o0.5 it ak! 3 eee March 26
Gio EGhORBY 25:3. hoses ee ann oe Le eee April 29
JicPa. NEAR BGI Oo, ot atte Seas eee June 6
@2 Es, WABERS: 3658.59 oo eee July 29
Ei (Ss JACOBY orb uecuc cats ona se eee August 1
AW) is TEAM, ris) 5 8 acai dyad oe August 8
ELS UR USANDSTBAD ES. Ss c0. cca ce ee ee November 1
Gees Honan 4 ee ee November 11
I SIGIR: Sete eRe Leis Jae, November 16
CEAG VP ETERS (1-5 goes oss Oo ee eee December 14
Ji:, doy HOW Riso acs 25 eee eee December 20
BrorHEeR LEON (JOSEPH SYLVESTRE SAGEr yY
IBARBIBR) 2 s-c50s50 o5dc tl oe eee ee ? 1955
1954
AMEnsOMO wD ILYUNN.osecc-cacceccasvess pene October 11
At Gre SNUG CANE Tie, span ten cee ee ae October 19
ARMIN (OF Woe USCHINERE 535 o eee enn April 22
FRANCIS) JR ROX: .3.:2s005ecneu eee December 29
Previous to 1953
Viv (BIPRENESS, 2.015 ee close oe eee 1951
A, “PENGK#). sic. See obo aire eee 1945
IPS. INDAR GUAGE 2 fsz/se 3 Sas Sine auc) ean ee 1942
J: -SCHOKADSKYS. cdeccka) abe eee eee 1940
WE AWITENG Ba ores cei ist Runkel eee 1928
After acceptance by the members of the Acad-
emy of the report of the Chairman of the Com-
mittee of Tellers, President Pittman declared the
following elected:
President-elect—WiLt1amM W. RuBrEy
Secretary—HEINZ SPECHT
Treasurer—HowarpD S. RAPPLEYE
Board of Managers—Franxk L. CAMPBELL and
F. N. FRENKIEL (to serve to January 1959)
Vote on the proposed revisions of Bylaws
changing method and conditions for retirement
was reported: 313 for and 6 against.
Dr. Pittman then introduced the new Pres-
ident, Dr. Ralph E. Gibson, and after a few re-
marks President Gibson adjourned the meeting.
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Bhilasophical Society of Washington... 06.000 scc seg tec be bot peed seen tees L. Marton
Anthropological Society OlaWashine tO coche ee ot eek Lan eee FRANK M. SETZLER
brslosicalsociety of Washington............2... 6.566 c ces cec lunes HERBERT FRIEDMANN
Mitenmemmoociesy of Washington... 4... le. ek eee ce ee he vee scone de os W. W. WALTON
Hatomolorical Society of Washington. ......:...0. 0.006.000 0s eden. Harowtp H. SHEPARD
MemenalGeorraphic Society:...........0...05e0eeceeescsetdacuees ALEXANDER WETMORE
Geolarieal society of Washington...... 0.2.04) 56...00. 5.60 ewes eee: Louis W. CuRRIER
Mediealisociety of the District of Columbia.......:.........-......:. FREDERICK O. CoE
ie oenmntprlistOrical SOCIELY wc. o.oo sc oe veo ee ck ee bee U.S. Grant, 3p
Peramermoociety Of Washington...) 60200665 ce eee ce ee eee cee eee CARROLL E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters..................... FLIPPO GRAVATT
Wiasmmeton mociety of Hneineers.....0....... 2056. 0e ee bc ce eee ek Hersert G. DorsEy
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers..... JOHN Howarp PARK
Helminthological Society of Washington......................... Donatp B. McMuLLEN
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists................. BERNICE EppY
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... cs eee ae JOHN O’ KEEFE
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers......................... Harry WELLS
National Capital Section, American Society of Civil Engineers........... D. E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine.......... WILLIE W. SMITH
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. HERBERT C. VACHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research...... W. T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society......................... JEROME NAMIAS
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Hngineers..........
CONTENTS
Page
MatTuHEmATics——A note on the group commutator of A and A*. Oca
TAUSSEKY.. 3... 2.) SEs e8ks ee a Se ee 305
PALEONTOLOGY.—Notes on prionodont pelecypods. Davin Nicou.... 309
Botany.—Notes on South American phanerogams—II. Lyman B. |
MEET, Sar ett As en Bon ce tele uae aN 2c a rrr 310
Botany.—A new bromeliad from the Northern Range in Trinidad.
COLIN. S. PITTENDRIGH...0... s.¢6 00s Yea ten te ee 315
ENTOMOLOGY.—New Neotropical Hebridae, including a catalogue of the
American species (Hemiptera). Cart J. Draxe and Haro C.
CHAPMAN). 2. pice ale ank Sanilic es be ls Can cee ee ol7
ELECTIONS TO THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (1955, 1956).. 326
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY. -........... 2.0254 .+4..5 eee 332
Notes anD NEws:
Determination of acetylene in low concentrations for air-pollu-
tion: control... 2% pee. ce ohn pees 307
Deaw23
VOLUME 48 November 1958 NUMBER ll
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
————— —
ieevececerceecern
os —
Published Monthly by the
Zee ft wG iON, ACADEMY OF. S@€FENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CHEsTER H. Pages, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BamMrorpD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonp, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL HSTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNaAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof .—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Reprinis of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 33)4 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately 10 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL:—Per -Year......:...>........) eee $7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol.-1:to vol. 10, tnel—not available*:..2:-..:.c..0:. — —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 47, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $393.50.
Monocrapu No. 1, ‘“The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PRocEEDINGS..................... esece tial $7.50
PRocEEDINGS, vols, 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.....................-.eeeeee $25.00
single. volumes, Unbound —: 62 :.5 5... 6.5 askew ob el 2.00.
SUE He THUMM OTS ste cit ayes ae OO ee legs Se ea eet ean gaat me Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and
aes to the Treasurer, H. S. RappLere, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specut, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md
.
Second class postage paid at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949. ;
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 48
November 1958
Now Er
PHYSICS.—Temperatures in heated finite slabs with fourth-power loss.! REYNOLD
GREENSTONE, Project OMEGA, Technical Operations, Inc., Washington,
D. C. (Communicated by C. M. Herzfeld.)
(Received October 6, 1958)
INTRODUCTION
It has been engineering practice to calcu-
late surface temperaturesin heated materials
on the assumption that the heat loss at the
surface is a linear function of surface tem-
perature. While this procedure is not theo-
retically precise, it has sufhced so long as
the expected range of surface temperatures
was not too high. In recent years, with the
growing interest in higher temperature
phenomena, there has been the need for
calculations using the theoretically more
precise Stefan-Boltzmann fourth-power law.
Jaeger (/) has calculated temperatures in a
semi-infinite slab cooling by reradiation to
the temperature of its surroundings assum-
ing fourth-power reradiation and Robertson
(2) at the National Bureau of Standards has
calculated temperatures at various depths
in a heated semi-infinite slab also assuming
fourth-power reradiation.
It is of interest to consider the rise of
temperature in a finite rather than semi-
infinite slab since in practice materials sub-
jected to heating may be too thin to justify
classing them with semi-infinite slabs. At
one extreme it is clear that sufficiently thin
slabs may be considered isothermal, and
at the other extreme sufficiently thick ma-
terials may be considered semi-infinite. In
the present paper, temperature rises in slabs
heated at a constant rate are calculated for
several thicknesses, and the transitions from
1 This paper is based on a thesis submitted by
the author in partial fulfillment of the require-
ments for the M. S. degree in physics at the Uni-
versity of Maryland.
thin-isothermal to finite and from finite to
semi-infinite temperature behavior are
demonstrated.
The distinctions between thin-isothermal,
finite, and semi-infinite behavior are not
merely based on physical thickness. Rather
they are dependent on time as well. Heat
travels at a finite rate through a material.
At times so short that the heat has not
reached the rear surface, finite thickness
can have no effect and the behavior of a
finite slab cannot be differentiated from
that of a semi-infinite slab. At times so long
that the heat has not only reached the rear
surface but has had time to produce tem-
perature equilibrium in the material, the
material should be treated as an isothermal
slab.
The specific assumptions of this paper
are these. A finite slab of thickness L (cm)
is subjected to constant irradiance H
(cal/em?-sec) at its front surface where the
absorptance is A. We are concerned only
with variations in temperature as a function
of depth x (em) since we assume the slab to
be uniformly irradiated over such large
transverse dimensions as to eliminate tem-
perature gradients in the transverse plane.
The slab is opaque, homogeneous, and its
thermal properties are assumed constant
over the range of calculated temperatures.
The rear surface of the slab is assumed
adiabatic. (This last assumption is made for
convenience in the calculations but should
cause little error in the transient behavior
calculated here. Throughout most of the
heating times considered, the temperature
PRAT HGOULAN JAN 2 7 195%
342
at the rear surface is far below that at the
heated surface. Thus, cooling which depends
on the fourth power of temperature may be
neglected.) A final assumption is that the
slab is initially in equilibrium with an
environment whose temperature 7 re-
mains fixed at 300°K.
The nonlinear boundary condition pre-
sented by the fourth-power law for surface
radiation makes unfeasible such standard
methods of temperature calculation as
Fourier analysis or the method of Laplace
transforms. The method of analysis adopted
here is the finite difference method of Dusin-
berre (3), the details of which appear in the
section on method of calculation.
While the results of this paper have been
given in terms of fixed values of parameters
and for steady heating, the method can be
readily generalized to accommodate tempera-
ture-dependent parameters and_ variable
heat inputs.
METHOD OF CALCULATION
The assumption of uniform heating over
a large transverse dimension has converted
the problem to one-dimensional form. Ac-
cordingly, the governing equation for tem-
peratures within the slab is the one-dimen-
sional Fourier equation (4)
ary OYE
ae Ta (1)
where 7 is temperature (degrees Kelvin),
h is thermal diffusivity (em?/sec), and ¢ is
time (sec).
At the heated surface continuity of heat
flow leads to the boundary condition
Wipe SS Si (=) (2)
Ox z=0
where o is the Stefan-Boltzmann constant,
e is the emissivity, and k is thermal conduc-
tivity (cal/cm-sec-°C).
At the rear surface (xv = L) we have the
adiabatic boundary condition
oT
os 7 0
The initial condition is 7 = To for all x
when ¢ = 0.
Following Dusinberre (3) we now proceed
(3)
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 11
to generate the difference equations equiva-
lent to equations (1), (2), and (3). We
consider the slab to be made of a succession
of elements of length Az except that, to
approximate surface behavior more closely,
we choose the surface elements to be of
length Ax/2 as in the sketch.
(Torr 2Cby 6
ASAE AK AXe Aix
Ax
2 2
Heat balance for the jth element expressed
in difference form leads to the expression
1 Cli eel) 4. k(T in. — 15)
Ax oe
i (4)
_ BACT T;)
teal At
where 7’; is the temperature of element 7 at
time ¢ and 7,’ is the temperature of element
7 at time ¢ + At.
A simple rearrangement leads to
(Ax)°
Lg eed
showing that the quantity
M = (Ax)?/hAt (5)
is a dimensionless modulus of the problem.
(The quantity 1/M is sometimes called the
Fourier modulus.) Solving for 7T;’, we ob-
tain
Spies = EAL = 2/M)
+ L/P sy -- Ley
which is the equivalent in difference form of
equation (1), the Fourier equation.
Equation (6) shows that MZ must be
greater than or equal to 2, for with WV less
than 2, 7,’ has a negative dependence on
T; . In other words, future temperatures at
element 7 will be less the higher the present
temperature, a physical absurdity.
In the present paper the choice IZ = 3
has been made giving
1s (Shen ae Mig ae aan) (7)
as the difference equivalent of Fourier’s
equation for temperatures at interior points
of the slab.
November 1958 GREENSTONE: TEMPERATURES IN HEATED FINITE
TEMPERATURE RISE AT(DEGREES C)
SLABS
10,000
Tp= 300 deg K
ol OS (gael dag E
bea See = ) Teq = 10,0007
3 (Aa nap
Teq [BE +104
5,000 AT=T-Tp 5000
4000
3000
2,000
2000
1500
|,000
000
900
500 800
700
600
200 500
100
100 200 400 600 800 1000 2000 4000 7000
TEMPERATURE RISE AT (DEGREES C)
bi leq t (deg C)
Fic. 1.—Temperature rise in a finite-isothermal slab with loss.
2000
1000
800
600
400
AH=18 cal/cm*-sec
L=O...cm
h= 107-3cm2/sec
k= 4.5 xlO-* cal/cm-sec-deg C
200
100
| 2 4 6 8 10
TIME t (SEC)
Fig. 2.—Temperature rise at selected depths in 0.l-em slab.
20
343
344
Heat balance for the heated surface ele-
ment expressed in difference form leads to
the expression
fey! (C43) VIE ap They se ae / 15
uel — oi is
which is equivalent to the exact boundary
condition (2). In difference form the
adiabatic boundary condition at the rear
surface becomes
IE = ee 5 (9)
Note that it 1s possible to determine the
equilibrium temperature directly without
going through the many iterations of the
difference method. Inspection of equation
(8) shows that as the slab heats up the term
in 7';* grows until, in the limit, the term
in brackets goes to zero at the point where
reradiation just balances out the surface
heating. Equilibrium temperature then is
given by
(8)
Ma = (iifae se Ta (10)
The same result is inherent in the exact
boundary condition (2).
As pointed out in the introduction the
temperature response of the heated finite
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 11
times the behavior should be characteristic
of heated semi-infinite slabs, and at late
times it should be characteristic of thin,
isothermal slabs. The surface temperature
rise In a semi-infinite slab heated at constant
rate and without loss is (4)
AT = T — T, = (2AH/k) Vit/=.
The temperature rise in an isothermal
slab of thickness LZ heated and reradiating
from one surface in the same manner as
the finite slab is obtained rather simply.
The heat balance equation for such an
isothermal slab is
AH — oe(T* — Ty) = (kL /WdT/dt. (12)
The equilibrium value of T is given by the
expression previously obtained for the finite
slab
(11)
T., = (AH/oe + To)" (13)
(The subscript S has been dropped because
the slab is isothermal.)
Let T’ = T/T,, and let 6 = hoe/kL.
Then (12) becomes
dr’ 7/1 — 1%) = oid (14)
a simple differential equation with variables
slab has two limiting behaviors. At early separable. When ¢ = 0, T = To, and
4000 AH=90cal/cm2-sec semi-infinite no loss
L=0.1 cm
= h=10-%cm2/sec
= k= 4.5 x 10-*cal/cm-sec-degC
uw 2000
uJ
a
2 finite with loss
: [
q
1000
O
az 800
= \— finite-isothermal with loss
«© 600
<6
a
a 400
=
ld
ke
200
100
i 2 4) 65) BE 10 2 4 6-8 M0 20 40
TIME t (sec)
Fig. 3.—Transition between semi-infinite no-loss results and finite-isothermal (with-loss) results.
November 1958 GREENSTONE: TEMPERATURES IN HEATED FINITE SLABS
1500
e)
fe)
fe)
800
600
400
TEMPERATURE RISE AT (DEGREES C)
200
100
100 200 400
AHVht /k (DEGREES C)
Fic. 4.—Surface temperature rise in three slabs of different thickness all heated at the same rate.
T’ = Ty = T/T,,. Then the solution of
(14) is
i, bee
2 1 — 7’
| ee
i ee
In ae amme i
(15)
Sin Stat, = Opie
A plot of equation (15) in a form giving
ieee iy versus b1 “t for various
values of T,, appears in Fig. 1. It is assumed
that To = 300°K.
RESULTS
Solutions of difference equations (7), (8),
and (9) were obtained for four choices of
slab thickness L = 107? cm, L = 0.1 em,
f= 1cm, and L = o., Values of H chosen
were 0, 10, and 20 cal/cm?-sec. Absorp-
tance and emissivity were set equal to 0.9.
Except for the case L = 10-*? cm, the values
h = 10% and k = 4.5 X 10~ were used.
In this one case the values were h = 1074
and k = 2.0 X 10~*. These choices of A
and k correspond roughly to the thermal
behavior of such nonconductors as rubber,
wood, and asbestos at room temperature.
The choices of irradiance, absorptance,
600 800 1000
3495
— L=0.032 cm
-—--— L=0O.1cm
—— L=lOcm
AH= 4.5cal/cm@-sec
2000 4000
and emissivity restrict the problem to
relatively moderate temperature rises (less
than 2000°C). The initial temperature of
the slab and its surroundings was assumed
to be 300°K.
The numerical solutions of the difference
equations were carried out on the LGP-30
electronic digital computer. The computer
program in essence is very simple. It calls
first for a solution of equation (8) to obtain
a new value of surface temperature 7.’
and then for a solution of equation (7) to
obtain new values of temperature at depths
within the slab. From there the process
simply iterates.
Typical time-temperature-depth results
are shown in Fig. 2 for a 0.1 em slab. The
equilibrium temperature is 1956°K. The
calculations were made using a grid size
of Az = 0.025 cm and At = 0.2083 sec.
Fig. 3 illustrates the transition between
semi-infinite behavior of the temperature-
response curve at early times and finite-
isothermal behavior at late times. Here
the temperatures in a finite slab (L = 0.1
cm) with loss are compared with those in a
semi-infinite slab without (equation
(11)) and with those in a finite-isothermal
loss
346
slab (thickness also L = 0.1 cm) with loss
(equation (15) and Fig. 1). At times less
than one second temperatures in the finite
slab with loss are very nearly the same as
those in the lossless semi-infinite slab.
At times greater than ten seconds tempera-
tures in the finite slab with loss become
very nearly the same as those in the iso-
thermal slab with loss.
It is apparently characteristic of the
approximations used in the calculations
that the first value of AT is always too high.
Thus in Fig. 3 the first point on the finite-
with-loss curve lies above the semi-in-
finite no-loss curve. The same effect was
noted in other calculations (not shown here)
as well.
In Fig. 4 curves of temperature rise vs
the composite variable AH +/ht/k are
shown for three thicknesses and the single
rate of heating AH = 4.5. It is apparent
that the results are nearly thickness-in-
dependent until AH ~/ht/k = 400. Similar
plots (not shown here) indicate a divergence
point at AH /ht/k = 800 when AH =
9.0 and AH Vht/k = 1500 when AH =
18.0. Thus the results may be said to be
approximately thickness-independent for all
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. I1
the cases examined here provided ~/ht/k
< 8/9. Alternatively, this criterion can be
viewed as the criterion for approximately
semi-infinite, no-loss behavior.
Surface temperatures calculated for the
semi-infinite slab with loss were not signif-
icantly different from those calculated
for the one centimeter slab having the same
thermal properties and heated at the same
rate.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The author wishes to acknowledge his
indebtedness to Dr. C. M. Herzfeld and
Dr. R. D. Myers for their advice in formu-
lating the problem and to Wilfrid G.
Rouleau for programming the problew for
the LGP-30 computer.
REFERENCES
(1) Jazrcer, J. C: Proc. Camb: Philisec 46:
634. 1950.
(2) Ropertson, A. F. National Bureau of
Standards Report 10A: 113. 1953.
(3) DusINBERRE, G. M. Numerical analysis of
heat flow. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1949.
(4) Carstaw, H. S., and Jarnerr, J. ©. Con-
duction of heat in solids. Oxford University
Press, London, 1948.
We take pride in the fact that we are thinking animals, and like to believe
that our thoughts are free, but the truth is that nine-tenths of them are rigidly
conditioned by the babbling that goes on around us from birth, and that the
business of considering this babbling objectively, separating the truth from
the false, is an intellectual feat of such stupendous difficulty few men are
ever able to achieve 1t—H. L.
MENCKEN.
November 1958
HESS AND SHAFFRAN: CORTISONE-INDUCED LIVER GLYCOGEN
347
BIOCHEMISTRY .—Inhibition by testosterone of cortisone-induced lwer glycogen
formation. W. C. Huss and I. P. SHarrran, Department of Biological Chem-
istry, Georgetown University Schools of Medicine and Dentistry.
(Received October 8, 1958)
The glyconeogenic activity of cortisone is
accompanied by negative nitrogen balance
(1, 2). The administration of testosterone
leads to positive nitrogen balance (3). It is
conceivable that the anabolic action of tes-
tosterone could offset the catabolic action
of cortisone and in so doing prevent deposi-
tion of liver glycogen. A series of experi-
ments were designed to test this idea and it
was found valid for liver but not for muscle.
Methods.—White rats, Wistar strain,
100-150 g were given 5 mg of testosterone
propionate intramuscularly on each of two
successive days. They were then fasted for
24 hours to deplete liver glycogen to 0.1
percent. A third dose of 5 mg of testosterone
propionate was injected at the end of the
fast; at the same time the test substances,
500 mg DL-alanine, 5 mg/100 g body weight
of cortisone acetate or both alanine and
cortisone acetate, were given. The methods
of administration of alanine and cortisone
acetate and determination of liver and mus-
cle glycogen were previously described (2).
Four to six rats were used in each experi-
mental period, and the animals were sacri-
ficed at intervals up to 48 hours after the
test dose.
Results—Liver glycogen values are given
in Table 1. As found previously, cortisone
acetate alone produced a marked and pro-
longed increase in liver glycogen. DL-ala-
nine produced an increase up to 6 hours,
DLz-alanine and cortisone acetate produced
an initial peak at 6 hours, followed by a
decline and a second prolonged rise. ‘Testos-
terone had a slight but not significant inhibi-
tory effect on the production of liver glyco-
gen from DL-alanine. Testosterone had a
very marked inhibitory effect upon forma-
tion of liver glycogen from cortisone and
also from the combination of cortisone and
DL-alanine. In the latter experiment, tes-
tosterone appeared to inhibit to some ex-
tent the formation of glycogen from DL-
*This study was done under a contract with
the Atomic Energy Commission.
alanine. The sums of the glycogen produced
by testosterone plus cortisone and testos-
terone plus DL-alanine are greater than the
amount of glycogen produced by all three.
The glycogen content of the rectus fe-
moris muscle of rats fasted for 24 hours
averaged 0.60 percent. When fed DL-ala-
nine only, there was no increase in muscle
glycogen after 6 or 16 hours. Cortisone ace-
tate produced an increase to 0.70 percent
after 6 hours and 0.82 percent after 16 hours.
Testosterone alone also produced an in-
crease in muscle glycogen to 0.65 percent
after 6 hours and 0.69 percent after 16 hours,
while cortisone acetate and testosterone
formed 0.80 percent glycogen after 6 hours
and 0.77 percent after 16 hours. Wortman
and Leonard (4) have reported an increase
in glycogen content of the rectus femoris
muscle of the rat following testosterone ad-
ministration; cortisol also produced an in-
crease that was greater than that induced
by cortisone. Leonard (8) reported that tes-
tosterone alone did not increase liver glyco-
gen. Tremolieres et al. (6) gave testosterone
acetate (5 mg/24 hrs) for 4-6 days to ad-
renalectomized rats and reported significant
increases in muscle glycogen and, in a few
cases, slight increases in liver glycogen. Ap-
parently the anabolic effect of testosterone
inhibits only liver glycogen production re-
sulting from the catabolic activity of corti-
sone but not that produced from exogenous
DL-alanine.
Summary.—Rats were treated with 5 mg
TABLE 1.—PERCENT LIVER GLYCOGEN
TIME, HRS.
D
Se |
— DONS W |
AUG Gapene e8 tec Uy Cte. cae ie
Cortisone. .
Alanine + cortisone......./2.
+ testosterone. . l
Cortisone + testosterone... 0.
Alanine, cortisone testos-
TOROME aes wie een Roce res
DD
~~
~~
GD ~I bo
pot ped,
tH DL) bo
CS xe bo
hm 1D te
—~
—_ ww
— ww
~
~
~I CG Oo
me OF Oe bh
a
—_
ft.
fama
—_
—_
pm
4.
ee)
.{1.6/2.4/1.0/0.7/0.8}1.6
348
of testosterone propionate for two succes-
sive days, fasted for 24 hours, and again
given 5 mg of testosterone together with 500
mg DL-alanine, or 5 mg of cortisone acetate
or both DL-alanine and cortisone acetate.
Testosterone did not inhibit formation of
liver glycogen from DL-alanine; it did de-
crease the amount formed by cortisone or
cortisone and DL-alanine. Testosterone in-
creased muscle glycogen but not as much
as did cortisone at the levels used.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 11
LITERATURE CITED
(1) Lone, C. N. H., Katzin, B., and Fry. Endo-
crinol. 26: 309. 1951.
(2) Hess, W. C., and SwHarrran, I. P. Journ.
Washington Acad. Sci. 47: 17. 1957.
(3) KocHaustan, A. D. Vitamins and hormones
4: 255. 1946.
(4) Wortman, L. C., and Lronarp, 8. L. Endo-
erinol. 53: 480. 1953.
(5) Lronarp, 8S. L. Endocrinol. 50: 199. 1952.
(6) TREMOLIERES, J., DERACHE, R., and FrRirraton,
G. Ann. Endocrinol. 15: 362. 1955.
———— EE LE
RECENT HONORS
Dr. WiLui1AM G. BROMBACHER has received
the highest honor of the Instrument Society
of America, honorary membership, for his
contributions to the field of instrumentation
and automation.
Roman F. GELLER, who retired in 1956
from his position as chief of the Porcelain
and Pottery Section of the National Bureau
of Standards, has been named 1959 recipient
of the Albert Victor Bleininger Award. The
award is the highest honor conferred in this
country for distinguished achievement in
the field of ceramics, and is presented an-
nually by the Pittsburgh Section, American
Ceramic Society.
Wiser 8. Hrnman, Jr., has been awarded
the Department of the Army Decoration for
Exceptional Civilian Service for his “excep-
tional performance of duty as technical di-
rector of DOFL.”
Dr. JAMEes I. Horrman has been selected
to receive the American Chemical Society’s
1959 Fisher Award in Analytical Chemistry.
This is the highest recognition for work in
analytical chemistry in the United States
and Canada.
Dr. Grorce C. PAFFENBARGER was pre-
sented the 1958 Callahan gold medal by the
Callahan Award Commission of the Ohio
State Dental Association “in recognition of
the high merit of the scientific contributions
which he has made to humanity and the
healing professions.”
NEW APPOINTMENTS
Dr. AuBert C. SmitH has been appointed
Director of the Museum of Natural History
for the United States National Museum,
Smithsonian Institution.
Dr. Donatp B. McMUuLLEN is on a 15-
month leave of absence to act as a consult-
ant to the World Health Organization, on
the control of schistosomiasis. He will be in
Africa and the Middle East.
November 1958
HOLDER AND STEWART: FILED TEETH FROM CAHOKIA MOUNDS 349
ANTHROPOLOGY .—A complete find of filed teeth from the Cahokia Mounds in
Illinois. PRESTON HoupEr, University of Nebraska, and T. D. Srewarrt, U.S.
National Museum, Smithsonian Institution.
(Received October 20, 1958)
The importance of the great and essen-
tially unexplored prehistoric site of the Ca-
hokia Mounds near East St. Louis, IIl., is
widely recognized (Titterington, 1938;
Deuel, 1958). The consensus of archeologi-
cal opinion assigns the major works to peo-
ples of a Mississippian cultural orientation.
The major occupation of the site 1s thought
to begin sometime around A.D. 700 to 800
and to continue to a time shortly before the
advent of the earliest French explorers. De-
spite differences of opinion regarding minor
points, it is generally agreed that the Mis-
Sissippian peoples introduced the use of
crushed shell aplastic in their pottery manu-
facture, lived in large village concentra-
tions, and practiced advanced horticulture.
In addition, they exhibited a development
of complex religious practices as evidenced
by the construction of massive temple
mounds and the manufacture of an impres-
sive constellation of ceremonial artifacts.
Waring and Holder (1945) indicated the
function of these latter aspects of Mississip-
pian culture and demonstrated the essen-
tially local nature of the development of an
elaborate ceremonial complex. Neverthe-
less, it was stressed that the ultimate source
of the impetus for this development lay in
Middle America.
Actually, little evidence of this Southern
Ceremonial Complex has been reported from
Cahokia, a not conclusive circumstance
considering the dearth of excavations at the
site. Still it is clear that Cahokia was a cen-
ter for the development of many attributes
of Mississippian cultural development.
Some insight into its close connection with
Middle American cultural influences has
been afforded in recent years by the re-
peated discovery there of mutilated teeth
(Stewart and Titterington, 1944, 1946; Tit-
terington, 1953). As these authors pointed
out, Cahokia stands as the center for the
occurrence of this phenomenon in North
America. However, the examples of dental
mutilation previously described from the
Cahokia area either were recognized some-
time after the original excavation of the
burials, or were isolated surface finds. The
precise cultural context and the exact con-
ditions of occurrence are somewhat obscure
although there is little doubt of the general
Mississippian provenience of the trait.
In 1954 during the course of salvage arch-
eological excavations in the heart of the
Cahokia site one of us (P.H.) for the first
time found a burial with filed teeth in situ.
This circumstance has provided relatively
complete and exact information which has
been lacking heretofore, namely, the condi-
tions of the burial, the sex and age of the
individual bearing the teeth, and a good
indication of the cultural affiliation of the
burial. It seems worthwhile, therefore, to
bring the new facts to the attention of an-
thropologists.
CIRCUMSTANCES OF THE FIND
In January 1954, it was reported to the
senior author that human bones had been
found by Joseph Berta of Collinsville, IIl.,
at what was later to be called the Rees site
on the property of the Sand Prairie Hunting
and Fishing Club about 1.2 miles east of
Horseshoe Lake and 2.8 miles northeast of
Monk’s Mound in Madison County, III.
(see Fig. 1). Ultimately the major find of
bones was demonstrated to consist of two
components of a single burial: an articu-
lated skeleton and a lot of bundled bones.
The articulated skeleton had filed upper
teeth as will be described.
The conditions of discovery were unfor-
tunate. In the summer of 1952 the Club had
engaged a tractor to bulldoze off a foot or
more of the top soil in this vicinity to pre-
pare it for a pienic ground. At that time
many fragmentary human bones appeared.
It is reported that a burial was uncovered
then which consisted of four adult skeletons
placed head to head in the form of a eross
300
oriented to the four directions. This feature
is said to have been back-covered without
further disturbance. Many other burials
were disturbed at this time. According to
observers a small rise was removed by the
bulldozing; but there was no noticeable
mound there in 1952.
In the winter of 1954 a tractor was again
brought in, this time in order to deepen the
bottom of Edelhardt Lake which had tem-
porarily dried up. In turning to handle the
dirt, the treads of the tractor dug through
the remaining foot or so of top soil and
churned up many fragments of human bone
which later proved to have come from the
bundled bones of the burial complex (see
Fig. 2). The occurrence was reported to Mr.
Berta, a member of the club, who uncovered
several of the skulls and bones of the
bundled burial. At this juncture the senior
author was requested to examine the find
SAND
FAIRMONT
CITY
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 11
and to explore it further.t This exploration
extended through the week ends of most of
January and February under weather condi-
tions not ideal for the exposure or preserva-
tion of bones. Nevertheless, enough was
recovered to warrant the following obser-
vations:
The site of the discovery is part of a
‘Richard Rees, proprietor, and Willard Hicks,
manager of the Sand Prairie Hunting and Fishing
Club, gave permission to excavate and offered
continued help and encouragement. Mr. Berta was
indefatigable in his interests and furnished much
valuable assistance. Due to his alertness the mu-
tilated teeth were recognized while the skeleton
was still 7m situ. Thanks are given to these and to
the many others who assisted in the work: Wash-
ington University students, David Alt, Thomas
Sweeney, Raymond Collins, Gregory Gregson, and
others; Leonard W. Blake and Jack Bower of the
Missouri Archeological Society, and various mem-
bers of the Sand Prairie Hunting and Fishing Club
for sundry equipment, advice and sustenance. The
Illinois State Museum filing number for the site
is 11 Ms’52.
PRAIRIE
Fic. 1.—Map of the Cahokia area in Madison County, Ill, showing the
location of the Rees site (11MSv52).
November 1958
rather extensive area of aboriginal occupa-
tion along both sides of the southeasterly
tip of Edelhardt Lake. Cursory examination
revealed surface fragments of pottery and
other signs of prehistoric occupation. Among
these fragments there was a majority of
shell-tempered wares of a general Mississip-
pian cultural origin. However, there were
also cord-marked wares present not only
in shell temper but also in grit and hme-
stone tempers. These latter wares indi-
eate non-Mississippian cultural affiliations.
From this sample and other evidence of
Woodland occupation which will be men-
tioned below, we can assume that the site
was occupied over a considerable span of
time by several different cultural groups.
One hundred yards or so to the south of
the burial location there is at present a
small rise of about three feet with an irregu-
larly circular outline some hundred feet in
AN
Y
Y
EYea
al
\)
ONE TE OOM,
HOLDER AND STEWART:
FILED TEETH FROM CAHOKIA MOUNDS 391
diameter lying along the high land parallel
to the lake shore. This feature gives every
indication of being the last remnant of a
mound that has eroded away through the
constant plowing of the fields. This feature
was not explored. Directly across the lake
from the burial sites some small rises are
scattered through the woods. Surface con-
centrations of sherds of a Mississippian cast
suggest that these are probably the loca-
tions of prehistoric dwellings.
Clearly, this burial occurs on a site which
has long been occupied and which shows
considerable evidence of an extensive occu-
pation by peoples of a Mississippian cul-
tural position. The water passage extending
unbroken to the center of the great Cahokia
Mound group no more than three miles to
the south is suggestive. In combination with
the concentrations of Mississippian pottery
this whole complex of factors would seem
Fig. 2.—Arrangement of the Rees site burial containing an articulated skeleton and the bundled
bones of seven other individuals. The upper front teeth of the articulated skeleton are filed.
d02
to identify the Rees site as one of the
mound locations subsidiary to the great
central group and probably occupied at the
same time. The exact temporal relationships
cannot be defined until there is further re-
search in the area.
The conditions of the burial complex it-
self are worthy of some description. For
some six inches below the new surface the
soil was disturbed, presumably by plowing
which had occurred since the bulldozing in
1952. About six more inches of soil inter-
vened between the surface and most of the
bones. In this grey sandy soil the edge of a
grave-pit could easily be determined by
following a half inch layer of hardened and
compacted sand which marked the edge of
the ovate basin-shaped pit. The fill of the
pit showed considerable “mixture” in con-
trast to the homogeneous grey sand of the
matrix. In the fill of the pit one red-painted
shell-tempered sherd was found. This Mis-
sissippian fragment seemed to have been
accidentally incorporated in the original fill.
Within this pit outline were two groups
of bones: an articulated skeleton laid in a
supine extended position with its head to
the south; and a mass of bundled disarticu-
lated bones from at least seven individuals
scattered along the easterly side. The ma-
jority of the loose long bones had been
placed in the north half of the bundle with
their long axes oriented north and south;
the south half was occupied by few long
bones but was mainly filled with short
bones, phalanges, vertebrae, clavicles, hand
and wrist bones, etc.; at least four skulls
and their disarticulated mandibles were in
the central part of the heap. No break oc-
curred in the fill between any of the bones,
and the grave outline extended unbroken
around all of them. This constituted a unit
burial. Since the ribs and short bones of the
bundled remains extended against and over
the upper surface of the right humerus of
the articulated skeleton, we can infer that
the latter was placed in the pit first, prob-
ably with the flesh still on the body.
An extensive rodent run traversed the
burial pit from east to west. Presumably
certain bones missing from the central por-
tion of the articulated skeleton were mis-
placed by rodent activity. The following
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 11
bones were missing: the right radius and
ulna, although the hand was undisturbed;
the lumbar section of the vertebral column;
the left radius and all of the right wrist and
hand with the exception of one terminal
phalanx; the upper portion of the shaft and
the head of the left femur. In addition, the
left tibia and fibula were broken and some
portions missing. It should also be noted
that the patellas had been moved. There
were extensive signs of rodent gnawing
along the shafts of the left fibula and the
left femur. The rodent disturbance contin-
ued in the form of a path or filled-in tun-
nel directly through the concentrations of
small bones in the “bundled burial” where
it was impossible, of course, to tell which
bones had been moved or removed.
Aside from the single random red-painted
sherd found in the fill the only cultural ma-
terial with the burial was a large plain
sherd lying between the ankles of the ar-
ticulated skeleton. This sherd was tempered
with crushed shell and fits with the de-
scription of the ware type St. Clair Plain
(Griffin, 1949), which is the run-of-the-mill
domestic ware at most Mississippian sites
of this region. It seems unlikely that this
sherd was placed in position as an offering;
it, too, must have been accidentally in-
cluded in the earth fill of the burial pit.
Further excavations revealed another
burial complex, about 10 feet to the north,
overlaying a pit which contained Woodland
types of pottery. This burial was itself con-
tained within a large amorphous pit. It was
at the same level as the original double bur-
ial and contained associated pottery vessels.
One of these was an engraved spurhandled
beaker. The form of the beaker, the en-
graving, and the workmanship in general
demonstrated a late Mississippian position
for this burial. Unfortunately, in the ab-
sence of undisturbed overburden the rela-
tion between the two burial complexes can-
not even be postulated.
An additional and incidental find should
be mentioned. Two loose incisor teeth with
filed grooves and notches were found by
Mr. Berta in the surface debris some ten
or fifteen feet to the north of the original
burial complex (Fig. 4, bottom). This sug-
gests that further examples of filed teeth
November 1958 HOLDER AND
may await discovery at this site despite
the conditions of disturbance.
SKELETAL MATERIAL
All of the bones were in a very poor state
of preservation, which the severe winter
weather at the time of excavation did not
improve. The skulls were fragmented from
the repeated passage of the tractor above
them. While in matrix they retained their
shape, but once removed immediately de-
teriorated into bits. Every effort was made
to salvage the skull and other bones of the
articulated skeleton, because of the filed
teeth. Of the disarticulated skeletons only
a selection of long bones and innominates
was saved in order to determine the num-
bers of individuals represented and their
sexes and ages. All the salvaged skeletal
material was sent to Washington for study
by the junior author.
Examination of the articulated skeleton
in the laboratory showed complete union of
the primary elements of the innominate, and
of the epiphyses at the distal end of the
femur and at the upper ends of the tibia
and fibula. In white males this stage of de-
velopment is reached in 100 percent of sub-
jects at 23 years (McKern and Stewart,
1957, p. 45). However, the iliac crest is not
completely ossified in this Indian, whereas
in Whites the attachment of this epiphysis
is always complete at 23 (McKern and
Stewart, 1957, p. 61). Thus a maximum
male age of 20-22 is indicated. The corre-
sponding age in a female, which is the sex
of the Indian skeleton, would probably be
around 18 months younger (Krogman, 1939,
p. 16), that is, 18.5-20.5. In view of the fact
that few populations today come up to
American growth standards, this prehis-
toric Indian female likely was younger than
19. Some support of this view is provided
by the incompletely formed roots of the
third molars.
An indication of this Indian girl’s stature
is given by the right tibia and right fibula,
the only long bones complete enough to
yield measurements of maximum length
(335 and 331 mm, respectively). These fig-
ures correspond to the following stature
estimates for females of the white and Ne-
gro races (Trotter and Gleser, 1952):
STEWART:
FILED TEETH FROM CAHOKIA MOUNDS 353
White Negro
MIST ateeier een ie hpi Male 62+ in 61 in
i ular trl eee ed eat) |, 61+ ‘ 60+ “
Since Indians have relatively longer trunks
than Whites and Negroes, the standard
long bone/stature regression formulae may
underestimate Indian stature.
An attempt was made to restore the skull
vault to its original shape, but the upper
face, being very fragile, was left in the
condition as found (Fig. 3). Undoubtedly
a little compression of the posterior vault
(cradle-board deformity) is present. In ad-
dition, although the upper face cannot be
properly attached, an unusual amount of
prognathism, both facial and alveolar, is
present. The shape of the lower jaw (es-
pecially the wide gonial angle) and the for-
ward slope of the upper teeth support this
conclusion.
The presence of alveolar prognathism per-
haps made this girl an especially favorable
subject for tooth filing. As figure 4 shows,
the occlusal edge of each of the upper me-
dian incisors has 4 shallow notches, that of
the upper left lateral incisor has 2, the up-
per right lateral incisor one, and the upper
right canine one. The notches in the lateral
incisors and right canine, besides being
more 9-shaped than the others, also have
somewhat sharper margins, steeper sides,
and are deeper, all of which suggests that
the filing was done in two stages some time
apart. The upper left canine has a facet of
wear just where a notch would be placed.
It is possible that this wear has obliterated
the notch, because a very slight groove is
visible under magnification at the proper
place. Also, the upper right lateral incisor
is malformed lingually which may account
for the absence of a second notch here and
thus the failure of the filer to match the pat-
tern on the opposite side. It should be noted
also that the labial surfaces of the upper
front teeth lack horizontal striations or
grooves of an artificial nature (compare
with the specimens shown at the bottom of
Fig. 4), and that the lower teeth have not
been included in the mutilation pattern
(the overbite would have hidden such al-
terations when the teeth were in occlusion).
Under magnification the edges of the
notches are seen to be smoothed from chew-
ing.
304 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. I1
Fig. 3.—Restored skull from the Rees site articulated skeleton. Adolescent female. Note the slight
posterior cranial compression and the extreme prognathism. See figure 4 for details of the teeth.
November 1958 HOLDER AND STEWART: FILED TEETH FROM CAHOKIA MOUNDS 3955)
tal grooves in the labial surfaces combined with notches in the occlusal edges (Left and middle are a
pair (female?) from the Rees site; right is a single tooth (male?) from the burial area northeast of Monk’s
Mound—U.S.N.M. no. 380984).
306
Incidentally, this girl was already well
on the way to losing, through decay, her
first and second lower molars on both sides.
In addition, five other molars show ad-
vanced caries.
Turning now to the disarticulated and
bundled bones, the senior author recognized
during excavation and kept apart the re-
mains of a child and of an adult male. The
child’s temporary teeth are all in place and
an alveolus for the first permanent molar
indicates eruption of this tooth, hence an
age ca. 6 years. Among the other bundled
bones are parts of an adolescent male ca. 17
years, and parts of at least four other indi-
viduals, mostly adult females. The follow-
ing maximum lengths were obtained on the
adult bones:
Male} Female?
Humerus, right.......... 326 mm 309 mm
< Neitz eet 325 =
TRA GiUSs * Sorc seaeee rote 241 —
Winasric hither eee 263 _
oe Velti cates ene — 243
LOSE, HM. coco co sou Nr.445 a eae
leith ate eae — 430
AMoy ED, FAGAN. .scccoscecacs 359 —
On WUE, WAR. caccosccecases 348 —
1 One individual
2 Probably more than one individual
Pathological changes were seen in only
three bones: a tibia and a fibula (general-
ized osteitis), and a femur (marked rough-
ening of the linea aspera).
There remains to comment on the two
filed incisor teeth found on the surface 10
to 15 feet from the burial under considera-
tion (Fig. 4, bottom, left and middle). Size,
shape and color suggest that these are the
upper median incisors of a small female.
Slight exposure of the dentine on the oc-
clusal edges indicates an adult. Each tooth
has horizontal grooves and scratches on the
labial surface and shallow notches on the
occlusal edge. The variable number and ir-
regular spacing of these deliberate altera-
tions suggest careless or amateurish execu-
tion. The notches (at least two in the one
shown on the left, and probably four in the
one on the right) are not A-shaped or
n -shaped, but have their two sides practi-
cally at right angles, with one side shorter
and more vertical than the other, sort of as
in an inverted check mark (1). Since the
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 11
edges of the notches are little if any
smoothed from chewing, it would seem that
they were executed after the dentine had
been exposed.
Another case of this sort (Fig. 4, bottom,
right), probably the upper median incisor
of a male, was given to the U. 8S. National
Museum by P. F. Titterington in 1948 and
is said to have come from the burial area
northeast of Monk’s Mound (Moorehead,
1928, fig. 1). Here certainly tooth wear has
nearly obliterated the wide-angled notches
(2 in number), but the horizontal grooves
(also 2 in number) remain quite distinct
and seem to have been made rather care-
fully.
DISCUSSION
The first complete find of filed teeth re-
ported here, accompanied by descriptions
of additional surface finds of isolated filed
teeth, throws new light on a prehistoric cul-
ture trait of limited occurrence in North
America. These discoveries further docu-
ment the concentration of the trait in the
central portion of the Mississippi Valley.
If there were doubts concerning the local
cultural provenience of the trait, it can now
with certainty be said to be Mississippian.
Furthermore, the precise determination of
the details of the burial indicate at least one
type of burial complex associated with filed
teeth.?
The new examples of tooth filing from
Cahokia resemble those described previ-
ously (Stewart & Titterington, 1944, 1946;
Titterington, 1953). Referring to Romero’s
classification (1958, fig. 2), the mutilation
consists of notches in the occlusal edge,
ranging in number from 1 to 4 (class A); of
horizontal grooves in the labial surface
(class D); or of combinations of the two
features (class F). The horizontal labial
grooves have been found only in North
America. On the other hand, notches in the
occlusal edge occur rather frequently in
Middle America and are considered to be
one of the simplest types of mutilation.
Notching in this manner was common in
*This type of burial is reminiscent of the un-
specified “compound burial” at Cahokia mentioned
in Stewart and Titterington, 1944, p. 318-9.
November 1958 HOLDER AND
Mexico during the late periods (i.e., A.D.
1000 to 1700, see Romero, 1958, table 12).
In Illinois, just as in Mexico, the total
pattern of notching appears to have been
variable. Whether the variations may have
served as individual or group identification
markers is a question that must await fur-
ther evidence. Certainly, the decoration
would in itself serve to set off the individ-
ual from the general population.
The youthfulness of the individual here
described—around 19 years—is somewhat
exceptional when compared with the data
from Middle America. Of the hundreds of
cases from the latter area studied by Ro-
mero (1958, p. 224) only two fall within
the age group 18 to 20 years. It is largely
because of the age of our specimen that we
place weight on the evidence for the filing
having been done in stages; that is, for the
central incisors having been filed first and
then after an interval, evidenced by the
smoothing of the edges of the notches, the
other front teeth having been filed. We have
no way of knowing whether ours is an ex-
ceptional case in this regard.
A surprisingly large number of cases have
come to light in the Cahokia area during
the last 15 years—15 altogether.*? However,
this information, especially as it relates to
completely documented specimens, is still
too scanty to indicate the frequency of the
practice at any given period or at different
periods. It would be premature, therefore,
to attempt social interpretations at this
time.
In conclusion attention is called to the
fact that the notches in the Illinois speci-
mens are not very deep. They thus seem like
weak and hesitant expressions of the boldly
cut notches of prehistoric Middle America.
In this respect the practice of dental mu-
tilation at Cahokia can now be regarded as
resembling other Mexican-like traits of the
*Including four undescribed cases with hori-
zontal labial grooves donated to the U.S. National
Museum by P. F. Titterington in 1948 (nos. 380,
358-361 ). These are said to have come from north
of Cahokia mounds nos. 19 and 20.
STEWART:
FILED TEETH FROM CAHOKIA MOUNDS 397
Mississippian complex. Despite their un-
doubted Middle American source they ap-
pear in the new setting in a context which
suggests not only attenuation, but also a
modification and reinterpretation in keeping
with their local adaptation.
It seems well to reiterate the need for fur-
ther carefully planned and controlled ex-
cavations at the great center of Cahokia.
If our incidental explorations could yield
results of this richness, how much more val-
uable would be a serious program of arche-
ological investigation.
LITERATURE CITED
DeveL, THorne. American Indian ways of life.
Illinois State Mus., Story of Illinois series no.
9. 76 pp. 1958.
GriFFIn, J. B. The Cahokia ceramic complezes.
Proc. 5th Plains Conf. for Archeol., Univ.
Nebraska, Notebook no. 1: 44-57. 1949.
Krocman, Witton Marton. A guide to identification
of human skeletal material. FBI Law En-
forcement Bull. 8 (8): 29 pp. 1939.
McKern, Tuomas W., and Stewart, T. D. Skeletal
age changes in young American males. Quarter-
master Res. and Dev. Command, Environ-
mental Protection Res. Div., Tech. Rep. EP-
45: 179 pp. 1957.
MoorEHEAD, WARREN K. The Cahokia mounds.
Univ. Illinois Bull. 26 (4, pt. 1): 9-106. 1928.
Romero, Javier. Mutilaciones dentarias pre-
hispanicas de México y America en general.
Inst. Nac. Anthrop. e Hist., Serie Investiga-
ciones no. 3: 326 pp. 1958.
Stewart, T. D., and Tirterincton, P. F. Filed
teeth from Illinois. Journ. Washington Acad.
Sci. 34 (10): 318-321. 1944.
. More filed Indian teeth from the
United States. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci.
36 (8): 259-261. 1946.
Tirrerincton, P. F. The Cahokia mound group and
its village materials. Privately printed. St.
Louis, Mo., 1938.
. Filed teeth. In “Cahokia Brought to Life.”
Publ. Greater St. Louis Archeol. Soc., pp. 31-
Sy), IB.
Trorrer, Mitprep, and Gieser, GoLpINE C. Esti-
mation of stature from long bones of American
Whites and Negroes. Amer. Journ. Phys.
Anthrop., ns. 10 (4): 463-514. 1952.
Warinc, A. J., JR., and Houper, Preston. A
historic ceremonial complex in the south-
eastern United States. Amer. Anthrop. 47 (1):
1-34. 1945.
pre-
308
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 11
PALEOBOTAN Y.—WNew occurrences of the fossil quillworts called Isoetites. ROLAND
W. Brown, U.S. Geological Survey.
(Received September 26, 1958)
Except botanists, few people are familiar
with the quillworts (Isoetes). As their com-
mon name implies, the quillworts have slen-
der, pointed, although not stiff leaves that
arise in a close spiral from a short stem or
corm. In appearance they look somewhat
like tufts of grass or sedge and may readily
be mistaken for them. They are chiefly
aquatic, growing along the muddy shores of
quiet ponds in nearly all parts of the world.
On the inside of the base of the leaf,
which is in reality a sporophyll, is the
sunken sporangial area that on the outer or
earlier leaves bears megaspores and on the
inner or later leaves, microspores. Thus,
Isoetes is not a fern but is commonly called
a fern ally. For further anatomical details
the reader is referred to my first paper on
fossil quillworts (Brown, 1939), in which I
reviewed the distinguishing features of [so-
etes as an introduction to the description of
some fossils whose identity with the quill-
worts was for a long time unsuspected. In
that paper I defined two species, Isoetites
serratus Brown from the Cretaceous, and J.
horridus (Dawson) Brown from the Terti-
ary. Since then, as a result of field work and
a closer inspection of the collections of fossil
plants in the U. 8. National Museum, new
localities extending the range of Isoetites
have been found and some new morphologi-
cal information has appeared. In one in-
stance the range of recognizable isoetalean
remains is greatly extended backward in
time.
Not long ago, speculating about the an-
cestral lineage of the Paleocene Isoetites
horridus, | was reminded of the illustrations
of some curious specimens described as Lep-
acyclotes [properly, Lepidocyclotes| by Ebe-
nezer Emmons (1856, p. 332, pl. 3, figs. 4,
6) from the Deep River Triassic coal field
southwest of Raleigh, N. C., the most recent
discussion of which is by Reinemund (1955).
Emmons’s collection of plants from this
area, long thought to be lost (Ward, 1900,
p. 274-277; Fontaine, 1900, p. 277-279),
was found at Williams College, Williams-
town, Mass., and transferred to the U. 8.
National Museum. Examining Emmons’s
specimens intently, I presently found fea-
tures in them that are clearly identical with
those on the previously described species
of Isoetites. Lepacyclotes is therefore re-
named as
Isoetites cireularis (Emmons) Brown, n. comb.
Higs)5; 78) Ossie,
Lepacyclotes circulars Emmons, Geol. rept. mid-
land counties, N. C. p. 332, pl. 3, fig. 4. 1856;
American geology, pt. 6, p. 130, pl. 3, fig. 4.
1857.
Fontaine, U. S. Geol. Survey Mon. 6, p. 119,
pl. 49, fig. 8 [called Avrawcarites carolinensis
Fontaine in plate legend], 1883; U. S. Geol.
Survey 20th Ann. Rept., pt. 2, p. 311, pl. 47,
fig. 4. 1900.
Daugherty, Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ.
526; p. Si, pl; 15, figss I 2toae
Lepacyclotes ellipticus Emmons, Geol. rept. mid-
land counties, N. C. p. 332, pl. 3, fig. 6. 1856;
American geology, pt. 6, p. 129, pl. 3, fig. 6.
1857.
Fontaine, U. 8S. Geol. Survey Mon. 6, p. 118, pl.
52, figs. 4, 4a [called Araucarites carolinensis
Fontaine in plate legend]. 1883; U. S. Geol.
Survey 20th Ann. Rept., pt. 2, p. 311, pl. 47,
fig. 5; pl. 48. 1900.
Emmons characterized Lepacyclotes as fol-
lows: “Disk circular or elliptic and formed of
numerous scales arranged in a circle or in that
of an ellipse; scales terminating outwardly in
triangular points, which form a border outside
of a circular ridge’. Describing the two species,
circularis and ellipticus, he added several details:
“Scales with a ridge upon the back, bounded by
two shallow furrows or depressions. Sometimes
furnished with a stem which traverses the disk
in the direction of its long diameter. ... At first,
it appeared to me that it was an accidental ac-
companiment; but having seen it already, three
or four times, and always lying in this direction,
I believe it should be regarded as a stem, or
support of the disk, and that it is part of
the plant”. He dismissed the idea that Lepa-
cyclotes might represent a cycad or conifer and
regarded the plant as something unknown to
him.
November 1958
Fontaine’s first guess was: “This plant is evi-
dently a cone of a conifer near to Araucaria.”
Later he noted a significant fact: “The epidermal
tissue of the scales, which is in many cases pre-
served, is exactly like that of Hquisetum
rogersi ...” The word “exactly” here is perhaps
too strong; but “much” or “very” would be
appropriate. Fontaine’s second guess, therefore,
was that the specimens represent parts of a
horsetail strobilus.
Daugherty identified his material from the
Chinle formation (Triassic) in the Petrified For-
est National Monument near Holbrook, Arizona,
with that described by Emmons, and concluded
that it represents “the basal portion of the
flower of a Williamsonia,” that is, a kind of
eyeadeoid. As I have not had an opportunity to
examine Daugherty’s specimens I enter his ci-
tation in the foregoing synonymy with a little
hesitation.
From the evidence about to be submitted it
can be concluded that Isoetites circularis is not
an araucarian cone, a cycadeoid flower, or a
horsetail strobilus, but that it represents a quill-
wort.
Spores. In Fig. 18, magnified three times,
the large, round, tetrahedral megaspores can be
seen matted together as black incrustations.
Maceration of this material with nitric acid and
potassium chlorate was not very successful.
Nevertheless, with a binocular microscope, the
spores and their triradiate ridges can be seen
clearly, but other markings are obscure. In Fig.
8, natural size, of another specimen, faint,
rounded cavities on both sides of the central
ridge indicate the impressions of spores. In none
of this Triassic material, however, have I found
a specimen that definitely shows microspores,
but such specimens should be looked for. The
tetrahedral megaspore, it should be remarked,
is general in the fern allies.
Sporangia. As in living Jsoetes, the spo-
rangium in the Triassic specimens was at the
base of the leaf (sporophyll) on the ventral
(inner) side. This part of the leaf seems to have
been a more or less distinct segment, for the
fossil sporangia are often found separately with-
out traces of the sterile leaf parts but with a
fairly sharp line showing where the rest of the
leaf was originally attached. The sporangia are
somewhat squarish (Figs. 5, 13) but in some
instances narrowed rapidly to the point of at-
tachment (Figs. 8, 11). Above the sporangium
BROWN: FOSSIL QUILLWORTS
309
was a persistent triangular ligule (Fig. 11) some-
what larger than but similar to those on speci-
mens (Fig. 3) from the Hanna formation (Ko-
cene), northeast of Hanna, Wyo. Behind and
beyond this, distally, the sterile part of the leaf
continued for an indefinite distance to its tip,
the nature of which is unknown in these speci-
mens. No remains of the sterile parts of the
leaves have been seen, except short fragments
that sometimes are present at the sides of the
ligules. Perhaps this part of the leaf, as suggested
before, was easily detached and lost, or perhaps
the collections from the Carolina area were not
made with an eye for such material. Conse-
quently, it is not known whether or not these
leaves resembled those of the toothed Cretace-
ous 2 serravus (ies: 10) 12 and) Brown, 1939;
fig. 5) and the entire or sparsely toothed Terti-
aval. honmvdus. (Brown 1939-9 te 6). hhey,
should be searched for in future collecting.
These sporangia are in general larger than
those of the Cretaceous, Paleocene, and Eocene
species (Figs. 1, 3, 6, 7) but are arranged in a
close spiral (Fig. 5, similar to the Paleocene
specimen, Fig. 4) around a so-called corm or
stem that is not noticeably lobed as it often is
in living species.
Surface features. Magnified 15 times, the
surface of J. curcularis 1s a fine pattern of minute
rectangular papillations quite similar to that
observed on the Cretaceous and Tertiary species
(Brown, 1939, fig. 4). It also resembles closely
the surface of Hquisetum, another fern ally.
Other occurrences. Besides the occurrences
of Isoetites already referred to or cited in the
legend to the figures, two others, not here illus-
trated, need to be reported. One is a corm with
a cirelet of sporangia similar to those shown in
Figs. 1 and 5. It was collected by H. R. Berg-
quist, of the U.S. Geological Survey, in 1946,
from basal Upper Cretaceous ferruginous sand-
stone (Lewisville member of the Woodbine for-
mation), 5 miles southeast of Dexter, Texas. The
second consists of characteristic megaspores ob-
tained by Duncan Heron, Department of Geol-
ogy, Duke University, by washing samples from
outcrops of the Tuscaloosa formation (Upper
Cretaceous) in North and South Carolina in
1957. These specimens are at that university.
Concerning the habit and ecology of Jsoetites
little is known, but a bit ean be conjectured.
Because the fossils are nearly always associated
with Hquisetum the inference that the living
Fries. 1-12.—(See opposite page for legend).
November 1958
plants were adapted to moist conditions seems
reasonable. The Cretaceous and Tertiary species
are frequently found with remains of aquatic
plants called Trapa?, whose foliage has all the
appearance of having been a floating rosette.
The peculiar squarish features seen along the
midline on leaves of Jsoetites are the outward
expression of collapsed inner air spaces, and this,
coupled with the fact that the ends of the leaves
were flat and spatulate suggests that the leaves
were adapted to resting on a water surface, as
they are in some living species of [soetes.
REFERENCES
Brown, Rotanp W. Some American fossil plants
belonging to the Isoetales. Journ. Washington
Acad. Sci. 29: 261-269. 1939.
. Cretaceous fish egg capsule from Kansas.
Journ. Paleontology 24: 594-600. 1950.
BROWN: FOSSIL QUILLWORTS
361
DaucuHerty, Lyman H. The upper Triassic flora of
Arizona. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 526:
1-108. 1941.
Emmons, Epenezer. Geological report of the mid-
land counties of North Carolina. Raleigh, 1856.
. American geology, pt. 6: 34-39; 99-134.
Albany, 1857.
FontTaIne, WILLIAM M. Contributions to the knowl-
edge of the older Mesozoic flora of Virginia.
U. S. Geol. Survey Mon. 6: 1-144. 1883.
. Notes on fossil plants collected by Dr.
Ebenezer Emmons from the older Mesozoic
rocks of North Carolina. U. S. Geol. Survey
Ann. Rept. 20 (2): 277-315. 1900.
REINEMUND, J. A. Geology of the Deep River coal
field, North Carolina. U.S. Geol. Survey Prof.
Paper 246: 1-150. 1955.
Warp, Lester F. Status of the Mesozoic floras of
the United States. The North Carolina area.
U. S. Geol. Survey Ann. Rept. 20(2): 266—
277. 1900.
Fig. 1.—Isoetites horridus (Dawson) Brown, showing a circle of sporangia, with megaspores and
microspores, around the corm. U.S.G.S. loc. 5144, in Tin Pan Canyon, northwest of Raton, N. Mex.
Raton formation (Paleocene). Fie. 2.—I. serratus Brown, Loc. 9332, northeast of Rock Springs, Wyo.
Mesaverde formation (Upper Cretaceous). Fie. 3.— I. horridus, showing small, pointed ligules above the
sporangia. Loc. 8548 northwest of Hanna, Wyo. Hanna formation (Eocene). Fie. 4.—I. horridus, south-
east of Rock Springs, Wyo. Fort Union formation (Paleocene). Fires. 5, 8, 9, 11, 13.—I. circularis (Em-
mons) Brown, n. comb., showing (5) a corm surrounded by sporangia, (8, natural size, 11, X3), single
sporangia with ligules and fragments of the sterile parts of leaves, (9, X15) the papillated surface pat-
tern, (13, X3) part of a corm with sporangia on whose surface can be seen patches of a black incrustation
consisting of matted, roundish, tetrahedral megaspores. Deep River coal field, southwest of Raleigh,
N. C. Pekin formation (Upper Triassic). Fie. 6.—I. horridus, showing sporangia with fragments of the
sterile parts of the leaves and their undulate margins. Loc. 8881, one-half mile northwest of Ramah,
Colo. Dawson arkose (Paleocene). Fires. 7, 10.—I. serratus, showing (7, X3) sporangia and fragments of
the sterile parts of the leaves, (10, X3) the spatulate, serrate tip of a leaf. Loc. 9384, north side of Cortez,
Colo. Dakota sandstone (Upper Cretaceous). Fig. 12.—I. serratus, X3, showing spatulate tip of a leaf
and undulations along the midline that represent collapsed inner air spaces. Loc. 4806, northeast of
Rock Springs. Mesaverde formation (Upper Cretaceous).
All figures are natural size except as noted, and all specimens are in the U. 8. National Museum.
362 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 11
ICHTHYOLOGY .—Three new species of archibenthic imiomous fishes from the
western North Atlantic. Gites W. Mean, United States Fish and Wildlife
Service.
(Received October 13, 1958)
The species discussed below are repre-
sented by specimens caught in moderately
deep water by the United States Fish and
Wildlife Service vessels Oregon and Silver
Bay, the Harvard-Havana Expedition of
the Atlantis, and by several small older col-
lections in the United States National Mu-
seum, the Chicago Natural History Mu-
seum, and the Museum of Comparative
Zoology, Harvard University.
I wish here to express my appreciation to
those who, by supplying specimens for
study and information about others, have
contributed to this account: Dr. N. B. Mar-
shall (British Museum); Loren P. Woods
and Mrs. Marion Grey (Chicago Natural
History Museum); William C. Schroeder
and Mrs. Myvanwy M. Dick (Museum
of Comparative Zoology, Harvard Uni-
versity); and Dr. Charles R. Robins (Ma-
rine Laboratory, University of Miami). My
thanks also go to the scientific staff and
crew of the M/V Oregon, particularly to
Harvey R. Bullis, Jr., and Warren F. Rath-
jen of the United States Fish and Wildlife
Service, for their hospitality and assistance
while at sea and for their continued interest
in the progress of work later based on the
collections obtained by their vessels.
Chlorophthalmus brasiliensis, n. sp.
igs le
The description which follows is based on
specimens collected by the U.S. Fish and Wild-
life Service vessel Oregon during its exploration
of the coastal shelf of northeastern South
America (cruise 47; November 1957). This
cruise made several deep-water stations be-
tween Venezuela and the Equator, and for-
tunately these contained representatives of the
more northern Chlorophthalmus agassizi as well
as large series of the form described below as
new. Since I plan to review the infraspecific
variability in western North Atlantic C. agassizi
in a later paper, I will restrict my remarks here
‘to a comparison of the new species, from off
Northern Brazil, with the geographically ad-
jacent population of C. agassizi. Except for the
long-nosed greeneye, Parasudis truculentus, no
other species of chlorophthalmid is known from
the western North Atlantic.
Holotype—A specimen 117.0 mm in standard
length from Oregon station 2082 (see data in
table): U.S.N.M. no. 156892.
Paraty pes —871 specimens from the following
Oregon stations; all off northern Brazil.
2080 02°04’N.lat. 47°00’W.long. 125 fms. Nov. 17, 1957
2081 01°52’N.lat. 46°54’W.long. 175 fms. Nov. 17, 1957
2082 01°51’N.lat. 46°50’W.long. 200 fms. Nov. 17, 1957
2083 01°49’N.lat. 46°48’W.long. 225 fms. Nov. 17, 1957
2084 01°45’N.lat. 46°46’W.long. 275 fms. Nov. 18, 1957
TABLE 1.—FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION OF NUMBER
oF ANAL Fin Rays, GILL RAKERS, AND PRE-
DORSAL SCALES IN SAMPLES OF Chlorophthalmus
brasiliensis FROM OFF BRAZIL AND OF C. agassizi
FROM SIMILAR DEPTHS OFF VENEZUELA AND THE
GUIANAS.
Anal fin rays
7 8 9 10
C. brasiliensis (Brazil) 9 40 1
C. agassizi (Surinam) d
C. agassizi (British 3 11
Guiana)
C. agassizi (Venezuela) 1 12
Gill rakers
Upper Lower limb Total
limb
2)3)4 19120 21/22|23)22|23)24)|25|26|27
C. brasiliensis (Brazil) 41| 9 7/28}12) 3 7|25|12} 5) 1
C. agassizi (Surinam) Deed, By 4
C. agassizi (British 1/13 3| 9) 2 4| 8] 2
Guiana)
C. agassizi (Venezuela) 13 6| 3] 4 6| 3) 4
Predorsal scales
i1 12 | 13. |) eis
C. brasiliensis (Brazil) 6 26 14 4
C. agassizi (Surinam) 1 2 1
C. agassizi (British 3 10 1
Guiana)
C. agassizi (Venezuela) 3 10
November 1958
Most of these specimens have been deposited
in the U. 8. National Museum (U.S.N.M. nos.
159358 to 159362). Others are in the collec-
tions of the Chicago Natural History Museum;
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard
University; Academy of Natural Sciences of
Philadelphia; Natural History Museum, Stan-
ford University; University of Miami Marine
Laboratory; British Museum (Natural His-
tory); Rijksmuseum van Natuurlijke Historie,
Leiden; and the Stichting Surinaams Museum,
Paramaraibo.
Diagnosis—The terete form, circular eye of
moderate size, and prolonged tip of lower jaw
will distinguish C. brasiliensis from C. agassizi,
the highly variable species to which I refer not
only all western North Atlantic specimens which
I have seen (including C. chalybeius Goode)
but also the tropical west African C. atlanticus
Poll. C. agassizi is composed of several allopatric
infraspecific populations, and it will be most
useful here to compare it to the population
geographically nearest to it. A summary of the
most apparent characters by which the two
forms can be distinguished follows:
Chlorophihalmus agasizzi,
FROM OFF VENEZUELA AND THE
GUIANAS
Chlorophthalmus brasiliensis,
FROM OFF NORTHERN BRAZIL
MEAD: THREE NEW ARCHIBENTHIC
1. Diameter of orbit greater
than 40 percent of prepectoral
length.
2. Length of snout, in per-
cent of prepectoral length, less
than (23.37 + 0.189 times pre-
pectoral length).
3. Postorbital width of
head, in percent of prepectoral
length, greater than (43.7 +
0.184 times prepectoral length).
4. Length of pectoral fin, in
percent of standard length,
greater than (24.2-+ 0.009 times
standard length).
5. Anal fin rays modally 84.
6. Total number of gill
rakers (both limbs) modally 23.
7. Number of
seales modally 12.
1. Diameter of orbit less than
40 percent of prepectoral length.
2. Length of snout, in per-
cent of prepectoral length,
greater than (23.37 + 0.189 times
prepectoral length).
3. Postorbital width of head,
in percent of prepectoral length,
less than (43.7 + 0.184 times pre-
pectoral length).
4. Length of pectoral fin, in
percent of standard length, less
than (24.2 + 0.009 times stand-
ard length).
5. Anal fin rays modally 9.
6. Total number of gill
rakers (both limbs) modally 24.
Description —The
predorsal 7. Number of predorsal
scales modally 13.
proportional measure-
ments which follow are expressed in percent of
standard length and are those of the type, 117.0
mm in standard length, followed, in parentheses,
by the range of values found in a series of 20
paratypes, 93.7 to 132.0 mm in length:
Length of head, 30.1 (28.7-31.4); width of
head, measured between the posterior midpoints
FISHES 363
of the orbits, 14.1 (13.5-14.6); width of head,
measured between the anterior midpoints of the
orbits, 10.8 (10.1-11.5). Width of body, meas-
ured immediately behind the bases of the pec-
toral fins, 12.9 (11.5-13.5). Depth of body, at
origin of dorsal fin, 16.0 (14.2-16.0) ; at origin of
anal fin, 10.9 (10.0-12.2); at origin of adipose
fin, 10.0 (8410.6); least depth of caudal
peduncle, 7.0 (6.6-7.6).
Length of snout, 9.4 (9.0-10.0); length of
upper jaw, 13.1 (12.3-13.7) ; distance from snout
to tip of lower jaw (mouth closed), 2.5 (2.2-
2.6). Horizontal diameter of orbit, 10.9 (10.1-
11.4); width of bony interorbital, 2.7 (2.7-3.1).
Distance from snout to origin of dorsal fin,
36.2 (35.4-37.8); preanal distance, 75.7 (74.5-
81.3) ; prepectoral length, 29.2 (28.1-31.5) ; pre-
ventral distance, 40.8 (39.6-42.6). Length of
base of dorsal fin, 10.7 (10.3-12.2); of anal fin,
7.3 (6.6-8.0). Length of pectoral fin, 22.8 (22.0-
24.7); of ventral fin, 17.9 (17.6-20.0). Depressed
height of dorsal fin, 20.1 (19.7-23.2); of anal
fin, 13.6 (13.5-15.7). Length of upper lobe of
caudal fin, measured from the base of the first
upper procurrent caudal ray, —— (23.5-26.6).
D—11. A—9 (occasionally 8 or 10). P—
16-17. V—9. C—I-17-I. Gill rakers (lower limb
of anterior arch) —20-23 (usually 21); total gill
raker count (first arch) —23-26 (modally 24).
Seales in horizontal series (between the upper
point of the gill opening and the base of the
midcaudal ray)—51-56. Scales between anus
and origin of anal fin—18-21; predorsal scales—
13-14; scale rows between origin of dorsal fin
and lateral line—7-S8.
Body terete, nearly circular in cross-section
anteriorly but becoming compressed posteriorly.
Depth of body, at dorsal origin, 1.9-2.2 in length
of head. Width of body, immediately behind
insertion of pectoral fin, 2.3-2.8 in length of
head. Length of head 3.2-3.5 in standard length.
Body and suborbital region of head covered
with imbricate, weakly denticulated eyeloid
scales most of which are usually lost during
capture. Lateral line seales pierced by a tube
but otherwise similar to body scales. No promi-
nent axillary scales; those surrounding pelvic
base and those in and below the axil of the
pectoral fin somewhat larger than body scales
and variously shaped.
Head broadest immediately behind eye; sides
of head converging the
evenly forward to
364
rounded snout. Tip of snout on a horizontal
with center of eye and with tip of lower jaw,
when the mouth is closed. Length of snout 1.1—
1.2 in diameter of orbit. Lower jaw terminal,
ending in a horizontal triangular plate. This
mandibular extension (snout to tip of lower jaw
with mouth closed) 3.5-4.2 in length of snout.
Angle of gape just before a vertical from anterior
edge of orbit. Maxillary ending below anterior
edge of pupil. Posterior two-thirds of maxillary
surmounted by a long and slender supramaxil-
lary. Maxillary broad posteriorly, its rear edge
convex and sloping downward, forward and in-
ward.
Head covered by an extensive network of
sensory pores which cannot be described satis-
factorily because of the loss of skin which has
occurred in almost all specimens. This system is
most highly developed on the interorbital re-
gion. Particularly evident are the pores which
extend onto the dermal dorsal eyelid, the cireum-
orbital system, and the scattered series of pores
on the ventral surface of the head.
Teeth present on premaxillary, dentary, pala-
tine and vomer. Tongue, the tip of which 1s free,
is edentulous. The terminal part of the lower
jaw, which extends beyond the upper, bears a
pair of toothed patches lateral to the edentulous
median symphyseal ridge. These teeth are small,
bristlelike and depressible. These patches are not
continuous with the principal series of mandibu-
lar teeth. The extreme tip of the lower jaw,
distal to the symphyseal ridge with its adjacent
tooth patches, bears no teeth and is pierced by
a pair of pores, the entrances to a bony tube
leading to the lower surface of the mandible near
its tip. These channels continue posteriorly,
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 11
median to the lower edge of the rami of the
mandible, passing through at least two pairs
of ossified tunnels. Because of skin loss, it is im-
possible to determine whether or not this
channel, after 1t emerges from the bone, is a
completely enclosed tube; there are no rem-
nants of such a tube between the ossified tunnels.
The principal mandibular teeth are minute, de-
pressible, needlelike and recurved, and form a
band which decreases in width posteriorly.
The premaxillary teeth are minute, of about
equal size, shghtly recurved and depressible, and
form a narrow band. Anteriorly this band is
on the ventral surface of the premaxillary; pos-
teriorly it is on the lateral face. The two lateral
knobs of the vomer bear patches of stronger
teeth, most of which are depressible. Though
widely separated, these patches are continuous
with one another, in most specimens, by way
of a single row of minute teeth along the an-
terior edge of the vomer. The palatine teeth are
very small and are restricted to a band along
the anterior half of that bone.
The gill rakers on the first arch are flattened
and of moderate length, that of the longest
about equal to the diameter of the eye lens,
and longer than the gill filaments opposing it.
Rakers on second arch similar but much shorter;
those on the last two reduced to spine-bearing
knobs.
Predorsal distance 2.6—2.8 in standard length;
preanal 1.2-1.4 in length; prepectoral 3.2-3.6
in length; preventral 2.3-2.5 in length. First
three dorsal rays unbranched, the third longest;
the depressed height of the fin 1.3-1.5 in length
of head. First three anal rays unbranched, the
third longest; the depressed height of anal fin
Fig. 1.—Chlorophalmus brasiliensis, holotype, 113.0 mm in standard length, U.S.N.M. no. 156892.
(Drawn by Margaret G. Bradbury.)
369
ARCHIBENTHIC FISHES
THREE NEW
MEAD
November 1958
“YISUO] prepuvyzs Jsurese “YYSuUIT prwpueys Jo yudo1ed ur ‘uy [e1oyood Jo YASUI] Jo yo]d ozIs-uo0-uOTyed “p SYySue] [B41oyoodoid ysurede “yyAuo] jesoyoodosd
JO qusoa0d UT ‘41G1O JO JoyoUTRIP [ByUOZTAOY JO yoTd ozIs-uO-OTyBL ‘9 SYYsuo] [eLoyoodoad ysurese “YySuUe] [B10yoodo1d Jo yuodsed Ut “YyZUe] ynOUsS Jo
SUIBULING
Wag ‘BjonzouaA WOAf (Q) Wz2ssphp *O Jo sueuttoeds puw (KX) sesuarIsnug sniupoyrydosojy,) UdseMyeq UOSstIedUI0D dLIyouIOYd10 yy
OZIS-UO-OT}R
“euBIny) YS
cv
I ‘g Syj8uez] [etojoodoid ysurese ‘yySue] [es0joedeid jo yuedsed ur ‘peoy jo YyypiM [eVyqris04sod jo yord oz1s-u0-O1yRYy
Ov
Ovl
(WW) HLONST WVYOL9Sd3ud
o2t
oll
G2 ‘dId
(WW) HLONI1
ool
a2 ‘Old
ve
ce
QUVGNVLS
-O€
06
82
92
(HLON3T QYVONVLS JO LN39N3d Ni)
Nid TW¥OL93d 3O HLON3I
ve
(HLON3T WWH¥OL93d3Y¥d JO LN39Y3d NI)
LAONS 3O HLONIT
ev
(WW) HLON31
9€
Ov
92 “Old
WHYOLISdsud
ve cf Of 82
(WW) HLONST WWHOL93d3ud
ve Old
ve
ce
92
b2
82
22
92
‘,
(HLON3ST WYOLDSdaNd JO LNS59YN3d NI)
v2
D
41990 3O YSL3SNVIG TIVLNOZIYXOH
22
(HLON3T WHOLDSdaSYd JO LN3DY3d NI)
QV3H JO HILOIM WiLISYOLSOd
yord
pues
7, “DIA
366
20-22 in length of head. Length of pectoral
fin 4.0-4.5 in body length; length of ventral
fin 5.0-5.7 in length. Except for the bases of
the caudal rays, all fins are scaleless.
Coioration—In preservative, the background
color of the body is yellowish or occasionally
orange; it is nearly white ventrally, becoming
brownish dorsally in fresh specimens. The ir-
regular dark blotches below the midline are
more prominent in young specimens. Broad
vertical bands of variable width dorsally. Viewed
from above, the most prominent of these are
at the nape, each end of the dorsal fin base,
midway between dorsal and adipose fins, just
ahead of the adipose fin, midway between
adipose fin and procurrent caudal rays, and
through these procurrents. Narrower bands le
between these. The pattern, rather variable,
fades with preservation in alcohol.
Tip of lower jaw and edge of upper jaw,
operculum, linings of pharyngeal and abdominal
cavities, eye and anus black. Snout and top of
head dusky, suborbital and to a lesser extent
ventral surface of head and body punctate.
A black stripe courses along the entire mid-
dorsal line, but is most conspicuous between
the nape and the origin of the dorsal fin. The
scale rows are delineated by black lines. Fins
dusky.
Baile prencais (Bathypterois) bigelowi, n. sp.
Fig. 3
Bathypterois longipes (non-Giinther), part, Goode
and Bean, 1895: 66 (the juvenile recorded from
Blake st. cxct).
Bathypterois quadrifilis (non-Giinther), Longley
and: Hildebrand, 1941: 25.
Bathypterois (Bathypterois) bigelowi is rep-
resented in the collections of the Chicago Natu-
ral History Museum; University of Miami Ma-
rine Laboratory; the Museum of Comparative
Zoology; and the United States National Mu-
seum. Although juveniles of this species have
been present in the National Museum collection
since the early exploratory activity of the Fish
Commission steamer Albatross, the identity of
these has not hitherto been appreciated and
they have been variously referred to Bathy-
pterois longipes and B. quadrifilis, species to
which they bear a close but superficial resemb-
lance. More recently, the western Caribbean
exploration of the U. S. Fish and Wildlife
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 11
Service vessel Oregon (September, 1957) ob-
tained large series of the new form, and it is
now apparent that this species is the commonest
bathypteroid in the western Atlantic and one
which prefers waters much shallower than most
of its congeners (260 to 400 fathoms).
Holotype—A specimen 124.5 mm in standard
length from the Caribbean Sea off Nicaragua,
Oregan station 1915 (see data below) ; C.N.H.M.
no. 64435.
Paratypes—The following western North At-
lantic specimens: 1 specimen, 90.6 mm (no
precise data, western Carribean), Chicago Nat-
ural History Museum no. 64422; 10, 88.0-117.0
mm, Oregon station 1906 (12° 19’ N., 82° 27’
W.; 325 fms.; Sept. 11, 1957), University of
Miami Marine Laboratory no. 1998 and
C.N.H.M. no. 64424; 4, 65.4-106.0 mm., Oregon
station 1908 (12° 33’ N., 82° 20’ W.; 350 fms.;
Sept. 11, 1957), C.N.H.M. no. 64426; 9, 80.3-
120.5 mm, Oregan station 1909 (12° 35’ N., 82°
19’ W.; 350 fms.; Sept. 11, 1957), C.N.H.M. no.
64427; 1, 73.0 mm, Oregon station 1910 (12°
AQ’ N., 82° 18’ W.; 350 fms., Sept. 11) 1957),
C.N.H.M. no. 64428; 1, 74.6 mm, Oregon station
1911 (12° 44 N., 82° 14° Ws 350 mince a sept:
11, 1957), C.N.H.M. no. 64429; 3, 119.0-123.6
mm, Oregon station 1912 (12° 49’ N., 82° 15’
W.; 325 fms; Sept. 12, 1957), CANsEEviE no:
64430; 1, 98.5 mm, Oregon station 1913 (12° 54’
N., 82° 15’ W.; 300 fms. {Sepiaeiaaioo a:
C.N.H.M. no. 64431; 2, 98.8-123.0 mm, Oregon
station 1914 (138° 062.N., 82° 13 We-sas0snmc:-
Sept. 12, 1958), C.N.H.M. no. 64432; 15 (im ad-
dition to the holotype), 76.5-129.5 mm, Oregon
station 1915 (18° 13’ N., 822 137WeeeoUsimecer
wept. 12, 1957), C.N.H MM. no2 3644593 and
U.M.M.L. no. 1999 (1 sp.); 5, 105.1-126.6 mm,
Oregon station 1917 (13° 20’ N., 82° 02’ W.; 325
fms.; Sept. 12, 1957), C.N.H.M. nos. 64436 and
64437; 6, 79.4-131.0 mm, Oregon station 1952
(16° 46° N., 82° 16° W.; 300) imsi-eSemmmiae
1957), U.M.M.L. no. 23835.
Seven additional specimens are availiable, all
in very poor condition but undoubtedly referable
to this species: 4, 45.0-71.5 mm, from south of
Tortugas, Fla. (Longley; U.S.N.M. no. 117214
and C.N.H.M. no. 42784); 1, 81.5 mm, John-
son-Smithsonian Expedition, Caroline station
1.1.T.13, off the Virgin Islands (18° 33’ 45” N.,
65° 15’ W.; 300-400 fms.; Jan. 30, 1933),
US.N.M. no. 108292; 1, 137.6 mm, Johnson-
Smithsonian Expedition, Caroline station 23
November 1958
MEAD: THREE NEW ARCHIBENTHIC FISHES 367
Fig. 3.—Bathypterois bigelowi. holotype, 124 mm in standard length, from the Caribbean Sea off
Nicaragua; C.N.H.M. no. 64435. (Drawn by Mildred H. Carrington.)
ies om euerto Rico (18° 327 N., 66° 217 45”
Were o0mimses Heb, 4, 1933), U.SINM. no:
108261; 1, 49.2 mm, Blake station 191 (25° 337’
Nes eosin) Ulo. NIM no. 47619) and’ 1,
89.0 mm long, which was caught at Blake sta-
tion 154, off Monserat at 298 fms. (MCZ
27926).
Recently, the Silver Bay caught a single
juvenile, 75.0 mm in standard length, in the
Atlantic off central Florida at station 454 (29°
LN ee arose VV .. 350. tims; June 12; 1958).
The principal characters of this fish fit the
description of B. (B.) bigelowi, but in certain
morphometric features, for example the relative
length of head, this single specimen differs sig-
nificantly. Since it was caught off the east coast
of Florida while most B. (B.) bigelowi came
from the Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean, it is
excluded from the account given below. More
Atlantic material is needed before a satisfactory
comparison can be provided. This juvenile is
now in the U. 8S. National Museum (no.
156951).
Diagnosis—Body light in color (possibly
greenish in life), darker dorsally than ventrally.
Most of dorsal fin membrane black. Membrane
between central caudal rays black. A prominent
black spot at base of upper and lower caudal
lobes. Membrane connecting lower rays of upper
pectoral fin black.
Upper pectoral, outer ventral and lower
eaudal rays prolonged, the tips of the produced
ventral and caudal rays typically thickened.
Upper pectoral rays split at a point beyond
origin of adipose fin. Eight ventral fin rays.
Second or third anal ray considerably longer
than first or fourth. Usually three rays in upper
pectoral fin below the uppermost two fused
and prolonged rays (frequently four lower rays
in upper pectoral fin in juveniles; occasionally
two in adults). These lower rays well developed
and connected by a black fin membrane. Usu-
ally 9 (8 to 10) rays in lower part of the pec-
toral fin, none notably stronger than the others.
Dorsal fin situated over or behind a vertical from
axil of ventral fin; anal origin well behind end of
base of dorsal fin.
Lateral line scales 48 to 55, the lateral line
continuing onto the caudal fin above central
caudal ray. Scales behind lower part of pectoral
fin base not pectinate. Total number of gill
rakers on first arch 40 or fewer. Eye minute,
its greatest measure much less than the width of
the posterior end of the maxillary.
No notch below caudal peduncle (cf. B.
phenax, the notch formed by the most posterior
ventral procurrent caudal ray). Vertebrae 49
to 952.
Description—The description which follows
is based primarily on the type and ten additional
specimens from various localities in the western
Caribbean. Fin ray counts include all speci-
mens. In the paragraph which follows, the pro-
portional measurements taken from the type are
followed, in parentheses, by the range of meas-
urements found in ten paratypes. All are ex-
pressed in percent of standard length.
Length of head, 24.6 (20.9-24.1); length of
snout, 8.3 (7.6—-8.6); length of premamillary,
15.6 (138.4-15.4). Horizontal diameter of eve,
1.4 (1.38-1.7); interorbital width, 8.5 (7.3-8.5).
Greatest depth of body, 15.5 (12.9-15:8);
368
depth at origin of anal fin, 13.7 (12.1-14.4) ;
least depth of caudal peduncle, 8.3 (7.7-9.0).
Greatest width of body, 8.8 (6.7-8.9).
Predorsal distance, 43.7 (40.0-45.0); pre-
anal, 62.6 (57.6-62.0); prepectoral, 19.7 (17.8-
21.8); preventral, 42.2 (37.3-42.1). Length of
base of dorsal fin, 18.3 (11.5-13.2); of anal fin,
7.6 (6.4-8.3). Distance from base of last dorsal
ray to adipose fin, 22.3 (21.6-23.9); from base
of last anal ray to ventral procurrent caudal
ray, 30.7 (30.0-34.7). Length of produced caudal
ray, 28.5 (22.7-27.7); of longest pectoral ray,
96.6 (78.1-98.3); of longest ventral fin ray,
36.7 (29.1-37.2).
D—12-13 (13 in 35 specimens, 12 in 17, 11
in 1). A—9 (8 in 3, 9 in 44, 10 in 6). Lower
rays In upper pectoral fin—3 (both fins of each
specimen counted when possible: 2 in 9, 3 in
92, 4 in 5). Lower pectoral fin—9 (8 in 5, 9 in
74, 10 in 22). V—S8 (invariable). C—I-16-II
(invariable). B. R—11 (infrequently 10 or 12).
G. R—10-12 + 1 + 22-28 = 33-40. Scales in
lateral line—48-55. Vertebrae—(in 14 speci-
mens from Oregon station 1915, western Carib-
bean) —49-52 (51 in 8 of these specimens).
Body compressed, snout depressed. Body
deepest at origin of dorsal fin, 1.5 to 1.8 in
length of head; depth at origin of anal fin 1.6
to 2.0 in head; least depth of caudal peduncle
2.5 to 3.1 in head.
Cheeks and body scaled; all scales cycloid.
Lateral line complete, originating at upper point
of gill opening and terminating on caudal fin
above central caudal rays. Base of caudal fin
scaled, all other fins naked.
Head 4.1 to 4.9 in standard length, nearly
flat dorsally, rounded anteriorly but with a slight
indentation at tip to receive symphyseal knob
of lower jaw. Length of snout 2.8 to 3.3 in head.
Top of head pierced by nostrils and a pair of
longitudinal series of pores. Olfactory organ
well developed, nostrils separated by a mem-
brane which bears a short flap.
Eye small, horizontally eliptical and laterally
directed, much smaller than greatest width of
maxillary, 3.8 to 6.0 in length of snout. Eye
relatively larger in juveniles. A horizontal row
of about four pores below eye. Interorbital
2.7 to 3.0 in head length.
Branchiostegal membranes broad and free
from isthmus, extending beyond rear edge of
operculum but not reaching insertion of lower
pectoral fin. Four branchiostegal rays on epi-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 11
hyal; seven on ceratohyal. Opercular bones well
developed and firm.
Gill rakers present on all four arches, spinu-
lose, flattened; those near angle of first arch
about twice the length of the opposing gill
filaments.
Length of maxillary 1.6 to 1.8 in head, sur-
mounted by a thin long supramaxillary which
terminates anteriorly under rear edge of eye.
Premaxillaries slender and separate from one
another. Mandible heavy, its outer lower sur-
face pierced by pores. A small edentulous sym-
physeal knob present. A band of minute teeth on
premaxillary and mandible, both broader an-
teriorly. A small patch of minute teeth fre-
quently but not always present on vomer, and
an occasional row of very small teeth on pala-
tine. Tongue toothless. Well developed patches
of pharyngeal teeth.
Dorsal fin inserted well behind bases of inner
ventral rays; predorsal distance 2.2 to 2.5 in
standard length. First two dorsal rays simple,
the rest branched. Adipose dorsal well-developed
and broad, placed about equidistant from end
of dorsal base and base of upper procurrent
caudal rays. Anal inserted well behind a verti-
eal from last dorsal ray; preanal distance 1.6
to 1.7 in body length. The first and occasionally
the second anal ray simple, the second or third
longer than its neighbors, markedly longer in
most specimens than those in most bathypteroid
species.
Lower two principal caudal rays simple and
produced, their ends frequently slightly thick-
ened. Lower branch of the branched ray im-
mediately above the simple rays also elongated.
The segments which form the lower simple
rays and this lower branch of the first divided
ray are much shorter than those of the caudal
rays above them. These segments become shorter
distally.
Two outer ventral fin rays simple and pro-
duced, extending beyond base of anal fin in adult.
Distance between snout and insertion of ven-
tral fin 2.4 to 2.7 in standard length. Upper
two rays of pectoral fin united basally, sepa-
rate distally, the split posterior to origin of
adipose fin. Lower rays of upper pectoral fin well
developed and connected by a black fin mem-
brane. Usually four such rays in the juvenile
but typically three in the adult. Lower pectoral
rays (typically 9) well developed and stiffened,
arching slightly upward, the longer extending
November 1958
beyond end of base of dorsal fin. Lower pectoral
rays about equal to one another in strength
basally, Prepectoral distance 4.6 to 5.6 in stand-
ard length.
Coloration—Living specimens are probably
greenish in general body color. The background
color of specimens preserved in alcohol is white,
stippled below the midline by small black spots
and darkened above by diffuse dark pigmenta-
tion in each scale pocket; the margin of each
scale pocket is pigmentless. Head and ventral
surface of body anterior to ventral fin darker.
Mouth, branchiostegal membrane, and pharyn-
geal and abdominal cavities black. Lower pec-
toral fin and ventral fins colorless. Membranes
connecting lower rays of upper part of pectoral
fin, dorsal rays, and midcaudal rays black. A
large conspicuous black spot at base of upper
and lower caudal lobes.
Relationships —Bathypterois bigelowi is un-
questionably most closely related to B. longifilis
Gunther, a species which the Challenger dredged
at 520 and 630 fathoms off the Kermadec
Islands in the South Pacific. Both of these speci-
mens were large females, about 13 inches long,
and the species has not since been reported.
B. bigelowi can be distinguished from Gunther’s
species by the strong black pigment in the mem-
brane which connects the lower rays of the
upper part of the pectoral fin (colorless in
longifilis), 9 or 10 rays in the lower pectoral
fin (cf. 13), the greater length of the second
anal ray, the total gill raker count (33-40 cf.
42), the presence of the large, conspicuous spots
at the base of the caudal lobes and the general
body coloration, and the more elongate outer
ventral and lower caudal rays.
Bathypterois (Bathypterois) bigelowi cannot
easily be confused with any other known North
Atlantic bathypteroid species, a preliminary key
to which follows below. In this key, Bathypterois
(Hemipterois) nigrescens Parr is considered
questionably distinct from B. (H.) viridensis
Roule. Bathypterois (Bathypterois) quadrifilis
has been described and figured as having no
subeaudal notch (Giinther, 1878: 184; Giinther,
1887: 189, pl. 83; Goode and Bean, 1895: 65,
fig. 75), but I have checked the Goode and
Bean specimens, and Dr. N. B. Marshall has
reexamined Giinther’s Challenger types; a sub-
caudal notch is present on all. Bathypterois
(Bathypterois) dubius is probably polytypic.
MEAD: THREE NEW ARCHIBENTHIC FISHES 369
KEY TO THE GENERA, SUBGENERA, AND NORTH
ATLANTIC SPECIES OF BATHYPTEROID FISHES
a. Pectoral fin divided into two distinctly different
parts, the uppermost pectoral ray usually
stiffened and elongate. Outer ventral and
lower caudal rays frequently prolonged but
never longer than the sandard length of the
fish. Adipose fin usually present (present in
all known western Atlantic specimens).
genus Bathypterois
6. Uppermost pectoral ray not notably thicker
at its base than its neighbor; all rays of
upper part of pectoral well developed. Six
or fewer rays in lower part of pectoral fin.
subgenus Bathypterois (Hemipterois)
B. (H.) viridensis Roule
B. (H.) nigrescens Parr
bb. Uppermost pectoral ray at least twice as
thick as that of its neighbor. Lower rays
of upper pectoral fin poorly developed.
More than 6 rays in lower part of pectoral
fin.. subgenus Bathypterois (Bathypterois)
c. Scales behind base of lower part of pectoral
fin strongly pectinate. Lower ray of lower
pectoral fin long and strong, conspicuously
heavier at its base than its neighbor.
Subcaudal notch present.
B. (B.) quadrifilis Ginther
cc. Scales behind base of lower pectoral fin
not pectinate. Lowermost ray of lower
pectoral fin not notably thicker than its
neighbor.
d. Subcaudal notch present.
e. Origin of anal fin behind a vertical
from end of base of dorsal fin. Eight
ventral rays. ..B. (B.) dubius Vaillant
ee. Origin of anal fin under end of base
of dorsal fin. Nine ventral rays.
B. (B.) phenax Parr
dd. No subcaudal notch.
f. Lower rays of upper pectoral rudi-
mentary and not connected by a
black membrane. Interradial mem-
brane of dorsal fin colorless. Body
uniformly dark. Caudal lobes dusky
but without conspicuous black spots
at their bases. Central caudal rays
colorless..B. (B.) longipes Giinther
ff. Lower rays of upper pectoral fin well
developed, connected by a mem-
brane which is black. Interradial
membrane of dorsal fin black. Body
darker above than below. A promi-
nent black spot at bases of upper
and lower caudal lobes. Membrane
between central caudal rays black.
B. (B.) bigelowt Mead
aa. Pectoral fin not divided into two parts, the fin
situated high on the shoulder and without
greatly prolonged rays (none extend beyond
anal fin). Outer ventral and lower caudal
rays longer than standard length of fish. No
adipose fin.
Benthosaurus grallator Goode and Bean
370
Bathytyphlops marionae, 0. sp.
Fig. 4
It is difficult to imagine a free-living fish more
degenerate than the species of the genus Bathy-
typhlops. They are undoubtedly blind, for the
eyes are vestigial and covered by skin and oc-
casionally scales; and none of the other sensory
structures are notably enlarged. They lack the
elongate tactile rays of the bathypteroids, and
the small villiform teeth and cephalic luminous
organ of Ipnops. The “teeth” of Bathytyphlops
consist of broad rugose grinding surfaces on most
of the jaw and pharyngeal bones. These fishes
cannot be active carnivores. But neither can
they be filter feeders, for the gill rakers, normal
and flattened in the related species of [pnops
and Bathymicrops, are reduced to low dentig-
erous rudiments. Only that at the angle of
the gill arch is developed, this excessively so.
They may perhaps be carrion feeders, although
their relatively large (180-350 mm) size sug-
gests nutritional requirements of some magni-
tude, and it seems unlikely that carcasses of
sufficient size to warrant the large grinding sur-
faces are numerous in their habitat.
The specimens described below are the first
Bathytyphlops known from the Atlantic. The
single species heretofore described, Bathytyph-
lops sewelli (Norman) was caught in the Ara-
bian Sea at a depth of 3840 to 3872 meters
(Norman, 1939: 26) and from an unspecified
Galathea station (Bruun, 1956: 171). These
western Atlantic records thus extend the range
of the genus half way around the world and,
more significantly, into far shallower water, for
the depths of capture here were 475 and 550
fathoms (868 and 1,000 meters).
It gives me pleasure to name this new and
bizarre species in honor of Mrs. Marion Grey,
Chicago Natural History Museum, in recog-
nition of her contributions to the ichthyology of
the deep sea.
Holotype—A 279.0 mm specimen caught in
the Caribbean at Oregon station 1955 (16° 48’
N., 82° 33’ W.; 550 fathoms; Sept. 17, 1957);
Chicago Natural History Museum no. 64439.
Paratype — A specimen 263.0 mm long taken
by the Harvard-Havana Expedition at Atlantis
station 2991 (Strait of Florida north of Cuba;
23° 21’ N., 80° 23’ W.; 475 fathoms; March 14,
1938; Museum of Comparative Zoology no.
39394).
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 11
Diagnosis —Eye present, minute but pig-
mented and with a well-developed lens; covered
by skin but not scales. Pectoral fin 12 or 13;
dorsal 12 or 13; anal 13-14. 64 or 65 scales in
lateral line.
Description—The proportional measurements
which follow, expressed in percent of standard
length, are those of the type, 279.0 mm, fol-
lowed in parentheses by those of the 263.0 mm
specimen (paratype) :
Length of head, 23.1 (22.4); length of snout,
7.5 (6.6); of premaxillary, 17.0 (16.6); diame-
ter of eye (horizontal): .7 (.8); width of inter-
orbital, 8.6 (8.5).
Greatest depth of body, 16.0 (—); depth at
origin of anal fin, 10.3 (9.9); least depth of
caudal peduncle, 7.7 (7.2). Greatest width of
body, 9.4 (9.8). Ts
Distance from snout to origin of dorsal fin,
39.1 (40.3); to origin of anal fin, 69.6 (69.0) ;
to insertion of pectoral fin, 21.3 (21.7); to in-
sertion of ventral fin, 37.5 (37.9). Length of base
of dorsal fin, 12.7 (12.2) ; length of base of anal
fin, 14.0 (12.4). Anus to insertion of ventral
fin, 10.8 (—); to origin of anal fin, 22.0 (—).
Distance from insertion of ventral fin to
origin of anal fin, 32.4 (33.2); from end of base
of dorsal fin to that of midecaudal ray, 47.5
(48.3); from end of anal base to base of mid-
caudal ray, 17.6 (17.5). Depressed height of
dorsal fin, 21-7 (20.1); of anal fy eiSraate2) >
Length of central caudal ray, 8.6 (10.4) ; length
of pectoral, 20.1 (17.1); of ventral, 16.7 (15.4).
D.—12-138. A—13-14. P—12-13. V—8s. C—
I-17-I. B.R.—15-17. Scales (lateral line)—64—
65; from D. to lateral line—8; from 1.1. to A—
6. Vertebrae (including hypural)—63-64.
Body moderately compressed, snout somewhat
depressed. Body deepest at origin of dorsal fin,
this depth about 1.4 in head length, about 6.2
in standard length. Depth at anal origin 2.2 to
2.3 in head; least depth of caudal peduncle 3.0
to 3.1 in head. Greatest width of body about 1.7
in greatest depth.
Entire top of head, cheeks, anterior part of
branchiostegal membrane and gular membrane,
entire body, and base of caudal rays sealed, the
scales (as well as can be determined) cycloid,
deciduous. (Few scales remain on the two study
specimens.) A broad sheath of scales extending
across venter between (and partly covering)
bases of inner ventral rays. An enlarged rounded
scale in axil of pectoral fin, and rows of more
November 1958
elongate scales along bases of dorsal and anal
fins. Lateral line well developed, the scales
pierced by a longitudinal tube which also opens
above and below. Lateral line begins above base
of pectoral fin and ends at base of caudal; it
does not continue onto the caudal fin.
Head of moderate size, the lower jaw termi-
nal. Head 4.3 to 4.5 in standard length. Rear
margin of head formed by the branchiostegal
membrane, the rear border of the head (edge
of gill cover) sloping obliquely downward. and
backward; the most posterior point below the
posterior half of the base of the pectoral fin.
Top of head covered by skin and scales, the
head bones well ossified, the ankyloses poorly
developed. Olfactory organs well developed,
slightly closer to tip of snout than to eye. A
thin tube around anterior nostril, this tube en-
larged into a flap posteriorly between the nos-
trils. Behind each posterior nostril are a pair
of shts which do not communicate with the ol-
factory cavity; the function of these is not ap-
parent. Top of head without the ossified pores
characteristic of many related species. Eye mi-
nute, covered by skin but apparently not scaled
over. A few poorly ossified circumorbital bones
floating free in skin around eye. Interorbital
width 2.6 to 2.7 in length of head.
Branchiostegal membranes broad, free from
isthmus and from each other, the left over-
lapping the right. Isthmus relatively broad
and scaled. Branchiostegal membranes scaled,
covered anteriorly by a thick, broad and scaled
transverse gular fold. Branchiostegal rays well
developed, the uppermost not notably flattened.
Opercular bones large and well ossified, the
CH mA ;
NEY SX \* “ ee
YARRA:
Fia. 4.—Bakhytyphlops marionae, holotype, 279 mm in standard length, from the
MEAD: THREE NEW ARCHIBENTHIC FISHES
es Rene sy
alt
operculum ending posteriorly with the well-de-
veloped suboperculum.
Gill rakers on first arch consist of one large
heavy raker at angle, the length of which is
equal to the distance between the nostrils, and
basal ossifications (about 6 on the epibranchial,
12 to 14 on the ceratobranchial) which represent
rudimentary rakers. These rudiments, the edges
of the branchial bones, and the enlarged raker
at the angle are covered by minute short spines
which provide a rugose surface similar to the
tooth patches on jaws and vomer. The succeed-
ing arches bear similar rugose patches, and the
pharyngeals are completely covered with patches
of similar although larger teeth.
Premaxillary long and slender, 1.3 to 1.4
in length of head. Lower and outer surface com-
pletely covered with denticles, giving the bone
a rugose appearance. Maxillary slender for most
of its length when viewed from the side, but
expanded in the horizontal plane. Posteriorly,
the maxillary is expanded vertically and sur-
mounted by an irregularly-shaped supramaxil-
lary. A short fleshy flap at posterior end of
maxillary. No teeth at symphysis of either jaw.
Palatine, pterygoid and vomerine teeth similar,
the toothed patches large. The two tooth-bearing
patches on vomer separated by a deep trough.
Mandible broad and heavy, its outer lower sur-
face pierced by the series of pores characteristic
of many deep-water inioms. Lower edges of
mandibles well separated from one another (in
contrast to the situation in the bathypteroids, in
which the lower edges of the dentaries very
nearly meet along the mid-ventral line). Ar-
ticular bone exceptionally long, extending for-
. sy Wa TRAHAN SS
7 RENN SERS S
Re on x xX
\ ¥
Gulf of Mexico
off Florida; C.N. H.M. no. 64439. (Drawn by Mildred H. Carrington.)
342
ward half the distance from joint of mandible to
tip of lower jaw. Mandible ending anteriorly
in a small knob. Symphysis without teeth,
the rest of the upper surface covered with the
molariform denticles characteristic of the other
tooth-bearing bones of the mouth.
Dorsal fin inserted just behind a vertical from
insertion of ventral; predorsal distance 2.5 to
2.6 in standard length. First two dorsal rays
simple, the rest branched, the last to its base.
Distance from dorsal origin to tip of fin when
fin depressed 4.6 to 5.0 in standard length;
length of base of dorsal fin about 1.8 in head
length. Anal origin posterior, preanal distance
1.4 to 1.7 in standard length; distance between
end of base of anal fin and base of midcaudal
ray about 5.7 in standard length. Height of anal
fin (depressed) 1.2 to 1.3 in head length. Two
or three rays simple, the remainder branched.
Caudal fin forked, the lobes equal.
Prepectoral distance 4.6 to 4.7 in standard
length. Fin extending to base of ventral fin,
its length 1.1 to 1.3 in length of head. Upper-
most two and lower two rays simple. Pre-
ventral distance 2.6 to 2.7 in standard length,
the outer ray only unbranched. Length of ven-
tral fin 1.4 to 1.5 in length of head. Anus about
a third of the distance from insertion of ventral
fin to origin of anal.
Color—In alcohol, B. marionae is light with
dark edges around the scale pockets (the body
may be wholly dark when the animal is alive and
with its skin and scales intact). Head dark.
Branchiostegal membrane, fins, and linings of
body cavities black.
Relationship—Bathytyphlops marionae is
very closely related to the Indian Ocean B.
sewelli, differmg from it in some body propor-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 11
tions and in the features given in the diagnosis
above. Dr. N. B. Marshall has generously re-
examined the type specimen in my behalf, and
his comments on the gill raker structure and
eyes of this specimen are noted here since they
were omitted from the original account pro-
vided by Norman. Dr. Marshall reports that
there is an enlarged gill raker (5.5 mm) at the
angle of the first gill arch, the rest of the rakers
being rudimentary and the gill raker count:
6 + 1+ 11. The eye rudiment is not absent
but 1s barely visible beneath the skin. Its di-
ameter is about 1.5 mm, and there is a narrow
pigmented ring around the opaque center. In
gill raker structure, B. sewelli is thus similar to
B. marionae. The vestigial eye of B. marionae,
about 2.5 mm in diameter in the 279-mm type,
is rather larger than that in Norman’s 350-mm
specimen.
LITERATURE CITED
Bruun, A. F. Animal life of the deep sea bottom.
In Bruun et al., ed., The Galathea Deep Sea
Expedition, 296 pp., 1 chart. New York, 1956.
GoopE, GrEorGE Brown, and Bran, TaARLeTon H.
Oceanic ichthyology. U. S. Nat. Mus. Special
Bull. 2: 553 pp., 123 pls. 1895.
GUNTHER, ALBERT. Preliminary notices of deep-sea
fishes collected during the voyage of the
H.MS. Challenger. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser.
5, 2: 179-187. 1878.
Report on the deep-sea fishes ...Rep.
Ser. Res... Challenger... ZooleZ2-sos5eo p=
73 pls. 1887.
LoncLey, WILLIAM H., and HILDEBRAND, SAMUEL F.
Systematic catalogue of the fishes of Tortugas,
Florida. Pap. Tortugas Lab. 34 (Carnegie
Inst. Washington Publ. 535): 331 pp., 34 pls.
1941.
Norman, J. R. Fishes. Sci. Rep. John Murray Exp.
1933-34, 7(1): 116 pp. 1939.
————— —
The new powers that science has given to man can only be wielded safely
by those who, whether through study of history or through their own ex-
perience of life, have acquired some reverence for human feelings and some
tenderness toward the emotions that give color to the daily existence of
men and women.—BERTRAND RUSSELL.
Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences
(20h 5S0 | 2G As a ee A. T. McPuErson, National Bureau of Standards
PEBESPAEIE-CLECE x2 6 os os ks ees doy FRANK L. CamMpBELL, National Research Council
oS PR EADISG) a eee eee aa Hetnz Specut, National Institutes of Health
REOSIUTEN. «0. ok as ws Howarp 8. Rapriuyez, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey (Ret.)
EE VISE es Morris C. Leixinp, Armed Forces Institute of Pathology
Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications
Haraup A. Renper, U.S. National Museum
Elected Members of the Board of Managers:
Td) nA TO a ene Ue ee es ani ere F. N. Frenxiszt, F. L. Camppenn
Some Ay LOGO. 208 cera s ei ogiiee 4 o4!c pve dae ek H. A. Bortuwick, T. D. Stewart
sommes VOGT oe crs alate cvs ao sie pares Bourpon F. Scrinner, Kerra JoHNSON
Board of Managers......... All the above officers plus the Editor and Vice Presidents
EG? 506 ee rece Cuester H. Pagan, National Bureau of Standards
Peecuioe Committee... 02.0.6 .55. A. T. McPuHerson, F. L. Campspetu, Heinz Specut,
7 Howarp 8. RappiEye, Lapistaus Marton
Committee on Meetings...... GrorcE W. Irvine, JR. (chairman), Howarp W. Bonp,
CLIFFORD Evans, THomas D. Fontaine, L. G. Hensest, Louis R. Maxwe tu,
Trt ScHOONOVER, CarL H. WALTHER
Commitiee on Encouragement of Science Talent............. Leo ScHUBERT (chairman),
MARGARET Pittman, HERMAN Branson, W. J. YouUDEN, PHorBE KNIPLING
Commitiee on Membership...... CHURCHILL HISENHART (chairman), JEROME CoRNFIELD,
SoLoMON KuLipack, WayNE C. Hatu, Euuiotrr W. Montroii, Pure Davis,
RicHarp B. Rozerts, THEopORE PERRos, Lawrence M. Kusuner, WiLBur S.
Hinman, L. K. Downine, JoserpH M. Catpweii, T. Date Stewart, Joun A.
O’Brien, JR., Paut Bowman, Expert L. Lirrun, Gzorer Dickson, GEOFFREY
Hpsauu, Mark K. Woops, Haroup HE. Finutey, Epwin W. RorppER
Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Research............... B. D. Van Evera (chairman),
Harry W. WELLS, FRANKLIN YEAGER, MARGARET PATTERSON
Committee on Bylaws...... Haroup H. SHeparD (chairman), Dortanp Davis, ASHLEY
B. Gurney, James I. Horrman, JASON SwWALLEN, Heinz Specut (ex officio)
Committee on Monographs:
fomamuary 1959 -. 2.2 kee cee ew case ude ALBERT Len Taytor, W. W. Watton
mihowseamuary LOGO). ees. es ee bd onan RicuHarp K. Cook, Paut H. Oryser
Mowanuary 1961...0..0..05.00. 608 Dean B. Cowliz (chairman), J. P. E. Morrison
Committee on Policy and Planning:
Miomamuary 1959). ci. lees ck ew oe ees Maraaret Pirtman, Waupo L. Scumirt
MAT LOBOS «ick ew ene ciel See a ne aw, R. E. Gipson, JoHN C. Ewers
To January 1961......... Francis M. DeranporrF (chairman), Frank M. SetzLeR
Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement: CHARLES R. Nansur (general chairman)
For Biological Sciences...... Witire W. Smita (chairman), GiLpeERT ASHWELL,
ELMER M. Newson, H. W. ScHornzBorn, Reese I. Sater,
CaRLETON R. TREADWELL
For Engineering Sciences...... FRANK A. BIBERSTEIN (chairman), Howarp L.
ANDREWS, JosEepH M. CaupweLi, MicHarL GoLpBERG, THomas J. Hickury,
Tuomas J. Kinuran, Paut A. SmitH, Horace M. Trent, Bruce L. Witson
For Physical Sciences...... Maurice M. SHapiro, VirGinta GRIFFING, LADISLAUS
Marton, RaupH D. Myurs, J. LEon SHERESHEVSKY, SHIRLEIGH SILVERMAN
For Teaching of Science...... JoHn R. Mayor (chairman), Homer Caruart, JOHN
CoLemaN, Keita C. Jonnson, PHorBE Knipiine, Howarp B. Owens,
MARGARET PATTERSON
Committee on Science Education:
Mromdemuanry, VOG0 Rs. occall ss sib ecw cess Sune ARNOLD H. Scott, Joun K. Taytor
Morwemuaty LOGO. 6 6062s ccs dw ee PHOEBE H. KnipLtine, REGINA FLANNERY
Mo wanuary 19GD 4.4 wk aes RAYMOND J. SEEGER (chairman), FaLcoNEeR SmitH
Committee on Public Relations...... RoBert D. STIEHLER (chairman), THomas G.
ANDREWS, Caru H. Dang, Lewis K. Downine, Kart Frank, RAupH B. KENNARD,
Epwarp F. Kniptine, THomas R. McGuirez, Joun A. O’BrrEN, REUBEN Woop
CONTENTS
Page
Puysics—Temperatures in heated finite slabs with fourth-power loss.
REYNOLD' GREENSTONE... 50022 She so LI eee vee ee
BIOocHEMISTRY—Inhibition by testosterone of cortisone-induced liver
glycogen formation. W. C. Huss and I. P. SHAFFRAN.......... 347
ANTHROPOLOGY.—A complete find of filed teeth from the Cahokia Mounds
in Illinois. Preston Houpe|er and T. D. STewarT............... 349
PALEOBOTANY.—New occurrences of the fossil quillworts called Iso-
etites: RoLAND-W.<BROWN...........08 2 Poo). 2 3 See 358
IcHTHYOLOGY.—Three new species of archibenthic iniomous fishes from
the western North Atlantic. Gites: W. MEAD...... )2-202 eee 362
Norss anD News: Recent honors; New appointments................ 348
alll — ———
. 4
H \ s \ af 4
; L ou VY Sly
me 48 December 1958 ee ates
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
Published Monthly by the
Pe cHINGT.ON ACAD E:MSY, OF SCIENCES
MOUNT ROYAL & GUILFORD AVES., BALTIMORE, MD.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Editor: CHESTER H. Paag, National Bureau of Standards
Associate Editors: RoNALD BamMrorD, University of Maryland
Howarp W. Bonn, National Institutes of Health
IMMANUEL ESTERMANN, Office of Naval Research
This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes:
(1) Original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceed-
ings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) correspond-
ence of interest to Academy members; and (4) notes of events connected with the scien-
tific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar
years.
Manuscripts should be sent to the Editor. It is urgently requested that contributors
consult the latest numbers of the JouRNaL and conform their manuscripts to the usage
found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, synonymies, footnotes, tables,
bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be type-
written, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil
and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the
ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious
minor errors.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent
to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final
form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed..
feprinis of papers are available to nonmember authors at the price of $1.50 per page
per hundred reprints, plus $1.50 per hundred for handling charge. Authors who are
Academy members are entitled to a 3314 percent discount. For more than 200 reprints
of a single paper, the additional hundreds are furnished at half the above rate. Short
papers are subject to a minimum reprint charge of $5 per hundred for the first 200, and
$2.50 per additional hundred. Covers are subject to a uniform price of $7.50 for the first
hundred; $2 per additional hundred. All authors have the option of purchasing com-
plete journal copies for approximately J9 cents each.
Publication Charges—Authors’ institutions are requested to honor a publication
charge of $15 per page to partially defray actual cost. When these charges are honored,
the first hundred reprints are free, and a special credit of $5 per page is allowed against
unusual typographical costs.
Unusual costs occasioned by foreign, mathematical, or tabular material, or excessive
illustrations, as well as alterations made in proof by the author, may be charged to the
author. The Academy pays the first $10 of extra cost for a member author.
Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour-
NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-
scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C.
Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per Year.......................... . .$7.50
Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number
Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — —
Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70
Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60
Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)......... 7.50 0.90
* Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 48, incl.) available
for sale to libraries at $401.00.
Monoerapu No. 1, ‘“The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50
INDEX TO JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PRocEEDINGS.......................... $7.50
PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete........................2.--- $25.00
Singlevolumies,, unbound , 2.252 60.0c so. coed ee oeaseo es oe 2.00
Single numbers....... BS eae iene 22h Rc ON SN NS Prices on request
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the
Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue.
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and
ee to the Treasurer, H. 8. Rappieye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12,
Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly
to the Secretary, Dr. H. Specutr, % National Institutes of Health, Bethesda 14, Md.
Second class postage paid at Baltimore, Md.
Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925.
Authorized February 17, 1949.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 48
December 1958
ING: 12
GENERAL SCIENCE. Our scientific “nervous system.” JosEPH W. Srruu, Doyles-
town, Pa.
(Received September 8, 1958)
The problem of scientific communication
is the most fundamental social problem of
a scientific-technical society such as ours.
This is so because the scientific communi-
cation system (in the broadest sense) 1S
the “nervous system” of such a society.
The “nervous system” of society like that
of the living organism provides the means
whereby the different “organs” (agencies)
and “cells” (individuals) are coordinated
and maintained in that harmonious rela-
tionship necessary for organized life. The
analogy of scientific communication to a
luman nervous system is sufficiently use-
ful to be worth detailing.
Our laboratories and scientists doing
basic research are the “sense organs” of
society. They are feeling, seeing, hearing;
in a word, “sensing” the nature in which
we live, in order to gain ever new informa-
tion about that nature. Since the world
and its nature are in a continuous state of
change, it is necessary that these “sense
organs” be as ever alert as our own sense
organs if we are to stay “in touch” with
the world and the nature in which we live.
The information obtained by our periph-
eral “sense organs’—the basie research
laboratories—is reported in the form of
written scientific papers. These are equiv-
alent to the “sensory messages” which our
own nerve endings are constantly sending
to our brains. These messages from the
research laboratories are transmitted by
way of scientific journals (the equivalent
of nerve fibers) to the libraries (“social
brains”) where they are stored (“memo-
rized’”’) and retained for future use.
Turning to the motor, the useful, side of
the nervous system, we see that “social
memory” provides the means whereby sci-
entific messages are memorized and re-
tained, sometimes over centuries of time,
waiting to be coordinated with new mes-
sages in order to provide a basis for new
ideas leading to new developments. Social
usefulness (motor activity) in this analogy
is represented by new inventions, which
may either be physical or scientific inven-
tions or simply new ways of performing
various services in our society. Of course,
since such changes modify the nature of
the society in which we live, the circle is
thus completed and the need for continuous
study by all kinds of scientific sense organs
is thus made apparent.
This anatomical analogy seems usetul
because it does two things: First, it pro-
vides a rather clear and vivid distinction
between basic and applied (or develop-
mental) research. Basic research is prima-
rily interested in gathering information,
while applied research is primarily con-
cerned with using it. Second, the analogy
lays stress on the organizational aspect of
scientific communication as a total inte-
erated system. Even though it is ultimately
necessary, from an operational standpoint,
to fragment the system we should always
think about and deal with the parts in
terms of the whole if we wish to maintain
the functional integrity and vitality of the
whole system. In fact we must have some
kind of national coordinating ageney if we
want to have a first class scientific “
system.” I shall not even trouble to repeat
nervous
AD)
I40
SMITHSONIAN .
= 2 A IOFO
INCTITLITION rh ij | bs
ov4
the widely reported evidence that by com-
parison with the Soviet ‘nervous system”
ours is not first class at present. Our failure
to make any substantial progress toward
fundamental solution of this problem, stems
from the fact that we have no individual
or agency responsible for the overall health
and function of the entire ‘‘nervous sys-
tem’. The many “organs” which have a
financial or bureaucratic stake in some as-
pect of this over-all problem seem each to
be checkmating each other so that essen-
tially nothing is happening.
It can be said unequivocally that our
scientific communications have been con-
stantly deteriorating relative to our needs
for a number of years and that nothing
has happened since Sputnik I to change
this trend. In order to demonstrate this
relative deterioration, it will be useful to
consider briefly the history of written com-
munication and of libraries.
The earliest evidences of written com-
munication are the drawings of people,
animals and objects found in caves through-
out the world. In the evolution of language,
these realistic drawings were eventually
reduced to abstract symbols which formed
the basis for hieroglyphies. In turn, hiero-
glyphics were finally replaced by still more
abstract alphabets. These have proven to
be the most flexible set of symbols invented
up to the present time with which to con-
struct words and convey ideas. The oldest
written documents known were carved on
stone and clay tablets as the Ten Com-
mandments supposedly were and so pos-
sessed some mobility as compared with the
cave drawings. Papyrus and animal skins
and metal plates were developed still later
and replaced the cumbersome early stone
and clay slabs.
The oldest library was apparently the
one established in Nineveh by the Assyro-
Babylonian king Assurbanipal (668-626
B.C.). He assembled much of the “litera-
ture” then extant. This library was suf-
ficiently large to require special catalogues
for indexing the records contained in it.
The library contained deeds, documents and
letters, religious texts, historical accounts
and a wide variety of works relating to
various areas of art and science.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
The first Greek libraries seem to have
been organized during the lives of Plato
and Aristotle.
The great Alexandrian library, which as-
pired to collect all the worlds literature was
begun in 283 B.C. and was destroyed by
fire in 47 B.C.
Undoubtedly the earliest libraries were
simply repositories for storing in safety
public records such as deeds, contracts,
laws and so on. Then legends and historical
accounts began to be saved. The earliest
recording and storing of what might be
called scientific data was apparently car-
ried out by the ancient priest-astrologers
who charted and recorded the position of
the stars and planets. It was through the
accumulation and later analysis of such
data that it became possible for scholars
to discover that the heavenly bodies were
not in a state of permanent rest as once
thought.
The problems of those early libraries
must have been largely physical problems;
problems of duplicating material without
error, a feat which we know was seldom
accomplished; problems of handling docu-
ments without causing severe physical
damage to the text and so on. Because
these books were written in long scrolls the
matter of frequent rolling and unrolling
would soon wear them out. Finally the
problem of storing papyri in ways that
would protect them from weather, insects,
and rodents must have been a difficult one.
We have seen that the recently discovered
Dead Sea Scrolls were stored in earthen-
ware jars. Though the number of docu-
ments may have been relatively small, still
the space problem must have been con-
siderable. Of course, since these early li-
braries were intended to serve only a tiny
fraction of the total population, the de-
mands made on them were much less than
today.
Modern libraries face much more com-
plex problems, those of classification, stor-
age, and retrieval of millions of items for
large numbers of users. These modern li-
brary problems really begin with the inven-
tion of printing at the beginning of the
Renaissance. Thus modern experimental
science, which also dates from the Renais-
DECEMBER 1958
sance, and the modern science library are
essentially the same age. The development
of these two areas is so completely inter-
connected, as the “nervous system” analogy
indicated, that we cannot usefully consider
one without the other.
The analysis which I shall present in the
following paragraphs shows that (whereas
laboratory science and research has changed
functionally from a static to a dynamic
phase, our library system has remained at
the earlier static phase of development. As
a result, these two parts of the “nervous
system” are now out of phase. Because of
this, our science libraries have to a con-
siderable extent already ceased to perform
their full role as the retained and useful
memory of our scientific knowledge. As a
result of this breakdown, other make-shift
though inadequate substitutes are being
improvised to fill the communication def-
icit. Only by thoroughly reorganizing our
science communication network to meet the
dynamic needs of modern dynamic science,
can we bring these two aspects of modern
science into harmony. The present impro-
vised make-shift solutions which generally
_add to the complexity of our “nervous sys-
tem” will in the long run further damage
our science communication system. So we
should hasten to make the fundamental
changes necessary to reorganize on dy-
namic lines. What are the changes needed
to provide ourselves with a dynamic “nerv-
ous system’? How can we make these
changes? But before we deal with the op-
erational questions there are several general
policy matters that must first be stated,
as the remainder of the suggestions in this
paper can only be carried out if these basic
policies are first accepted and implemented.
Stated affirmatively these policies are:
1. Scientific communication is the “nerv-
ous system” of our society! As such it is
the most important system in our social
organization, for we can not even maintain
let alone improve our technical society
without it. One only need consider the
chaos that results when a bus or streetcar
strike occurs, or when there is a power
failure for a few hours, to see how utterly
dependent we are on technology to main-
tain our way of life in modern cities and
STILL: OUR SCIENTIFIC NERVOUS SYSTEM BT:
industrialized society. If our scientific com-
munication were to really break down com-
pletely, as eventually it will surely do if
really adequate corrective measures are not
soon taken, we would ultimately find our
cities degenerating for lack of trained per-
sonnel into chaotic jungles with “frozen”
transportation and communication net-
works. One can easily imagine that such
communities would be incapable of con-
trolling the disease which would then break
out to destroy the human life within them.
2. We do not have any national agency
responsible for watching after the integrity
of our “nervous system” as, for example,
the Federal Reserve Board watches the in-
tegrity and vitality of our banking system.
We must establish a National Library and
Communication Commission to perform
this function. If our banking system which
is a vastly simpler system requires a full
time Board to study and regulate its op-
erations so do these far more complex mat-
ters require similar guidance.
3. Like many problems in this world, no
absolute 100 percent perfect solution is
going to be offered here or elsewhere. We
must cease waiting for a perfect solution
to be discovered and begin taking active
common sense steps toward finding a solu-
tion now. As we take those common sense
steps and observe results the way ahead
will become clearer.
This is not the time to enter into ex-
tended arguments to support these affirma-
tions. They are the basic assumptions on
which the following suggestions rest.
The first point to recognize in approach-
ing the operational aspect of this problem
is that there are fundamentally two kinds
of basic scientific information, (1) that
which deals with essentially statie data
and (2) that which deals with essentially
dynamic data. These two kinds of data are
quite distinct. Static information is de-
seriptive and/or classificatory in nature.
Looking at the history of all well-developed
sciences today, we observe that the statie
phase always precedes the dynamic and
we also see that this phase must be fairly
well developed before a science is ready
for the dynamic phase; the phase in which
relationships operating in time become the
376
focus of interest. To illustrate this point,
we note that anatomical descriptions pre-
ceded physiology, and natural history de-
scriptions and classification systems for
plants and animals preceded the dynamic
theory of evolution. It is this historical
point which provides the key for under-
standing our library crisis. Most of our
present libraries were organized in earlier
times to serve static needs, the storage of
public records, historical accounts and so
on. The static organization of these li-
braries was also adequate to the needs of
early static science. Hence, the general li-
braries were simply expanded to meet new
scientific needs. But as science has grown
dynamic, this static library organization
has grown less and less adequate, until
now we are nearing the point of total
breakdown. I say we are nearing the point
of total breakdown, because the time has
arrived when it is being found cheaper to
repeat some experiments than to spend the
time required to search for the earlier ones
in the literature.
There is one library on this continent
(maybe the only one in the world) which
is an exception to what has just been said.
This one library is organized on dynamic
lines. It is the library of Dr. Hans Selye,
at the Institute of Experimental Medicine
and Surgery in Montreal, which is devoted
to the task of identifying and storing all
scientific data relative to endocrinology and
stress. It was the discovery of Dr. Selye’s
unique library organization a few years
ago which provided me the clue I have
used in developing the greatly expanded
science communication scheme which I am
about to present. My exploratory research
made at that time in order to prepare a
research request looking toward a deeper
exploration of his system convinced me of
the uniqueness of his system.
The basis of the Selye classification
scheme is the clear recognition that every
experiment involves the study of the action
of a stimulus on a target. Selye symbolizes
this as T <— 8S. Targets and stimuli with
which his library deals are restricted to
those of interest to the endocrine-stress
field. But the dynamic 7 < S symbol sys-
tem is obviously one which is applicable
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 12
to all dynamic experiments. In fact the
T <—S symbol really corresponds to a cy-
bernetic “bit” of information. The sim-
plicity of the system derives from the fact
that it always strives to reduce the data
which it codes to the smallest possible
“bits” contained in the reports being coded.
How can a classification scheme be built
up from such symbols? Dr. Selye has es-
tablished a set of codes and rules of pre-
cedence for targets and stimuli. The system
makes a distinction between stressors and
stimuli, but for our purposes I will ignore
this and refer to all such agents as Stimuli.
His rules of precedence are essentially as
arbitrary as those of the Dewey decimal
system and we need not be concerned with
the details. They are as arbitrary as de-
ciding that as doctors describe the different
parts of the body they must always proceed
from head to foot. Selye’s rules are only
useful in assigning a definite position in
the classification scheme to various T < §S
relationships, and possess no other logical
relationships. The rules are not extensive.
If they are forgotten, they can easily be
looked up. The codes are chiefly abbrevia-
tions of the standard names of Targets and
Stimuli.
To clarify this general description, let
me describe the system at work. Selye’s
library receives several hundred journals
which contain essentially all reports of re-
search in the endocrine-stress field. Hach
article is read and all reported T <S re-
lationships are identified and ceded. For
example an experiment which studied the
affect of cold on the adrenal glands would
be coded, Adr. — Cold. Since Adrenal has
a definite assigned position in the order of
precedence for targets, and since cold also
has a definite position in the order of
precedence of stimuli there is therefore a
unique position in the classification scheme
for the relationship Adr. <— Cold. So with
a reasonably small number of targets and
stimuli it is possible to identify and classify
all such relationships in this rather large
field of science.
Selye’s system then gives an accession
number not to every journal received, but
to every article which is of interest to the
library. So far as possible, individual re-
DECEMBER 1958
prints of articles are maintained rather
than the intact journals themselves.
As already mentioned all of the 7 < S
relationships identified in each article are
coded and indexed. A file card exists
for every 7 < S relationship which has
been identified by the system. This card
is to be found filed in the unique position
defined by the rules of precedence. When
the coding of an article is completed, clerks
pull all the pertinent 7 < S cards from
the file and the accession number of the
new article is added to each of them and
the T <S file cards are returned to their
proper file position. The reprint of the
article itself is placed in its accession num-
ber position. A separate author file, cross-
referenced with accession numbers, is also
maintained, but this is really not essential
for the operation of the system, for re-
trieval is ordinarily accomplished by ref-
erence to the 7’ <S file. From time to time,
new 7’ <S relationships are identified and
when they are new cards are prepared and
usually the unique place in the classifica-
tion scheme in which it will be filed has
already been defined by the Rules of Pre-
cedence. If a new target or stimulus de-
velops or if an old target or stimulus needs
to be subdivided it is a simple matter to
add to or amend the Rules of Precedence
or add a new or subdivide a few old T <— S
cards accordingly. Thus the classification
scheme is easily updated to include the
expanded more rational subdivision of in-
formation.
From the standpoint of retrieval, the sys-
tem is remarkable because when one wishes
to determine what studies have been made
concerning a particular T < S relation-
ship, one only has to encode that relation-
ship, look at the appropriate 7 <— S ecard
and call for the references listed thereon to
get everything in the library which has
already been recognized, at the time of
original accession, to have dealt with that
relationship. Dr. Selye estimates that the
system is close to 95 percent perfect. That
is, every important 7 <— S relationship in
their library has been identified, coded, and
listed on the 7 < S cards. It is easy to
imagine what benefit such a system is to
Dr. Selye and his colleagues. It reminds
STILL: OUR SCIENTIFIC NERVOUS SYSTEM Bel
me of the advantage of putting and keep-
ing your shirts in one place as compared
with having to hunt them each morning
as if you were hunting Haster eggs.
The laborious, tedious, time-consuming
searches for bibliographical data as each
new question arises, which the average re-
searcher must undertake, is simply un-
necessary with this system.
Now the question is: Can this system
serve as a model for solving the commu-
nication problem of science in general? The
answer is Yes! There are four main aspects
of the matter to be considered:
(1) Our existing set up, inefficient as it is, can
not be dispensed with until the new system
is ready to take over.
(2) A single communication organization repre-
senting all aspects of science would need to
be organized to plan and guide the reorgani-
zation. Needless to say, it would have to
have authority and great prestige to ac-
complish the task in hand.
(3) The principle steps in the actual reorganiza-
tion would be these—
(a) Develop a universal scientific code
based on the T <—S principle. Though
no attempt will be made here to de-
velop such a code it will merely be
pointed out that in the physical
sciences Targets are usually material
objects and they may therefore be
naturally classified according to size
ranging from sub-atomic particles up-
ward. The stimuli being forces, also
have a natural classification system.
(Some may object to these statements
concerning the nature of targets and
stimuli especially as they might apply
at the atomic nuclear level where trans-
formations from Mass to Energy and
vice versa may occur. Perhaps the
statements will prove too sweeping, and
thus show that the T <— S scheme as
I have outlined it will not fit all pos-
sible situations in the physical sciences.
I am not competent to argue the mat-
ter at the nuclear level. I know of no
clearcut exceptions to these state-
ments, so I will let them stand as at
least first approximations, subject to
modification if proven necessary. |
don’t claim to have a perfect solution,
only a better one.)
(6) Dividing the science library problem
into a number of practical working
318
(c)
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACDAEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 12
units each of a size similar to the one
which Dr. Selye already has in opera-
tion. Arranging this division so no un-
wanted overlaps between library units
existed. Arranging for coordination of
code expansions so that areas of over-
lap would so far as possible have
identical codes for any single T < S
relationship. The national science li-
brary would thus consist of a number
of geographically decentralized operat-
ing units set up as adjuncts of working
laboratories, which would be welded
into a single system by means of the
central planning organization. The de-
tailed codes would not need to be cen-
trally worked out. Only general rules of
coordination would need to be laid down
to govern their peripheral development.
As the decentralized libraries became
operational it would be possible for
most existing library systems to stop
handling scientific journal reports and
ultimately they would even be able to
discard most of their existing files of
bound journals. This change-over might
be possible on a gradual basis, but it is
difficult to be sure until the actual or-
ganizational problems have been met in
practice. When the dynamic libraries
were fully operating this would leave
existing nonresearch libraries storing
only static information including mono-
graphs, atlases, textbooks, ete. and
being served by the dynamic library
system for their other science needs.
(4) The actual operation of the system would
involve the following steps:
(a) Master subject file—Theoretically head-
ings for all possible T <—S relationships
could be made out and filed according to
the rules of precedence of targets and
stimuli. Then every piece of research
dealing with a given T <— S relationship
would be filed behind its heading card
in chronological sequence. One variation
from Selye’s setup would be important.
Instead of maintaining articles by ac-
cession number as Selye does, each ar-
ticle should be microfilmed and a Mini-
card made for each 7’ < S relationship
identified by the coders. These cards
would be filed behind the appropriate
T <—S heading cards in the master sub-
ject file in chronological order. Even on
a world basis it should be possible to
place every new report in such a file
within thirty days of publication.
(6) Once the Mini-cards had been coded,
punched, and verified and the actual
article microfilmed on it, it would be
simple to duplicate such cards as often
as necessary. (The master cards might
be of metal or plastic to increase their
permanence. )
(c) Probably the actual master subject file
cards can be fed directly into machines
(existing ones or types that could be
developed) and the contained informa-
tion printed for bibliographies, ete.
Thus, a research worker could ask for
and quickly receive a complete biblog-
raphy on any T <S relationship. Of
course, the complete cards could be
duplicated and sent out as well, thus
furnishing the individual scientist with
all reported scientific data pertaining
to a particular T <— S relationship.
(5) Further extensions and advantages of such
a system—It can readily be foreseen that
such a system would have a number of logi-
eal extensions, uses and advantages which
have not yet been mentioned. Some of these
are:
(a) Annual statistical studies of new entries
into the subject file would be of con-
siderable value to those interested in ad-
ministrative and planning aspects of
science.
(6) Although T <— S heading cards might
only be made for those in which some
research had actually been reported, it
can easily be seen that the mere me-
chanical listing of all clearly defined
T —S possibilities not yet studied could
have value in pointing to neglected re-
search areas.
(c) By using microfilm or Mini-card tech-
nics, articles could be duplicated as
many times as necessary and filed in
pertinent 7 <S positions in the master
subject file. If stored and filed by Mini-
ecard technic, no serious problem de-
velops from library growth and the re-
sulting need to interfile new materials.
(In contrast to Mini-card, the mainte-
nance of such reports on microfilm rolls
would be much more complicated from
an administrative standpoint.)
(d) Once the system was fully operational
there would be no need for binding and
retaining journals as is currently done.
The Master Library System would keep
the master file and distribute duplicates
to working libraries and individual sci-
DECEMBER 1958
(e)
(f)
(g)
entists which would thus have complete
libraries in the special areas of 7 <— S$
interest.
The actual content of journals would
ultimately be greatly effected by the
system. Probably most research—espe-
cially that concerning negative results—
would no longer be published in com-
plete journal form. Instead, journals
would deal mostly with short abstracts
of really new basic findings, interpretive
and theoretical articles and the like.
The wasteful procedure of publishing
thousands of copies of data of current
interest to only a handful of people
would be stopped. This limited interest
data would be furnished to such a
library system where it could be coded
and photographed like any other article
and be available to interested investi-
gators when requested. Arrangements
would exist so that workers interested in
any T <S field to which new data was
added would automatically be sent du-
plicate copies of Mini-cards. This would
provide an automatic “express” of all
new data to the researchers working in
that area.
Ultimately, the coding of articles might
be decentralized to the journals them-
selves so the coders could benefit by
direct communication with the author
concerned.
Such a classification system would make
possible the ready identification of all
workers in a specific 7 < S classifica-
tion, thus facilitating the organization
of symposia when desired. Reviews,
monographs and textbooks written with
such a library system in support could
be approximately current instead of
several years out of date when printed.
The present method of static filing
would be adequate for these latter types
STILL: OUR SCIENTIFIC NERVOUS SYSTEM 379
of publication, but the information con-
tained in them would be more current
than is presently possible.
From time to time, committees could
examine the literature under various
T <S categories and could relegate,
with suitable comments, to historical
files such experiments as had been found
to be outdated or erroneous. If this
seemed undesirable they could at least
append some kind of warning note to
such data. This would save new entrants
to such fields from being misled or wast-
ing time on data of dubious validity. Of
course, such a system of classification
and filing would facilitate the associa-
tion of “retractions” with the original
article when an author might later find
reason to wish to retract some state-
ment.
This plan is built on a basis correspond-
ing to the ways in which the human mind
organizes its knowledge. It does not prom-
ise to be 100 percent perfect, as do the
electronic pigeonhole systems on which so
much energy has been spent with very lim-
ited results to date. (A detailed criticism
of the many fruitless efforts in this general
direction, was written by Dr. Yehoshua
Bar-Hillel in 1957 and published in Amer-
ican Documentation 8: 103-113.) The sys-
tem offered here only promises the degree
of perfection which a well-informed and
well-trained human intellect may give, per-
haps in the neighborhood of 90 percent on
short-range matters, less on long-range.
However, the system is extremely flexible
and its errors are easily correctible. It is
therefore perfectible. Thus the longer the
system works the better it should get. This
would appear to be a system which will
serve science far into the future.
380
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
ETHNOGEOGRAPHY.—Pile-dwellers and coconut culture in the Laguna de Sin-
amaica, Venezuela, RayMonp E. Crist, University of Florida. (Communi-
cated by Paul H. Oehser.)
(Received October 13, 1958)
Many urban agglomerations are located
where they are because of a favorable site
and propitious economic factors. But in
many parts of the world there exist villages
that have as bases factors which, to the per-
son brought up on Western economics, are
noneconomic or antieconomic; villages that
have been founded in response to their
founders’ desire to be cut off from the world
rather than to be in easy contact with it.
One such village settlement, only some 30
miles north of metropolitan Maracaibo,
consists of groups of pile-dwellings in the
shallow waters of the estuary of the Limon
River, known locally as the Laguna de
Sinamaica. Here the visitor rides in a motor-
boat through a village that has many simi-
larities to the settlements of Neolithic man
in the lakes of Switzerland.
In 1498 the northeast corner of South
America was discovered by Columbus on
his third voyage to the New World. The
following year, Alonso de Ojeda, a Spanish
conquistador, on a voyage of exploration
sailed into the Gulf of Venezuela and Lake
Maracaibo, which Columbus had not vis-
ited. He found along the east shore native
houses built on stilts over the waters of
the lake, and this prompted him to call the
sector Venezuela (little Venice). This pic-
turesque name gradually came to be used to
denote all that part of South America that
in time became the Republic of Venezuela.
Certain of these settlements of pile-dwell-
ings still exist as low rent areas for workers
in Maracaibo: eg., in Santa Rosa, a
northern suburb of metropolitan Maracaibo,
as well as in the village of El Mojan, 15
* The field and library work on which this paper
is based was made possible by a grant of the Creole
Petroleum Corp. Various departments of the or-
ganization cooperated in every way to further the
undertaking. Thanks are due Prof. Lorenzo Mon-
roy and to E. J. Lamb who were of assistance at
every step throughout the author’s stay in Vene-
zuela. To Drs. Woodfin L. Butte and Guillermo
Zuloaga, directors of the Creole Corp., the writer
is especially grateful.
miles north of Maracaibo near the mouth
of the Rio Limon. These houses, all in the
shallow water near shore, are inhabited for
the most part by heads of families who earn
their livelihood by working on shore, usu-
ally in Maracaibo. However, the inhabi-
tants of the agglomerations of pile-dwell-
ings up the Limon River earn their livings
and live out their lives in homes under
which there is always a sheet of water.
Sometimes during low water it is possible
to wade to a neighbor’s house, but most of
the travel is done by dugout canoes that are
paddled with great dexterity. Produce of
all kinds, including pigs and chickens, is
transported in dugouts in the settlement
itself, and contact with the outside world
is made by sailboats or boats with out-
board motors.
These settlements in the Laguna de Sina-
maica were probably first established by
Parajauno Indians as they sought safety
from the fierce warriors of the Guajiro
tribes coming from the north. The Para-
jauno language is still spoken by a large
number of these lake-dwellers, who were
perhaps too weak in numbers or in energy to
seek a better abode, but who, however, with
the years have found their site increasingly
advantageous.
The whole group of stilt-dwellings, re-
ferred to as the settlement in the Laguna
de Sinamaica, is made up of three distinct
agglomerations, called La Boca del Cano,
La Boquita, and El Barro. They are located
at the upper end of the estuary of the Rio
Limon, about 20 kilometers upstream from
the ferry-crossing at Puerto Mara and some
40 kilometers downstream from Carras-
quero. La Boca del Cano, the largest settle-
ment, is located where the Limon itself
empties into the estuary. La Boquita is-
situated at the point where the largest dis-
tributary of the Limon enters the estuary.
El Barro is a collection of houses in very
shallow water out in the brackish-water
DECEMBER 1958
estuary, or laguna, itself, usually a mud-flat
at low tide, as its name implies.
The settlement was probably originally
established on the natural levees of the river
and its distributaries, and the first two of
the settlements named are more or less
linear in type. As space on land became
limited, more and more houses were built
on stilts, and the original compactness has
been lost. El Barro is a typical caserio, i.e.,
it 1s lke thousands of tiny rural settle-
ments in Latin America, neither rural
village nor typical dispersed settlement.
The church is new, built on an artificial
island instead of on piles, and is a testi-
mony to the energy of the Capuchin mis-
sionaries.
The original settlers almost certainly
had fishing as their main activity. A sur-
plus of the catch could be exchanged for
the food products grown by those living on
land. The waters of the estuary still abound
in fish, and fishing continues to be an
important occupation. Fishermen are to be
seen almost any time of the day paying out
or hauling in their nets, and the festoons of
nets drying in front of the houses are one
of the most picturesque features of this
unique village. The daily bread, or starch
ration of a goodly part of the population
was then as now the pldtano, or cooking
banana.
It is not known just when coconut trees
were first planted in this sector, or how long
it took before their economic importance
was appreciated. Old residents of Sinamaica
felt pretty sure that coconuts came into
prominence about a hundred years ago. At
all events, the introduction of the coconut
palm gave a new orientation to the economy
of these lake-dwellers. The precarious self-
sufficiency of former days gave way to an
economy tied to the Maracaibo market, by
the sale of coconuts and their byproducts.
Coconut trees were first planted on the
natural levees along the distributaries of
the streams flowing into the estuary, but
little by little the area suitable for growing
trees and other crops has been increased by
the Herculean efforts of man. Artificial
islands are created by building a tight fence
of stout posts enclosing in the beginning just
CRIST: PILE-DWELLERS AND COCONUT CULTURE 381
a plot of water. The enclosure is gradually
filled in with reeds, earth, or about any
kind of refuse that comes to hand, till the
surface of the entire space enclosed by the
fence is above the level of the water at high
tide. Even before the plot has become solid
ground in its entirety young palm trees will
be set out. While waiting for them to mature
the land is not allowed to remain idle, but
is planted in cooking bananas for home use.
A few stocks of sugar cane may also be
grown, the fermented juice of which (gua-
rapo) 1s a favorite and refreshing beverage.
These artificial plots belong of course to
the person or persons who create them and
they are inherited by their children. They
ean also be sold, but such cases are rare,
as those brought up in the settlement like
it there and hold on to their hard-won
property. When such plots are sold they
are almost invariably bought by someone
living nearby in the settlement.
There is a limited sale of coconuts in
the unripe stage when they contain the
largest amount of delicious agua de coco,
used as a refreshing drink, alone, or mixed
with rum. These green coconuts are taken
down river where they find a ready sale at
the ferry-crossing at Puerto Mara. By far
the largest part of the crop, however, is
harvested when ripe. Barefooted boys or
men climb the trunks with great agility
and with deft strokes of their machetes cut
down the heavy clusters of coconuts. The
big fruits are then transported in dugout
canoes to the house where they are husked.
After this process—all done by hand, of
course—the extremely hard inner shell is
cracked open, and the white meat is re-
moved and ground on a primitive grinding
machine, consisting usually of a wheel to
which perforated strips of tin have been
attached. Oil is pressed from these ground
coconut meats, and the coconut cake and
whey after the oil has been removed are
used to feed the hogs kept in a narrow
pen beside the oil presses. Thus the process
of making coconut oil has hogs on the hoof
and pork and lard as byproducts, all of
which are in short supply and hence find
a ready market in Maracaibo.
Prices in Venezuela, and especially in
‘q[Inq Sutoq Jo ssooo.1d UL SI Joy OUIO1}XO OY} OF PURIST OT, “41 UO Soory
wed jnuo00) UMOIS SsvY ApPROITR JUS oY} O} PURIST [VIOYAIe oY [—pP ‘YT
“OUTOS B JNO GUTALT oI
uoW SUNOA oso ]T, “Asnpul jJuRyIodul UB ST SUTYST|—Z YI]
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
382
383
OCONUT CULTURE
PILE-DWELLERS AND C
CRIST
DECEMBER 1958
“‘popOBIFX ST TIO Yory
NS
AVS
N
WN
KK
NWUCCOn
JOU
SyNUOVOD c
JO Spo]
CQQQE
DWN:
SS
N
\
‘s]vul Surdsss Jo suryeut oy} Ul pue sesnoy jo
SULYVUL IO} [BVlIOJVUL SB
pesn eq 0} soysni Jo poy sour
Vy ta)
Sonenn
) y=
9
“DI
SuNOA
¢
JUB
joyn
U['}
9)
7}
e
Iv
upd
Jeo]
JIM osnoy
V iy
uvjd vuvurq suo pur ‘
sus YIM puRIsT pojon
S
uy
Ws
want
a
BUIJOOY
uo) AT}Ua
ed ynuodo.
Ja1
YW)
7
‘DIA
‘SIOMOP, YIM poyoud “41 uO Youod v sey osnoy SOoAVU OY [—ZI “SIL
“uwuped {NUOVOD JUITUIATOD BG
jo opvys oy} UL O6po S1oJvM oY} Ye PoyYsem av SOYJO[ )— OT 9
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
“IOGYStou JSorvou JOY UO SurypVo
SUIOS SI UVUIOM SIV], ‘oouRD vB o[pped 07 SUIvO]T OUOAIOAW— TT ‘DIyf
puv puesy Aq syRowl ynuUOD0) puNoOAs oY} JO JNO pozZoonbs st [IO—6 “YI
DECEMBER 1958
Maracaibo, are so inflated that even exact
figures as to prices received for produce
give only an approximation of the real in-
come of those who live in the Laguna.
About the best one can do is to contrast
the level of housing in the Laguna with that
in Maracaibo. Further, no one seems to
work exclusively at one task and thus be
dependent upon one source of income. Those
who worked rather steadily at making coco-
nut oil and fattening hogs averaged slightly
more than unskilled laborers in Maracaibo
and more, even, than some of the lower
echelon white-collar workers. But this does
not take into account the perquisites of
living and working in the Laguna.
The pile-dwellings are more spacious and
comfortable by far than the huts in the
slums of Maracaibo. Further, the women-
folk add a considerable amount to the
family income by gathering reeds and mak-
ing them into sleeping mats.
A house socially acceptable in this com-
munity is built in a few days, in a bee in
which neighbors and friends of the family
take part. All the material used is locally
grown: poles for uprights, flooring of palm
planks, walls of rushes (enea) or palm
leaves, roofs of palm thatch. A well-made
roof lasts for six or seven years before it
must be replaced, so upkeep is hardly a
Worry.
The home is not merely a place in which
to retire to eat and sleep and to keep out
of inclement weather, as are in general the
houses of poorer people, built on dry land,
throughout tropical Latin America. Dwell-
ings on piles are lived in 24 hours of the day,
especially by women and children. Small
children are in the house at all times, since
there are no playgrounds. The doorways
of some of the more unpretentious houses
have slats across them to prevent infants
from tumbling into the water. At an early
age lake-dwellers become adept at paddling
a canoe, but the grownups have first call on
using the family canoe—there are no two-
canoe families. Houses are simple construc-
tions, almost barren of furniture. There
seems to be complete resignation to, or even
satisfaction with, what many outsiders
would consider minimum comfort. In many
homes the housewife may do a great deal of
CRIST: PILE-DWELLERS AND COCONUT CULTURE 3895
sewing, or several members of the family
may be engaged in the making of reed sleep-
ing mats, a major household industry; yet
even such a simple and essential item as a
chair may be most uncomfortable, or indeed
entirely absent!
The four men who have acquired small
boats equipped with outboard motors, with
which they transport coconuts to Puerto
Mara where they pick up groceries and
notions—and even an occasional sightseer—
enjoy what in larger communities would
certainly be called middle-class status; at
all events they definitely outrank those who
own only small canoes for use in paddling
about the settlement or even those who have
canoes large enough to accommodate a
small sail and which are used to transport
produce.
A SS
Fig. 13—The church has been SoS on =
small artificial island.
The raison d’ etre of these settlements
cannot of course be the same in 1958 as it
was when they were founded. But in spite
of the inconveniences inherent in the site
and in spite of the tremendous pull of the
labor market in Maracaibo with all its
modern attractions, these lake settlements
continue not only to thrive but to grow.
And it certainly is not merely a question of
inertia. Other urban agglomerations, even
on more favorable sites, have become ghost
towns, losing population to the cities with
fewer economic attractions than Maracaibo.
Are these people still imbued with the sense
of inferiority and inadequacy that caused
their forebears to settle there in the first
place? That would seem highly unlikely. It
would seem more probable that these people
386
are wise enough to realize that the advan-
tages of living in dwellings on pilings at a
distance from Maracaibo still outweigh the
advantages offered for people with their
skills and economic capacities by Mara-
caibo. They find it preferable to live where
they are, under conditions that they know,
rather than to move and thus run the risk
of living in a metropolitan slum. They can
build in a few days a house that is adequate
and socially acceptable, and thereby avoid
paying rent. Their village is already pro-
vided with such modern items as a school, a
church, telephone connections with the out-
side world, electric lights, canned foods and
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
bottled drinks—items and services that for
the most part are due to the money economy
made possible by the introduction of the
coconut palm. Perhaps the money economy
was the sine qua non that made it possible
for the inhabitants of the Laguna to take a
new lease on life; without the introduction
of the coconut palm the lake-dwellers might
have felt called upon to migrate, to try for
a higher level of living elsewhere, as do so
many of the descendants of the once-fierce
Guajiro Indian warriors, whose attacks
probably made lake-dwellers of the peace
loving Parajauno Indians in the first place.
JUNGLE CAMOUFLAGE
A mammal whose fur is a garden is the
Bradypus of Barro Colorado Island, the Smith-
sonian Institution’s jungle wildlife preserve in
the Canal Zone. The creature is better known as
the three-toed sloth—to Panamanian natives as
the “perezoso.” It is, in superficial appearance
at least, one of the least active of warm-blooded
animals, moves slowly and infrequently, and may
spend as much as 18 hours of each day in ap-
parently deep sleep.
Along the jungle paths of the Canal Zone
Biological Area, as the 4,000-acre island of dense
rain forest is officially known, the Bradypus 1s
one of the more numerous mammals. Quite
likely, however, it will go unnoticed, mistaken
for a mossy excrescence or perhaps a termite
nest, as it clings upside down and probably fast
asleep to some overhanging branch. This natural
protection is due to one of the most unusual
camouflage devices in nature. The coarse, brown-
ish hairs of its fur are full of minute cracks. In
these cracks grow unique species of algae, one-
celled plants. These give the animal a grayish-
green hue, which helps it to blend with its
environment. Thus the sloth is not likely to be
bothered by predatory mammals or by the birds
of prey that swoop low over the rain forests.
This is a give-and-take arrangement. The par-
ticular species of alga is ideally adapted to grow
and flourish in the cracks of the sloth’s hair and
nowhere else.
Much the same is true of the two-toed sloth,
close relative of the Bradypus, not as slow, and
somewhat larger. In this species the coarse hairs
are grooved and thus provide secure beds for the
algae of species related to those found in
Bradypus.
The sloths are sometimes further protected
in their slumbers by the fact that the trees they
frequent are often also homes of red fire ants,
which, for some unknown reason, never bother
them. They attack viciously most other warm-
blooded animals and are among the terrors of
the jungle.
—--—- —.
DECEMBER 1958
SETTY: ADELIE PENGUIN CUTANEOUS MUSCLES 387
ZOOLOGY .—The cutaneous muscles of the Adelie penguin (Pygosceles adeliae).
L. R. Serry, School of Medicine, Howard University. (Communicated by
Herbert Friedmann. )
(Received November 17, 1958)
The material used in this account of the
cutaneous muscles of the Adelie penguin
(Pygosceles adeliae) was taken from one
specimen that died in the zoo at Portland,
Oreg. The cutaneous musculature of one
specimen of the emperor penguin (Apteno-
dytes fostert) from the same zoo was also
examined.
The cutaneous muscles remained at-
tached to the underside of the removed
skin. Because of this fact, the muscles were
studied and figured from their medial sur-
faces (Fig. 1). They were observed both
when they were in the fresh state and later
when they were preserved in a solution
made of equal parts of 4-percent formal-
dehyde, glycerine, and 95-percent alcohol.
The only description to be found in the
literature available, on cutaneous muscles
of penguins was that in Report on the
anatomy of the Spheniscidae by Dr. Mor-
rison Watson (Zool. Voy. Challenger, pt.
Fre. 1.—The cutaneous muscles of the Adelie penguin (Pygoceles adeliae). These muscles are shown
from their underside and in sztu in the removed skin. 1, Panniculus carnosus; 2, cutaneous dorsalis: 3.
abdominis superior; 4, abdominis inferior.
388
18. 1883). Watson described and figured
the cutaneous muscles for Hudyptes
chrysome, and he observed these muscles
in Eudyptes chrysolophus, Aptenodytes
longirostris, Spheniscus magellanicus, Sphe-
niscus minor, and Pygosceles taeniatus. He
stated that the system of cutaneous muscles
is developed to a greater extent in penguins
than in any other bird, with the exception
of Apteryx. He added that this develop-
ment is probably related to their aquatic
habits and the necessity of an arrangement
whereby the water may be readily expelled
from the interstices of their furlike plum-
age.
The cutaneous muscles of Pygosceles
adeliae (Fig. 1) are as follows:
1. Panniculus carnosus: A very extensive
muscle extending over the whole cervical
region. Its origin is from the upper border
of the clavicle. Many of its fibers are in-
serted on the cranium just back of the
orbit, and many of its fibers extend to the
middorsal line of the neck, where they
blend with the corresponding fibers of the
opposite side.
2. Cutaneus dorsalis: An elongated mus-
cle on the dorsal side of the cephalic end
of the trunk. Most of the fibers run trans-
versely to its long axis. Its cephalic half is
wider than its caudal half. In Aptenodytes
fostert the two halves of cutaneus dorsalis
are essentially of the same width.
Watson stated that in the two specimens
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
of Pygosceles taeniatus he dissected this
muscle was entirely wanting. But this mus-
cle is quite conspicuous in Pygosceles adel-
1ae.
3. Abdominis superior: An _ elongated
muscle on the lateral side of the trunk. Its
fibers run approximately parallel to the
long axis of the body. At its cephalic end
it attaches to the tendon of insertion of
pectoralis major.
4. Abdominis inferior: An elongated mus-
cle but only about half as long as abdominis
superior. It is situated caudad of abdominis
superior. Most of its fibers run obliquely.
In Pygosceles adeliae a distance of about
1 inch intervenes between abdominis in-
ferior and abdominis superior. But in Ap-
tenodytes fosteri the cephalic end of ab-
dominis inferior makes contact with the
caudal end of abdominis superior.
The names abdominis superior and ab-
dominis inferior are here used for the first
time in the nomenclature of cutaneous mus-
cles of penguins. Watson considered (for
the species studied by him) the muscles
here so named as parts of a muscle termed
muscle des parures.
A fifth cutaneous muscle, called constric-
tor colli, has been described by Watson.
But its fibers are very intimately blended
with those of panniculus carnosus. There-
fore it is here considered as a part of
panniculus carnosus.
By Nature’s kindly disposition most questions which it 1s beyond a
man’s power to answer do not occur to him at all ——GroRGE SANTAYANA.
DECEMBER 1958
THURMAN: REVALIDATION OF ARMIGERES
389
ENTOMOLOGY .—Revalidation of three species of Armigeres Theobald, 1901
(Diptera: Culicidae).! ERNESTINE B. THURMAN.”
(Received November 18, 1958)
The need to evaluate the status of four
species of mosquitoes in the subgenus Armi-
geres in relationship to the type species of
the genus, Armigeres obturbans (Walker,
1860), became evident during a study of the
specimens of the genus in the collection of
the U. 8S. National Museum in connection
with a revisionary treatment of the Culici-
dae of northern Thailand. Armzgeres joloen-
sis (Ludlow, 1904), Armigeres kuchingensis
Edwards, 1915, and Armigeres durham: Ed-
wards, 1917, are hereby revalidated to spe-
cific rank, and Armigeres subalbatus (Co-
quillett, 1898) is applied to the common
Oriental species distributed from Japan,
China, and Taiwan south and west through
Thailand to India and Ceylon.
A. joloensis was described from specimens
captured at Jolo Jolo, Philippine Islands
(May, 1903), as a variety of Desvoidea
fusca Theobald, 1908, which is currently a
synonym of Armigeres malayt Theobald,
1901. The lectotype male is in good condi-
tion in the U. 8. National Museum.
Blanchard (1901) proposed the generic
*Scientific Article no. A695, Contribution No.
2917, of the Maryland Agricultural Experiment
Station, Department of Entomology. Acknowledg-
ment 1s made of the support provided by the Na-
tional Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases,
National Institutes of Health, Public Health Serv-
ice, D. H. E. W., under Grant E 809 awarded to
Wilham E. Bickley, Department of Entomology,
University of Maryland; and of the assistance
rendered by the United States National Museum,
Smithsonian Institution; the Entomology Research
Division, U. 8. D. A.; and the U. S. Operations
Mission to Thailand, International Cooperation
Administration. The author is indebted also to
many persons who have assisted her with the vari-
ous phases of her studies, particularly to Dr. Alan
Stone, of the Entomology Research Division, U. S.
D. A.; Peter F. Mattingly, of the British Museum:
Dr. Donald L. Colless, of the University of Ma-
laya; William W. Macdonald, of the Institute for
Medical Research, Kuala Lumpur; Dr. William E.
Bickley, of the University of Maryland; and Dr.
Dale R. Lindsay, of the Public Health Service,
D.H.E.W.
“Senior scientist (R), on detail from the Divi-
sion of Research Grants, National Institutes of
Health, Bethesda 14, Md., formerly assigned as
malaria control adviser with the U. 8S. Operations
Mission to Thailand, I. C. A.
name Desvoidya, incorrectly assuming that
Armigeres was preoccupied by Armiger
Hartmann, 1840-1842 (Mollusca). Theo-
bald (1910) considered Desvoidya joloensis
as a valid species. In 1913 Edwards placed
the species in the genus Armigeres, revali-
dating the name and stating that it was not
preoccupied by Armiger Hartmann, thus it
antedated Desvoidya Blanchard, 1901 (mis-
spelled Desvoidea by Theobald, 1903).
Later Edwards (1915) stated that he was in
error in 1913 when he synonymized Armi-
geres jugraensis (Leicester, 1908), under A.
joloensis and that the latter represented only
a slight color variation of A. obturbans. A.
joloensis is listed as a synonym of A. ob-
turbans by Edwards (1932) and Bohart
(1945).
A. kuchingensis was described from two
males and six females collected by Edwards,
July 24-27, 1914 (females biting), at Kuch-
ing Reservoir, Sarawak. In 1917, Edwards
described A. durhami from Bukit Kutu, Ma-
lay Peninsula, as “much as in kuchingen-
sis... clasper with distinct swelling on the
flexor surface a little beyond middle.”’ Three
specimens of A. durham collected by Dr.
Durham were named as Desvoidya fusca
by Theobald (1903). Barraud (1927) placed
A. durhami as a variety of A. kuchingensis
along with three varieties from India which
he described in the same paper (var. nong-
pohensis, var. shillongensis, and var. di-
brugarhensis). Later Barraud (1934) syn-
onymized these varieties as only individual
variations of A. kuchingensis. Borel (1930)
listed A. durhami as a synonym of A. kuch-
ingensis, while Bohart (1945) listed A.
kuchingensis as a synonym of A. obturbans.
The type of A. obturbans, a female col-
lected on Makassar, Celebes, by Wallace,
has been lost; the type of Culex ventralis
Walker, 1861 (questioned as a synonym of
A. obturbans by Edwards, 1932), a female
collected in Amboyna (Amboina, Moluceas)
by Wallace, is not in a condition to be of
scientific value (Mattingly in personal eom-
munication to Stone, 1955). In 1865, Walker
390
described a species from New Guinea, which
he named Culex ventralis, n. sp. This name
is invalid as a primary homonym. The type
is unknown. The character, as based on de-
scriptions, distinguishing C. obturbans, C.
ventralis of 1861, and C. ventralis of 1865,
is the coloration of the apex of the hind fe-
mur. For C. obturbans the hind femur is
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
described as white beneath; for C. ventralis
of 1861, there is a purple tomentum, and for
C. ventralis of 1865, the femur is silvery
white with the apex dark. The holotype (fe-
male) of Culex subalbatus, which is a syn-
onym of A. obturbans according to Edwards
(1932) and Barraud (1934), is in very good
condition in the U. 8. National Museum.
VENTRAL Jf
VIEW # )
Fic. 1.—Armigeres subalbatus (Coquillett): Structures of male terminalia.
DECEMBER 1958
The apex of the hind femur of the holotype
of C. subalbatus is white on the venter and
the ventrolateral aspects.
Bohart considered the common Philippine
Armageres with a long dististyle in the male,
to be A. obturbans. This common species
called A. kuchingensis,
Baisas (1935)
IX-S---
THURMAN: REVALIDATION OF ARMIGERES
a91
though he figured a species with a short
dististyle. Stone and E. Thurman (1958)
have shown that Baisas was dealing with a
species which in general habitus appears to
be A. kuchingensis though there are signifi-
cant differences in the structures of the
claspette, phallosome, and dististyle. This
VENTRAL
VIEW
Fie, 2.—Armigeres durhami (Edwards): Structures of male terminalia.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
392
“(g¢6]) UBULINY,, "| pus su0yg Aq poyusseid O18 wspsypg “py puv ‘sisuaburyony “VY ‘Siswaojol *y JO BI[BUTULI9} O[BUI OY} JO SOANON.AYS OY} JO SUOTFBIYSN]TT »
9qOT [BS
-10p JO 103U9A UO 9[ppruL
ieou syurod {[euis ‘sse001d
URIPOU POZIOIOPOS YIM
eseq wloly suoroofoid
poyenpeis g 10 p “WOTSTATp
podeys- A YFIM oq OT [B1}U9 A
aT AASISBq
pxeMoy pojyurod ‘daivys ‘%
9qo| [es10p
jo xodv 04 Ajieou sult
-yoval souo Sul 7% ‘eseq
4e suomoofoid [Burs
Z “PeplAIp ego, [BI}UEA
80] [Bs10p jo
xode 0} A[ivou Suryovel
sou0 dxI][-1oduy G—p ‘oseq
uory10d
aqoy
[esiop Jo 10}U9A UO 9[p
-plul 1e6u syurOd oynutut
9qo]
[Bsiop JO JeqyueA UO 9{p
-plul Ivou syutod oynutuL
9TAYSIsBq PxBMO0Z POAINI
‘yyoous ‘pousyyey “¢-f
48 suomoofoid [ews jeseq ut suomoeofoid F ‘suorqoefoid [e1eye, 1-G ‘suorjooefoid jereyey, )-G
€-Z ‘PEPIAIP oqo] [B4QUSA | JO g ‘PeprIArIp oqo] [BA}UEA | “POptArpuN sqoy [e1zUEA ‘peplArpun oqo, [edyuoA |” SOLOS OUetch
a[AASISBq oe i
PIBMO} POAIND “PozerItzs poyerys ‘xode a[A4siseq Woy ABME a[AASISBq UOTF
‘poueyyepy ‘xode daeys ‘p—-g | 7% oye[Nyeds ‘peamno ‘e-z |peyurod ‘yyoours “daeys ‘g-z | AvMe pozutod SCLC US eC =Car ewe uee 9449
-dsepo Jo 98499
94, 0d sR] 9ayj0dse]o JO 98408 9ay,0dSB]D JO 9B70S 974,0dSB]O JO ovIOS 9a},0dse]o JO ayjodseyo jo
jo oeyaS SuIYoReI you “y1oYyg | JO ssvq Sutyover ‘Buoy | Jo oseq Suryoror “suoy | Jo oseq Suryovor “suo | ovjos Suryovel you “4y1OYG | oRJeS SUITOR. you ‘q1oyg | 9[AASSIC
T:é 1:6 1:9°% T:€-G°% T-€-9°¢ oe o[AYSIsVg
SBI[BULULIO} OTB]
jenby jenby [snboy [enbay jenbou py yenbouy | MBIDPIUL 9B]
c[lep xede ‘oz1yM
AIOATIS,, 3G98T ‘suppoujwaa
syoodse , Ung ueUI0Y
[B10}8[O19UeA UO SseTvoS gjdand,, :][98] ‘sajpujuaa
xode 04 xode 04 xode 04 xode 04 yep YIM Moy) xodv 04 .UyBou
I9{U9A PUB SOpIs UO O4IY A
19jJU9A PUB SOpIS UO O4IT MA
19JUIA PUB SOpIsS UO oI M
19}U9A PUB SOpIS UO oI MA
10}U9A PUB SOpIs UO OFT MA
-Iopun,, oJIYM ssupqunjqgo
pao! o 8 iMurey pulzy
yods Azuoiq {[euISs
gods yep YM OFM
yods Azuoiq [[BUIS
yods
yods
OVI AA | UJI Apores fog M ATTBNsS() YQIM Ajorvs foqyTy M AT[ENSE) | YAVp TIPOUL YPM oFIY AA | YABP TBLpout YFLM OPI | 8X00 910\T
uINSIOp UO V[QISTA (2) uINsIOop uO winsiop 03 uo dn UINSIOp UO 9[qISTA UINSIOP UO 9[QISTA UINSIOP WO O{[QISTA
qou ‘aR[MOITOTUIES ‘OZIY AA OTQISTA ‘WepNosToruTEs ‘ayy AA | TT BSurypoved ‘oB1Vy] ‘op AA | JOU ‘IBPNOATOTUTES ‘oyTY AA | 9q ABUT ‘repnsuersy ‘oy | Aporer “aepnsueny ‘op | SsULy1eUL
[BUIWIOpg® [B.109e'T
qUoUIdES SUT
-I9A00 AjIBou podoT[BosS
Ayetpout ‘epim = pusq
pueq purg o41yM [vorde pusq oy [olds yeordeqns AIA soylBur MOIIBU PUBG MOIIBU PUB
OYIYM [eoide qyIM YLVed
-qns ModieUu YIM YIed
-qns MOIIeU YYIM YIed
-O} JUIOS /snjDQ]DgNs Ul SY
OTM [wordeqns YIM Ye
OVI M [BOIABGNsS YAIM YIVC
GomdooD TIA OYIUL94YS
IA ¥ A uO - (TA (IA
ueyd AT ® II] UO sopra snypg)pqns Jo% ‘A JOW ‘ALJO% | 0% tA JO WH HAT JOM
spuevq 10 ‘spueq [eo ult sev oq Avul ‘spuvq | ‘]]] Jo %) YIP ur sur ‘TIT JO %) U9Pt ur sut
OVI MA ory | -Ide Azuoiq qurey ‘Morey | [eolde MoiIBU AT[eNS-) |-SBoloop Spueq Y1Bp jeoidy |-svo1oop spuvq yarep [wordy |*°“TA-TIT 8e}!Ut04$
udu
-loods uUBvAB]BI UT YO9ed Tap1oqg oy AM
jesiop Azuoiq 10 usp[os (yoyed [es1op (yoyed yyRoued oul] [Bsiop pRwo1q
MOIIVU YIM ;SUsUILOEdS UI So[BOS YAIBp 10 AZUOIG [esiop ul selBos Yyaep SUIUIIO, SefTvos Yzaep
OPI MA OY M |IeyL pus ueipuy uray |Aoy puy Ajorer) oJIY AA [10 AzuoIq oAGY MOF) OFIY AA |POAINO MOTIBU YIM OIA | 9qO|
jeqyouoid = 10110480 q
SUINOB] JO MOIICU
Q[eUloy foyIyM ‘OpIM OBIT
ayy “ournsip ATTBNS/)
OPIYM “QOUTSIPUT
oyu M
OFM
oyryM AUTBAIO)
“-Japslog [BJOUOSOT[
YA-%
v-A
UA
vA
YN
“NUN
Mis stosoqoid
qyysuel/tdyjed o[Bure iy
41SD8109 *“V
ySisauasuUryony *V
(7 “SIq) 2mDy snp °V
4SIsUao0j0l
(T SI) Snyoqipgns “Vy
gsypaquan *p gsupqin}go “Vy
siayoRIeyO
1O6L ‘d1VaOaH TL, SHUMDINUY FO SHIONdS XIQ 40 SLTNGY tO SUMLOVUVH LS) OILSONDVIGQ— [| WTAvVy
DECEMBER 1958
kuchingensis-like species with a short dis-
tistyle Stone and E. Thurman (1958) de-
scribed as Armigeres baisast.
After much deliberation the author has
concluded that: A. swbalbatus (Coquillett)
and of Bohart (1945) represents the com-
mon Oriental species, which is the A. ob-
turbans of Barraud (1934) et auctorum (nec
Walker, 1860), in areas north and west of
Malaya; A. obturbans of Bohart (1945) et
auctorum reported from the Philippine Is-
lands includes A. joloensis and A. kuchingen-
sis, if the latter species occurs in the Philip-
pine Islands; A. kuchingensis of Baisas
(1935) is all or in part A. barsasi; and that
A. obturbans, if the name is to be retained,
should be applied to specimens from locali-
ties near or adjacent to its type locality in-
asmuch as the type is lost and the diagnosis
of the species differs among specialists. The
author prefers to consider C. obturbans and
C. ventralis of 1861 and 1865 as nomina
dubia.
Diagnostic characters of A. obturbans,
sensu stricto, based on literature as well as
specimens and unpublished notes from Col-
less, 1954-56, and Macdonald, 1957-58; of
the holotype of C. subalbatus; of the lecto-
type of A. joloensis; of the holotype of A.
kuchingensis; of A. durhami, based on Thai
specimens and unpublished notes from Col-
less, 1954-56; and of the holotype’ of A.
baisasi are presented in Table I. The struc-
tures of the male terminalia of A. subal-
batus and A. durham are illustrated in Fig-
ures 1 and 2. Illustrations of the structures
of the male terminalia of A. joloensis, A.
kuchingensis, and A. baisasi are presented
by Stone and E. Thurman (1958).
THURMAN: REVALIDATION OF ARMIGERES 39
OO
REFERENCES
Barsas, F. E. Notes on the Philippine mosquitoes.
I. The Armigeres group. Philippine Journ. Sci.
96(4): 485-497. 1935.
BarrauD, P. J. A revision of the culicine mos-
quitoes of India: Part XX, The Indian species
of Armigeres (including Leicesteria) with de-
scriptions of two new species. Indian Journ.
Med. Res. 14(3): 533-548. 1927.
——. The fauna of British India. Diptera 5:
Megarhinin and Culicini, 463 pp. London,
1934.
BuancuarD, R. Observations sur quelques mous-
tiques. Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 53: 1046. 1901.
Bouart, R. M. A synopsis of the Philippine
mosquitoes. U.S. Nav. Med. 580: 48 pp. 1945.
Borer, E. Les moustiques de la Cochinchine et
du Sud-Annam. Soc. Pathol. Exotique. Monogr.
3: 1-423. 1930.
Epwarps, F. W. New synonymy in oriental Culi-
cidae. Bull. Ent. Res. 4: 221-242. 1913.
Diagnoses of New Bornean Culicidae.
Bull. Ent. Res. 5: 283-285. 1915.
Notes on Culicidae, with descriptions of
new species. Bull. Ent. Res. 7(3): 201-229.
1917.
In P. Wytsman, Genera insectorum, Dip-
tera, Fam. Culicidae: 258 pp., 5 pls. 1932.
Luptow, C. 8. Mosquito notes. Can. Ent. 36:
233-236. 1904.
SToNE, A., AND THURMAN, ERNESTINE B. Armigeres
(Armigeres) baisasi, a new mosquito from the
Philippine Islands (Diptera: Culicidae). Journ.
Washington Acad. Sci. 48(7): 240-243. 1958.
THropaLD, F. V. Monograph of Culicidae or
mosquitoes. 3: 359 pp. London, 1903.
Monograph of Culicidae or mosquitoes.
5: 646 pp. London, 1910.
Waker, F. Catalogue of the dipterous insects
collected at Makassar in Celebes, by Mr. A.
R. Wallace, with descriptions of new species.
Journ. Linn. Soc. London, Zool. 4: 90-172.
1860.
Catalogue of the dipterous insects col-
lected in Amboyna by Mr. A. R. Wallace. with
descriptions of new species. Journ. Linn. Soc.
London, Zool., 5: 144-168. 1861.
Descriptions of new species of the dip-
terous sects of New Guinea. Journ. Linn. Soc.
London, Zool., 8: 102-130. 1865.
a94
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
ZOOLOGY .—Further remarks on the geographical distribution of Gorgoniidae.
FrepERICK M. Bayer, U.S. National Museum.
(Received November 17, 1958)
In my paper of 1953 on the zoogeography
and evolution in the octocorallian family
Gorgoniidae, I advanced the proposition
that the closely related group of gorgoniid
eenera characterized by scaphoid spicules
is an adaptive offshoot of the mainstream
of gorgoniid development produced in re-
sponse to altered environmental conditions
resulting from cessation of interoceanic
communication across the Isthmus of Pan-
ama toward the end of the Miocene time.
One of the premises upon which this theory
depends was that the “scaphoid genera” of
gorgoniids are endemic in the Caribbean
region. Except for Pterogorgia perwana
Stiasny, said to be from Callao, and four
species of Pseudopterogorgia from the East
Indies and Australia, no species have been
reported outside the West Indian area, and
I disposed of these exceptions by consider-
ing P. peruana to be a West Indian species
with incorrect locality data, and the species
of Pseudopterogorgia to be species of
Leptogorgia with somewhat bent spindles
erroneously interpreted as scaphoids. I had
seen neither P. peruana nor any Pseu-
dopterogorgia, and the collections of gor-
gonians in the U.S. National Museum con-
tained no “scaphoid species” from the west
coast of the Americas nor from the East
Indies.
During the course of studies conducted
in European museums, made possible by
the assistance of the Biology Branch of
the Office of Naval Research through a
program with the American Institute of
Biological Sciences, I was able to examine
part of Stiasny’s type of Pterogorgia peru-
ana and a specimen of Pseudopterogorgia
oppositipinna parvispiculata Bielschowsky
from Amboina, contained in the collections
of the Rijksmuseum van Natuurlijke His-
torie at Leiden. Even though the locality
datum of P. peruana is still open to ques-
tion—the species has not turned up in sub-
sequent collections from South America—
it is certainly not identical with any of
the known West Indian species; it agrees
in most particulars with Pseudoterogorgia
australiensis (Ridley). Moreover, the spic-
ules of Pseudopterogorgia, as revealed by
a specimen from Amboina, are without
doubt genuine scaphoids and not bent spin-
dles as the literature once led me to believe.
These observations mean that (1)
“seaphoid species” of Gorgoniidae do occur
in the Indo-Pacific; (2) “scaphoid genera”
are not restricted to the Caribbean region
and probably came into being while At-
lantic-Pacific intercommunication still ex-
isted; and (3) the Indo-Pacific species of
Pseudopterogorgia are generically insepar-
able from the West Indian Pterogorgia, a
name that I replaced with Antillogorgia for
reasons stated in 1951 (p. 97). The generic
name Pseudopterogorgia obviously takes
precedence over Antillogorgia, which is a
junior subjective synonym.
I will now show by means of a few figures
that the scaphoid spicules are not suff-
ciently different in Atlantic and Indo-Pa-
cific species to warrant generic separation.
In Fig. 1 is shown a typical scaphoid of Gor-
gonia acerosa Pallas, type species of Antillo-
gorgia; in Fig. 2, a scaphoid typical of
Gorgonia americana Gmelin; in Fig. 3,
a blunt scaphoid characteristic of Ptero-
gorgia rigida Bielschowsky; in Fig. 4, a
blunt, undulated scaphoid of Pterogorgia
blanquillensis Stiasny; in Fig. 5, a similar
blunt, undulated scaphoid from Pseudo-
pterogorgia oppositipinna parvispiculata
Bielschowsky; in Fig. 6, a scaphoid of
Pterogorgia peruana Stiasny; and in Fig.
7, an acute, strongly undulated scaphoid
of Pterogorgia bipinnata Verrill.
It is quite clear that the only distinguish-
ing characteristic of Pseudopterogorgia—
the 2-4 belted scaphoids “deren zugespitzte
Enden mit dahnlichen, nicht regelmassig
angeordneten Warzen besetzt sind” (Kii-
kenthal 1924, p. 355)—is found also in
West Indian Antillogorgia. From this it is
clear that the correct generic name for the
plumose, scaphoid-bearing gorgoniids of
both Atlantic and Indo-Pacific is Pseudo-
DECEMBER 1958 BAYER: GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF GORGONIIDAE
pterogorgia Kukenthal, 1919, with the fol-
lowing synonymy:
Gorgonia (part) Pallas, 1766, Elench. Zooph.:
160.
Pterogorgia (part) Ehrenberg, 1834, Abh. Akad.
Wiss. Berlin 1832 (pt. 1): 368.
Pseudopterogorgia Kikenthal, 1919, Ergebn.
Tiefsee-Exped. 13(2): 854. [Type species,
Pseudopterogorgia austrahensis (Ridley), by
original designation.|
Antillogorgia Bayer, 1951, Journ. Washington
Acad. Sci. 41: 97. [Type species, Gorgonia
acerosa Pallas, by original designation]
Diagnosis —Plumose, pinnate gorgonids with
no trace of anastomosis of the branchlets. Cor-
tical spicules predominately scaphoids in the
outer layer and straight, belted spindles in the
axial sheath. Anthocodial armature strong,
weak, or absent, when present consisting of
flat rods with scalloped edges.
Remarks —It will be noted in the seven fig-
ures given herewith that four of the scaphoids,
those belonging to bipinnata, blanquillensis, op-
positipinna parvispiculata, and peruana, are
sculptured with broad, rounded ridges across
the convex side, whereas such ridges are absent
from the scaphoids of acerosa, americana and
rigida, im which the ornamentation of the con-
vex side is reduced to a few prickles or sup-
pressed entirely. This character of smooth or
slightly prickly scaphoids is shared by all Car-
ibbean species of Pseudopterogorgia except P.
a95
bipinnata (Verrill), the closely related and
perhaps identical kallos (Bielschowsky), and
blanquillensis (Stiasny). Unfortunately, the ex-
amination of a large number of specimens of
various species discloses intergradation between
these scaphoid types. Occasionally, some of the
blunt scaphoids of P. rigida have low ridges
across the convex side, and in P. blanquillensis
a few are practically smooth. It appears that
all of these variations are simply progressive
phases in the development of a trend begun
with the unilaterally spinose spindles of Lepto-
gorgia.
If the ornamentation of the convex side of
the scaphoids is used as a basis for dividing
Pseudopterogorgia into two subgenera, then the
original zoogeographic proposition may retain
some degree of validity since no species with
smooth scaphoids has yet been discovered out-
side the West Indian region. The subgenus with
ridged scaphoids, found chiefly in the Indo-Pa-
cific, is represented in the Atlantic by two or
three rather uncommon species.
For the convenience of those who may wish
to extend recognition to these two groups of
species, subgenera are defined for them as fol-
lows:
Genus Pseudopterogorgia Kiikenthal, 1919
Subgenus Pseudopterogorgia Kiikenthal, ss.
Diagnosis —The transverse girdles of tuber-
cles on the scaphoids are developed across the
(eee a a eo ee els ONL re
Fias. 1-7.—Scaphoid spicules of Pseudopterogorgia species: 1,
2, P. americana (Gmelin); 3, P. rigida (Bielschowsky) ; 4, P. blanquillensis (Stiasny); 5, P. oppositipinna
parvispiculata Bielschowsky; 6, P. peruana (Stiasny); 7, P. bipinnata (Verrill).
Pseudopterogorgia acerosa (Pallas);
396
convex side of the sclerites as blunt, rounded
ridges.
Distribution—Four species and one _ sub-
species in the East Indies, Philippine Islands
and Australia; two, possibly three, in the trop-
ical western Atlantic.
Subgenus Antillogorgia Bayer, 1951
Diagnosis—Transverse girdles entirely sup-
pressed on the convex side of the scaphoids,
which may be completely smooth or somewhat
prickly.
Distribution—Nine species in the tropical
western Atlantic.
REFERENCES
Bayer, FrepericK M. A revision of the nomencla-
ture of the Gorgonudae (Coelenterata: Octo-
corallia), with an illustrated key to the genera.
Journ. Washington. Acad. Sci. 41(3): 91-102,
14 figs. 1951.
Zoogeography and evolution in the octo-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
corallian family Gorgonudae. Bull. Mar. Sci.
Gulf and Caribbean 3(2): 100-119, 5 figs. 1953.
EMRENBERG, C. G. Beitrage zur physiologischen
Kenntniss der Corallenthiere wm allgemeien,
und besonders des rothen Meeres, nebst einem
Versuche zur physiologischen Systematik der-
selben. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1832 (pt. 1):
225-380. 1834.
KUKENTHAL, WiLLy. Gorgonaria. Wiss. Ergebn.
deutschen Tiefsee-Exped. 13(2): 1-946, 318
figs., pls. 30-89. 1919.
. Gorgonaria. Das Tierreich 47: xxvill +
478 pp, 209 figs. Berlin, 1924.
Pauuas, Peter Simon. Elenchus zoophytorum: xvi
+ 28 + 451 pp. Hagae-Comitum, 1766.
Riptey, Stuart O. Alcyonaria. Rep. Zool. Coll.
H. M.S. Alert: 327-365, pls. 36-88. 1884.
—. Report on the alcyonud and gorgonud
Alcyonaria of the Merguz Archipelago, col-
lected for the trustees of the Indian Museum,
Calcutta, by Dr. John Anderson, F.R.S. Journ.
Linn. Soc. London, Zool. 21: 223-247, pls.
17-18. 1888.
Stiasny, Gustav. Alcyonides et gorgonides des
collections du Muséum National d’Histoire
Naturelle. Mém. Mus. Nat. Hist. Nat. Paris,
nouv. sér., Zool., 3(1): 1-80, pls. 1-22. 1951.
——
HITCH-HIKERS OF THE SEA
There are sea hitch-hikers.
This group of curious fishes—the remoras, or
disk-fishes, which ride about attached to other
marine animals by disks that act lke suction
cups—is being subjected to a specialized study
by Dr. E. A. Lachner, associate curator of fishes
of the Smithsonian Institution. These remoras,
tropical and semitropical and found around the
world, have been the subject of much legendry
throughout history. In early 16th-century wood-
cut maps they were pictured as “ship stoppers,”
with grotesque groups of four or five attached
to the hulls of ships and holding them motion-
less. They were considered responsible for the so-
called dead calms sometimes encountered by
sailing ships. Even now their ways of life and the
evolution of their curious suction disks are little
understood. Dr. Lachner is asking fishermen and
others who may encounter them to send him as
many details as possible—the hitch-hiker itself
and a photograph or description of the species
of animal to which it is attached. He is making
an exhaustive search of literature for as many
accounts, anecdotal and otherwise, as possible.
The remoras become hitch-hikers when but
very tiny creatures. At this size they are some-
times referred to as “louse fishes,” perhaps be-
cause they resemble lice in their habit of creep-
ing into the gill chambers of such fishes as the
barracuda, the manta ray, or the sailfish. Some
remoras reach a length of 3 feet and ride about
on giant sharks, sea bass, and other large hosts.
Others appear to be quite selective in their choice
of transportation. Dr. Lachner is especially in-
terested in this aspect of their life. One remora
is found only on marine mammals, as whales and
porpoises. Another species, for example, will ride
only on the swordfish, the sailfish, or the marlin.
So far as known the remoras do not injure
their probably unwitting hosts. Their only pur-
pose seems to be to get rides, although when the
whole story is known this may turn out to be a
much more complex procedure, Dr. Lachner be-
heves. Some authors think they may render a
service by feeding on minute organisms that in-
fest the hosts. It is likely, he believes, that the
hitch-hiker rides to localities which are their own
as well as their hosts’ feeding or breeding
grounds.
The young have clusters of exceptionally large,
hooked, and backward-directed teeth on the
lower jaw. These may be used to secure their
holds on their hosts before the suction cup be-
comes fully developed. The suction disk is an
DECEMBER 1958 VOICES
evolutionary development of the spiny dorsal
fin, behind the head. It is very large in compari-
son with the size of the fish, and in one species
its length is nearly half that of the body length.
When the remora is about half an inch long the
disk is behind the head, weak and nonfunctional.
As body growth continues, the disk develops
powerful muscles and also actually assumes a
forward position over the head.
Different species can be distinguished by the
structure of these disks, which are provided with
numerous lamella or folds, powerful muscles, and
OF THE STARS
397
spiny denticles to aid in clinging to the host. The
species also differ in the size and development
of the fins, in having different dentitions, in char-
acteristic numbers of vertebrae, and in their body
coloration. The remoras, Dr. Lachner points out,
apparently are parasitic only in their hitch-
hiking. They never have lost their own ability
as rapid swimmers in pursuit of their prey—
but it is easier to ride than swim. Some species,
he says, such as the whale suckerfish, are very
rare and have been reported only a few times in
American waters.
ee
VOICES OF THE STARS
The stars seem to have voices. These consti-
tute an important phenomenon of the new radio
astronomy which is producing a strikingly dif-
ferent picture of the heavens. The so-called
“thermal noises,” which differ markedly from
source to source, are described by Dr. Gerald
S. Hawkins, director of Boston University Ob-
servatory, in a report recently published by the
Smithsonian Institution. Says Dr. Hawkins:
“The sun and local galaxy can be heard as a
gentle hiss,” the galactic noise remains steady
but the storms on the sun swell and fade many
times in the course of an hour. Jupiter is the
performer that really dominates the air. When
heard over a high-fidelity system, its roars and
rumbles almost convince one that the Romans
were right in their ideas about the gods.”
The signals tell us about various heavenly
bodies, for the most part invisible in the most
powerful telescopes. Much also is learned about
clearly visible objects—such, for example, as
the sun. At wavelengths measured in centimeters,
Dr. Hawkins says, the sun looks very much the
same as it does to the eye, except that the steady
light now is unaffected by cloud, rain, or fog.
“At wavelengths of 20 centimeters, the sun ceases
to be uniformly bright but develops a ringlike
halo. Viewed with radio eyes it would appear as
a brilliant circle with a dusky center. This is
caused by the temperature inversion in the
corona [the white halo seen around the sun at
times of total eclipse whose temperature 1s many
times greater than that of the solar surface]
where the temperature increases as we move out
from the sun. Looking at the center we see the
cooler layers below, and looking at the limb we
see the hotter layers edge-on. In addition to the
limb brightening, star-like points appear on the
disc of the sun.... It has been shown that these
points occur near the visual sunspots, so at 20
centimeters the radio astronomer has a com-
pletely reversed image, a dark sun with bright
sunspots.”
Three types of major radio disturbances, the
report points out, are recognized as emanating
from the sun. These are “noise storms, outbursts,
and bursts. A noise storm originates in a cloud in
the corona, vertically above a sunspot. The cloud
is invisible optically, but on radio wavelengths
it shows temperatures of billions of degrees... .
During periods of sunspot activity,’ says the
report, “noise storms occur once every five days
on the average. If the sun were to behave in the
visible spectrum as it does at radio wavelengths
the world would have been burnt to a cinder
long ago. “One of the most spectacular phe-
nomena is the noise outburst which occurs after
a solar flare. The flare is usually accompanied by
an upward surge of hot gas which leaves the
chromosphere with a velocity of about 100 kilo-
meters per second and then falls back again into
the sun. An intense radio source, associated with
the surge, moves outward with a velocity of the
order of 2,000 kilometers per second. This moye-
ment has been followed in a number of surges...
and there is evidence that the radio source does
not fall back again but leaves the sun completely
as a corpuscular stream of electrons and positive
ions. As the stream forces its way through the
ionized layers in the corona it is able to emit
radiation of mereasing wavelength.... After a
time lapse of about 24 hours the corpuscular
stream reaches the earth and excites the atmos-
phere to make it glow with the beautiful colors
and forms of the aurora.”
398
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, NO. 12
ZOOLOGY .—A new cyclopoid copepod, Hemicyclops visendus, associated with
Upogebia in Madagascar. ARTHUR G. Humss, Roar F. Cressry, and Ricx-
ARD U. Gooprne,! Boston University.
(Received November 11, 1958)
The specimens of the new clausidiid
copepod described below were obtained by
washing in 5 percent alcohol in filtered sea
water more than 100 mud shrimps dug from
their burrows in hard, intertidal mud at
Nossi-Bé, Madagascar. We are indebted to
Dr. Fenner A. Chace, Jr., for the identifica-
tion of the shrimps as Upogebia (Upogebia)
sp. (Crustacea, Anomura). Specimens of
these have been deposited in the United
States National Museum. We also wish to
thank Dr. Jan H. Stock, who has allowed us
to include certain unpublished material.
The field work was made possible by a
John Simon Guggenheim Memorial Foun-
dation Fellowship awarded the first author.
Subsequent laboratory study has been aided
by a grant from the National Science Foun-
dation.
All figures were drawn with the aid of a
camera lucida. The letters after each figure
refer to the scale at which the figure was
drawn.
Hemicyclops Boeck, 1873
Hemicyclops visendus, n. sp.
Specimens studied—37 females, 17 males,
and several immature specimens washed from
the body surface of Upogebia (Upogebia) sp.
at Pointe a la Fievre, Nossi-Bé, Madagascar,
June 13, 1955. Holotype female, allotype, and
13 paratypes (10 females and 3 males) depos-
ited in the Institut de Recherche Scientifique de
Madagascar at Tananarive, the same number
of paratypes in the United States National
Museum, and the remaining paratypes in the
authors’ collection.
Female—Body length 1.87 mm (1.82-1.96
mm), width 0.74 mm (0.74-0.77 mm), based
on 10 specimens. Anterior part of the body,
including the fifth pedigerous segment, about
1.3 times longer than the posterior part, in-
cluding the genital segment, abdomen, and cau-
dal rami (Fig. 1). Terga of the second, third,
S Permanent address: Zoology Department, Uni-
versity of Washington, Seattle.
and fourth pedigerous segments distinct with
subacute posterolateral angles. First pedigerous
segment fused with the head region, and the
fifth narrow and not produced posterolaterally.
Genital segment (Fig. 2) elongate, 360 x 266 un,
with a pair of long, low dorsolateral ridges and
an indistinct transverse anterior furrow on its
ventral surface, and having a striated, mem-
branous posterior border. Egg sac attachments
located on the extreme anterior corners. Ab-
domen (Fig. 2) 3-segmented, the segments 182,
120, and 90 w in length, respectively, the first
two with a striated, membranous posterior edge,
the last with a posterior ventral row of spinules
on either side of the midline. Caudal ramus
(Fig. 3) about 1.7 times longer than wide,
120 x 70 p, with the 6 setae, beginning with
the innermost and slightly dorsal seta, 126,
210, 804, 492, 98, and 64 pu, respectively. Outer-
most two setae composed of a proximal half
with the usual degree of sclerotization and a
setuliform distal half, the junction between these
as shown in Fig. 4. Inner margin of the ramus
with a row of hairs. Outer margin with a minute
hair near the base.
Egg sac (Fig. 1) somewhat variable in length,
averaging about 270 x 125 yw, reaching to the
posterior edge of the genital segment (or in
some specimens almost to the beginning of the
second abdominal segment) and containing many
small eggs.
First antenna (Fig. 5) with 7 podomeres,
their lengths being 57, 82, 61, 108, 44, 52, and
51 yw, respectively. An aesthetask on each of
the last three podomeres. Certain setae with
long, erect lateral hairs on the second, fifth,
sixth, and seventh podomeres as shown in the
figure. Very short lateral hairs on many of the
remaining setae. Second antenna (Fig. 6) with
4 podomeres, the first elongate with groups of
spinules and a long plumose seta on its inner
distal angle; the second somewhat shorter with
a group of slender spinules on its inner edge
and a finely barbed seta on its inner distal
angle; the third with a double row of long
spinules on its inner edge and a row of small
spinules along its slightly expanded outer edge,
DECEMBER 1958 HUMES, ET AL.: NEW CYCLOPOID COPEPOD 399
Ne
Wn
\ NSS :
SS
ZZ:
SCALE A O.5MM
SC/ALIE 3} O.5IviM
SCALE: -G- @a ll MIM
Figs. 1-7.—Hemicyclops visendus, n. sp., female: 1, Dorsal view (A); 2, genital segment and abdomen,
ventral (B); 3, caudal ramus, ventral (C); 4, detail of midregion of next to outermost seta of caudal
ramus (D); 5, first antenna (E); 6, second antenna (E); 7, labrum, paragnaths, and labium bordering
the oral region, ventral (C).
400
the inner distal angle of the podomere extended
and bearing a small seta with a setuliform distal
half, a prominent seta having its basal two-
thirds armed with a row of 8 long spmules and
its distal third filamentous and finely barbed,
and 2 subterminal setae; the fourth podomere
nearly quadrangular, offset on the third, bear-
ing on its outer surface 2 comb-rows of spinules,
and having 7 setae, 2 subterminal on the outer
edge of the podomere and 5 terminal, 4 of
these being linear, the fifth arising separately
and having long lateral barbules.
Labrum (Fig. 7) with its posterior margin
straight and composed of a median piece with
2 rows of teeth one above the other and a pair
of lateral areas also with 2 rows of teeth. Other
teeth and spinules as in the figure. Labium
(Fig. 7) a broad area bearing 2 rows of teeth
and an arcuate row of spines, all directed for-
ward toward the mouth region. Between the
labrum and the labium a bilobed area covered
with very fine hairs. On each side just behind
the paragnaths a triangular raised area also with
fine hairs.
Mandible (Fig. 8) with a strongly sclerotized,
elongate base bearing terminally a strongly
sclerotized piece, a weaker spinulose blade havy-
ing a row of toothlike spines on one side and
a row of spinules on the other, and 2 barbed
setae. Paragnath (Fig. 7) 78 x 38 yp, situated
close to the mandible and consisting of an ob-
long ridge covered with hairs, bearing the re-
lation to the labrum and the labium as shown
in the figure.
First maxilla (Fig. 9) with 2 distal lobes,
one with 5 setae (4 of them with strong lateral
spinules), the other lobe with a stout spine
provided with 2 rows of spinules, and with
2 setae. A rounded projection on the inner side
of the base of the appendage. Small spinules as
shown in the figure.
Second maxilla (Fig. 10) composed of 2
podomeres, the first large and having at its
inner distal angle 2 large, coarsely spinulose
setae, one with its broadened base bearing an
accessory seta. The second podomere smaller,
not inflated, with its distal end forming a strong
spine (without an articulation) bearing on its
outer edge 2 strong accessory spines and
distally a row of 3 or 4 smaller spines. Near
the base of this large spine a seta with a
broad, stalklike basal half and a slender, re-
curved distal half, the junction between the
two halves showing 3. spinules. Subtermin-
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 48, No. 12
ally on the podomere an outer seta with lateral
hairs and a stout inner spine with an apparently
bifid tip and having a double row of long
spinules along the middle of its outer edge.
Maxilliped (Fig. 11) with 4 podomeres, the
first two elongate and both bearing the usual
2 setae, the last 2 podomeres very short.
Third podomere with a single outer seta. Last
podomere with a strong recurved inner spine
having 4 or 5 slender spinules along its concave
edge, a shorter spine with an inner row of
spinules on its inner edge, and with an acces-
sory seta arising on its base, and 2 long setae
and 3 spinules as shown in the figure.
Swimming legs with trimerous rami. Con-
necting piece between the first pair of legs with
a row of long hairs, but in legs 2-4 a double
row of spinules in this position. Armature of
the rami of legs 1-4 as follows: .
leg 1 leg 2 leg 3 leg 4
exp end exp end exp end exp end
lst podomere TOMO i180) = (1 TSO) OE 120° O71
2d podomere ilgil (eal Let O32 11s O22 Tet 032
3d podomere 8 6 9 6 9 6 8 5
Leg 1 (Fig. 12) with an inner spine on the
basipodite. First three spines of the exopodite
with a terminal setule (Fig. 13). Leg 2 (Fig.
14) with the basipodite extended laterad (a
condition seen also in legs 3 and 4) and with
a row of hairs on its inner margin instead of a
spine. Leg 3 (Fig. 15) similar to leg 2. Leg 4
(Fig. 16) having the last podomere of the
endopodite provided with three fringed spines,
a seta half plumose and half fringed, and a
plumose seta. The base of the next to outer-
most seta on the last exopodite podomere of
legs 2-4 with 2-4 long inner hairs. Other or-
namentation of the legs as shown in the figures.
Leg 5 (Fig. 17) with 2 podomeres, the first
roughly quadrangular, about 100 ,» long, with
2 groups of long spinules and an outer seta
125 pw long. Second podomere oval, 151 x 98
pw, having the ratio of 1.54:1, with 2 fringed
spines inserted on the outer edge of the distal
half, 63 and 54 » long respectively, a naked
seta 97 w long arising from a small terminal
papilla, and an inner fringed spine 67 , long.
Rows of spinules along the outer and inner
edges of the podomere and near the bases of
the outer spines as indicated in the figure.
Leg 6 absent.
Color in life under magnification in reflected
light showing red speckling on the cephalo-
thorax, eye red, egg sacs bright red.
DECEMBER 1958 HUMES, ET AL.: NEW CYCLOPOID COPEPOD 401
9 |
|
SCALE D O.OS5MM
Figs. 8-14.—Hemicyclops visendus, n. sp., female: 8, Mandible (F); 9, first maxilla (C); 10, seeond
maxilla (C); 11, maxilliped (E); 12, leg 1 (G); 18, outer spine of exopodite of leg 1 (D); 14, leg 2 (G).
402
Male—Slightly larger than the female. Body
length 2.06 mm (1.92-2.27 mm), width 0.77
mm (0.70-0.84 mm), based on 10 specimens.
Anterior part of the body, including the fifth
pedigerous segment, shorter in relation to the
posterior part (Fig. 18). Genital segment (Fig.
19) wider than long, 252 x 370 p, with the
sixth legs located on the posterior corners.
Spermatophores (Fig. 20) oval, 112 x 92 un,
with a short neck. Abdomen (Fig. 19) 4-seg-
mented, the segments 215, 201, 154, and 100 p
long respectively. Caudal ramus as in the fe-
male.
First antenna, second antenna, mandible,
paragnath, and first maxilla like those of the
female. Labrum (Fig. 21) with its posterior
edge toothed as in the figure. Labium (Fig. 22)
with a few blunt teeth on its anterior border
and an irregular transverse row of spinules
posteriorly. Region between the labrum and
the labium similar to that in the female. Second
maxilla (Fig. 23) with the stout imner spine
on the second podomere of the female here
replaced by a strongly sclerotized, broad hook
lacking an articulation with the podomere. Out-
ermost spine with its lateral spinules more
conspicuous than in the female. Maxilliped (Fig.
24) with a single seta on the first podomere,
the second podomere large with its inner side
inflated and bearing rows of spimules and 2
setae, the third podomere very short and un-
armed, and the last podomere consisting of a
slender recurved claw 257 » long bearing near
its inner base a slender setiform process (per-
haps homologous to the mnermost spine in
the female maxilliped), a seta, and a very
small spinule, as shown in the figure.
All swimming legs like those of the female,
except for the absence of the inner basipodite
spine on leg 1.
Leg 5 (Fig. 25) with the first podomere
fused with the thoracic segment and bearing
an outer seta 100 » long and a row of stout
spinules. Second podomere elongate rather than
oval as in the female, 243 x 100 y, the three
spines and the seta being 67, 84, 98, and 81 p
in length, respectively, from outer to inner.
Outer edge of the podomere near the articula-
tions of the outer two spines prolonged to form
spinelike processes. Other armature as in the
figure.
Leg 6 (Fig. 26) a strong spine 68 p», long.
Color similar to that of the female.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
(The specific name is derived from visendus,
worth seeing.)
Remarks—Hemicyclops visendus Humes,
Cressey, and Gooding may be distinguished
from other species in the genus chiefly by the
form of the second podomere of the fifth legs,
the length of the caudal rami, and the shape
of the third and fourth podomeres of the
second antenna. In H. purpureus Boeck, 1873,
the inner distal angle of the third podomere
of the second antenna is not produced and the
form of the second podomere of the fifth leg
of the female is less distinctly oval (as shown
in the figures of Sars, 1917). In H. adhaerens
(Williams, 1907) and in two new species to be
described by Gooding (in press), one from the
body surface and burrows of Arenicola, the
other from washings and burrows of Calli-
anassa, the last podomere of the second an-
tenna is more than 2 times longer than wide
and the second podomere of the fifth leg of
the female is elongate (more than 2 times
longer than wide). H. elongatus Wilson, 1937,
has an elongate second podomere in the fifth
leg of the female and the caudal ramus is at
least 4 times longer than wide. In H. thysanotus
Wilson, 1935, the second podomere of the fifth
leg is much elongated and the caudal ramus
is more than 3% times longer than wide.
Following the work of Gooding (in press),
H. callianassae Wilson, 1935, and H. pugettensis
Light and Hartman, 1937, are considered as
synonyms of H. thysanotus Wilson, 1935, and
H. americanus Wilson, 1932, is a synonym of
H. adhaerens (Williams, 1907). Having ex-
amined specimens of H. littoralis (T. Scott,
1892), we support Sars’s synonymy of this
species with H. purpureus Boeck, 1873. These
four species therefore need not be compared
here. Hersiliodes livingstoni T. Scott, 1894,
doubtfully attributed to Hemicyclops by Boc-
quet and Stock (1957) appears to us to belong
to Hersiliodes rather than to Boeck’s genus.
In #H. indicus Sewell, 1949, H. australis
Nicholls, 1944, H. leggii (Thompson and Scott,
1903), and H. tamilensis (Thompson and Scott,
1903) the caudal ramus is subquadrate, about
as long as wide. Both leggit and australis have
2 setae (instead of one as in wisendus) on the
first podomere of the male maxilliped and
indicus lacks the projection of the third pod-
omere of the second antenna. In H. aberdo-
nensis (T. Scott and A. Scott, 1892) the caudal
DECEMBER 1958 HUMES, ET AL.: NEW CYCLOPOID COPEPOD 40;
20
SCALE E O.2MM
SCALE F O.IMM
Fies. 15-17.—Hemicyclops visendus, n. sp., female: 15, Leg 3 (G); 16, leg 4 (G); 17, leg 5 (C).
Fias. 18-20.—Same, male: 18, Dorsal view (A); 19, genital segment and abdomen, dorsal
(B); 20, spermatophore (F).
A404. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
SCALE G O.2MM
=
=
wo
S
oO
ac
uJ
zi
L
O
op)
Fies. 21-26.—Hemicyclops visendus, n. sp., male: 21, Labrum, ventral (C); 22, labium and adjacent
oral region (without paragnaths), ventral (C); 23, second maxilla (C); 24, maxilliped (E); 25, leg 5 (E);
26, leg 6, ventral (H).
Pe ee ee oie an
DECEMBER 1958
ramus is about 3 times longer than wide, there
are 2 setae on the first podomere of the male
maxilliped, and the third and fourth podomeres
of the second antenna are of about equal
length and short. In H. thompson (Canu, 1888)
the second podomere of the fifth leg of the
female is somewhat elongate, the caudal ramus
is about 2 times longer than wide, and the
second podomere of the second antenna bears
a marginal row of spinules. H. canuensis Bourne,
1890, is, as suggested by Canu (1892, p. 254),
probably a synonym of thompsoni, and need
not be considered here.
In H. bdcescw (Serban, 1956) Stock, in
press, the second podomere of the fifth leg of
the female is 2.27 times longer than wide and
the caudal ramus is about 2 times longer than
wide. In H. dilatatus Shen and Bai, 1956, no
oviducal openings or egg sacs were described
on the single specimen known. There may,
therefore, be some question whether the speci-
men is a mature female or a late copepodid.
Assuming it to be mature, it differs from
visendus in that the caudal ramus is shorter
than the anal segment, the genital segment is
subquadrate, the inner basipodite spine on leg
1 is long (about as long as the first 2 endop-
odite podomeres together), and the second
podomere of leg 5 is elongate rather than oval.
LITERATURE CITED
BocquEt, C., anp Stock, J. H. Copépodes para-
sites dinvertébrés des cétes de France. I. Sur
deux genres de la famille des Clausididae,
commensaux de mollusques: Hersiliodes Canu
et Conchyliurus nov. gen. Proc. Akad. We-
tensch. Amsterdam, ser.C, 60: 212-222. 1957.
Borecx, A. Nye Slaegter og Arter af Saltvands-
Copepoder. Forh. Vidensk. Selsk. 1872: 35-60.
1873.
Bourne, G. C. Report on the surface collections
made by Mr. W. T. Grenfell in the North Sea
and west of Scotland. Journ. Marine Biol.
Assoc. United Kingdom I(n:s.): 376-381. 1890.
Canu, EH. Les copépodes marins du Boulonnais.
II. Les Hersiludae, famille nouvelle de copé-
podes commensaux. Bull. Sci. France et
Belgique 19: 402-432. 1888.
Les copépodes du Boulonnais. Morpho-
logie, embryologie, taxonomie. Trav. Lab. Zool.
Maritime Wimereux-Ambleteuse 6: 1-354.
1892.
Goopinc, R. U. North and South American cope-
pods belonging to the genus Hemicyclops. Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus. (in press).
HUMES, ET AL.: NEW CYCLOPOID COPEPOD
405
Licut, 8. F., anp Harrman, O. A review of the
genera Clausidium Kossmann and Hemicyclops
Boeck (Copepoda, Cyclopoida) with the de-
scription of a new species from the northeast
Pacific. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 41: 173-
188. 1937.
Nicuouts, A. G. Littoral Copepoda from South
Australa (II) Calanoida, Cyclopoida, Noto-
delphyoida, Monstrilloida and Caligoida. Rec.
South Austral. Mus. 8: 1-62. 1944.
Sars, G.O. An account of the Crustacea of Nor-
way with short descriptions and figures of all
the species. VI. Copepoda Cyclopoida, parts
AT Gye) IKGUE Clausididae, Lichomolgidae
are) WAIN 72, 19172
Scott, T. Additions to the fauna of the Firth of
Forth. Part IV. 10th Ann. Rep. Fish. Board
Scotland, pt. 3: 244-272. 1892.
Report on Entomostraca from the Gulf of
Guinea, collected by John Rattray, B. Sc.
Trans. Linn. Soc. London, ser. Zz, LOO Os 1
161. 1894.
Scott, T., anv Scorr, A. On new and rare Crus-
tacea from the east coast of Scotland. Ann.
Scottish Nat. Hist. 1892: 149-156. 1892.
SERBAN, M. Pontocyclops bacescui n. Gat SP:
(Crustacea Copepoda), ein neuer Cyclopide
vom schwarzen Meere. Izdanija (SABO], 3A
PUBAPCTBO HA HP MAHKEJIOHWIIA) 1:
169-184. 1956.
SEWELL, R. B. S. The littoral and semi-parasitic
Cyclopoida, the Monstrilloida and Noto-
delphoida. John Murray Exped. 1933-34, Sci.
Reps. 9: 17-199. 1949.
SHEN, C. J., anD Bat, S.O. The marine Copepoda
from the spawning ground of Pneumatophorus
japonicus (Houttuyn) off Chefoo, China. Acta
Zool. Sinica 8: 177-234. 1956.
Stock, J.H. Copepods associated with Neapolitan
mvertebrates. Pubbl. Staz. Zool. Napoli (in
press).
THompson, I. C., anp Scorr, A. Report on the
Copepoda collected by Professor Herdman. ai
Ceylon, in 1902. Report to the Government of
Ceylon on the Pearl Oyster Fisheries of the
Gulf of Manaar. Supplementary Rep. no. 7:
227-307. London, 1903.
Witurams, L. W. List of the Rhode Island Cope-
poda, Phyllopoda, and Ostracoda with new
species of Copepoda. 37th Ann. Rep. Com-
missioners of Inland Fisheries of Rhode Island.
special paper no. 30: 69-79. 1907.
Witson, C.B. The copepod crustaceans of Chesa-
peake Bay. Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus. 80: 1-54.
1982.
. Parasitic copepods from the Pacific coast.
Amer. Midl. Nat. 16: 776-791. 1935.
Two new semi-parasitic copepods from the
Peruvian coast. Parasitology 29: 206-211. 1937.
406
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
AUTOMATIC READER FOR HIGH-PRECISION BALANCES
The National Bureau of Standards has de-
veloped a photoelectric device that automatically
and continuously indicates the position of the
swinging beam of a high-precision balance. At
the same time it provides a greatly mcreased
reading sensitivity, the minimum readable dis-
placement on the scale being 0.0001 inch as com-
pared with 0.004 inch for the conventional visual
method.
Design and construction of the apparatus are
due primarily to L. B. Macurdy and H. A. Bow-
man. Consultation was provided by M. L.
Greenough and T. R. Young, also of the Bureau
staff; and the instrument was fabricated largely
in the Bureau’s instrument shop.
PRIMARILY A RESEARCH TOOL
The device was developed primarily as a re-
search tool for obtaining a better understanding
of balance errors; data from such studies are
now being accumulated and will be used in work-
ing out improved balance designs. The photo-
electric reader can provide data on the motion
of the balance beam (1.e., of the horizontal arm
from which the balance pans are suspended) in
two forms: (1) As a voltage whose magnitude
represents the instantaneous position of the
beam; or (2) as numerical data that represent
turning points (extremes of the swing), from
which masses may be calculated. A plot of the
output voltage on a recorder forms a graph that
ean be used in evaluating the dynamic charac-
teristics of the oscillating structure. The turning
points are read from a dial that ordinarily indi-
cates the instantaneous position of the beam,
but which remains stationary for a brief interval
after each turning point is reached.
Though primarily a research tool, the photo-
electric device also contributes in a more direct
way to reduce the errors in precision mass
measurements. Major errors in such measure-
ments are due to small changes in temperature
and humidity that occur during the course of
the experiment. Since the automatic reader
makes it possible to increase the speed of bal-
ance operations by from 5 to 10 times, it shortens
the interval during which these changes in
ambient conditions can act. Faster operation also
increases the “on scale” range of the balance;
and this permits the use of larger—and hence
more accurate—sensitivity weights. The disad-
vantage of high-speed operation is that it ordi-
narily results in losses of readability and de-
flection sensitivity. However, the high reading
sensitivity of the present instrument more than
compensates for these losses.
BASIC DESIGN OF READER
The basic design of the reader is fairly
straightforward. A narrow beam of light is sent
towards the balance and is reflected by a mirror
on the balance beam back to the slit at the
front of a photocell. Besides swinging with the
motion of the balance, the ight beam has a small
60-c/s vibration of its own (amplitude about
1 minute of arc). This facilitates the design of a
servo loop to maintain the photocell sht centered
on the light beam. When light beam and slit are
not in line, an “error signal” is generated, and
this controls a two-phase motor that turns the
lead screw on which the photocell is mounted.
By suitable design and adjustment of the com-
ponents, the photocell is made to follow the
swinging light beam to within about 0.0002 inch,
corresponding to 4 X 10° degree in the angular
position of the balance arm.
The position of the balance beam is thus repre-
sented by the angle turned through by the lead
screw. The latter drives a dial which has a
single turn of free play so that when the direc-
tion of the lead screw reverses (1.e., at a turning
point) the dial remains motionless for one revolu-
tion of the screw. To obtain a voltage propor-
tional to the position of the balance beam, the
lead screw is mechanically coupled to the pick-
off arm of a precision potentiometer. .
BACKGROUND NOISE
Zero stability of the apparatus, determined
from observations on a light beam reflected from
an arrested (and therefore presumably motion-
less) balance, is about 2 microinches per min-
ute. This drift changes direction roughly twice
daily, and may therefore be associated with some
diurnal motion of the building or piers. There
are occasional bursts of “noise” of about
+0.0003 inch, some of which have been corre-
lated with starting and stopping of building ele-
DECEMBER 1958
vators. However, the total effect of all noise is not
considered serious enough to warrant additional
noise studies at this time.
The reader is currently being used to evaluate
mechanical features that are under consideration
for inclusion in a short-period high-precision
automatic weighing system for which preliminary
OBITUARY
407
studies are under way. Already a number of use-
ful results have been obtained. In one study, for
example, the device has been used to show the
effects of errors associated with a certain type of
arrestment mechanism, while another has shown
the reloading error in a balance of one design
when operated without arrestment.
Caisia Maximobna Stadnichenko
Taisia Maximovna Stadnichenko, of the U. 8.
Geological Survey, died on November 26, 1958,
after a short heart ailment. Miss Stadnichenko
was born in Taganash, Crimea, Russia, on Octo-
ber 9, 1894, and was graduated from the Vladi-
vostok Gymnasium in 1912 and from the Uni-
versity of Petrograd in 1917. She began her
scientific career in 1917 as a chemist with the
Russian Geological Survey expedition to the Is-
land of Sakhalin, off the east coast of Siberia.
She came to the United States after World
War I as an interpreter for the Russian Peace
Mission and a representative to the Washington
Disarmament Conference. For three years—
1922-1925—she was an instructor in chemistry
at Vassar College, and throughout her career she
never lost her enthusiasm for helping young
scientists along their professional way. From
1925 to 1931 she was a research assistant of the
National Research Council and American Pe-
troleum Institute.
In 1931 Miss Stadnichenko became a natu-
ralized citizen and at that time joined the staff
of the U. 8. Geological Survey to carry on re-
search relating to the origin and constitution of
coal and carbonaceous shales in association with
the late Dr. David White. In this study she
achieved a position as one of the foremost in-
vestigators of the geochemistry of coal. During
and soon after World War II Miss Stadnich-
enko’s work was directed toward the recovery of
germanium from coal ash, a minor element that
was of tremendous importance at that time in
the manufacture of transistors. The results of
this investigation were published in U. S. Geo-
logical Survey Circular 272. At the time of her
death she was in charge of an inv estigation of
the distribution of minor elements in American
coals; manuscripts on beryllium and molyb-
Henin content of American coals and on the geo-
chemistry of minor elements of the coals of the
Northern Great Plains, written in collaboration
with Peter Zubovic and N. B. Sheffey, are await-
ing publication.
ANNA JESPERSEN
408
Ralph B.
Ralph B. Stewart died suddenly on November
29, 1958, at the age of 57 years.
Born June 29, 1901, in Pennsylvania, he at-
tended the University of Washington (BS.,
1923), the University of California (graduate
work, 1924-26), and the Johns Hopkins Univer-
sity (Ph.D., 1928). With the exception of brief
tours of teaching at Bryn Mawr College and
Stanford University, he spent his professional
life on the U. S. Geological Survey as geologist
and paleontologist, much of it in the Washington
area.
While he was still a graduate student, he wrote
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 48, No. 12
Stewart
two monumental memoirs, published mm 1927 and
1930, on California Cretaceous and Tertiary mol-
lusks. He was especially interested in early
Tertiary mollusks. He quickly mastered, how-
ever, any field in which he became interested, as
shown by his penetrating observations and anal-
ysis of the fault pattern in the North Dome of
the Kettleman Hills (one of California’s major
oilfields), published in 1941. His career was later
shadowed by progressively declining health. He
is survived by his wife, Irene Stewart, of New
Haven, Conn.
INDEX TO VOLUME 48
An asterisk (*) denotes the abstract of a paper presented before the Academy or an affiliated society
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Geological Society of Washington. 132.
Washington Academy of Sciences. 332.
AUTHOR INDEX
ADLER, IstpoRE. * Some applications of X-ray
fluorescent spectroscopy to mineralogical
problems. 135.
ALLARD, Howarp F., and AuuLarpD, Harry A.
Venomous moths and butterflies. 18.
Auston, A. H.G. New or noteworthy ferns from
Colombia and Ecuador. 230.
ANDREASEN, G. E., and Zierz, Istpore. * Limit-
ing parameters in the magnetic interpretation
of a geologic structure. 135.
BaiLey, L. F. See Carpmr, D. S. 148.
Bau, Douauas, and W1nmER, A.S. * Brandywine
Structure, and underground natural gas stor-
age for Washington, D. C. 133.
BarRNES, Harvey. * Geology of a Philippine coal
field. 138.
BasTrRON, Harry. See Ropinson, W. O. 140.
BateMAN, P. C. * Characteristics of some east-
ern Sierra Nevada granites. 132.
Bates, R.G. See Guiuuou, R. B. 139.
Bayer, FRepERIcK M. Further remarks on the
geographical distribution of Gorgoniidae. 394.
BuaKke,S.F. Twospecies of Hibiscus from Texas.
Zi
BRIDGERS, BERNARD T. Techniques involving the
sowing of spores of the Filicinae for artificial
culture. 158.
BRONNIMANN, Paut, and Brown, Noe K., Jr.
Hedbergella, a new name for a Cretaceous
planktonic foraminiferal genus. 15.
Brown, Nort K., Jr. See BRONNIMANN, PAUL.
15.
Brown, Rotanp W. New occurrences of the fos-
sil quillworts called Isoetites. 358.
Burks, B. D. A recharacterization of the genus
Coelopencyrtus, with descriptions of two new
species (Hymenoptera: Encyrtidae). 22.
CAMPAIGNE, Howarp. A new characterization of
group. 276.
CARpHR}) DPD. S., and Bamery, lL. F. * Seismic
wave travel times from nuclear explosions.
148.
Casu, Enirn K. Some new or rare Discomycetes
from South America. 256.
CHAPMAN, Haroup C. See Drake, Caru J. 317.
CRABILL, RatpH E., Jr. A new Eulithobius,
with a key to the known American species
(Chilopoda: Lithobiidae). 260.
Cressry, Roger F. See Humes, Artuur G. 398.
Crist, Raymonp E. Pile-dwellers and coconut
culture in the Laguna de Sinamaica, Vene-
zuela. 380.
Dicks, R. H. Gravitation an enigma. 213.
Doveuass, R. C. * Significance and distribution
of Orbitolina. 136.
Diu e cen J. and CHAPMAN, HAROLD ‘C.
Neotropical Hebridae, including a catalogue
of the American species (Hemiptera). 317.
FRIEDMAN, IrvING, and Smitu, R. L. * The
origin of water in some voleanic glasses. 139.
Goopine, RicHarp U. See Humes, Artuur G.
398.
GREENSTONE, ReYNOLD. Temperatures in heated
finite slabs with fourth-power loss. 341.
GUILLOU, R. B., and Barres, R. G. * The corre-
lation of airborne radioactivity data and
aerial geology. 139.
Harpy, Jerry D., Jr. A new lizard of the genus
Leiocephalus from Cuba (Squamata: Iguani-
dae). 294.
HARTMAN, Ouca. A new nereid worm from
Warm Mineral Springs, Fla., with a review of
the genus Nicon Kinberg. 263.
Hass, W. H. * Classification and stratigraphic
range of disjunct conodonts. 141.
Hess, W. C., and SHarrran, I. P. Inhibition by
testosterone of cortisone-induced liver gly-
cogen formation. 347.
The effect of cortisone on the incor-
poration of C-14 in various tissues from 2-C-14
labeled alanine. 109.
Hosss, Horton H., Jr. Two new crayfishes of
the genus Procambarus from South Carolina.
160.
HorrMan, Ricnarp L. Appalachian Cambalidae:
Taxonomy and distribution (Diplopoda:
Spirostreptida). 90.
HoupER, PRESTON, and Stewart, T. D. A com-
plete find of filed teeth from the Cahokia
Mounds in Illinois. 349.
Humes, Artuur G. Antillesia cardisomae, un.
gen. and sp. (Copepoda: Harpacticoida) from
the gill chambers of land crabs, with obser-
vations on the related genus Cancrinola. 77.
Humes, ArtHuur G., Cressey, Roger F., and
GoopinG, RicHarp U. A new cyclopoid cope-
pod, Hemicyclops visendus, associated with
Upogebia in Madagasear. 398.
Hunter, Mattruew A. Progress in titanium re-
search. 1.
Iwal, Tamotsu. A study of the luminous organ
of the apogonid fish Szphamia_ versicolor
(Smith and Radcliffe). 267.
JACKSON, JuLIusS L. Stabilized free radicals. 181.
JONES, MerepITH L. Further notes on Sarsiella
tricostata. 238.
Sarsiella tricostata, a new ostracod from
San Francisco Bay (Myodocopa: Cypridini-
dae). 48.
Krene, Y. L. Two new genera of grasses from
China. 115.
KIMBALL, GEORGE HE.
research. 33.
KINKEL, A. R.
pines. 138.
Kocu, Lrto FRANCIS.
gian? 252.
Loomis, H. F. A new family of muillipeds on
Barro Colorado Island, Canal Zone. 235.
MANNING, RaymMonp B. See Ropins, C. RicuH-
ARD. 301.
Merap, Gites W. A new species of iniomous fish
from the Gulf of Mexico. ISS.
Three new species of archibenthic inio-
mous fishes from the western North Atlantic.
362.
Meyeruorr, H. A. * Evolution of Appalachian
drainage: a reinterpretation from geologic
evidence. 134.
A eritique of operations
* Copper deposits of the Philip-
theolo-
On scientist and
409
410
Moore, WattEeER G. On the occurrence of Strep-
tocephalus similis Baird in Mexico and the
United States. 169.
Murata, K. J. See Ropinson, W.O. 140.
Nace, R. L. * Hydrology of the Snake River
basalt. 136.
Nico., DAvID.
pods. 56.
Notes on prionodont pelecypods. 309.
Taxonomy versus stratigraphy. 113.
The pelecypod Eulora: Observations on
new localities. 153.
Trends and problems in pelecypod classi-
fication (the genus and subgenus). 285.
OutveR, H. W. * Testing isostasy in California.
141.
PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ, ALINA, and VON
Branb, THEODOR. Observations on the oxy-
gen consumption of young Australorbis glabra-
tus. 38.
Pierce, W. G. * Detachment thrusts, with spe-
cial reference to the Heart Mountain thrust,
Wyoming. 142.
PITTENDRIGH, Couin 8. A new bromeliad from
the Northern Range in Trinidad. 315.
RANDALL, JOHN E. Two new species of Anampses
from the Hawaiian Islands, with notes on
other labrid fishes of this genus. 100.
Reep, Ciype F. Contributions to the herpetol-
ogy of Maryland and Delmarva, No. 17:
Southeastern herptiles with northern limits
on coastal Maryland, Delmarva, and New
Jersey. 28.
Contributions to the herpetology of
Maryland and Delmarva, 13: Piedmont her-
petofauna on coastal Delmarva. 95. ;
RersH, Donaup J. Description of a new species
of Cossura (Annelida: Polychaeta) from the
Mississippi Delta. 53.
Roserts, Evuiotr B. Ferdinand Hassler’s gift
to America. 69.
Ropertson, E. C. * Experimental consolidation
of aragonite mud. 142.
Rosins, C. RicHarp. Garmannia zebrella, a new
gobiid fish from Trinidad, with notes on the
species of the subgenus T7zgrigobius Fowler.
192.
Rosins, C. RicHarp, and MANNING, RAYMOND
B. The status and distribution of the fishes
of the family Microdesmidae in the Western
Atlantic. 301.
Rosinson, W. O., Bastron, Harry, and Murata,
kK. J. * Biogeochemistry of the rare earth
elements with special reference to the hickory
tree. 140.
Ruspin, Meyer. * New treatment and resulting
C-14 dates from the Near East. 148.
* Radiocarbon age determination of a
Pleistocene section near Scranton, Iowa. 134.
Scurack, Roatp A. The electrostatic field and
the symmetry of snowflakes. 273.
A survey of inequivalve pelecy-
JOURNAL OF THE ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 48, No. 12
ScHwaRTz, ALBERT. Another new species of
Eleutherodactylus (Amphibia: Leptodactyli-
dae) from western Cuba. 127.
SEEGER, RaymMonp J. Scientist and theologian?
145.
Setty, L. R. The cutaneous muscles of the
Adelie penguin (Pygosceles adeliae). 387.
SHAFFRAN, I. P. See Huss, I. C. 109, 347.
SmitH, Lyman B. Notes on South American
phanerogams—I. 282.
. Notes on South
gams—IT. 310.
SmitH, R. L. See FrrepMaAN, Irvine. 139.
STASEK, CHARLES R. A new species of Allogaus-
sta (Amphipoda, Lyianassidae) found living
within the gastrovascular cavity of the sea-
anemone Anthopleura elegantissima. 119.
STewarRT, D. B. * Some feldspar problems. 135.
STEWART, T. D. See HotpEr, Preston. 349.
Stitt, JosepH W. Our scientific ‘‘nervous sys-
tem.’’ 373.
The physiology of aging—a research ap-
proach. 224.
STONE, ALAN, and TuHurMAN, ERNESTINE B.
Armigeres (Armigeres) baisasi,-a new mos-
quito from the Philippine Islands (Diptera:
Culicidae). 240.
Taussky, Otaa. A note on the group commuta-
tor of A and A*. 305.
TuHayYer, T. P. * Some relations of later Tertiary
volcanology and structure in eastern Oregon.
33a
THompson, R. C. On matrix commutators. 306.
THURMAN, DEED C., Jr., and THURMAN, ERNES-
TINE B. Two new species in the genus Arm?-
geres Theobald, 1901, from northern Thailand
(Diptera: Culicidae). 186.
THURMAN, ERNESTINE B. Revalidation of three
species of Armzgeres Theobald, 1901 (Diptera:
Culicidae). 389.
See also THURMAN, DEED C., Jr. 186.
See also STONE, ALAN. 240.
American phanero-
Titton, G. R. * Are tektites out of this world?
140.
Topp, E. L. A new species of Meropleon Dyar
from South Carolina (Lepidoptera: Noctui-
dae). 27.
VALLENTYNE, J. R. * Paleobiochemistry. 134.
VAUGHN, PETER PauL. A pelycosaur with sub-
sphenoidal teeth from the lower Permian of
Oklahoma. 44.
BRAND, THEODOR.
SZUMLEWICZ, ALINA. 38.
WIneER, A. S. See Batu, Dovuetas. 133:
YoOcHELSON, Exuis L. Some Lower Ordovician
monoplacophoran mollusks from Muisscuri. 8.
. * The Lower Ordovician gastropod Cera-
topea. 139.
ZiETZ, ISIDORE.
VON See PERLOWAGORA-
See ANDREASEN, G. E. 135.
SUBJECT INDEX
Anthropology. A complete find of filed teeth
from the Cahokia Mounds in _ Illinois.
PrEsTON Houper and T. D. Stewart. 349.
Biochemistry. Inhibition by testosterone of cor-
tisone-induced liver glycogen formation.
W.C. Hess and I. P. SHarrran. 347.
The effect of cortisone on the incorporation
of C-14 in various tissues from 2-C-14 la-
beled alanine. W. C. Hxss and I. P. Suar-
FRAN. 109.
Biogeochemistry. * Biogeochemistry of the rare
earth elements with special reference to the
hickory tree. W. O. Ropinson, Harry
Bastron, and K. J. Murata. 140.
* Paleobiochemistry. J. R. VALLENTYNE. 134.
Botany. A new bromeliad from the Northern
Range in Trinidad. Courn S. Prrrenpricu.
315.
New or noteworthy ferns from Colombia and
Eeuador. A. H. G. Auston. 230.
Notes on South American phanerogams—I.
LyMAN B. Smrru. 282.
Notes on South American phanerogams—II.
Lyman B. Smiru. 310.
Techniques involving the sowing of spores of
the Filicinae for artificial culture. BERNARD
T. BripGers. 158.
Two new genera of grasses from China. Y. L.
iKenes 15.
Two species of Hibiscus from Texas. S. F.
Buake. 277.
Entomology. A new species of Meropleon Dyar
from South Carolina (Lepidoptera: Noc-
tuudae). He i, opp. 27.
Armigeres (Armigeres) baisasi, a new mosquito
from the Philippine Islands (Diptera:
Culicidae). ALAN Stonr and ERNESTINE B.
THURMAN. 240.
A recharacterization of the genus Coelopen-
cyrtus, with descriptions of two new species
(Hymenoptera: Encyrtidae). B. D. Burks.
22
New Neotropical Hebridae, including a cata-
logue of the American species (Hemiptera).
Cart J. Drake and Haroip C, CHapman.
317.
Revalidation of three species of
Theobald, 1901 (Diptera:
NESTINE B. THurman. 389.
Two new species in the genus Armigeres
Theobald, 1901, from northern Thailand
(Diptera: Culicidae). Drrp C. THURMAN,
Jr., and Ernestine B. THurman. 186.
Venomous moths and butterflies. Howarp F.
ALLARD and Harry A. ALLARD. 18.
Ethnogeography. Pile-dwellers and coconut cul-
ture in the Laguna de Sinamaica, Venezuela.
Raymonp E. Crist. 380.
_ General science. A critique of operations research.
GrEoRGE E. KimsBa.n. 33.
Our scientific “nervous system.” JosppH W.
SMbiI. BC,
Geochemistry. * Are tektites out of this world?
G. R. Tiron. 140.
Geology. * Brandywine Structure, and under-
ground natural gas storage for Washington,
D. C. Dovetas Bau and A. 8S. Winzr. 133.
“Characteristics of some eastern Sierra
Nevada granites. P. C. Bareman. 132.
* Copper deposits of the Philippines. A. R.
KINKBEL. 138.
Armigeres
Culicidae). Er-
411
* Detachment thrusts, with special reference
to the Heart Mountain thrust, Wyoming.
W. G. Pierce. 142. ‘ i
Evolution of Appalachian drainage: a re-
interpretation from geologic evidence. H.
A. Meyernorr. 134.
Experimental consolidation of
mud. E. C. Roperrson. 142.
Geology of a Philippine coal field. HARLEY
BaRNEs. 138.
* Hydrology of the Snake River basalt. R. L.
Nace. 136.
Limiting parameters in the magnetic inter-
pretation of a geologic structure. CG. E.
ANDREASEN and IsipoRE Zrerz. 135.
New treatment and resulting C-14 dates
from the Near East. Mryer RvuBIn. 143.
Radiocarbon age determination of a Pleisto-
cene section near Scranton, Iowa. MEYER
Ruin. 134.
Some feldspar problems.
135.
Some relations of later Tertiary voleanology
and structure in eastern Oregon. T. P.
THAYER. 133.
Taxonomy versus stratigraphy. Davin Nicox.
TNS
*The correlation of airborne radioactivity
data and aerial geology. R. B. GUILLOU and
R. G. Bates. 139.
* The origin of water in some voleanic glasses.
IrvinG FriepMan and R. L. Surra. 139.
Geophysics. * Seismic wave travel times from
nuclear explosions. D. S. Carper and L. F.
Baiuey. 143.
* Testing isostasy in
Ouiver. 141.
Herpetology. A new lizard of the genus Lezocepha-
lus from Cuba (Squamata: Iguanidae).
JERRY D. Harpy, Jr. 294.
Another new species of Eleutherodactylus
(Amphibia: Leptodactylidae) from western
Cuba. ALBERT Scowartz. 127.
Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland
and Delmarva, 13: Piedmont herpetofauna
on coastal Delmarva. Ciypr F. Rreep. 95.
Contributions to the herpetology of Maryland
and Delmarva, No. 17: Southeastern herp-
tiles with northern limits on coastal Mary-
land, Delmarva, and New Jersey. Ctypr F
REED. 28.
History of science. Ferdinand Hassler’s gift to
America. Exiiotr B. Roperts. 69.
Ichthyology. A new species of iniomous fish from
the Gulf of Mexico. Gizes W. Mrap. 188.
A study of the luminous organ of the apo-
gonid fish Stphamia versicolor (Smith and
Radcliffe). Tamorsu Iwat. 267.
Garmannia zebrella, a new gobiid fish from
Trinidad, with notes on the species of the
subgenus T?grigobius Fowler. C. RicHarp
RosBins. 192.
The status and distribution of the fishes of the
family Microdesmidae in the Western At-
lantic. C. RicHarp Rosins and RaymMonp
B. Mannine. 301.
Two new species of Anampses from the Ha-
walian Islands, with notes on other labrid
fishes of this genus. Joun E. RANDALL. 100.
Three new species of archibenthie iniomous
fishes from the western North Atlantie.
GILES W. Mrap. 362.
*
aragonite
D. B. Stewart.
California. H. W.
412
Mathematics. A new characterization of group.
Howarp CaMpaIGcNeg. 276.
A note on the group commutator of A and A*.
Oxtea Taussky. 305.
On matrix commutators.
306. ¥
Mineralogy. * Some applications of X-ray fluo-
rescent spectroscopy to mineralogical prob-
lems. IstpoRE ADLER. 135.
Progress in titanium research.
HuntTekR. |.
Mycology. Some new or rare Discomycetes from
South America. Eprra K. Casi. 256. é
New members (1955, 1956). 326.
Notes and news. Post-shot yield measurement of
AKC underground nuclear test, 14; Study
of frogfishes, 26; Shanidar skull, 37; Activ-
ities of the Joint Board on Science Educa-
tion, 63; Science curricula in secondary
schools, 66; Interaction of direct azo dyes
in aqueous solution, 795, Cockroaches and
disease, 108; Eremotherium, the giant sloth,
144; Retardation of copper corrosion by
light, 157; Surface attack by buffer solu-
tions, 159; Martian atmosphere restudied,
176; Air pollution studies, 179; Cryostat for
precise temperature control over very wide
range, 180; River Basin Surveys unearth
big Plains Indian town, 198; Automatic
sorting machine for letter mail, 199; Color
response of the human eye, 201; Problem
solving on the high-speed computer, 204;
Processing pictorial information on digital
computers, 210; High-temperature trans-
formations, 244; Studies of electroless plat-
ing, 247; Academy opens headquarters of-
fice, 249; Life history of meadowlark, 250;
Worm behavior, 255; Energy distributions
and temperature determinations in flames;
271; Gyromagnetic ratio of proton redeter-
mined, 280; Araucanian witcheraft, 293;
Determination of acetylene in low concen-
trations for air-pollution control, 307; Re-
cent honors, new appointments, 348; Jungle
camouflage, 386; Hitch-hikers of the sea,
396; Voices of the stars, 397; Automatic
reader for high-precision balances, 406.
Obituaries. Milton Abramowitz, 266; Taisia
Maximovna Stadnichenko, 407; Ralph B.
Stewart, 408.
R. C. THOMPSON.
MatTruew A.
Paleobotany. New occurrences of the fossil quill-
worts called Isoetites. RoLAND W. Brown.
308.
Paleontology. A pelycosaur with subsphenoidal
teeth from the lower Permian of Oklahoma.
Prrer Paut VAUGHN. 44.
«Classification and stratigraphic range of
disjunct conodonts. W. H. Hass. 141.
Hedbergella, a new name for a Cretaceous
planktonic foraminiferal genus. PAUL
BRONNIMANN and Nog. K. Brown, JR. Lo.
Notes on prionodont pelecypods. DavipD
Nicou. 309.
* Significance and distribution of Orbitolina.
R. C. Dovetass. 136.
Some Lower Ordovician monoplacophoran
mollusks from Missouri. Exuis L. YocHEL-
SON. 8.
* The Lower Ordovician gastropod Ceratopea.
Exvuis L. YocHELSON. 139.
JOURNAL OF THE ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 48, No. 12
The pelecypod Eulora: Observations on new
localities. Davip Nicou. 153.
Philosophy. On scientist and theologian? LEO
Francis Kocu. 2582.
Scientist and theologian? RaymMonp J. SEE-
GER. 145.
Physical chemistry. Stabilized free
Juutius L. Jackson. 181.
Physics. Gravitation an enigma. RR. Be Drews:
213
radicals.
in heated finite slabs with
Temperatures
REYNOLD GREENSTONE.
fourth-power loss.
341.
The electrostatic field and the symmetry of
snowflakes. Roatp A. ScHRACK. 273.
Physiology. Observations on the oxygen con-
sumption of young Australorbis glabratus.
ALINA PERLOWAGORA-SZUMLEWICZ and
THEODOR VON BRAND. 38.
The physiology of aging—a research approach.
JosEPH W. STILL. 224.
Zoology. A new cyclopoid copepod, Hemicyclops
visendus, associated with Upogebia in
Madagascar. ArTHUR G. HumEs, RoGER in,
Cressey, and Ricnarp U. Goopina. 398.
A new Eulithobius, with a key to the known
American species (Chilopoda: Lithobiidae).
Raupu EF. Crasity, JR. 260.
A new family of millipeds on Barro Colorado
Island, Canal Zone. H. F. Loomis. 239.
A new nereid worm from Warm Mineral
Springs, Fla., with a review of the genus
Nicon Kinberg. OLGA HaRTMAN. 263.
A new species of Allogaussia (Amphipoda,
Lysianassidae) found living within the gas-
trovascular cavity of the sea-anemone
Anthopleura elegantissima. CHARLES 1
STASEK. 119.
Antillesia cardisomae, n. gen. and sp. (Cope-
poda: Harpacticoida) from the gill cham-
bers of land crabs, with observations on
the related genus Cancrinola. ARTHUR G.
HumEs. 77.
Appalachian Cambalidae:
distribution (Diplopoda:
RicHarp L. HorrMan. 90.
A survey of inequivalve pelecypods. Davin
Nicou. 56.
Description of a new species of Cossura (An-
nelida: Polychaeta) from the Mississippi
Delta. Donaup J. REISH. 53.
Further notes on Sarsiella tricostata. MERE-
pitH L. JoNnEs. 238.
Further remarks on the geographical distri-
bution of Gorgoniidae. FREDERICK M.
BayYER. 394.
On the occurrence of Streptocephalus similis
Baird in Mexico and the United States.
Water G. Moore. 169.
Sarsiella tricostata, a new ostracod from San
Francisco Bay (Myodocopa: Cypridinidae).
Merepitu L. Jonss. 48.
The cutaneous muscles of the Adelie penguin
(Pygosceles adeliae). L. R. Sperry. 387.
Trends and problems in pelecypod classifica-
tion (the genus and subgenus). DAVID
Nicou. 285.
Two new crayfishes of the genus Procambarus
from South Carolina. Horton H. Hosss,
Jr. 160.
Taxonomy and
Spirostreptida).
Vice-Presidents of the Washington Academy of Sciences
Representing the Affiliated Societies
Peimecapnical Society Of Washington. ....2.....0 0.0.00. ce eeeecceceeeeececeeee. L. Marton
Authrepelogical Society of Washington.............................. FRANK M. SETZLER
Eiemarical society of Washington... ......... 060s. cece nel oe ek. HERBERT FRIEDMANN
Bmmenmsocieoy of Washington). 6.5. 00. 0b. ec gees oh cessed eee. W. W. Watton
>Entomological Society of Washington. ..................2.-.0.0.-.. Haroup H. SHEPARD
Memon GacogTaphic SOCIEtY. 1... 2... foe ee ces cea vce ecccees ce. ALEXANDER WETMORE
Geological Society of Washington...... Pier Nese cuss Cte pa BIS: Leet cect Louis W. CurRIER
Memiealmoociety of the District of Columbia:.............2.........:. FREDERICK O. Cor
Meme srOrical oclety stor Pee oe aed kad eee. U.S. Grant, 3p
pormmeriesociery Of Washington.......... 0 00.6.es0see0s ce dsc checeecile. CaRROLL E. Cox
Washington Section, Society of American Foresters..................... Furppo GRAVATT
iesmmeton Society of Engineers.........-......0. 200-00. c0.c2 5. HERBERT G. DorsEy
Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers..... JoHN HowarpD Park
Helminthological Society of Washington......................... DonaLp B. McMuuuen
Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists................. BERNICE Eppy
Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers................ JoHN O’KEEFE
Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers......................... Harry WELLS
National Capital Section, American Society of Civil Engineers........... D. E. Parsons
D. C. Section, Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine.......... WILLIE W. Smita
Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals.................. HERBERT C. VACHER
Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research...... W. T. SWEENEY
Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences.............. F. N. FRENKIEL
D. C. Branch, American Meteorological Society......................... JEROME NAMIAS
Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers.......... Senne
>
CONTENTS
Page
GrNERAL ScipncE—Our scientific “nervous system.” JosEPH W.
Ce | SPT ate ee oe. SR eA ee eo ne ee oe 373
ETHNOGEOGRAPHY.—Pile-dwellers and coconut culture in the Laguna de
Sinamaica, Venezuela. Raymonp KE. CrisT....:.......--+++-++- 380
Zootocy.—The cutaneous muscles of the Adelie penguin, _(Pygosceles
adele), Nic Ry OTT ge awe ae Sa ee itd tee 387
ENnTOMOLOGY.—Revalidation of three species of Armigeres Theobald,
1901 (Diptera: Culicidae). ERNESTINE B. THURMAN sore aaa 389
ZooLoGy.—Further remarks on the geographical distribution of Gor-
goniidae. FrRepERICK M. BAYER.......... RS. 394
ZooLtoey.—A new cyclopoid copepod, Hemicyclops visendus, associated
with Upogenia in Madagascar. Artraur G. Humes, RocEr F. |
CrESssEY, AND Ricnarp U. GoovDING......). 5... ..+....-9+ 5
Notes AND NEws: |
JungleacamOunlages yo... open ates oe a 386
Hitch-hikers of ‘the sea... 0.0... U... 2 ee Oe 396
Voices of thersstars 6... 2). od pee Sean heen ioeeee Sink gt dy eed
Automatic reader for high-precision balances... . . a ee 406
OpITUARIES: Taisia Maximovna Stadnichenko; Ralph B. Stowll 407, , 408
inipExuten) OLUMb.AS.6r.4 >. bowie ot cea ee ae ges bx ee Loads ee a.
rl
i pes. bd es
er ee ee
7 - ‘ Fail ai} a he 7
Denites il Poy a
7 | nu
Paved 8
Pay
f
- - = nme mee
aa; Sp | Nh el PP RE TS a IE
a a out
Zea
ita i, ut “
cd
Bests
cae
peed
FE
Seg
ao"
f
By
oo
areas
AS
erinta!
ST
Srp
a4 M
SEE
a
em
a ae
gots a! oes
if Ta i wif
Sc NG TAYE ee
Stet
wy
Sonsaggnmusttan™
a
re
HET aT
eZ
pore
Be.
2
Agee
Ve
x -
nase
SP TIE | HHH
a ae
a
Fy, eh A ge
So i
ipiaie
ia”
poe
#,
si a
ir
ic ers
a fe Sy
NT ta
|
ee a
2 a
IG fm ‘,
AL y
aH } bs Ay , |
HH | cr 745 - ii
‘. 2
: i ! X - as
3 i a r
sh eS, =" lal OF
te Tse i © Sty, ~ -
= i 14 P * Loo
H rf ie t * Se
a |
| ‘ A rar Se pargcaeteabong
hey | o = 5 4 “i <a
Re fi it :, wa ts rs . “ Y x can 4
es is “i a in ori aie
pa : ; ; iets : a ‘ yey ot
Ae, ER ROER ge A f . A : . a, he
i : SF ri; i Bet i i oe
f 3 f RK iH ca ; ioe Sees 2 ee
i! \ ; \ . : o a 5 SR ta 1 Se ye
< a i d i oat 3 = = Hy A / ey Ny
E A GE st 7 at, < “i 7 IM aa
F i } ia a ve g ree : x *
4 aay “ = : ey, | * sinter i Se j . >
: OR a ay ofa oa site f s sf SH ark or ss = airs er, p Hah,
VS, een a ta Sy De seta bed ae i “Pay Mi 4 - .
aed - # doe . aie ‘ f
4 ; i PA Sere ae op as til He
x nn F ve
= ane
: ,
4
i asf
hid
oe
= a
Lr, : yA
MN 9°
2 mote diy tN, Sf
FAs Fe ( ; A Fr ‘ “Wy
fi, - ~. ‘rah 5 ‘7
ee
han,
Ae "eLt T Res
a ame
F pe
mt
i an
oy
cr
\
hal na Sng,
5
ed =
= ae =
wy F ~
ss ee
wee
Ky
Y
yi
as,
Hee Be
i
aa
She ti te Geni he Nedeme 1.8 oR
basal bee slit few te Miho fh
mtr ees ae Hate ee rewrite OF
tar abet sa tain poet
Sybepre he lite
pee ee
ipegeeartion
bie
Pith ho Bens be howe bee
Me Bete Se Neem
Phskes 2h eae Lem &
= be bts SORE H RTE
=e Lessee nape? ase Sie Wee
325 he or sanet eiceeh Higneen fi tiaces seh
br bode SOP AEM He»
eRe Be Beem hE tate ae
sertanth Mo hew .
Cet 1241 Seeder Bebsvect eee: eee ek Mats Re Sens hne cttiear
Re RSet Dawa ye gente Back hati ods See dae Be bist Deeb DY Neat aewed
S4~ fine Pair heen Me Be dh pais hams ae Ean ML
Ba vbiegen nie bs f sR mene Repl dnee kh
hab hs ge Hs At Me Mees i oe Rite bke v1 oe
Bhaectiet Byewe l= eta Gainge Ge fe et! Me ibe Bey
tea Lo Wig ae Ges) Le sheer fee teem he Hime Lee ei naar
Topi acee aoe
trey seer tnt tit
DE RES? habe e a He Hs | bowed be oe
5 Pe tt he fae Re emeceee pee Fe sly
ONE ME HN Bernese Gees hehe Me Nats Be
Hebe Nay lek Te) Ue RoR Ge bem sin Boney
PRObt ine be mn @
heteet ecb le &
++ eee
$e RAS eo ed
bp alg
Sheth aeve
«LEE ee shan Re Mi
Rie Dee het ie RES She am hp G- FEB whose Ret EB Lass
Vethewenn ee
f= Hes ete Re Be
can Bot Speer te hess Revi QM ened es en iz
Me fakes Mie hat ahs Rep Rene iade oe pete dete oass Ue
tne fam ert aN a Maw te teat nies
Sims ae eS Res) (ee hen: Oh Bane ae fe
Rad: tim be Deak Re Be hee Oe fa eee ho sede Moe Lethe nla
Paw ee Sheer HOP mE bee he Rowe wae He hate. Sota Ma eu en
ne 8 fle A= Retires ee TGs ive Ai nes sh Bier eet tras
He fie ha ep ne ;
Bad finer ae OH Ya he
ae hee
Nate
oe ewe AP? fe
Me tee RH Ae ae eee pe fer tiws |
nee arate ath AR RAGS BER Bee oe ee eee eer eee teee tLe Cary ee te ee ee oe
Sie Whe the We 8 GE eae ee ie neta Doe Hane he sewed rie Rew hh aed ora aes ib Be 40 abs
‘ De hate Oe" S412 Vee © ale Ee De BIN Be hee de Re Cres eee hides ea tae feat fin thet be MS fe the Ueiee
ee Ot BT Be Bnei: Fee he Boke Mig bo Me BO Gs fa pe ed Te Bie me BD AA eg D: bee
whe Meg a Ram 4 RAMEE Ae yee tote eet biegiker -
os vi bale tae Bee > = fe pee ds ey aye ;
A=W) nb Dee Me te BA Se Hine He wee peti Me he eee
Mek preemie mest HPs te de
aie OF ee thetige Ant rae BA
SEM MS Leh eC Oe ee &
LB 8s hese tl eOgki ans Hee
Goa the hice? Bade bees se thee
Nin Fy Lan the ME Ne Ute ee
Rs
RaAbweds
Bue
O Ag Beye Be Meth odie Fw nena e Hes hey jog a aléep see oe a4 Ap
eoesue® ; & apart Poa dle ucehied.y ee. %
Peat ete Chee ee ee ee ee Praia Sir urea § ¥« ran
VN feb: a: Qeai ge ad nyt wef Mpa UE ome vn a> bee HLBe ee ‘ Bees bey $
=e eae a Pate Pa net re we isang Pied iO) pe hen le ee ie ead takin 26 $39 Fy ees oa o
Stats dt ee pad verte eae eeetioererstnied poate ene ph bee oe alee ee al: gh BT Re PTFE Rie: Bee ps
Op wo flgh? 6 Be edn oos cold seus F re Pertepem pid- Ab pst Bast Gre MMe BT E
ea eke Be LAE ee te ae aes a - hee Shi ued Fieeime i woe ke b: he e bie » Gok f t
Ret ede oem Neha s€ - Bee bee te Feeie rar BS 0 abe Fate £46 36
[Ae Re Ny yet A TS ate Be Gta ate ee he Os Hee belie Lae Ge os ped noe Pha we ee
m aRett bx Deh as. & piR ee 4 oA Be AbD eeteH Get dees = he on ethan Pi iy Seer ee he . ”
AeAsar ed ee Ba phe- Dorie cmebene ds haus {het aL MEM ikem dew ne ae i : PPure hag ‘ .
ae ki die iare SH RE KIt) bie) Od $ : ne peelacd rar) ot
oa he teh Asien: fo ie sWe thse bo atE® oe BS eo he te , ‘ . Pe Peet abavbints i
HAs OU Sm SSE EAD She EK o
sepme se
Me fate de Meee ee
Si aleleetiy!
We He 22 ast Rela be aes hE Be mae bee hes ; oe wes h
+ BERS Alsat sett Mae 2-9 ys : ; we» ray
ak ae ‘ SHA See AE Bs ts fegad: be Brifhs ight fe as3 Me Resse Saale 7 : salts Vek wie heme aghy Ce)
Oink Hau ae ve He he bE Ns herent mig: Ye pratt eet er yhon ti im
Oe yrepes tare i bap evden Aedes tee eke Bi age Gee fee he) bhai 4 ‘ * wg oa ‘ eis
h pei we lew ; vagy a Fae Tae ene ‘ 3 ] +2 as F f
ehe Deb eRe TLC he ote ae Ae Ree Bigs PoP We tibhanh ty oee A se LAT hes , toe
FeO ened bs. ee ee Aelee de AR ds eeere er Se ' 6 Got ba
pipes te eect Ce erer Le ere tet cbr tc cee Cn iat eo en a rece bed) Gwe eG n> “8
fot age An) Debye Late = Sfestties arieton: Liye ale we bath i nies eve oR nek wk
the HOE eh ie heh oy esha oie 44 ' ee
re yO Sa ‘ + e% we
ee ee ea Rigen en > > Whee ee
he GaN Be Bakiminetthbet gs 2 arhaaes gett gS ate or the Be “
Shes reste ? : . eer , é
peal ete a, to eg phar aba se ‘ Oge s ; :
ite weg we fe . air ‘ o's
Pee HEA? esis
shefee?
mags ey chew dy Akan Pete) ee RS eEalb doe |
Ete pa oto babs r . F
iba ; for ane 4 4 Oiaes {
Acad arate i noes roy leer a ee wer
etaahee Wyeas! OMe bere ep bp hm ¢ FS Mig
ise dats yay: mie Oa ee Risen kW nhird wre 4 a
Tie tet cs ? vs hekene ee pity P A et SEE Dl E- (eM Beat AST pratt s é E
SapeeasoyRtaydca i Sr teet and eeemtee » OF Si nts \
Heees Sas ae Digi ebpvabelgvechrera peels of .
So eebe te 4 wa oe? . dit ane f 4 . . ‘ eer + “ PP Tree ‘ ‘ aoe
sneer ase sees liats a ede atGbees Phd pip pat pel oo hes wale
ESET TSS at eray ra 4 i - eelestes oeteb > oo a eg eh s ’ .
en Se 208 PEPSI Wey Ue ea ree ‘ ’ FH
+4 as a case ATE te so eje pia Pant ‘
sagan j ; ' a $i d-phewhers ve ¥ hie
tye Wilas ues arabe aah g ate . wishes ;
+ AE iat phe > rae Pare P at kt pet rey ‘
: ‘
‘ \ ents ‘
= e
ts hte peor
a) "3
FP i ‘
: ‘ § 2
103 ‘
nentgebics ‘ ‘ ra,
Siva ly 4 Pe hy ‘ tye ie
Bete ner ee ‘
outer? iam yo) tae se EEE AG ‘ ECR II Tee ef é ish 4 Reeth Heme PER: seks BY Le rehid : {
Fh bel ese ee 5 tbe ontes Se ee OPE TSR Se des Tebie Wade wet ‘ 08 ie ‘
, - Bide Ge er ane PAsT ae et Deira iat OL fied a Oa Ok Cook ed I | DT Pel eh tet i rae
MBG Sg EY Eee ey PRGA eis rose bene H Cot eae me Pg aL ; bi pe! Path ope ' ta . LA pire ‘
4 peavh i Bebe Beit Gand ict hele yee Ue arek ei eretnia ware ay a iF ee fehl
Gesindant PXa 2: areticn 50 Far ee at a hee Es ' Bs 4 f
adi Zl aa tito! e te 84 7 GREE ae ort eet H ies tay
6S:4; iibek or eeae # ei im yi Hee ee Car eae ett ‘ toe ‘ ied:
- Lian) Fete neiey bry hg ‘ ‘*? Fees se we o. ‘ ae | oa . ; ‘
ree hah is ve ease SMa a | Ve BU Ge? it a eas Se Bad we F f ‘ dee “i t
Pye vimnt he bums a rhe eee Beto ee eR ett beh Re ge Pel rs ' eh chk Ba | hele we
’ ise st theatre iepr peed eT py ere Hes AHEM BS
Jthutnes tenes é gat toy. & whe ase) ay att BAT ieee hs ‘ eta Re Be Cet ua ‘
aes art rie ta) fe wel Wed at iebey web tree eee toes : . fae .
Ohh ose Bates weivd r CAPO ae ce dene 4 Hey eae wires
be at bate se peewte Behe 6 sane t eta yi ae ‘ ‘ ‘ i
SHAb- tpt es tied RG gh? pr alr het, uF Sok fhe ; t Sit ad sak tty whee & alee t bate ae
bia vet one tae Ee Petia ths: ey ” HORS. eee greet siete OTF 8 Led: 4 Fh PA t
APRS OF OARS Pe Ge PPAR UE A AEE Ee ars a atieloy Bev urhis Be HePet hee OBS Oo OFF iA ook Sak Pe TTT Se # oe ¥ a |
Dee oe $ 2Fkve 7% oe ge shee en be 222 aoe SenyES ee Bre #4 of | oe ar © ety eet el eles bay yd , Y :
ers tae) Oe Matted ae ee re tener mare Pie Priyie. Py eae of cater es Pe ee ae | VS ee ee delete bee 7 wrertetie: BT ek se Pet eR” Geet Un A Ba :
pst fenan? SoRrOts MOP eteC et te Otero Ure tt eee DU eee tire ee ie oor bat nae keris ree Or or ter hey 4 Bes pf eeehr ok ie Ae oe oo ike 0 yy 7 1.ae : 4
aia ey EES FEF OH wre hg nee be F aeue c 2 : ‘ bet La Fe : Opals f of °
EVs ee eN PURE | ayia tar eD OD Lise edhe a wit abt Oy pas : wee pee eC tothe 3 $a tics ‘ os ‘
er wees EL FRE ie HSS? DER wt He Hee he Puede ene Coke ae Hiss Mette eRO tO REG RA Heh Bree e ' 4 ' ‘ we P
Brescetr ere tet tee ist BS ay Bat ‘ te a bee ’ ‘ eee OL aa | Ce i
oon irons ite co ee Fs ASE yearh 2 ) he ee bed .¢ Lael Sek DETER. we?’ 2 fae . ‘ '
Pareris Gori erat lex tre. & Po S RE gale fis ib: Get Peg wah t-te. ‘i FT Oo hieiel ira it
fae VESTN She RT dt ae wre Bt er eto ERE OD Bast Fes - oe Be eae . i t es \ f
feb 258 Gg Lato a Beat es Br bed se Cl ties eR AEF ee FE Wie had e4 wi ‘ i
Se OTE QP a ee eRe ES 5 $e ics? #85 GF be 0! tone atts CD y ON EE +“? ' ‘ we ‘
6g 8 TEA EL he Pte pete DART ike Peg Dea i et eae a PE Tae eR wa el
stedsPaiehe a: hzie eeUee Santini ace dete ie ears t met 4 dey ithe é Web ae iret ie et
Por ie i AH ewe bee fest Hale it oy eee eg Pde ie Jar at \
Far eeyeye ey sth a 4 Dae Prorat ir ee) bie, ibe hE le ha aree ite oe , i es a Pt ea LEAS PANE,
tee he Ss usiihe de pes Fe Le susie fiotitans eed Pea “ { rit i" aie j t ;
Sats yi * eZ aA tina P pipe hoaeie ey ae ure Ve UP a « vie © ory tyeh-tt b.ave m oe ¢ we t
aL BteRe rg A= O24 cusseticg i are Fhe wee diew a Genet biwe b Teg eth det eli Oe PP ee erie es ine i
fa eri y Bee he Wate Sy iha cue iy ta Wade tee ed eae eee pee ein @ Heat |
eter cet bere a hs pe Wh peat heii eran isch hehe d bow Deets on vows ut ti ‘ ‘ Fy ( ine ie ;
eater ees aes be nsdear ped eae alee wt dee PEE tn B heae oF Peet id feat | wep th et a me bert bei
Snedettie gs SF ape Renae pee ai eat emma tg HS ee ay ois we Uweere gi owe bar dad Fart Oe we eee {ir aé ee wy ii ef t eres i
PPAR ae we me gery Pe eee eee ee eee ein toe Pipa wea Hee « eer Pee ts eit dete ‘ , te ‘ ‘
A HEE few Rem ee BON ater wrk wed fri taney ta fee vie Hp PR peas ;
dee oe ie eens er de ae balbe ye ide Ree ey 8 WE a whee 8 a tat aa tH ath Wark t wep Fe aed ' ;
RV HES Ae oe ee Ree ea oe pr Ben wre , : ees iz; , 1 t Uae bebe x pre ‘
AEA a hae He ete ee rr ee eta beh § Wd OH / : foe eke i i
RENEE ELBE Sab (at GLa ie hed As ee dot ‘ rid rr to eet bs pel et
ene a sere ees Hakata HUN ti * Ce eae, © (ru he oi Yi
Peer tone tr . bk Fee Hed Teh! poHek tiv Pere a ; bike? pt :
ad Parser te Bod sks andes erin rte rts th) syet BR a heh athe 6 ebr ina e @) Orde hed pr uit e oan re rT ” ’
SOE AN qh tgee Serer rear ie riny et de acieben fe betes te Gees Beebe | Wrimtet te # aD et
Set FoPseoge neue R eH a uteen- O28 ere Co are ee | BO he bes weed te een h oet rin
et Fir a- WP eae fig or ea ee en ee es oe Oe ease) “7 He ; * g ra i] ray “~s 7 wry ‘ ‘ y \. rae
Ae DOA G eg we OE Wes + ; ; bem BL he feme ble wteF ie iia 4 é ‘
ef ny ore ert o* bored fer ‘ be Fi stg Pehe Pek’ (ee ‘
“He wi See DHT teed OREN ued Hess . iy? a
bye yt : s * arbeieeird peters ; : bee ‘ tri
eek nytt 43 <6 ue aadi wtde tarden al ern @ Viegernttee Og et Lei i % i oe ea bobred : é
; heme tae este Te ae he yet gee et Gefieee Bree bee POE OE Lt Ret Beker ep poe ae aaa! +t ‘
Wed brn stra nls oe ne bP eee wl dae hoes ree | Briere en Vehed bP) eee A ‘ ' ‘ ‘ ; vn? trea iets :
<0 fee Hows one! WEDS ie eee FT ey het bo heet pie areee raid oa Moat ae cok oa et ad hae tpt Ea ice ; ‘
iret Re ents ca were Vie * prereset Ai aisicg hoa pened Aes ee ‘ oe ane HEB Me .
PE ene” He Ob He Hee Ty Re REN ae Pre rea ie 28 ee BP TEPER WERE Ne OE 1 eon beg brd £ HD etl p ser} t ‘
POND ee Bee OF rare ge Be bee et da be Fuesy We HQ Orertcpep a i +a Ube 62 Whee e 7 #7 8- ue? '
Hast ahs he Pate ogee er ae re ee ee Wp eg ebipeeea BEE ea ae GEO BE t rp eb 6 “ i i wet ‘
WEWPHE ED Se inet tee” PHOT HONE Le a ed Y errs ete | i f he thet eee " ied tal tae 1 ‘ SPH as ‘ é '
wet epee Pete ee bt Sg ee AP ‘ E , BOTA Ope ene ae a erp Pee ber i we ts
hackh BERS OER irene -taben \- ahr ee be teh . ’ bere ied . be r ‘ ’ * eu i how ’
Peochiwr hina aie eucatn pep ncengs sit ocne hone kenebLabtne pees peaTtAn tial (rick gets OS frm he vie GEO alee poste bed Lene hice’ j ts Pty ‘
= ear gle whe Per arate ae ies oo er rc ea pr be te Die bd Wi Web RTO pew Pe eRe rea OH Yd P or ae br is wire ' we ye
em ateane ye eer att rrpeet taited wterere bobs ue lB ghbe w ott Se ee | Us faite Ht i t ’ nt «
Pe Re UH He O48 bye Been wee ruepse ace hs ma MSGR EA pope WB btw Cone bee ‘ tit evP ier arhes oat wed ' owe
Seer: ens erg ers Sars yen be pet pehedeie ( jer te bee - wets A : tebe utes eh ge fb “ eed 4
Mean Hes eer UH be ie neue ree ert tr ee ee (be cdi qe Weg m ah ee “ Dal wi i ep y i ‘ : ire
sedi ie Se Prt ee oo ee er ei | rey ty ard ea ‘ ¢ F ’ a bw hed be & ’ { } é ‘ .
TE nat ht